ANSYS Meshing User's Guide

ANSYS, Inc. Release 2025 R1

Southpointe January 2025
2600 Ansys Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317 ANSYS, Inc. and
ansysinfo@ansys.com ANSYS Europe,
Ltd. are UL
http://www.ansys.com registered ISO
(T) 724-746-3304 9001: 2015
(F) 724-514-9494 companies.
Copyright and Trademark Information

© 2025 ANSYS, Inc. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.

ANSYS, Ansys Workbench, AUTODYN, CFX, FLUENT and any and all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature
names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks or trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries located in the
United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark used by ANSYS, Inc. under license. CFX is a trademark
of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product, service and feature names or trademarks are the property
of their respective owners. FLEXlm and FLEXnet are trademarks of Flexera Software LLC.

Disclaimer Notice

THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFID-
ENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products
and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement
that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products
and documentation may be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions
of that software license agreement.

ANSYS, Inc. and ANSYS Europe, Ltd. are UL registered ISO 9001: 2015 companies.

U.S. Government Rights

For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc.
software license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).

Third-Party Software

See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software
and third-party software. If you are unable to access the Legal Notice, contact ANSYS, Inc.

Published in the U.S.A.

Table of Contents
Capabilities in Ansys Workbench ............................................................................................................. 19
Meshing Overview ................................................................................................................................ 19
Meshing Implementation in Ansys Workbench ...................................................................................... 19
Types of Meshing .................................................................................................................................. 20
Part/Body Level Meshing ................................................................................................................ 20
Mesh Methods ................................................................................................................................ 20
Conformal and Non-Conformal Meshing ............................................................................................... 21
Conformal Meshing Within a Part .................................................................................................... 21
Conformal Meshing Across Parts ..................................................................................................... 24
Connections/Interface Handling ..................................................................................................... 24
Usage in Workbench ................................................................................................................................. 27
Basic Meshing Application Workflows ................................................................................................... 27
Overview of the Meshing Process in Ansys Workbench .................................................................... 27
Overview of the Meshing Process for CFD/Fluids Analyses ............................................................... 28
Overview of the Meshing Process for Hydrodynamics Analysis ......................................................... 30
Combining CFD/Fluids Meshing and Structural Meshing ................................................................. 31
Strategies for CFD/Fluids Meshing in Ansys Workbench ......................................................................... 33
Accessing Meshing Functionality .......................................................................................................... 35
Overview of the Meshing Application Interface ..................................................................................... 36
Determination of Physics, Analysis, and Solver Settings .......................................................................... 39
Working with Legacy Mesh Data ........................................................................................................... 40
Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry ................................................................................................ 42
Mesh Application File Export ........................................................................................................... 43
Fluent Mesh Export ......................................................................................................................... 43
Classes of Zone Types in Ansys Fluent ........................................................................................ 46
Standard Naming Conventions for Naming Named Selections ................................................... 48
Zone Type Assignment ............................................................................................................. 49
Examples of Fluent Mesh Export: An Alternative to Using a Fluid Flow (Fluent) Analysis Sys-
tem .......................................................................................................................................... 55
Polyflow Classic Export ................................................................................................................... 63
CGNS Export ................................................................................................................................... 64
Ansys ICEM CFD Export ................................................................................................................... 65
Exporting Faceted Geometry to Ansys Fluent Meshing .................................................................... 74
Named Selections and Regions for Ansys CFX .................................................................................. 77
Passing Named Selections to the Solver .......................................................................................... 78
Repairing Geometry in Overlapping Named Selections ................................................................... 79
Resolving Overlapping Contact Regions .......................................................................................... 79
Extended Ansys ICEM CFD Meshing ...................................................................................................... 83
Writing Ansys ICEM CFD Files .......................................................................................................... 84
Rules for Interactive Editing ............................................................................................................ 86
Limitations of Ansys ICEM CFD Interactive ....................................................................................... 87
Working with Meshing Application Parameters ..................................................................................... 87
Ansys Workbench and Mechanical APDL Application Meshing Differences ............................................. 87
Mesh Controls Overview ........................................................................................................................... 89
Global and Local Mesh Controls ............................................................................................................ 89
Understanding the Influence of the Sizing Options ................................................................................ 89
Adaptive Sizing .............................................................................................................................. 90
Uniform, Curvature, Proximity, or Proximity and Curvature Sizing ...................................................... 90
Overriding Sizing Minimum and Maximum Sizes ............................................................................. 91

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. iii
Meshing User's Guide

Global Mesh Controls ............................................................................................................................... 93

Display Group ....................................................................................................................................... 93
Display Style ................................................................................................................................... 93
Defaults Group ..................................................................................................................................... 96
Physics Preference .......................................................................................................................... 96
Solver Preference ............................................................................................................................ 99
Export Format .............................................................................................................................. 100
Export Unit ................................................................................................................................... 100
Export Preview Surface Mesh ........................................................................................................ 100
Element Order .............................................................................................................................. 101
Element Size ................................................................................................................................. 102
Sizing Group ....................................................................................................................................... 103
Mesh Sizing Defaults ..................................................................................................................... 104
Using Dynamic Mesh Sizing Defaults ....................................................................................... 104
Sizing Options .............................................................................................................................. 105
Curvature-Based Sizing ................................................................................................................. 107
Proximity-Based Sizing .................................................................................................................. 107
Uniform Sizing .............................................................................................................................. 108
Setting Sizing Options .................................................................................................................. 109
Resolution .............................................................................................................................. 109
Growth Rate ........................................................................................................................... 110
Max Size ................................................................................................................................. 110
Mesh Defeaturing ................................................................................................................... 110
Transition ............................................................................................................................... 112
Span Angle Center .................................................................................................................. 112
Initial Size Seed ....................................................................................................................... 113
Curvature Min Size .................................................................................................................. 113
Curvature Normal Angle ......................................................................................................... 114
Proximity Min Size .................................................................................................................. 115
Proximity Gap Factor ............................................................................................................... 115
Proximity Size Function Sources .............................................................................................. 115
Use Uniform Size Function for Sheets ...................................................................................... 116
Enable Washers ....................................................................................................................... 117
Height of Washer .............................................................................................................. 117
Allow Nodes to be Moved off Boundary ............................................................................ 117
Limitations for Washers ..................................................................................................... 119
Bounding Box Diagonal .......................................................................................................... 119
Average Surface Area .............................................................................................................. 120
Minimum Edge Length ........................................................................................................... 120
Quality Group ..................................................................................................................................... 120
The Mesh Quality Workflow ........................................................................................................... 120
Check Mesh Quality ...................................................................................................................... 121
Error and Warning Limits ............................................................................................................... 127
Target Element Quality ................................................................................................................. 130
Target Skewness ........................................................................................................................... 131
Target Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes) ............................................................................................ 131
Target Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA) ......................................................................................... 132
Target Aspect Ratio (Height) .......................................................................................................... 132
Smoothing ................................................................................................................................... 133
Mesh Metric ................................................................................................................................. 133
Element Quality ...................................................................................................................... 139

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
iv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Meshing User's Guide

Aspect Ratio Calculation for Triangles ...................................................................................... 140

Aspect Ratio Calculation for Quadrilaterals ............................................................................. 141
Aspect Ratio Calculation for Tetrahedrons ............................................................................... 142
Jacobian Ratio ........................................................................................................................ 142
Warping Factor ....................................................................................................................... 147
Parallel Deviation .................................................................................................................... 149
Maximum Corner Angle .......................................................................................................... 150
Skewness ............................................................................................................................... 151
Orthogonal Quality ................................................................................................................. 153
Characteristic Length (Autodyn) .............................................................................................. 155
Minimum Tri Angle ................................................................................................................. 156
Maximum Tri Angle ................................................................................................................. 156
Minimum Quad Angle ............................................................................................................ 157
Maximum Quad Angle ............................................................................................................ 157
Warping Angle ........................................................................................................................ 157
Tet Collapse ............................................................................................................................ 158
Aspect Ratio (Height) .............................................................................................................. 159
Minimum Element Edge Length .............................................................................................. 159
Maximum Element Edge Length ............................................................................................. 160
Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA) ............................................................................................. 160
Inflation Group ................................................................................................................................... 161
Use Automatic Inflation ................................................................................................................ 163
None ...................................................................................................................................... 164
Program Controlled ................................................................................................................ 164
All Faces in Chosen Named Selection ...................................................................................... 165
Inflation Option ............................................................................................................................ 166
Transition Ratio ............................................................................................................................. 168
Maximum Layers .......................................................................................................................... 169
Growth Rate ................................................................................................................................. 169
Number of Layers ......................................................................................................................... 169
Maximum Thickness ..................................................................................................................... 169
First Layer Height .......................................................................................................................... 169
First Aspect Ratio .......................................................................................................................... 170
Aspect Ratio (Base/Height) ............................................................................................................ 170
Inflation Algorithm ....................................................................................................................... 170
Inflation Element Type .................................................................................................................. 174
View Advanced Options ................................................................................................................ 174
Collision Avoidance ................................................................................................................ 174
Fix First Layer .................................................................................................................... 176
Gap Factor ........................................................................................................................ 177
Maximum Height over Base .................................................................................................... 177
Growth Rate Type ................................................................................................................... 177
Maximum Angle ..................................................................................................................... 178
Fillet Ratio .............................................................................................................................. 178
Use Post Smoothing ............................................................................................................... 179
Smoothing Iterations .............................................................................................................. 180
Advanced Group ................................................................................................................................. 180
Number of CPUs for Parallel Part Meshing ..................................................................................... 180
Straight Sided Elements ................................................................................................................ 180
Rigid Body Behavior ...................................................................................................................... 182
Triangle Surface Mesher ................................................................................................................ 182

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. v
Meshing User's Guide

Topology Checking ....................................................................................................................... 183

Protecting Topology Defined Prior to Meshing ........................................................................ 184
Protecting Topology Post Meshing .......................................................................................... 186
Pinch ............................................................................................................................................ 187
Pinch Control Automation Overview ....................................................................................... 190
How to Define Pinch Control Automation ................................................................................ 193
How to Define or Change Pinch Controls Manually .................................................................. 194
Usage Information for Pinch Controls ...................................................................................... 194
Loop Removal ............................................................................................................................... 196
Automatic Methods ............................................................................................................................ 197
Sheet Body Method ..................................................................................................................... 197
Sweepable Body Method ............................................................................................................. 198
Statistics Group .................................................................................................................................. 198
Nodes ........................................................................................................................................... 198
Elements ...................................................................................................................................... 199
Show Detailed Statistics ................................................................................................................ 199
Model Assembly Group ....................................................................................................................... 199
Local Mesh Controls ................................................................................................................................ 201
Method Control .................................................................................................................................. 202
Method Controls and Element Order Settings ................................................................................ 202
Setting the Method Control for Solid Bodies .................................................................................. 206
Automatic Method Control ..................................................................................................... 206
Tetrahedrons Method Control ................................................................................................. 207
Patch Conforming Algorithm for Tetrahedrons Method Control ......................................... 208
Patch Independent Algorithm for Tetrahedrons Method Control ........................................ 210
Hex Dominant Method Control ............................................................................................... 233
Sweep Method Control ........................................................................................................... 235
MultiZone Method Control ..................................................................................................... 242
Cartesian Method Control ....................................................................................................... 261
Layered Tetrahedrons Method Control .................................................................................... 266
Particle Method ...................................................................................................................... 272
Automatic (PrimeMesh) .......................................................................................................... 273
Setting the Method Control for Sheet Bodies ................................................................................. 282
Quadrilateral Dominant Method Control ................................................................................. 282
Triangles Method Control ........................................................................................................ 284
MultiZone Quad/Tri Method Control ....................................................................................... 284
Automatic (PrimeMesh) .......................................................................................................... 287
Sizing Control ..................................................................................................................................... 296
Notes on Element Sizing ............................................................................................................... 297
Applying a Local Sizing Control ..................................................................................................... 300
Descriptions of Local Sizing Control Options .................................................................................. 302
Contact Sizing Control ........................................................................................................................ 311
Refinement Control ............................................................................................................................ 313
Face Meshing Control ......................................................................................................................... 314
Setting Basic Face Meshing Controls for Mapped Meshing ............................................................. 315
Understanding Advanced Mapped Face Meshing Controls ............................................................ 320
Restrictions Related to Vertex Types ........................................................................................ 321
Restrictions Related to Edge Mesh Intervals ............................................................................. 322
Selecting Faces and Vertices .................................................................................................... 322
Effect of Vertex Type on Face Meshes ....................................................................................... 324
Setting Advanced Face Meshing Controls for Mapped Meshing ............................................... 325

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
vi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Meshing User's Guide

Notes on Face Meshing Controls for Mapped Meshing ................................................................... 327

Example Usage ............................................................................................................................. 331
Mesh Copy Control ............................................................................................................................. 331
Match Control ..................................................................................................................................... 334
Cyclic Match Control ..................................................................................................................... 336
Arbitrary Match Control ................................................................................................................ 338
Pinch Control ...................................................................................................................................... 340
Defining Pinch Controls Locally ..................................................................................................... 340
Changing Pinch Controls Locally ................................................................................................... 343
Inflation Control ................................................................................................................................. 345
Gasket Control .................................................................................................................................... 349
Feature Suppress ................................................................................................................................ 350
Repair Topology .................................................................................................................................. 355
Connect ............................................................................................................................................. 359
Weld ................................................................................................................................................... 362
Quad Layer ......................................................................................................................................... 380
Deviation ............................................................................................................................................ 385
Geometry Fidelity .............................................................................................................................. 386
Options ................................................................................................................................................... 389
Accessing the Options Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 389
Meshing Options on the Options Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 389
Licensing Option ................................................................................................................................ 394
Mesh Quality Option ........................................................................................................................... 395
Specialized Meshing ............................................................................................................................... 399
Mesh Sweeping .................................................................................................................................. 399
Thin Model Sweeping ................................................................................................................... 406
MultiZone Meshing ............................................................................................................................. 419
MultiZone Algorithms ................................................................................................................... 420
MultiZone for Sweepable Bodies ................................................................................................... 422
Using MultiZone ........................................................................................................................... 423
MultiZone Source Face Selection Tips ...................................................................................... 426
MultiZone Source Face Imprinting Guidelines .......................................................................... 427
Internal Loops .................................................................................................................. 427
Boundary Loops ............................................................................................................... 428
Multiple Internal Loops ..................................................................................................... 428
Multiple Connected Internal Loops ................................................................................... 429
Parallel Loops ................................................................................................................... 430
Intersecting Loops ............................................................................................................ 431
MultiZone Face Mappability Guidelines ................................................................................... 432
Side Face Handling of Imprinted Regions .......................................................................... 432
Using Virtual Topology to Handle Fillets in MultiZone Problems ............................................... 439
MultiZone Support for Inflation ..................................................................................................... 440
MultiZone Limitations and Hints ................................................................................................... 442
Selective Meshing ............................................................................................................................... 444
Inflation Controls ................................................................................................................................ 453
Mesh Refinement ............................................................................................................................... 461
Mixed Order Meshing ......................................................................................................................... 461
Contact Meshing ................................................................................................................................ 462
Winding Body Meshing ....................................................................................................................... 462
Wire Body Meshing ............................................................................................................................. 462
Pyramid Transitions ............................................................................................................................. 462

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. vii
Meshing User's Guide

Match Meshing and Symmetry ............................................................................................................ 462

Rigid Body Meshing ............................................................................................................................ 463
Thin Solid Meshing ............................................................................................................................. 466
CAD Instance Meshing ........................................................................................................................ 466
Meshing and Hard Entities .................................................................................................................. 468
Baffle Meshing .................................................................................................................................... 470
Parallel Part Meshing .......................................................................................................................... 472
Mesh Control Interaction Tables ............................................................................................................. 475
Interactions Between Mesh Methods ................................................................................................... 475
Interactions Between Mesh Methods and Mesh Controls ..................................................................... 478
Miscellaneous Tools ................................................................................................................................ 483
Generation of Contact Elements .......................................................................................................... 483
Renaming Mesh Control Tools ............................................................................................................. 484
Mesh Numbering ................................................................................................................................ 484
Mesh Editing ...................................................................................................................................... 484
Inserting a Mesh Edit Object ......................................................................................................... 485
Mesh Connections ........................................................................................................................ 485
Contact Matches ........................................................................................................................... 496
Considerations for Contact Matches ........................................................................................ 497
How Mesh Size Affects Contact Matches .................................................................................. 497
How Tolerances Affect Contact Matches .................................................................................. 498
Applying Contact Matches ...................................................................................................... 500
Displaying Multiple Views of Contact Matches ......................................................................... 504
Troubleshooting Failed Contact Matches ................................................................................. 505
Node Merge ................................................................................................................................. 508
Node Move ................................................................................................................................... 512
Pull ............................................................................................................................................... 516
Common Display Features .................................................................................................................. 524
Hiding or Suppressing Bodies ....................................................................................................... 524
Hiding or Showing Faces ............................................................................................................... 525
Creating Section Planes ................................................................................................................ 525
Ease of Use Features ............................................................................................................................... 527
Updating the Mesh Cell State .............................................................................................................. 527
Generating Mesh ................................................................................................................................ 528
Previewing Surface Mesh .................................................................................................................... 531
Exporting a Previewed Surface Mesh in Fluent Format ................................................................... 533
Previewing Source and Target Mesh .................................................................................................... 533
Previewing Inflation ............................................................................................................................ 534
Exporting a Previewed Inflation Mesh in Fluent Format .................................................................. 535
Previewing Weld Geometry ................................................................................................................. 535
Previewing Weld Mesh ........................................................................................................................ 536
Previewing Quad Layer ....................................................................................................................... 536
Showing Program Controlled Inflation Surfaces ................................................................................... 536
Showing Sweepable Bodies ................................................................................................................ 537
Showing Problematic Geometry .......................................................................................................... 537
Showing Problematic Location ............................................................................................................ 537
Showing Problematic Elements ........................................................................................................... 538
Showing Elements that Do Not Meet the Target Metric ........................................................................ 538
Showing Removable Loops ................................................................................................................. 538
Showing Suppressible Features ........................................................................................................... 539
Displaying Element Normals on Mesh ................................................................................................. 539

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
viii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Meshing User's Guide

Inspecting Large Meshes Using Named Selections ............................................................................... 540

Generating Multiple Mesh Controls from a Template ........................................................................... 540
Clearing Generated Data ..................................................................................................................... 541
Showing Missing Tessellations ............................................................................................................. 542
Showing Mappable Faces .................................................................................................................... 542
Grouping Mesh Objects By Type .......................................................................................................... 543
Virtual Topology ..................................................................................................................................... 545
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 545
Creating and Managing Virtual Cells .................................................................................................... 546
Creating and Managing Virtual Split Edges .......................................................................................... 561
Creating and Managing Virtual Split Faces ........................................................................................... 565
Creating and Managing Virtual Hard Vertices ....................................................................................... 568
Common Virtual Topology Operations ................................................................................................. 568
Common Virtual Topology Features ..................................................................................................... 572
Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................................... 579
Mesh Workflows ...................................................................................................................................... 601
Mesh Workflow Concepts .................................................................................................................... 601
Mesh Workflows Introduction ............................................................................................................. 607
Mesh Workflows Context Tab .............................................................................................................. 612
Mesh Workflow .................................................................................................................................. 613
Input ............................................................................................................................................ 615
Steps ............................................................................................................................................ 615
Output ......................................................................................................................................... 617
Mesh Workflow Types ......................................................................................................................... 618
External FEM Acoustics ................................................................................................................. 619
Internal FEM Acoustics .................................................................................................................. 621
BEM Acoustics .............................................................................................................................. 623
Mesh Workflow Steps .......................................................................................................................... 624
Fill Holes ....................................................................................................................................... 625
Wrap ........................................................................................................................................... 626
Mesh Surface ................................................................................................................................ 627
Create Enclosure ........................................................................................................................... 627
Mesh Volume ................................................................................................................................ 628
Improve Volume Mesh .................................................................................................................. 628
Extrude ........................................................................................................................................ 629
Create Topology ........................................................................................................................... 629
Merge Volumes ............................................................................................................................. 629
Manage Zone Properties ............................................................................................................... 630
Patch Holes .................................................................................................................................. 630
Read Mesh .................................................................................................................................... 631
Write Mesh ................................................................................................................................... 631
Create Size Field ........................................................................................................................... 631
Mesh Workflow Controls ..................................................................................................................... 632
Hole Filling ................................................................................................................................... 633
Constant Size Wrapper .................................................................................................................. 635
Custom Names Wrapper ............................................................................................................... 637
Material Point ............................................................................................................................... 637
Leak Detection ............................................................................................................................. 638
Constant Size Surface Mesher ....................................................................................................... 638
Wrapper Specific Surface Mesher .................................................................................................. 640
External Part Enclosure ................................................................................................................. 641

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. ix
Meshing User's Guide

Spherical Enclosure ....................................................................................................................... 643

Hemispherical Enclosure ............................................................................................................... 645
Convex Irregular Shape Enclosure ................................................................................................. 647
HemiConvex Irregular Shape Enclosure ......................................................................................... 649
Custom Names ............................................................................................................................ 652
Constant Size Volume Mesher ....................................................................................................... 652
Volume Mesh Improvement .......................................................................................................... 654
Second Order Conversion ............................................................................................................. 655
Extrusion ...................................................................................................................................... 655
Topology Creation ........................................................................................................................ 657
Volumes Merging ......................................................................................................................... 657
Zone Material Assignment ............................................................................................................ 658
Zone Thickness Assignment .......................................................................................................... 658
Checkpoint ................................................................................................................................... 659
Hole Patching ............................................................................................................................... 659
Mesh Reading ............................................................................................................................... 660
Mesh Writing ................................................................................................................................ 660
Custom Names(Sizing) .................................................................................................................. 660
Constant Sizing ............................................................................................................................. 661
Curvature Sizing ........................................................................................................................... 662
Proximity Sizing ............................................................................................................................ 664
Body of Influence Sizing ................................................................................................................ 665
Size Field Surface Mesher ............................................................................................................. 667
Size Field Volume Mesher .............................................................................................................. 668
Size Field Wrapper ........................................................................................................................ 670
Mesh Workflow Outcomes .................................................................................................................. 672
Scope ........................................................................................................................................... 673
Failure Info ................................................................................................................................... 673
Face Zone Scope ........................................................................................................................... 674
Volume Zone Scope ...................................................................................................................... 674
Internal Enclosure Scope ............................................................................................................... 674
External Enclosure Scope .............................................................................................................. 675
Extrusion Start Scope .................................................................................................................... 675
Extrusion End Scope ..................................................................................................................... 675
Internal Volume Zone Scope ......................................................................................................... 676
Size Field Name ............................................................................................................................ 676
Property Worksheet ............................................................................................................................ 676
Mesh Workflow States ......................................................................................................................... 678
Understanding the States of Mesh Workflows ................................................................................ 679
Understanding the States of Mesh Workflow Steps ........................................................................ 681
Mesh Workflow Domain Browser ......................................................................................................... 682
Show Wizards ............................................................................................................................... 684
Apply Scoping ........................................................................................................................ 685
Create Sizing .......................................................................................................................... 686
Index ........................................................................................................................................................ 689

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
x of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
List of Figures
1. Baffle Model Constructed in Discovery Modeling ..................................................................................... 23
2. Solid/Skin Model With Coincident Faces ................................................................................................... 24
3. Meshing Application Interface ................................................................................................................. 37
4. Boundary Zone Type and Continuum Zone Type Specifications in Ansys Fluent ........................................ 47
5. Multibody Part Containing All Fluid Bodies in the DesignModeler Application .......................................... 56
6. Named Selections Defined in Meshing Application .................................................................................. 57
7. Boundary Zone Names and Types Transferred to Ansys Fluent .................................................................. 58
8. Continuum Zone Names and Types Transferred to Ansys Fluent ................................................................ 59
9. Multibody Part Containing Mix of Solid and Fluid Bodies in the DesignModeler Application ...................... 60
10. Multibody Part Being Edited in the Meshing Application ........................................................................ 61
11. Changing the Fluid/Solid Material Property of a Body ............................................................................. 62
12. Continuum Zone Names and Types Transferred to Ansys Fluent .............................................................. 63
13. Meshed Model (Four Separate Workbench Parts) Ready for Export to Ansys ICEM CFD ............................ 67
14. Opening the .prj File (Four Separate Workbench Parts) in Ansys ICEM CFD .............................................. 68
15. Meshed Model (One Multibody Workbench Part) Ready for Export to Ansys ICEM CFD ............................ 69
16. Opening the .prj File (One Multibody Workbench Part) in Ansys ICEM CFD .............................................. 70
17. Meshed Model (with Named Selections) Ready for Export to Ansys ICEM CFD ......................................... 71
18. Fluid1_Fluid2 Named Selection .............................................................................................................. 71
19. InterfaceSolidFluid2 Named Selection .................................................................................................... 72
20. SharedEdge Named Selection ................................................................................................................ 72
21. SharedVertices Named Selection ............................................................................................................ 73
22. Opening the .prj File (with Named Selections) in Ansys ICEM CFD ........................................................... 74
23. Part, Body, and Named Selection Names in the Meshing Application ....................................................... 76
24. Objects/Zone Names Transferred to Ansys Fluent Meshing ..................................................................... 76
25. First Contact Region: One Contact and One Target .................................................................................. 80
26. Second Contact Region: One Contact, Two Targets .................................................................................. 80
27. Third Contact Region: One Contact, Two Targets ..................................................................................... 81
28. Fourth Contact Region: One Contact, Two Targets ................................................................................... 81
29. Geometry with Cyclic Redundancies ...................................................................................................... 83
30. Proximity Sizing Limitation .................................................................................................................. 108
31. Washers Generated Around Two Holes ................................................................................................. 117
32. Washer Element Nodes Not Moved ...................................................................................................... 118
33. Washer Element Nodes Moved ............................................................................................................. 119
34. Mesh Metrics Bar Graph ....................................................................................................................... 134
35. Geometry View After Selecting an Individual Bar .................................................................................. 135
36. Clicking and Holding on an Individual Bar ............................................................................................ 136
37. Bar Graph Controls Page ...................................................................................................................... 137
38. Quadrilateral Aspect Ratio Calculation .................................................................................................. 141
39. Aspect Ratios for Quadrilaterals ............................................................................................................ 141
40. Jacobian Ratio (MAPDL) ....................................................................................................................... 145
41. Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes) ............................................................................................................. 146
42. Jacobian Ratio (Gauss Points) ............................................................................................................... 147
43. Shell Average Normal Calculation ......................................................................................................... 148
44. Shell Element Projected onto a Plane ................................................................................................... 148
45. Quadrilateral Shell Having Warping Factor ............................................................................................ 149
46. Warping Factor for Bricks ..................................................................................................................... 149
47. Parallel Deviation Unit Vectors .............................................................................................................. 150
48. Parallel Deviations for Quadrilaterals .................................................................................................... 150
49. Maximum Corner Angles for Triangles .................................................................................................. 150

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xi
Meshing User's Guide

50. Maximum Corner Angles for Quadrilaterals .......................................................................................... 151

51. Ideal and Skewed Triangles and Quadrilaterals ..................................................................................... 151
52. Vectors Used to Compute Orthogonal Quality for a Cell ........................................................................ 153
53. Vectors Used to Compute Orthogonal Quality for a Face ....................................................................... 155
54. Inflation into Volume Mesh Methods .................................................................................................... 162
55. Last Aspect Ratio Option ...................................................................................................................... 167
56. Different Numbers of Layers Are Respected .......................................................................................... 172
57. Portion of Project Tree .......................................................................................................................... 173
58. Different Numbers of Layers Are Not Respected ................................................................................... 173
59. Layer Compression vs. Stair Stepping Option (Full Mesh View) ............................................................... 176
60. Layer Compression vs. Stair Stepping Option (Detail View) .................................................................... 176
61. Maximum Angle = 140 ......................................................................................................................... 178
62. Maximum Angle = 180 ......................................................................................................................... 178
63. Fillet Ratio = 0.0 ................................................................................................................................... 179
64. Fillet Ratio = 0.5 ................................................................................................................................... 179
65. Fillet Ratio = 1.0 ................................................................................................................................... 179
66. Triangle Surface Mesher = Program Controlled ..................................................................................... 183
67. Triangle Surface Mesher = Advancing Front .......................................................................................... 183
68. Protecting Topology ............................................................................................................................ 186
69. Locations of Pinch Controls .................................................................................................................. 188
70. Mesh Generated Without Pinch Controls .............................................................................................. 189
71. Mesh Generated With Pinch Controls ................................................................................................... 189
72. Automatic Pinch Control for Edges on Left; Manual Pinch Control Required for Edges on Right .............. 191
73. Mesh Generated with Automatic Pinch Control and Manual Pinch Control on Similar Geometry ............ 191
74. Pinch Not Recommended for Models with Multiple Complications ....................................................... 196
75. Mixed Order Meshing of a Multibody Part ............................................................................................ 205
76. Mixed Order Elements ......................................................................................................................... 206
77. Geometry Input to Patch Independent Tetra Mesher ............................................................................. 211
78. Full Tetrahedron Enclosing the Geometry ............................................................................................. 211
79. Full Tetrahedron Enclosing the Geometry in Wire Frame Mode .............................................................. 212
80. Cross-Section of the Tetrahedron ......................................................................................................... 212
81. Mesh After Capture of Surfaces and Separation of Useful Volume .......................................................... 213
82. Final Mesh Before Smoothing .............................................................................................................. 213
83. Final Mesh After Smoothing ................................................................................................................. 214
84. Example (a) Showing Base Geometry ................................................................................................... 223
85. Example (b) Min Size Limit (Described Below) Set to 1 .......................................................................... 223
86. Example (c) Min Size Limit (Described Below) Set to 0.5 ........................................................................ 224
87. Example (d) Defeature Size Set to 1 ...................................................................................................... 224
88. Example (e) Defeature Size Set to 1 and Element Order Set to Linear ..................................................... 225
89. Example (f ) Defeature Size Set to 1 and Min Size Limit Set to 0.5 ........................................................... 225
90. Example (a) Showing Base Geometry ................................................................................................... 229
91. Example (b) Default Patch Independent Tetrahedron Mesher ................................................................ 229
92. Example (c) Patch Independent Tetrahedron Mesher with Min Size Limit Set to Capture Curvature ........ 230
93. Effect of Smooth Transition Setting ...................................................................................................... 230
94. Element Edge Lengths Smaller Than Specified Element Size .................................................................. 232
95. Sweep Method Would Require Slicing to Obtain Pure Hex Mesh ........................................................... 243
96. MultiZone Generates Pure Hex Mesh without Slicing ............................................................................ 243
97. Free Mesh Type = Tetra ......................................................................................................................... 251
98. Free Mesh Type = Tetra/Pyramid ........................................................................................................... 252
99. Free Mesh Type = Hexa Dominant ........................................................................................................ 253
100. Free Mesh Type = Hexa Core ............................................................................................................... 254

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Meshing User's Guide

101. Source / Target Face Selection for MultiZone ...................................................................................... 255

102. Layered Tetrahedrons Mesh ............................................................................................................... 268
103. Sweeping a Closed Torus .................................................................................................................... 298
104. Resulting Mesh for Closed Torus ......................................................................................................... 299
105. Inside Corner Vertex ........................................................................................................................... 321
106. Face Vertex Types ............................................................................................................................... 323
107. Seven-sided Planar Face ..................................................................................................................... 324
108. Example Face Mesh—Side Inside Corner Vertex .................................................................................. 325
109. Example Face Mesh—Corner Inside Corner Vertex .............................................................................. 325
110. Mesh Copy Scope .............................................................................................................................. 333
111. Generated Mesh ................................................................................................................................ 333
112. Match Controls Used with Thin Sweeping ........................................................................................... 336
113. Coordinate Systems for Arbitrary Mesh Matching ............................................................................... 339
114. Matched Mesh ................................................................................................................................... 340
115. Snap to Boundary Set to Yes ............................................................................................................... 343
116. Snap to Boundary Set to No ............................................................................................................... 343
117. Axis Sweep Representation ................................................................................................................ 401
118. Edge Only Sweep Path ....................................................................................................................... 401
119. Edge Plus Closed Surface Sweep Path ................................................................................................. 402
120. Example (a) Showing Invalid Closed Cylindrical Face as Source Face .................................................... 403
121. Example (b) Valid Open Cylindrical Face as Source Face ....................................................................... 403
122. Example (c) Multiple Connected Side Faces ........................................................................................ 404
123. Axial Sweep Model ............................................................................................................................ 404
124. Axial Sweep Model: Face Meshing Control .......................................................................................... 405
125. Axial Sweep Model: Hard Edge Sizing Control ..................................................................................... 406
126. Axial Sweep Model: Meshed ............................................................................................................... 406
127. Example (a) N Source to 1 Target or 1 Target to N Source Topology ...................................................... 408
128. Example (b) N Source to N Target Topology ........................................................................................ 409
129. Example (c) 1 Source to N Target Mesh ............................................................................................... 409
130. Example (d) N Source to 1 Target Mesh ............................................................................................... 410
131. Example (e) N Source to N Target Mesh ............................................................................................... 410
132. Using Virtual Topology to Create Single Edge Between Source/Target Faces ........................................ 411
133. Example (a) Mapped Face Control Applied to Target Is Ignored ........................................................... 411
134. Example (b) Mapped Face Control Applied to Source Is Respected ...................................................... 412
135.Thin Solid Sweeper Used to Mesh a Single Body Part ........................................................................... 413
136. Thin Solid Sweeper Used to Mesh a Single Body Part: Detail ................................................................ 413
137. Thin Solid Sweeper Used to Mesh a Multibody Part ............................................................................. 414
138. Thin Solid Sweeper and Laminated Composite Models ....................................................................... 415
139. Ambiguous Source Face Definition for Laminated Composite Model ................................................... 416
140. Recommended Source Face Definition for Laminated Composite Model ............................................. 417
141. Thin Solid Sweeper Limitation ............................................................................................................ 418
142. Adding Face Projections (Splits) in the DesignModeler Application ..................................................... 418
143. Defining Source Faces when Face Splits Are Present ............................................................................ 419
144. Three Plates Model Meshed with Thin Solid Sweeper .......................................................................... 419
145. Blocking Algorithm—Sample Geometry ............................................................................................. 420
146. Blocking Algorithm—Step 1: 2D Blocking ........................................................................................... 421
147. Blocking Algorithm—Step 2: 3D Blocking ........................................................................................... 421
148. Blocking Algorithm—Step 3: Inflation ................................................................................................. 422
149. Classifying the Problem: Sources ........................................................................................................ 423
150. Classifying the Problem: Handling of Paths and Imprints ..................................................................... 424
151. Collective Source Faces ...................................................................................................................... 424

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xiii
Meshing User's Guide

152. Classifying the Problem: Sweep Path .................................................................................................. 425

153. Valve Body: Traditional Approach ....................................................................................................... 425
154. Valve Body: Automatic Source Faces with MultiZone ........................................................................... 426
155. Source Imprinting Classifications: Internal Loops ................................................................................. 428
156. Source Imprinting Classifications: Boundary Loops ............................................................................. 428
157. Source Imprinting Classifications: Multiple Internal Loops ................................................................... 429
158. Source Imprinting Classifications: Multiple Connected Internal Loops View 1 ....................................... 429
159. Source Imprinting Classifications: Multiple Connected Internal Loops View 2 ....................................... 430
160. Source Imprinting Classifications: Parallel Loops ................................................................................. 431
161. Source Imprinting Classifications: Intersecting Loops View 1 ............................................................... 431
162. Source Imprinting Classifications: Intersecting Loops View 2 ............................................................... 432
163. Simple Cutout Case ............................................................................................................................ 433
164. Cutouts at Multiple Levels .................................................................................................................. 433
165. Intersections Between Levels and Sides .............................................................................................. 434
166. Meshed Model ................................................................................................................................... 434
167. Vertices in a Split Circle ...................................................................................................................... 435
168. 360 ˚ Cutout ...................................................................................................................................... 435
169. Internal Loops along Side Faces of the Sweep Path ............................................................................. 436
170. Map Face Control Assigned to Side Faces ............................................................................................ 437
171. Connecting Faces Assigned as Source Faces ....................................................................................... 437
172. Using Inflation on Cylindrical Side Faces ............................................................................................. 438
173. Using Inflation on Cylindrical Side Faces ............................................................................................ 439
174. Fillets and MultiZone ......................................................................................................................... 439
175. Fillets and Inflation ............................................................................................................................ 440
176. Fillets as Side Faces ............................................................................................................................ 440
177. Sphere of Influence on Face that Doesn't Intersect Edges .................................................................... 443
178. Two Boxes with Sizing on One Face .................................................................................................... 446
179. Mesh Generated for Entire Part ........................................................................................................... 446
180. Selective Meshing: Left Body First ....................................................................................................... 447
181. Selective Meshing: Right Body First .................................................................................................... 447
182. Mesh Worksheet ................................................................................................................................ 449
183. Mesh Worksheet Step Deactivation .................................................................................................... 453
184. Sweep Method With Inflation: Hex Fill ................................................................................................. 455
185. Sweep Method With Inflation: Wedge Fill ............................................................................................ 456
186. Swept Body Shares Source/Target Face With Tet Body ......................................................................... 459
187. Defining Inflation for a Swept Body Sharing Source/Target Face With Tet Body .................................... 459
188. Detail of Proper Connections on the Common Interface ..................................................................... 460
189. Tet Body Surrounds Swept Body ......................................................................................................... 460
190. Detail of Well-aligned Layers Between the Swept and Tet Regions ....................................................... 461
191. 2D Rigid Body Contact Meshing ......................................................................................................... 465
192. Error Handling for Instances ............................................................................................................... 468
193. Cylinder Containing Baffles ................................................................................................................ 471
194. Section Cut Showing Baffle Meshing .................................................................................................. 471
195. Detail of Inflation on Baffles ............................................................................................................... 472
196. Setting the Contact Match Tolerance .................................................................................................. 499
197. Contact Match with Gaps Between "Primary" and "Secondary" Bodies ................................................. 499
198. Viewing the "Primary" and "Secondary" Bodies in Auxiliary Windows ................................................... 505
199. Previewed Inflation Mesh ................................................................................................................... 535
200. Section Plane View of Previewed Inflation Mesh ................................................................................. 535
201. Mesh Objects Grouped By Type .......................................................................................................... 543
202. Merge Face Edges Off ........................................................................................................................ 548

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xiv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Meshing User's Guide

203. Merge Face Edges On ......................................................................................................................... 548

204. Single Face Virtual Cell Limitations ..................................................................................................... 550
205. Formation of Virtual Faces .................................................................................................................. 551
206. Virtual Faces After Operation .............................................................................................................. 551
207. Formation of Virtual Edges ................................................................................................................. 552
208. Gauss Curvature Angle ....................................................................................................................... 553
209. Curvature Angle at 25, 60, and 120 degrees ......................................................................................... 553
210. Feature Angle .................................................................................................................................... 554
211. Feature Angle at 20, 40, and 80 Degrees .............................................................................................. 554
212. Aspect Ratio at 0.2, 0.5, and 0.9 ........................................................................................................... 554
213. Contact Angle at 270, 330, and 355 degrees ........................................................................................ 555
214. Edge Angle at 80, 100, and 150 degrees ............................................................................................. 555
215. Shared Boundary Ratio at 0.2, 0.3, and 0.4 ........................................................................................... 555
216. Small Edges Between Faces ................................................................................................................ 556
217. Small Edges Removed ........................................................................................................................ 557
218. Small Edges Attached to the Same Faces ............................................................................................ 557
219. Small Edge Repair with Edge Merge ................................................................................................... 558
220. Sliver Face ......................................................................................................................................... 558
221. Sliver Repair ....................................................................................................................................... 559
222. Small Face ......................................................................................................................................... 559
223. Small Face Repair ............................................................................................................................... 560
224. Original Virtual Split Edge with Dependent Virtual Split Edge .............................................................. 563
225. Unlocked Dependent Splits ................................................................................................................ 564
226. Locked Dependent Splits ................................................................................................................... 564
227. Overridden Locked Dependent Splits ................................................................................................. 564
228. Types of Faces Requiring Two Virtual Split Face Operations ................................................................. 566
229. Splits Requiring a Series of Virtual Split Face Operations ...................................................................... 567
230. Virtual Topology Properties Dialog: Example 1 .................................................................................... 574
231. Virtual Topology Properties Dialog: Example 2 .................................................................................... 574
232. Virtual Topology Properties Dialog: Example 3 .................................................................................... 575
233. Virtual Topology Properties Dialog: Example 4 .................................................................................... 576
234. Virtual Topology Properties Dialog: Example 5 .................................................................................... 576
235. Obsolete Mesh ................................................................................................................................... 581
236. Failed Mesh ....................................................................................................................................... 582
237. Example with Missing Face ................................................................................................................. 586
238. Problematic Topology Highlighted During Meshing ............................................................................ 587
239. Failed Surface Mesh Due to Protected Topology ................................................................................. 587
240. Mesh Respecting Protected Topology ................................................................................................. 588
241. Patch Independent Tet Mesh Failure Due to Geometry Gap ................................................................. 588
242. Patch Independent Tet Mesh Failure Corrected with Larger Mesh ........................................................ 589
243. Edge Biasing Not Respected by MultiZone .......................................................................................... 594
244. Edge Biasing Respected by MultiZone ................................................................................................ 595

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xv
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xvi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
List of Tables
1. Washer Limitations ................................................................................................................................ 119
2. Mesh Matching for Symmetrical Parts .................................................................................................... 462
3. Rigid Body Meshing: Default Behaviors for Rigid Dynamics, Transient Structural, and Explicit Dynamics
Analyses ................................................................................................................................................... 464
4. Mesh Matching for Gaps ........................................................................................................................ 499

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xvii
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xviii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Meshing: Capabilities in Ansys Workbench
The following topics are discussed in this section.
Meshing Overview
Meshing Implementation in Ansys Workbench
Types of Meshing
Conformal and Non-Conformal Meshing

Meshing Overview

Philosophy
The goal of meshing in Ansys Workbench is to provide robust, easy to use meshing tools that will sim-
plify the mesh generation process. These tools have the benefit of being highly automated along with
having a moderate to high degree of user control.

Physics Based Meshing

When the Ansys Meshing application is launched (that is, edited) from the Ansys Workbench Project
Schematic, the physics preference will be set based on the type of system being edited. For analysis
systems, the appropriate physics is used (p. 39). For a Mechanical Model system, the Mechanical
physics preference is used. For a Mesh system, the physics preference defined in Tools > Options >
Meshing > Default Physics Preference (p. 389) is used.

Meshing Implementation in Ansys Workbench

The meshing capabilities are available within the following Ansys Workbench applications. Access to a
particular application is determined by your license level.

• The Ansys Mechanical application - Recommended if you plan to stay within the Ansys Mechanical
application to continue your work (preparing and solving a simulation). Also, if you are planning to
perform a Fluid-Structure Interaction problem, and desire to use a single project to manage your
Ansys Workbench data, you can use the Mechanical application to perform your fluid meshing. This
is most conveniently done in a separate model branch from the structural meshing and structural
simulation.

• The Ansys Meshing application (p. 27) - Recommended if you plan to use the mesh to perform
physics simulations in Ansys CFX or Ansys Fluent. If you wish to use a mesh created in the Meshing

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 19
Capabilities in Ansys Workbench

application for a solver supported in the Mechanical application, you can replace the Mesh system
with a Mechanical Model system. See Replacing a Mesh System with a Mechanical Model System (p. 36).

Note:

In the 2025 R1 release, Ansys Autodyn runs inside the Mechanical application. The recom-
mendation is to use an Explicit Dynamics analysis system, in which meshing comes as part
of that system. As an alternative, you can also use this system to prepare a model for the
traditional Ansys Autodyn application (AUTODYN component system). For simple Ansys
Autodyn models, you can use the meshing tools within the traditional Ansys Autodyn applic-
ation (AUTODYN component system).

Types of Meshing
The following types of meshing are discussed in this section.
Part/Body Level Meshing
Mesh Methods

Part/Body Level Meshing

In part-based meshing, parts are meshed individually and have no connections (other than mesh
connections (p. 485) or node merge (p. 508)).

Assemblies can also be meshed using part-based meshing methods, but in such cases the mesher
operates one part at a time, and therefore cannot mesh virtual bodies or evaluate parts that occupy
the same space.

Mesh Methods
This section describes types of meshing in terms of element shapes. Applicable mesh control options
are presented for each element shape shown below, and operate at the part level unless otherwise
noted. See the Method Control (p. 202) section for further details.

Tet Meshing
• Patch Conforming Tetrahedron Mesher (p. 208)

• Patch Independent Tetrahedron Mesher (p. 210)

• Layered Tetrahedrons Mesher (p. 266)

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) (p. 287)

Hex Meshing
• Swept Mesher (p. 235)

• Hex Dominant Mesher (p. 233)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
20 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Conformal and Non-Conformal Meshing

• Thin Solid Mesher (p. 237)

• MultiZone Mesher (p. 242)

Cartesian Meshing
• Body-Fitted Cartesian (p. 261) (part level)

Quad Meshing
• Quad Dominant (p. 282)

• MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284)

Triangle Meshing
• All Triangles (p. 284)

Conformal and Non-Conformal Meshing

This section describes meshing options for Conformal and Non-conformal meshing.
Conformal Meshing Within a Part
Conformal Meshing Across Parts
Connections/Interface Handling

Conformal Meshing Within a Part

A conformal mesh can be generated in a variety of ways when meshing in Ansys Workbench. In
general, a part can be used to prescribe a region where you want a conformal mesh. When a part is
meshed, only the geometry in that part is sent to the mesher. So, geometry in other parts will generally
not influence the mesh of a given part (there are some exceptions to this, for example, contact sizing
controls). To create a conformal mesh consisting of multiple different regions or bodies, a multibody
part should be used.

The following notes apply to multibody parts:

• Multibody parts need to be formed in DesignModeler or Discovery Modeling.

• There are different types of multibody parts. The types of multibody parts prescribe how the
interface between the different bodies should be handled. Options include:

– Shared Topology: Merges the pair(s) of common faces between bodies into a single set of
common faces (2 faces become 1 face). The shared faces belong to both of the neighboring
bodies. When meshing these types of multibody parts, the mesh at the interface will be
conformal.

– No Shared Topology: Leaves the pair(s) of common faces between bodies separate. The
separate faces are meshed separately so the mesh would be non-conformal. Contact detec-
tion (p. 24) should pick up these duplicate faces so that you can easily see the non-conformal
interfaces.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 21
Capabilities in Ansys Workbench

→ Often it is helpful to imprint the bodies with each other so that there are pairs of common
faces with the face boundaries being the same. This could help in creating more similar
mesh at the non-conformal interface between the bodies. DesignModeler has Imprint as
a method for Shared Topology. It is similar to None, but it will imprint all bodies in the
multibody part with each other.

→ In some cases this option is used to help organize bodies into parts, but it is important
to note that this has ramifications. A multibody part will have all bodies meshed using
only 1 meshing process. If instead the bodies are in separate parts, parallel part by part
meshing will be utilized and could significantly reduce the meshing time.

→ Patch Independent Tetrahedrons has an option Match Mesh Where Possible that will
try to make the mesh conformal across bodies even without shared topology.

Note:

The Patch Independent Tetrahedrons method is being deprecated and will

be removed in future releases.

• It is common to use multibody parts in hex meshing. The approach is to slice the model into
sweepable bodies and use Shared Topology to get conformal mesh between those sweepable
bodies.

• Generally multibody parts are formed from all solid bodies or all sheet bodies or all line bodies.

– Multibody parts of solids, sheets, and line bodies are not allowed.

– Multibody parts of solids and sheets are allowed, but note the following:

→ Solids are meshed first by default. You can use selective meshing (p. 444) to obtain a dif-
ferent behavior.

→ In Discovery Modeling, the Shared Topology options: Share and Merge, both create
shared topology. Use Merge when trying to embed sheets within a solid to construct a
zero-thickness or baffle model. Otherwise, use the Share option.

Figure 1: Baffle Model Constructed in Discovery Modeling (p. 23) shows a model with one
solid body with a baffle face embedded in it. This model was constructed from one solid
body and one sheet body, using the Merge option in Discovery Modeling.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
22 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Conformal and Non-Conformal Meshing

Figure 1: Baffle Model Constructed in Discovery Modeling

To construct the same model in Ansys DesignModeler, use the Automatic option for
Shared Topology.

→ Solid/skin models can be constructed using the Share option in Discovery Modeling. Like
with other multibody parts, the common faces will become shared.

Solid/skin models where the sheets are coincident to the solid's faces are supported
(Figure 2: Solid/Skin Model With Coincident Faces (p. 24)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 23
Capabilities in Ansys Workbench

Figure 2: Solid/Skin Model With Coincident Faces

– Multibody parts of sheets and beams (line bodies) (p. 462) are supported.

• For related information, refer to Geometry Introduction in the Mechanical help.

Conformal Meshing Across Parts

In some cases, you may want to get conformal mesh without having to use Shared Topology.

For example, maybe instances are being used to create repetitive copies of the mesh, and you want
to get conformal mesh between the copies. Shared Topology could be used within the part that is
being copied, but each copy would have to be a unique part. Or, maybe meshing speed is paramount
so you want to use parallel part by part meshing and later connect the meshes. There are several
mesh-based ways to make the mesh conformal across parts. These include:

• Mesh connections (p. 485): This approach starts from an existing shell mesh and imprints and connects
the mesh to make it conformal.

• Node merge (p. 508): After meshing, you can insert a node merge operation to make coincident
mesh (nodes close together within a tolerance) conformal. Merge nodes can be used in conjunction
with match mesh (p. 334) or contact match mesh (p. 496) controls to make the nodes coincident
prior to merging.

Connections/Interface Handling
When coming into the Meshing/Mechanical application, by default, connections are found between
parts that have faces in proximity of each other. This automatic detection of connections or interfaces
can be disabled if it is not desired. The Auto Detect Contact On Attach can be changed by selecting

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
24 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Conformal and Non-Conformal Meshing

Tools> Options from the Ansys Workbench main menu, and then selecting either the Mechanical or
Meshing category as appropriate. The option is enabled by default in both applications.

These contact regions can be used for mesh sizing (p. 311), and/or are used to define the behavior
on how the contact/interface is treated when running the simulation.

For structural solvers see the description of connections in the Ansys Mechanical help.

For CFD solvers, contact regions are used differently by the Ansys CFX and Ansys Fluent solvers:

• Contact regions are used in Ansys CFX as General Grid Interface (GGI) definitions. For details, refer
to the documentation available under the Help menu within CFX.

• Contact regions are used in Ansys Fluent as mesh interfaces. See Special Cases (p. 54) for details.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 25
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
26 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Meshing: Usage in Workbench
The Ansys Meshing application is a separate Ansys Workbench application. The Meshing application is
data-integrated with Ansys Workbench, meaning that although the interface remains separate, the data
from the application communicates with the native Ansys Workbench data. The following topics are
addressed in this section:
Basic Meshing Application Workflows
Strategies for CFD/Fluids Meshing in Ansys Workbench
Accessing Meshing Functionality
Overview of the Meshing Application Interface
Determination of Physics, Analysis, and Solver Settings
Working with Legacy Mesh Data
Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry
Extended Ansys ICEM CFD Meshing
Working with Meshing Application Parameters
Ansys Workbench and Mechanical APDL Application Meshing Differences

Basic Meshing Application Workflows

The following sections describe several basic workflows for using the Meshing application in Ansys
Workbench:
Overview of the Meshing Process in Ansys Workbench
Overview of the Meshing Process for CFD/Fluids Analyses
Overview of the Meshing Process for Hydrodynamics Analysis
Combining CFD/Fluids Meshing and Structural Meshing

Overview of the Meshing Process in Ansys Workbench

The following steps provide the basic workflow for using the Meshing application as part of an Ansys
Workbench analysis (non-Fluid Flow). Refer to the Ansys Workbench help for detailed information
about working in Ansys Workbench.

1. Select the appropriate template in the Toolbox, such as Static Structural. Double-click the template
in the Toolbox, or drag it onto the Project Schematic.

2. If necessary, define appropriate engineering data for your analysis. Right-click the Engineering
Data cell, and select Edit, or double-click the Engineering Data cell. The Engineering Data workspace
appears, where you can add or edit material data as necessary.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 27
Usage in Workbench

3. Attach geometry to your system or build new geometry. Right-click the Geometry cell and select
Import Geometry... to attach an existing model or select New SpaceClaim Geometry... or New
DesignModeler Geometry... to launch the Discovery Modeling or Ansys DesignModeler application,
respectively.

4. Access the Meshing application functionality. Right-click the Model cell and choose Edit. This step
will launch the Ansys Mechanical application.

5. Once you are in the Mechanical application, you can move between its components by highlighting
the corresponding object in the Tree as needed. Select the Mesh object in the Tree to access
Meshing application functionality and apply mesh controls.

6. Define loads and boundary conditions. Right-click the Setup cell and select Edit. The appropriate
application for your selected analysis type will open (such as the Mechanical application). Set up
your analysis using that application's tools and features.

7. You can solve your analysis by issuing an Update, either from the data-integrated application
you're using to set up your analysis, or from the Ansys Workbench GUI.

8. Review your analysis results.

Note:

You should save your data periodically (File> Save Project). The data will be saved as a
.wbpj file. Refer to the Ansys Workbench help for more information about project file
management in Workbench.

For more information:

• For information on identifying and correcting mesh failures, refer to Meshing: Troubleshoot-
ing (p. 579).

• For information about using the Ansys Meshing application to import or export mesh files,
refer to Working with Legacy Mesh Data (p. 40) and Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geo-
metry (p. 42).

• Fluids users of the Ansys DesignModeler, Ansys Meshing, and Ansys CFX applications should
refer to Named Selections and Regions for Ansys CFX (p. 77) for important information about
region definitions.

• Fluids users of the Ansys DesignModeler, Ansys Meshing, and Ansys Fluent applications should
refer to Fluent Mesh Export (p. 43) for important information about Named Selection support.

Overview of the Meshing Process for CFD/Fluids Analyses

This section describes the basic process for using the Ansys Meshing application to create a mesh as
part of an Ansys Workbench CFD/fluids analysis. Refer to Strategies for CFD/Fluids Meshing in Ansys
Workbench (p. 33) for information about different CFD/Fluids meshing strategies. Refer to the Ansys
Workbench help for detailed information about working in Ansys Workbench. There are four basic
steps to creating a mesh:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
28 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Basic Meshing Application Workflows

Create Geometry
You can create geometry for the Meshing application in the Discovery Modeling or Ansys Design-
Modeler application. You can also import the geometry from an external CAD file.

The Meshing application requires you to construct solid bodies (not surface bodies) to define the region
for the 3D mesh (for 2D simulations a sheet body can be used). A separate body must be created for
each region of interest in the fluids simulation. For example, a region in which you want the fluids
solver to solve only heat transfer must be created as a separate body. Multiple bodies are created in
the DesignModeler application by using the Freeze command, see Freeze in the DesignModeler help
for details.

It is best practice to explicitly identify any fluid regions in the model as fluids rather than solids.

For new users or new models it is often useful to first generate a default mesh, evaluate it, and then
apply the controls described in Define Mesh Attributes (p. 29) as appropriate to improve various
mesh characteristics.

Define Named Selections

During the fluids simulation setup, you will need to define boundary conditions where you can apply
specific physics. For example, you may need to define where the fluid enters the geometry or where
it exits. Although it may be possible to select the faces that correspond to a particular boundary
condition inside the solver application, it is rather easier to make this selection ahead of time in either
the CAD connection, the Ansys DesignModeler application, or the Meshing application. In addition,
it is much better to define the location of periodic boundaries before the mesh is generated to allow
the nodes of the surface mesh to match on the two sides of the periodic boundary, which in turn
allows for a more accurate fluids solution.

Creating a Named Selection will affect how the mesher treats that topology. For details, see Protecting
Topology Defined Prior to Meshing (p. 184).

You can define the locations of boundaries by defining Named Selections, which can assist you in
the following ways:

• You can use Named Selections to easily hide the outside boundary in an external flow problem.

• You can assign Named Selections to all faces in a model except walls, and Program Con-
trolled (p. 164) inflation will automatically select all walls in the model to be inflation boundaries.

For more information:

• Fluids users of the Ansys DesignModeler, Ansys Meshing, and Ansys CFX applications should
refer to Named Selections and Regions for Ansys CFX (p. 77).

• Fluids users of the Ansys DesignModeler, Ansys Meshing, and Ansys Fluent applications should
refer to Fluent Mesh Export (p. 43).

Define Mesh Attributes

The mesh generation process in the Meshing application is fully automatic. However, you have con-
siderable control over how the mesh elements are distributed. To ensure that you get the best fluids

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 29
Usage in Workbench

solution possible with your available computing resources, you can dictate the background element
size, type of mesh to generate, and where and how the mesh should be refined. In general, setting
up the length scale field for your mesh is a three-step process, as outlined below:

• Assign a suitable set of global mesh controls (p. 93).

• Override the default mesh type by inserting a different mesh method (p. 202).

• Override the global sizing or other controls locally on bodies, faces, edges, or vertices and the
regions close to them by scoping local mesh controls (p. 201).

Generate Mesh
When you are ready to compute the mesh, you can do so by using either the Update feature or the
Generate Mesh feature. Either feature computes the entire mesh. The surface mesh and the volume
mesh are generated at one time. The mesh for all parts/bodies is also generated at one time. For help
in understanding the difference between the Update and Generate Mesh features, see Updating
the Mesh Cell State (p. 527).

For information on how to generate the mesh for selected parts/bodies only, refer to Generating
Mesh (p. 528). The Previewing Surface Mesh (p. 531) and Previewing Inflation (p. 534) features are also
available if you do not want to generate the entire mesh at one time.

Once the mesh is generated, you can view it by selecting the Mesh object in the Tree Outline. You
can define Section Planes to visualize the mesh characteristics, and you can use the Mesh Metric (p. 133)
feature to view the worst quality element based on the quality criterion for a selected mesh metric.

Note:

Fluids users should refer to Generation of Contact Elements (p. 483) for recommendations
for defining contact for fluids analyses.

Overview of the Meshing Process for Hydrodynamics Analysis

This section describes the basic process for using the ANSYS Meshing application to create a mesh
as part of a hydrodynamics analysis. Refer to the Aqwa User's Manual for more information about
hydrodynamics analysis. There are three basic steps to creating a mesh:

Create Geometry
You can create geometry for the Meshing application in the Discovery Modeling or Ansys Design-
Modeler applications, or import a geometry from an external file. The model should consist of surface
and line bodies only (no solid bodies). See General Modeling Requirements in the Aqwa User's
Manual for full details of what is required for creating geometry for a hydrodynamics analysis.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
30 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Basic Meshing Application Workflows

Select Physics Preference

Before performing meshing, select Hydrodynamics as your Physics Preference (p. 96).

Note:

Hydrodynamics can be set as the default preference by selecting Tools > Options, clicking
the Meshing heading, and changing the Default Physics Preference to Hydrodynamics.
For more information, see Meshing: Options (p. 389).

Once defined, you can define the following mesh controls:

• Element Size (p. 102)

• Defeature Size (p. 111)

Define Mesh Attributes

The mesh generation process in the Meshing application is fully automatic. The Hydrodynamics
preference corresponds to the uniform sizing with quad dominant method. However, you have con-
siderable control over how the mesh elements are distributed. To ensure that you get the best solution
possible with your available computing resources, you can dictate the background element size, type
of mesh to generate, and where and how the mesh should be refined. In general, setting up your
mesh is a two-step process, as outlined below:

• Assign suitable global mesh sizes within the Hydrodynamics Physics Preference

• Override the global sizing locally on bodies, faces, edges, or vertices and the regions close to
them by scoping local mesh controls (p. 201)

Generate Mesh
When you are ready to compute the mesh, you can do so by using either the Update feature or the
Generate Mesh feature. The mesh for all parts/bodies is also generated at one time. For help in un-
derstanding the difference between the Update and Generate Mesh features, see Updating the Mesh
Cell State (p. 527).

Once the mesh is generated, you can view it by selecting the Mesh object in the Tree Outline. You
can use the Mesh Metric (p. 133) feature to view the worst quality element based on the quality criterion
for a selected mesh metric.

Combining CFD/Fluids Meshing and Structural Meshing

In some applications, a CFD/fluids mesh and a structural mesh are required within the same workflow.
For these one-way coupling applications, the loading, solving, and postprocessing of the fluids meshed
part(s) later occur in a Fluid Flow analysis system, while the loading, solving, and postprocessing of
the structurally meshed part(s) later occur in a Structural analysis system. The best approach for this
kind of application is to break the model into separate parts rather than use a continuous multibody
part.

The following approach is recommended for these applications:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 31
Usage in Workbench

1. Attach the model to a Geometry (DesignModeler) system and use the Explode Part feature to
create independent parts within the model.

2. Link a Fluid Flow analysis system and a Structural analysis system to the Geometry system. The
geometries may be shared or not, depending on whether defeaturing needs to be done to one
or the other system. Dedicate the Fluid Flow analysis system to meshing the appropriate fluid
domain for the fluids application. Suppress the structural part(s) in the model. Dedicate the
Structural analysis system to meshing the appropriate structural part(s). Suppress the fluid part(s)
in this model.

In this case, only the respective parts are meshed. The mesh of the Fluid Flow analysis system is
shown below on the left, and the mesh of the Structural analysis system is shown on the right.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
32 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Strategies for CFD/Fluids Meshing in Ansys Workbench

Note:

• You can set up the workflow schematic in different ways depending on various
factors, including variations in the fluid/structural model, persistence, the desired
multiphysics simulation, and so on.

• The coupling of the solvers is also handled from the Project Schematic. For details,
refer to the discussion about creating and linking a second system in the Ansys
Workbench help.

• For geometry persistence, both models will require updating when changing CAD
parameters.

Strategies for CFD/Fluids Meshing in Ansys Workbench

Ansys Workbench offers various strategies for CFD/Fluids meshing. For each strategy, certain defaults
are in place to target the particular needs of an analysis. The strategies and circumstances in which
each of them are appropriate are described below. In all cases, your first decision is to determine
whether you want to use assembly meshing (p. 20) or part-based meshing.

Tetra Dominant Meshing - Patch Conforming Tetra/Prism Meshing

The first strategy is to use conformal tetra/prism meshing plus the default Sweep (p. 235) method. This
strategy is recommended for models involving moderately clean CAD (for example, native CAD, Parasolid,
ACIS, and so on) for which you desire a tetra/hybrid dominant mesh.

Although the Patch Conforming Tetra (p. 208) mesh method is fully automated, it interacts with addi-
tional mesh controls and capabilities as necessary, including:

• Advanced tetra and inflation layer technology

• Pinch (p. 187) controls for removing small features at the mesh level (offered as an alternative to
Virtual Topologies (p. 545), which work at the geometry level)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 33
Usage in Workbench

• Sizing (p. 105) controls for providing greater control over mesh distribution

• Conformal swept regions (p. 458)

• Body of influence (p. 305) (BOI) for setting one body as a size source for another body

Tetra Dominant Meshing - Patch Independent Tetra/Prism Meshing

An alternative for those desiring a tetra dominant mesh is Patch Independent Tetra (p. 210)/Prism
meshing. This approach is best for "dirty CAD"—CAD models with many surface patches (for example,
IGES, CATIA V4, and so on) and in cases with large numbers of slivers/small edges/sharp corners. It in-
cludes support for post inflation (p. 173), as well as CAD simplification built-in to the tetra mesher.

Note:

The Patch Independent Tetrahedrons method is being deprecated and will be removed
in future releases.

Mapped Hex Meshing - All Hex Swept Meshing

This mapped hex approach (which includes both general Sweep (p. 399) and thin Sweep (p. 406)) is re-
commended for clean CAD. It supports single source to single target volumes, and may require you to
perform manual geometry decomposition.

Benefits of this approach include:

• Support for Sizing (p. 105) controls

• Compatibility with Patch Conforming Tetra (p. 208) meshing

• Support for swept inflation (p. 454)

Mapped and Free Meshing - MultiZone Meshing

Best for moderately clean CAD, the MultiZone (p. 242) strategy for meshing provides multi-level sweep
with automatic decomposition of geometry into mapped (structured) and free (unstructured) regions.
When defining the MultiZone mesh method, you can specify a Mapped Mesh Type and a Free Mesh
Type that will be used to fill structured and unstructured regions respectively. Depending on your settings
and specific model, the mesh may contain a mixture of hex/prism/tetra elements.

The MultiZone mesh method and the Sweep (p. 235) mesh method described above operate similarly.
However, MultiZone has capabilities that make it more suitable for a class of problems for which the
Sweep method would not work without extensive geometry decomposition.

Additional benefits of this approach include:

• Support for 3D inflation

• Ability to selectively ignore small features

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
34 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Accessing Meshing Functionality

Accessing Meshing Functionality

You can access Meshing application functionality from the Model/Mesh cell in an analysis system, or
from the Mesh cell in a Mesh component system. Before using the steps provided in this section, you
should be familiar with the concepts of analysis systems and component systems in Ansys Workbench.

Accessing Meshing Functionality from an Analysis System

The Model cell (Mesh cell in Fluid Flow analysis systems) allows you to access a meshing application or
share a mesh with another system. Model corresponds to the contents of the Model branch within the
Ansys Mechanical application and allows you to perform physics-based meshing capabilities, such as
spot welds, contact, etc. Mesh contains just node coordinates and mesh connectivity.

To launch the Meshing application from a Model cell in an analysis system (non-Fluid Flow):

1. From the Analysis Systems group of the Ansys Workbench Toolbox, either double-click or drag an
analysis system onto the Project Schematic. As a result, a template for that type of analysis system
appears in the Project Schematic.

2. In the analysis system, right-click the Geometry cell and choose New SpaceClaim Geometry... or
New DesignModeler Geometry... to create geometry within the Discovery Modeling or Ansys
DesignModeler application respectively or choose Import Geometry to attach existing geometry.

3. Right-click the Model cell and choose Edit. This step will launch the Mechanical application. From
the Mechanical application, you can access the Meshing application controls by clicking on the Mesh
object in the Tree Outline.

To access meshing from a Mesh cell in a Fluid Flow analysis system:

1. From the Analysis Systems group of the Ansys Workbench Toolbox, either double-click or drag a
Fluid Flow analysis system onto the Project Schematic. As a result, a template for that type of ana-
lysis system appears in the Project Schematic.

2. In the analysis system, right-click the Geometry cell and choose New SpaceClaim Geometry... or
New DesignModeler Geometry... to create geometry within the Discovery Modeling or Ansys
DesignModeler application respectively or choose Import Geometry to attach existing geometry.

3. Right-click the Mesh cell and choose Edit. This step will launch the appropriate mesh application
(for example, the Meshing application, etc.).

Accessing Meshing Functionality from a Mesh Component System

To launch the Meshing application from a Mesh component system:

1. From the Component Systems group of the Ansys Workbench Toolbox, either double-click or drag
a Mesh component system onto the Project Schematic. As a result, a template of a Mesh system
appears in the Project Schematic.

2. In the Mesh system, right-click the Geometry cell and choose New SpaceClaim Geometry... or New
DesignModeler Geometry... to create geometry within the Discovery Modeling or Ansys Design-
Modeler application respectively or choose Import Geometry to attach existing geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 35
Usage in Workbench

3. Right-click the Mesh cell and choose Edit. This step will launch the appropriate mesh application
(for example, the Meshing application, etc.).

Replacing a Mesh System with a Mechanical Model System

You can replace a Mesh component system with a Mechanical Model component system. This system
can then be shared with any analysis system. For details, refer to the description of Mechanical Model
systems in the Ansys Workbench help.

Overview of the Meshing Application Interface

The intuitive Meshing application interface, which is shown in Figure 3: Meshing Application Inter-
face (p. 37), facilitates your use of all meshing controls and settings (p. 89).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
36 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Overview of the Meshing Application Interface

Figure 3: Meshing Application Interface

The functional elements of the interface are described in the following table.

Note:

The links in the table redirect you to topics in the Ansys Mechanical help that contain
supplemental information. Not all of the items described in the Mechanical help are
available in the Meshing application interface.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 37
Usage in Workbench

Window Component Description

Main Menu This menu includes the basic menus such as File
and Edit.
Standard Toolbar This toolbar contains commonly used application
commands.
Graphics Toolbar This toolbar contains commands that control
pointer mode or cause an action in the graphics
browser.
Context Options Toolbar This toolbar contains task-specific commands
that change depending on where you are in the
Tree Outline.
Unit Conversion Toolbar Not visible by default. This toolbar allows you
to convert units for various properties.
Named Selections Toolbar Not visible by default. This toolbar contains
options to manage Named Selections similar to
how they are managed in the Mechanical
application.
Edge Graphics Options Toolbar This toolbar provides quick access to features
that are intended to improve your ability to
distinguish edge and mesh connectivity in a
surface body model.
Explode View Options Toolbar This toolbar is a graphical display feature used
to create imaginary distance between geometry
bodies (only) of your model for viewing
purposes.
Tree Outline Outline view of the project. Always visible.
Location in the outline sets the context for other
controls. Provides access to object's context
menus. Allows renaming of objects. Establishes
what details display in the Details View.
Details View The Details View corresponds to the Outline
selection. Displays a details window on the lower
left panel which contains details about each
object in the Outline.
Geometry Window (also sometimes called the Graphics Displays and manipulates the visual
window) representation of the object selected in the
Outline. This window may display:

• 3D Geometry

• 2D/3D Graph

• Spreadsheet

• HTML Pages

• Scale ruler

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
38 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Determination of Physics, Analysis, and Solver Settings

Window Component Description

• Triad control

• Legend

Note:

• Hover your mouse over the

time stamp in the legend and
RMB click to toggle the time
stamp off and on.

• The Geometry window may

include splitter bars for
dividing views.

• See ANSYS.com > Support >

Platform Support for a
complete list of 3Dconnexion
products certified with the
current release of ANSYS
applications.

Reference Help Opens an objects reference help page for the

highlighted object. These are the same pages
that are available in the Mechanical application.
Tabs The document tabs that are visible on the lower
right portion of the window.
Status Bar Brief in-context tip. Selection feedback.
Splitter Bar Application window has up to 3 splitter bars.

Determination of Physics, Analysis, and Solver Settings

Most systems in Ansys Workbench are defined by three primary attributes: physics type, analysis type,
and solver type. The method you use to launch the Meshing application functionality determines how
default physics, analysis, and/or solver settings are defined:

• Mesh systems, which are a type of component system, are unfiltered (physics, analysis, and
solver). If you launch the Meshing application from a Mesh component system (p. 35), your
preferences will be set to the defaults you previously defined within the Meshing application.
See Meshing Overview (p. 19) for more information.

• If you launch the Meshing application from an analysis system (p. 35) (whether it be via the
Model cell in a non-Fluid Flow analysis system or the Mesh cell in a Fluid Flow analysis system),

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 39
Usage in Workbench

your Physics, Analysis, and Solver settings will be set according to the selected type of analysis
system. To change the Physics Preference, you must use the Details View of the Mesh folder.

Note:

• To view the physics, analysis, and solver types that are defined for an analysis system,
right-click the Model cell (non-Fluid Flow analyses) or Mesh cell (Fluid Flow analyses)
and select Properties. This step will open the Properties window, where you can view
the attributes. For example, for an Electric system, the Properties window will show
that Physics is Electric, Analysis is Steady-State Electric Conduction, and Solver is
Mechanical APDL.

• Mechanical Model systems, which are a type of component system, are unfiltered
(physics and solver). For details, refer to the discussion of Mechanical Model systems
in the Ansys Workbench help.

For more information:

• For a list of analysis systems available in Ansys Workbench and basic steps for building each
type of system, refer to the discussion of analysis systems in the Ansys Workbench help.

• For details about the various types of non-Fluid Flow analyses and how to perform them, refer
to the discussion of analysis types in the Ansys Mechanical help.

• For details about Fluid Flow analyses and how to perform them, refer to the documentation
available under the Help menu within Ansys CFX or Ansys Fluent.

Working with Legacy Mesh Data

You can import legacy mesh files using the following methods. The method that is best for you depends
on the type of file that you want to import and how you intend to use it:

• Choose File> Import from the Ansys Workbench Menu bar or click the Import button on the
Ansys Workbench Toolbar to read legacy Ansys Workbench mesh data

• Right-click the Mesh cell and choose Import Mesh File to import a read-only mesh for downstream
use

• Use the External Model system to read third-party mesh formats for other Ansys Workbench
systems. You can use the External Model system for importing the following file formats:

– NASTRAN Bulk Data (.bdf, .dat, .nas)

– Abaqus Input (.inp)

– Fluent Input (.msh, .cas)

– ICEM CFD Input (.uns)

– LS-DYNA Input (.k)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
40 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Working with Legacy Mesh Data

Importing Using File> Import or the Import Button

If you choose File> Import or click the Import button from Ansys Workbench, you can import mesh
files that have an extension of .cmdb or .meshdat. Doing so creates a Mesh system in the Ansys Work-
bench Project Schematic. When the Mesh cell is edited, the mesh will open in the Meshing application
where you can edit it.

For more information about reading a simulation/mesh database (.dsdb/.cmdb) from previous ANSYS
versions, refer to the discussion of importing legacy databases in the Ansys Workbench help.

Importing Read-only Meshes for Downstream Application Use

You can right-click a Mesh cell and choose Import Mesh File to browse to a mesh file that you want
to import, provided the file is of one of the following types:

• Ansys CFX mesh file with extension .gtm or .cfx

• Ansys ICEM CFD mesh file with extension .cfx, cfx5, or .msh

• Ansys Fluent mesh file with extension .cas, .msh, or .gz

• Ansys Polyflow Classic mesh file with extension .poly, .neu, or .msh

Note:

When you use this method, in the strictest sense you are not "importing" the mesh file. That
is, you will not be able to edit the file in the Meshing application using this method. Rather,
you are making the mesh available for downstream systems.

To be able to edit these types of files in the Meshing application, you must import the mesh
into the External Model application, and then into another system.

The Import Mesh File method is enabled when:

• No geometry is associated with the Geometry cell.

• No generated mesh is associated with the Mesh cell. (Imported meshes do not disable the Import
Mesh File menu item.)

• No incoming connections are associated with the Geometry cell or Mesh cell.

• No outgoing connections are associated with the Geometry cell.

• No outgoing connections from the Mesh cell are connected to the Mechanical APDL or Ansys
Autodyn applications.

When you import the mesh to the Mesh cell:

• The Geometry cell is deleted.

• The title of the cell changes from "Mesh" to "Imported Mesh."

• The state of the Mesh cell is "Up to Date."

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 41
Usage in Workbench

• No incoming connections are allowed.

• Outgoing connections can be established with a Mechanical APDL, Ansys Autodyn, Ansys CFX,
Ansys Fluent, or Ansys Polyflow Classic system.

• The Geometry cell in the target system is deleted.

• Using the reset command (right-clicking on the Imported Mesh cell and choosing Reset) deletes
the imported mesh.

Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

A mesh generated by the Meshing application can be exported into the following file formats:

• Meshing File format (*.meshdat), suitable for import into Ansys Workbench (p. 43)

• Ansys Fluent mesh format (*.msh), suitable for import into Ansys Fluent

• Ansys Polyflow Classic format (*.poly), suitable for import into Ansys Polyflow Classic

• CGNS format (*.cgns), suitable for import into a CGNS-compatible application

• Ansys ICEM CFD format (*.prj), suitable for import into Ansys ICEM CFD

• TGrid Faceted Geometry format (*.tgf ), suitable for import into Fluent Meshing (formerly TGrid)

To export a mesh:

1. Generate the mesh.

2. If necessary, select an Export Unit (p. 100) or Export Format (p. 100) from the Defaults group in the
Details View.

3. Select File> Export from the main menu.

4. In the Save As dialog box, choose a directory and specify a file name for the file. Then choose a file
type from the Save as type drop-down menu and click Save.

Note:

• You can also use the Meshing application to export faceted geometry for use in Ansys
Fluent Meshing. In such cases you can skip step 1 above. A file with the extension .tgf is
created, suitable for import into Ansys Fluent Meshing.

• When the same entity is a member of more than one Named Selection, those Named Se-
lections are said to be "overlapping". If you are exporting a mesh into the Ansys Fluent,
Ansys Polyflow Classic, CGNS, or Ansys ICEM CFD format (or faceted geometry into the
Ansys Fluent Meshing format), and overlapping Named Selections are detected, the export
will fail and you must resolve the overlapping Named Selections before proceeding. Any
Named Selection whose Send to Solver (p. 78) option is set to No is skipped during the
check for overlapping entities in Named Selections. For this reason, an easy way to avoid

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
42 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

overlapping Named Selections is to set all values of Send to Solver to No. For details, see
Repairing Geometry in Overlapping Named Selections (p. 79).

For details, refer to:

Mesh Application File Export
Fluent Mesh Export
Polyflow Classic Export
CGNS Export
Ansys ICEM CFD Export
Exporting Faceted Geometry to Ansys Fluent Meshing
Named Selections and Regions for Ansys CFX
Passing Named Selections to the Solver
Repairing Geometry in Overlapping Named Selections
Resolving Overlapping Contact Regions

Mesh Application File Export

When you export a mesh file to Meshing File format (File> Export from the Meshing application main
menu, then Save as type Meshing File), a file with the extension .meshdat is created. The exported
file can be imported as a legacy file into Ansys Workbench by either selecting File >Import (p. 40)
from the Menu bar or clicking the Import button on the Toolbar, and then selecting an Importable
Mesh File. This will create a Mesh System in the Ansys Workbench Project Schematic.

Fluent Mesh Export

When you export a mesh file to Ansys Fluent mesh format (File> Export from the Meshing application
main menu, then Save as type Fluent Input Files), a mesh file with the extension .msh is created.
The exported mesh file is suitable for import into another product such as Ansys Fluent, or into Ansys
Fluent Meshing outside of Ansys Workbench. For more control over the input file, refer to Meshing
Options on the Options Dialog Box (p. 389).

If the mesh file you export contains quadratic elements, all midside nodes will be dropped during
export. That is, all element types will be exported as linear element types for Ansys Fluent.

An orientation check/correction will be performed for 3D geometry models exported as 2D mesh

such that all 2D cells will have the same orientation. You do not need to manually correct the orient-
ation of the geometry face(s).

When the mesh file is exported to Ansys Fluent mesh format, the material properties of the bodies/parts
in the model must be translated to proper continuum zone types (p. 46) for use in Ansys Fluent. To
provide this information to Ansys Fluent, the following logic is used:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 43
Usage in Workbench

1. If Physics Preference (p. 96) is set to CFD and you do not use either of the methods described
in steps 2 or 3 below to explicitly assign a body/part to be either solid or fluid, all zones are
exported to Ansys Fluent mesh format as FLUID zones by default.

Note:

An exception to the above involves models that include an enclosure. If you used
the Enclosure feature in the Ansys DesignModeler application, the enclosure body
will be assigned a continuum zone type of FLUID by default.

2. For models created/edited in the DesignModeler application, a Fluid/Solid material property

can be assigned to a solid body or a multibody part (if the multibody part contains at least
one solid body). This material assignment appears under Details of Body in the Details View
of the DesignModeler application.

For multibody parts, you can change the material property for all bodies in one operation in
the DesignModeler application by modifying the Fluid/Solid property for the multibody part
and the modification will propagate to any solid bodies in the part. Similarly, you can use
the DesignModeler application to modify the Fluid/Solid property for a solid body that belongs
to a multibody part, and the Fluid/Solid property for the multibody part will be modified
accordingly.

When exported to Fluent Meshing format, a body/part with a material property of Solid will
be assigned a continuum zone type of SOLID and a body/part with a material property of
Fluid will be assigned a continuum zone type of FLUID. This setting in the DesignModeler
application overrides the default behavior described in step 1.

Note:

Refer to Figure 5: Multibody Part Containing All Fluid Bodies in the DesignModeler
Application (p. 56) for an example that illustrates where to set the Fluid/Solid
material property in the DesignModeler application.

3. Finally, the Fluid/Solid material property setting in the Meshing application is considered.
This material assignment appears in the Details View of the Meshing application when a
prototype (Body object) is selected in the Tree Outline. Similar to the DesignModeler applic-
ation feature described in step 2, the Meshing application lets you change the Fluid/Solid
material property for a body.

When exported to Ansys Fluent mesh format, a body with a material property of Solid will
be assigned a continuum zone type of SOLID and a body with a material property of Fluid
will be assigned a continuum zone type of FLUID. This setting in the Meshing application

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
44 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

overrides any assignments that were made based on the default behavior described in step
1 or the Fluid/Solid setting described in step 2.

Note:

If there are multiple continuum zones or boundary zones of the same type in the
DesignModeler application or the Meshing application, each zone name in the exported
Ansys Fluent mesh file will contain the necessary prefix and an arbitrary number will
be appended to the name to make it unique. Refer to Examples of Fluent Mesh Export:
An Alternative to Using a Fluid Flow (Fluent) Analysis System (p. 55) for an example
that illustrates multiple zones of the same type.

For related information, refer to:

Classes of Zone Types in Ansys Fluent
Standard Naming Conventions for Naming Named Selections
Zone Type Assignment
Examples of Fluent Mesh Export: An Alternative to Using a Fluid Flow (Fluent) Analysis System

Note:

• Contact regions are said to be “overlapping” when the same entity (face or edge) is a
member of more than one contact region or when multiple contact regions share the
same geometry. Ansys Fluent does not support overlapping contact regions. For part-
based meshing only, if you are exporting a mesh into the Ansys Fluent format and
overlapping contact regions are detected, the software will attempt to combine the re-
gions. If it is unable to combine them, the export will fail and you must resolve the
overlapping contact regions manually before proceeding. You can use the Check
Overlapping Contact Regions option to identify the problematic contact regions. For
details, see Resolving Overlapping Contact Regions (p. 79).

• If you are performing a 2D analysis and intend to export to Ansys Fluent, you should
disable the Auto Detect Contact On Attach option to avoid problems that may otherwise
occur upon export. You can access this option by selecting Tools> Options from the
Ansys Workbench main menu, and then selecting either the Mechanical or Meshing
category as appropriate. The option is enabled by default in both applications.

• Fluent mesh export may fail if you are using shared licensing, no licenses are available,
and Ansys Fluent is running already. In such cases, the error is due to shared licensing
restrictions, but the error message that is issued does not identify licensing as the cause.

• For additional information about importing files into Ansys Fluent or Ansys Fluent
Meshing, refer to the documentation available under the Help menu within the respective
product.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 45
Usage in Workbench

Classes of Zone Types in Ansys Fluent

Zone type specifications in Ansys Fluent define the physical and operational characteristics of the
model at its boundaries and within specific regions of its domain. There are two classes of zone
type specifications:

• Boundary zone types (sometimes called "face zones")

• Continuum zone types (sometimes called "cell zones")

Boundary zone type specifications, such as WALL or INLET_VENT, define the characteristics of the
model at its external or internal boundaries. Boundary zones are collections of faces in 3D, and
collections of edges in 2D. By default, a boundary zone of type WALL is created for the boundary
of each body in the geometry during export to Ansys Fluent mesh format. Continuum zone type
specifications, such as FLUID or SOLID, define the characteristics of the model within specified regions
of its domain. By default, a continuum zone is created for each body in the geometry during export
to Ansys Fluent mesh format. (By default, continuum zone types will be assigned as described in
Fluent Mesh Export (p. 43).)

If you do not want the default zone type to be assigned to a boundary zone, you can set the Auto
Zone Type Assignment (p. 389) option to Off. You can then override default type of WALL by defining
Named Selections and naming them according to the conventions (p. 48) provided. All faces be-
longing to the same body in a Named Selection are placed into a single boundary zone.

Note:

For 2D models, you can group sheet surface bodies into a Named Selection, and the
underlying faces contained in the sheet surface bodies will be placed into a single con-
tinuum zone (as long as the faces themselves are not contained in a Named Selection).

The following sections further describe boundary zone type and continuum zone type specifications
and illustrate their purposes in the definition of an example computational model involving simple
geometry.

For details on how zones are named and how zone types are assigned during export, refer to Zone
Type Assignment (p. 49).

For an example that illustrates the basic workflow for using Ansys Workbench to create a model
in the Ansys DesignModeler application, mesh it in the Meshing application, and export the mesh
to Ansys Fluent, refer to Examples of Fluent Mesh Export: An Alternative to Using a Fluid Flow
(Fluent) Analysis System (p. 55). In the example, Named Selections are defined in the Meshing ap-
plication and the correct Ansys Fluent zone names/types are assigned in the exported Fluent mesh
file based on those definitions.

Comparing and Contrasting Boundary Zone Types and Continuum Zone Types
Boundary zone type specifications define the physical and operational characteristics of the model
at those topological entities that represent model boundaries. For example, if an INFLOW boundary
zone type is assigned to a face entity that is part of three-dimensional model, the model is defined
such that material flows into the model domain through the specified face. Likewise, if a SYMMETRY
boundary zone type is assigned to an edge entity that is part of a two-dimensional model, the
model is defined such that flow, temperature, and pressure gradients are identically zero along the

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
46 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

specified edge. As a result, physical conditions in the regions immediately adjacent to either side
of the edge are identical to each other.

Continuum zone type specifications define the physical characteristics of the model within specified
regions of its domain. For example, if a FLUID continuum zone type is assigned to a body entity,
the model is defined such that equations of momentum, continuity, and species transport apply
at mesh nodes or cells that exist within the body. Conversely, if a SOLID continuum zone type is
assigned to a body entity, only the energy and species transport equations (without convection)
apply at the mesh nodes or cells that exist within the body.

Generally speaking, entities are assigned to zone type classes in Ansys Fluent as shown in the fol-
lowing table:

Model Dimension Entity Zone Type Class

3D Body Continuum
Face Boundary
2D Face Continuum
Edge Boundary

The Effect of Zone Type Specifications

As an example of the effect of zone type specifications on the specification of a computational
model, consider the geometry shown in Figure 4: Boundary Zone Type and Continuum Zone Type
Specifications in Ansys Fluent (p. 47), which consists of a single volume in the shape of a straight,
elliptical cylinder. The geometry includes one body, three faces, two edges, and two vertices.

Figure 4: Boundary Zone Type and Continuum Zone Type Specifications in Ansys Fluent

The geometry shown in Figure 4: Boundary Zone Type and Continuum Zone Type Specifications in
Ansys Fluent (p. 47) can be used to model many different types of transport problems, including
fluid flow through a straight, elliptical pipe and heat conduction through a solid, elliptical rod. The
following table shows the zone type specifications associated with the fluid flow problem using
the geometry shown in Figure 4: Boundary Zone Type and Continuum Zone Type Specifications in
Ansys Fluent (p. 47).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 47
Usage in Workbench

Entity Zone Class Zone Type

face.1 Boundary WALL
face.2 Boundary INFLOW
face.3 Boundary OUTFLOW
body.1 Continuum FLUID

The following table shows the zone type specifications associated with the heat conduction problem
using the geometry shown in Figure 4: Boundary Zone Type and Continuum Zone Type Specifications
in Ansys Fluent (p. 47).

Entity Zone Class Zone Type

face.1 Boundary WALL
body.1 Continuum SOLID

Note:

For additional information about boundary (face) zones and continuum (cell) zones in
Ansys Fluent, refer to the documentation available under the Help menu within Ansys
Fluent.

Standard Naming Conventions for Naming Named Selections

This section is applicable to boundary zones only.

If you want to override the default boundary zone type assignments by using Named Selections,
naming conventions have been provided for you to follow. Use these conventions when defining
Named Selections in either the Ansys DesignModeler application or the Meshing application. By
following these naming conventions consistently, you can ensure that Ansys Fluent boundary zone
types will be assigned correctly and predictably in the exported Ansys Fluent file.

When naming Named Selections, it is best practice to specify the appropriate name from the list
below exactly as shown (case-insensitive). In cases where the name shown below contains an un-
derscore character, a hyphen is also acceptable (for example, both EXHAUST_FAN and EXHAUST-FAN
will work). (Note, however, that although the Meshing application allows both hyphens and under-
score characters to be used when defining Named Selections, the DesignModeler application allows
only underscore characters.)

The name of each Named Selection is filtered upon export such that only allowable characters remain.
Allowable characters include all alphanumeric characters as well as the following special characters:

` ! $ % ^ & * _ + - = : < > . ? /

All other characters, including spaces, are invalid. If an invalid character is used, it is replaced by
an underscore (_) upon export.

In addition, the export process does allow for partial matches and special abbreviations, which are
described in Zone Type Assignment (p. 49).

AXIS

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
48 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

EXHAUST_FAN
FAN
INLET_VENT
INTAKE_FAN
INTERFACE
INTERIOR
MASS_FLOW_INLET
OUTFLOW
OUTLET_VENT
PERIODIC
POROUS_JUMP
PRESSURE_FAR_FIELD
PRESSURE_INLET
PRESSURE_OUTLET
RADIATOR
RECIRCULATION_INLET
RECIRCULATION_OUTLET
SYMMETRY
THIN
VELOCITY_INLET
WALL

Note:

For details about the boundary (face) zone and continuum (cell) zone types in Ansys
Fluent, refer to the documentation available under the Help menu within Ansys Fluent.

Zone Type Assignment

This section describes zone naming and the zone type assignment process.

Zone Naming
By default, zones are named after the part and body from which they are derived. For example,
part "part" and body "solid body" will result in a zone name of "part-solid_body." When the zone
name is created:

• Any invalid characters (such as the space in "solid body") are replaced by an underscore
character ("solid_body").

• Names that begin with a digit are prefixed by "zone."

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 49
Usage in Workbench

• If the part name and the body name are identical, only the body name is used to create the
zone name. The same rule applies to single body parts.

Note:

If you set the Auto Zone Type Assignment option to Off (as described in Meshing
Options on the Options Dialog Box (p. 389)), all boundary zones are set to the default
zone type WALL.

If a boundary zone was created for a Named Selection (as described in Classes of Zone Types in
Ansys Fluent (p. 46)), the name of the boundary zone is set to the name of the Named Selection.

In cases where the zone naming process could lead to conflicting zone names (for example, in a
situation where the potential exists for a zone name that is already in use to be used to name a
new zone), one of the following approaches is used:

• If the zone type is not similar to the zone name in question, the zone type will be prefixed
to the zone name to make it unique. For example, an existing continuum zone named "fluid"
and a new boundary zone named "fluid" (with zone type WALL) will result in the boundary
zone being renamed "wall-fluid."

A unique integer will be suffixed to the zone name, preceded by a dot character (.). For ex-
ample, an existing continuum zone named "solid" (with zone type SOLID) and another con-
tinuum zone named "solid" (with zone type FLUID) will result in the continuum zone being
renamed "solid.1."

• If the zone type is similar to the zone name in question, the approach is dependent on
whether the zone is a continuum zone or a boundary zone:

– If multiple continuum zones have the same type and same zone name, they are merged
into a single continuum zone.

– If multiple boundary zones have the same type and same zone name, a unique integer
will be suffixed to the zone name, preceded by a dot character (.). For example, an existing
boundary zone named "wall" and a second boundary zone named "wall" will result in the
second boundary zone being renamed "wall.1." Subsequent boundary zones named "wall"
will be renamed "wall.2," "wall.3," and so on.

Because part and body names influence the creation of continuum zones in Ansys Fluent, it is best
practice to assign distinct part and body names that follow these rules:

• Names should include only allowable characters. Allowable characters include all alphanu-
meric characters as well as the following special characters:

` ! $ % ^ & * _ + - = :< > .? /

All other characters, including spaces, are invalid. If an invalid character is used, it is replaced
by an underscore (_) upon export.

• It is not sufficient for part and body names to differ by case only. This approach may lead
to name conflicts for zones in Ansys Fluent, because names are converted to all lowercase
characters upon export.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
50 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

• Using "INTER" as zone name or part of a zone name should be avoided. Because the mesh-
er does not allow named selections with identical names and interface definitions require
two named selections, using "INTER" can cause zone type conflicts.

Zone Type Assignment Process

The section is applicable to boundary zones only.

The zone type is derived from the zone name. To assign zone types, the string comparison operations
detailed below are performed during the export process. These string comparison operations, which
correspond to the naming conventions described in Standard Naming Conventions for Naming
Named Selections (p. 48), are applied in the order in which they are listed below (that is, at first
an exact match is tested, after that a partial match is tested, etc.) and are always case-insensitive.
For example, fan, Fan, FAn, and faN are all exact matches for the 'FAN' string comparison and result
in a zone type of FAN being assigned.

When the search operation begins, it will start by searching the first portion (or sub-string) of the
string and if no match is found, it will search for a match anywhere in the string. For example, if a
Named Selection with the name wall_inlet_flange is defined, it will be exported as zone type WALL.
The 'inlet' portion of the name will have no effect on zone type assignment.

In some cases a name may match multiple patterns or rules, and the expected zone type may not
be assigned. For this reason it is strongly advisable to use only unambiguous names that exactly
match one of the rules presented below.

Once they are exported, names are all lowercase. The single quotation marks that are shown en-
closing the strings below are not considered during the string comparison operations.

1. Exact matches are checked:

'AXIS'
'EXHAUST_FAN'
'FAN'
'INLET_VENT'
'INTAKE_FAN'
'INTERFACE'
'INTERIOR'
'INTERNAL'
'MASS_FLOW_INLET'
'OUTFLOW'
'OUTLET_VENT'
'POROUS_JUMP'
'PRESSURE_FAR_FIELD'
'PRESSURE_INLET'
'PRESSURE_OUTLET'
'RADIATOR'
'RECIRCULATION_INLET'
'RECIRCULATION_OUTLET'
'SYMMETRY'
'THIN'
'VELOCITY_INLET'
'WALL'

2. Partial matches are considered only if an exact match was not found in step 1:
'AXIS'
{'EXHAUST' && 'FAN'}
'FAN'
{'INLET' && 'VENT'}
{'INTAKE' && 'FAN'}

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 51
Usage in Workbench

'INTERFACE'
'INTERIOR'
'INTERNAL'
{'MASS' && 'FLOW' && 'INLET'}
'OUTFLOW'
{'OUTLET' && 'VENT'}
{'POROUS' && 'JUMP'}
{'PRESSURE' && 'FAR' && 'FIELD'}
{'PRESSURE' && 'INLET'}
{'PRESSURE' && 'OUTLET'}
'RADIATOR'
{'RECIRCULATION' && 'INLET'}
{'RECIRCULATION' && 'OUTLET'}
'SYMMETRY'
{'VELOCITY' && 'INLET'}

3. String comparisons to the special abbreviations listed in the table below are performed if no
match was found in step 1 or step 2. If an exact match to one of the strings listed in the table
is found, the corresponding zone type is assigned:

When a match for this string is found... This zone type is assigned...
'CNDBY' INTERFACE
'EXFAN' EXHAUST FAN
'IFACE' INTERFACE
'IN' PRESSURE INLET
'INFAN' INTAKE FAN
'INTERFACE' INTERFACE
'IVENT' INLET VENT
'MASFI' MASS FLOW INLET
'OUT' PRESSURE OUTLET
'OVENT' OUTLET VENT
'PFAR' PRESSURE FAR FIELD
'PORJ' POROUS JUMP
'PRESF' PRESSURE FAR FIELD
'PRESI' PRESSURE INLET
'PRESO' PRESSURE OUTLET
'PRESS' PRESSURE FAR FIELD
'RAD' RADIATOR
'RINLT' RECIRCULATION INLET
'ROUT' RECIRCULATION OUTLET
'SLIDE' INTERFACE

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
52 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

When a match for this string is found... This zone type is assigned...
'SYM' SYMMETRY
'SYMET' SYMMETRY
'SYMM' SYMMETRY
'VELF' VELOCITY INLET
'VELI' VELOCITY INLET

4. Partial matches are considered if no match was found in steps 1, 2, or 3. If a partial match to
one of the strings listed in the following table is found, the corresponding zone type is assigned:

When a match for this string is found... This zone type is assigned...
'EXHAUST' EXHAUST FAN
'INLET' VELOCITY INLET
'OUTLET' PRESSURE OUTLET
'SYM' SYMMETRY
'THIN' THIN
'WALL' WALL

5. If none of the string comparisons described in steps 1, 2, 3, or 4 result in a match, the boundary
zone is assigned zone type WALL by default.

Note:

• When Named Selections defined in the Ansys DesignModeler application are required
in the Meshing application, you must set the appropriate geometry import options
to ensure the Named Selections will be transferred properly. Refer to Importing
DesignModeler Named Selections into the Meshing Application (p. 77) for details.

Handling Periodic Regions

To export matching face meshes as PERIODIC boundary zone types, you must perform the following
steps:

1. Define matching face meshes (for 3D) or edge meshes (for 2D only) as Periodic Regions or
Cyclic Regions in a Symmetry folder (p. 462) or as Match Controls or Arbitrary Match Controls.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 53
Usage in Workbench

2. Define two Named Selections for each periodic boundary condition, one Named Selection per
side, ensuring that ”periodic” is used in the name (for example, periodic1A, periodic1B...).
The same Named Selections could be used to define the periodic or cyclic region.

Note:

• Periodic regions must belong to the same Fluent mesh cell zone to ensure a successful
export.

• When match controls on faces are used, only one periodic or cyclic transformation is
supported (for example, you can export multiple match controls as long as they use
the same coordinate system and have the same angle/translation).

Special Cases
Be aware of the following special cases related to boundary zone type assignment:

• If Physics Preference (p. 96) is set to CFD and no other zone assignment has been explicitly
defined, all zones are exported as FLUID zones. See Fluent Mesh Export (p. 43) for more in-
formation.

• A boundary zone type of INTERFACE is assigned automatically to the contact source and
contact target entities that compose contact regions at the time of mesh export. For this
reason, you are not required to explicitly define INTERFACE zones to resolve contact regions.
The zone type of INTERFACE, along with the contact information, is written to the mesh file.

When reading the mesh file, Ansys Fluent creates a mesh interface for each contact region
automatically. Each interface can consist of any number of INTERFACE zones for the source
and any number of INTERFACE zones for the target.

For 3D meshes, only face zones referenced in the contact region are considered during export.
For 2D meshes, only face zones consisting of edges are considered. Each contact region can
contain one or more face zones as sources and one or more face zones as targets. If any
entity referenced in a contact region (either as source or target) is also contained in a Named
Selection, that contact region is not considered during export.

For more accurate results in cases in which one face zone in a pair has a higher element
count than the other, the zone with the lower element count should be defined as Interface
Zone 1 of the mesh interface and the zone with the higher element count should be defined
as Interface Zone 2. In the transfer of the contact region source and target regions it is
ensured that the source regions are defined as interface zone 1 and the target regions as
interface zone 2.

• A boundary zone type of INTERNAL is assigned automatically between two FLUID zones
(sharing a common boundary) at the time of mesh export. For this reason, you are not re-
quired to explicitly define an INTERNAL zone in such cases if the name of this zone does not
contain any special name derived from the part/body or Named Selection name.

• A boundary zone type of WALL is assigned automatically to a baffle, unless the baffle is part
of a Named Selection that was defined in the Ansys DesignModeler application or the

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
54 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

Meshing application, and the name of the Named Selection results in a different zone type
assignment.

• A boundary zone type of WALL is assigned automatically between a FLUID zone and a SOLID
zone at the time of mesh export. For this reason, you are not required to explicitly define a
WALL zone in such cases. When reading the mesh file, Ansys Fluent will generate an addi-
tional WALL SHADOW zone automatically.

Examples of Fluent Mesh Export: An Alternative to Using a Fluid Flow (Fluent)

Analysis System
The first example illustrates the basic workflow you can follow to create a multibody part in the
Ansys DesignModeler application, mesh the model in the Meshing application, and export the mesh
to Ansys Fluent. In the example, the bodies are renamed in the DesignModeler application, and
Named Selections are defined in the Meshing application. Based on these definitions, Ansys Fluent
zone names/types are assigned correctly and predictably (for both continuum and boundary zones)
in the exported Fluent mesh file.

First, the model is imported into the DesignModeler application. The model consists of nine solid
bodies after import. In the DesignModeler application, a multibody part is formed, the bodies are
renamed, and all bodies are assigned a material property of fluid. (See Fluent Mesh Export (p. 43)
for more information about the Fluid/Solid material property in the DesignModeler application.)
Shared Topology is also used in this example. Refer to Figure 5: Multibody Part Containing All Fluid
Bodies in the DesignModeler Application (p. 56).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 55
Usage in Workbench

Figure 5: Multibody Part Containing All Fluid Bodies in the DesignModeler Application

Next, the model is edited in the Meshing application. The patch conforming mesh method is applied
with inflation, and Named Selections are defined for boundary zones. Virtual Topology is also used
in this example to provide geometry cleanup. Refer to Figure 6: Named Selections Defined in
Meshing Application (p. 57).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
56 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

Figure 6: Named Selections Defined in Meshing Application

After meshing, the mesh is exported to Ansys Fluent format and read into Ansys Fluent. As shown
in Figure 7: Boundary Zone Names and Types Transferred to Ansys Fluent (p. 58), the boundary
zone names and types are transferred as expected.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 57
Usage in Workbench

Figure 7: Boundary Zone Names and Types Transferred to Ansys Fluent

Similarly, continuum (or cell) zone names and types (in this case, all fluid) are transferred as expected.
Refer to Figure 8: Continuum Zone Names and Types Transferred to Ansys Fluent (p. 59).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
58 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

Figure 8: Continuum Zone Names and Types Transferred to Ansys Fluent

The second example also illustrates a workflow involving the DesignModeler application, the
Meshing application, and Ansys Fluent. However, in this example the Fluid/Solid material property
of a body is changed while the model is being edited in the Meshing application.

First, the model is imported into the DesignModeler application. The model consists of 13 parts
and 17 bodies, but 12 of the bodies are not needed for this example and are suppressed. This leaves
a multibody part consisting of five bodies. The Fluid/Solid material property is set to Solid for four
of the bodies and to Fluid for the remaining body. Notice that one body is selected in the Tree
Outline and is highlighted in the Geometry window. Refer to Figure 9: Multibody Part Containing
Mix of Solid and Fluid Bodies in the DesignModeler Application (p. 60).

See Fluent Mesh Export (p. 43) for more information about the Fluid/Solid material property in
the DesignModeler application.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 59
Usage in Workbench

Figure 9: Multibody Part Containing Mix of Solid and Fluid Bodies in the DesignModeler
Application

Next, the model is opened in the Meshing application for editing. Notice that the same body has
been selected in the Tree Outline and is highlighted in the Geometry window. Also notice that the
Fluid/Solid setting for the body is set to Defined By Geometry (Solid) in the Details View. When
set to Defined By Geometry, the value is based on the Fluid/Solid material property that was as-
signed to the body in the DesignModeler application. Refer to Figure 10: Multibody Part Being Edited
in the Meshing Application (p. 61).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
60 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

Figure 10: Multibody Part Being Edited in the Meshing Application

Next, the Fluid/Solid material property of the highlighted body is changed to Fluid. For all other
bodies, the Fluid/Solid material property that was assigned in the DesignModeler application will
be retained for this example. Refer to Figure 11: Changing the Fluid/Solid Material Property of a
Body (p. 62).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 61
Usage in Workbench

Figure 11: Changing the Fluid/Solid Material Property of a Body

After meshing, the mesh is exported to Ansys Fluent format and read into Ansys Fluent. As shown
in Figure 12: Continuum Zone Names and Types Transferred to Ansys Fluent (p. 63), the continuum
(or cell) zone names and types are transferred as expected. Notice that the zone named "part-solid,"
which is highlighted in the panel on the left, has a zone type of FLUID.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
62 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

Figure 12: Continuum Zone Names and Types Transferred to Ansys Fluent

Polyflow Classic Export

When you export a mesh file to Polyflow Classic format (File> Export from the Meshing application
main menu, then Save as type Polyflow Classic Input Files), a mesh file with the extension .poly is
created. The exported mesh file is suitable for import into Ansys Polyflow Classic and supports the
following features:

• Named Selections - Named Selections that are present in the Meshing application will appear in
the exported mesh file.

• PMeshes - You can create Named Selections to specify specialized modeling conditions on edges
for 2-D or shell geometry; and edges and faces for 3-D geometry. The exported mesh file will contain
the mesh nodes and elements associated with those Named Selections in PMesh format. For more
information, refer to Generating Meshes in Ansys Meshing for Polyflow Classic.

• Element types - Those that are supported in the exported mesh file are listed in the table below.
Only linear meshes are supported for Polyflow Classic export.

Dimension Supported Element Type

3D 8–node hexahedral
4–node tetrahedral
5–node pyramid
6–node wedge
2D 3–node triangle

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 63
Usage in Workbench

Dimension Supported Element Type

4–node quadrilateral

Note:

• As an alternative to the export process described here, you can transfer a mesh from a
Mesh system into a downstream Polyflow Classic system.

• If you change your mesh settings after generating the mesh and do not perform an
Update (p. 527), the mesh that is exported is the currently existing mesh (that is, a mesh
that does not reflect your new settings). In such cases, a warning message is issued that
indicates that the mesh you are exporting to Polyflow Classic format has not been up-
dated. If you want the latest settings to affect the mesh, perform an Update and export
the mesh again.

CGNS Export
When you export a mesh file to CGNS format (File> Export from the Meshing application main menu,
then Save as type CGNS Input Files), a CGNS mesh file with the extension .cgns is created. The ex-
ported mesh file is suitable for import into a CGNS-compatible application. For more control over the
input file, refer to Meshing Options on the Options Dialog Box (p. 389).

Named Selections are supported in the CGNS file.

Element types that are supported in the exported CGNS mesh are listed in the table below. Only linear
meshes are supported for CGNS export.

Dimension Supported Element Type

3D 8–node hexahedral
4–node tetrahedral
5–node pyramid
6–node wedge
2D 3–node triangle
4–node quadrilateral

The maximum number of elements in a part multiplied by the number of nodes per element cannot
exceed 2 billion. For linear HEXA meshes, the maximum number of elements in a part (or body) should
not exceed 250 million elements. For linear TETRA meshes, the maximum number of elements in a
part (or body) should not exceed 500 million elements.

To export larger meshes, split them into several smaller parts (or Named Selections).

If you exceed the CGNS export limits, you will get the error message:
Error: CGNS section CGNS_section_name exceeds maximum mesh size limit, please split the mesh into smaller sectio

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
64 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

Ansys ICEM CFD Export

When you export from the Meshing application to Ansys ICEM CFD format, an Ansys ICEM CFD project
file with the extension .prj, along with a geometry file (*.tin) and/or mesh file (*.uns) are written. The
files that are created are the same as those that are created if you begin in Ansys ICEM CFD and use
its Import Model option to import a file from the Meshing application.

Anytime you plan to export from the Meshing application to Ansys ICEM CFD format, it is best practice
to define the desired part and body names for your model in the DesignModeler or Discovery Mod-
eling application prior to meshing the model in the Meshing application. This is recommended because
the Ansys ICEM CFD part names will be derived from the part and body names that are defined for
the model when you initially open the model in the Meshing application. The export process will ignore
any renaming or Named Selections created in the Meshing application.

There are three ways to export meshing data to ICEM CFD format:

1. Choose File> Export from the Meshing application main menu, then Save as type ICEM
CFD Input Files.

Ansys ICEM CFD part names that appear in the exported files are derived from the Ansys
Workbench geometry part and body names. In the case of a single body part, only the body
name is used.

Note:

The concept of a part in Ansys Workbench and a part in Ansys ICEM CFD is
not the same. For information about parts in Ansys Workbench, refer to Con-
formal and Non-Conformal Meshing (p. 21) in the Meshing application help
and Geometry Introduction in the Mechanical help. For information about
parts in Ansys ICEM CFD, refer to the documentation available under the Help
menu within Ansys ICEM CFD.

2. Save your Ansys Workbench files (*.mechdat or *.meshdat) and use the Ansys ICEM CFD File
> Import Model option to import the files into Ansys ICEM CFD (as long as Ansys Workbench
and Ansys ICEM CFD are installed on the same machine). Legacy formats such as *.dsdb and
*.cmdb are also supported.

Any defined Named Selections will be imported into Ansys ICEM CFD as subsets because
subsets support non-exclusive sets (overlapping Named Selections). However, each entity
can only be in a single part (exclusive sets). In cases where you want overlapping Named
Selections to be converted to Ansys ICEM CFD parts, the overlapping subsets can be cleaned
up in Ansys ICEM CFD and then converted into parts. For details about handling imported
Ansys Workbench files in Ansys ICEM CFD, refer to the documentation available under the
Help menu within Ansys ICEM CFD.

3. Use the Ansys ICEM CFD Workbench Add-In. In Ansys Workbench, right-click a Geometry or
Mesh cell and choose Transfer Data Into New > ICEM CFD. The advantage of the Add-In
connection is that it maintains the connectivity once the geometry is modified. So, unlike
the previous two methods, you can easily refresh the geometry in ICEM CFD and then update
the mesh and the solver input. For more information, see Component Systems in the [Ansys
Workbench User's Guide].

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 65
Usage in Workbench

Rules Followed By the Export Process

When exporting to Ansys ICEM CFD format, these rules are followed:

Note:

The series of examples that follows this list illustrates many of the rules listed here.

• To achieve unique Ansys ICEM CFD part names in the Ansys ICEM CFD format files, a unique
integer is suffixed to all Ansys Workbench part/body names.

• A single body part in Ansys Workbench will appear as <part_name>_<part_index> in the Ansys
ICEM CFD format files.

• A multibody part in Ansys Workbench will appear as <part_name>_<part_in-

dex>/<body_name>_<body_index> in the Ansys ICEM CFD format files. The / character denotes
hierarchy.

• Bodies that are in a multibody part in Ansys Workbench are put into an Ansys ICEM CFD as-
sembly. The structuring in the Ansys ICEM CFD format files reflects the part/body structure
present in Ansys Workbench.

• As long as they are not contained in Named Selections, faces that are shared between bodies
in the same multibody part in Ansys Workbench are put into separate Ansys ICEM CFD parts.
This type of shared face is named according to the bodies having the face in common, with
the body names separated by the # character.

• Entities that are contained in a Named Selection are put into a separate Ansys ICEM CFD part.

• For each body, an Ansys ICEM CFD Material Point is created and put into the corresponding
Ansys ICEM CFD part. The names of Material Points have the suffix _MATPOINT.

• If a mesh has been generated, it is exported along with the geometry. In such cases, these
additional rules are followed:

– As long as they are not contained in a Named Selection, node/line/surface mesh cells
are associated with the corresponding geometry part/body in Ansys ICEM CFD.

– As long as they are not contained in a Named Selection, volume mesh cells are associated
with the Material Point part.

– Mesh cells that are associated with geometry entities that are contained in a Named
Selection are associated with the Ansys ICEM CFD part that corresponds to that Named
Selection.

The first example is a model consisting of four separate single body parts in Ansys Workbench. The
single body parts are named fluid1, fluid2, fluid3, and fluid4. The table below shows the geometry in
Ansys Workbench and the corresponding part names that will appear in Ansys ICEM CFD:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
66 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

This geometry in Ansys Workbench... Results in these part names in Ansys ICEM
CFD...
A model consisting of four separate single body parts
named:
fluid1 FLUID1_1
fluid2 FLUID2_2
fluid3 FLUID3_3
fluid4 FLUID4_4

The figure below shows the model after it was meshed in the Meshing application:

Figure 13: Meshed Model (Four Separate Workbench Parts) Ready for Export to Ansys ICEM CFD

Next, the model was exported from the Meshing application to Ansys ICEM CFD format. In the figure
below, the corresponding .prj file has been opened in Ansys ICEM CFD. Notice the names that are
assigned to the various entities in the Ansys ICEM CFD format file:

• Each body/part name has been suffixed with a unique integer to distinguish it from similarly
named bodies/parts. (Note that in this example, part_name is equal to body_name.)

• Each single body part in Ansys Workbench appears as <part_name>_<part_index> in the Ansys
ICEM CFD format files. For example, the part named fluid1 in Ansys Workbench has a part
name of FLUID1_1 in Ansys ICEM CFD, which appears as FLUID1_1_1 in the Ansys ICEM CFD
format files after the part_index is added.

• For each body in the Ansys Workbench file (fluid1, fluid2, fluid3, fluid4), a Material Point has
been assigned (FLUID1_1_1_MATPOINT, FLUID2_2_1_MATPOINT, FLUID3_3_1_MATPOINT,
FLUID4_4_1_MATPOINT).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 67
Usage in Workbench

Figure 14: Opening the .prj File (Four Separate Workbench Parts) in Ansys ICEM CFD

The second example is a model consisting of one multibody part in Ansys Workbench. The multibody
part, which is named Part 4, contains four bodies named fluid1, fluid2, fluid3, and fluid4. The table
below shows the geometry in Ansys Workbench and the corresponding part names that will appear
in Ansys ICEM CFD:

This geometry in Ansys Workbench... Results in these part names in Ansys ICEM CFD
(the / character denotes hierarchy)...
A model consisting of one multibody part named
Part 4, containing four bodies named:
fluid1 PART_4_1/FLUID1_3
fluid2 PART_4_1/FLUID2_2
fluid3 PART_4_1/FLUID3_1
fluid4 PART_4_1/FLUID4_4

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
68 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

Figure 15: Meshed Model (One Multibody Workbench Part) Ready for Export to Ansys ICEM CFD

Next, the model was exported from the Meshing application to Ansys ICEM CFD format. In the figure
below, the corresponding .prj file has been opened in Ansys ICEM CFD. Notice the names that are
assigned to the various entities in the Ansys ICEM CFD format file:

• Each body/part name has been suffixed with a unique integer to distinguish it from similarly
named bodies/parts.

• Each multibody part in Ansys Workbench appears as <part_name>_<part_in-

dex>/<body_name>_<body_index> in the Ansys ICEM CFD format files. For example, the fluid1
body in Part 4 in Ansys Workbench has a part name of PART_4_1/FLUID1_3 in the Ansys ICEM
CFD format files.

• The bodies that are in the multibody part in the Ansys Workbench file (fluid1, fluid2, fluid3,
and fluid4) have been put into an Ansys ICEM CFD assembly named Part_4.

• The faces that are shared between the various pairs of bodies have been named FLUID2_2#FLU-
ID1_3, FLUID3_1#FLUID2_2, and FLUID3_1#FLUID4_4.

• For each body in the Ansys Workbench file (fluid1, fluid2, fluid3, fluid4), a Material Point has
been assigned (FLUID1_3_MATPOINT, FLUID2_2_MATPOINT, FLUID3_1_MATPOINT, FLU-
ID4_4_MATPOINT).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 69
Usage in Workbench

Figure 16: Opening the .prj File (One Multibody Workbench Part) in Ansys ICEM CFD

The third (and final) example involves a model for which four Named Selections are defined in the
DesignModeler application. The model is meshed in the Meshing application, exported to Ansys ICEM
CFD format, and opened in Ansys ICEM CFD.

The first figure shows the model after it was meshed in the Meshing application.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
70 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

Figure 17: Meshed Model (with Named Selections) Ready for Export to Ansys ICEM CFD

The next four figures show the entit(ies) in the model that are contained in each of the four Named
Selections. In the figure below, the Fluid1_Fluid2 Named Selection is highlighted.

Figure 18: Fluid1_Fluid2 Named Selection

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 71
Usage in Workbench

In the figure below, the InterfaceSolidFluid2 Named Selection is highlighted.

Figure 19: InterfaceSolidFluid2 Named Selection

In the figure below, the SharedEdge Named Selection is highlighted.

Figure 20: SharedEdge Named Selection

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
72 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

In the figure below, the SharedVertices Named Selection is highlighted.

Figure 21: SharedVertices Named Selection

Next, the model was exported from the Meshing application to Ansys ICEM CFD format. In the figure
below, the corresponding .prj file has been opened in Ansys ICEM CFD. Notice the names that are
assigned to the various entities in the Ansys ICEM CFD format file:

• Each body/part name has been suffixed with a unique integer to distinguish it from similarly
named bodies/parts.

• The bodies that are in the multibody part in the Ansys Workbench file (Solid, Fluid1, and Fluid2)
have been put into an Ansys ICEM CFD assembly named Part_1.

• The face that is shared between SOLID_1 and FLUID1_2 has been named SOLID_1#FLUID1_2.

• Because Fluid1_Fluid2, InterfaceSolidFluid2, SharedEdge, and SharedVertices are all Named

Selections in the Ansys Workbench file, each of them has been put into a separate Ansys ICEM
CFD part.

• For each body in the Ansys Workbench file (Solid, Fluid1, Fluid2, Solid), a Material Point has
been assigned (SOLID_1_MATPOINT, FLUID1_2_MATPOINT, FLUID2_3_MATPOINT, and SOL-
ID_2_1_MATPOINT).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 73
Usage in Workbench

Figure 22: Opening the .prj File (with Named Selections) in Ansys ICEM CFD

Note:

For additional information, refer to the documentation available under the Help menu
within Ansys ICEM CFD.

Exporting Faceted Geometry to Ansys Fluent Meshing

You can use the Meshing application to export faceted geometry for use in Ansys Fluent Meshing
(formerly TGrid):

1. Select File> Export from the main menu.

2. In the Save As dialog box, choose a directory and specify a file name for the file. Then choose
TGrid Faceted Geometry File from the Save as type drop-down menu and click Save.

As a result, a file with the extension .tgf is created. The exported file can be imported into Ansys
Fluent Meshing, where you can use such features as the Ansys Fluent Meshing wrapper utility.

Note:

The .tgf file has the same format as a .msh file and will be recognized as a "Mesh File"
when read into Ansys Fluent Meshing (File/Read/Mesh... menu item).

Upon export, Ansys Fluent Meshing objects and zones are created according to geometry bodies and
Named Selections. Part and body names are used in the Ansys Fluent Meshing object/zone names
to identify the parts and bodies from which they originated.

Remember the following information when exporting to Ansys Fluent Meshing:

• The quality of the exported facets is derived from the CAD system. You can use the Facet
Quality option (Tools > Options > DesignModeler > Graphics > Facet Quality) to control
the quality of the exported facets (the higher the setting, the higher the quality). However, be
aware that higher settings create large numbers of facets, which can slow down the Meshing
application.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
74 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

• The part, body, and Named Selection names that were present in the Meshing application are
exported in all lowercase characters for use in the corresponding Ansys Fluent Meshing zone
names.

• Only part and body names that were imported into the Meshing application are used in the
exported zone name. For example, names that were initially defined in the Ansys DesignModeler
application or initially appeared in the Tree Outline when a CAD file was loaded directly into
the Meshing application will be used. Any subsequent renaming of parts and bodies that occurs
in the Meshing application will not be taken into account in the exported zone names.

• Vertices (regardless of whether they are contained in a Named Selection) are ignored.

• The name of each Named Selection is filtered upon export such that only allowable characters
remain in the name of the Ansys Fluent Meshing zone. Allowable characters include all alpha-
numeric characters as well as the following special characters:

_+-:.

All other characters, including spaces, are invalid. If an invalid character is used, it is replaced
by a hyphen (-) upon export.

• When the same entity is a member of more than one Named Selection, those Named Selections
are said to be "overlapping." If you are exporting faceted geometry into the Ansys Fluent
Meshing format (or a mesh into the Ansys Polyflow Classic, CGNS, or Ansys ICEM CFD format),
and overlapping Named Selections are detected, the export will fail and you must resolve the
overlapping Named Selections before proceeding. For details, see Repairing Geometry in
Overlapping Named Selections (p. 79).

The figures below illustrate the process of exporting geometry in faceted representation from the
Meshing application to Ansys Fluent Meshing. Figure 23: Part, Body, and Named Selection Names in
the Meshing Application (p. 76) shows the model in the Meshing application. The geometry consists
of a multibody part named AeroValve, and the three bodies that AeroValve contains are named
Outletbody, Valve, and Inletbody. Notice that three Named Selections have been defined and are
highlighted in the Geometry window: Inlet, Outlet, and Valve_opening.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 75
Usage in Workbench

Figure 23: Part, Body, and Named Selection Names in the Meshing Application

Figure 24: Objects/Zone Names Transferred to Ansys Fluent Meshing (p. 76) shows the Surface Retri-
angulation panel after the exported .tgf file is imported into Ansys Fluent Meshing.

Figure 24: Objects/Zone Names Transferred to Ansys Fluent Meshing

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
76 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

Named Selections and Regions for Ansys CFX

There are a number of places in the Ansys Workbench and CFX applications where geometric faces
and regions of mesh can be grouped together and assigned names. While this provides a large amount
of flexibility, it can lead to confusion. To have more control over which groups of names are loaded
into CFX to help simplify this issue, this section describes the ‘best practices’ for region definitions
and is targeted mainly at Ansys CFD users of the DesignModeler, Meshing, and CFX applications.

Note:

Refer to Passing Named Selections to the Solver (p. 78) for related information.

Defining Names in the DesignModeler Application or the Meshing Application

When creating or importing geometry in the DesignModeler application or editing a mesh in the
Meshing application, Named Selections can be defined in terms of one or more CAD faces. If it is
desirable for these Named Selections to be available in CFX-Pre, then they must adhere to these
simple rules: Named Selections should not overlap or be defined as multi-dimensional and all Named
Selections must have unique names.

Importing DesignModeler Named Selections into the Meshing Application

If the Named Selections defined in the DesignModeler application are required in the Meshing applic-
ation, you must set the appropriate geometry import options to ensure the Named Selections will
be transferred properly:

1. From the Ansys Workbench Menu Bar, select Tools> Options.

2. In the left pane of the Options dialog box, select Geometry Import.

3. In the right pane of the Options dialog box, select the Named Selections check box and
either clear the Filtering Prefixes field (to import all names) or set it to the appropriate filter
if required.

The next time that you attach geometry containing Named Selections and launch the Meshing applic-
ation, the application will start, load the geometry, and load any Named Selections previously defined
for that geometry. The preferences you set on the Options dialog box are local settings and affect
only you.

If a mesh is generated, the Named Selections defined in the DesignModeler application will be available
when the mesh is imported into CFX-Pre.

Note:

For detailed descriptions of the geometry import options, see the CAD Integration section
in the ANSYS Workbench help.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 77
Usage in Workbench

Using Multiple Mesh Methods

Named Selections can be defined in the Meshing application, the DesignModeler application, or
supported CAD systems. When the resulting mesh is loaded into CFX-Pre, all of these Named Selections
are available. Control over which names are imported with the mesh is available in the Mesh Import
options.

It is possible to define Named Selections that conflict with some virtual topology, or do not conform
to the CFX Topology Model in some other way. Such Named Selections will not be imported into
CFX-Pre.

If a Named Selection is created that contains characters not supported in CFX-Pre names, these names
will be modified on import to remove the illegal characters. Note that non-ASCII characters are illegal
in CFX-Pre names.

Invalid Named Selections

The use of Virtual Topology within the Meshing application can invalidate Named Selection definitions.
Consider the case where a Named Selection ‘Region1’ is defined in terms of 4 CAD faces (1, 2, 3 and
4). If this geometry is then loaded into the Meshing application and Virtual Topology is used to merge
2 of these faces (3 and 4), the original Named Selection can no longer be resolved. In CFX-Pre, the
Named Selection will be modified so that it only refers to the ‘resolvable’ faces. Hence, in CFX-Pre,
the Named Selection ‘Region1’ would be defined in terms of faces 1 and 2 only.

Named Selections Involving Interior Faces

If an interior face (for example, a face that is shared between two bodies in the same part in
DesignModeler) is included in a Named Selection in the Meshing application, then the corresponding
location in CFX-Pre will be a Composite region that includes two Primitive regions: one for each side
of the interior face. Care should be taken when using the resulting Composite region for evaluating
expressions and performing calculations: for example, areas evaluated on such a Composite region
would be likely to give double the expected result (since the area is evaluated over both of the
primitive regions that form the two sides of the interior face) and mass flows will be approximately
zero (since the mass flow is evaluated on both of the primitive regions and will have the opposite
sign on each). You can optionally edit the Composite region in CFX-Pre to include only one of the
primitive regions.

Passing Named Selections to the Solver

When defining Named Selections, you can use the Send to Solver option to control whether a Named
Selection is passed to the solver. Send to Solver is available in both the Mechanical and Meshing
applications.

The default is Yes for Named Selections that you create, and No for Named Selections that are gen-
erated automatically by the Mesh worksheet (p. 448). When set to No, the selected Named Selection
is not passed to Ansys Fluent, Ansys CFX, Polyflow Classic, CGNS, Ansys ICEM CFD, Ansys Fluent
Meshing, Mechanical APDL, Ansys Autodyn, or any other downstream system that may be connected
to the Mechanical or Meshing application.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
78 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

Repairing Geometry in Overlapping Named Selections

When you export (p. 42) a mesh into the Ansys Fluent, Polyflow Classic, CGNS, or Ansys ICEM CFD
format, or as a faceted geometry (p. 74) for use in Ansys Fluent Meshing, each Named Selection must
be unique. That is, the entities (bodies, faces, or edges) in one Named Selection cannot also exist in
a second Named Selection. Any entity that is in two or more Named Selections is considered overlap-
ping. The overlapping entities need to be resolved before the mesh can be exported.

Note:

Any Named Selection whose Send to Solver (p. 78) option is set to No is skipped during
the processing described above. For this reason, an easy way to avoid overlapping Named
Selections is to set all values of Send to Solver to No.

If a mesh fails to export and an error about overlapping Named Selections occurs, you can display
the overlapping entities by right-clicking on the Mesh object in the Tree Outline and choosing
Show>Geometry in Overlapping Named Selections. You can then inspect the Named Selections
to remove the duplicate (overlapping) entities and proceed with exporting the mesh.

Alternatively, you can repair the overlapping Named Selections automatically by right-clicking on the
Named Selections folder and choosing Repair Overlapping Named Selections. This option checks
all Named Selections (for which Send to Solver is set to Yes) in the order in which they appear in
the Tree (top to bottom). When it encounters an overlapping Named Selection, it moves that Named
Selection to a new folder called Overlapping Named Selections and sets its Send to Solver option
to No. You can delete the Overlapping Named Selections folder.

The repaired Named Selections are placed at the bottom of the Tree and their names are prefixed
with Repaired. To repair a Named Selection, the Meshing application removes any duplicate (overlap-
ping) entities from the Named Selection and sets its Send to Solver option to Yes.

Note:

• In cases where you want overlapping Named Selections to be converted to Ansys ICEM
CFD parts, the overlapping subsets can be cleaned in Ansys ICEM CFD and then converted
into parts.

• If you are using Named Selections for mesh settings (such as sizing), set the Send to
Solver (p. 78) option for these Named Selections to No so that they are skipped when
the check for overlapping Named Selections is performed. Otherwise, the check may
cause the mesh state to go out-of-date.

Resolving Overlapping Contact Regions

Contact regions are said to be “overlapping” when the same entity (face or edge) is a member of
more than one contact region or when multiple contact regions share the same geometry. When you
export a mesh to Ansys Fluent or Ansys CFX, contact regions become mesh interfaces and interfaces
must be unique. That is, if there are overlapping contact regions, the overlaps need to be resolved
into exclusive groups for the export to be successful.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 79
Usage in Workbench

Overlapping entities can be from a variety of sources. In the examples shown in the following series
of images, the first contact region has one face as a contact and one as a target, this is a good con-
nection for Ansys Fluent or Ansys CFX. The other three contact regions have two faces as targets and
only one face as a contact, the extra target face in each of these contact regions overlaps. Hence,
results in overlapping contact regions that may need to be addressed for the export to succeed. In
this particular case, the default tolerance that was used to detect contacts was too large. This problem
could be fixed by deleting all the contacts and using a smaller Face Overlap Tolerance to recreate
them.

Figure 25: First Contact Region: One Contact and One Target

Figure 26: Second Contact Region: One Contact, Two Targets

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
80 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Exporting Meshes or Faceted Geometry

Figure 27: Third Contact Region: One Contact, Two Targets

Figure 28: Fourth Contact Region: One Contact, Two Targets

Other cases of overlap may have different causes and solutions. To identify overlapping contact regions
so that you can resolve them and export the mesh successfully, follow these steps:

1. Right-click the Connections, Connection Group, or Contacts folder in the Tree and choose Check
Overlapping Contact Regions.

If any overlapping contact regions are found, an informational message appears in the Messages
window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 81
Usage in Workbench

2. Right-click the message and select Go To Object.

The overlapping contact regions that are responsible for the message are highlighted in the Tree.

3. With all of the overlapping contact regions still highlighted in the Tree, right-click one of them
and select Group.

All of the overlapping contact regions are grouped into a new folder to isolate them for diagnosis.

To resolve the overlapping contact regions, select each contact region that was placed into the new
folder one at a time and examine its properties. Verify that all associated properties are defined ap-
propriately. The following approaches are recommended:

• Often tolerances are set too large, as described in the example shown above. Try deleting all
the contacts and using smaller tolerance values to recreate them. It may help to set Tolerance
Type to Value rather than Slider, so that you can enter an exact Tolerance Value. Make sure
the Tolerance Value and Face Overlap Tolerance are set to reasonable values before regener-
ating the contacts.

• Depending on the case, setting Group By to Faces may help to pinpoint problematic faces. In
other situations, setting Group By to Bodies and promoting the overlapping contact regions
to Named Selections may be a better approach.

• If the tolerances are different for different bodies, run contact on selected bodies with different
tolerances.

• If the faceting of the geometry is too coarse, increase the facet tolerance in DesignModeler.

• If some of the overlapping contact regions are not needed in Ansys Fluent or Ansys CFX, you
can suppress them so they will not affect the success of the export.

• If the case involves cyclic constraints, use imprinting in DesignModeler or Discovery Modeling.
Imprinting results in exact pairs and ensures faces have common boundaries between parts.
Refer to Figure 29: Geometry with Cyclic Redundancies (p. 83), which illustrates a complex
case of cyclic redundancy. Here the overlap is A->B->C->A, where A is the face contact of the
top body, B is the cylindrical face of the middle body, and C is the face in contact of the bottom
body.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
82 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Extended Ansys ICEM CFD Meshing

Figure 29: Geometry with Cyclic Redundancies

After you have resolved all of the overlapping contact regions, you can retry the export.

Note:

This feature is applicable to part-based meshing only.

Extended Ansys ICEM CFD Meshing

The features described here extend Meshing application functionality through integration of the
Meshing application with Ansys ICEM CFD, and enable you to use Ansys Workbench to drive automation
of Ansys ICEM CFD.

With this approach you can leverage advantages of Ansys Workbench such as:

• Its capabilities for running design optimization and what-if scenarios using parameters

• The strength of its core product solvers

The following topics are discussed in this section:

Writing Ansys ICEM CFD Files
Rules for Interactive Editing
Limitations of Ansys ICEM CFD Interactive

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 83
Usage in Workbench

Writing Ansys ICEM CFD Files

The Write ICEM CFD Files control determines whether Ansys ICEM CFD files are written, and includes
options for running Ansys ICEM CFD interactively or in batch mode from an Ansys ICEM CFD Replay
file.

Note:

The Write ICEM CFD Files control is available when you use any Ansys ICEM CFD mesh
method that is available in the Meshing application (Patch Independent Tetra (p. 210),
MultiZone (p. 242), or MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284)). However, the Interactive and Batch
options are available only if Ansys ICEM CFD is installed. A warning is issued if you try to
use one of these options and Ansys ICEM CFD cannot be found.

Note:

Another method for writing meshing data to ICEM CFD files is to select the Mesh cell in
Workbench and select Transfer Data to New>ICEM CFD. While the Write ICEM CFD
control writes the geometry of a part, using the Ansys ICEM CFD Add-in component links
to the entire Geometry assembly. For more information, see Component Systems in the
Ansys Workbench User's Guide.

Options for Write ICEM CFD Files include:

No
No files are written. This is the default.

Yes
Writes Ansys ICEM CFD files. Useful when you are working in Ansys Workbench but you want to export
your project files for further mesh editing in Ansys ICEM CFD. If this control is set to Yes, your Ansys
ICEM CFD project (.prj), geometry (.tin), unstructured domain (.uns), and blocking (.blk) files will be
saved during mesh generation.

• If your Ansys Workbench project file has been saved, your Ansys ICEM CFD files will be written to the
Ansys Workbench project directory. Ansys Workbench creates a project folder as the top level folder
for each project, at the same level as the project file. The project folder will be named <file-
name>_files, where <filename> is a name you provide. The project file will be named <fi-
lename>.wbpj. Under the project folder is a design point subdirectory for each design point in
the project. The active design point is always design point 0 (dp0) and corresponds to the design
point labeled Current in the Ansys Workbench GUI. Under each design point folder are system
folders for each system type in the project ( Mechanical, Fluent, etc.). Each system folder contains
solver-specific files and folders, such as input files, model directories, engineering data, resources,
etc. Following this structure, the Ansys ICEM CFD files will be written to <file-
name>_files\dp0\global\MECH\SYS.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
84 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Extended Ansys ICEM CFD Meshing

• If your Ansys Workbench project file has not been saved, your Ansys ICEM CFD files will be written to
the temporary Ansys Workbench folder, as follows: %TEMP%\WB_<computer>\unsaved_pro-
ject_files\dp0\global\MECH\SYS.

Note:

• Only appropriate files are written, based on the selected mesh method.

• Refer to the Ansys Workbench help for more information about project file management
in Ansys Workbench.

Interactive
Applicable only when Ansys ICEM CFD is installed.

When the Interactive option is set and you select Generate Mesh, the Meshing application launches
Ansys ICEM CFD in interactive mode. When you specify the Interactive option, you must also select
an option for ICEM CFD Behavior (p. 86) to determine whether the geometry and/or mesh is trans-
ferred to Ansys ICEM CFD.

Typically, you run in interactive mode to set up an Ansys ICEM CFD Replay script file (*.rpl) that can
be run later in either batch or interactive mode. You can begin by loading a generic Replay file. It is
important to use this default Replay file because the batch process requires the pre and post steps
that are defined within it. To load the default Replay file:

1. From within Ansys ICEM CFD, select File > Replay Scripts > Replay Control and the Replay
Control window appears.

2. Click Load on the Replay Control window and the Open Script File window appears.

3. Click Open on the Open Script File window to load the default Replay file.

You can incorporate your custom commands into the Replay file by using the Replay Control feature
or a text editor. The Replay file will be associated with your Ansys ICEM CFD project when you save
the project and exit Ansys ICEM CFD.

After the mesh is returned to the Meshing application and the Ansys Workbench project is saved, the
Replay file will be written to the Ansys Workbench project directory. Later you can set Write ICEM
CFD Files to Batch and the mesh will be updated automatically in batch. You can change parameters
on the Ansys Workbench project page and Update the mesh in batch from either the project page
or from within the Meshing application.

Refer to Rules for Interactive Editing (p. 86) and Limitations of Ansys ICEM CFD Interactive (p. 87) for
related information.

For more information about Replay Control, refer to the documentation available under the Help
menu within Ansys ICEM CFD.

Batch
Applicable only when Ansys ICEM CFD is installed.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 85
Usage in Workbench

Runs Ansys ICEM CFD in batch mode from an existing Replay file. If you specify the Batch option,
you must also select an option for ICEM CFD Behavior (p. 86) to determine whether the geometry
and/or mesh is transferred to Ansys ICEM CFD.

ICEM CFD Behavior

Determines Ansys ICEM CFD behavior when running Ansys ICEM CFD in Interactive or Batch mode.

For Patch Independent Tetra, the available options under Advanced are:

• Generate Mesh - After the meshing operation completes, transfers both the geometry and
mesh to Ansys ICEM CFD for editing.

• Skip Meshing - Bypasses the meshing operation and transfers only the geometry to Ansys
ICEM CFD for meshing and editing.

For MultiZone and MultiZone 2D, the available options under Advanced are:

• Generate Blocking and Mesh - After the meshing operation completes, transfers the geometry,
blocking, and mesh to Ansys ICEM CFD for editing.

• Generate Blocking - Bypasses the meshing operation and transfers only the geometry and
blocking to Ansys ICEM CFD for meshing and editing.

• Update pre-existing Blocking - Bypasses the blocking operation, updates pre-existing

blocking and meshes, and transfers the geometry and mesh to ANSYS ICEM CFD for meshing
and editing. When you select Update pre-existing Blocking, the Update Sizes is set to Yes
by default and updates the bunching with the given Workbench parameters while meshing.
When the Update Sizes is set to No, protects the bunching in ICEM CFD files.

• Named Selection Treatment: Provides named selection transfer for Interactive and Batch. The
available options are Parts and Subsets.

Rules for Interactive Editing

The final mesh must pass Ansys Workbench shape and topology checks in order for the mesh to be
returned to Ansys Workbench. This requirement imposes the following rules and guidelines for editing
in Ansys ICEM CFD:

• Do not modify the geometry.

• Pay attention to face and volume part naming. Use the same naming conventions and do not
adjust the part naming.

• Pay attention to mesh quality. If the mesh quality becomes degraded, the mesh will not be
returned to Ansys Workbench unless Check Mesh Quality (p. 121) is set to No.

• The final mesh must pass Ansys Workbench shape and topology checks in order for the mesh
to be returned to Ansys Workbench without a warning or error message.

• Follow file naming conventions for proper archiving and batch interaction. Retain the default
names. Changing the names will break the association between the Replay file and the Ansys
Workbench project.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
86 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Ansys Workbench and Mechanical APDL Application Meshing Differences

Limitations of Ansys ICEM CFD Interactive

Be aware of the following limitations when using Ansys ICEM CFD Interactive:

• Ansys ICEM CFD Interactive is designed to work at the part level. If you have assigned multiple
Ansys ICEM CFD mesh methods (Patch Independent Tetra (p. 210), MultiZone (p. 242), or Mul-
tiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284)) to different bodies of a multibody part, the Ansys ICEM CFD Interactive
options specified for the Ansys ICEM CFD method control that appears lowest in the Tree will
be honored. That is, Ansys ICEM CFD Interactive options will affect all bodies being meshed
with Ansys ICEM CFD methods regardless of whether a particular option is turned on for a
particular body.

Working with Meshing Application Parameters

The term parameters in the Meshing application includes mesh input parameters (such as element size,
height of the initial inflation layer, and growth rate) as well as mesh output parameters (number of
elements, number of nodes, and mesh metric values).

A check box appears to the left of each field in the Details View that can be treated as a parameter.
Clicking the check box causes a P to appear in the box, which indicates that the field has been exposed
as a parameter for use in the Parameter Workspace. Fields that cannot be parameterized do not contain
a check box and are left-aligned to save space. The Parameter Workspace collects all specified parameters
and lists them in the Parameter Workspace grids for later use and/or modification.

Note:

• If an object has a parameterized field, and that object definition is changed in a way that
makes that parameterization non-meaningful, the non-meaningful parameterization will
not be removed by the program. For example, if there is a parameterized Number of Di-
visions sizing control defined in the Meshing application and you switch to the Element
Size sizing control and parameterize it, the Number of Divisions parameterization will
not be removed and will continue to appear in the Parameter Workspace grids. The presence
of a non-meaningful parameter in the grids has no harmful effect, but you can delete the
parameter manually if you do not want it to appear. To do so, return to the Meshing ap-
plication and clear the corresponding check box in the Details View.

• If a mesh control is suppressed, the parameter associated with the control will be deleted.

• If you are using a parameterized field in a Design Point study, you must specify a real value
for the field rather than using its default value.

• Refer to the Ansys Workbench help for detailed information about the Parameter Workspace
and Design Points.

Ansys Workbench and Mechanical APDL Application Meshing Differences

While the meshing algorithms used by Ansys Workbench Mechanical originated from the meshing
capabilities present in the Mechanical APDL (MAPDL) application, over time these algorithms have di-
verged. The divergence was due to the different focus of early versions of the Workbench Mechanical

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 87
Usage in Workbench

application (then known as DesignSpace). As Workbench Mechanical and its meshing and solving cap-
abilities evolved, new technology was added and existing technology was enhanced, making Workbench
Mechanical a full, general-purpose, finite element code that supports all levels of multiphysics disciplines.

To accommodate ease of use in Workbench Mechanical, as well as the need for different default meshes
based on simulation type, physics preferences (p. 96) are available. These physics preferences automate
default mesh settings related to element size, element quality, and so on. The Mechanical physics
preference has two choices for Error Limits (p. 127), or shape check values:

• Standard Mechanical, which uses quality error limits that are less strict than those used by
MAPDL.

• Aggressive Mechanical, which uses quality error limits that are similar to those used by MAPDL.

In addition to letting you set a value for Error Limits, Workbench Mechanical lets you set values for
Target Quality and Check Mesh Quality (p. 121). The mesher uses the Target Quality as a goal for
mesh quality. You can think of the Target Quality as a warning limit (in MAPDL terminology), but you
can set the Target Quality however you deem appropriate. Check Mesh Quality is very similar to
MAPDL's Level of shape checking. Depending on the setting of Check Mesh Quality, you can check
for errors, errors and warnings, or neither (turn off checks altogether).

One of the major differences between Standard Mechanical and Aggressive Mechanical error limits
is in the computation of the Jacobian ratio. The Jacobian Ratio (p. 142) is a metric that compares a given
element's shape to that of an ideal element. Jacobian ratio can be computed at the corner nodes (Ag-
gressive Mechanical) or at Gauss points (Standard Mechanical). Depending on the type of simulation,
the calculation at the Gauss points may be sufficient and therefore Standard Mechanical makes
meshing more robust. If you are interested in higher accuracy or your problem is nonlinear, you can
set Error Limits to Aggressive Mechanical or set Physics Preference to Nonlinear Mechanical. In
both cases, the Jacobian ratio that is used is computed at the corner nodes (as it is in MAPDL).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
88 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Meshing: Mesh Controls Overview
When in the Mechanical application, your part or multibody part is automatically meshed at solve time.
The default element size is determined by the software (for details, see default sizing (p. 104)).

You can also create the mesh before solving. To do this, select Mesh from the Tree Outline and right-
click your mouse. Mesh controls are available to assist you in fine tuning the mesh to your analysis.
These controls are described in the sections that follow.

Mesh control overview topics include:

Global and Local Mesh Controls
Understanding the Influence of the Sizing Options

Global and Local Mesh Controls

If you want more control over the mesh, you can get it by using mesh control tools. Both global mesh
controls (p. 93) and local mesh controls (p. 201) are available. Global mesh controls are located in the
Details View when the Mesh object is selected in the Tree Outline. To access the local mesh control
tools, highlight the Mesh object, then either click the right mouse button and choose Insert> {<choose
a mesh control tool>}, or choose a mesh control from the Mesh Control context toolbar.

In general, in cases where a numeric value can be specified for an option but a value of 0 would not
make sense within the context of the option, specifying 0 resets the option to its default. For example,
the Curvature Normal Angle (p. 114) option accepts a value from 0 to 180, but since 0 does not make
sense within its context, specifying 0 resets Curvature Normal Angle to its default.

Understanding the Influence of the Sizing Options

An important aspect of meshing in Workbench is the size function. Depending on the physics preference,
the sizing options allow you to control whether you want a uniform mesh or whether the mesh should
be influenced by the model's curvature and/or proximity of faces next to each other (thickness of
model).

The following chart recommends how to get the appropriate mesh:

Uniform mesh Mesh with Mesh with Mesh with 2D

Curvature Proximity Curvature and
Refinement Refinement Proximity
Refinement
Physics Prefer- Set Capture Set Capture Set Capture Not recommended
ence = Nonlin- Curvature and Cap- Curvature to Yes Proximity to Yes
ear Mechanical ture Proximity to No

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 89
Mesh Controls Overview

If using any Set Use Adaptive Siz- Set Capture Set Capture Set both Capture
other Physics ing, Capture Curvature to Yes Proximity to Yes Curvature and Cap-
Preference Curvature, and Cap- ture Proximity to
ture Proximity to No Yes

Note:

When Physics Preference is Hydrodynamics, the only properties you can set are Element
Size (p. 102) and Defeature Size (p. 111).

Adaptive Sizing
Adaptive Sizing can be thought of as a 2D curvature and proximity-based refinement approach which
refines edges based on curvature and/or proximity but does not propagate the refined mesh along
the face. It works with Resolution, Span Angle Center and Transition, and has historically been
used as a way to reduce the total element count while capturing every edge of the model. This ap-
proach can significantly stretch the mesh leading to poor mesh quality, so it is generally recommended
to use one of the other sizing options and use defeaturing to reduce the total element count when
needed.

When Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes, the mesher uses the value of the element size property to
determine a starting point for the mesh size. The value of the element size property can be set by
the user or automatically computed using Defaults (p. 104). When meshing begins, edges are meshed
with this size initially, and then they are refined for curvature and 2D proximity. Next, mesh based
defeaturing and pinch control execution occurs. The final edge mesh is then passed into a least-
squares fit size function, which guides face and volume meshing.

Uniform, Curvature, Proximity, or Proximity and Curvature Sizing

A size function is computed when meshing begins. The mesher examines the global and local sizes
and uses the smallest, most local size to seed the mesh. It uses the growth rate to transition the mesh
from a small size to a larger size.

The following factors contribute to the final mesh distribution obtained by the mesher:

• The value of the Element Size (p. 102) option

• The value of the Curvature Min Size (p. 113)/Proximity Min Size (p. 115) option

• The value of the Max Size (p. 110) option

• The value of the Growth Rate (p. 110) option

• Features of the geometry, which can be any of the following:

– Edge and face curvature (p. 107), based on the normal angle variation between adjacent
mesh elements in 2D (edge) or 3D (face)

– Edge and face proximity (p. 107), based on the number of element layers created between
a gap between edges in 2D or between faces in 3D

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
90 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Understanding the Influence of the Sizing Options

• Local element sizing (p. 296) on selected edges, faces, or bodies

• Sphere of influence (p. 304) scoped to a selected body, face, edge, or vertex

• Body of influence (p. 305) scoped to a selected body

• Influence of an existing mesh or a swept (p. 399) body

Note:

• The mesher uses the sizes defined by the user or computes its own Defaults (p. 104).

• The size function works within parts, but not across parts.

• When Capture Curvature and/or Capture Proximity are set to Yes, the default pinch
tolerance (p. 192) is 90% of the value of Curvature Min Size/Proximity Min Size
(whichever is smaller). This differs from the tolerance used by the default mesh based
defeaturing. Refer to Mesh Defeaturing (p. 110) for details.

• The size function computes a background grid prior to meshing and re-uses that back-
ground grid during meshing. This background grid could differ for solid parts and sheet
parts.

• The size function may over-refine bodies being meshed with sweep or MultiZone as side
faces can influence source faces and source faces can influence side faces to try to make
the mesh more uniform. Use hard edge sizing controls or set the number of divisions
along the sweep path to override such behavior.

• In some situations, the mesh will exceed the applied Element Size setting to create a
better quality mesh. To set a strict upper limit for each element edge, set the Element
Size to a size slightly smaller than the desired size.

Overriding Sizing Minimum and Maximum Sizes

One of the most important values related to sizing is minimum size (Curvature Min Size (p. 113) and
Proximity Min Size (p. 115) controls). Setting a value for minimum size that is too small may lead to
an unnecessarily fine mesh and longer meshing time or robustness issues due to the mesh tolerances
being smaller than the geometry tolerances (mesh falling into holes/gaps in the model). On the other
hand, setting a value that is too large may mean that important features are not captured by the
mesh.

The following notes may help:

• Use local sizing controls to override global controls to either increase or decrease the mesh size as
necessary.

• Use the Mechanical Min Size Factor and/or CFD Min Size Factor to change the relationship
between Element Size and the default min size. See Sizing (p. 392) for details.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 91
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
92 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Meshing: Global Mesh Controls
Global mesh controls are located in the Details View when the Mesh object is selected on the Tree
Outline.

Global settings are categorized into the following groups and are available through drop-down menus:
Display Group
Defaults Group
Sizing Group
Quality Group
Inflation Group
Advanced Group
Automatic Methods
Statistics Group
Model Assembly Group

Display Group
Display group allows you to display mesh on parts or bodies of the model based on the available styles.
Display group have the following option:
Display Style

Display Style
Display Style allows you to change the display style of the mesh in the Geometry window based on
Display Style options. The default value is Use Geometry Setting. Display Style has the following
options:

• Use Geometry Setting: The display of the mesh in the Geometry window is based on the
setting of the Display Style property of the Geometry.

• Shell Thickness (visible for surface/shell bodies only)

• Element Quality (p. 139)

• Aspect Ratio, based on either

Aspect Ratio Calculation for Triangles (p. 140)

Aspect Ratio Calculation for Quadrilaterals (p. 141)

• Jacobian Ratio (p. 142) (MAPDL, Corner Nodes, or Gauss Points)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 93
Global Mesh Controls

• Warping Factor (p. 147)

• Parallel Deviation (p. 149)

• Maximum Corner Angle (p. 150)

• Skewness (p. 151)

• Orthogonal Quality (p. 153)

• Characteristic Length (Autodyn) (p. 155)

• Minimum Tri Angle (p. 156)

• Maximum Tri Angle (p. 156)

• Minimum Quad Angle (p. 157)

• Maximum Quad Angle (p. 157)

• Warping Angle (p. 157)

• Tet Collapse (p. 158)

• Aspect Ratio (Height) (p. 159)

• Minimum Element Edge Length (p. 159)

• Maximum Element Edge Length (p. 160)

• Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA) (p. 160)

• Deviation from Geometry: Display the deviation of the mesh nodes from the geometry.

Note:

The use of Display Style to color mesh according to quality and the use of Mesh Met-
rics (p. 133) to view quality statistics are mutually exclusive. For example, when you are
viewing Mesh Metrics, you cannot also view the mesh quality by color.

When Check Mesh Quality is No, Yes Errors and Warnings and Yes, Errors the Show Contours in
Mesh Quality Worksheet set the Display Style to selected quality criterion.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
94 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Display Group

When Check Mesh Quality is Mesh Quality Worksheet the Show Contours in Mesh Quality
Worksheet set the Display Style to selected quality criterion and displays the warning (yellow) and
failed (red) elements for the selected quality criterion.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 95
Global Mesh Controls

Defaults Group
The Defaults group allows you to control these options:
Physics Preference
Solver Preference
Export Format
Export Unit
Export Preview Surface Mesh
Element Order
Element Size

Physics Preference
Physics Preference option allows you to establish how Workbench performs meshing based on the
physics of the analysis type that you specify. The available options are:

• Mechanical

• Nonlinear Mechanical

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
96 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Defaults Group

• Electromagnetics

• CFD

• Explicit

• Hydrodynamics

The value of the Physics Preference option sets the default for various meshing controls, as detailed
in the following table.

Note:

• The solver options for the Mechanical physics preference appear within the Mechanical
application only, and only under certain circumstances. See Solver Preference (p. 99)
for more information.

• When Physics Preference is Hydrodynamics, the only properties you can set are Element
Size (p. 102) and Defeature Size (p. 111). The meshing controls that appear in the table
below are not applicable to the Hydrodynamics physics preference. Therefore, Hydro-
dynamics is not included in the table. Refer to Overview of the Meshing Process for
Hydrodynamics Analysis (p. 30) for related information.

• When the Physics Preference is Explicit, the quality based meshing considers Aspect
Ratio (Height) for Patch Conforming Tetrahedron Method. Also, in the Mesh Details
view under Advanced options, the Triangle Surface Mesher is set to Advancing Front
by default. This provides more uniform triangle meshing. If the Multizone Mesh Method
is selected, the Use Split Angle in Advanced option is enabled to give automatically
more orthogonal meshing for many cases.

• Refer to the Meshing Overview (p. 19) section for further details about physics based
meshing.

Physics Preference
Mechanical Nonlinear CFD
Meshing Mechanical Ansys Mechanical CFX-Solver (p.
Fluent
99) Polyflow
Control APDL Rigid Electromagnetics Classic Explicit
Solver (p. 99)
Solver (p. 99)
Dynamics Solver (p. 99)
Solver (p. 99)
Program Linear Program
Element Quad-
Con- (Read- Con- N/A N/A N/A Linear
Order (p. 101) ratic
trolled only) trolled
Straight
Sided No N/A No Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A
Elements (p. 180)
As- As- As- 0.5 * As- As- As- 0.5 *
Element sembly sembly sembly As- sembly sembly sembly As-
Size (p. 102) Diagonal Diagon- Diagonal sembly Diagon- Diagon- Diagon- sembly
* Bound- al * * Bound- Diagon- al * al * al * Diagon-

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 97
Global Mesh Controls

Physics Preference
Mechanical Nonlinear CFD
Meshing Mechanical Ansys Mechanical CFX-Solver (p.
Fluent
99) Polyflow
Control APDL Rigid Electromagnetics Classic Explicit
Solver (p. 99)
Solver (p. 99)
Dynamics Solver (p. 99)
Solver (p. 99)
al * Bound- al *
Bound- Bound- Bound-
ing Box ing Box Bound- ing Bound-
ing Box ing Box ing Box
Factor Factor ing Box Box ing Box
Factor Factor Factor
Factor Factor Factor
Capture
Capture Cap-
Curvature
Curvature ture
set to
set to No Curvature
Yes for
for sheet Use Ad- Cap- Cap- set to
shell Capture
bodies; Capture aptive ture ture Yes for
Sizing models; Curvature
otherwise Curvature Sizing Curvature Curvature solid
Options (p. 105) otherwise set to
Use Ad- set to Yes set to set to set to bodies
Use Ad- Yes
aptive Yes Yes Yes and No
aptive
Sizing for
Sizing
set to sheet
set to
Yes bodies
Yes
Fast
Fast / Fast /
/1.85
1.85 for 1.85 for
for solid
Transition (p.solid
112) solid
bodies Slow/ Slow / Slow / Slow /
/ Growth bodies bodies N/A/ 1.5
and 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.5
Rate (p. 110) and 1.2 and 1.2
for
for sheet for sheet
sheet
bodies bodies
bodies
Span
Angle
Center (p. 112) Coarse
Coarse / Coarse / Fine / Fine / Fine / Coarse
/ N/A / 60° /
70.395° 70.395° 18° 18° 18° / 72°
Curvature 70.395°
Normal
Angle (p. 114)
Aggress- Aggress- Nonlin-
Electro-
Error ive ive ear
magnet- CFD CFD CFD Explicit
Limits (p. 127)Mechan- Mechan- Mechanic-
ics
ical ical al
Medi- Medi- Medi-
Smoothing (p.
Medium
133) Medium N/A Medium High
um um um
Inflation
Pre Pre Pre Pre Pre Pre Pre Pre
Algorithm (p. 170)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
98 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Defaults Group

Physics Preference
Mechanical Nonlinear CFD
Meshing Mechanical Ansys Mechanical CFX-Solver (p.
Fluent
99) Polyflow
Control APDL Rigid Electromagnetics Classic Explicit
Solver (p. 99)
Solver (p. 99)
Dynamics Solver (p. 99)
Solver (p. 99)
Layer
Stair Stair Stair Stair Stair
Collision Stair Stair Com-
Step- Step- Step- Step- Step-
Avoidance (p.Stepping
174) Stepping pres-
ping ping ping ping ping
sion
Transition
0.272 0.272 0.272 0.272 0.77 0.272 0.272 0.272
Ratio (p. 168)
Dimen- Dimen- Dimen-
Rigid Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen-
sionally sion- sionally Full
Body sionally sionally sionally sionally
Re- ally Re- Re- Mesh
Behavior (p. 182)
Reduced Reduced Reduced Reduced
duced duced duced
Mesh Element Element Skew- Jacobi- Element Skew- Skew- Ele-
Quality Quality Quality ness, Jac- an Ra- Quality ness ness ment
Workflow obian Ra- tio Qual-
Targets tio (Corner ity, As-
(Corner Nodes) pect
Nodes) Ratio
(Height),
Charac-
teristic
Length
(LS-
Dyna)
Defeature 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.1*Ele-
Size (p. 111) ment
Size

Solver Preference
Solver Preference allows you to select the solver preference for your Physics Preference. Solver
Preference is available only when Physics Preference is CFD. The available options are Fluent, CFX,
and Polyflow. Based on your selection, the Meshing application sets certain defaults that result in a
mesh that is more favorable to the CFX, Fluent, or Polyflow solver, respectively. Inflation controls
with defaults that are affected by the Solver Preference setting include:

• Aspect Ratio (Base/Height) (p. 170)

• Collision Avoidance (p. 174)

• Transition Ratio (p. 168)

Within the Mechanical application only, choosing Mechanical as your Physics Preference also causes
a Solver Preference option to appear, provided the analysis system is a Transient Structural or Rigid
Dynamics system during the initial geometry attach. In such cases, you can set Solver Preference to

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 99
Global Mesh Controls

either Mechanical APDL or Ansys Rigid Dynamics. Solver Preference setting affects controls with
defaults, including Element Order (p. 101).

Other differences (such as what happens when you insert a Method control) are dependent on the
behavior of the geometry bodies and the Rigid Body Behavior setting. See Rigid Body Meshing (p. 463)
for more information.

Refer to Physics Preference (p. 96) for more information about defaults that are set based on Physics
Preference and Solver Preference.

Export Format
Export Format defines the format for the mesh when exported to Ansys Fluent. Export Format is
available only when Physics Preference is CFD and the Solver Preference is Fluent. The available
options are:

• Standard: Export the mesh as face based fluent mesh. The default value is Standard.

• Large Model Support: Export the mesh as a cell based fluent mesh.

Note:

The Large Model Support option is not available for the following types of meshes:

• 2D

For more information about exporting meshes to Ansys Fluent, see Fluent Mesh Export (p. 43).

Export Unit
Export Unit defines the unit of measurement for the mesh when exported to Ansys Polyflow. Export
Unit is available only when Physics Preference is CFD and the Solver Preference is Polyflow. The
default value is Use Project Unit, which means the mesh is not scaled. The available options are
Meters, Centimetres, Millimetres, Micrometers, Inches, or Feet. Mesh scales according to your se-
lected export unit.

Export Preview Surface Mesh

Export Preview Surface Mesh option controls the export of the preview surface mesh elements.
Export Preview Surface Mesh is available only when Physics Preference is CFD, the Solver Preference
is Fluent.

You can use Export Preview Surface Mesh when the bodies are only partially meshed. That is, not
all volumes have been filled with elements and only surface meshes are previewed. In such cases,
you can choose to export the previewed surface meshes and continue meshing in Fluent Meshing.
The available options are:

• No: Exports only volume mesh element to the Fluent mesh file. The default value is No.

• Yes: Exports both volume mesh and preview surface mesh to the Fluent mesh file.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
100 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Defaults Group

Element Order
The global Element Order option allows you to control whether meshes are to be created with
midside nodes (quadratic elements) or without midside nodes (linear elements). Reducing the number
of midside nodes reduces the number of degrees of freedom.

Element Order has the following options:

• Program Controlled

• Linear

• Quadratic

Refer Physics Preference for default values.

Examples are presented below for linear and quadratic elements. The heavy vertical line in each
graphic represents the body boundary.

• Program Controlled: Automatically sets the element order for the geometry body based on the
Physics Preference. For sheet bodies and beam models, Program Controlled is identical to the
Linear option described below. For solid bodies and 2-D models, Program Controlled is identical
to the Quadratic option.

The selected Physics Preference option sets the default for Program Controlled, as detailed in
the following table:

Physics Mechanical Nonlinear Mech- Electromagnet- CFD Explicit

Preference anical ics
Program Linear for shell Linear for shell Linear for shell N/A Linear for shell
Controlled Bodies and Bodies and Bodies and Bodies and
Quadratic for Quadratic for Quadratic for Quadratic for
Solid Bodies Solid Bodies Solid Bodies Solid Bodies

• Linear: Removes the midside nodes on all elements. Example shown below are for a solid body:

• Quadratic: Retains midside nodes on elements created in the part or body. All elements have
midside nodes.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 101
Global Mesh Controls

If Element Order is Quadratic, and if Straight Sided Elements is set to No, the mesher places
the midside nodes on the geometry so that the mesh elements properly capture the shape of the
geometry. However, if the location of a midside node might affect the mesh quality, the midside
node may be relaxed to improve the element shape. Therefore, some midside nodes might not
follow the shape of the geometry precisely.

For information on how the Straight Sided Elements control affects midside nodes, see Straight
Sided Elements (p. 180).

Note:

• When Physics Preference is CFD, Element Order is not available.

• Element Order supports both linear and quadratic elements for 2D axisymmetric models.
This includes support for 2D linear and quadratic inflation layers on axisymmetric parts.
You must set Element Order to Linear to obtain linear elements in such cases.

• Element Order supports both linear and quadratic elements for 2D shell and line
models. This includes support for 2D linear and quadratic inflation layers on shell models.

• When setting the Method control (p. 202) to a scoped body, you can change the setting
of the Element Order option to control whether meshes are to be created on the scoped
body with midside nodes or without midside nodes. You do this by using the Element
Order setting under Definition in the Method Control Details View. This setting overrides
the setting of the global Element Order option. For Information refer to Method Controls
and Element Order Settings (p. 202).

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) uses global Element Order for meshing.

Element Size
Element Size allows you to specify the maximum surface element size used for the entire model.
This size will be used for all edge, face, and body meshing. You can parametrize Element Size. When
you set Adaptive Sizing to Yes, mesher do not follow the Element Size.

• For solids, the Element Size is calculated as Bounding Box Diagonal (p. 119) * Bounding Box
Factor (p. 392).

• For sheets or solids/sheets, the Element Size is calculated as sqrt(Average Surface Area (p. 120)) *
Surface Area Factor (p. 392).

Element Size is calculated based on the Physics Preference you select. The Element Size calculation
for each physics preference is as follows:

• When Physics Preference is Mechanical, Nonlinear Mechanical, CFD or Hydrodynamics,

Element Size = Assembly Diagonal * Bounding Box Factor

• When Physics Preference is Explicit or Electromagnetics,

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
102 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sizing Group

Element Size = 0.5* Assembly Diagonal * Bounding Box Factor

Note:

When you set Physics Preference as Explicit, the default Max Size is equal to Element
Size. That is, the volume max size is automatically set equal to the surface max size to
create a uniform mesh.

Sizing Group
Mesh Sizing Defaults (p. 104) describes how default sizes are computed and how the values respond
when you modify other sizing values.

The Sizing group contents depend on the Physics Preference being used.

• When the Physics Preference is Mechanical, Electromagnetics, or Explicit, Use Adaptive Sizing
is set to Yes by default.

• When the Physics Preference is Nonlinear Mechanical, or CFD, Capture Curvature is set to Yes
by default.

• When the Physics Preference is Hydrodynamics, the only properties you can set are Element
Size (p. 102) and Defeature Size (p. 111).

With Use Adaptive Sizing set to Yes, it includes:

• Resolution (p. 109)

• Mesh Defeaturing (p. 110) (Defeature size)

• Transition (p. 112)

• Span Angle Center (p. 112)

• Initial Size Seed (p. 113)

• Enable Washers (p. 117)

• Bounding Box Diagonal (p. 119)

• Average Surface Area (p. 120)

• Minimum Edge Length (p. 120)

With Use Adaptive Sizing set to No, it includes:

• Growth Rate (p. 110)

• Max Size (p. 110)

• Mesh Defeaturing (p. 110) (Defeature size)

• Capture Curvature (Curvature Min Size (p. 113) and Curvature Normal Angle (p. 114))

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 103
Global Mesh Controls

• Capture Proximity (Proximity Min Size (p. 115), Proximity Gap Factor (p. 115), and Proximity Size Function
Sources (p. 115))

• Enable Washers (p. 117)

• Bounding Box Diagonal (p. 119)

• Average Surface Area (p. 120)

• Minimum Edge Length (p. 120)

Mesh Sizing Defaults

When a model is loaded, the default Element Size is automatically set by the software using the
physics preference and characteristics about the model.

• If the model only has solid parts, the Element Size is set as a factor of the Bounding Box Diagon-
al (p. 119). When Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes, the factor is determined by using a combination
of the Physics Preference (p. 96) and Initial Size Seed (p. 113). For other sizing options, the default
Bounding Box Factor is set to 0.05, but you can modify this in the Options dialog box ( Tools >
Options > Meshing > Bounding Box Factor (p. 392)).

• If the model has sheet parts, the Element Size is set as a factor of the average surface area. When
Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes, the factor is determined by using a combination of the Physics
Preference (p. 96), and Initial Size Seed (p. 113). For other sizing options, the default Surface Area
Factor is set to 0.125, but you can modify this in the Options dialog box ( Tools > Options >
Meshing > Surface Area Factor (p. 392)).

Other default mesh size settings, such as defeature size, curvature minimum size, and proximity
minimum size, are set in relation to the Element Size. If Use Adaptive Sizing is set to No, a simple
factor is used to scale the defeature size, curvature minimum size, and proximity minimum size.

Beginning in Release 18.2, you can rely on dynamic defaults to scale other sizes off of the element
size. When you modify the element size, the other default sizes update dynamically in response,
thereby providing a more direct scaling of sizing values.

Dynamic defaults are controlled by the Mechanical Min Size Factor, CFD Min Size Factor, Explicit
Min Size Factor, Mechanical Defeature Size Factor, Explicit Defeature Size Factor and CFD De-
feature Size Factor options. These options are available in the Options (p. 389) dialog box. You use
these options to set your preferences for the scale factors (p. 392) that will be used to calculate the
corresponding default sizes. Essentially, the scale factors control the default values for global minimum
size and global defeature size, as well as the default sizes used by local mesh sizing controls when
Type is set to Factor of Global Size (p. 306).

Using Dynamic Mesh Sizing Defaults

To use dynamic defaults:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
104 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sizing Group

1. Retain the default settings of Defeature Size, Curvature Min Size, Proximity Min Size,
and/or Max Size.

Note:

If you modify any of these default sizes, their values will not update dynamically.
This is because user-defined sizes are always retained.

2. Adjust the Element Size.

In response, the other default global mesh sizes will update dynamically.

3. (Optional) For more control over global size scaling, modify the values of the Mechanical
Min Size Factor, CFD Min Size Factor, Mechanical Defeature Size Factor and/or CFD
Defeature Size Factor options (p. 392) to obtain the desired scaling.

4. (Optional) To control scaling locally, choose Factor of Global Size (p. 306) as the Type when
you define a local sizing control. Then, depending on the entities and other options you
select for the control, use the Defeature Size Scale, Curvature Min Size Scale, and Prox-
imity Min Size Scale local sizing control options (p. 302) to obtain local sizing based on
the global sizing.

Note:

By setting Type to Factor of Global Size, you ensure the local sizes will update
dynamically if you change the global element size.

Sizing Options
The Sizing options provide greater control over the following properties:

• Mesh growth (transition) between small and large sizes based on a specified growth rate

• Curvature based refinement and angles between normals for adjacent mesh elements
(curvature (p. 107)-based sizing)

• Number of mesh elements employed in the gaps between two geometric entities (proxim-
ity (p. 107)-based sizing)

By default, Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes, unless Physics Preference (p. 96) is set to CFD, Explicit
or Nonlinear Mechanical (in which case the default is Capture Curvature set to Yes), or Hydro-
dynamics (in which case the sizing is Uniform). The option you choose determines which refinement
mechanisms are activated, as described in the following sections.

Controls for sizing include Element Size (p. 102), Growth Rate (p. 110), Max Size (p. 110), and
Curvature Min Size (p. 113)/ Proximity Min Size (p. 115). The Curvature Min Size/Proximity Min
Size and Max Size specifications represent, respectively, the global minimum and global maximum
allowable element size. The Element Size specification represents the global maximum allowable
size of the elements created by the free surface meshers of the supported methods. The Growth

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 105
Global Mesh Controls

Rate represents the increase in element edge length with each succeeding layer of elements from
the edge or face. For example, a growth rate of 1.2 results in a 20% increase in element edge length
with each succeeding layer of elements.

Sizing options are applicable to the following mesh methods:

Volume Meshing:

• General Sweep (p. 399) (Surface mesh only)

• Thin Sweep (p. 406) (Surface mesh only)

• Hex Dominant (p. 233) (Surface mesh only)

• Patch Conforming Tetrahedron (p. 208)

• Patch Independent Tetrahedron (p. 210)

• MultiZone (p. 242)

Note:

• The sizing controls are passed to the Patch Independent Tetrahedron method. That is,
the Patch Independent Tetrahedron method does not use the same sizing algorithms;
rather, this method interprets the controls and uses internal algorithms to respect the
user-defined settings.

• The General Sweep, Thin Sweep, and Hex Dominant mesh methods use the sizing controls
in the creation of the surface mesh, but the volume mesh does not use them.

Surface Meshing:

• Quad Dominant (p. 282)

• All Triangles (p. 284)

• MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284)

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) (p. 287)

Note:

For an overview of how using the sizing influences mesh distribution, refer to Understanding
the Influence of the Sizing Options (p. 89).

Sizing topics include:

• Curvature-Based Sizing (p. 107)

• Proximity-Based Sizing (p. 107)

• Uniform Sizing (p. 108)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
106 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sizing Group

Curvature-Based Sizing
The mesher examines curvature on edges and faces and computes element sizes on these entities
such that the size will not violate the maximum size or the curvature normal angle, which are either
automatically computed by the mesher or defined by the user.

Curvature-based sizing is defined by the following properties:

• Curvature Normal Angle (p. 114)

• Curvature Min Size (p. 113)

• Element Size (p. 102)

• Max Size (p. 110)

• Growth Rate (p. 110)

The Curvature Normal Angle (p. 114) is the maximum allowable angle that one element edge is
allowed to span given a certain geometry curvature.

Proximity-Based Sizing
You can specify the minimum number of element layers created in regions that constitute "gaps" in
the model for proximity-based sizing. For the purposes of specifying proximity-based sizing, a "gap"
is defined in one of two ways:

• The internal volumetric region between two faces

• The area between two opposing boundary edges of a face

Proximity-based sizing is defined by the following properties:

• Proximity Min Size (p. 115)

• Proximity Gap Factor (p. 115)

• Proximity Size Function Sources (p. 115)

• Element Size (p. 102)

• Max Size (p. 110)

• Growth Rate (p. 110)

The Proximity Gap Factor (p. 115) is the number of layers of elements to be generated in the gaps.
Proximity Size Function Sources (p. 115) determines which regions of proximity are considered in
calculations.

Note:

The proximity sizing does not recognize the proximity between certain entities in cases
involving voids in a model. For example, the proximity between a vertex and an edge on

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 107
Global Mesh Controls

a face in 2D (below left) is ignored if the triangle is a void in the rectangle. Similarly, the
proximity between a vertex or edge and a face in 3D (below right) is ignored if the prism
and the block are voids in a larger domain. The two-headed arrows in the figure indicate
the areas where proximity is ignored.

Figure 30: Proximity Sizing Limitation

Uniform Sizing
Uniform sizing does not refine the mesh based on curvature or proximity. Rather, you specify defeature
and maximum sizes and gradation is provided between sizes based on a specified growth rate.

Uniform sizing is defined by the following properties:

• Defeature Size (p. 111)

• Element Size (p. 102)

• Max Size (p. 110)

• Growth Rate (p. 110)

With uniform sizing, you must use size controls to control mesh sizes locally, as opposed to the
curvature and proximity sizing, which refine the sizes locally based on curvature and proximity of
features in the geometry. Even if the specified local sizes are Soft (p. 310) sizes, they may override
the global sizes when the uniform sizing is being used.

Note:

The Use Uniform Size Function for Sheets (p. 116) enables you to use uniform sizing
while you are using other sizing options to refine the mesh for the rest of the model. This
setting is available only when the model contains mixed body types (for example, sheet
and solid bodies), and when Capture Curvature and/or Capture Proximity is set to Yes.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
108 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sizing Group

Setting Sizing Options

By default, Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes, unless Physics Preference (p. 96) is set to CFD or
Nonlinear Mechanical (in which case the default is Capture Curvature set to Yes), or Hydrodynamics
(in which case the sizing is uniform). The option you choose determines which refinement mechanisms
are activated.

The following options are available:

Resolution
Growth Rate
Max Size
Mesh Defeaturing
Transition
Span Angle Center
Initial Size Seed
Curvature Min Size
Curvature Normal Angle
Proximity Min Size
Proximity Gap Factor
Proximity Size Function Sources
Use Uniform Size Function for Sheets
Enable Washers
Bounding Box Diagonal
Average Surface Area
Minimum Edge Length

Resolution
Available when Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes, the Resolution option controls the mesh distri-
bution. The default setting is Program Controlled (see Adaptive Resolution in the Options dialog
box (p. 392)). The range of values that can be set is 0 to 7, with the mesh resolution changing from
coarse (0) to fine (7).

A value of -1 will set the Resolution to the default value set for Adaptive Resolution in the Options
dialog box (p. 392).

• If Adaptive Resolution is set to Program Controlled, the default value is 4 when the Physics
Preference (p. 96) is Electromagnetics or Explicit. For all other Physics Preference (p. 96), the
default value is 2.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 109
Global Mesh Controls

• If Adaptive Resolution is explicitly set in the Options dialog box (p. 392) (0-7), the value set will
be used as default.

Note:

• If you set the Resolution explicitly, the set value will be retained.

• For databases from previous releases (prior to Release 2025 R1), the Resolution will
be explicitly set to a value which is not the default.

• For new databases, if Resolution is set to Default and the Adaptive Resolution in
the Options dialog box (p. 392) is different than it was when the database was saved,
the new value will be used instead.

Growth Rate
Growth Rate represents the increase in element edge length with each succeeding layer of elements.
For example, a growth rate of 1.2 results in a 20% increase in element edge length with each suc-
ceeding layer of elements. This option is available when Use Adaptive Sizing is set to No. Specify
a value from 1 to 5 or accept the default.

The default is calculated based on the Physics Preference (p. 96) option and the presence of sheet
bodies.

Note:

For sheet models, the Details View does not display the default value of Growth Rate.

Max Size
Max Size is the maximum size that the sizing controls will return to the mesher. This option is
available when Use Adaptive Sizing is set to No. Specify a value greater than 0 or accept the default.

Note:

• The Max Size option is hidden if there are no solids in your model.

• For information about overriding sizes, refer to Overriding Sizing Minimum and Max-
imum Sizes (p. 91).

• For information about the relationship between the Element Size control and the
Min Size, and Max Size controls, refer to Understanding the Influence of the Sizing
Options (p. 89).

Mesh Defeaturing
The Meshing application automatically defeatures small features and dirty geometry according to
the Defeature Size you specify here.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
110 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sizing Group

Mesh defeaturing is supported for the following mesh methods:

Solid Meshing:

• Patch Conforming Tetrahedron (p. 208)

• Patch Independent Tetrahedron (p. 210)

• MultiZone (p. 242)

• Thin Sweep (p. 406)

• Hex Dominant (p. 233)

Surface Meshing:

• Quad Dominant (p. 282)

• All Triangles (p. 284)

• MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284)

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) (p. 287)

For the Patch Independent Tetrahedron (p. 210), MultiZone (p. 242), and MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284)
methods, the Defeature Size you set here will be populated to the local (scoped) method controls.
If you subsequently make changes to the local settings, the local settings will override the global
Defeature Size set here. See the descriptions of the individual methods for more information.

See Protecting Topology Defined Prior to Meshing (p. 184) for details on protecting defeatured to-
pology.

The options for defining mesh defeaturing are described below.

Mesh Defeaturing
Use the Mesh Defeaturing control to enable and disable defeaturing. When Mesh Defeaturing is
Yes (default), features smaller than or equal to the value of Defeature Size are removed automat-
ically.

Defeature Size
Defeature Size is available only when Mesh Defeaturing is set to Yes. Specify a positive value to
set the global tolerance for defeaturing, or accept the default. Specifying a value of 0.0 resets the
Defeature Size to its default, which is determined by the Mechanical Defeature Size Factor or
CFD Defeature Size Factor preference (p. 392) specified in the Options dialog box. If you retain the

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 111
Global Mesh Controls

default Defeature Size and subsequently modify the Element Size (p. 102), the default Defeature
Size is recalculated to reflect the size factor preferences.

Note:

• If a user-defined value has been specified for Defeature Size, that value will be used
for everything—sheets and solids. In addition, the value will not update dynamically
if you modify the Element Size because user-defined values are always retained.

• If you allow the Defeature Size to default and you modify the mesh size by applying
local sizing controls (for example, local face or edge sizing), the tolerance may be
modified automatically. In such cases, a warning message is issued to notify you that
the global defeature size has been modified. To prevent this behavior, manually specify
a value for Defeature Size.

• Some bodies or parts might be ignored if the Defeature Size is too high. If this hap-
pens, the body will be considered to be meshed but will have no elements. These
bodies or parts can be suppressed if desired. To capture these bodies or parts in the
mesh, regenerate the mesh with a reduced Defeature Size.

• If the geometry contains close vertices, setting the Defeature Size can resolve them.

On the Graphics Options toolbar, you can click the Close Vertices button to determ-
ine if there are any close vertices in the model, and then set the Defeature Size to a
value that will sufficiently defeature any extra vertices.

• You can also set the Defeature Size on a body, face, or edge by inserting a local size
control (p. 300).

Transition
When Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes, Transition affects the rate at which adjacent elements
will grow. Slow produces smooth transitions while Fast produces more abrupt transitions.

Span Angle Center

When Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes, Span Angle Center sets the goal for curvature-based
refinement. For a curved region, the mesh will subdivide along the curvature until the individual
elements span this angle.

You can set the span angle by choosing one of the following options:

• Coarse - 91o to 60o

• Medium - 75o to 24o

• Fine - 36o to 12o

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
112 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sizing Group

Example 1: How the Span Angle Center Controls Element Placement

The following figure shows a curved region. If the curvature were extended to 360o to create a
circle, the Curvature Normal Angle is the arc span from the center of the circle to the curved region.
The Curvature Normal Angle (α = 45o) is computed based on the Span Angle Center setting.

Initial Size Seed

When Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes, Initial Size Seed allows you to control the initial seeding
of the mesh size for each part.

• Assembly (default) bases the initial seeding on the diagonal of the bounding box that encloses
all assembly parts regardless of the number of suppressed parts. As a result, the mesh never
changes due to part suppression.

• Part bases the initial seeding on the diagonal of the bounding box that encloses each particular
individual part as it is meshed. The mesh never changes due to part suppression. This option
typically leads to a finer mesh and is recommended for situations where the fineness of an indi-
vidual part mesh is important relative to the overall size of the part in the assembly.

Note:

When Use Adaptive Sizing is set to No, Assembly is set internally and cannot be
modified.

Curvature Min Size

Available when Capture Curvature (p. 107) is set to Yes, Curvature Min Size is the minimum size
returned to the mesher. Some element sizes may be smaller than this based on local feature sizes
or other geometric anomalies.

Specify a positive value or accept the default, which is determined by the size factor prefer-
ences (p. 392) (Mechanical Min Size Factor, Explicit Min Size Factor and/or CFD Min Size Factor)
specified in the Options dialog box. If you retain the default Curvature Min Size and subsequently

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 113
Global Mesh Controls

modify the Element Size (p. 102), the default Curvature Min Size is recalculated to reflect the
size factor preferences.

Note:

• The appropriate size factor is based on the physics preference. The Mechanical Min
Size Factor applies when physics preference is Mechanical, Electromagnetics. The
CFD Min Size Factor applies when physics preference is CFD. The Explicit Min Size
Factor applies when the physics preference is Explicit.

• When Capture Proximity (p. 107) is also set to Yes, you can specify a global Proximity
Min Size to be used in proximity calculations in addition to the global Curvature Min
Size. When only Capture Proximity is selected, only Proximity Min Size is available.
Refer to Proximity Min Size (p. 115) for details.

• For information about overriding sizes, refer to Overriding Sizing Minimum and Max-
imum Sizes (p. 91).

• For information about the relationship between the Element Size control and the
Max Size controls, refer to Understanding the Influence of the Sizing Options (p. 89).

Curvature Normal Angle

Curvature Normal Angle is the maximum allowable angle that one element edge is allowed to
span given a particular geometry curvature. This option is available only when Capture Curvature
is set to Yes. You can specify a value from 0 to 180 degrees or accept the default. (A value of 0 resets
the option to its default.) The default value depends on the Physics Preference (p. 96) selected.

You can use the Curvature Normal Angle to limit the number of elements that are generated
along a curve or surface if the Curvature Min Size (p. 113) is too small for that particular curve.

Example 2: How the Curvature Normal Angle Controls Element Placement

The following figure shows a curved region with a Curvature Normal Angle of α = 45o. If the
curvature were extended to 360o to create a circle, the Curvature Normal Angle is the arc span
from the center of the circle to the curved region. Three arc spans are needed to span the entire
curvature, which results in three elements placed along the curvature: one in each arc span.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
114 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sizing Group

Proximity Min Size

Available when Capture Proximity (p. 107) is set to Yes, Proximity Min Size enables you to specify
a global minimum size to be used in proximity sizing calculations. Specify a positive value or accept
the default, which is set equal to the default of Curvature Min Size.

When only Capture Proximity is selected, only Proximity Min Size is available.

Some element sizes may be smaller than this based on local feature sizes or other geometric anom-
alies.

Proximity Gap Factor

Proximity Gap Factor is the minimum number of layers of elements to be generated in the gaps.
This option is available only when Capture Proximity is set to Yes. You can specify a value from
0 to 100, or accept the default (3).

Remember the following information:

• The value of Proximity Gap Factor is an estimate, it may not be exactly satisfied in every gap.
When using mapped Face Meshing controls (p. 314) or sweeping (p. 399), interval assignment may
change the number of divisions (elements or cells) in a gap.

• For thin regions, to control the aspect ratio of the cells in the gap, you can use Proximity Gap
Factor less than 1. For example, if you want to refine the surface mesh to allow elements with
an aspect ratio of 4 in the gap, you can use a Proximity Gap Factor of 0.25

• In cases involving Patch Conforming tetra (p. 208) meshing and Swept (p. 399) meshing, the
proximity sizing drives the surface mesh size distribution as follows. The value of Proximity Gap
Factor is applicable to both 3D proximity (the number of 3D elements/cells between two faces
in a body) and 2D proximity (the number of 2D elements/cells between two edges on a face),
and the global Growth Rate (p. 110) value is automatically taken into account in the gap.
However, the 3D proximity sizing affects only the surface mesh in the gap, and assumes the
volume mesh will use the global settings. Hence, if you define local mesh sizing on a body and
specify local Element Size (p. 303) or local Growth Rate (p. 309) settings that differ drastically
from the global sizing settings (or if inflation is specified), the final number of cells across a 3D
gap may deviate from the specified Proximity Gap Factor value.

• When Method (p. 202) is set to Automatic (p. 206), the proximity calculation in swept bodies
may result in an under-refined mesh. You can use inflation (p. 345) layers or a scoped fixed size
at such locations to produce a sufficient number of elements/cells.

Proximity Size Function Sources

Proximity Size Function Sources determines whether regions of proximity between faces and/or
edges are considered when proximity size function calculations are performed. This option is
available only when Capture Proximity is set to Yes. You can specify Edges, Faces, or Faces and
Edges:

• Faces - Considers face-face proximity between faces. Face-edge and edge-edge proximity are
not considered (that is, the trailing edge of fluid around wings will not be captured with this
setting).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 115
Global Mesh Controls

• Faces and Edges - This is the default for part/body-based meshing methods. Considers face-face
and edge-edge proximity. Face-edge proximity is not considered.

Note:

• In cases involving face-face proximity, the face normal orientation is ignored during
the proximity calculation.

• It is important to resolve all edges as much as possible for better feature capturing
and for minimizing the occurrence of non-manifold nodes. For this reason, you should
specify a setting of either Edges or Faces and Edges. For many models, the Edges
setting may be sufficient to resolve all proximity situations. For large complex models,
using either the Faces and Edges or Faces setting may result in longer computation
time.

• When Capture Proximity is Yes, a critical angle of 30 degrees is considered by default

for proximity calculation. Hence, the mesher ignores any face pair having a critical
angle above 30 degrees for proximity calculation.

Here, the angle between the faces should be less than 30 degrees for computing the
proximity of the faces.

Use Uniform Size Function for Sheets

Use Uniform Size Function for Sheets enables you to use the Uniform sizing while you are using
other options to refine the mesh for the rest of the model. This setting is available only when the
model contains mixed body types (for example, sheet and solid bodies), and when Capture
Curvature and/or Capture Proximity is set to Yes. The default for this setting is No.

Note:

When the Physics Preference is Explicit, Use Uniform Size Function for Sheets
is set to Yes by default when both solid and sheet bodies are present.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
116 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sizing Group

Enable Washers
Enable Washers controls the pattern of the mesh that is generated around any holes in a sheet
body. If you set this option to Yes, the mesh will be generated with a layer of equally-spaced
quadratic elements—called washers—around each hole.

The Enable Washers option is only available for sheet bodies when Use Adaptive Sizing, Capture
Curvature, and Capture Proximity are all set to No. If the model contains both solid and sheet
bodies, Enable Washers is available, but washers will only be generated for the sheet bodies.

Figure 31: Washers Generated Around Two Holes

If you enable washers, you can specify the height of the washers and whether the washer element
nodes should be moved for holes that are close to a boundary. You should be aware of the scen-
arios in which a washer might not be generated for a hole.
Height of Washer
Allow Nodes to be Moved off Boundary
Limitations for Washers

Height of Washer
Height of Washer controls the height of the washer elements to be generated around each hole.
By default, the height is set to the Defeature Size (p. 111).

You should ensure that the height of the washer is set to a value between the target minimum
element size in the model and the Element Size (p. 102) (the nominal uniform element size ex-
pected in the overall model).

Note:

The mesher attempts to respect the minimum size and Element Size when the mesh
is generated. However, you may notice variations in the final mesh due to local feature
sizes, transition areas, or other geometric anomalies.

Allow Nodes to be Moved off Boundary

Allow Nodes to be Moved off Boundary controls the placement of the nodes for holes that are
too close to a boundary to place the washer elements. If you select Yes, the nodes will be moved

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 117
Global Mesh Controls

such that the washer elements can be placed without compromising any boundaries. The default
value for Tolerance for Moving Nodes is 10% of the value specified for Height of Washer. If
you select No, the mesher will not generate any washer elements in any locations in which the
elements do not fit.

The following figure shows a hole that is too close to an edge for the washer elements to be
generated between the hole and the edge.

Figure 32: Washer Element Nodes Not Moved

After setting Allow Nodes to be Moved off Boundary to Yes, the washer elements are now
generated by slightly moving some of the nodes away from the edge of the hole.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
118 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sizing Group

Figure 33: Washer Element Nodes Moved

Limitations for Washers

The following table describes the scenarios in which a washer might not be generated for a hole:

Table 1: Washer Limitations

Scenario Description
A hole is shared by two faces The hole is not detected, and a washer is not
generated around the hole. To ensure that a
washer is generated, you should merge the
faces (p. 546).
A local mesh control (p. 201) is set Washers are not generated on any face to which
a local mesh control has been applied.
The Defeature Size (p. 111) is greater than the Washers might not be generated.
Minimum Edge Length
A hole has a diameter less than the Minimum A washer will not be generated for the hole.
Edge Length
The Min Size and Element Size (p. 102) are set Washers might not be generated.
to the same value

Bounding Box Diagonal

Bounding Box Diagonal provides a read-only indication of the length of the assembly diagonal.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 119
Global Mesh Controls

Average Surface Area

Average Surface Area provides a read-only indication of the average surface area of the model.

Minimum Edge Length

Minimum Edge Length provides a read-only indication of the smallest edge length in the model.
When you click , Show Minimum Edge Lengths option is displayed. Show Minimum Edge
Length helps you to find and display the smallest edges in the model. The smallest edges may
help you determine the defeature size when defeaturing is required to refine the mesh to resolve
the feature. For example, Curvature Min Size (or Local Size Control).

Quality Group
The Mesh Quality Workflow (p. 120) describes the steps for configuring mesh quality. The Quality group
includes:

• Check Mesh Quality (p. 121)

• Error and Warning Limits (p. 127)

• Target Element Quality (p. 130)

• Target Skewness (p. 131)

• Target Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes) (p. 131)

• Smoothing (p. 133)

• Mesh Metric (p. 133)

The Mesh Quality Workflow

The general workflow for configuring mesh quality is as follows:

1. Set Physics Preference (p. 96).

2. (Optional) If Physics Preference is Mechanical, set Error Limits (p. 127).

3. Set Check Mesh Quality (p. 121) depending on how you want the mesher to respond when
elements reach error or warning limits.

4. Set appropriate quality targets based on your physics preference:

• Target Quality (p. 130)

• Target Skewness (p. 131)

• Target Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes) (p. 131)

5. Generate the mesh. (p. 528)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
120 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

6. Review warning or error messages. Use Show Elements (p. 538) if needed.

7. Review mesh metrics (p. 133).

8. Perform troubleshooting (p. 579) if needed.

Check Mesh Quality

Check Mesh Quality determines how the software behaves with respect to error and warning lim-
its (p. 127):

• Yes, Errors (default) - If the meshing algorithm cannot generate a mesh that passes all error limits,
an error message is printed and meshing fails.

• Yes, Errors and Warnings - If the meshing algorithm cannot generate a mesh that passes all error
limits, an error message is printed and meshing fails. In addition, if the meshing algorithm cannot
generate a mesh that passes all warning (target) limits, a warning message (p. 538) is printed.

• No - Mesh quality checks are done at various stages of the meshing process (for example, after
surface meshing prior to volume meshing). The No setting turns off most quality checks, but some
minimal checking is still done. In addition, even with the No setting, the target quality metrics are
still used to improve the mesh. The No setting is intended for troubleshooting (p. 579) and should
be used with caution as it could lead to solver failures or incorrect solution results.

• Mesh Quality Worksheet: Measures the mesh quality and allows you to set warning and error
limits for each mesh quality criterion. When you select Mesh Quality Worksheet, the Display Style
contours are modified to display the elements that exceed the warning and error limits.

Note:

Changing the Check Mesh Quality setting after you have meshed affects the mesh
status as follows:

– If, after meshing, you change the Check Mesh Quality setting from No to Yes, Errors
or Yes, Errors and Warnings, or you change the setting from Yes, Errors to Yes, Errors
and Warnings, the mesh becomes out-of-date and requires action.

– If, after meshing, you change the Check Mesh Quality setting from Yes, Errors and
Warnings to another setting, or you change the setting from Yes, Errors to No, the
mesh will not go out-of-date. However, some old messages may not directly apply
anymore.

– If, after meshing, you change the Check Mesh Quality setting from No or Yes, Errors
or Yes, Errors and Warnings to Mesh Quality Worksheet, it validates the generated
mesh.

Mesh Quality Worksheet

Mesh Quality Worksheet helps you to measure the quality of mesh, provide visualization tools for
finding areas of low mesh quality and improve the mesh. The Mesh Quality Worksheet displays the
quality criteria and its default warning and error limit based on the selected Physics Preference.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 121
Global Mesh Controls

When you change the Physics Preference, the worksheet metrics column gets reset to the default
values. To access Mesh Quality Worksheet, You can click Mesh on the Tree Outline and click Quality
Worksheet in the Mesh Context tab on the ribbon. Mesh Quality Worksheet is available for No or
Yes, Errors or Yes, Errors and Warnings and Mesh Quality Worksheet in Check Mesh Quality.

Mesh Quality Worksheet options are as follows:

Advanced View: Allows you to have a detailed view of the quality metrics. It displays the %Warning,
#Warning, %Failed, #Failed and Average columns when enabled.

: Open the Options window to set the mesh metric visibility for the selected quality criterion
in the Mesh Quality Worksheet . you can use right-click options to select single or multiple quality
criterion. The available right-click options are:

• Physics Preference: Sets the default value for quality criterion based on the Physics Preference
in the Details view.

• On: Enables the quality criterion visibility in the Mesh Quality Worksheet for the selected
mesh metric.

• Off: Disables the quality criterion visibility in the Mesh Quality Worksheet for the selected
mesh metric.

: Allows you to reset the worksheet warning and error limit values to default ones.

: Allows you to load or resume the saved mesh quality worksheet by reading a *.csv file.

: Allows you to save the mesh quality worksheet in *.csv format.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
122 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

: Allow you to change the errors or warning limits and recompute the failed or warning elements
without invalidating the mesh.

When you click Show Contours, the available options are:

: Allows you to switch off the metrics contour and reset the Display Style to Use Geometry
Setting.

: Allows you to increase the number of mesh layers for the selected quality criterion. It is ap-
plicable only when Check Mesh Quality is set to Mesh Quality Worksheet.

: Allows you to decrease the number of mesh layers for the selected quality criterion. It is ap-
plicable only when Check Mesh Quality is set to Mesh Quality Worksheet.

: Allows you to switch the contour from Classic Contours to Warning/Error Contours.

: Allows you to switch the contour from Warning/Error Contours to Classic Contours.

Sheet: Displays the mesh quality metrics worksheet for sheet bodies.

Solid: Displays the mesh quality metrics worksheet for solid bodies.

Solid - Surface: Displays the mesh quality metrics worksheet for exterior face elements of solid bodies.
You can use Preview Surface Mesh and view the surface mesh quality in the worksheet for solid
bodies before proceeding to volume meshing if required.

Note:

In Mesh Quality Worksheet, when you use Preview Surface Mesh, you can view the
Mesh Metric only from the Solid - Surface tab.

Sheet, Solid, Solid-Surface tab have the following states:

A cross mark denotes that you cannot compute the mesh metrics. For example, if there is cross
mark on the sheet tab, it defines that there is no sheet bodies in the geometry.

A refresh mark denotes you need to compute the mesh metrics.

A tick mark denotes the mesh metrics of a mesh are up-to-date.

The columns in Mesh Quality Worksheet are as follows:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 123
Global Mesh Controls

• Error Check: Allows you to activate or deactivate error check for a given quality criterion.
When Error Check is enabled, the mesh becomes invalidated if the error limits for the quantity
are exceeded upon mesh completion. If you have strict quality requirements, Error Check can
be used to avoid mesh continuation to solver. For example, automated design of experiment
studies in the Workbench. Error Check is only available when Check Mesh Quality is set to
Mesh Quality Worksheet.

• Quality Criterion: Displays quality mesh metric for each row. This column is read-only.

• Warning (Target) Limit: Allows you to specify the warning limit constraints for all elements
of the quality metric.

• Error (Failure) Limit: Allows you to specify the error limit constraints for all elements of the
quality metric.

• % Warning: The percentage of elements that exceed the specified warning limit.

• # Warning: The number of elements that exceed the specified warning limit.

• % Failed: The percentage of elements that exceed the error limit.

• # Failed: The number of elements that exceed the error limit.

• Average: Displays average of quality mesh metric for each row.

• Worst: Displays the metric value for the worst quality element for each metric and provides
color coding for the quality metric displayed. The green color indicates that no elements exceed
the Warning Limit. Yellow color highlights indicates that bad elements exceed Warning
Limit but not Error Limit and red color indicates that the worst element(s) exceed the Error
limit. For some metrics, a high value is considered as bad. For example, Skewness. For other
metrics, a low value is considered bad. For example, tet collapse. See Mesh Metrics (p. 133) for
more details on quality metrics. In the below image, you can see that Min Element Quality
is green (good), Max Aspect Ratio and Min Orthogonal Quality are yellow (warning) and
Max Skewness is red (Error).

If Error Check was selected for the Max Skewness, after completion the mesh becomes invalid.

You can customise the quality criteria as per your preference under Mesh Quality in File > Options
> Meshing. The default quality criteria displayed in the worksheet is based on Physics Preference
and differs for Sheet, Solid and Solid - Surface.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
124 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

When you right-click a Quality Criterion in the Mesh Quality Worksheet, you have the following
options:

• Create NS Group: Failed Elements: Generates element based named selection groups to view
the failed elements in the mesh when you select the named selection group in the tree. Create
NS Group: Failed Elements is available in Solid and Sheet tab.

• Create NS Group: Warning Elements: Generates element based named selection groups to
view the warning elements in the mesh when you select the named selection group in the
tree. Create NS Group: Warning Elements is available in Solid and Sheet tab.

• Show Contours: Sets the Display style to selected quality criterion when Check Mesh Quality
is No, or Yes, Errors and Warnings, or Yes, Errors.

Show Contours sets the Display Style to selected quality criterion and displays the warning
(yellow) and failed (red) elements for the selected quality criterion when Check Mesh Quality
is set to Mesh Quality Worksheet. Show Contours is available in Sheet, Solid, Solid-Surface
tabs. There are two contours available in Mesh Quality Worksheet:

– Classic Contours: Displays the contours banded across a range from red to blue in the
geometry window. Red indicates poor quality elements and blue indicates good quality
elements.

– Warning/Error Contours: Displays the contours banded with three colors in the geometry
window. Warning/Error Contours is based on the warning and error limits defined in the
Mesh Quality Worksheet. Red indicates elements that exceed the Error Limit, yellow indic-
ates elements between Error and Warning Limits and grey indicates elements that are below
the Warning Limit.

• Show Histogram: Displays the mesh metrics histogram for the selected quality criterion. Show
Histogram is available in Solid and Sheet tab.

• Isolate Failed Element Bodies: Isolate the failed element bodies for the selected quality cri-
terion. Isolate Failed Element Bodies is available in Solid and Sheet tab.

• Open Troubleshooting Documentation: Opens the troubleshooting documentation page

from the browser. Open Troubleshooting Documentation is available in all tabs.

• Visibility Off: Allows you to disable the selected quality criterion from the Mesh Quality
Worksheet. Visibility Off is available in all tabs.

If Create NS Group: Failed Elements or Create NS Group: Warning Elements is used, you can right-
click the created named selection group in the tree and click Select Mesh Clusters in Group to select
all the elements clusters in the named selection. You can then use the Walk under the Selection tab
to navigate through the clusters of problem elements.

You can click File > Options > Meshing and select Check Mesh Quality as Mesh Quality Worksheet
under Quality in Meshing to use the worksheet as the default for mesh validation method.

You can customize the quality criteria as per your preference under Mesh Quality in File > Options
> Meshing. The default quality criteria displayed in the worksheet differs for Sheet, Solid and Solid
- Surface.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 125
Global Mesh Controls

You can select On or Off to hide or display the quality criteria in the Mesh Quality Worksheet from
File > Options > Meshing > Mesh Quality. Mesh Quality Worksheet calculates quality for available
criteria only when you mesh or refresh the worksheet. You should hide quality criteria that are not
used, to reduce time taken for quality calculation in larger meshes.

When Check Mesh Quality is set to Quality Worksheet and you can view contours of mesh quality
using Display Style, the properties of the contours are modified from the default display. For a given
criterion, the Geometry window displays elements between the Warning Limit and Error Limit as
yellow and ones exceeding the Error Limit as red.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
126 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

Some additional element layers in grey color around the red color and yellow color elements help
you understand the cause for mesh issues. To increase the number of mesh layers for required quality

elements press Shift+W or , for decreasing number of mesh layers for required quality elements

press Shift+S or . If you press Shift+W or several times, all mesh elements are shown.

To go back to the cluster view, you must use Shift+S or to remove element layers.

Limitation
• When you enable Error Check for any mesh metrics in the Mesh Quality Worksheet, Mesh
Quality Worksheet does not invalidate the mesh generated by the Mesh Workflow (p. 601).

Error and Warning Limits

During mesh generation, an element's quality (which is sometimes called the element shape) is cal-
culated. The meshing algorithm uses error limits to obtain a valid mesh. It performs extra mesh
cleanup to ensure the error limits are met, such that a valid mesh is one that satisfies the necessary
(minimum) conditions and can be consumed by the solver. The meshing algorithm then attempts to
improve quality based on warning (target) limits. Error and warning (target) limits can be defined
further as:

• An error limit is the value at which an element's quality is not suitable for the solver being
used, and by default the mesh would fail (see Check Mesh Quality (p. 121)). Priority is given to
ensure there are no elements below the error limits. Error limits are determined by the physics
preference as shown in the table below. You cannot change error limits. However, if you are
using the Mechanical physics preference, you can choose from two sets of error limits:
Standard Mechanical or Aggressive Mechanical. You can think of the error limits as the
minimum quality criteria of the meshing.

• A warning (target) limit has two purposes:

1. It is used as a warning limit. If the mesh has elements that are questionable for the
solver being used, these elements can be flagged for you via the warning limit. To
configure this warning behavior, set Check Mesh Quality (p. 121) to Yes, Errors and
Warnings.

2. It is used as a target limit. The mesh methods will first try to improve the mesh to
ensure there are no elements that do not pass the error limits. If successful, the mesh
methods do further improvements to try to meet the target limits. You can think of
the target limits as the quality goals for the meshing. If the mesher cannot meet the
goals, a warning can be issued. To configure this warning behavior, set Check Mesh
Quality (p. 121) to Yes, Errors and Warnings.

Note:

All mesh methods use the warning (target) limits to flag warning elements if Check Mesh
Quality (p. 121) is set to Yes, Errors and Warnings. However, not all mesh methods use

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 127
Global Mesh Controls

the target limits to improve the mesh. Currently, only the Patch Conforming Tetra (p. 208)
mesh method uses the target limits to improve the mesh.

You can control how the mesher responds when it reaches error and warning limits by setting the
Check Mesh Quality (p. 121) option.

The error limits for each physics preference are:

• Mechanical - Uses either of these sets of error limits, depending on the setting of the Error Limits
option:

– Standard Mechanical - These error limits have proven to be effective for linear, modal, stress,
and thermal problems.

– Aggressive Mechanical - These error limits are more restrictive than the error limits for Standard
Mechanical. Aggressive Mechanical may produce more elements, fail more often, and take
longer to mesh. As an alternative, you can set Physics Preference to Nonlinear Mechanical.
However, doing so changes other defaults and may significantly change the mesh size and/or
which features the mesh is capturing, and therefore may have a big impact on mesh quality.
This is the default when Physics Preference is set to Mechanical, but you can use the Error
Limits option to change it.

• Nonlinear Mechanical - Uses error limits as shown in the table below to produce a high quality
mesh that meets the shape checking requirements of tetrahedral elements for nonlinear analysis.
If the element quality cannot meet the error limits, the mesh is not desirable for nonlinear analysis.
These error limits are used whenever Physics Preference is set to Nonlinear Mechanical, you
cannot change them.

Note:

Using the Nonlinear Mechanical option typically produces more elements and longer
meshing times. If the element size is too coarse, meshing robustness may be problem-
atic because it is sometimes difficult to get a good quality mesh that not only meets
the coarse element size but also captures the features of the model. In such cases, you
should reduce the element size, simplify the model, or set Check Mesh Quality (p. 121)
to No to turn off the error checks.

• Electromagnetics - Uses error limits based on element volume, face warping, and face angle. These
error limits are used whenever Physics Preference is set to Electromagnetics, you cannot change
them.

• CFD - For non-assembly meshing algorithms, uses error limits based on element volume.

• Explicit - Uses error limits based on Jacobian ratio and element volume. These error limits are used
whenever Physics Preference is set to Explicit, you cannot change them.

The following table presents the error and warning (target) limits for different values of Physics Pref-
erence (p. 96). The Hydrodynamics physics preference does not have error and warning limits, so it
is not included in the table.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
128 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

Physics Mechanical Nonlinear Electromagnetics CFD Explicit

Preference Mechanical
CriterionStandardAggressive
WarningError Warning Error WarningError WarningError Warning
Mechanical
Mechanical
(Target) Limit (Target) Limit (Target) Limit (Target) Limit (Target)
Error Error Limit Limit Limit Limit Limit
Limit Limit
Element< < < < N/A N/A < N/A N/A N/A < 0.2
Quality (p.
5 139) 5 0.05 5 0.05 (default)
x x (default) x (default)
10-4 10-4 10-4
for for for
3D 3D 3D

< < <

0.01 0.02 0.02
for for for
2D 2D 2D

< < <

0.75 0.85 0.85
for for for
1D 1D 1D
Jacobian< N/A N/A < N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Ratio (p.0.025
142) 0.025
(Gauss
Points)
JacobianN/A < N/A < < 0.04 N/A N/A N/A N/A < N/A
Ratio (p. 142) 0.025 0.001 (default) 0.001
(Corner
Nodes)
Skewness
N/A(p. 151)
N/A N/A N/A > 0.9 N/A N/A N/A > 0.9 N/A N/A
(default) (default)
Orthogonal
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A <= 0 <= N/A N/A
Quality (p. 153) for 0.05
meshing,for
not assembly
used meshing,
for not
other used
methodsfor
other
methods
Element< 0 <0 N/A <0 N/A < N/A < N/A <0 N/A
Volume 10-30 10-32,
Aspect N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Ratio
(for
triangles (p. 140)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 129
Global Mesh Controls

Physics Mechanical Nonlinear Electromagnetics CFD Explicit

Preference Mechanical
and
quadrilaterals (p. 141))
Face N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A > 150 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Angle
Face N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A > 0.4 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Warping (p. 147)
Aspect N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A >5
Ratio (default)
(Height)
Characteristic
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A <10%
Length Element
(LS-DYNA) Size
(default)

Target Element Quality

The Target Element Quality global option allows you to set a target Element Quality (p. 139) that
you would like the mesh to satisfy.

The Target Element Quality value drives improvements to tetrahedral elements. If you set the target
quality and the mesh contains tetrahedral elements, the mesher will attempt to improve the tetrahedral
elements to meet the target quality that you specified. If the target quality cannot be met, a valid
mesh may still be generated. In addition, if Check Mesh Quality (p. 121) is set to Yes, Errors and
Warnings, a warning message is displayed to help you address the issues preventing the mesh from
satisfying the target quality. You can right-click the Message field and select the Show Elements (p. 538)
option from the context menu to create Named Selections for the elements that don't meet the target.

You should set the target quality if you intend to run a simulation that is sensitive to mesh quality.
However, because setting the target quality increases memory usage and the time required to generate
the mesh, you should not set the quality any higher than necessary.

To set the Target Element Quality, enter a value between 0 (lower quality) and 1 (higher quality).
The default is 0.05.

Note:

• Target Element Quality is supported for the Patch Conforming Tetra (p. 208) mesh
method only.

• The Adaptive sizing can result in coarse mesh sizes with stretched elements that cannot
be improved with a higher target quality value. Therefore, if you are using the Adaptive
sizing, you should set the Target Element Quality to a value < 0.1. Alternatively, you
could use a different sizing option (such as Curvature (p. 107)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
130 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

Target Skewness
The Target Skewness global option allows you to set a target Skewness (p. 151) that you would like
the mesh to satisfy.

The target skewness value drives improvements to tetrahedral elements. If you set the target skewness
and the mesh contains tetrahedral elements, the mesher will attempt to improve the tetrahedral
elements to meet the target skewness that you specified. If the target skewness cannot be met, a
valid mesh may still be generated. In addition, if Check Mesh Quality (p. 121) is set to Yes, Errors and
Warnings, a warning message is displayed to help you address the issues preventing the mesh from
satisfying the target skewness. You can right-click the Message field and select the Show Ele-
ments (p. 538) option from the context menu to create Named Selections for the elements that don't
meet the target.

You should set the target skewness if you intend to run a simulation that is sensitive to mesh quality.
However, because setting the target skewness increases memory usage and the time required to
generate the mesh, you should not set the skewness any lower than necessary.

To set the Target Skewness, enter a value between 0 (higher quality) and 1 (lower quality). The default
is 0.9. For a tetrahedral mesh, you should not set Target Skewness to a value < 0.8.

Note:

Target Skewness is supported for the Patch Conforming Tetra (p. 208) mesh method only.

Target Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes)

The Target Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes) global option allows you to set a target Jacobian Ra-
tio (p. 142) that you would like the mesh to satisfy.

The target Jacobian ratio value drives improvements to tetrahedral elements. If you set the target
Jacobian ratio and the mesh contains tetrahedral elements, the mesher will attempt to improve the
tetrahedral elements to meet the target Jacobian ratio that you specified. If the target Jacobian ratio
cannot be met, a valid mesh may still be generated. In addition, if Check Mesh Quality (p. 121) is set
to Yes, Errors and Warnings, a warning message is displayed to help you address the issues preventing
the mesh from satisfying the target Jacobian ratio. You can right-click the Message field and select
the Show Elements (p. 538) option from the context menu to create Named Selections for the elements
that don't meet the target.

You should set the target Jacobian ratio if you intend to run a simulation that is sensitive to mesh
quality. However, because setting the target Jacobian ratio increases memory usage and the time
required to generate the mesh, you should not set the Jacobian ratio any higher than necessary.

To set the Target Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes), enter a value between 0 (lower quality) and 1
(higher quality). The default is 0.04.

Note:

Target Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes) is supported for the Patch Conforming Tetra (p. 208)
mesh method only.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 131
Global Mesh Controls

Target Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA)

The Target Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA) global option allows you to set a target Characteristic
Length (LS-DYNA) (p. 160) that you would like the mesh to satisfy to avoid small elements and resulting
small critical time-step for Explicit simulations in the Mesh Details view.

If Check Mesh Quality (p. 121) is set to Yes, Errors and Warnings, a warning message is displayed to
help you address the issues preventing the mesh from satisfying the target Characteristic Length (LS-
DYNA). You can right-click the Message field and select the Show Elements (p. 538) option from the
context menu to create Named Selections for the elements that do not meet the target.

By default, Target Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA) is available only when the Physics Preference
is Explicit. When the Target Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA) is larger than the global Element
Size, the Target Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA) is internally reset to half of the global Element
Size.

Note:

• Target Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA) is supported for the Patch Conforming

Tetra (p. 208) mesh method only.

• When the Target Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA) is not met, an error message
is displayed to provide the percentage volume of elements that failed to meet the
Target Characteristic Length (LS- DYNA) out of the total volume of elements on
the flexible parts.

Target Aspect Ratio (Height)

The Target Aspect Ratio (Height) global option allows you to set a target Aspect Ratio (Height) (p. 159)
that you would like the mesh to satisfy in the Mesh Details view.

The Target Aspect Ratio (Height) value drives improvements to tetrahedral elements through im-
provements to the surface mesh aspect ratio. If you set the Target Aspect Ratio (Height) and the
mesh contains tetrahedral elements, the mesher will attempt to improve the tetrahedral elements to
meet the Target Aspect Ratio (Height) that you specified. If the Target Aspect Ratio (Height) cannot
be met, a valid mesh may still be generated. In addition, if Check Mesh Quality (p. 121) is set to Yes,
Errors and Warnings, a warning message is displayed to help you address the issues preventing the
mesh from satisfying the Target Aspect Ratio (Height). You can right-click the Message field and
select the Show Elements (p. 538) option from the context menu to create Named Selections for the
elements that do not meet the target.

To set the Target Aspect Ratio (Height), enter a value between 2 (higher quality) and 100 (lower
quality). The default is 5.

Note:

Target Aspect Ratio (Height) improvement is supported for the Patch Conforming
Tetra (p. 208) mesh method only.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
132 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

Target Aspect Ratio (Height) is available only when the Physics Preference is Explicit.

Smoothing
Smoothing attempts to improve element quality by moving locations of nodes with respect to sur-
rounding nodes and elements. The Low, Medium, or High option controls the number of smoothing
iterations along with the threshold metric where the mesher will start smoothing.

Note:

• When Smoothing is set to High, additional smoothing of inflation layers occurs. This
may slow down the prism generation process.

• For more controls on smoothing to improve quality, you can use Automatic Node
Movement in Patch Conforming Tetrahedrons Method (p. 208).

Mesh Metric
The Mesh Metric option allows you to view mesh metric information and thereby evaluate the mesh
quality. Once you have generated a mesh, you can choose to view information about any of the fol-
lowing mesh metrics: Element Quality (p. 139), Aspect Ratio for triangles (p. 140) or quadrilaterals (p. 141),
Jacobian Ratio (p. 142) (MAPDL, corner nodes, or Gauss points), Warping Factor (p. 147), Parallel Devi-
ation (p. 149), Maximum Corner Angle (p. 150), Skewness (p. 151), Orthogonal Quality (p. 153), Character-
istic Length (Autodyn) (p. 155), Minimum Tri Angle (p. 156), Maximum Tri Angle (p. 156), Minimum Quad
Angle (p. 157), Maximum Quad Angle (p. 157), Warping Angle (p. 157), Tet Collapse (p. 158), Aspect Ratio
(Height) (p. 159), Minimum Element Edge Length (p. 159), Maximum Element Edge Length (p. 160) and
Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA) (p. 160). Selecting None turns off mesh metric viewing.

When you select a mesh metric, its Min, Max, Average, and Standard Deviation values are reported
in the Details View, and a bar graph is displayed under the Geometry window. The graph is labeled
with color-coded bars for each element shape represented in the model's mesh, and can be manipu-
lated to view specific mesh statistics of interest (p. 134).

Note:

If the model contains multiple parts or bodies, you can view the mesh metric information
for an individual part or body. To do so, return to the Tree Outline. Under the Geometry
object, click the specific part or body of interest. The Details view displays the Nodes,
Elements, Min, Max, Average, and Standard Deviation values for the selected metric
and part/body under Statistics. (The graph is not available at the part/body level.)

Accessing Mesh Metric Information

To access mesh metric information:

1. Generate the mesh. You can view mesh metric information for any mesh that was successfully
generated using the Generate Mesh (p. 528), Preview Surface Mesh (p. 531), or Preview Infla-
tion (p. 534) feature.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 133
Global Mesh Controls

2. Click the Mesh object in the Tree Outline.

3. In the Details View, expand the Quality folder.

4. For the Mesh Metric control, select the metric of interest from the drop-down menu.

By default, the Min, Max, Average, and Standard Deviation values for the selected metric
are reported in the Details View. In addition, a bar graph (p. 134) is displayed under the Geo-
metry window.

Note:

To view the numbers of Nodes and Elements in the meshed model, expand the
Statistics (p. 198) folder in the Details View.

Viewing Advanced Mesh Statistics

When you select a mesh metric, a bar graph is displayed as shown in Figure 34: Mesh Metrics Bar
Graph (p. 134). For this illustration, the Element Quality mesh metric was selected in the Details View,
so the bar graph displays the minimum to maximum Element Quality values over the entire mesh.

Figure 34: Mesh Metrics Bar Graph

In Figure 34: Mesh Metrics Bar Graph (p. 134), the X-axis represents the value of the selected mesh
metric. Using the Y-Axis Option setting described in Using the Bar Graph Controls (p. 137), you control
whether the Y-axis represents the number of elements within a particular quality factor range (the
default), or the percentage of the total volume represented by the elements within a particular
quality factor range. In Figure 34: Mesh Metrics Bar Graph (p. 134), the Y-axis represents the number
of elements. The alternative would be for the Y-axis to represent the percentage of the total volume.
Remember that a model could have a large number of poorly shaped elements that are confined to

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
134 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

a small local area. The total volume of these elements might not be significant compared to the
volume of the entire model. As a result, the bar corresponding to this low quality factor may not be
significant. The Mesh Metric option displays the selected mesh metric without qualifying the elements
for acceptability.

Additional, characteristics of the bar graph include:

• The graph is displayed only when a mesh metric is selected. If you set Mesh Metric to None,
the graph is not displayed. Alternatively, you can click the Metric Graph button on the toolbar
to hide/show the graph.

• Resuming a model retains the last-saved state of the graph.

• Clicking the Controls button accesses the graph controls described in Using the Bar Graph
Controls (p. 137).

• The location of an individual bar along the X-axis is the mid-point of the range of metric values
covered by that bar.

• Clicking an individual bar on the graph (or in the column of white space above the bar) changes
the view in the Geometry window. The geometry becomes transparent and only those elements
meeting the criteria values corresponding to the selected bar are displayed, as shown in Fig-
ure 35: Geometry View After Selecting an Individual Bar (p. 135). (The option to click in the
column above the bar is helpful if the graph contains very short bars that are difficult to click.)

Figure 35: Geometry View After Selecting an Individual Bar

• If you click and hold the cursor on an individual bar or column, you see a tooltip showing the
metric value associated with the bar, along with either a number of elements or the percent
of total volume represented by the elements (depending on the Y-Axis Option setting). For

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 135
Global Mesh Controls

example, in Figure 36: Clicking and Holding on an Individual Bar (p. 136), 0.176 is the mid-point
of the range of metric values covered by the selected bar, and there are 10 elements with
values that fall within that range. The 10 elements are displayed in the Geometry window.

Figure 36: Clicking and Holding on an Individual Bar

• To select multiple bars, hold the Ctrl key and click all desired bars. All elements corresponding
to all selected bars are displayed in the Geometry window.

• To return the Geometry window to the full mesh view (no transparency, all elements are dis-
played), click on empty white space on the graph. Empty white space does not include the
column of white space above a bar, as clicking in this area selects the bar and displays only
those elements associated with it.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
136 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

• If you click in a column for which there are 0 elements, all that is displayed in the Geometry
window is the transparent geometry.

• The graph can be filtered based on element types. See Using the Bar Graph Controls (p. 137)
for more information.

• The graph respects section planes and hiding of bodies in the Geometry window. For example,
if you hide a body and then click an individual bar to view the elements corresponding to the
selected bar, elements in the hidden body are not displayed in the Geometry window, even
if they meet the criteria that the bar represents.

• To zoom the graph, hold the ALT key and use your mouse to define a selection box on the
graph (click the graph and drag the mouse downward and to the right to define the area to
zoom, then release the mouse button). To reset the graph to its initial view, hold the ALT key,
click the graph and drag the mouse downward and to the left, then release the mouse button.

• The values of the X-axis and Y-axis labels on the graph correspond to the visible ranges, rather
than to global values. For example, the value 198 in Figure 36: Clicking and Holding on an In-
dividual Bar (p. 136) is the maximum end of the range for the Y-axis, based on the current
content of the graph. If you zoom the graph or define a new range of values to display as
described in Using the Bar Graph Controls (p. 137), the values of the X-axis and Y-axis labels
change accordingly along with the content of the graph.

Using the Bar Graph Controls

When you click the Controls button on the graph, the graph is replaced by the controls page as
shown in Figure 37: Bar Graph Controls Page (p. 137). Clicking the X button applies any changes on
the controls page and returns you to the graph.

Figure 37: Bar Graph Controls Page

From the controls page shown in Figure 37: Bar Graph Controls Page (p. 137), you can set the following
values:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 137
Global Mesh Controls

• Y-Axis Option - Determines what the heights of the bars represent. Options include Number
of Elements and Percent of Volume/Area. The default is Number of Elements.

• Number of Bars - Determines the number of bars to include in the graph. You can enter any
whole number greater than or equal to 0. The default is 10. When you click Update Y-Axis,
the Min and/or Max values for the Y-Axis are recomputed so that the graph and the Y-Axis
values on the controls page reflect the new number of bars.

• Range - Defines a range for the selected metric to display only those elements that fall within
the specified range.

– X-Axis - Specify a Min and/or Max value. To locate and estimate the number of worst
elements in the mesh, adjust the Min and Max values to the lower or upper end of the
quality criterion (depending on metric) and click Update Y-Axis. (Determining the dis-
tribution and location of all the bad elements at one time is helpful in cases where you
may need to re-import your model into the DesignModeler application to remove the
corresponding problematic geometry.) Click Reset to return to the X-Axis defaults.
(Note: Negative values are acceptable.)

– Y-Axis - Specify a Min and/or Max value. By lowering the Max value, you can clip the
Y-axis for easier visualization of small bars, especially as they relate to different element
types. Click Reset to return to the Y-Axis defaults.

• List of element types - Determines which element types to include in the graph. Element types
that do not appear in the mesh are read-only on the controls page. Select the element types
that you want to include in the graph, or click Select All to include all available element types
in the graph. By default, all available element types are selected.

Note:

Because the bars approximate the metrics across the range of the X-Axis, choosing a very
small number of bars over a large X-Axis range may move the bars away from the actual
average metric of the elements represented by each bar.

Calculation Details
For information about the calculations that are performed for each metric, refer to:
Element Quality
Aspect Ratio Calculation for Triangles
Aspect Ratio Calculation for Quadrilaterals
Aspect Ratio Calculation for Tetrahedrons
Jacobian Ratio
Warping Factor
Parallel Deviation
Maximum Corner Angle
Skewness
Orthogonal Quality

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
138 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

Characteristic Length (Autodyn)

Minimum Tri Angle
Maximum Tri Angle
Minimum Quad Angle
Maximum Quad Angle
Warping Angle
Tet Collapse
Aspect Ratio (Height)
Minimum Element Edge Length
Maximum Element Edge Length
Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA)

Element Quality
The Element Quality option provides a composite quality metric that ranges between 0 and 1. This
metric is based on the ratio of the volume to the sum of the square of the edge lengths for 2D
quad/tri elements, or the square root of the cube of the sum of the square of the edge lengths for
3D elements. A value of 1 indicates a perfect cube or square while a value of 0 indicates that the
element has a zero or negative volume.

This can also be expressed as follows:

• For two-dimensional quad/tri elements:

Note:

For the Mechanical (p. 96) physics preference, if Error Limit is set to Aggressive
Mechanical (p. 127) and the Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes) (p. 142) is less than zero,
an error occurs.

• For three-dimensional brick elements:

The following table lists the value of C for each type of element:

Element Value of C
Triangle 6.92820323
Quadrangle 4.0
Tetrahedron 124.70765802
Hexahedron 41.56921938

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 139
Global Mesh Controls

Wedge 62.35382905
Pyramid 96

Aspect Ratio Calculation for Triangles

The aspect ratio for triangles is calculated using the triangle interior angles. For each triangle node
(corner node, not mid node), a nodal aspect ratio, r, is defined as:

Where, α is the interior angle at the node.

The mean nodal aspect ratio of a triangle is defined as:

Where, is the nodal aspect ratio of the

The aspect ratio of the triangle is defined as:

For Explicit Physics Preference, Aspect Ratio (Height) is calculated as:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
140 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

Aspect Ratio Calculation for Quadrilaterals

The aspect ratio for a quadrilateral is computed by the following steps, using only the corner nodes
of the element (Figure 38: Quadrilateral Aspect Ratio Calculation (p. 141)):

Figure 38: Quadrilateral Aspect Ratio Calculation

1. If the element is not flat, the nodes are projected onto a plane passing through the average of
the corner locations and perpendicular to the average of the corner normals. The remaining
steps are performed on these projected locations.

2. Two lines are constructed that bisect the opposing pairs of element edges and which meet at
the element center. In general, these lines are not perpendicular to each other or to any of the
element edges.

3. Rectangles are constructed centered about each of the 2 lines, with edges passing through the
element edge midpoints. The aspect ratio of the quadrilateral is the ratio of a longer side to a
shorter side of whichever rectangle is most stretched.

4. The best possible quadrilateral aspect ratio, for a square, is one. A quadrilateral having an aspect
ratio of 20 is shown in Figure 39: Aspect Ratios for Quadrilaterals (p. 141).

Figure 39: Aspect Ratios for Quadrilaterals

For Explicit Physics Preference, Aspect Ratio (Height) is calculated as:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 141
Global Mesh Controls

Aspect Ratio Calculation for Tetrahedrons

The aspect ratio for tetrahedrons is defined using four boundary triangles and six mid triangles.
The mid triangles are formed connecting the corner nodes to the shortest distance point of the
adjoining edges.

Tetrahedron Aspect Ratio is defined as the maximum aspect ratio of ten triangles, four boundary
triangles and six projected triangles. Here the boundary triangles are (0,1,2), (0,1,3),(0,2,3), (1,2,3).
The projected triangles formed by connecting the corner angles to the shortest distance point of
the adjoining edges are (0,1,5) (1,2,3), (2,5,1) (0,1,2)(0,2,1) (1,5,2).

Jacobian Ratio
The Jacobian ratio is a measurement of the shape of a given element compared to that of an ideal
element. If an element has a bad quality Jacobian ratio, the element may not map well from element
space to real space, thereby making computations based on the element shape less reliable. The
ideal shape of an element depends on element type.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
142 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

Jacobian ratio is not calculated for triangles and tetrahedra that are linear (no midside nodes) or
have straight-sided midside nodes. This is because the shape function for these types of elements
is linear, and the partial derivatives of linear functions are constant. Therefore, the determinant of
the Jacobian ratio for these types of elements is constant over the entire element, which means R
J (min) = R J (max). For such elements, the Jacobian ratio is always 1.

Jacobian Ratio Calculation

There are two ways to calculate the Jacobian ratio: either based on corner nodes (nodal points) or
based on Gauss points (integration points).

When the Jacobian Be aware that...

ratio calculation is
based on...
A sampling of • The calculation is more restrictive.
element corner
nodes • To view mesh metric information based on this calculation, you must
set Mesh Metric (p. 133) to one of the following:

– Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes), which is bounded by -1 (worst)

and 1 (best) on the mesh metrics bar graph (p. 134). An element
with a Jacobian ratio <= 0 should be avoided.

– Jacobian Ratio (MAPDL), which is used by the MAPDL solver,

is the inverse of Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes). Jacobian Ratio
(MAPDL) is bounded by negative infinity and positive infinity,
but all negative-value elements are collected and arbitrarily
assigned the value -100 for purposes of the mesh metrics bar
graph (p. 134). An element with a Jacobian ratio <= 0 should be
avoided. A Jacobian ratio whose value is close to 1 is best.

Note:

When Physics Preference is set to Mechanical, the Error

Limits (p. 127) option for shape checking is set to Standard
Mechanical. The Jacobian ratio calculation used for Stand-
ard Mechanical checks Gauss points but does not check
corner nodes. This may lead to a situation where you have
an element that has a Jacobian Ratio (Gauss Points) that
is > 0 and a Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes) that is <= 0.

A sampling of • The calculation is less restrictive.

element Gauss
points • To view mesh metric information based on this calculation, you must
set Mesh Metric (p. 133) to Jacobian Ratio (Gauss Points), which is
bounded by -1 (worst) and 1 (best) on the mesh metrics bar
graph (p. 134). An element with a Jacobian ratio <= 0 should be avoided.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 143
Global Mesh Controls

An element's Jacobian ratio is computed by the following steps, using the full set of nodes for the
element:

1. Sampling locations are based on the selected Mesh Metric option [Jacobian Ratio (MAPDL),
Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes), or Jacobian Ratio (Gauss Points)]. At each sampling location
listed in the table below, the determinant of the Jacobian matrix is computed and called RJ. RJ
at a given point represents the magnitude of the mapping function between element natural
coordinates and real space. In an ideally-shaped element, RJ is relatively constant over the ele-
ment, and does not change sign.

Element RJ Sampling Locations for RJ Sampling Locations for Jacobian Ratio

Shape Jacobian Ratio (MAPDL) and (Gauss Points)
Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes)
10-node Corner nodes Four Gauss quadrature points
tetrahedra
5-node or Base corner nodes and near apex 5-node pyramids use 1 Gauss quadrature
13-node node (apex RJ factored so that a point
pyramids pyramid having all edges the
same length will produce a 13-node pyramids use 8 Gauss quadrature
Jacobian ratio of 1) points
8-node Corner nodes and centroid Four Gauss quadrature points
quadrilaterals
20-node All nodes and centroid Eight Gauss quadrature points
bricks
all other Corner nodes Choose the optimal number of Gauss
elements quadrature points for integration

2. For Jacobian Ratio (MAPDL), the Jacobian ratio of the element is the ratio of the maximum to
the minimum sampled value of RJ, while for Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes) and Jacobian Ratio
(Gauss Points), it is the ratio of the minimum to the maximum. For Jacobian Ratio (MAPDL),
if the maximum and minimum have opposite signs, the Jacobian ratio is arbitrarily assigned to
be -100 (and the element is clearly unacceptable).

3. If the element is a midside-node tetrahedron, an additional RJ is computed for a fictitious straight-

sided tetrahedron connected to the 4 corner nodes. For Jacobian Ratio (MAPDL), if that RJ
differs in sign from any nodal RJ (an extremely rare occurrence), the Jacobian ratio is arbitrarily
assigned to be -100. For Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes) and Jacobian Ratio (Gauss Points),
the Jacobian ratio is assigned to be -1.

4. If the element is a line element having a midside node, the Jacobian matrix is not square (because
the mapping is from one natural coordinate to 2-D or 3-D space) and has no determinant. For
this case, a vector calculation is used to compute a number which behaves like a Jacobian ratio.
This calculation has the effect of limiting the arc spanned by a single element to about 106°.

The Jacobian ratio of various element shapes may worsen as follows:

• A triangle or tetrahedron has a Jacobian ratio of 1 if each midside node, if any, is positioned
at the average of the corresponding corner node locations. This is true no matter how oth-

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
144 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

erwise distorted the element may be. Hence, this calculation is skipped entirely for such
elements. Moving a midside node away from the edge midpoint position will worsen the
Jacobian ratio. If the node is moved significantly, the Jacobian ratio will become negative
and the element is invalid.

• Any rectangle or rectangular parallelepiped having no midside nodes, or having midside

nodes at the midpoints of its edges, has a Jacobian ratio of 1. Moving midside nodes toward
or away from each other can worsen the Jacobian ratio. If the node is moved significantly,
the Jacobian ratio will become negative and the element is invalid.

• A quadrilateral or brick has a Jacobian ratio of 1 if (a) its opposing faces are all parallel to
each other, and (b) each midside node, if any, is positioned at the average of the correspond-
ing corner node locations. As a corner node moves near the center, the Jacobian ratio wor-
sens. If the node is moved significantly, the Jacobian ratio will become negative and the
element is invalid.

The figures below illustrate mesh quality by color for Jacobian Ratio (MAPDL) and Jacobian Ratio
(Corner Nodes).

Note:

To view mesh quality by color, in the Details view, set Display Style to the desired metric.
The use of Display Style to color mesh according to quality and the use of mesh met-
rics (p. 133) to view quality statistics are mutually exclusive. For example, when you are
viewing mesh metrics, you cannot also view the mesh quality by color.

Figure 40: Jacobian Ratio (MAPDL)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 145
Global Mesh Controls

Figure 41: Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes)

Jacobian Ratio (Gauss Points) is a good indicator of quality for quadratic tetrahedrons because
its formulation is similar to that used by the solver. However, it is not very helpful for shell meshes.
For shell meshes, Element Quality (p. 139) is a better indicator of mesh quality. For example, the 2D
elements that register as bad in the preceding figures will not necessarily register as bad elements
for the Jacobian Ratio (Gauss Points) mesh metric, as shown below:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
146 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

Figure 42: Jacobian Ratio (Gauss Points)

Warping Factor
Warping factor is computed and tested for some quadrilateral shell elements, and the quadrilateral
faces of bricks, wedges, and pyramids. A high factor may indicate a condition the underlying element
formulation cannot handle well, or may simply hint at a mesh generation flaw.

Warping Factor Calculation for Quadrilateral Shell Elements

A quadrilateral element's warping factor is computed from its corner node positions and other
available data by the following steps:

Note:

When computing the warping factor for a quadrilateral shell element, the Meshing
application assumes 0 thickness for the shell.

1. An average element normal is computed as the vector (cross) product of the 2 diagonals (Fig-
ure 43: Shell Average Normal Calculation (p. 148)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 147
Global Mesh Controls

Figure 43: Shell Average Normal Calculation

2. The projected area of the element is computed on a plane through the average normal (the
dotted outline on Figure 44: Shell Element Projected onto a Plane (p. 148)).

3. The difference in height of the ends of an element edge is computed, parallel to the average
normal. In Figure 44: Shell Element Projected onto a Plane (p. 148), this distance is 2h. Because
of the way the average normal is constructed, h is the same at all four corners. For a flat quad-
rilateral, the distance is zero.

Figure 44: Shell Element Projected onto a Plane

4. The "area warping factor" ( ) for the element is computed as the edge height difference divided
by the square root of the projected area.

5. For all shells except those in the "membrane stiffness only" group, if the thickness is available,
the "thickness warping factor" is computed as the edge height difference divided by the average
element thickness. This could be substantially higher than the area warping factor computed
in 4 (above).

6. The warping factor tested against warning and error limits (and reported in warning and error
messages) is the larger of the area factor and, if available, the thickness factor.

7. The best possible quadrilateral warping factor, for a flat quadrilateral, is zero.

Figure 45: Quadrilateral Shell Having Warping Factor (p. 149) shows a "warped" element plotted on
top of a flat one. Only the right-hand node of the upper element is moved. The element is a unit
square, with a real constant thickness of 0.1.

When the upper element is warped by a factor of 0.01, it cannot be visibly distinguished from the
underlying flat one.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
148 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

When the upper element is warped by a factor of 0.04, it just begins to visibly separate from the
flat one.

Figure 45: Quadrilateral Shell Having Warping Factor

Warping of 0.1 is visible given the flat reference, but seems trivial; however, it is well beyond the
error limit for a membrane shell. Warping of 1.0 is visually unappealing. This is the error limit for
most shells.

Warping beyond 1.0 would appear to be obviously unacceptable. However, SHELL181 permits even
this much distortion. Furthermore, the warping factor calculation seems to peak at about 7.0.
Moving the node further off the original plane, even by much larger distances than shown here,
does not further increase the warping factor for this geometry. Users are cautioned that manually
increasing the error limit beyond its default of 5.0 for these elements could mean no real limit on
element distortion.

Warping Factor Calculation for 3-D Solid Elements

The warping factor for a 3-D solid element face is computed as though the 4 nodes make up a
quadrilateral shell element with no real constant thickness available, using the square root of the
projected area of the face as described in 4 (above).

The warping factor for the element is the largest of the warping factors computed for the 6 quad-
rilateral faces of a brick, 3 quadrilateral faces of a wedge, or 1 quadrilateral face of a pyramid. Any
brick element having all flat faces has a warping factor of zero (Figure 46: Warping Factor for
Bricks (p. 149)).

Figure 46: Warping Factor for Bricks

Twisting the top face of a unit cube by 22.5° and 45° relative to the base produces warping factors
of about 0.2 and 0.4, respectively.

Parallel Deviation
Parallel deviation is computed using the following steps:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 149
Global Mesh Controls

1. Ignoring midside nodes, unit vectors are constructed in 3-D space along each element edge,
adjusted for consistent direction, as demonstrated in Figure 47: Parallel Deviation Unit Vec-
tors (p. 150).

Figure 47: Parallel Deviation Unit Vectors

2. For each pair of opposite edges, the dot product of the unit vectors is computed, then the angle
(in degrees) whose cosine is that dot product. The parallel deviation is the larger of these 2
angles. (In the illustration above, the dot product of the 2 horizontal unit vectors is 1, and acos
(1) = 0°. The dot product of the 2 vertical vectors is 0.342, and acos (0.342) = 70°. Therefore, this
element's parallel deviation is 70°.)

3. The best possible deviation, for a flat rectangle, is 0°. Figure 48: Parallel Deviations for Quadrilat-
erals (p. 150) shows quadrilaterals having deviations of 0°, 70°, 100°, 150°, and 170°.

Figure 48: Parallel Deviations for Quadrilaterals

0 70 100

150 170

Maximum Corner Angle

Maximum corner angle is computed and tested for all except Emag elements. Some in the finite
element community have reported that large angles (approaching 180°) degrade element perform-
ance, while small angles don't.

Maximum Corner Angle Calculation

The maximum angle between adjacent edges is computed using corner node positions in 3-D
space. (Midside nodes, if any, are ignored.) The best possible triangle maximum angle, for an
equilateral triangle, is 60°. Figure 49: Maximum Corner Angles for Triangles (p. 150) shows a triangle
having a maximum corner angle of 165°. The best possible quadrilateral maximum angle, for a flat
rectangle, is 90°. Figure 50: Maximum Corner Angles for Quadrilaterals (p. 151) shows quadrilaterals
having maximum corner angles of 90°, 140° and 180°.

Figure 49: Maximum Corner Angles for Triangles

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
150 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

Figure 50: Maximum Corner Angles for Quadrilaterals

Skewness
Skewness is one of the primary quality measures for a mesh. Skewness determines how close to
ideal (equilateral or equiangular) a face or cell is (see Figure 51: Ideal and Skewed Triangles and
Quadrilaterals (p. 151)).

Figure 51: Ideal and Skewed Triangles and Quadrilaterals

The following table lists the range of skewness values and the corresponding cell quality.

Value of Skewness Cell Quality

1 degenerate
0.9 — <1 bad (sliver)
0.75 — 0.9 poor
0.5 — 0.75 fair
0.25 — 0.5 good
>0 — 0.25 excellent
0 equilateral

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 151
Global Mesh Controls

According to the definition of skewness, a value of 0 indicates an equilateral cell (best) and a value
of 1 indicates a completely degenerate cell (worst). Degenerate cells (slivers) are characterized by
nodes that are nearly coplanar (colinear in 2D).

Highly skewed faces and cells are unacceptable because the equations being solved assume that
the cells are relatively equilateral/equiangular.

Two methods for measuring skewness are:

• Based on the equilateral volume (applies only to triangles and tetrahedra).

• Based on the deviation from a normalized equilateral angle. This method applies to all cell
and face shapes, including pyramids and prisms.

Equilateral-Volume-Based Skewness
In the equilateral volume deviation method, skewness is defined as

where, the optimal cell size is the size of an equilateral cell with the same circumradius.

Quality meshes have a skewness value of approximately 0.1 for 2D and 0.4 for 3D. The table above
provides a general guide to the relationship between cell skewness and quality.

In 2D, all cells should be good or better. The presence of cells that are fair or worse indicates poor
boundary node placement. You should try to improve your boundary mesh as much as possible,
because the quality of the overall mesh can be no better than that of the boundary mesh.

In 3D, most cells should be good or better, but a small percentage will generally be in the fair range
and there are usually even a few poor cells.

Note:

The Equilateral-Volume-Based Skewness quality metric applies to any mesh element that
includes a triangular face. For triangular and tetrahedral elements, all faces of which are
strictly triangular, the Equilateral-Volume-Based Skewness metric applies directly. For
wedge or pyramidal elements, which include combinations of triangular and quadrilat-
eral faces, the Meshing application computes both Equilateral-Volume-Based Skewness
metrics (for the triangular faces) and Normalized Equiangular Skewness metrics (for the
quadrilateral faces and 3-D element, itself ) and reports the maximum computed metric
as the element skewness. As a result, Equilateral-Volume-Based Skewness metrics reported
for meshes that contain wedge and/or pyramidal elements may include skewness values
attributable to Normalized Equiangular Skewness computations.

Normalized Equiangular Skewness

In the normalized angle deviation method, skewness is defined (in general) as

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
152 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

where

θmax = largest angle in the face or cell

θmin = smallest angle in the face or cell

θe = angle for an equiangular face/cell (60 for a triangle, 90 for a square)

For a pyramid, the cell skewness will be the maximum skewness computed for any face. An ideal
pyramid (skewness = 0) is one in which the 4 triangular faces are equilateral (and equiangular) and
the quadrilateral base face is a square. The guidelines in the table above apply to the normalized
equiangular skewness as well.

Orthogonal Quality
The range for orthogonal quality is 0-1, where a value of 0 is worst and a value of 1 is best.

The orthogonal quality for cells is computed using the face normal vector, for each face, the
vector from the cell centroid to the centroid of each of the adjacent cells, ; and the vector from
the cell centroid to each of the faces, . Figure 52: Vectors Used to Compute Orthogonal Quality
for a Cell (p. 153) illustrates the vectors used to determine the orthogonal quality for a cell.

Figure 52: Vectors Used to Compute Orthogonal Quality for a Cell

For each face, the cosines of the angle between and , and between and , are calculated.
The smallest calculated cosine value is the orthogonality of the cell. Finally, Orthogonal Quality
depends on cell type:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 153
Global Mesh Controls

• For tetrahedral, prism, and pyramid cells, the Orthogonal Quality is the minimum of the or-
thogonality and (1 - cell skewness).

• For hexahedral and polyhedral cells, the Orthogonal Quality is the same as the orthogonality.

Note:

• When the cell is located on the boundary, the vector across the boundary face is
ignored during the quality computation.

• When the cell is separated from the adjacent cell by an internal wall (a baffle), the
vector across the internal boundary face is ignored during the quality computation.

• When the adjacent cells share a parent-child relation, the vector is the vector from
the cell centroid to the centroid of the child face while the vector is the vector from
the cell centroid to the centroid of the adjacent child cell sharing the child face.

Orthogonal quality in the Meshing application is equivalent to Inverse Orthogonal Quality in Ansys
Fluent Meshing, except that the scale is reversed:

Inverse Orthogonal Quality = 1 – Orthogonal Quality

The orthogonal quality values may not correspond exactly with the inverse orthogonal quality values
in Ansys Fluent because the computation depends on boundary conditions on internal surfaces
(WALL vs. INTERIOR/INTERNAL/FAN/RADIATOR/POROUS-JUMP). Ansys Fluent may return different
results which reflect the modified mesh topology on which CFD simulations are performed. The
Tetrahedrons assembly algorithm uses only traditional element types.

For more information about Inverse Orthogonal Quality, see Quality Measure.

In a similar way, orthogonal quality for faces is computed as the smallest cosine of the angle between
the edge normal vector, for each edge and the vector from the face centroid to the centroid of
each edge, . Figure 53: Vectors Used to Compute Orthogonal Quality for a Face (p. 155) illustrates
the vectors used to determine the orthogonal quality for a face.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
154 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

Figure 53: Vectors Used to Compute Orthogonal Quality for a Face

Characteristic Length (Autodyn)

Characteristic length (also sometimes called characteristic dimension) is used to compute the time
step that satisfies the Courant-Friedrichs-Lewy (CFL) condition for a given analysis setup.

The CFL condition is of interest mostly in explicit dynamics and computational fluid dynamics
analyses. It governs the maximum time step for which a solution will be stable, and it must be met
for the solution to converge. The CFL condition can be expressed as follows:

where,

f = time step safety factor (commonly/default 0.9)

h = characteristic length
c = material sound speed
such that if you know the characteristic length and material sound speed, you can determine the
time step safety factor.

As h decreases, so does the time step. The definition of h varies based on element type:

Element Type Definition of Characteristic Length (h)

Hexahedral or wedge The volume of the element divided by the square of the

longest diagonal and scaled by

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 155
Global Mesh Controls

Element Type Definition of Characteristic Length (h)

Tetrahedral The minimum distance of any element node to its
opposing element face

Characteristic Length (Autodyn) calculated by the Mesh Metrics and the User Defined Function
are the same.

Note:

Characteristic Length (Autodyn) is available in the Mesh Details view only when
the Characteristic Length (Autodyn) option is set to On in File > Options >
Meshing > Mesh Quality.

Minimum Tri Angle

Minimum Tri Angle is the smallest angle between the two edge elements of the triangular element.
The allowed range of value for Minimum Tri Angle is from 0 to 60 degrees.

Maximum Tri Angle

Maximum Tri Angle is the largest angle between the two edge elements of the triangular element.
The allowed range of value for Maximum Tri Angle is from 60 to 180 degrees.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
156 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

Minimum Quad Angle

Minimum Quad Angle is the smallest angle between the two edge elements of the quadrilateral
mesh. The allowed range of value for Minimum Quad Angle is from 0 to 90 degrees.

Maximum Quad Angle

Maximum Quad Angle is the largest angle between the two edge elements of the quadrilateral
mesh. The allowed range of value for Maximum Quad Angle is from 90 to 180 degrees.

Warping Angle
Warping Angle is the measure of angular deviation of a quad element from the plane. The quad
is divided into two triangles along the diagonal and the angle between the normals of the triangles
are measured. The allowed range of value for Warping Angle is from 0 to 90 degrees.

You can calculate Warping Angle from the faces of volume elements. Warping angle is applicable
to quad faces only. Hence, you cannot compute warping angle for tet elements. You can compute
warping angle for quad elements in sheet and any elements containing quad faces for solid bodies.
A pyramid element has only one quad face for computing the warping angle. The worst warping
angle of all the quad faces determines the warping angle for hex elements.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 157
Global Mesh Controls

Here,

n1 is the normal for Plane-1(1,2,4)

n2 is the normal for Plane-2 (2,3,4)

n3 is the normal for Plane-3 (1,4,3)

n4 is the normal for Plane-4 (1,2,3)

θ1 is the angle between n1 and n2 for Plane-1 and Plane-2.

θ2 is the angle between n3 and n4 for Plane-3 and Plane-4.

Warping Angle is calculated as the max(θ1,θ2). Warping Angle is measure of how far the two tri-
angles deviate from being coplanar. A warpage angle of 0 denotes the quad is perfectly planar
whereas larger angles denote more warping.

Tet Collapse
Tet Collapse is defined as the :

min{h/[1.24*sqrt(A)]}

where,

h is the height of a corner node to opposite tet face

A is the area of the tet face

The allowed range of value for Tet Collapse is from 0 to 1.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
158 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quality Group

Aspect Ratio (Height)

Aspect Ratio (Height) is the ratio of the longest edge of an element to its shortest edge or it is
the shortest distance from the corner node to its opposite edge. For calculating the aspect ratio of
3D elements, each face of the element is treated as 2D element to determine the aspect ratio and
the largest aspect ratio among the faces is considered as the aspect ratio for the 3D element.

The Aspect Ratio is calculated as follows:

AR= lmax/min(l,h*)

where,

lmax is the maximum edge length.

lmin is the minimum edge length.

l is the linear edge length

h is the height of the node to the non-connected face edges

hmin is the minimum face height

hmax is the maximum face height

h* is the normalized height

• For triangular elements, the normalized height is calculated as

h*=2/sqrt(3)*h

• For quadrilateral elements, the normalized height is

h*=h

For tetrahedron elements, Aspect Ratio (Height) is the ratio of longest edge of an element to its
shortest height measured from a node to its opposing face.

Minimum Element Edge Length

Minimum Element Edge Length is the shortest edge length of an element. For quadratic mesh,
the length is the total of two segments from the start node to mid node and the end node to mid
node.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 159
Global Mesh Controls

Maximum Element Edge Length

Maximum Element Edge Length is the longest edge length of an element. For quadratic mesh,
the length is the total of two segments from the start node to mid node and the end node to mid
node.

Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA)

Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA) (also called characteristic dimension) is used to compute the
time step that satisfies the Courant-Friedrichs-Lewy (CFL) condition for a given analysis setup. The
CFL condition is of interest mostly in explicit dynamics and computational fluid dynamics analyses.
It governs the maximum time step for which a solution will be stable.

Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA) has different definition for different element type.

For Tetrahedron elements,

where,

h is the height of a tetrahedron element from a node to its opposite face.

For Hex elements,

where,

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
160 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Inflation Group

V is the volume of the hex element

A is area of the element face

For Pyramid (5-node solid element), Explicit analysis does not use pyramid element and therefore
no definition for this element type. To avoid graphic display issues for element summary, pyramid
height is used for this element type.

where, h is the height of the apex node to the base of the pyramid. Here, the base quad face can
be divided into 4 different triangles, the minimum height to these 4 triangles is used.

For Shell elements and Quad elements,

where,

A is element area

L is element edge length

D is the diagonal of quad element.

For Tri element,

where,

A is element area

L is element edge length

For Beam element, the characteristic length is the linear length to the beam element.

Inflation Group
Inflation is useful for CFD boundary layer resolution, electromagnetic air gap resolution or resolving
high stress concentrations for structures. Inflation is supported for the following mesh methods:

Volume Meshing:

• Patch Conforming (p. 208)

• Patch Independent (p. 210)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 161
Global Mesh Controls

• Sweep (p. 235)

Note:

Inflation is supported for the sweep mesh method only when the Src/Trg Selection option
is set to either Manual Source or Manual Source and Target.

• MultiZone (p. 242)

Surface Meshing:

• Quad Dominant (p. 282)

• All Triangles (p. 284)

• MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284)

Figure 54: Inflation into Volume Mesh Methods (p. 162) illustrates inflation into the patch conforming,
patch independent, sweep, and MultiZone mesh methods respectively.

Figure 54: Inflation into Volume Mesh Methods

Defining Global Inflation Controls

The Inflation group of global mesh controls appears in the Details View when the Mesh object is selected
in the Tree Outline. The options in the Inflation group provide global control over all inflation bound-
aries.

In most cases, the controls in the Inflation group apply to both 3D and 2D inflation. Additional inform-
ation that is specific to 2D inflation is noted where applicable.

Basic options include:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
162 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Inflation Group

Use Automatic Inflation

Inflation Option
Transition Ratio
Maximum Layers
Growth Rate
Number of Layers
Maximum Thickness
First Layer Height
First Aspect Ratio
Aspect Ratio (Base/Height)
Inflation Algorithm
Inflation Element Type
View Advanced Options

Defining Local Inflation Controls

In addition to setting global inflation controls, you can use local (scoped) inflation controls to apply
inflation to specific boundaries. In most cases, the values that you set globally will be populated to the
local inflation controls. If you subsequently make changes to the local inflation settings, the local settings
will override the global settings. For details, refer to Inflation Control (p. 345).

Inflation and Mesh Method Controls

For steps to follow to assign inflation depending on the selected mesh method, refer to Inflation Con-
trols (p. 453). For general information on applying inflation controls in combination with the various
mesh method controls, refer to Meshing: Mesh Control Interaction Tables (p. 475).

Use Automatic Inflation

You can set the Use Automatic Inflation control so that inflation boundaries are selected automat-
ically depending on whether or not they are members of Named Selections groups. The following
options are available:
None
Program Controlled
All Faces in Chosen Named Selection

Remember the following information when using inflation:

• Automatic inflation is supported only for 3D inflation on volume models. It is not supported for 2D
inflation on shell models. You cannot select Program Controlled (p. 164) or All Faces in Chosen
Named Selection (p. 165) for the Use Automatic Inflation option to mesh a 2D model. To apply
2D inflation on a shell model, use local inflation mesh controls (p. 345) instead.

• In the following scenarios, using inflation results in automatic suppression of the refinement (p. 313)
control:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 163
Global Mesh Controls

– When automatic inflation (either Program Controlled (p. 164) or All Faces in Chosen Named
Selection (p. 165)) is used with refinement in the same model

– When local inflation (p. 345) is used with refinement in the same body or in the same part

• In general, using a mixture of local inflation and automatic inflation within the same part is not re-
commended. When you mix local and automatic inflation, the local inflation settings will be used
for the bodies to which they are applied. The automatic inflation settings will create inflation only
on those bodies that do not have local inflation applied to them. The automatic inflation settings
will ignore all bodies and all attached faces to which local inflation settings are applied.

None
If you select None, inflation boundaries are not selected globally. Instead, the inflation boundaries
that you identify using the local inflation mesh controls (p. 345) are used. This is the default.

Program Controlled
Program Controlled inflation operates differently depending on whether meshing occurs at the
part/body level or assembly level.

Note:

Program Controlled inflation is only supported for 3D models.

Program Controlled Inflation for Part/Body Level Meshing

If you are using a mesh method that operates at the part/body level and you select Program
Controlled inflation, all faces in the model are selected to be inflation boundaries, except for the
following:

• Faces in Named Selection(s)

Note:

– By default, faces in Named Selections are not selected to be inflation boundaries

when Use Automatic Inflation is set to Program Controlled. However, you can
select specific Named Selections to be included in Program Controlled inflation.
For details, see the discussion of Named Selections and Program Controlled inflation
in the Mechanical help.

– When you select Use Automatic Inflation as Program Controlled and add or re-
move a named selection, the application assumes the scoped faces have changed.
Hence, the mesh becomes obsolete and must be regenerated.

• Faces in Contact region(s)

• Faces in Symmetry definition

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
164 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Inflation Group

• Faces that belong to a part/body that has a mesh method defined on it that does not support
3D inflation definitions (mesh method is set to Sweep (p. 235) or Hex Dominant (p. 233))

• Faces in sheet bodies

• Faces on bodies that have manual inflation controls

When Program Controlled automatic inflation is used for part or body level meshing, the mesher
inflates in the following manner:

• For single body parts, the face always inflates into the body.

• For multibody parts with a mix of fluid and solid parts:

– Faces on fluid region inflate into fluid region, solid region is not inflated.

– Faces on parts of the same material are not inflated.

• For parts of the same material, shared faces are not inflated.

The manner in which inflation is applied depends on values that you enter for the following options:

• Inflation Option (p. 166)

• Inflation Algorithm (p. 170)

• Inflation Element Type (p. 174)

• View Advanced Options (p. 174)

Note:

When Program Controlled automatic inflation is being used for part/body level meshing,
you can view the surfaces that have been selected for inflation by using the Show
Program Controlled Inflation Surfaces (p. 536) feature.

All Faces in Chosen Named Selection

If you select All Faces in Chosen Named Selection, a Named Selection field is displayed to let
you scope inflation to the Named Selection. The manner in which inflation is applied to the Named
Selections group depends on values that you enter for the following options:

• Inflation Option (p. 166)

• Inflation Algorithm (p. 170)

• Inflation Element Type (p. 174)

• View Advanced Options (p. 174)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 165
Global Mesh Controls

Inflation Option
The Inflation Option settings determine the heights of the inflation layers. The following options are
available:

• Smooth Transition - This is the default. The Smooth Transition option uses the local tetrahedral
element size to compute each local initial height and total height so that the rate of volume change
is smooth. Each triangle that is being inflated will have an initial height that is computed with respect
to its area, averaged at the nodes. This means that for a uniform mesh, the initial heights will be
roughly the same, while for a varying mesh, the initial heights will vary.

The computations used for prism layer growth are as follows:

– The following value is computed at each node on the prism base:

Height of last prism (H) = Transition Ratio (p. 168) * average edge length

– The height of the first layer (h) is computed using the following formula, where g = Growth
Rate (p. 169), n = Number of Layers (p. 169) and H = Height of last prism:

H = h * (g ^ (n-1))

Increasing the value of the Growth Rate control reduces the total height of the inflation layer. The
total height approaches an asymptotic value with respect to the number of inflation layers.

For details about the additional controls that appear when Smooth Transition is selected, refer to
the descriptions of the Transition Ratio (p. 168), Maximum Layers (p. 169), and Growth Rate (p. 169)
controls.

Note:

The Smooth Transition option works differently for the MultiZone mesh method. See
MultiZone Support for Inflation (p. 440) for details.

• Total Thickness - The Total Thickness option creates constant inflation layers using the values of
the Number of Layers and Growth Rate controls to obtain a total thickness as defined by the
value of the Maximum Thickness control. Unlike inflation with the Smooth Transition option,
with the Total Thickness option the thickness of the first inflation layer and each following layer
is constant.

For details about the additional controls that appear when Total Thickness is selected, refer to
the descriptions of the Number of Layers (p. 169), Growth Rate (p. 169), and Maximum Thickness (p. 169)
controls.

• First Layer Thickness - The First Layer Thickness option creates constant inflation layers using
the values of the First Layer Height, Maximum Layers, and Growth Rate controls to generate
the inflation mesh. Unlike inflation with the Smooth Transition option, with the First Layer
Thickness option the thickness of the first inflation layer and each following layer is constant.

For details about the additional controls that appear when First Layer Thickness is selected, refer
to the descriptions of the First Layer Height (p. 169), Maximum Layers (p. 169), and Growth Rate (p. 169)
controls.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
166 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Inflation Group

• First Aspect Ratio - The First Aspect Ratio option creates inflation layers using the values of the
First Aspect Ratio, Maximum Layers, and Growth Rate controls to generate the inflation mesh.

Post inflation (p. 173) is not supported when Inflation Option is First Aspect Ratio.

For details about the additional controls that appear when First Aspect Ratio is selected, refer to
the descriptions of the First Aspect Ratio (p. 170), Maximum Layers (p. 169), and Growth Rate (p. 169)
controls.

• Last Aspect Ratio - The Last Aspect Ratio option creates inflation layers using the values of the
First Layer Height, Maximum Layers, and Aspect Ratio (Base/Height) controls to generate the
inflation mesh.

Figure 55: Last Aspect Ratio Option (p. 167) illustrates this option. With the Last Aspect Ratio
method, the First Layer Height is specified. The offset height for the last layer is calculated from
the local base mesh size and specified Aspect Ratio (base/height). For example, if you specify a
value of 3 for Aspect Ratio (base/height), the offset height of the last layer will be the local base
mesh size divided by 3. The local growth rate is calculated using Maximum layers to create expo-
nential growth through the intermediate layers.

Figure 55: Last Aspect Ratio Option

Post inflation (p. 173) is not supported when Inflation Option is Last Aspect Ratio.

For details about the additional controls that appear when Last Aspect Ratio is selected, refer to
the descriptions of the First Layer Height (p. 169), Maximum Layers (p. 169), and Aspect Ratio
(Base/Height) (p. 170) controls.

Note:

For bodies meshed with the Body Fitted Cartesian method, the Inflation option cannot
be changed. If Physics Preference is set to CFD, then three inflation layers are created

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 167
Global Mesh Controls

with total thickness proportional to Element Size. For any other physics preference, a
single inflation layer is created with thickness proportional to element size.

Transition Ratio
In basic terms, the Transition Ratio control determines the rate at which adjacent elements grow. It
is the volume-based size change between the last layer of elements in the inflation layer and the first
elements in the tetrahedron region. The value of Transition Ratio is an ideal value and should produce
accurate size change for inflation from a planar boundary. However, be aware that areas of strong
curvature will introduce an inaccuracy into the size change. If proximity (p. 105) detection is activated,
elements in proximity and elements with prism aspect ratios meeting the value defined by the Max-
imum Height over Base (p. 177) control will ignore this transition ratio.

The Transition Ratio control is applicable only when Inflation Option (p. 166) is Smooth Transition.
Valid values for Transition Ratio are from 0 to 1. When Physics Preference (p. 96) is set to CFD and
Solver Preference (p. 99) is set to CFX, the default for Transition Ratio is 0.77. For all other physics
preferences, including CFD when Solver Preference is set to either Fluent or Polyflow Classic, the
default is 0.272.

The reason for this difference is because the Fluent and Polyflow Classic solvers use a cell-centered
scheme for transition ratio. In a cell-centered scheme, the fluid flow variables are allocated at the
center of the computational cell, and the mesh-element is the same as the solver-element. In contrast,
the CFX solver uses a vertex-centered scheme. In a vertex-centered scheme, the fluid flow variables
are stored at the cell vertex, and the solver-element is a "dual" of the mesh-element. This means that
the vertex of the mesh-element is the center of the solver-element. The difference between the two
schemes is illustrated in the figure below.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
168 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Inflation Group

Maximum Layers
The Maximum Layers control determines the maximum number of inflation layers to be created in
the mesh. Valid values are from 1 to 1000. The default is 5 for solid bodies and 2 for surface bodies.

If you set a different number of maximum layers on adjacent regions, stair stepping will be used
between the regions.

The Maximum Layers control is applicable only when Inflation Option (p. 166) is Smooth Transition,
First Layer Thickness, First Aspect Ratio, or Last Aspect Ratio.

Note:

For Explicit physics preference, the default value is 1.

Growth Rate
The Growth Rate control determines the relative thickness of adjacent inflation layers. As you move
away from the face to which the inflation control is applied, each successive layer is approximately
one growth rate factor thicker than the previous one. Valid values are from 0.1 to 5.0. The default is
1.2.

The Growth Rate control is applicable only when Inflation Option (p. 166) is Smooth Transition, First
Layer Thickness, Total Thickness, or First Aspect Ratio.

Number of Layers
The Number of Layers control determines the actual number of inflation layers in the mesh, except
in places where layers are removed locally for reasons of improving mesh quality (for example, in
areas where inflation layers would otherwise collide with each other). Valid values are from 1 to 1000.
The default is 5 for solid bodies and 2 for surface bodies.

If you set a different number of layers on adjacent regions, stair stepping will be used between the
regions.

The Number of Layers control is applicable only when Inflation Option (p. 166) is Total Thickness.

Maximum Thickness
The Maximum Thickness control determines the desired thickness of the inflation layer. You must
enter a value for this control, and it must be greater than 0.

The Maximum Thickness control is applicable only when Inflation Option (p. 166) is Total Thickness.

First Layer Height

The First Layer Height control determines the height of the first inflation layer. This first inflation
layer consists of a single layer of prism elements that is formed against the faces of the inflation
boundary. You must enter a value for this control, and it must be greater than 0.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 169
Global Mesh Controls

The First Layer Height control is applicable only when Inflation Option (p. 166) is First Layer Thickness
or Last Aspect Ratio.

First Aspect Ratio

By choosing the First Aspect Ratio option for the Inflation Option control, you can control the
heights of the inflation layers by defining the aspect ratio of the inflations that are extruded from the
inflation base. The aspect ratio is defined as the ratio of the local inflation base size to the inflation
layer height. Use the First Aspect Ratio control to specify the first aspect ratio to be used. Enter a
value greater than 0. The default is 5.

The First Aspect Ratio control is applicable only when Inflation Option (p. 166) is First Aspect Ratio.

Aspect Ratio (Base/Height)

By choosing the Last Aspect Ratio option for the Inflation Option control, you can control the
heights of the inflation layers by defining the aspect ratio of the inflations that are extruded from the
inflation base. The aspect ratio is defined as the ratio of the local inflation base size to the inflation
layer height. Use the Aspect Ratio (Base/Height) control to specify the aspect ratio to be used. Enter
a value between 0.5 and 20. The default is 1.5 when Solver Preference (p. 99) is CFX, and 3 when
Solver Preference (p. 99) is Fluent or Polyflow.

The Aspect Ratio (Base/Height) control is applicable only when Inflation Option (p. 166) is Last Aspect
Ratio.

Inflation Algorithm
The Inflation Algorithm control determines which inflation algorithm will be used. Options for Infla-
tion Algorithm are Pre and Post and are dependent upon the selected mesh method.

Note:

Post Inflation is being deprecated and will be removed in future releases.

The following table shows which inflation algorithms are applicable to each mesh method. For inform-
ation on how the inflation algorithm is handled when a combination of mesh methods is being used,
see Interactions Between Mesh Methods (p. 475).

Mesh Method Inflation Algorithm

Pre Post
Patch Yes, 3D Yes, 3D
Conforming
Tetrahedrons (p. 208)
Patch N/A Yes, 3D
Independent
Tetrahedrons (p. 210)
Hex N/A N/A
Dominant (p. 233)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
170 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Inflation Group

Mesh Method Inflation Algorithm

Pre Post
Sweep (p. 235) Yes, 2D. Occurs in the following N/A
manner: 1) source face is meshed with
triangles, 2) inflation occurs on tri
surface mesh, and 3) source is swept.
Intervals on source and target are
fixed.
MultiZone (p. 242) The Inflation Algorithm displays as N/A
Pre but an O-grid-based algorithm
specific to MultiZone is used. As with
the Pre inflation algorithm, the mesh
is inflated during the meshing
process.
MultiZone The Inflation Algorithm displays Yes, 2D
Quad/Tri (p. 284) as Pre but an O-grid-based
algorithm specific to MultiZone
Quad/Tri is used. As with the Pre
inflation algorithm, the mesh is
inflated during the meshing
process.
Quad Yes, 2D N/A
Dominant (p. 282)
All Yes, 2D N/A
Triangles (p. 284)
Cartesian (p. 261) The Inflation Algorithm displays N/A
as Pre but algorithm specific to
Body Fitted Cartesian is used.
As with the Pre inflation
algorithm, the mesh is inflated
during the meshing process.

Note:

• 3D only

• If Physics Prefer-
ence is CFD, then 3
layers are created.
For other physics
preferences, only
one layer is created.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 171
Global Mesh Controls

Pre
When Pre is selected, the surface mesh will be inflated first, and then the rest of the volume mesh
will be generated. This is the default for all physics types.

Remember the following information:

• Inflation Algorithm must be set to Pre for the Previewing Inflation (p. 534) feature to work.

• When Inflation Option (p. 166) is either First Aspect Ratio or Last Aspect Ratio, Inflation Algorithm
is set to Pre and is read-only.

• Hard points are not supported and may be ignored for 3D Pre inflation.

• Hard edges are not supported and may be ignored for Pre inflation.

• In some cases an additional smoothing attempt will be performed automatically. Refer to

Smoothing (p. 133) for details.

• Match controls (p. 334) on faces are supported with Pre inflation, regardless of whether inflation is
set to Program Controlled (p. 164) or has been set through any global or local inflation definition.
In contrast, match controls on edges are not supported with Pre inflation. Match controls (both
faces and edges) are not supported with Post inflation (p. 173). For all these non-supported cases,
Ansys Workbench automatically suppresses/disables the Match Control feature.

• For swept meshes with inflation (p. 454) and match control (p. 334), inflation is performed ahead of
the match mesh and sweeping. This can affect the sizings on the match controls, which can in turn
lead to meshing failure. Therefore, when using both match controls and inflation with sweeping,
it might improve meshing robustness if you assign hard edge sizings (p. 300) to the high and low
edges of the source face for the sweep.

Pre Inflation and Different Numbers of Layers on Adjacent Faces

The Pre Inflation Algorithm does not support the definition of different numbers of inflation layers
on adjacent faces. For example, Figure 56: Different Numbers of Layers Are Respected (p. 172) shows
a case in which different numbers of inflation layers have been specified on two faces. Since the faces
are not connected, the different numbers of layers are respected.

Figure 56: Different Numbers of Layers Are Respected

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
172 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Inflation Group

Now assume that the Inflation controls shown in Figure 57: Portion of Project Tree (p. 173) define four
inflation layers for the Inflation control, five inflation layers for the Inflation 2 control, and two inflation
layers for the Inflation 3 control, and that the controls are defined on adjacent faces.

Figure 57: Portion of Project Tree

In this case, although different numbers of inflation layers were defined, a two-layer (fewest number
of layers defined) inflation mesh is generated as shown in Figure 58: Different Numbers of Layers Are
Not Respected (p. 173).

Figure 58: Different Numbers of Layers Are Not Respected

Post
When Post is selected, a postprocessing technique that works after the tetrahedral mesh is generated
is used. A benefit of this option is that the tetrahedral mesh does not have to be generated each
time the inflation options are changed.

Remember the following information:

• Match controls (p. 334) on faces are supported with Pre inflation (p. 172), regardless of whether in-
flation is set to Program Controlled (p. 164) or has been set through any global or local inflation
definition. In contrast, match controls on edges are not supported with Pre inflation. Match controls
(both faces and edges) are not supported with Post inflation. For all these non-supported cases,
Ansys Workbench automatically suppresses/disables the Match Control feature.

• Post inflation is not supported when there is a mixture of tetrahedron and non-tetrahedron mesh
methods applied to the bodies in a multibody part. If you want to apply Post inflation to a multibody
part, all bodies in the part must have a tetrahedron mesh method applied to them.

• Post inflation is not supported when Inflation Option (p. 166) is either First Aspect Ratio or Last
Aspect Ratio.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 173
Global Mesh Controls

• Refer to Using the Mesh Worksheet to Create a Selective Meshing History (p. 448) for information
about how Post inflation operations are processed by the Mesh worksheet.

Inflation Element Type

Inflation Element Type determines the element type for creating inflation layer. The default value
is Wedges. The available options are:

• Wedges: Creates inflation layers containing wedge elements.

• Tetrahedrons: Creates inflation layers containing tetrahedron elements.

View Advanced Options

The View Advanced Options control determines whether advanced inflation options appear in the
Details View. Choices are No (default) and Yes. When this control is set to Yes, the following options
are available:
Collision Avoidance
Maximum Height over Base
Growth Rate Type
Maximum Angle
Fillet Ratio
Use Post Smoothing
Smoothing Iterations

Note:

In addition to viewing and/or modifying the advanced inflation options in the Details View,
you can view and/or modify them by using the Options dialog box (p. 389).

Collision Avoidance
The Collision Avoidance control determines the approach that is to be taken in areas of proximity
to avoid collisions that may occur from marching inflated surface meshes from opposite sides into
each other.

For 2D inflation, the Collision Avoidance control detects geometry limitations in faces that would
otherwise cause inflation mesh to overlap or cross face boundaries, or result in a space that is so
small that it leads to bad quality mesh for the remaining region of inflation mesh. When Collision
Avoidance is set to Layer Compression or Stair Stepping, the value of the Gap Factor (p. 177)
control, along with the local mesh size, will determine how much space will be adequate for the
remaining region of inflation mesh.

Note:

• The option that you choose for Collision Avoidance is used only in areas of proximity.
In areas of proximity, if the option is set to Layer Compression, layer compression is

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
174 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Inflation Group

performed. If it is set to Stair Stepping, stair stepping is performed. If it is set to None,

no collision checking is performed. However, in all other problematic scenarios (for
example, invalid normals, quality failure, bad surface mesh and so on), local stair
stepping is performed regardless of which option you choose.

• When Collision Avoidance is set to Layer Compression and local stair stepping occurs
after compression, poor quality pyramids may be introduced into the mesh. Because
of this possibility, a warning message will appear whenever stair stepping occurs after
compression. The message will not identify the location of the stair stepping. However,
the location of the stair stepping with added pyramids often coincides with the location
of the worst quality element (specifically, when considering the Skewness metric).
For this reason, using the Meshing application's Mesh Metric (p. 133) feature to locate
the worst quality element (based on Skewness) is also likely to locate the pyramids.

• The Collision Avoidance option is not used for MultiZone (p. 440) as the inflation
layers are created within the blocking approach.

The following options are available:

• None - The None option does not check for layer collisions. Selecting this option speeds up in-
flation layer computation time. However, it can result in an invalid mesh and mesh failures. For
these reasons, this option is not recommended.

For 2D inflation, if a collision/proximity limitation is detected during layer creation, creation of

inflation layers stops with the previous layer. (Inflation stops completely; contrast with Stair
Stepping below.)

• Layer Compression - The Layer Compression option compresses inflation layers in areas of
collision. In these areas, the defined heights and ratios are reduced to ensure the same number
of layers throughout the entire inflation region. Generally, this option is best for avoiding the
creation of pyramids in the mesh. Layer Compression is the default only when the Physics
Preference (p. 96) is set to CFD and the Solver Preference (p. 99) is set to Fluent; otherwise,
the default is Stair Stepping.

For 2D inflation, if a collision/proximity limitation is detected during layer creation, inflation

heights will shrink locally. If Fix First Layer (p. 176) is set to Yes, the First Layer Height (p. 169) will
not be scaled.

For details about the additional controls that appear when Layer Compression is selected, refer
to the descriptions of the Fix First Layer (p. 176) and Gap Factor (p. 177) controls.

• Stair Stepping - Rather than compressing the prism layers, with Stair Stepping the prism layers
are "stair stepped" in the proximity region to avoid collision and to maintain the gap defined by
Gap Factor (p. 177). The Stair Stepping approach to inflation growth locally reduces inflation
layers to avoid collisions, as well as bad quality elements in sharp or tight corners. The term "stair
stepping" refers to the steps created between one layer and the next. Using this approach, special
logic is used to fill the steps with pyramid and tetrahedron elements for prism steps, or prism,
pyramid, and tetrahedron elements for hex steps. This special logic helps the mesher obtain a
high-quality transition to the tetrahedral mesh. Stair Stepping is the default, unless the Physics
Preference (p. 96) is set to CFD and the Solver Preference (p. 99) is set to Fluent, in which
case the default is Layer Compression.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 175
Global Mesh Controls

For 2D inflation, if a collision/proximity limitation is detected during layer creation, creation of

inflation layers stops locally. (Contrast with None above.)

An additional control, for Gap Factor (p. 177), appears when Stair Stepping is selected.

The figures below illustrate how the Layer Compression and Stair Stepping options differ.

Figure 59: Layer Compression vs. Stair Stepping Option (Full Mesh View)

Figure 60: Layer Compression vs. Stair Stepping Option (Detail View)

Fix First Layer

The Fix First Layer control determines whether the heights or ratios of the first inflation layer
will be modified to avoid collision. Valid values are Yes and No. The default is No. This option
will not allow the value that is set for the First Layer Height (p. 169) control to be changed.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
176 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Inflation Group

The Fix First Layer control is applicable only when Collision Avoidance (p. 174) is Layer Compres-
sion.

Gap Factor
The Gap Factor control allows maintenance of the gap between intersecting prisms. Valid values
are from 0 to 2. The default is 0.5. A value of 1 means a gap equal to the ideal tet cell height
based on base face size in proximity to each other is maintained.

The Gap Factor control is applicable only when Collision Avoidance (p. 174) is Layer Compression
or Stair Stepping

Note:

For Explicit physics preference, the default value is 0.1

Maximum Height over Base

The Maximum Height over Base control sets the maximum allowable prism aspect ratio (that is,
the ratio of height over base of the base triangle). When the prism aspect ratio reaches this value,
the height of the prisms stops growing. That is, new prisms continue to form, but the heights of
the prisms will not increase. Valid values are from 0.1 to 5. The default is 1.0.

For 2D inflation, the Maximum Height over Base control helps to maintain a good size ratio. Once
the inflation height is greater than the local mesh size multiplied by the value of Maximum Height
over Base, the inflation height stops growing. New layers continue to form, but the heights of the
inflation layers will not increase. New layers that form will be equal to the inflation base size multi-
plied by the value of Maximum Height over Base.

Growth Rate Type

The Growth Rate Type control determines the height of the inflation layers given the initial height
and height ratio. The following options are available:

• Geometric - This is the default. With this option, the prism height of a particular layer is defined
by h*r(n-1), where h = initial height, r = height ratio, and n = layer number. The total height at
layer n is: h(1–rn)/(1–r).

• Exponential - With this option, the prism height of a particular layer is defined by h*e(n-1)p, where
h = initial height, p = exponent, and n = layer number.

• Linear - With this option, the prism height of a particular layer is defined by h(1+(n-1)(r-1)), where
h = initial height, r = height ratio, and n = layer number. The total height at layer n is: nh((n-1)(r-
1)+2)/2.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 177
Global Mesh Controls

Maximum Angle
The Maximum Angle control determines prism layer growth around angles and when prisms will
adhere (project) to adjacent surfaces/walls. If the inflated mesh involves extruding from one surface
and not its neighbor, and the angle between the two surfaces is less than the specified value, the
prisms (sides) will adhere (project) to the adjacent wall. Valid values are from 90 to 180 (degrees).
Typically, a value between 120 and 180 is desirable. The default is 140. Refer to the figures below
for examples of maximum angle.

For 2D inflation, the Maximum Angle control determines whether an edge that is adjacent to an
inflation edge can be imprinted with inflation mesh. If the angle between the two edges is smaller
than the value of Maximum Angle, the inflation mesh will be imprinted on the adjacent edge. On
the other hand, if the angle between the two edges is larger than the value of Maximum Angle,
the inflation mesh will not be imprinted on the adjacent edge.

In Figure 61: Maximum Angle = 140 (p. 178), the angle between the planes is 158.2 (21.8) degrees.
Since the maximum angle is less than the angle between the walls, the prism layers are capped
with pyramids.

Figure 61: Maximum Angle = 140

In Figure 62: Maximum Angle = 180 (p. 178), the maximum angle exceeds the separation angle
between the surfaces, so the prism remains attached to the adjacent surface.

Figure 62: Maximum Angle = 180

Fillet Ratio
The Fillet Ratio control determines whether a fillet proportional to the total height of a prism ele-
ment will be created when a prism element is generated in the corner zone of a tetrahedral mesh.
Creating a fillet proportional to the total height of the prism makes it possible to control the

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
178 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Inflation Group

smoothness of the prism layer. Valid values are from 0 to 1 (decimal values are allowed). A value
of 0 means no fillets. The default is 1. Refer to the figures below for examples of fillet ratio.

Note:

For meshing corners with angles less than 60 degrees, there may not be space for
a fillet.

Figure 63: Fillet Ratio = 0.0

In the figure below, the radius of the inner prism fillet is 0.5 times the height of the total prism
thickness.

Figure 64: Fillet Ratio = 0.5

Figure 65: Fillet Ratio = 1.0

Use Post Smoothing

The Use Post Smoothing control determines whether post-inflation smoothing will be performed.
Smoothing attempts to improve element quality by moving the locations of nodes with respect to

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 179
Global Mesh Controls

surrounding nodes and elements. Valid values are Yes and No. The default is Yes. When this control
is set to Yes, the Smoothing Iterations (p. 180) control appears in the Details View.

Smoothing Iterations
The Smoothing Iterations control determines the number of post-inflation smoothing iterations
that will be performed to improve the mesh. Valid values are from 1 to 20. The default is 5.

The Smoothing Iterations control is applicable only when Use Post Smoothing (p. 179) is Yes.

Advanced Group
The Advanced group allows you to control these options:
Number of CPUs for Parallel Part Meshing
Straight Sided Elements
Rigid Body Behavior
Triangle Surface Mesher
Topology Checking
Pinch
Loop Removal

Number of CPUs for Parallel Part Meshing

Number of CPUs for Parallel Part Meshing: Sets the number of processors to be used for parallel
part meshing. Using the default for specifying multiple processors will enhance meshing performance
on geometries with multiple parts. For parallel part meshing, the default is set to Program Controlled
or 0. This instructs the mesher to use all available CPU cores. The Default setting inherently limits 2
GB memory per CPU core. An explicit value can be specified between 0 and 256, where 0 is the default.
Refer to Parallel Part Meshing (p. 472) for more details.

Straight Sided Elements

The Straight Sided Elements option (which is displayed when the model includes an enclosure from
the DesignModeler application), specifies meshing to straight edge elements when set to Yes. You
must set this option to Yes for Electromagnetic simulations.

This option may affect the placement of midside nodes if the Element Order option is set to Quad-
ratic.

Example 3: Midside Node Placement with Straight Sided Elements

In this example, the mesh is generated with straight sided elements with midside nodes.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
180 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Advanced Group

Generating the mesh without straight sided elements results in midside nodes that capture the
curvature of the model. If an element edge corresponds to geometry that is curved, the element's
edge will be curved. Likewise, if an element edge corresponds to geometry that is straight, the ele-
ment's edge will be straight.

Straight Sided Elements is not available if the Element Order option is set to Linear.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 181
Global Mesh Controls

Rigid Body Behavior

The Rigid Body Behavior option determines whether a full mesh is generated for a rigid body, rather
than a surface contact mesh. Rigid Body Behavior is applicable to all body types. Valid values for
Rigid Body Behavior are Dimensionally Reduced (generate surface contact mesh only) and Full
Mesh (generate full mesh). The default is Dimensionally Reduced unless the Physics Preference
(p. 96) is set to Explicit. For more information, refer to Rigid Body Meshing (p. 463).

For Explicit, the default behavior is Full Mesh, but Dimensionally Reduced is also available. The
differences between the two options when the Physics Preference is set to Explicit are highlighted
in the table below.

Explicit behavior Full Mesh (default) Dimensionally Reduced

Rigid properties From Mesh, computed in Explicit Solver From Geometry, computed in
Mechanical
Mesh Tets/hexas for solids, Quad/tria for Quad/tria for both solids and shells
shells

Triangle Surface Mesher

The Triangle Surface Mesher control determines which triangle surface meshing strategy will be
used by patch conforming meshers. In general, the advancing front algorithm provides a smoother
size variation and better results for skewness (p. 151) and orthogonal quality (p. 153). The following
options are available:

• Program Controlled - This is the default. The mesher determines whether to use the Delaunay or
advancing front algorithm based on a variety of factors such as surface type, face topology, and
defeatured boundaries.

• Advancing Front - The mesher uses advancing front as its primary algorithm, but falls back to
Delaunay if problems occur.

Note:

If the mesher falls back to Delaunay, the edge mesh from the advancing front algorithm
could still be used and in some rare cases could lead to meshing failures. Switching to
the Program Controlled option could fix the issue as the starting edge mesh could be
better.

The figures below illustrate the difference between the Program Controlled and Advancing Front
options.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
182 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Advanced Group

Figure 66: Triangle Surface Mesher = Program Controlled

Figure 67: Triangle Surface Mesher = Advancing Front

Topology Checking
The Topology Checking option controls what happens when a user scopes an object (such as loads,
boundary conditions, Named selections and so on) to geometry (bodies, faces, edges, and vertices)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 183
Global Mesh Controls

after the mesh has been generated. If Topology Checking is set to Yes (default), the software will
check to see if the scoped geometry has mesh properly associated to it. If the associations are incorrect,
the scoping of the object will force the mesh to be out of date. The mesh would need to be re-gen-
erated to get proper associations. If the associations are correct, the scoping is performed without
any change to the mesh and the mesh stays up to date. Set Topology Checking to No to avoid the
checks and always keep the mesh up to date.

Note:

• Topology Checking is defaulted to Yes as it is important to have proper associations

between geometry and mesh in order to properly transfer the loads to the solver.

• The best practice is to define all loads and boundary conditions prior to meshing so that
the topology is properly captured during meshing.

You can override the default of the Topology Checking control by setting the Topology Checking
option on the Options panel (p. 389).

The following sections describe how the mesher handles Topology Protection:
Protecting Topology Defined Prior to Meshing
Protecting Topology Post Meshing

Protecting Topology Defined Prior to Meshing

Protected topology will result in having a better association between the mesh topology (nodes,
faces, elements) and the geometry features (topology).That is,

• A geometry vertex should have a node associated to it.

• A geometry edge should have mesh nodes/edges associated to it.

• A geometry faces should have mesh nodes/faces/elements associated to it.

• A geometry body should have mesh nodes/elements associated to it.

• When you protect a group of faces, the mesher protects only the outer boundary of the group
but it still defeatures the interior edges within the face group.

Since boundary conditions are ultimately applied to the mesh, it is important to have proper asso-
ciations to get proper loading. Thus, if protected topologies are ignored, an error or warning message
may be issued by the mesher.

There are two levels of topology protection, namely hard and soft.

• Hard protected topology can be defined by scoping Named Selections and/or Contact region
objects to geometry (bodies, faces, edges, and vertices) and setting the Protected option
to Yes. This instructs the mesher to give higher priority to those geometry features. Thus,
during mesh generation, the outer boundaries of a collection of hard protected topologies
will be maintained. The mesher will return an error state and message if the outer boundaries
of the hard protected topologies cannot be protected.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
184 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Advanced Group

• Soft protected topology can be defined by scoping Named Selections to geometry (bodies,
faces, edges, and vertices) and setting the Protected option to Program Controlled. For
soft protected topologies, mesh-based defeaturing takes priority. Thus, the outer boundaries
of soft protected topologies may be altered by the mesher. In such situations, mesher will
return a warning message. You can right-click the warning message and use the Show
Problematic Geometry option to visualize problematic geometries. You should verify that
the mesh is acceptable in case of defeaturing of outer boundaries of the soft protected to-
pologies.

Setting up Hard Protected Topology

• For contacts, set Protected to Yes.

• For Named Selections, set Protected to Yes.

Setting up Soft Protected Topology

For Named Selections, set Protected to Program Controlled. When Program Controlled is selected,
the scoped object(s) will be considered as soft protected. The scoped objects will not receive addi-
tional protection by the mesher, even if the Named Selection is used for boundary conditions,
symmetry, other types of loads for the solver, as well as match controls and hard sizing controls
for meshing. Mesh-based defeaturing will have priority and the outer boundaries of these topologies
may be altered by the mesher.

Resuming Legacy Databases (prior to Release 19.0)

If you resume a legacy database (prior to Release 19.0) with protected topologies:

• Contacts are resumed with Protected set to No.

• Named selections are resumed with Protected set to Program Controlled.

Note:

• If surface bodies have differing thicknesses, the edges between the faces will be pro-
tected unless using MultiZone Quad/Tri mesh method. If using the MultiZone
Quad/Tri mesh method, use Preserve Boundaries = All, or put the faces into separate
named selections.

• If you use the MultiZone mesh method and set Preserve Boundaries (p. 242) to All,
the MultiZone method will protect all boundaries.

• Virtual Topology can still be used with patch independent meshing; however, the
boundaries of the virtual cells do not have to be protected unless the virtual topology
is scoped to something. In other words, the virtual cells replace the underlying geo-
metry but follow the same protection rules.

• You should apply loads/boundary conditions prior to meshing as it is the most robust
process to get the proper mesh to respect the boundary conditions.

• The mesh is associated to the geometry even for bodies, faces, edges, and vertices
that are not protected, but in such cases there may not be the one-to-one relationship

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 185
Global Mesh Controls

that exists between the mesh and geometry for protected topology. For example, in
Figure 68: Protecting Topology (p. 186) the highlighted edge is protected for the boxes
in the bottom row, but not for the boxes in the top row.

In the two boxes on the right, the faces with red mesh indicate face mesh that is as-
sociated with the triangular face on the left of the geometry. Due to the sharp features
of the box, the side faces all have a one-to-one relationship. You can check the asso-
ciation by using the Plot Elements Attached to Named Selections option.

Figure 68: Protecting Topology

Protecting Topology Post Meshing

After meshing, if a new object is scoped to the geometry, the associations to the mesh may not
match (see Figure 68: Protecting Topology (p. 186)). In this case, the new object is added to the list
of protected topologies, but you may or may not want to re-mesh because the associations may
be fine. For example, if you scope a control to one of the side faces of the box, the associated mesh
will be fine. However, if you select one of the triangular faces, the associated mesh may be prob-
lematic.

You can set the Topology Checking (p. 183) control in the Advanced group to control the re-
meshing behavior. By default, Topology Checking is set to Yes, which forces a re-mesh.

• If Topology Checking is set to Yes (default), the mesh goes out-of-date, because the state
manager must revalidate that all scoped topology is associated properly as protected topology.
If you then attempt to re-mesh, the software runs the topology checks and ensures all protected
topology is respected. If the topology checks are successful, the mesh is validated but not re-
meshed. If the topology checks are unsuccessful, the software re-meshes the geometry, treating
the newly scoped objects as protected topology.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
186 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Advanced Group

• If Topology Checking is set to No, the software does not check to ensure that the mesh is asso-
ciated to the topology properly, so you must validate the associations manually if you have
concerns.

Pinch
The Pinch feature lets you remove small features (such as short edges and narrow regions) at the
mesh level in order to generate better quality elements around those features. The Pinch feature
provides an alternative to Virtual Topology (p. 545), which works at the geometry level. The two features
work in conjunction with one another to simplify meshing constraints due to small features in a
model that would otherwise make it difficult to obtain a satisfactory mesh.

When Pinch controls are defined, the small features in the model that meet the criteria established
by the controls will be "pinched out," thereby removing the features from the mesh. You can instruct
the Meshing application to automatically (p. 193) create pinch controls based on settings that you
specify, or you can manually (p. 340) designate the entities to be pinched. Pinch controls can be applied
to solid and shell models, with certain restrictions as shown in the table below.

The Pinch feature is supported for the following mesh methods:

Volume Meshing:

• Patch Conforming (p. 208)

• Thin Solid Sweeping (p. 237)

• Hex Dominant Meshing (p. 233)

Surface Meshing:

• Quad Dominant (p. 282)

• All Triangles (p. 284)

• MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284)

The table below shows the types of model (solid or shell), mesh methods, pinch creation methods
(auto or manual), and pinch behaviors that are supported for each type of pinch control.

Note:

With Ansys Workbench Release 16.0, post pinch behaviors are migrated into Mesh Con-
nections. When you regenerate a mesh that was created using Pinch Behavior settings,
the new mesh might report different results than the previous mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 187
Global Mesh Controls

Entities Model Type Mesh Method Pinch Creation

in Method
Pinch
Control: Thin MultiZone
Primary Solid Patch Hex Quad All Auto Manual
Shell Solid Quad /
> Conforming DominantDominant Tri Pinch Pinch
Sweeping Tri
Secondary
Edge X X X X X X X X X X
>
Edge
Edge X X X X X X X X X
>
Vertex
Vertex X X X X X X X X X X
>
Vertex
Face > X X X X X
Edge
Face > X X X X X
Vertex

Examples of a Mesh With and Without Pinch

The figures below illustrate the effect of pinch controls on the mesh. The first figure shows where
the pinch controls have been defined in the model. The second and third figures show the meshes
that are generated without the pinch controls and with the pinch controls, respectively.

Figure 69: Locations of Pinch Controls

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
188 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Advanced Group

Figure 70: Mesh Generated Without Pinch Controls

Figure 71: Mesh Generated With Pinch Controls

For More Information

For general information on applying pinch controls in combination with the various mesh method
controls, refer to Meshing: Mesh Control Interaction Tables (p. 475).

Additional pinch topics include:

Pinch Control Automation Overview
How to Define Pinch Control Automation
How to Define or Change Pinch Controls Manually
Usage Information for Pinch Controls

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 189
Global Mesh Controls

Pinch Control Automation Overview

The Advanced group of global mesh controls appears in the Details View when the Mesh object
is selected in the Tree Outline. By setting pinch options in the Advanced group, you can instruct
the Meshing application to automatically generate pinch controls according to your settings. The
Meshing application can generate the pinch controls based off shell thickness (for surface models
only), or by identifying small features in the model that fall within a tolerance you specify.

Understanding the Automatic Pinch Control Algorithm

The Meshing application uses four major criteria for generating automatic pinch controls. These
criteria (in order of importance) include:

1. Capture geometry of sheet bodies.

2. Edges adjacent to flat surfaces are primaries.

3. Cluster primaries together so that they are adjacent to one another.

4. All things being equal, longer edges are primaries.

Note:

• The primary geometry is the entity that retains the profile of the original geometry.
The secondary geometry is the entity that changes in order to move towards the
primary geometry. Depending on the tolerance, the pinch control will pinch out the
entire secondary entity or only a portion of the secondary entity into the primary.

• The automatic pinch control algorithm supports only one primary for each pinch
control.

• Once the automatic pinch control algorithm has paired two edges to use as a primary
and a secondary in an automatic pinch control, the algorithm cannot use either of
those same two edges as primary or secondary in any other automatic pinch control.
For example, in the geometry shown in Figure 72: Automatic Pinch Control for Edges
on Left; Manual Pinch Control Required for Edges on Right (p. 191), an automatic pinch
control has been created for the annotated secondary (red) edges and the primary
(blue) edge on the left side of the model. However, a pinch control will not be created
automatically for the very similar configuration of edges on the right side of the
model. For the Meshing application to be able to generate the mesh shown in Fig-
ure 73: Mesh Generated with Automatic Pinch Control and Manual Pinch Control on
Similar Geometry (p. 191), a manual pinch control had to be created for the edges on
the right.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
190 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Advanced Group

Figure 72: Automatic Pinch Control for Edges on Left; Manual Pinch Control Required for
Edges on Right

Figure 73: Mesh Generated with Automatic Pinch Control and Manual Pinch Control on Similar
Geometry

The basic options for defining automatic pinch controls are described below.

Use Sheet Thickness for Pinch

The Use Sheet Thickness for Pinch control determines whether automatic pinch controls will be
based on the shell thickness of the model, rather than on a specified pinch tolerance (p. 192). When
the sheet thickness method of automatic pinch control is used, the pinch algorithm uses a pinch
tolerance equal to 1/2 of the shell thickness.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 191
Global Mesh Controls

Valid values are Yes and No. The default is No.

Note:

• The Use Sheet Thickness for Pinch control is available only for sheet (surface) models.
If your model contains a combination of surface and solid bodies, the Use Sheet
Thickness for Pinch control is available only if all solid bodies are suppressed (p. 528).

• You cannot use the sheet thickness method of automatic pinch control for a surface
model that has no thickness defined or has a 0 (zero) thickness.

Pinch Tolerance
The Pinch Tolerance control allows you to specify a tolerance for the Meshing application to use
when it generates automatic pinch controls. Vertex-vertex pinch controls will be created on any
edge with a length less than the specified tolerance, and edge-edge pinch controls will be created
on any face for which two edges are within proximity according to the specified tolerance. For the
Meshing application to automate pinch control, you must specify a value for Pinch Tolerance unless
Use Sheet Thickness for Pinch (p. 191) is set to Yes. Specify a value greater than 0.0.

Note:

• The value that you specify for Pinch Tolerance should be smaller than the mesh size
around the region in which the pinch control is being applied. For example, if an Edge
Sizing control has been placed on an edge, a Pinch Tolerance value that is greater
than that edge sizing may cause the mesher to fail.

• In general, the value that you specify for Pinch Tolerance should be greater than the
value that appears in the Sizing > Minimum Edge Length (p. 120) field. Exceptions
to this guideline include models without seam edges, such as elliptical prism, cylinder,
and sphere models.

• Do not specify an overly high value for the Pinch Tolerance control. The Pinch feature
allows the mesher to mesh over geometry features as if they were not there, and a
tolerance that is set too high can cause inverted elements.

• When Capture Curvature and/or Capture Proximity is set to Yes, the default pinch
tolerance is 90% of the value of Curvature Min Size (p. 113)/ Proximity Min Size
(p. 115) (whichever is smaller). This differs from the tolerance used by the default mesh
based defeaturing, refer to Mesh Defeaturing (p. 110) for details.

Generate Pinch on Refresh

The Generate Pinch on Refresh control determines whether pinch controls will be regenerated
following a change made to the geometry (such as a change made via a DesignModeler application
operation such as a merge, connect, etc.). If Generate Pinch on Refresh is set to Yes and you
change the geometry, all pinch controls that were created automatically will be deleted and recreated
based on the new geometry. If Generate Pinch on Refresh is set to No and you update the geo-

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
192 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Advanced Group

metry, all pinch controls related to the changed part will appear in the Tree Outline but will be
flagged as undefined.

Valid values are Yes and No. The default is No.

Note:

Only Automatic pinch controls are regenerated. That is, if a pinch control has a Scope
Method of Manual (either because it was created manually or because you made a
change to an Automatic pinch control), the pinch control will never be regenerated on
refresh. See Changing Pinch Controls Locally (p. 343) for information about making changes
to pinch controls.

How to Define Pinch Control Automation (p. 193) provides the steps for defining automatic pinch
controls.

How to Define Pinch Control Automation

The following sections provide the steps for defining pinch control automation. Pinch can be
automated based on either shell thickness or a user-defined tolerance.

Note:

Use of pinch control automation will delete all existing pinch controls that have a Scope
Method of Automatic before creating the new pinch controls.

Defining Pinch Control Automation Based on Shell Thickness

This section describes the steps for defining pinch control automation based on shell thickness.
This procedure applies to sheet (surface) models only.

To define pinch control automation based on shell thickness:

1. In the Details View of the Mesh folder, expand the Advanced group of controls.

2. Set Use Sheet Thickness for Pinch (p. 191) to Yes.

Notice that the value of the Pinch Tolerance (p. 192) control changes to Based on Sheet
Thickness and is grayed out.

3. Change the value of the Generate Pinch on Refresh (p. 192) control if desired.

4. Right-click the Mesh folder and select Create Pinch Controls from the context menu.

A pinch control object is automatically inserted into the Tree for each region containing features
that meet the criteria established by the pinch control settings. To display details about an
individual pinch control, highlight it in the Tree and information about it appears in the Details
View. For information about making changes to this information, refer to Changing Pinch
Controls Locally (p. 343).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 193
Global Mesh Controls

Defining Pinch Control Automation Based on a Specified Pinch Tolerance

This section describes the steps for defining pinch control automation based on a tolerance that
you specify.

To define pinch control automation based on pinch tolerance:

1. In the Details View of the Mesh folder, expand the Advanced group of controls.

2. Specify a value for Pinch Tolerance (p. 192).

3. Change the value of the Generate Pinch on Refresh (p. 192) control if desired.

4. Right-click the Mesh folder and select Create Pinch Controls from the context menu.

A pinch control object is automatically inserted into the Tree for each region containing features
that meet the criteria established by the pinch control settings. To display details about an
individual pinch control, highlight it in the Tree and information about it appears in the Details
View. For information about making changes to this information, refer to Changing Pinch
Controls Locally (p. 343).

How to Define or Change Pinch Controls Manually

As an alternative to defining pinch control automation (p. 193), you can define local controls to
pinch scoped entities. You can also make changes to pinch controls, regardless of whether they
were created automatically or manually. For details, refer to Pinch Control (p. 340) in the local mesh
controls section of the Meshing help.

Usage Information for Pinch Controls

Remember the following information when using the Pinch feature:

• The Pinch feature works on faces, edges, and vertices only, bodies cannot be pinched. Refer to
the table in Pinch (p. 187) for restrictions related to entity types.

• The automatic pinch control algorithm supports only one primary for each pinch control. In
manual pinch controls, you can specify multiple faces or multiple edges to act as primaries, but
only one vertex can act as primary.

• When defining manual pinch controls, using the same primary in more than one pinch control
is supported. This is true for all types of manual pinch controls: edge-edge, edge-vertex, vertex-
vertex, face-edge, and face-vertex. When multiple pinch controls use the same primary, the ag-
gregate of the pinch controls is used to determine the pinch. Note that this behavior differs from
that of other mesh controls when multiples are specified. With other mesh controls, the control
that appears lowest in the Tree is honored.

• If there are hard size constraints on a primary, the pinch control will be skipped completely. If
there are hard size constraints on secondaries, only the secondaries with the constraints will be
skipped. In either case, a warning message will be issued.

• If your model contains multibody parts and you want pinch controls to operate on selected
parts/bodies only, you must first suppress (p. 528) the parts/bodies that you do not want the

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
194 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Advanced Group

pinch controls to apply to. Then follow the steps outlined in How to Define Pinch Control Auto-
mation (p. 193).

Alternatively you can use mesh connections, which supports automatic and manual mesh con-
nections. With mesh connections, you can change the settings in the Details View of the Connec-
tion Group folder to automatically generate mesh connections on scoped geometry only. For
more information, see Connection Features and Operations in the Mechanical help.

• If the geometry fails to mesh correctly due to the pinched features, an error message is generated.
To highlight the geometry that is responsible for the message, select the message, right-click,
and select Show Problematic Geometry from the context menu.

• When a face contains an internal loop with a pinch control and the edges of the loop become
a "single internal edge" due to pinching, the surface mesher may completely ignore the "single"
edge (that is, the surface mesher may mesh over the edge). The reason that this may occur is
that a pinch control never changes the topology of a model. When a surface mesher collects all
boundary edge meshes before performing surface meshing, it considers the newly created "single"
edge to be a regular edge rather than a hard edge, which most users would expect. As a result,
all edge meshes along the "single" edge may be ignored.

• After pinch controls are generated:

– If you highlight a pinch control in the Tree, the pinch region is flagged in the Geometry window.
For more information, see the descriptions of Primary Geometry and Secondary Geometry
pinch controls in Pinch Control Automation Overview (p. 190).

– You can make changes to pinch controls whether they were generated automatically or created
manually. To do so, in the Mesh folder, highlight the Pinch object that you want to change.
As a result, the Details of the pinch appear in the Details View, where you can change its Scope
and Definition. Making changes to a pinch that was generated automatically causes the value
of the Scope Method control to change from Automatic to Manual. For details about defining
or changing pinch controls manually, see Pinch Control (p. 340) in the local mesh controls section
of the Meshing help.

• If a pinch control has a pinch tolerance defined for it that falls below one or more Hard (p. 310)
scoped size controls, a warning will be issued. The warning will suggest that you either modify
the pinch tolerance or remove any pinch control(s) in close proximity to the Hard size control(s)
in question; otherwise, surface meshing may fail.

• There is no guarantee that features will be preserved when using pinch controls. For this reason,
it is best practice to check the mesh where pinch controls have been defined close to features.
If a problem exists in the mesh, flipping the primary and secondary entities will be sufficient to
solve the problem in many cases.

• Pinch controls can be used for models involving multiple complications in one location (such as
slivers, sharp angles, and short edges within the same pinch tolerance) as well as for models
containing isolated problem spots. However, when used in combination with the Sizing Op-
tions (p. 89), pinch controls are best used for isolated problems. For example, refer to the meshes
in the figure below, which show the results of applying pinch controls in combination with other
sizing options. For the mesh on the left, a Pinch Tolerance (p. 192) of 3e-3 and a Curvature
Min Size (p. 113) of 6.e-3 were specified. For the mesh on the right, a Pinch Tolerance of 3e-3
and a Min Size of 4.e-3 were specified. Neither is acceptable due to the presence of high aspect

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 195
Global Mesh Controls

ratio triangles in the mesh. In such cases, the use of Virtual Topology or defeaturing within the
DesignModeler application is recommended as an alternative to pinch.

Figure 74: Pinch Not Recommended for Models with Multiple Complications

• In a face-edge pinch control, the mesh on the edges within the specified tolerance is "snapped"
to the primary face. You must choose the primary and secondaries in such a way that the elements
on the face whose edges are defined as secondaries will be stretched onto the primary face. If
the edges would be "squashed," no pinch will be created.

• When a face pinch control and a Face Meshing (p. 314) control are applied to the same face, the
mesher attempts to generate a mapped mesh for the face. If the mesher cannot retain the mapped
mesh pattern, it will generate a free mesh instead and issue a warning.

• When using a Face as the primary geometry, then the pinch control is applied post-processing
and does not support mixed dimension meshing. When using an Edge as the primary geometry,
then the pinch control is applied pre-processing, and is recommended in mixed dimension situ-
ations.

• If you apply a match control (p. 334) and a face-edge pinch control to the same topology, a
warning is issued.

• Since Pinch objects cannot be duplicated, they cannot be used as template objects for the Object
Generator.

Loop Removal
The Advanced group of global mesh controls appears in the Details View when the Mesh object is
selected in the Tree Outline. The Meshing application automatically removes loops according to the
criteria you specify for the loop removal options in this group. Prior to meshing, you can use the
Show Removable Loops (p. 538) feature to preview the loops that will be removed according to the
current settings.

The loop removal feature is supported for the following mesh methods:

Surface Meshing:

• Quad Dominant (p. 282)

• All Triangles (p. 284)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
196 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Automatic Methods

• MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284)

Note:

• The loop removal controls are passed to the MultiZone Quad/Tri method as described
in MultiZone Quad/Tri Method Control (p. 284).

• If you are meshing with loop removal on (using the Quad Dominant or MultiZone
Quad/Tri method), making changes to a loop after meshing (such as adding a load on
a loop) invalidates the mesh and you will need to re-mesh. You should apply loads to
the model before meshing when using these controls. Refer to Protecting Topology
Defined Prior to Meshing (p. 184) for related information.

The options for defining loop removal are described below.

Sheet Loop Removal

The Sheet Loop Removal control determines whether loops will be removed (meshed over) by the
mesher. When Sheet Loop Removal is set to Yes, the mesher removes any loop with a radius less
than or equal to the value of Loop Removal Tolerance.

Valid values are Yes and No. The default is No.

Loop Removal Tolerance

The Loop Removal Tolerance control sets the tolerance for loop removal. Any loop with a radius
less than or equal to the value of Loop Removal Tolerance will be meshed over by the mesher.

Specify a value greater than 0.0.

Automatic Methods
The Automatic Methods describe how the mesh generated for the sheet and sweepable solid bodies
when you do not apply a local mesh method to them. The Automatic Methods group includes:
Sheet Body Method
Sweepable Body Method

Sheet Body Method

The Sheet Body Method determines the mesh generated for sheet bodies when you do not apply
a local mesh method to them. The available options are:

• Quad Dominant: Allows you to generate the quadrilateral mesh for the sheet bodies. The default
value for Sheet Body Method is Quad Dominant.

When Sheet Body Method is Quad Dominant, mesher cannot perform Weld, Connect, Repair
Topology, Deviation, and Quad Layer controls for that sheet bodies.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 197
Global Mesh Controls

If the model or geometry has a manual connection, mesher applies the Quad Dominant method
as the default Sheet Body Method, even when you set Sheet Body Method as Prime Mesh.

To perform Weld, Connect, Repair Topology, Deviation, and Quad Layer controls you need to
scope those sheet bodies under Automatic (PrimeMesh) method.

• Prime Mesh: Allows you to generate the quadrilateral mesh for the sheet bodies.

When Sheet Body Method is Prime Mesh, any mesh controls that are incompatible with the
Automatic (Prime Mesh) method are ignored. For information on the Prime Mesh, refer to Auto-
matic (PrimeMesh) (p. 293) limitations.

When Sheet Body Method is Prime Mesh, mesher can perform Weld, Connect, Repair Topology,
Deviation, and Quad Layer methods.

Note:

Prime Mesh does not support for Inflation control, Match Mesh control, Vertex Types
and Number of Divisions in Face Meshing control, Edge Biasing in Edge Sizing control,
and Influence Volume in Face Sizing control.

Sweepable Body Method

The Sweepable Body Method determines the mesh generated for the sweepable bodies when you
do not apply a local mesh method to them. The available options are:

• Sweep: Allows you to generate the sweep mesh on the sweepable solid bodies.

• MultiZone: Allows you to generate the MultiZone mesh on the sweepable bodies. For inform-
ation related to MultiZone, refer to MultiZone Method (p. 242).

Statistics Group
The Statistics group lets you view and request information about these options:
Nodes
Elements
Show Detailed Statistics

Nodes
The Nodes option provides a read-only indication of the number of nodes in the meshed model. If
the model contains multiple parts or bodies, you can view the number of nodes in an individual part
or body by highlighting it under the Geometry object in the Tree Outline.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
198 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Model Assembly Group

Elements
The Elements option provides a read-only indication of the number of elements in the meshed
model. If the model contains multiple parts or bodies, you can view the number of elements in an
individual part or body by highlighting it under the Geometry object in the Tree Outline.

Show Detailed Statistics

The Show Detailed Statistics displays the total number of elements in each of the element types in
the given model when set to Yes. The default is No. The available mesh statistics are Corner Nodes,
Mid Nodes, Orientation Nodes, Beam Elements, Beam3, Shell Elements, TriShell3, QuadShell4,
Solid Elements, Tet10, Wedge15, Pyramid13, Solid Shell, Gasket Elements and more.

Model Assembly Group

The Model Assembly group displays Read Only when you have assembled files from upstream sources
(Mechanical Model, analysis systems, and so on).

Read Only is Yes by default. See the Mesh Modification section for more information.

Note:

When Read Only is set to Yes, the Mesh Numbering option is not available.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 199
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
200 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Meshing: Local Mesh Controls
Local mesh controls are available when you highlight a Mesh object in the tree and choose a tool from
either the Mesh Control drop-down menu, or from first choosing Insert in the context menu (displayed
when you right-click a Mesh object). You can specify the scoping of the tool in the tool's Details View
under Method to either a Geometry Selection or to a Named Selection.

Note:

Be aware of the following items regarding mesh control tools:

• The Object Generator enables you to make one or more copies of a template object,
scoping each to a different piece of geometry. When defining mesh controls, you can use
the Object Generator to make copies of a template mesh control, which may reduce the
necessity to manually define multiple related mesh controls. For details, refer to Generating
Multiple Objects from a Template Object in the Mechanical help.

• For most mesh controls, the latest control that you add on a particular geometry overrides
any prior controls that you already have added on that geometry. For example, if you apply
a Sizing control setting of 0.5 to faces A,B,C then apply a setting of 1.0 to face B, faces A
and C will retain the 0.5 setting, but the setting for face B will be 1.0. This is also useful
when you want to force sweep many bodies of a multibody part and only tet mesh one
or specify special sweeping options on one. For example, you can select all 1000 parts and
then override one or 10 part(s) instead of picking 999 (990) and then selecting one (10).

Exceptions include the MultiZone Quad/Tri and All Tetrahedrons - Patch Independent
controls. For information about how these controls interact with other controls, refer to
Meshing: Mesh Control Interaction Tables (p. 475), Interactions Between Mesh Meth-
ods (p. 475), and Interactions Between Mesh Methods and Mesh Controls (p. 478).

• If you suppress a mesh control tool, the Suppress symbol appears ("x" adjacent to the
name of the tool) and Suppressed is set to Yes in the Details View of the tool. Situations
can occur when you do not suppress a mesh control tool, and the Suppress symbol appears
adjacent to the tool but Suppressed is set to No in the Details View of the tool. In these
situations, refer to the mesh control's Active read-only field for the reason why the tool
is suppressed. Examples are a control applied to a uniform surface body mesh (not suppor-
ted), a control scoped to suppressed geometry, or a Contact Sizing control scoped to a
suppressed Contact Region.

The following local mesh controls are available:

Method Control
Sizing Control
Contact Sizing Control

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 201
Local Mesh Controls

Refinement Control
Face Meshing Control
Mesh Copy Control
Match Control
Pinch Control
Inflation Control
Gasket Control
Feature Suppress
Repair Topology
Connect
Weld
Quad Layer
Deviation
Geometry Fidelity

Method Control
The Method Control provides meshing algorithms used for meshing solid and sheet bodies. The
Method control is valid only for a body. When you do not select any Method Control, application applies
Automatic Method on all bodies to provide a successful automated mesh. By default, the application
attempts to use hexahedral elements for solid bodies and quadrilateral element generation for sheet
bodies. If a solid body is not sweepable, the body is meshed with the Patch Conforming Tetrahedrons
mesher.

To set the values for the Method control,

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Method.

Or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Method in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

In the Details view for the scoped local method, you can set Method based on whether you want to
apply the method to a solid body or a sheet body. For more information, refer to:
Method Controls and Element Order Settings
Setting the Method Control for Solid Bodies
Setting the Method Control for Sheet Bodies

Method Controls and Element Order Settings

When setting the Method control (p. 202) to a scoped body, you can control whether meshes are to
be created on the scoped body with midside nodes or without midside nodes by using the Element
Order setting under Definition in the Details View. When setting the Element Order option for a
scoped body, choices include Use Global Setting, Linear, and Quadratic.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
202 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

If you select Use Global Setting, Element Order will be handled as dictated by the global Element
Order option (p. 101). The remaining choices—Linear and Quadratic—have the same descriptions
as their counterparts under the global Element Order option (p. 101). Setting Element Order to Linear
or Quadratic for a scoped body will override the setting of the global Element Order option.

If the Element Order is set to Quadratic, and if Straight Sided Elements is set to No, the midside
nodes will be placed on the geometry so that the mesh elements properly capture the shape of the
geometry. However, if the location of a midside node might affect the mesh quality, the midside
node may be relaxed to improve the element shape. Therefore, some midside nodes might not follow
the shape of the geometry precisely.

For more information about how the Straight Sided Elements control affects midside nodes, see
Straight Sided Elements (p. 180).

Mixed Order Meshing

Mixed order meshing is supported across bodies for the following mesh methods:

• For solid meshing:

– Patch Conforming Tetrahedron (p. 208)

– Patch Independent Tetrahedron (p. 210)

– MultiZone (p. 242)

– General Sweep (p. 399)

– Thin Sweep (p. 406)

– Hex Dominant (p. 233)

– Cartesian (p. 261)

• For surface meshing:

– Quad Dominant (p. 282)

– All Triangles (p. 284)

– MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284)

– Automatic (PrimeMesh) (p. 287)

Note:

Mixed order meshing is not supported for Pull.

This means that when scoping one of these mesh methods to bodies in a multibody part, you can
set the Element Order option to Quadratic (resulting in higher order elements) for some bodies and
to Linear (resulting in lower order elements) for others.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 203
Local Mesh Controls

Mixed order meshing is supported whether you are performing Selective Meshing (p. 444) or meshing
all of the bodies in the part at the same time. The behavior, and your resulting mesh, is dependent
on the meshing order:

• For simultaneous meshing, the Quadratic bodies generally have precedence at the interface.
In such cases, all of the elements in a lower order body that are adjacent to a higher order
body will be higher order elements, thereby creating one layer of quadratic elements at the
interface face. These elements will be higher order at the interface face but with dropped
midside nodes where adjacent to the linear elements in the mesh.

An exception occurs when a solid body and a sheet body share an interface. In this case, the
solid body takes precedence and will be meshed first using its defined element order. Then
the sheet body is meshed with midside nodes handled as described for Selective Meshing,
below.

• For Selective Meshing (p. 444), the order in which you mesh the bodies determines the preced-
ence. If you first mesh a linear body followed by meshing an adjacent quadratic body, then
the linear body has precedence. Elements in the quadratic body that are adjacent to the linear
body will be lower order elements. Midside nodes will be dropped from the quadratic elements
at the interface face.

If you first mesh a quadratic body followed by meshing an adjacent linear body, then the
quadratic body has precedence. Elements in the linear body that are adjacent to the quadratic
body will be higher order elements. Midside nodes will be added to the linear elements at the
interface face.

The figures below illustrate an example of mixed order meshing. To obtain the mesh shown in Fig-
ure 75: Mixed Order Meshing of a Multibody Part (p. 205), the global Element Order option was set
to Quadratic, resulting in a mesh of quadratic tet elements for the topmost body. The sweep method
was applied to the remaining bodies, with the Element Order option set to Linear on the Sweep
Method (p. 235) control. This resulted in a mesh of primarily linear hex/wedge elements for the swept
bodies, with the hex/wedge elements that are attached to the common interface being mixed order
(see Figure 76: Mixed Order Elements (p. 206)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
204 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

Figure 75: Mixed Order Meshing of a Multibody Part

Figure 76: Mixed Order Elements (p. 206) shows the mixed order hex/wedge elements that are attached
to quadratic pyramid elements at the interface. On the Mesh Metrics (p. 133) bar graph, mixed order
elements are displayed as quadratic element types.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 205
Local Mesh Controls

Figure 76: Mixed Order Elements

Setting the Method Control for Solid Bodies

Method Controls available for solid bodies are:
Automatic Method Control
Tetrahedrons Method Control
Hex Dominant Method Control
Sweep Method Control
MultiZone Method Control
Cartesian Method Control
Layered Tetrahedrons Method Control
Particle Method
Automatic (PrimeMesh)

Automatic Method Control

Automatic Method control performs sweeping for solid models and quadrilateral element generation
for surface body models. When solid bodies cannot be swept, the body is meshed with the Patch
Conforming Tetrahedron mesher.

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and select Show > Sweepable Bodies to preview the bodies
that can be swept meshed. To use the MultiZone mesh method instead of Sweep for bodies that
are automatically detected as sweepable, click Files > Options > Meshing. Select On for Use
MultiZone for Sweepable Bodies.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
206 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

To access the Automatic Method control,

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Method.

Or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Method in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

The Automatic Method Details view has the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry bodies or named selection. The default value
is Geometry Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allow you to scope the geometry bodies. When you select Geometry
Selection, the Geometry allows you to select the geometry from the Geometry window.

– Named Selection: Allow you to scope bodies grouped under a named selection.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is set to Yes, Active displays the status of the selected control. Active is read-only.

• Method: Allows you to select method.

• Element Order: Allows you to select the element order. The default value is Use Global Setting.
For information about the Element Order option, refer Method Controls and Element Order
Settings (p. 202).

Tetrahedrons Method Control

Tetrahedrons Method control creates a tetrahedral mesh. The Algorithm setting allows selection
of a tetrahedral mesh creation method from the following options:

• Patch Conforming Algorithm for Tetrahedrons Method Control (p. 208)

• Patch Independent Algorithm for Tetrahedrons Method Control (p. 210)

To access the Tetrahedrons Method control,

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Method.

Or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Method in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon. Select
Method as Tetrahedrons in the Automatic Method Details view.

The Tetrahedrons Method Details view has the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry bodies or named selection. The default value
is Geometry Selection.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 207
Local Mesh Controls

– Geometry Selection: Allow you to scope the geometry bodies. When you select Geometry
Selection, the Geometry allows you to select the geometry from the Geometry window.

– Named Selection: Allow you to scope bodies grouped under a named selection.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is set to Yes, Active displays the status of the selected control. Active is read-only.

• Method: Allows you to select method.

• Algorithm: Allows you to select the algorithm. The available options are Patch Conforming and
Patch Independent. The default value is Patch Conforming.

• Element Order: Allows you to select the element order. The default value is Use Global Setting.
For information about the Element Order option, refer Method Controls and Element Order
Settings (p. 202).

Patch Conforming Algorithm for Tetrahedrons Method Control

The Patch Conforming Tetra mesh method is a Delaunay tetra mesher with an advancing-front
point insertion technique used for mesh refinement. The Patch Conforming Tetra mesh method
provides:

• Support for 3D inflation (p. 161)

• Built-in pyramid layer for conformal quad-tet transition (p. 462)

• Built-in growth and smoothness control. The mesher tries to create a smooth size variation
based on the specified growth factor.

• Removes features under a certain size (Mesh Defeaturing (p. 110)).

Remember the following information when using the Patch Conforming Tetra mesh method:

• When Patch Conforming Tetra meshing (with Physics Preference (p. 96) of CFD) fails due
to lack of available memory, an error message is issued. However, this error message does not
identify insufficient memory as the cause because meshing stops before the memory limit is
reached. You may not notice any unusual behavior.

Patch Conforming Method Details view has the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry bodies or named selection. The default value
is Geometry Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allows you to scope the geometry bodies. When you select Geo-
metry Selection, the Geometry allows you to select the geometry from the Geometry
window.

– Named Selection: Allows you to scope bodies grouped under a named selection.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
208 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is set to Yes, Active displays the status of the selected control. Active is read-only.

• Method: Allows you to select method.

• Algorithm: Allows you to select the algorithm. The available options are Patch Conforming
and Patch Independent. The default value is Patch Conforming.

• Element Order: Allows you to select the element order. The default value is Use Global Setting.
For information about the Element Order option, refer Method Controls and Element Order
Settings (p. 202).

Advanced Improve Options

• Aggressive Thin Face Collapse: Allows you to defeature the thin faces when the size of the
thin faces is less than twice of the target Characteristics Length, when Aggressive Thin Face
Collapse is set to Program Controlled. Aggressive Thin Face Collapse is available only when
Physics Preference is set to Explicit. The default value is Program Controlled.

• Automatic Node Movement: Allows you to move nodes to meet the target mesh quality cri-
teria for a given Physics Preference. At the end of tetrahedral meshing, an optimization al-
gorithm finds the elements exceeding the target quality and automatically move the nodes to
improve the quality of the elements. When multiple quality targets exist, the node movement
is performed sequentially on the different target criteria. For example, When Physics Preference
is Explicit, performs Automatic Node Movement first for Element Quality, then Aspect Ratio
(Height) and finally Characteristic Length (LS-Dyna).

The available options are:

– Program Controlled: Performs Automatic Node Movement for the Explicit Physics Prefer-
ence. The value of the Physics Preference option sets the default for Program Controlled,
as detailed in the following table:

Physics Prefer- Mechanic- Nonlinear Mechanic- Electromagnet- CFD Expli-

ence al al ics cit
Program Con- Off Off Off Off On
trolled

– Conservative: Allows you to meet the target quality without moving the nodes away from
the surface.

– Aggressive: Allows you to move nodes outside the boundary to meet target mesh quality
for a given Physics Preference. When you set Automatic Node Movement to Aggressive,
you receive a warning message for node movement.

– Custom: Allows you to customize the Feature Protection Angle, Restricted Node Movement
to Surface, and Improvement Iterations to meet the target quality for given Physics Pref-
erence.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 209
Local Mesh Controls

→ Restricted Node Movements to Surface: Allows you to constrain node movement to be

only along the boundary when set to Yes. The default value is Yes for Custom and Con-
servative.

→ Improvement Iterations: Allows you to set the number of iterations performed by the
algorithm to improve the target mesh quality. The default value is 3.

→ Feature Protection Angle: Specifies the minimum angle at which nodes move to meet
target quality for given Physics Preference. After volumes are meshed, if the dihedral
angle between two triangular element faces is less than the specified Feature Protection
Angle, the nodes on the edge between the element faces are protected during Automatic
Node Movement. The default value is 120 degrees for Custom and Conservative and
0 degrees for Aggressive. If the angle is set to 0 degrees, no nodes are protected during
Automatic Node Movement. This is the most aggressive setting for quality improvement,
causing nodes to locally move off features to attain quality targets where possible. If the
angle is 180 degrees this effectively protects all nodes in the surface mesh from moving.
That is, Automatic Node Movement would only acts only on interior nodes.

Refinement Options

• Refine at Thin Section: Allows you the refine the number of element layers in the thin
sections of the geometry when set to Yes. The default value is No.

– Number of Element Layers: Provides the number of element layers in the thin section.
Number of Element Layers is a read-only option. The default value is 2.

• Refine Surface Mesh: Allows you to refine the surface mesh in the thin section of geometry
when set to Yes. The default value is No. Refine Surface Mesh is available only when Use
Adaptive Sizing is set to No.

– Minimum Thickness: Allows you to set the minimum gap thickness to refine the surface
mesh at thin sections with good quality elements. You should measure the thinnest
section in your geometry and use this distance as input. The default value is half of the
global Element Size.

– Face Proximity Gap Factor: Allows you to refine or coarse the adjacent surface mesh.

Limitations

• Automatic Node Movement does not support CFD Physics Preference.

Patch Independent Algorithm for Tetrahedrons Method Control

The Patch Independent mesh algorithm for tetrahedrons is a "Top-Down" meshing algorithm
based on the spatial subdivision algorithm which ensures refinement of the mesh where necessary,
but maintains larger elements where possible, allowing faster computation. The Patch Conforming
(PC) Tetrahedrons Algorithm is recommended for tetrahedral meshing but in some cases the
Patch Independent Method can be helpful. For example, when meshing STL geometries or when
geometry is dirty with badly formed surfaces which would require significant geometry clean-up
to fix and mesh with Patch Conforming Tetrahedrons. After the root tetrahedron that encloses
the entire geometry is initialized, the Patch Independent mesher subdivides the root tetrahedron
to meet all element size requirements (that is, the prescribed local mesh sizes).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
210 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

At each subdivision step, the edge length of the tetrahedron (=size) is divided by 2. This means
that the prescribed sizes should all differ by factors that are an integer power of 2. The size of
the root tetra is set to the smallest given size multiplied by 2n. All other prescribed sizes are ap-
proximated by subdividing the root tetra. Refer to the series of figures below, which illustrate
the process that is followed by the Patch Independent tetra mesher.

Figure 77: Geometry Input to Patch Independent Tetra Mesher

At this point, the Patch Independent tetra mesher balances the mesh so that elements sharing
an edge or face do not differ in size by more than a factor of 2.

Figure 78: Full Tetrahedron Enclosing the Geometry

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 211
Local Mesh Controls

Figure 79: Full Tetrahedron Enclosing the Geometry in Wire Frame Mode

Figure 80: Cross-Section of the Tetrahedron

After this is done, the Patch Independent tetra mesher makes the mesh conformal. That is, it
guarantees that each pair of adjacent elements shares an entire face. The mesh does not yet
match the given geometry, so the mesher next rounds the nodes of the mesh to the prescribed
points, prescribed curves, or model surfaces. The Patch Independent tetra mesher then "cuts
away" all the mesh, which cannot be reached by a user-defined material point without intersection
of a surface.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
212 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

Figure 81: Mesh After Capture of Surfaces and Separation of Useful Volume

Figure 82: Final Mesh Before Smoothing

Finally, the mesh is smoothed by moving nodes, merging nodes, swapping edges and in some
cases, deleting bad elements.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 213
Local Mesh Controls

Figure 83: Final Mesh After Smoothing

Note:

The Patch Independent Tetrahedrons method is being deprecated and will be re-
moved in future releases.

The Patch Independent Method Details view has the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry or named selection. The default value
is Geometry Selection. The available options are:

– Geometry Selection: Allows you to scope the geometry for Patch Independent
Tetrahedrons method.

– Named Selection: Allows you to scope the available named selection for Patch
Independent Tetrahedronsmethod.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected control. The default value is No. When
Suppressed is set to Yes, Active displays the status of the selected control. Active field
is read-only.

• Method : Allows you to select the meshing method.

• Algorithm: Allows you to select the algorithm for meshing.

• Element Order: Defines the element order for meshing. Refer to Method Controls and Element
Order Settings (p. 202).

• Defined By: Allows you to apply settings to define the mesh size. The available options are
Max Element Size and Approx Number of Elements per Part.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
214 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

• Max Element Size: Specifies the size of the initial element subdivision. The default value de-
pends on the sizing options selected:

– When Use Adaptive Sizing is set to No, the default value of Max Element Size is inher-
ited from the global Max Size (p. 110) value.

– When Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes, the default value of Max Element Size is in-
herited from the global Element Size (p. 102) value.

In either case, you can change the value if you want to apply a specific value locally. In such
cases, the maximum size comes from the larger value of the global controls (that is, Max Size
or Element Size, as described above) or, the largest scoped body size or face size that Patch
Independent is also scoped to. A scoped edge size is not respected if it is larger than either
the global size or the size on an attached face.

With the Patch Independent mesh method, scoped body sizing is supported as follows:

– If the local body size defined is smaller than the global maximum size, the scoped body
size is assigned inside the volume.

– If the global maximum size is smaller than any scoped body, face or edge sizing, the
global maximum size (Element Size when Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes, Max Size
when Use Adaptive Sizing is set to No) is changed to be the same as the largest sizing
within the mesher. For example, if Patch Independent is defined on two bodies, and
the setup is as follows:

→ Global Max Size = 4

→ Local body size scoped to Body1 = 8

→ No local body size is scoped to Body2

The Patch Independent maximum size will be 8 and the global Max Size of 4 will be
used for the sizing of Body2. You can paramterize Max Element Size.

Note:

The maximum element size inside the volume of Body2 could grow to
8. Because setting local sizings affects the largest element size in the
model, you should avoid setting local sizes that are larger than the
global maximum size.

• Approx Number of Elements per Part: Prescribes an approximate number of elements for
the mesh. The default is 5.0e+005. Specifying a prescribed number of elements for the Patch
Independent method is applicable only if the method is being applied to a single part. You
can parameterize Approx Number of Elements per Part.

• Feature Angle: Specifies the minimum angle at which geometry features are captured. If the
angle between two faces is less than the specified Feature Angle, the edge between the faces
are ignored, and the nodes are placed without respect to that edge. If the angle between two
faces is greater than the Feature Angle, the edge should be retained and mesh aligned and
associated with it (note the edge could be ignored due to defeaturing, and so on). You can

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 215
Local Mesh Controls

specify a value from 0 (capture most edges) to 90 (ignore most edges) degrees or accept the
default of 30 degrees. You can parameterize the Feature Angle.

• Mesh Based Defeaturing: Ignores edges based on size. The default value is Off. When Mesh
Based Defeaturing set to On, Defeature Size option is available.

– Defeature Size: Allows you to enter a numerical value greater than 0.0. By default, the
value of this local Defeature Size option is the same as the global Defeature Size (p. 111).
When you specify a different value for the Defeature Size, it overrides the global value.
Specifying a value of 0.0, resets the tolerance to its default. If multiple Patch Independent
tetra mesh method controls are defined with different tolerances, the smallest tolerance
is respected. You can parametrize the Defeature Size.

Some basic cases include the following:

– A small hole with a diameter smaller than the tolerance as shown below.

No edges are dropped. You should defeature manually in this case.

– Two approximately parallel spaced edges (fillet or chamfer), as shown below.

To determine whether a face is a fillet or chamfer, the Patch Independent mesher evaluates
the face's geometric features. To be considered as a fillet or chamfer:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
216 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

→ A face must be at least twice as long as it is width.

→ A fillet or chamfer has either three or four sides (that is, two long sides and one or two
short sides), all with angles <= 135 degrees.

In the case of a fillet, which is a curved or rounded face, the angle between the fillet and a
face attached to one of its long sides is 0 degrees (not 180 degrees). In contrast, a chamfer
is a planar face and the angle between the chamfer and a face attached to one of its long
sides is larger than 0 degrees.

For defeaturing of fillets or chamfers, the mesher considers the fillet or chamfer face as well
as the faces adjacent to it (the faces attached to its long sides). The dihedral angles between
these faces are evaluated to determine whether the attached edges of adjacent faces are
respected (that is, whether nodes are placed with respect to the edges at the long sides of
the fillet or chamfer).

There are three dihedral angles occurring at a fillet or chamfer:

→ One dihedral angle occurs between the two faces "touching," or adjacent to, the fillet or
chamfer face. When this angle is compared with the Feature Angle, the angle is measured
between the face normals at the imaginary edge where the two faces (virtually) meet.

→ Two dihedral angles occur between the fillet or chamfer face and the respective faces
"touching," or adjacent to, the two long sides of the fillet orchamfer. The angles are eval-
uated as the angles between the face normals at the common edge of the fillet or chamfer
and the attached face.

Defeaturing occurs as follows:

→ If the angle between the two faces adjacent to the fillet or chamfer face is greater than
the Feature Angle, and the angles between the fillet or chamfer face and the faces attached
to its long sides are less than the Feature Angle, and the minimum fillet or chamfer width
is greater than the Defeature Size, both long sides or edges are respected.

→ If the angle between the two faces adjacent to the fillet or chamfer face is greater than
the Feature Angle, and the angles between the fillet or chamfer face and the faces attached
to its long sides are less than the Feature Angle, and the minimum fillet or chamfer width
is less than the Defeature Size, only one long side or edge is respected.

→ If only one angle between the fillet or chamfer face and the faces attached to its long
sides is greater than the Feature Angle, only one long side or edge is respected.

→ If none of the angles are greater than the Feature Angle, none of the long sides or edges
are respected.

The following series of figures illustrates fillet or chamfer detection. In this example, a cross-
section is revolved. The top and bottom of the section are identical, except the bottom has
fillets or chamfers at each corner and the top does not. Because the definition of a fillet or
chamfer is somewhat general, two cases are presented, each with a different angle of revolu-
tion. The angle of revolution is 5 degrees in the first case, as shown below. In this case, only
the small faces fit the criteria of fillets or chamfers.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 217
Local Mesh Controls

In the second case, the angle of revolution is 180 degrees, as shown below. In this case, all
faces fit the criteria of fillets or chamfers, except for the front or back faces of the extrusion.

The figure below shows the angles that are considered for fillet or chamfer detection, and
the small faces that are found to be fillets or chamfers.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
218 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

As described earlier, the angles that are considered for a given fillet or chamfer are:

1. the angle between adjacent fillet or chamfer faces.

2. the two angles attached to the fillet orchamfer.

Notice the angles in the figure below.

Notice the settings shown below, with Feature Angle set to 30 and Mesh Based Defeaturing
turned off.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 219
Local Mesh Controls

In the figure below, the highlighted edges are the edges that are ignored with the settings
shown above. All edges are captured except for locations where the angle between faces
or adjacent fillet/chamfer faces (two bottom edges) is 20 degrees. Changing the Feature
Angle to a value below 20 results in the mesher capturing those edges, while increasing the
angle results in more edges being ignored.

In the settings shown below, Feature Angle is changed to 80 but the other settings used
before are retained.

In the figure below, the highlighted edges are the edges that are ignored with the settings
shown above. All edges are ignored except for those at angles of 90 degrees, both with or
without fillets or chamfers.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
220 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

Now, consider the settings shown below. Here the Feature Angle is set back to 30, but
Mesh Based Defeaturing is turned on. Both the Defeature Size and the Min Size Limit
are set to 2.5 mm, which is larger than the bottom fillets or chamfers.

In the figure below, the highlighted edges are the edges that are ignored with the settings
shown above. The same edges as before are ignored due to the feature angle, but in addition
every other edge along the bottom fillets or chamfers is ignored.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 221
Local Mesh Controls

The last part of this example involves the case in which the angle of revolution is 180 degrees.
Once again the Feature Angle is set to 80 but Mesh Based Defeaturing is turned off.

In the figure below, the highlighted edges are the edges that are ignored. With the settings
shown above and the longer extrusion, more faces are found to be fillets or chamfers when
compared to the case of the shorter extrusion. In comparison, the bottom section is
identical as all faces are found to be fillets or chamfers (so the meshing behavior does not
change). However, with the inclusion of all faces on top being considered chamfers, the
meshing behavior does change.

The following series of figures shows examples of the Patch Independent Tetrahedron mesher
with various settings. Figure (a) shows the base geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
222 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

Figure 84: Example (a) Showing Base Geometry

Figures (b) through (f ) below show examples of the Patch Independent Tetrahedron mesher
under the conditions noted.

Figure 85: Example (b) Min Size Limit (Described Below) Set to 1

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 223
Local Mesh Controls

Figure 86: Example (c) Min Size Limit (Described Below) Set to 0.5

Figure 87: Example (d) Defeature Size Set to 1

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
224 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

Figure 88: Example (e) Defeature Size Set to 1 and Element Order Set to Linear

Figure 89: Example (f) Defeature Size Set to 1 and Min Size Limit Set to 0.5

• Refinement: Refines mesh automatically based on geometry curvature or proximity or both.

This will result in larger elements on flat planar faces and smaller elements in areas of high
curvature or within small gaps. The available options are No, Proximity and Curvature,
Curvature and Proximity. The default value is Proximity and Curvature. For Explicit physics

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 225
Local Mesh Controls

preference, the default vale is No. When you select Proximity and Curvature, Curvature or
Proximity, the Min Size Limit option is available.

– Min Size Limit: Prevents curvature or proximity based refinement from generating
elements that are too small.

Curvature or proximity based refinement subdivides the elements until this Min Size
Limit is reached. However, projection to geometry and smoothing may push the size
even smaller for some elements. The default value of Min Size Limit depends on
whether Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes or No.

When Use Adaptive Sizing is set to No, the default value of Min Size Limit is inherited
from the global Curvature Min Size (p. 113) or Proximity Min Size (p. 115) control based
on the Refinement type set. The mesher also uses the Min Size values defined locally.

→ When Refinement is set to Proximity and Curvature (default), the maximum

of the global Proximity Min Size (p. 115) and Curvature Min Size (p. 113) is used
as the default Min Size Limit.

→ When Refinement is set to Proximity, the global Proximity Min Size (p. 115) is
used as the default Min Size Limit.

→ When Refinement is set to Curvature, the global Curvature Min Size (p. 113) is
used as the default Min Size Limit.

Note:

The global Curvature Min Size (p. 113) or Proximity Min Size (p. 115)
values are used to determine the default value for Min Size Limit
based on the Refinement type set for the Patch Independent
method control, irrespective of the global refinement type set (for
example, even if Capture Curvature and Capture Proximity are both
set to No).

→ When Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes, you must specify a value for Min Size
Limit.

Note:

Also see Notes on Element Size Settings for the Patch Independent Tetra
Mesher (p. 231).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
226 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

• Num Cells Across Gap: Specifies the number of cells desired in narrow gaps. This sets the goal
for the proximity based refinement. The mesh will subdivide in tight regions toward this goal,
but the refinement is limited by the Min Size Limit. It will not override this limit. Num Cells
Across Gap is only available when Refinement is Proximity and Curvature or Proximity.
The default value depends on the Sizing Options (p. 105):

– WhenUse Adaptive Sizing is set to No, the default value of Num Cells Across Gap is
inherited from the global Num Cells Across Gap (p. 115) value.

– When Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes, the default value of Num Cells Across Gap
is 3.

In either case, you can change the value if you want to apply a specific value locally.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 227
Local Mesh Controls

• Curvature Normal Angle: Sets the goal for the curvature based refinement. The mesh will
subdivide in curved regions until the individual elements span this angle. This refinement is
also limited by the Min Size Limit. You can specify a value from 0 to 180. Curvature Normal
Angle is available only when Refinement is set to Proximity and Curvature or Curvature.The
default value depends on the Sizing Options (p. 105):

– When Use Adaptive Sizing is No, the default value of Curvature Normal Angle is in-
herited from the global Curvature Normal Angle (p. 114) value.

– When Use Adaptive Sizing is Yes, the default value of Curvature Normal Angle will
be computed based on the value of the Span Angle Center (p. 112) global option.

In either case, you can change the value to define specific values locally, but be aware that
with Patch Independent Tet, only one value for curvature normal angle (num cells in gap) is
used by the mesher. The smallest curvature normal angle (largest num cells in gap) is applied
globally. A warning message will indicate this for you.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
228 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

Figure 90: Example (a) Showing Base Geometry

Figure 91: Example (b) Default Patch Independent Tetrahedron Mesher

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 229
Local Mesh Controls

Figure 92: Example (c) Patch Independent Tetrahedron Mesher with Min Size Limit Set
to Capture Curvature

• Smooth Transition: Determines whether the Octree volume mesh generated from the Patch
Independent mesh method should be kept or whether it should be replaced with a Delaunay
volume mesh starting from the Patch Independent surface mesh. The available options are On
and Off. The default is Off. When Smooth Transition is set to On, the volume mesh is a
Delaunay mesh. When Smooth Transition is set to Off, the volume mesh is an Octree mesh.

Figure 93: Effect of Smooth Transition Setting (p. 230) illustrates the effect of setting Smooth
Transition to Off (Octree volume mesh on the left) or On (Delaunay volume mesh on the
right).

Figure 93: Effect of Smooth Transition Setting

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
230 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

• Growth Rate: Represents the increase in element edge length with each succeeding layer of
elements. For example, a growth rate of 1.2 results in a 20% increase in element edge length
with each succeeding layer of elements. Specify a value from 1.0 to 5.0 or accept the Default.
When set to Default, the value is the same as the global growth rate (p. 110). When Use Adapt-
ive Sizing is set to Yes, the Default is set differently based on Smooth Transition. When
Smooth Transition is Off, the default is 2.0. When Smooth Transition is On, the default is
1.2.

Note:

If Smooth Transition is Off, the growth rate is very approximate as the volume is
filled with an Octree meshing approach which requires 2-to-1 transitions. Thus in
such cases, the growth rate relates only to when the transitions occur through the
mesh.

• Minimum Edge Length: Read-only indication of the smallest edge length in the part.

• Match Mesh Where Possible: The Match Mesh Where Possible control is applicable to contact
definitions between faces. The available options are Yes and No. The default is Yes. If contact
is defined by a single face that topologically belongs to two different bodies, setting this option
to Yes has no effect. However, if there are independent faces on the two bodies, setting this
option to Yes causes the Patch Independent mesh method to create nodes on both sides of
the contact. The nodes are not connected but have identical coordinates.

• Write ICEM CFD Files: Sets options for writing Ansys ICEM CFD files. Refer to Writing Ansys
ICEM CFD Files (p. 84) for details.

Notes on Element Size Settings for the Patch Independent Tetra Mesher

Remember these notes when using the Patch Independent tetra mesher:

• If you are specifying element sizes with the Patch Independent mesher, you may notice that
some element edge lengths are less than the size that you have entered. For example, if your
element size is 1, the resulting elements in a uniform tetrahedron mesh will have tetrahedron
with edges of length 31/2/2 and edges of length 1. A single tetrahedron in this mesh will have
two edges of length 1 and four edges of length 31/2/2. Two of the three dimensions of the
bounding box of this tetrahedron will have length of 1 while the other dimension will have
the length of 0.5. This correlates to an element size of 1.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 231
Local Mesh Controls

Figure 94: Element Edge Lengths Smaller Than Specified Element Size

• If you are using Curvature and Proximity Refinement, you may notice that your elements are
always less than the maximum size specified. Element growth rates with this mesher are always
based on powers of 2. For instance, if your minimum size limit is set to 1 and your maximum
element size limit is set to 5, and you have curvature in your model that warrants curvature
based mesh refinement down to the minimum element size, you will see that the largest ele-
ments are not size 5 but size 4. This happens because in order to maintain elements at the
minimum size limit, the initial tetrahedron must be some power of 2 larger than the minimum
element size, which in this example case is 1.

• Small features of Named Selections are checked in comparison to element size settings prior
to meshing. If the minimum element size seems to be too big to capture the essential features
of the geometry, a warning is provided if small entities could cause the mesher to fail.

Notes on Scoping for the Patch Independent Mesher

You can use the Patch Independent tetra mesh method in combination with other solid mesh
methods in a multibody part, and the bodies are meshed with conformal mesh. Refer to Conformal
and Non-Conformal Meshing (p. 21) for information about conformal meshing.

Notes on Virtual Topologies and the Patch Independent Mesher

Virtual topologies may affect the success of meshing with the Patch Independent tetra mesh
method. Because virtual topologies are often a coarse approximation of the original faces or
edges, the resulting small inaccuracies (gaps and overlaps) may cause the Patch Independent
tetra mesher to miss some parts of the boundary of the virtual topology. As a result, the mesher
may not accurately model the respected topology and may fail.

Since in general, the Patch Independent tetra mesh method does not require the use of virtual
topologies to clean up the geometry, you can remove some of the problematic virtual topology
and use Named Selections for boundary conditions instead, as appropriate.

Miscellaneous Notes for the Patch Independent Mesher

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
232 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

The Patch Independent tetra mesh method does not support mesh connections (p. 485), contact
matches (p. 496), pinch controls (p. 187), match controls (p. 334), or face meshing controls (p. 314).

Hex Dominant Method Control

Hex Dominant Method creates a free hex-dominant mesh, meshing surfaces with quad elements,
extruding them into volume for some distance and then filling the remaining space with unstructured
element types.

Note:

When you perform Explicit Analysis with LS-DYNA, Hex Dominant Method is not
recommended as it creates unsupported pyramid elements in the core.

To access the Hex Dominant Method control,

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Method.

Or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Method in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

Select Method as Hex Dominant Method in the Automatic Method Details view.

Hex Dominant Method Details view has the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry bodies or named selection. The default value
is Geometry Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allow you to scope the geometry bodies. When you select Geometry
Selection, the Geometry allows you to select the geometry from the Geometry window.

– Named Selection: Allow you to scope bodies grouped under a named selection.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is set to Yes, Active displays the status of the selected control. Active is read-only.

• Method: Allows you to select the method.

• Element Order: Allows you to select the element order. The default value is Use Global Setting.
For information about the Element Order option, refer Method Controls and Element Order
Settings (p. 202).

• Free Face Mesh Type: Allows you to select the shape of the elements used to fill the body. The
available options are Quad/Tri or All Quad. The default is Quad/Tri.

– All Quad: Allows you to create the quadrilateral mesh.

– Quad/Tri: Allows you to create the mesh with both quadrilateral and triangular elements.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 233
Local Mesh Controls

• Control Messages: Provides message when the Hex Dominant Method fails. You can click
Control Messages to view the message.

Hex dominant meshing is more suitable for:

• Meshing bodies with large amounts of interior volume where stress concentrations are highest
close to the surface of the bodies.

• Rigid body meshes where mesh quality is not important.

• Meshing bodies that require hex elements at the surface and where Sweep and MultiZone
methods have failed to produce a mesh and when you lack time or the relevant skills to split the
geometry to create successful mesh with Sweep or MutliZone methods.

Hex dominant meshing is less suitable for:

• Models where high quality hex mesh is required. For such cases, the recommendation is to use
MultiZone or Sweep methods to achieve high quality results.

• Models where fast transition of the mesh can result in poor solution accuracy (such as CFD
models). The Hex dominant approach can have very fast transitions at the core of the volume.

• Models where pyramid elements are invalid as the Hex Dominant Method produces a lot of
pyramids in the core. For example, Explicit physics calculations.

Note:

• Mesh Matching for cyclic symmetry is not supported for hex dominant meshing.

• Workbench assists you in determining if hex dominant meshing is applicable to your

situation. When you apply the Hex Dominant option on a body or group of bodies,
Workbench calculates the normalized volume to surface area ratio (p. 234). If it detects
a ratio less than 2, Control Message appears in a highlighted row under Definition
in the Details View. If you click Yes, Click To Display, a warning message states that
a low percentage of hex elements or poorly shaped hex elements may result. Sugges-
tions are included for alternative meshing schemes.

The normalized volume to surface area ratio is defined by the following expression:

(Volume of body/(Surface area of body)3/2)/factor

where factor, the ratio for a unit sphere = (4/3 π)/(4 π)3/2

• Adaptive refinement starting from a hex dominant mesh will result in remeshing of
the structure with tetrahedrons.

• Use Body or Face Sizing to obtain more uniform face meshing, which leads to more
hexes by volume.

• If you apply a local Sizing control (p. 296) to a solid body with a Method control set
to Hex Dominant (p. 233) or Sweep (p. 235), or to a sheet body with a Method control
set to Quadrilateral Dominant (p. 282), a near uniform quadrilateral mesh results on

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
234 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

– all affected faces on a body meshed with Hex Dominant

– the source face meshed with Sweep

– all affected faces meshed with Quadrilateral Dominant

To obtain even more of a uniform quadrilateral mesh, set the Behavior (p. 310) of the
Sizing control to Hard.

• Meshing thin and complicated bodies (for example a cellular phone case), using Hex
Dominant Method requires much smaller element sizes to give good quality hex
elements. As a result, the number of elements may increase compared to using a tet-
rahedron mesh.

Sweep Method Control

Sweep method generates sweep mesh on "sweepable" bodies (p. 399) (including axis-sweepable
bodies, which are not displayed when you use the Show Sweepable Bodies feature). The mesher
fails, when a swept mesh cannot be generated on a body with a Sweep Method control.

Use the Sweep option when you require:

• a swept mesh.

• a swept mesh on a model that revolves around an axis where the source and target faces share
topology.

To access the Sweep Method,

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Method.

Or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Method in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon, then
click Method. Set Method as Sweep in Automatic Method Details view.

Sweep Method Details view has the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry or named selection. The available options
are Geometry Selection and Named Selection. The default value is Geometry Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allow you to scope the geometry bodies.

– Named Selection: Allow you to scope the bodies grouped under a named selection.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the method control. The default value is No. When
Suppressed is set to Yes, the Active is available. Active is a read-only and provides the
number of suppressed parts

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 235
Local Mesh Controls

• Method: Allows you to select the method control.

When you select the Sweep option, the Details View expands to include additional settings, many
of which are unique to this option. For basic usage that involves obtaining a swept mesh, the pro-
cedure is to apply a Method Control to one or more bodies, set Method to Sweep, and accept
the default values of the various settings.

For advanced or specialized usage such as meshing thin models or axis sweeping, adjust the settings
as needed. The following is a description of each of these settings.

• Algorithm: Allows you to select algorithm. The available options are Program Controlled and
Axisymmetric. The default is Program Controlled .

– Program Controlled: Applies to only on the traditional sweepable bodies which can be
detected by Show Sweepable Bodies.

– Axisymmetric: Applies to all axisymmetric models. Axisymmetric Sweeper supports shared

topology. Axisymmetric Sweeper supports Contact Sizing (p. 311) and Topology Protec-
tion (p. 184).

Note:

Mesh Based Defeaturing (p. ?) is available only when Axisymmetric algorithm

is selected.

• Mesh In Center: Defines the type of mesh in the centre of the Axisymmetric model. Mesh in
Center is available only when Algorithm is Axisymmetric. The default value is Hexahedra. The
available options are:

– Wedges: Generates wedges at the center of the axisymmetric model.

– Hexahedra: Generates O-Grid mesh at the centre of the axisymmetric model. You can
specify the number of divisions for the O-Grid using the O-Grid Divisions.

• Element Order: Allows you to select element order for mesh. Refer to Method Controls and
Element Order Settings (p. 202).

• O-Grid Divisions: Define the number of divisions per quadrant from the center of the O-Grid to
the boundary (or outside) of the O-Grid. The default value for O-Grid Divisions is 4. O-Grid Di-
visions is available only when you select Axisymmetric algorithm.

• Project Corners to Top: Projects the nodes on the steps along the body of interest to the top
surface of the Axisymmetric model. The default value is Yes. Project Corners to Top is available
only when Algorithm is Axisymmetric .

• Src/Trg Selection: Defines the source and target selection type according to the following choices:

– Automatic: Determines automatically the best source and target for the body.

– Manual Source: Allows you to select the source and the program determines the target.
Manual Source is useful when there are multiple source target pairs, and you want to specify
the source to get the correct bias through the sweep direction. Another application is when

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
236 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

your cross section is changing, and the mesh quality would be better when sweeping from
one side vs. another.

– Manual Source and Target: Allows you to select the source and target manually. The sweeper
revolves the mesh around common edges or vertices. You can use Manual Source and Target
when you want to sweep a body where the source and target faces share vertices or edges or
both.

– Automatic Thin (p. 406): Allows you to select thin models and thin sheet metal parts and sweep
a mesh through the thickness of the body. For Automatic Thin, the face with the largest face
area is selected as the primary source and the algorithm determines the rest of the source
faces. You can define multiple elements through the thickness using the Sweep Num Divs
control. Biasing is not available. User Defined Criteria allows you to select the type of Auto-
matic Thin sweep. This option is available only when the Src/Trg Selection is set to Automatic
Thin. The available options are Program Controlled and Protect Internal Edges. When you
select Program Controlled, the interior loops in the model are not preserved while performing
thin sweep. When you select Protect Internal Edges, the interior loops in the model are pre-
served while performing thin sweep. An Element Option setting is included that instructs the
solver to use the Solid Shell element where possible, or to always use a Solid element.

– Manual Thin (p. 406): The same restrictions apply as described above for Automatic Thin.
However, with this choice, you can do any of the following:

→ Pick one source face and allow the program to determine the rest.

→ Pick all the source faces and allow the program to do nothing but mesh the source faces
and sweep them to the target.

→ Pick multiple source faces and mesh one target face.

Note:

→ The Sweep mesh method does not support the Manual Source, Manual Source
and Target, or Manual Thin settings for Src/Trg Selection if Sweep is applied
to more than one part, even if you suppress all of the other parts.

→ In some cases, the thin model sweeper may want to swap source and target faces
based on meshing conditions in neighboring bodies. In such cases, you receive
a warning message.

Refer to Considerations for Selecting Source Faces for the Thin Model Sweep-
er (p. 407) for details.

→ To make source/target face selection easier, select Annotation Preferences from

the Toolbar and then deselect Body Scoping Annotations in the Annotation
Preferences option box to toggle the visibility of annotations in the Geometry
window. For example, after scoping Sweep to a body, the body will be displayed
using a blue solid annotation. Turn off the body scoping annotations, then select
the source/target faces. For picking internal faces, the Hide Faces right-click option
may help you to see inside a body. For example, you can select external faces in
the Geometry window and then use the Hide Faces option to hide the selected
faces (making it easier to select the internal faces).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 237
Local Mesh Controls

• Source Scoping Method: Defines the method for choosing a source face or target face. Source
Scoping Method is Program Controlled and read-only when you select Src/Trg Selection as
Automatic or Automatic Thin. The available options are Geometry Selection and Named Se-
lection.

– Geometry Selection: Enables you to select sources or targets manually using

the Source option.

– Named Selection: Enables you to choose one Named Selection as a source or target
using the Source Named Selection option.

• Target Scoping Method: Defines the method for scoping targets when Src/Trg Selection is Manu-
al Source and Target. The available options are Geometry Selection and Named Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allows you to select the target from the Geometry window using
Target option .

– Named Selection: Allows you to select the target from the available named selections
using Target Named Selection option.

• Free Face Mesh Type: Determines the shape of the elements used to fill the swept body (pure
hex, pure wedge, or a combination of hex/wedge). The default value is Quad/Tri. The available
options are :

– All Tri: Fills the swept body with triangular elements.

– Quad/Tri: Fills the swept body with quadrilateral or triangular elements.

– All Quad: Fills the Swept body with quadrilateral elements.

When Src/Trg Selection is Automatic, Manual Source, or Manual Source and Target,Free Face
Mesh Type allows you to choose All Tri, Quad/Tri, or All Quad meshing

When Src/Trg Selection is Automatic Thin or Manual Thin, Free Face Mesh Type allows you
to choose Quad/Tri or All Quad meshing .

Note:

– If the source face is also a side face of another body, the face is always quad mapped.

– When Free Face Mesh Type is set to either Quad/Tri or All Quad and the source
face can be mapped meshed, the face is sometimes mapped meshed ignoring the
applied sizing controls (such as Contact Sizing (p. 311), Sphere of Influ-
ence (p. 304),and more).

– In some cases, when Src/Trg Selection is set to Automatic, automatically selected

source face should be quad mapped to get a successful sweep mesh. In such cases,
the value specified for Free Face Mesh Type may be ignored.

• Type: Allows you to specify whether to use Number of Divisions or Element Size through the
sweep direction. The available options are:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
238 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

– Element Size: Specifies the size of elements to be created in the sweep direction.

→ Sweep Element Size: Provides the size of elements created in the sweep direction.

– Number of Division: Specifies the number of elements to be created in the sweep direc-
tion.

→ Sweep Num Divs: Provides the number of elements to be created in the sweep
direction.

When sweeping generalized bodies that share faces, the Element Size is a soft constraint on in-
terval assignment and the Number of Divisions is a hard constraint. If you have conflicting
Number of Divisions constraints, the sweeper will fail and yield a message. To obtain a regular
mesh in the sweep direction, the guiding edges must have consistent lengths. You can define
virtual split edges to achieve consistent lengths for these edges (see Creating and Managing
Virtual Split Edges (p. 561)). Also see Sizing Control (p. 296) for more information.

Note:

The Type Element Size is not available for Axisymmetric algorithm.

• User Defined Criteria: Allows you to select the type of Automatic Thin sweep. User Defined
Criteria is available only when the Src/Trg Selection is Automatic Thin. The default option is
Program Controlled. The available options are:

– Program Controlled: Performs thin sweep without preserving the interior loops in the
model.

– Protect Internal Edges: Performs thin sweep preserving the interior loops in the model.

• Element Option: Instructs the solver which the element option to be used. The default option
is Solid Shell. The available options are Solid Shell and Solid.

– Solid Shell: Instructs the solver to use the solid shell elements where possible.

– Solid: Instructs the solver to always use a solid element.

• Control Messages: Provides message when the sweep method fails.

Advanced

• Sweep Bias Type: Specify bias in the same manner as edge biasing for the Bias Type setting
in a Sizing (p. 296) mesh control. There is no graphical feedback for biasing on a Method
control. Biasing direction is from the source to the target.

Note:

Sweep Bias Type is not available for Axisymmetric algorithm.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 239
Local Mesh Controls

• Mesh Based Defeaturing: Enable or disable the defeaturing of small features. The default
value is Off. The available options are On and Off. When Mesh Based Defeaturing is On,
features smaller than or equal to the value of Defeature Size are removed automatically.

– Defeature Size: Specifies the tolerance value for defeaturing.

• Fall-Back Mesh Type: Provides the option to select the mesh type to be used when the
Axisymmetric Sweep fails. The default option is Program Controlled. The available options
are:

– Program Controlled: Provides error message when Axisymmetric Sweep fails unless
you choose tetrahedral meshing.

– None: Provides error message when Axisymmetric Sweep fails.

– Tetrahedrons: Generates tetrahedral mesh when Axisymmetric Sweep fails.

• Constrain Boundary: Specifies whether you want to allow the mesher to split the elements
at the boundary of a swept mesh region to aid in meshing. Available for multibody parts
only (both for general sweeping and thin sweeping). When Constrain Boundary is Yes,
does not split the elements at the boundary while sweep meshing. (constrain boundary, no
splitting is allowed). When Constrain Boundary is No, splits the elements at the boundary
while sweep meshing. (do not constrain boundary, splitting is allowed). Choosing Yes prevents
tets from entering the swept body. The default is No.

Note:

Constrain Boundary setting is not available for Axisymmetric algorithm.

Note:

• For gasket simulations, set the Stiffness Behavior of the body to Gasket and proceed
with adjusting mesh settings as described in the Gasket Meshing section located under
Gasket Bodies in the Mechanical application help.

• In models with swept regions, the sizing controls will affect the mesh gradation in the
swept region. You can override this effect by specifying any Sweep Bias value (includ-
ing a value of 1), Sweep Element Size value, or Sweep Num Divs value in the Details
View when defining the sweep method.

• There is a system limitation when using the sweep method with the Size Func-
tion (p. 89). The Size Function may have nodes slightly off because the spacing is
queried. The sweeper then tries to match that spacing, which may lead to unexpected
mesh results.

• If you apply a local Sizing Control (p. 296) to a solid body with a Method control set
to Hex Dominant (p. 233) or Sweep (p. 235), or to a sheet body with a Method control
set to Quadrilateral Dominant (p. 282), a near uniform quadrilateral mesh will result
on all affected faces on a body meshed with Hex Dominant, on the source face
meshed with Sweep, and on all affected faces meshed with Quadrilateral Dominant.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
240 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

To obtain even more of a uniform quadrilateral mesh, set the Behavior (p. 310) of the
Sizing Control to Hard.

Limitations
Axisymmetric sweep has the following limitations:

• A warning message appears, when the nodes are off the mesh. You can click the warning
message to locate that area on the model and can redefine mesh using Mesh Based Defea-
turing (p. ?) for the particular area.

• Axisymmetric algorithm does not support Surface of Influence.

• Axisymmetric sweep fails when meshing shared topologies having a sweepable and a non-
sweepable body (For example, bodies with imprints on sides). You may need to mesh the
individual bodies separately.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 241
Local Mesh Controls

Model 1 and 3 supports Axisymmetric sweep. Axisymmetric sweep fails on model 2 as the
model has a side imprint that is not an axisymmetric model.

• In a multibody part, when you have Axisymmetric sweep and MultiZone method applied
on shared topology bodies, and you mesh all bodies simultaneously, Axisymmetric sweep
may fail if MultiZone fails to create O-Grid on the interfaces between the bodies where both
methods are applied. Here, the mesher follows the following order while applying mesh
methods on the bodies:

1. MultiZone

2. Axisymmetric Sweep

3. Sweep

4. Thin Sweep, Tetrahedron, Hex- Dominant

In such cases, you may need to mesh the body by body. When you use Generate Mesh on
Selected Bodies or Mesh Worksheet defining the meshing sequence for each body,
Axisymmetric may fail in the following cases:

– Executing low level mesh methods first.

– Meshing bodies with large O-Grid patterns before the ones with small O-Grid pattern in
solid bodies.

• Axisymmetric algorithm only supports some edge biasing along the axial direction.

• Axisymmetric Sweep cannot handle any body with internal voids.

• Axisymmetric Sweep does not support Mixed Order Meshing.

MultiZone Method Control

MultiZone Method Control provides automatic decomposition of geometry into mapped
(sweepable) regions and free regions. When you select MultiZone Method Control, all regions are
meshed with a pure hexahedral mesh if possible. To handle cases where a pure hex mesh is not
possible, you can adjust your settings to generate sweep mesh in the structured regions and a free
mesh in unstructured regions.

For example, using the Sweep mesh method, you would need to slice the part below into five
bodies as shown to obtain a pure hex mesh:

Note:

This section describes method control settings. See MultiZone Meshing (p. 419) for detailed
algorithm and usage information.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
242 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

Figure 95: Sweep Method Would Require Slicing to Obtain Pure Hex Mesh

In contrast, using MultiZone requires no slicing. MultiZone automates the geometry decomposition
and generates the pure hex mesh shown in Figure 96: MultiZone Generates Pure Hex Mesh without
Slicing (p. 243).

Figure 96: MultiZone Generates Pure Hex Mesh without Slicing

When you select the MultiZone mesh method, the Details View expands to expose various settings,
including several that are unique to MultiZone. For basic usage that involves obtaining a MultiZone
mesh, the procedure is to apply a Method Control to one or more bodies, set Method to MultiZone,
and accept the default values of the various settings.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 243
Local Mesh Controls

For advanced or specialized usage, adjust the settings as needed. MultiZone Method Details view
has the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry or named selection. The default value is Geo-
metry Selection. The available options are:

– Geometry: Allows you to scope the geometry for MultiZone method.

– Named Selection: Allows you to scope the available named selections for MultiZone
method.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the method control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is set to Yes, the Active field is available. Active is a read only field and provides the
number of suppressed parts.

• Method: Allows you to select the method.

• Decomposition Type: Allows you to define the decomposition type that MultiZone use to
automatically break geometry into blocks. The available options are Program Controlled , Thin
Sweep, Cart Sweep, Standard and Medial Axis. The default option is Program Controlled.

– Program Controlled: Determines automatically the decomposition type for each body
and meshes them accordingly. For single bodies, Program Controlled first mesh all
axisymmetric bodies, then mesh thin bodies using MultiZone Thin Sweep and mesh the
rest of the bodies with MultiZone Standard option. When you have multiple bodies in
a multibody part and you generate mesh simultaneously for all the bodies, Program
Controlled uses the same Decomposition Type for all connected bodies. If you mesh
body by body using Generate Mesh on Selected Bodies or Mesh Worksheet defining
the meshing sequence for each body, the mesher detects the body type and based on
which the MultiZone decides the Decomposition Type to be used. Hence, meshing
bodies together and individually can provide different results.

Note:

Program Controlled does not support cart sweep bodies. You may have
to mesh the cart sweep bodies separately using MultiZone Cart Sweep.

– Thin Sweep: Detects sweep source and target surfaces and creates the 2D blocking on
the source surface. Then, the 2D blocking is pulled to 3D and associated to the target
surfaces in an automatic fashion. You should apply Thin Sweep Decomposition to mesh
geometries identified as thin-walled solids, as an alternative to using the typical approach

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
244 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

with Standard method. You can use the Select Source/Target Faces tool to select the
sweep surfaces.

Note:

Partial selection of source and target faces may return partial and incon-
sistent mesh. Hence, full selection of sources and targets is recommended.

When you select Decomposition Type as Thin Sweep, the Sweep Thickness is available.

→ Sweep Thickness: Allows you to provide the thickness of the model. The default
value is 0. If the value is 0, the application identifies the thickness automatically. If
the mesh fails, you may have to provide the thickness. For models with varying
thickness, you should provide thickness value slightly greater than the maximum
thickness of the model. If you select the sweep source (top) and target (bottom)
surfaces, the Thickness value is not used. You can parametrize Sweep Thickness.

Note:

The software automatically recognizes the source, side and target

faces, then meshes the source set of faces and pulls the sheet
blocking to the target set of faces. If the source, side, and target
faces cannot be detected correctly, you receive a warning message
to select the source or target faces manually.

When no side or only one side (or at least one surface on the side, algorithm checks and
completes selection if required) of the solid is selected, the following priority is used to
determine which (non-thin) side of the solid is a sweep source:

1. manually selected faces

2. shared faces or faces with input mesh

3. non-smooth faces

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 245
Local Mesh Controls

4. faces containing more features

5. faces with the largest area

The software attempts to automatically determine the side faces and remaining faces are
the target set of faces.

Alternatively, select the source and target set of faces as the source faces. This should be
two sets of connected faces. The remaining faces will be treated as side faces.

Refer Thin Sweep Limitations (p. 260) to view the limitations for Thin Sweep method in
MultiZone.

– Cart Sweep: Applied to geometries that are axis aligned. Cart Sweep generates a Cartesian
mesh, convert that Cartesian mesh to sweepable topologies and smooth it out.

For non-aligned geometries, you can define the sweep direction by selecting a face normal
to the sweep direction. Use the Select Source/Target Faces tool to set the sweep direction.

Note:

Non-aligned geometries may require additional sizing adjustments when

compared to those aligned to the global coordinate system.

You can set up a mapped mesh control on the source face to create all mapped blocks
with the Cart Sweep method. The performance (time of mesh generation) depends on
two points:

→ Time to generate the Cartesian mesh depends on the Element Size and Cartesian
Size.

→ Time to convert from Cartesian to sweepable topology depends on the number

of topological blocks or bodies created. Many stairsteps can slow things down. So,
setting reasonable sizes and defeaturing non-axis-aligned features helps to improve
performance.
When setting up the model, ensure that the sizes specified are appropriate for capturing
the features. Unlike other mesh methods, reducing the Element Size may cause the mesh
to fail. You should use Element Size to define the final mesh sizes.

When you select Decomposition Type as Cart Sweep, the Cartesian Size is available.

→ Cartesian Size: Defines the size above which features are captured in the mesh.
Here, defeaturing is done based on Cartesian Size. You can set an explicit cartesian
size to define the size that the Cartesian mesher uses to capture features. Use a
smaller Cartesian mesh size to capture features without increasing final mesh size.
If Cartesian Size is default, then mesh size will be used.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
246 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

Note:

– Removing fillets or chamfers helps to improve success of meshing.

– For selective meshing workflows, first mesh the bodies using the Cart Sweep
method and then proceed to mesh the other bodies. The Cart Sweep method
does not support pre-meshed adjacent bodies.

Planar surface patches can be preserved with the Cart Sweep method by cre-
ating named selection. The Named Selections should include ''protected'' (case-
insensitive) as a prefix or suffix to the name (for example, PROTECTED-SIDE,
ProtectedFaces, protected-outlet).

Refer Cart Sweep Limitations (p. 260) to view the limitations for Cart Sweep Method in MultiZone.

• Spacing Options: Allows you to force split lines to better capture the model features. You can
select the following options:

– Uniform: Uses the specified element size for spacing.

– Key-Points: Check all vertices in the model and add split lines to follow the features,
within the specified Key-Points Tolerance. It adjusts the mesh spacing between neigh-
boring split lines so that the hex mesh follows the features. This aligns the cartesian mesh
with feature lines and avoids clustering. When you select Key-Points, the Key-Points
Tolerance is available and merges the nodes within the provided tolerance. The Key-
Points Tolerance value should be less than or equal to the Cartesian Size. If you provide
a Key-Points Tolerance value more than the Cartesian Size, the Key-Points Tolerance
value gets reset to Cartesian Size.

Note:

Key-Points are the corner points of the features. Specifying Key-Points

matches cartesian splits with the corner points so that the feature is respec-
ted.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 247
Local Mesh Controls

• Standard: Uses the standard MultiZone Algorithm (p. 420) for meshing which performs a surface
blocking and attempts to break the volume into sweepable regions. If the software cannot find
any sweepable regions,generates a free mesh.

• Medial Axis: Identifies the medial axis path, constructs surface blocking for the sectional profile,
and extrudes along the medial axis path or revolves about the axis to create a 3D hexa blocking.
You can determine the medial axis path for extrusion in any of the following ways:

– Using contiguous surface curves that creates the geometry.

– Computing the Medial-Axis curve from sectional circumcenters.

– Using the axis of revolution for axis-symmetric bodies.

Medial Axis determines the source and target automatically based on constraints. For models
with multiple source faces, you can specify the source and target faces to avoid ambiguity. Me-
dial Axis ignores the patch boundaries and you have to select Preserve Boundaries as All to
respect protected topology along the extrusion curves.

When you apply Medial Axis decomposition type on a revolved body, the body is meshed with
MultiZone axisymmetric meshing. Here, surface blocking for sectional profile is revolved around
its axis to generate 3D hexa blocking. Here, Sweep Element Size controls the volume meshing
and you can use Defeature Tolerance to remove the tiny edges and gaps in the geometry.
Axisymmetric approach supports Virtual Topology and multi-body shared topology models. In
multi-body shared topology models, all connected axisymmetric bodies must be meshed together.
Axisymmetric rotation provides limited support for split revolved faces and expects at least one
unsplit circular curve in the model to perform meshing. In such cases, you may use virtual topology
to merge curves.

Medial Axis supports models with steps along the extrusion direction depending on the mesh
size. For example, a change in pipe diameter. You can apply Medial Axis on long tubes or
channels with and without guiding edges. You can also apply Medial Axis on fully or partially
revolved bodies.

Medial Axis supports:

– Multi-Source faces to single target face extrusion

– Input mesh from adjacent meshed bodies.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
248 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

– Inflation control

– Facetted models

Refer Medial Axis Limitations (p. 260) to view the limitations for Medial Axis Method in MultiZone.

• Mapped/Swept Mesh Type: Determines the shape of the elements used to fill structured regions.
The default is Hexa. The available options are:

– Hexa: Generates a mesh of all hexahedral elements for the part the method is scoped to.

– Hexa/Prism: Generates a mesh of hexahedral and prism or wedge elements for the part the
method is scoped to. The main difference between the Hexa/Prism option and Hexa is that
for swept regions, the surface mesh can allow triangles for quality and transitioning. The triangles
are later extruded to prisms or wedges.

– Prism: Generates a mesh of all prism elements is generated for the part the method is scoped
to. This option is sometimes useful if the source face mesh is being shared with a tet mesh,
as pyramids are not required to transition to the tet mesh.

• Surface Mesh Method: Instructs MultiZone to use the Program Controlled, Uniform, Pave or
PrimeMesh Quad Dominant method to create the surface mesh. The default method is Program
Controlled.

– Program Controlled: Automatically uses a combination of Uniform and Pave mesh methods
depending on the mesh sizes set and face properties.

Note:

When you mesh a surface with more than thousand loops, Program Controlled
automatically uses Prime Quad Dominant Method for meshing.

– Uniform: Uses a recursive loop-splitting method which creates a highly uniform mesh. Uniform
method is used when all edges have the same sizing and the faces being meshed do not have
a high degree of curvature. This method provides good orthogonal mesh.

– Pave: Uses a paving mesh method which creates a good quality mesh on faces with high
curvature, when neighboring edges have a high aspect ratio. This approach is also more reliable
to give an all-quad mesh.

– PrimeMesh Quad Dominant: Uses the Prime quad-dominant surface meshing algorithm for
multizone, which merges triangles into quads to create a surface mesh. PrimeMesh Quad
Dominant method is suitable for models with thousands of loops. The method provides im-
proved performance and fewer non-responsive state issues compared to other MultiZone surface

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 249
Local Mesh Controls

mesh methods. In some cases, it may deteriorate the mesh quality. You should select
Mapped/Swept Type as Hexa/Prism when you apply PrimeMesh Quad Dominant method.

Note:

Note:Automatic (PrimeMesh) method and PrimeMesh Quad Dominant

method in MultiZone are independent methods and may provide different
results.

Note:

The Surface Mesh Method is applicable only to faces that are free meshed. If a face
can be mapped meshed, it will be. See Face Meshing Control (p. 314) for more inform-
ation.

• Free Mesh Type: Instructs MultiZone to allow a free mesh if it is not possible (without slicing)
to generate a pure hex or hex/prism mesh. Free Mesh Type is available only when the Decom-
position Type is Standard. The value of Free Mesh Type determines the shape of the elements
used to fill unstructured regions. The default is Not Allowed. The available options are:

– Not Allowed: Choose this option if you require a mapped mesh.

– Tetra: Fills tetrahedral mesh on the regions of the model that cannot be meshed with a mapped
mesh. Figure 97: Free Mesh Type = Tetra (p. 251) shows a MultiZone mesh that was generated
when Free Mesh Type was set to Tetra. Notice the lower section is mapped meshed, and the
upper section is free meshed because it cannot be map meshed. Refer to Patch Conforming
Algorithm for Tetrahedrons Method Control (p. 208) for more information.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
250 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

Figure 97: Free Mesh Type = Tetra

– Tetra/Pyramid: Fills tetrahedral mesh with pyramids at the faces on the regions of the model
that cannot be meshed with a mapped mesh will be filled with a tetrahedral mesh with pyr-
amids at the faces. Figure 98: Free Mesh Type = Tetra/Pyramid (p. 252) shows a MultiZone mesh
that was generated when Free Mesh Type was set to Tetra/Pyramid. Notice the lower section
is mapped meshed, and the upper section is free meshed because it cannot be map meshed.
Refer to Patch Conforming Algorithm for Tetrahedrons Method Control (p. 208) for more inform-
ation.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 251
Local Mesh Controls

Figure 98: Free Mesh Type = Tetra/Pyramid

– Hexa Dominant: Fills hex dominant mesh on regions of the model that cannot be meshed
with a mapped mesh. Figure 99: Free Mesh Type = Hexa Dominant (p. 253) shows a MultiZone
mesh that was generated when Free Mesh Type was set to Hexa Dominant. Notice the upper
section is mapped meshed, and the lower section is free meshed because it cannot be mapped
meshed. Refer to Hex Dominant Method Control (p. 233) for more information.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
252 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

Figure 99: Free Mesh Type = Hexa Dominant

– Hexa Core: Fills hexa core mesh on the regions of the model that cannot be meshed with a
mapped mesh. Hexa Core meshes can be generated where most of the volume is filled with
a Cartesian array of hexahedral elements replacing the tetras. This is connected to the remainder
of a prism/tetra hybrid by automatic creation of pyramids. Hexa Core allows for reduction in
number of elements for quicker solver run time and better convergence. Figure 100: Free Mesh
Type = Hexa Core (p. 254) shows a MultiZone mesh that is generated when Free Mesh Type
was set to Hexa Core. Notice the upper section is mapped meshed, and the lower section is
free meshed because it cannot be mapped meshed.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 253
Local Mesh Controls

Figure 100: Free Mesh Type = Hexa Core

• Element Order: Refer to Method Controls and Element Order Settings (p. 202). The default is Use
Global Setting.

• Src/Trg Selection: Defines the source and target selection type. The default is Automatic. The
available options are:

– Automatic: Determines the source and target automatically. The Automatic option works fine
for simple sweep configurations, but if there are multiple levels of sweeps, it is often best to
manually define the source faces.

– Manual Source: Allows you to select the faces to be used as sources (and targets) using the
specifiedSource(s) and Target(s). MultiZone treats all sources or targets as sources, as imprint-
ing can occur from either side. For more details, refer to the description of Src/Trg Scoping
Method, Source(s) and Target(s), and Src/Trg Named Selection below.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
254 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

• Src/Trg Scoping Method: Defines the method for choosing a source face. Geometry Selection
enables you to select sources or targets manually using the Source(s) and Target(s) option.
Named Selection enables you to choose one Named Selection as a source or target using the
Src/Trg Named Selection option.

• Source(s) and Target(s): Select the faces that need to be imprinted for proper geometry decom-
position. Source(s) and Target(s) is available when you select Geometry Selection as your
Src/Trg Scoping Method. The faces you select can be either "sources" or "targets," but all of
them are treated as sources by MultiZone, as shown in Figure 101: Source / Target Face Selection
for MultiZone (p. 255).

Note:

To make source face selection easier, select Annotation Preferences from the
Toolbar and then deselect Body Scoping Annotations in the Annotation Pref-
erences option box to toggle the visibility of annotations in the Geometry win-
dow. For example, after scoping MultiZone to a body, the body is displayed using
a blue solid annotation. Turn off the body scoping annotations, then select the
source faces. For picking internal faces, the Hide Faces right-click option may
help you to see inside a body. For example, you can select external faces in the
Geometry window and then use the Hide Faces option to hide the selected faces
(making it easier to select the internal faces).

Figure 101: Source / Target Face Selection for MultiZone

• Src/Trg Named Selection: Choose an existing named selection to select the faces that need to
be imprinted for proper geometry decomposition. Src/Trg Named Selection is only available
when you select Named Selection as your Src/Trg Scoping Method.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 255
Local Mesh Controls

• Sweep Size Behavior: Enables you to set a Sweep Element Size to define the mesh spacing
(default), or to select Sweep Edges to remove edges and prevent them from constraining the
source faces.

– Sweep Element Size: Enables you to set an element size to define the mesh spacing
along the sweep path from source to target faces. If this control is set to a non-zero value,
sizing controls applied to the selected bodies as curvature and proximity refinement,
local sizing or both are ignored.

The Sweep Element Size setting is ignored if hard size controls are applied to side edges
or faces. If multiple bodies with the same sweep direction have different sizes set for
Sweep Element Size, the smallest size is used and the others are ignored.

Selecting the check box adds Sweep Element Size to the Workbench parameters, enabling
you to use element size settings as a variable design point when creating multiple solutions.

– Sweep Edges: This option should be used with an edge sizing control. The edge sizing
control defines the distribution along the sweep path, and can also affect the source face.
Use this option to remove the influence of the edge sizing from the source face mesh.
That is, the edges selected will only influence the sweep path and not the source faces.

– Sweep Number of Divisions: Allows you to provide the number of elements across the
thickness. Available only when the Decomposition Type is Thin Sweep. Sweep Number
of Divisions is not respected for cases where walls (side faces) are shared with source or
target surfaces of connected bodies. You can parametrize Sweep Number of Divisions.

• Element Option: Allows you to select the element type for the solver to use. The available options
are Solid and Solid Shell. The default value is Solid. Element Option is available only when the
Decomposition Type is Thin Sweep.

Note:

In Sweep Method control, Automatic Thin and Manual Thin provide better ortho-
gonal quality mesh than MultiZone Thin Sweep for Solid Shell element option for
models with slanted side faces.

Note:

To choose the orientation of the Solid Shell elements, you can select the source face
manually.

• Preserve Boundaries: Preserves only the protected topologies (See Protecting Topology Defined
Prior to Meshing (p. 184)) or all features in the model. The default value is Protected. The available
options are:

– Protected: Preserves only the protected topologies at the boundary.

– All: Preserves all topologies at the boundary.

• Mesh Based Defeaturing: Filters edges in or out based on size. The default value is Off. If Mesh
Based Defeaturing set to On, a Defeature Size field appears where you may enter a numerical

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
256 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

value greater than 0.0. By default, the value of this local Defeature Size field is the same as the
global Defeature Size (p. 111). If you specify a different value here, it overrides the global value.
Specifying a value of 0.0 here, resets the tolerance to its default. Available only when the Decom-
position Type is Standard and Thin Sweep.

• Minimum Edge Length: Read-only indication of the smallest edge length in the model.

• Write ICEM CFD Files: Sets options for writing Ansys ICEM CFD files. Refer to Writing Ansys ICEM
CFD Files (p. 84) for details. The default is No.

• Use Split Angle: Decomposed regions are sent in blocks to the meshing algorithm. This option
splits the edges of the decomposed regions to improve the mapped mesh quality and prevent
skewed mesh on side faces. The default option is No. For Physics Preference set to Explicit, the
default option is Yes. If the mesh is skewed, you can set the Use Split Angle to Yes to create
new region splits which will create more orthogonal mesh. When Use Split Angle is set to Yes,
the Split Angle is enabled and allows you specify the value for the split angle. The default value
is 60 degrees. The splits are created at nodes where the angle of an end node of an edge (edge
vector) to the corresponding end node of a parallel edge is less than the specified split angle.
Use Split Angle is available only when the Decomposition Type is Standard.

• Triangle Reduction: Reduces the number of triangular elements while performing PrimeMesh
Quad Dominant surface meshing. The default option is Conservative. Triangle Reduction is
available only when Surface Mesh Method is PrimeMesh Quad Dominant. The available options
are:

– None: Generates quadrilateral mesh without reducing the triangle count on the whole
body.

– Conservative: Moves triangles near to the boundary nodes or edges away from the
boundary and then reduces the triangle count on the whole body.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 257
Local Mesh Controls

– Aggressive: Moves the interior triangles and the boundary triangles to form pairs of
connecting triangles and then reduces the triangle count on the whole body. Hence, Ag-
gressive removes more triangles than Conservative.

Note:

For detailed information about MultiZone, refer to MultiZone Meshing (p. 419). For
general information on applying MultiZone in combination with other mesh method
controls, refer to Meshing: Mesh Control Interaction Tables (p. 475).

Notes on Scoping for the MultiZone Mesh Method

• You can use the MultiZone mesh method in combination with other solid mesh methods
in a multibody part, and the bodies are meshed with conformal mesh.

• If a multibody part contains some bodies that are scoped to be meshed with MultiZone
and other bodies that are not scoped with any mesh method, then the other bodies are
meshed with the default mesh method.

Refer to Conformal and Non-Conformal Meshing (p. 21) for information about conformal
meshing.

• For Torus geometry with sliver faces, set Mesh Based Defeaturing as ON to avoid mesh
failure.

• MultiZone supports handling bodies where all three Decomposition Types are applied on
different bodies. When you mesh multibodies with shared topology simultaneously, all
bodies with Cart Sweep applied are meshed first, followed by bodies applied with Thin
Sweep and finally the bodies applied with Standard MultiZone.

• MultiZone tries to mesh axisymmetric cases using the Program Controlled Decomposition
Type. In case of failure, set the Defeature Size other than the default value. This forces the
application to create a revolved profile blocking. This feature requires that all faces in the
body to be 360 degree fully revolved but edges could be split. It does not support cases
with cutouts in the revolved surface.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
258 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

• For long coil cases failure, you may perform the following:

If the geometry is unclean, save the geometry in ACIS format and import the geometry to
Discovery Modeling and save the database. Slice one end of the coil into a small piece. Now,
apply Shared topology and clean up the geometry using Repair and Prepare tools in Dis-
covery Modeling and save the database. Open the saved database in the Mesh component
system in Ansys Workbench and apply mesh setting and perform meshing.

Selective meshing may help sometimes. For example, mesh the inner body first, followed
by the outer body and then two long bodies along the length of the coil simultaneously.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 259
Local Mesh Controls

Thin Sweep Limitations

The limitations of Thin Sweep are:

• Thin Sweep does not fully support multibody part with shared topology meshed either with
all bodies once or selective meshing.

• Thin Sweep does not support intersecting loops in double side imprinting.

• When you try to mesh all bodies in a model having a stack of the thin bodies, Thin Sweep
may not recognize the bodies as thin bodies.

• The Sweep Number of Divisions is not respected for cases where walls (side faces) are shared
with source or target surfaces of connected bodies. In the below example, the Sweep
Number Of Divisions = 2 is not respected for top body.

Cart Sweep Limitations

The limitations of Cart Sweep are:

• Cart Sweep supports Mapped Mesh Type only with source face selection.

• Cart Sweep supports only Preserve Boundaries that are Protected.

• Cart Sweep may not work well with shared topology.

Medial Axis Limitations

The limitations of Medial Axis are:

• Medial Axis path should have a single start and a single end. That is, the path should not have
any branch.

• Medial Axis may not support all protected topology.

• Medial Axis may exhibit slow performances when connecting to adjacent meshed bodies with
many protected topologies. In such cases, try to maintain the medial axis body as single source
to single target to improve the performance.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
260 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

Cartesian Method Control

Cartesian method creates unstructured hexa mesh of mostly uniform size, aligned to the specified
coordinate system, and fits it to the geometry. The element size should be smaller than the thickness
of the model to prevent the mesher from defeaturing (not capturing) that portion of the model.
Alternatively, the defeaturing could be helpful to eliminate dirty geometry smaller than the element
size. Cartesian Method is a body fitted meshing.

This method is useful when the geometry features align well with a coordinate system and a regular
mesh is desired. Models for explicit dynamics, organic models (models without many feature edges),
process industry and electronic components are good examples that could benefit from this mesh
method. This method is also recommended for simulating the printing process in Additive Manu-
facturing.

Note:

The Cartesian method must be applied to an entire part. If a body in a multibody part
is selected, all bodies in the part are added to the Geometry selection.

To access the Cartesian Method control,

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Method.

Or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Method in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon. Select
Method as Cartesian in the Automatic Method Details view.

The Cartesian Method Details view has the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry bodies or named selection. The default value
is Geometry Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allow you to scope the geometry bodies. When you select Geometry
Selection, the Geometry allows you to select the geometry from the Geometry window.

– Named Selection: Allow you to scope bodies grouped under a named selection.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is set to Yes, Active displays the status of the selected control. Active is read-only.

• Method: Allows you to select method.

When you select the Cartesian Method option, the Details view expands to include additional
settings, many of which are unique to this option. For basic usage that involves obtaining a Cartesian
mesh, the procedure is to apply a Method Control to one or more bodies, set Method to Cartesian,
and accept the default values of the various settings.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 261
Local Mesh Controls

For advanced or specialized usage, adjust the settings as needed. The following is a description of
each of these settings.

• Element Order: Allows you to select the element order. The default value is Use Global Setting.
For information about the Element Order option, refer Method Controls and Element Order
Settings (p. 202).

• Type - Allows you to specify how the edge size is determined. Edge size is considered a soft size,
allowing for small variations depending on geometry and other settings. The available options
are Element Size and Number of Divisions. The default value is Element Size.

– Element Size: Allows you to set the element size. You can use the Default setting, which
is based on global element size, or manually set the element size. Select the check box
to the left of the label to parameterize the Element Size.

– Number of Divisions: Allows you to set manually number of divisions in Z-direction using
Number of Divisions in Z-Dir or you can use the Default setting, which is obtained from
the model's bounding box size in the z-direction divided by the global element size. The
nominal size found from the computation of the number of divisions is also used for the
spacing in the x and y dimensions.

→ Number of Division in Z-Dir: Allows you to set the number of divisions in the Z direc-
tion. You can parametrize Number of Divisions in Z- Dir.

• Spacing Option: Allows you to force split lines to better capture model features. The default
value is Uniform. The available options are:

– Uniform: Uses the specified element size for X, Y and Z spacing. This may result in distorted
or missing elements.

– Key-Points (Auto): Check all vertices in the model and add split lines to follow the features,
within the specified Tolerance. Then, Key-Points (Auto) adjust the mesh spacing between
neighboring split lines so that the hex mesh follows the features.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
262 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

→ Key-Points Tolerance: Allows you to set the tolerance to defeature small features and
avoid over-refined meshes when corner features are not aligned.

Example without Key-Points

Example with Key-Points Tolerance equals zero

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 263
Local Mesh Controls

Example with Key-Points Tolerance ≥ geometry step size

– Key-Points (Manual) - Allows you to select vertices manually to create split lines in each of
the X, Y and Z directions. Mesh spacing is adjusted between neighboring splits. Additional
split lines may be added by the mesher as required to follow the features. The available options
for the Key-Points (Manual) in X, Y and Z direction are:

→ Vertices in X: Allows you to set vertices manually to create split lines in X-direction.

→ Vertices in Y: Allows you to set vertices manually to create split lines in Y-direction.

→ Vertices in Z: Allows you to set vertices manually to create split lines in Z-direction.

Note:

Key-Points are the corner points of the features. Specifying key-points matches
cartesian splits with the corner points so that the feature is respected.

Advanced

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
264 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

• Projection Factor: Allows you to set the balance between mesh quality and capturing the geo-
metry.

Set a value between 0 and 1. If the Projection Factor is set to 0, the Cartesian mesh will have
high quality hexa elements that approximate the geometry surface through stairstepping. Increas-
ing the value of Projection Factor will force the mesh to more closely follow the geometry surface,
but with reduced element quality. If the Projection Factor is set to 1, most of the boundary
nodes will project to the geometry and perturb only those causing bad element quality. However,
some hexa elements may have pairs of coplanar faces to fit a planar geometry surface.

The following demo is presented as an animated GIF. View online if you are reading the PDF version
of the help. Interface names and other components shown in the demo may differ from those in the
released product.The image shows the effect of decreasing the Projection Factor for a simple
geometry with two sides aligned with the global coordinate system.

The default value of Projection Factor is 0 for Additive Manufacturing Process simulations.
Specifically, if the AM Process object is present in the Project tree when a Cartesian method is
added, the Projection Factor is automatically set to 0. When you want to generate supports
from the meshed body, the Projection Factor must be set to 0.

• Project in constant Z-Plane: Allows you to use for print simulation in Additive Manufacturing.

If enabled, the x and y coordinates of the Cartesian mesh are modified while maintaining a con-
stant height in the Z-direction. The final mesh is much tighter to the geometry. This option is
enabled by default if the AM Process object is present in the Project tree.

• Stretch Factor in X: Allows you to modify the Aspect Ratio of the hex mesh in the X-dimension.

• Stretch Factor in Y: Allows you to modify the Aspect Ratio of the hex mesh in the Y-dimension.

• Stretch Factor in Z: Allows you to modify the Aspect Ratio of the hex mesh in the Z-dimension.

Stretch Factor is useful to reduce the element count for a geometry that may be elongated or
shortened in one dimension. In this image, Stretch Factor in Z has been set to 3.0 while X and
Y remain at 1.0. Mesh elements sizes can be up to about 3x larger in the z-dimension than x-di-
mension and y-dimension, within the constraint of the Projection Factor.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 265
Local Mesh Controls

Note:

The process for applying the Stretch Factor depends on how edge sizing is determined.
However the result on aspect ratio is the same.

– When Type = Element Size, the stretch factor applies a multiplier to the element
size, aligned to a selected dimension. For example, when Element Size = 0.1 and
stretch factors of 0.5, 1, and 2 are applied, then the dimensional mesh element size
will be approximately 0.05, 0.1 and 0.2.

– When Type = Number of Divisions, the stretch factor scales the other dimensions
while preserving the specified number of divisions in the z-dimension. For example,
when stretch factors are 0.5, 1, and 2, then the nominal element sizes are scaled by
approximately 1/4, 1/2 and 1 to preserve the number of divisions in the z-dimension.

Note:

Body Fitted Cartesian Method supports soft edge sizing.

• Coordinate System: Allows you to choose the coordinate system to which the mesh is aligned.
The default value is Global Coordinate System.

• Write ICEM CFD Files: Allows you to set options for writing Ansys ICEM CFD files. Refer to Writing
Ansys ICEM CFD Files (p. 84) for details.

• Smooth Mesh Spacing: Allows you to perform edge length based smoothing when Smooth
Mesh Spacing is set to Yes. The default value is Yes when the Physics Preference is Explicit.
For other Physics Preference, the default value is No.

Layered Tetrahedrons Method Control

Layered Tetrahedrons mesh method creates unstructured tetrahedral mesh in layers based on a
specified layer height and fits it to the geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
266 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

This method can be used for simulating the printing process in Additive Manufacturing as the build
parts must conform to a mesh with fixed step sizes in the global Z direction.

The meshing process involves the following approach:

• Generates an initial surface mesh based on the defined settings.

• Generates mesh layers based on the specified layer height. The mesher generates the mesh layers
starting from the Z-location of the plane.

• Projects nodes on the geometry within the specified tolerance (Relative Tolerance) of the layer
plane to the plane during the initial layer operation.

• Layered Tetrahedron method preserves feature nodes and corner nodes determined based on
the Feature Angle and the Corner Angle, respectively.

• Identifies problematic sliver faces based on Sliver Triangle Height and collapses or fixes sliver
faces to improve quality.

• Identifies and inflates the geometry faces overlapping the layer planes based on the Overlapping
angle. Additionally, geometry faces close to the layer planes which leads to bad quality tets are
identified based on the Layer Height and proximity to the plane. These faces inflate away from
the layer planes to create space for better quality tets based on the Inflate Relative Tolerance
value specified.

• Fills the improved surface mesh with tetrahedral mesh conforming to the mesh layer. Thus, im-
proves the tetrahedral mesh quality.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 267
Local Mesh Controls

Figure 102: Layered Tetrahedrons Mesh

Note:

• Layered Tetrahedrons Mesh Method does not support bodies with shared topology.
Conformal mesh is not created even when the bodies have shared interface(s).

• This method cannot be used with mesh controls such as Inflation, Refinement, Match
Control, Pinch, Face Meshing and Edge Sizing controls.

• The mesh is not associated back to geometry. See Association Using Named Selec-
tions (p. 271) for more details.

To access the Layered Tetrahedrons Method control,

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Method.

Or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Method in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

Select Method as Layered Tetrahedrons Method in the Automatic Method Details view.

When you choose the Layered Tetrahedrons Method option, the Details view expands to include
additional settings, many of which are unique to this option. For basic usage, the procedure is to

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
268 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

apply a Method Control to the body and set Method to Layered Tetrahedrons. Set the Layer
Height and accept the default values of the various settings.

Meshing Recommendations
• The Layered Tetrahedrons method is available only when Use Adaptive Sizing is set to No.

• Minimum and maximum sizes should be decided based on the model.

– The minimum size should be decided based on the features to be resolved and the Layer
Height. You should set a value smaller than the Layer Height.

– The Element Size should not be greater than 6 times the specified minimum size. The mesh
quality reduces as the Element Size to Min Size ratio increases.

– The Max Size does not influence the layered tet mesher.

• Set the Growth Rate, the recommended range of values is 1.2 to 2.

• The recommended range for the Curvature Normal Angle is up to 36 degrees.

• The Sliver Triangle Height is based on the minimum size (p. 113) specified. The default value is
10% of the minimum size. You should use a Sliver Triangle Height not more than 50% of min
size.

• Increasing Relative Tolerance and Inflate Relative Tolerance can avoid generating thin pockets
of mesh. The recommended range for Relative Tolerance is between 0.01 to 0.02. The recom-
mended range for Inflate Relative Tolerance is between 0.1 to 0.3.

The Layered Tetrahedrons mesh method includes the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry bodies or named selection. The default value
is Geometry Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allow you to scope the geometry bodies. When you select Geometry
Selection, the Geometry allows you to select the geometry from the Geometry window.

– Named Selection: Allow you to scope bodies grouped under a named selection.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is set to Yes, Active displays the status of the selected control. Active is read-only.

• Method: Allows you to select the method.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 269
Local Mesh Controls

• Element Order: Allows you to select the element order. The default value is Use Global Setting.
For information about the Element Order option, refer Method Controls and Element Order
Settings (p. 202).

Note:

Only straight sided mid-nodes are available for quadratic element type.

• Layer Height: Allows you to set the height of steps in elements along the global Z direction.

• Control Messages: Provides a message when Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes and when layered
tetrahedron mesh fails. You can click Control Messages to view the message.

Advanced

• Generate Layers Using Facets: Generates layered tetrahedron mesh for the given model using
facets. When Generate Layers Using Facets is Yes this allows you to skip the surface mesh
generation before slicing. Thus, slicing operation is performed directly on CAD. The default value
is No.

• Repair Facets: Enables you to repair CAD facets. When set to Yes, Repair Facets allows you to
fix Sliver facets and facet intersections aggressively. The default value is No.

• Layer Start: Generates the mesh layers from the Z-location of the plane. The default value is the
min Z-coordinate of the bounding box enclosing the scoped bodies. For Additive Manufacturing
simulations, more specifically, when the AM Process object is available in the Project tree, it
automatically sets the value to the Z-coordinate of the top of the baseplate by default.

• Relative Tolerance: During the initial layer operation, projects nodes within the specified tolerance
(relative tolerance) to the layer plane to the plane on the geometry plane. The default value is
0.01 (1%) which can be used for most cases. The recommended range of values is 0.01 to 0.02
(1-2%). For extreme cases, you may use a value of up to 0.05.

• Inflate Relative Tolerance: Improve the surface mesh in the thin layer regions after performing
the layering operation. This tolerance moves nodes away to the specified value to improve the
quality. The default value is 0.1 (10% of the layer height). The tolerance range of 0.1 and 0.3 help
you to achieve good results. The largest acceptable value is 0.5, use this value carefully.

• Overlapping Angle: Identify and inflate the geometry faces overlapping the layer planes based
on the provided angle. The default is 155 degrees. The acceptable range is an angle greater
than the Feature Angle and less than 180 degrees.

• Defeature Layer Volume: Specifies the threshold volume for defeaturing a thin end layer of
cells. Defeature Layer Volume is used only if a very thin end layer is expected since such layers
may cause mesh quality issues.

• Aggressive Inflate Option: Enables inflation of faces in the proximity of the layer planes to im-
prove mesh quality in addition to inflation to resolve overlapping faces. This default value is Yes.
In some cases, the aggressive inflation may cause some intersections in the surface mesh, in
which case you can set the Aggressive Inflate Option to No.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
270 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

• Aggressive Tetrahedrons Improvement: Activates the tetrahedron mesh improvement routines.

It allows you to remove the thin tetrahedrons formed during meshing. The default value is No.
When set to Yes, allows the mesh to do aggressive tetrahedron improvements.

• Sliver Triangle Height: Identifies problematic sliver faces based on the provided height and
collpases or fixes the face to improve quality. The Sliver Triangle Height is based on the specified
minimum size (p. 113). The default value is 10% of the minimum size. Based on the model, you
may need to increase the value. However, you should not use a value greater than 50% of the
min size.

• Feature Angle: Determines feature nodes based on Feature Angle and are preserved during
meshing. The default feature angle is 40 degrees. The acceptable range is from 0 degrees to an
angle less than the specified Overlapping Angle.

• Corner Angle: Determines corner nodes based on Corner Angle and are preserved during
meshing. The default is 90 degrees. The acceptable range is from 0 to 180 degrees.

Association Using Named Selections

The Layered Tetrahedrons method does not fully associate the mesh to the geometry. To have
mesh associated to the geometry, define Named Selections on the faces on which association is
required prior to meshing.

Note:

Edge and vertex named selections are not considered for mesh association.

Limitations
The Layered Tetrahedrons method has the following limitations:

• Multi-body parts with and without shared topology are not supported. You should separate them
into individual parts in CAD.

• The model should not have other suppressed bodies.

• The mesh is not associated back to geometry. See Association Using Named Selections (p. 271)
for more details.

• Only straight sided mid-nodes are available for quadratic element type.

• Contact must be used between two bodies even if they have a shared interface.

Note:

Layered Tetrahedron method does not generate conformal mesh when there is a
shared interface between bodies.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 271
Local Mesh Controls

Particle Method
Particle Method generates cloud of particles of specified diameter within the body. Particle
Method is available only when the Physics Preference is set to Explicit in the Mesh Details view
and for bodies with Reference Frame set to Particle.

Note:

• Particle Method does not support multi body parts.

• Particle Method supports only solid bodies.

• Solid bodies must have water-tight facets to be meshed with Particle Method.

To access the Particle Method control,

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Method.

Or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Method in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

Select Method as Particle in the Automatic Method Details view.

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry bodies or named selection. The default value
is Geometry Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allows you to scope the geometry bodies. When you select Geometry
Selection, the Geometry allows you to select the geometry from the Geometry window.

– Named Selection: Allows you to scope bodies grouped under a named selection.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is set to Yes, Active displays the status of the selected control. Active is read-only.

• Method: Allows you to select method.

• Particle Diameter: Allows you to define the diameter of particles to be generated.

• Control Message: Provides message when the Particle Method is scoped to an unsupported
body. You can click Control Message to view the error message.

Note:

– If Thick Shells and Beams option is turned off, the particles are displayed as
crosses based on their centers. To visualize the particles as spheres Thick Shells
and Beams option must be turned on.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
272 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

– Error message for mesh failure referring to non-conformal facets means that
the input body does not have water-tight facets. The input must be corrected
in the geometry. Refaceting the geometry can help to resolve this issue in some
cases or use the Shrinkwrap tool in Discovery or Discovery Modeling to get a
fully connected faceted body before proceeding to Particle Meshing. Converting
the body to faceted in the geometry tool and ensuring the faceted body is
watertight is another way to resolve this issue.

Automatic (PrimeMesh)
Automatic (PrimeMesh) performs sweeping for solid models and generate quadrilateral elements
for sheet body models, when Solid-Shell Weld - Shared Nodes is No under Meshing option in
Files > Options > Meshing. When solid bodies cannot be swept, the body is meshed with the
Patch Conforming Tetrahedron mesher. Automatic (PrimeMesh) creates non conformal mesh with
contacts between the shell and the weld bodies.

Automatic (PrimeMesh) performs tetrahedral mesh for solid bodies even though bodies are
sweepable and quadrilateral mesh for the sheet bodies, when Solid-Shell Weld - Shared Nodes
is Yes under Meshing option in Files > Options > Meshing. Automatic (PrimeMesh) creates
conformal mesh with contacts between the shell and the weld bodies.

Automatic (PrimeMesh) method can be scoped to all body types like solid, sheet and beam bodies.
Automatic (PrimeMesh) uses global Element Order for meshing.

When Solid-Shell Weld - Shared Nodes is set to No,

• Geometry operations such as Repair Topology, Connect and so on are not performed on
the solid bodies which are scoped to the Automatic (PrimeMesh). For example, when you
perform Repair Topology with merge face operation on two faces of the solid bodies, that
operation is not executed.

• Weld generation between shell and solid bodies can be completed but the node connection
between the weld and solid bodies are not conformal. Instead, contact is created during the
solve.

When Solid-Shell Weld - Shared Nodes is set to Yes,

• Geometry operations such as Repair Topology, Connect and so on are performed on the
scoped solid bodies which are scoped to the Automatic (PrimeMesh).

To access Automatic (PrimeMesh),

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Method.

Or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Method in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

For solid bodies, Select Method as Automatic (PrimeMesh) in the Automatic Method Details
view.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 273
Local Mesh Controls

The Automatic (PrimeMesh) Details view has the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry bodies or named selection. The default value
is Geometry Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allows you to scope the geometry bodies. When you select Geometry
Selection, the Geometry allows you to select the geometry from the Geometry window.

– Named Selection: Allows you to scope bodies grouped under a named selection.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is set to Yes, Active displays the status of the selected control. Active is read-only.

• Method: Allows you to select method.

• Control Messages: Provides an error message for errors or incompatibilities in the scoped geo-
metries of the method. Control Messages is available only when Use Adaptive Sizing is set to
Yes, the input geometry has symmetries or two Automatic (PrimeMesh) method is scoped to
the same body. You can click Control Messages to view the error message.

Advanced

• Shell Mesh Type: Allows you to select the type of shell mesh. The default value is Quadrilateral.

– Triangle: Allows you to generate a triangular mesh for shell bodies.

– Quadrilateral: Allows you to generate a quad-dominant mesh for shell bodies.

→ Triangle Reduction: Allows you to reduce the number of triangular elements while meshing
with Quadrilateral mesh type. The available options are None, Conservative, and Aggress-
ive. The default option is Conservative. Triangle Reduction is available only when Shell
Mesh Type is Quadrilateral.

→ None: Allows you to generate quadrilateral mesh without reducing the triangle count on
the whole body.

→ Conservative: Allows you to move the triangles near to the boundary nodes or edges away
from the boundary and then reduces the triangle count on the whole body.

→ Aggressive: Allows you to move the interior triangles and the boundary triangles to form
pairs of connecting triangles and then reduces the triangle count on the whole body. Hence,
Aggressive removes more triangles than Conservative.

Note:

Aggressive may reduce the quality of the mesh while removing triangles.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
274 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

• Auto Repair Topology: Allows you to automatically repair topologies of the scoped bodies,
when set to Yes. The default value is No. The available options are:

– Partial Defeature: Allows you to partially merge the geometry by suppressing only a
portion of the edge joining two faces based on Thin Face Width, Sharp Angle and Feature
Angle.

Partial Defeature is useful for retaining important geometric features without merging
the faces completely at thin faces or sharp angles.

When you set Partial Defeature to Yes, mesher automatically sets the Remove Thin
Faces and Remove Sharp Angle to Yes by default and you cannot update Remove Thin
Faces and Remove Sharp Angle.

– Remove Thin Faces: Removes the thin faces by merging them with the neighboring faces
below the specified tolerance. When Remove Thin Faces is Yes, the available option is :

→ Thin Face Width: Allows you to specify the width of the thin face. The default value
for Thin Face Width is same as the Connection Tolerance.

– Collapse Short Edge: Collapses the edges below the specified tolerance. Feature edges
and Protected edges are not collapsed. The default value is No. When the Collapse Short
Edges is Yes, the available option is:

→ Short Edge Length: Allows you to specify the shortest edge length to perform collapse
operation. The default value for Collapse Short Edges is same as the Connection Tol-
erance.

– Remove Sharp Angle Faces: Removes the sharp angle faces below the specified angle
tolerance by merging them to the neighboring faces. The default value is No. When Re-
move Sharp Angle Faces is Yes, the available option is:

→ Sharp Angle: Allows you to capture faces below the specified angle. The default value
for Sharp Angle is 10 degrees.

– Feature Angle: Specifies the minimum dihedral angle at which the geometry features are
repaired. The default value is 30 degrees. You can provide any value between 0 to 180
degrees.

Feature Angle is the dihedral angle measured as follows:

When θ = 0, two surfaces are perfectly tangential, and the edges are not protected. Hence,
the two surfaces can be merged, or edges can be suppressed, pinched or more.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 275
Local Mesh Controls

When 30 ≤ θ ≤ 90 degrees, the edges between the two surfaces are protected and
cannot perform merging or pinching at the location.

θ = 90

When θ > 90 degrees,the surfaces are not protected and prevents topology operations
like merge or pinch on faces or edges.

Note:

When you scope same body or part with the Auto Repair Topology and Repair
Topology, the Message window displays a warning message that multiple repair
topology options overlap. Software executes controls with the smallest values
first, which can lead to unexpected result.

• Repair Tolerance: Allows you to repair and collapse the smallest edges of faces. The default
value is the same as the global Defeature Size.

When Repair Tolerance is default and you modify global Defeature Size, the mesher automat-
ically updates the Repair Tolerance.

When you modify Repair Tolerance, the mesher does not automatically update the global De-
feature Size.

Note:

When you provide a high value of Repair Tolerance, it may lead to mesh failure.
When you scope same body or part with the Repair Tolerance in Automatic
(PrimeMesh) Method and Connect control, the Message window displays a
warning message that Connection Tolerance overrides Repair Tolerance in
Automatic (PrimeMesh) Method.

Best Practices
The recommended inputs for Automatic (PrimeMesh) are as follows:

Set the facet quality to 7 before importing model into Mechanical. You can set the facet
quality in Discovery Modeling by navigating through SpaceClaim > SpaceClaim Options >
Rendering Quality. The facet quality in DesignModeler can be set by navigating through
DesignModeler > Tools > Options >Graphics > Facet Quality.

• For bodies with large cylindrical faces, a facet quality of 10 may be required for adequate
geometric representation during meshing. To avoid rendering the whole model with this

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
276 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

value, you can set this value on each body using Body Properties in Discovery Modeling
or under Appearance in Discovery.

• In Discovery Modeling, DesignModeler or in other upstream CAD package, Extend operation

should be performed. The largest connection gap to be resolved should be smaller than the
specified Element size.

• Remove overhangs in upstream CAD. Overhangs are small penetrations between two surfaces.
When unresolved overhangs can lead to mesh failure or mesh quality issues.

• Imprinting edges or performing share topology at CAD level is not recommended. If CAD
model has edges already imprinted, then use Repair Topology (p. 355) to remove them.

• If the model has faces with missing facets, then you should fix them in upstream CAD.

The suggested general connection strategy is for clean models that do not have much difference
between the smallest and the largest gap to be connected across. The best practices to follow while
connecting two entities are as follows:

• Find the smallest and largest gap between the entities to be connected.

– Define a list of connection tolerance such that the smallest gap is less than the
smallest connection tolerance and the largest connection tolerance is greater than
the largest gap.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 277
Local Mesh Controls

– Check for any warning message on unconnected edges reported during meshing.

– Right-click the warning message and select Show Problematic Geometry. Use
model Walk to analyze the unconnected regions.

– Create named selections on unconnected entities.

Remember the following while performing Automatic (PrimeMesh):

• The gap size between the entities to be connected must be smaller than the Element Size.
For example, if the biggest gap size to be resolved is 1 mm then the element size must be
greater than 1 mm.

• Faces (width) and edges (length) of the connected entities below the connection tolerance(s)
are defeatured.

• Mesh is not associated with defeatured entities (edge, face, body/part).

• Mesh is not associated with vertices.

• In Automatic (PrimeMesh), the Sheet Loop Removal only works if the connection is made
through the Connect control.

• In case of quadrilateral mesh failure, triangle mesh is generated with a warning message
displayed.

– Right-click the warning message and select Show Problematic Topology to display
the bodies on which triangle mesh was generated.

– If triangle mesh also fails, then the mesh failure is reported and CAD facets will be
displayed.

Limitations
The limitations of Automatic (PrimeMesh) are as follows:

• Overlapping beams are not supported. Mesh in the overlapping portion of the beams will
be assigned to either one of the involved beams.

• Mapped Meshing does not support mapping of annular region.

• Weld and Mapped control override all other sizing and local control settings.

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) does not support multi-body parts which includes solid body parts.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
278 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) does not create conformal meshes between solids.

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) does not support Layered Tetrahedrons Method.

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) does not support global Defeature Size, when Mesh Defeaturing
is set to Yes in the Sizing option. In Automatic (PrimeMesh), you must use Repair Topo-
logy (p. 355) to defeature the geometry. Also, in Repair Topology set Repair Thin Faces
Options and Repair Short Edges Options to Yes for automatically repairing short edges
and thin faces.

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) does not support Inflation control, Match control, Pinch control,
Adaptive Sizing, BOI Size, Vertex Size (Sphere of Influence).

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) does not support quality targets provided to the mesher.

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) Method applies Face Meshing and local Sizing controls after
performing any merge and suppress operations defined under Auto Repair Topology or
Repair Topology control. In such cases, Face Meshing and local Sizing controls are applied
to a larger composite face than the initial scoped faces. To avoid faces being modified by
topology repair operations, you can apply a Named Selection to the faces with Protected
as Yes.

Ease of Use Features

When an error or warning such as unconnected edges or mesh failure occurs, you can right-click
the corresponding message and select Show Problematic Geometry to highlight the location at
which error occurred in the model.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 279
Local Mesh Controls

You can click Selections tab in the ribbon and click Start in Walk group to walk through the error
locations. You can use Next to walk to the next location. You can click Previous to go back to the
previous error location.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
280 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 281
Local Mesh Controls

You can view the unconnected faces after meshing. To view the unconnected faces, right-click the
Geometry window. Select Diagnostics > Find Unconnected Faces. The unconnected faces get
highlighted in the model.

When entities scoped to Named Selection with Protected set to Yes are modified while performing
Automatic (PrimeMesh), you will receive a warning message.

Setting the Method Control for Sheet Bodies

Method Controls available for sheet bodies are:
Quadrilateral Dominant Method Control
Triangles Method Control
MultiZone Quad/Tri Method Control
Automatic (PrimeMesh)

Quadrilateral Dominant Method Control

Quadrilateral Dominant Method creates the free quad mesh on the body. To access the Quadri-
lateral Dominant method,

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
282 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Method.

Or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Method in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry bodies or named selection. The default value
is Geometry Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allows you to scope the geometry bodies. When you select Geometry
Selection, the Geometry allows you to select the geometry from the Geometry window.

– Named Selection: Allows you to scope bodies grouped under a named selection.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is set to Yes, Active displays the status of the selected control. Active is read-only.

• Method: Allows you to select method.

• Element Order: Allows you to select the element order. The default value is Use Global Setting.
For information about the Element Order option, refer Method Controls and Element Order
Settings (p. 202).

• Free Face Mesh Type: Allows you to select the shape of the elements used to fill the body. The
available options are Quad/Tri or All Quad. The default is Quad/Tri.

– All Quad: Allows you to create the quadrilateral mesh.

– Quad/Tri: Allows you to create the mesh with both quadrilateral and triangular elements.

Note:

• If you are using the Quadrilateral Dominant mesh method with inflation (p. 345) and
the Size Function (p. 105) is on, the mesh size of the last inflation layer will be used
for the corresponding Quadrilateral Dominant boundary mesh size.

• If you apply a local Sizing control (p. 296) to a solid body with a Method control set
to Hex Dominant (p. 233) or Sweep (p. 235), or to a sheet body with a Method control
set to Quadrilateral Dominant (p. 282), a near uniform quadrilateral mesh will result
on all affected faces on a body meshed with Hex Dominant, on the source face
meshed with Sweep, and on all affected faces meshed with Quadrilateral Dominant.
To obtain even more of a uniform quadrilateral mesh, set the Behavior (p. 310) of the
Sizing control to Hard.

• If you are meshing a multibody part that contains a mix of line bodies and surface
bodies, all surface bodies and all line bodies that share edges with surface bodies will
be meshed with the selected surface mesh method. Any remaining line bodies (where
only vertices are shared with surface bodies) will always be meshed with the Quadri-
lateral Dominant mesh method.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 283
Local Mesh Controls

Triangles Method Control

Triangles Method creates a triangular mesh. To access the Triangles Method,

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Method.

Or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Method in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

Select Method as Triangles in the Quadrilateral Dominant Details view.

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry bodies or named selection. The default value
is Geometry Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allows you to scope the geometry bodies. When you select Geometry
Selection, the Geometry allows you to select the geometry from the Geometry window.

– Named Selection: Allows you to scope bodies grouped under a named selection.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is set to Yes, Active displays the status of the selected control. Active is read-only.

• Method: Allows you to select method.

• Element Order: Allows you to select the element order. The default value is Use Global Setting.
For information about the Element Order option, refer Method Controls and Element Order
Settings (p. 202).

MultiZone Quad/Tri Method Control

MultiZone Quad/Tri Method creates a mesh of quads,triangles or both over the entire part of the
selected body.

MultiZone Quad/Tri is a patch independent method.

To access the MultiZone Quad/Tri Method,

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Method.

Or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Method in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

Select Method as MultiZone Quad/Tri in the Quadrilateral Dominant Details view.

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry bodies or named selection. The default value
is Geometry Selection.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
284 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

– Geometry Selection: Allows you to scope the geometry bodies. When you select Geometry
Selection, the Geometry allows you to select the geometry from the Geometry window.

– Named Selection: Allows you to scope bodies grouped under a named selection.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is set to Yes, Active displays the status of the selected control. Active is read-only.

• Method: Allows you to select method.

• Surface Mesh Method: Instructs MultiZone Quad/Tri to use the Program Controlled, Uniform,
or Pave method to create the mesh. The default method is Program Controlled

– Program Controlled: Automatically uses a combination of Uniform and Pave mesh

methods depending on the mesh sizes set and face properties.

– Uniform: Uses a recursive loop-splitting method which creates a highly uniform mesh.
This option is generally good when all edges have the same sizing and the faces being
meshed do not have a high degree of curvature. The orthogonality of the mesh from this
method is generally very good.

– Pave: Uses a paving mesh method which creates a good quality mesh on faces with high
curvature, and also when neighboring edges have a high aspect ratio. This approach is
also more reliable to give an all-quad mesh.

Note:

The MultiZone Quad/Tri method ignores the Sizing Options (p. 105) when Surface
Mesh Method is set to Uniform. In such cases, Element Size acts as a hard size.

• Element Order - Allows you to select the element order. Refer to Method Controls and Element
Order Settings (p. 202).

• Free Face Mesh Type - Determines the shape of the mesh elements. The default value is Quad/Tri.
Free Face Mesh Type has the following options:

– All Tri: Allows you to create the triangular mesh.

– Quad/Tri: Allows you to create the mesh with both quadrilateral and triangular elements.

– All Quad: Allows you to create the quadrilateral mesh.

• Element Size - Allows you to specify the element size used for the selected geometry. Applicable
only when Surface Mesh Method is set to Uniform. Otherwise, uses the global Element
Size (p. 102).

Advanced

• Preserve Boundaries: Allows you to protect the boundaries from the defeature size when set
to Protected and when set to All it respects all the features. The default value is Protected.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 285
Local Mesh Controls

• Mesh Based Defeaturing: "Filters" edges in or out based on size and angle. The default value
based on global Mesh Defeaturing (p. 111). This local Mesh Based Defeaturing setting is the same
as the setting of the global Mesh Defeaturing control. When Mesh Based Defeaturing is On, a
Defeature Size field appears.

– Defeature Size: Allows you to set the defeature size for mesh defeaturing. Defeature
Size is available only when Mesh Defeaturing is set to Yes. The default value is based
on the global Mesh Defeaturing (p. 111). When you specify a value different from the
global Defeature Size, it overrides the global value. Specifying a value of 0.0 resets the
Defeature Size to its default. A recommended setting is at least one-half the value set
for Element Size to assure a successful mesh. You can parametrize Defeature Size.

Note:

When the global Mesh Defeaturing (p. 111) control is on but Use Adaptive Sizing
is set to Yes, the default defeaturing performed for MultiZone Quad/Tri includes
defeaturing based on the dihedral angle between the faces as well as edge length
defeaturing based on the smallest element size set by the user.

• Sheet Loop Removal: Removes holes on surface bodies based on size. If set to Yes, a Loop Re-
moval Tolerance field appears. The default value is No.

– Loop Removal Tolerance: Sets the tolerance for loop removal. You can specify a numerical
value greater than 0.0. By default, the value of this local Loop Removal Tolerance field is the
same as the global Loop Removal Tolerance (p. 197). When you specify a value different from
the global Loop Removal Tolerance. It overrides the global value. Holes with boundary con-
ditions applied are not removed from the mesh. Any boundary conditions applied to holes
that were removed from the mesh will not be respected by the solver.

• Minimum Edge Length: Read-only indication of the smallest edge length in the part.

• Write ICEM CFD Files: Sets options for writing Ansys ICEM CFD files. Refer to Writing Ansys ICEM
CFD Files (p. 84) for details.

Usage Information for the MultiZone Quad/Tri Mesh Method Control

The following usage information is applicable to the MultiZone Quad/Tri mesh method:

• MultiZone Quad/Tri does not support base mesh caching, so a change to inflation controls re-
quires remeshing.

• Using MultiZone Quad/Tri may allow meshing over very small bodies in a multibody part. This
may lead to a solver error if a body load is associated with that body. If this is the case, you must
suppress the body (p. 528) before solving your model.

• Surface bodies with specified variable thickness are not protected topology. To prevent faces
and their boundaries from being meshed over, create an individual Named Selection for each
thickness.

• The MultiZone Quad/Tri mesh method supports mesh connections (p. 485).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
286 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

• You can use the MultiZone Quad/Tri mesh method in combination with other surface mesh
methods in a multibody part, and meshes the bodies with conformal mesh. If you select the
MultiZone Quad/Tri mesh method to mesh a multibody part that contains a mix of line bodies
and surface bodies, all surface bodies and all line bodies that share edges with surface bodies
will be meshed with the selected method. Any remaining line bodies (where only vertices are
shared with surface bodies) will be meshed with the Quadrilateral Dominant (p. 282) mesh
method. Refer to Conformal and Non-Conformal Meshing (p. 21) for more information about
conformal meshing.

• When meshing multibody parts having solid bodies and sheet bodies with some faces shared,
it is best to mesh the shared faces with MultiZone Quad/Tri. If the faces are meshed using the
solid body mesh method control, the MultiZone Quad/Tri body will often fail.

Caution:

Multiple environments with different loadings may over-constrain the MultiZone Quad/Tri
mesher such that the mesher may not be able to return a mesh for the given inputs. If
discretization error is not an issue, the mesher will be less constrained if you duplicate
the model and change the environment instead of adding multiple environments under
the same model.

Automatic (PrimeMesh)
Automatic (PrimeMesh) performs sweeping for solid models and generate quadrilateral elements
for sheet body models, when Solid-Shell Weld - Shared Nodes is No under Meshing option in
Files > Options > Meshing. When solid bodies cannot be swept, the body is meshed with the
Patch Conforming Tetrahedron mesher. Automatic (PrimeMesh) creates non conformal mesh with
contacts between the shell and the weld bodies.

Automatic (PrimeMesh) performs tetrahedral mesh for solid bodies even though bodies are
sweepable and quadrilateral mesh for the sheet bodies, when Solid-Shell Weld - Shared Nodes
is Yes under Meshing option in Files > Options > Meshing. Automatic (PrimeMesh) creates
conformal mesh with contacts between the shell and the weld bodies.

Automatic (PrimeMesh) method can be scoped to all body types like solid, sheet and beam bodies.
Automatic (PrimeMesh) uses global Element Order for meshing.

When Solid-Shell Weld - Shared Nodes is set to No,

• Geometry operations such as Repair Topology, Connect and so on are not performed on
the solid bodies which are scoped to the Automatic (PrimeMesh). For example, when you
perform Repair Topology with merge face operation on two faces of the solid bodies, that
operation is not executed.

• Weld generation between shell and solid bodies can be completed but the node connection
between the weld and solid bodies are not conformal. Instead, contact is created during the
solve.

When Solid-Shell Weld - Shared Nodes is set to Yes,

• Geometry operations such as Repair Topology, Connect and so on are performed on the
scoped solid bodies which are scoped to the Automatic (PrimeMesh).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 287
Local Mesh Controls

To access Automatic (PrimeMesh),

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Method.

Or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Method in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

For sheet bodies, Select Method as Automatic (PrimeMesh) in the Quadrilateral Dominant Details
view.

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry bodies or named selection. The default value
is Geometry Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allows you to scope the geometry bodies. When you select Geometry
Selection, the Geometry allows you to select the geometry from the Geometry window.

– Named Selection: Allows you to scope bodies grouped under a named selection.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is set to Yes, Active displays the status of the selected control. Active is read-only.

• Method: Allows you to select method.

• Control Messages: Provides an error message for errors or incompatibilities in the scoped geo-
metries of the method. Control Messages is available only when Use Adaptive Sizing is set to
Yes, the input geometry has symmetries or two Automatic (PrimeMesh) method is scoped to
the same body. You can click Control Messages to view the error message.

Advanced

• Shell Mesh Type: Allows you to select the type of shell mesh. The default value is Quadrilateral.

– Triangle: Allows you to generate a triangular mesh for shell bodies.

– Quadrilateral: Allows you to generate a quad-dominant mesh for shell bodies.

→ Triangle Reduction: Allows you to reduce the number of triangular elements while meshing
with Quadrilateral mesh type. The available options are None, Conservative, and Aggress-
ive. The default option is Conservative. Triangle Reduction is available only when Shell
Mesh Type is Quadrilateral.

→ None: Allows you to generate quadrilateral mesh without reducing the triangle count on
the whole body.

→ Conservative: Allows you to move the triangles near to the boundary nodes or edges away
from the boundary and then reduces the triangle count on the whole body.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
288 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

→ Aggressive: Allows you to move the interior triangles and the boundary triangles to form
pairs of connecting triangles and then reduces the triangle count on the whole body. Hence,
Aggressive removes more triangles than Conservative.

Note:

Aggressive may reduce the quality of the mesh while removing triangles.

• Auto Repair Topology: Allows you to automatically repair topologies of the scoped bodies,
when set to Yes. The default value is No. The available options are:

– Partial Defeature: Allows you to partially merge the geometry by suppressing only a
portion of the edge joining two faces based on Thin Face Width, Sharp Angle and Feature
Angle.

Partial Defeature is useful for retaining important geometric features without merging
the faces completely at thin faces or sharp angles.

When you set Partial Defeature to Yes, mesher automatically sets the Remove Thin
Faces and Remove Sharp Angle to Yes by default and you cannot update Remove Thin
Faces and Remove Sharp Angle.

– Remove Thin Faces: Removes the thin faces by merging them with the neighboring faces
below the specified tolerance. When Remove Thin Faces is Yes, the available option is :

→ Thin Face Width: Allows you to specify the width of the thin face. The default value
for Thin Face Width is same as the Connection Tolerance.

– Collapse Short Edge: Collapses the edges below the specified tolerance. Feature edges
and Protected edges are not collapsed. The default value is No. When the Collapse Short
Edges is Yes, the available option is:

→ Short Edge Length: Allows you to specify the shortest edge length to perform collapse
operation. The default value for Collapse Short Edges is same as the Connection Tol-
erance.

– Remove Sharp Angle Faces: Removes the sharp angle faces below the specified angle
tolerance by merging them to the neighboring faces. The default value is No. When Re-
move Sharp Angle Faces is Yes, the available option is:

→ Sharp Angle: Allows you to capture faces below the specified angle. The default value
for Sharp Angle is 10 degrees.

– Feature Angle: Specifies the minimum dihedral angle at which the geometry features are
repaired. The default value is 30 degrees. You can provide any value between 0 to 180
degrees.

Feature Angle is the dihedral angle measured as follows:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 289
Local Mesh Controls

When θ = 0, two surfaces are perfectly tangential, and the edges are not protected. Hence,
the two surfaces can be merged, or edges can be suppressed, pinched or more.

When 30 ≤ θ ≤ 90 degrees, the edges between the two surfaces are protected and
cannot perform merging or pinching at the location.

θ = 90

When θ > 90 degrees,the surfaces are not protected and prevents topology operations
like merge or pinch on faces or edges.

Note:

When you scope same body or part with the Auto Repair Topology and Repair
Topology, the Message window displays a warning message that multiple repair
topology options overlap. Software executes controls with the smallest values
first, which can lead to unexpected result.

• Repair Tolerance: Allows you to repair and collapse the smallest edges of faces. The default
value is the same as the global Defeature Size.

When Repair Tolerance is default and you modify global Defeature Size, the mesher automat-
ically updates the Repair Tolerance.

When you modify Repair Tolerance, the mesher does not automatically update the global De-
feature Size.

Note:

When you provide a high value of Repair Tolerance, it may lead to mesh failure.
When you scope same body or part with the Repair Tolerance in Automatic
(PrimeMesh) Method and Connect control, the Message window displays a
warning message that Connection Tolerance overrides Repair Tolerance in
Automatic (PrimeMesh) Method.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
290 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

Best Practices
The recommended inputs for Automatic (PrimeMesh) are as follows:

• Set the facet quality to 7 before importing model into Mechanical. You can set the facet
quality in Discovery Modeling by navigating through SpaceClaim > SpaceClaim Options
> Rendering Quality. The facet quality in DesignModeler can be set by navigating through
DesignModeler > Tools > Options >Graphics > Facet Quality.

• For bodies with large cylindrical faces, a facet quality of 10 may be required for adequate
geometric representation during meshing. To avoid rendering the whole model with this
value, you can set this value on each body using Body Properties in Discovery Modeling
or under Appearance in Discovery.

• In Discovery Modeling, DesignModeler, or in other upstream CAD package, Extend operation

should be performed. The largest connection gap to be resolved should be smaller than the
specified Element size.

• Remove overhangs in upstream CAD. Overhangs are small penetrations between two surfaces.
When unresolved overhangs can lead to mesh failure or mesh quality issues.

• Imprinting edges or performing share topology at CAD level is not recommended. If CAD
model has edges already imprinted, then use Repair Topology (p. 355) to remove them.

• If the model has faces with missing facets, then you should fix them in upstream CAD.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 291
Local Mesh Controls

The suggested general connection strategy is for clean models that do not have much difference
between the smallest and the largest gap to be connected across. The best practices to follow while
connecting two entities are as follows:

• Find the smallest and largest gap between the entities to be connected.

– Define a list of connection tolerance such that the smallest gap is less than the
smallest connection tolerance and the largest connection tolerance is greater than
the largest gap.

– Check for any warning message on unconnected edges reported during meshing.

– Right-click the warning message and select Show Problematic Geometry. Use
model Walk to analyze the unconnected regions.

– Create named selections on unconnected entities.

Remember the following while performing Automatic (PrimeMesh):

• The gap size between the entities to be connected must be smaller than the Element Size.
For example, if the biggest gap size to be resolved is 1 mm then the element size must be
greater than 1 mm.

• Faces (width) and edges (length) of the connected entities below the connection tolerance(s)
are defeatured.

• Mesh is not associated with defeatured entities (edge, face, body/part).

• Mesh is not associated with vertices.

• In Automatic (PrimeMesh), the Sheet Loop Removal only works if the connection is made
through the Connect control.

• In case of quadrilateral mesh failure, triangle mesh is generated with a warning message
displayed.

– Right-click the warning message and select Show Problematic Topology to display
the bodies on which triangle mesh was generated.

– If triangle mesh also fails, then the mesh failure is reported and CAD facets will be
displayed.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
292 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

Limitations
The limitations of Automatic (PrimeMesh) are as follows:

• Overlapping beams are not supported. Mesh in the overlapping portion of the beams will
be assigned to either one of the involved beams.

• Mapped Meshing does not support mapping of annular region.

• Weld and Mapped control override all other sizing and local control settings.

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) does not support multi-body parts which includes solid body parts.

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) does not create conformal meshes between solids.

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) does not support Layered Tetrahedrons Method.

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) does not support global Defeature Size, when Mesh Defeaturing
is set to Yes in the Sizing option. In Automatic (PrimeMesh), you must use Repair Topo-
logy (p. 355) to defeature the geometry. Also, in Repair Topology set Repair Thin Faces
Options and Repair Short Edges Options to Yes for automatically repairing short edges
and thin faces.

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) does not support Inflation control, Match control, Pinch control,
Adaptive Sizing, BOI Size, Vertex Size (Sphere of Influence).

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) does not support quality targets provided to the mesher.

Ease of Use Features

When an error or warning such as unconnected edges or mesh failure occurs, you can right-click
the corresponding message and select Show Problematic Geometry to highlight the location at
which error occurred in the model.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 293
Local Mesh Controls

You can click Selections tab in the ribbon and click Start in Walk group to walk through the error
locations. You can use Next to walk to the next location. You can click Previous to go back to the
previous error location.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
294 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Method Control

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 295
Local Mesh Controls

You can view the unconnected faces after meshing. To view the unconnected faces, right-click the
Geometry window. Select Diagnostics > Find Unconnected Faces. The unconnected faces get
highlighted in the model.

When entities scoped to Named Selection with Protected set to Yes are modified while performing
Automatic (PrimeMesh), you will receive a warning message.

Sizing Control
The Sizing control sets:

• The element size for a selected body, face, or edge.

• The number of divisions along an edge.

• The element size within a user-defined "sphere of influence" that can include a selected body, face,
edge, or vertex. This control is recommended for local mesh sizing. The control must also be attached
to a coordinate system if it is to be scoped to anything other than a vertex.

• The element size within a user-defined "body of influence." The body of influence will influence the
mesh of the body to which it is scoped, but the body of influence itself will not be meshed.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
296 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sizing Control

• The scale factor for a selected body, face, or edge. The scale factor enables you to define the local
element, minimum, and defeature sizes as factors of the global element size.

• The minimum mesh sizing used for a selected body, face, or edge. This setting overrides the default
global sizing.

The Sizing control is described in the following sections:

Notes on Element Sizing
Applying a Local Sizing Control
Descriptions of Local Sizing Control Options

Notes on Element Sizing

Remember the following notes when using the Sizing control:

• Visual aids are available to assist you. When you pick an edge, the edge length is displayed. A circle
is displayed adjacent to the cursor whose diameter indicates the current setting in the Element
Size field. The scale ruler is displayed below the graphic and provides a good estimate of the scale
of the model. Also for edge sizing, if you specify a bias, and if you set Element Size to a value
other than Default, the size control will be displayed graphically with the initial mesh density (in-
cluding any specified bias) in the Geometry window.

• When Applying Sizes to Faces: Faces adjacent to a face that has a scoped size control applied to
it respect the source as part of the sizing control. Meshes on the adjacent faces will transition
smoothly to the size on the scoped face. When size controls that have differing sizes are on adjacent
entities, the adjacent topology receives the smallest size.

• When Applying Sizes to Edges: If possible, the meshing algorithm places the requested number
of divisions on the specified edge. Otherwise, the algorithm adjusts the number to allow a successful
mesh generation. When Behavior is set to Hard, the number of divisions is given a higher priority
and the mesher may fail rather than adjust the number of divisions. In case of failure, inspect the
messages for more information as to what constraints may be causing it.

Note:

– In MultiZone, a closed edge is represented by more than one blocking topological

edges. Therefore, user-specified edge node distribution size may not be respected.
However, the number of intervals will still be respected.

– For split curves in rotated edge association, only interval count, not distribution, will
be respected.

• When Sweeping (p. 399): Consider the following when applying size controls to source and target
geometry:

– If your sizing controls are scoped to either the source or target face, the mesher will transfer
the size control to the opposite face. If you have a size control on both faces, the size on
one of the faces will be used. That face is automatically determined by the software. However
the size on the edges of the target face will not be affected if no sizes are explicitly defined
on these edges.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 297
Local Mesh Controls

– Edge sizing applied to a target face is respected only if Behavior is Hard.

– If you have a sphere of influence on a possible source or target face, the face with the most
spheres will be chosen as the source face. The edge mesh of the source face affected by
the sphere of influence will not affect the target face. This may prevent the model from
sweeping with acceptable element quality. To avoid this, place the sphere of influence on
the edges of both the source and target face.

– Applying sizes, regardless of type (that is, size, number of divisions, sphere of influence), to
the edges of possible source and target faces will only affect the faces that use these edges.

If you want to control a side area, the problem must be properly constrained such that the interval
assignment does not override your size control. The divisions on the edge may decrease in order
to make the body sweepable. When using a meshing process other than swept meshing, the divisions
can only increase. When applying a size to a part that is sweepable, the resulting mesh may have
fewer divisions on the edge than specified due to the interval assignment logic of the sweepers.

When sweeping a model, if you use the Sphere of Influence sizing control and the sphere is not
touching the edges of a side area or is totally enclosed in the body, the sphere will have no effect.

When sweeping a closed torus (shown below) with an applied size on the face of the torus, the
number of divisions that will result on the torus is governed by the arc length between the caps
of the surface on the inside of the torus.

Figure 103: Sweeping a Closed Torus

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
298 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sizing Control

Figure 104: Resulting Mesh for Closed Torus

• Using the Sphere of Influence sizing control may not have any effect on the generated mesh if
the control is scoped to the Body of a Line Body.

• In general, users are discouraged from defining a body of influence and a sphere of influence such
that the regions of influence overlap. In cases where elements fall within overlapping bodies/spheres
of influence, elements will be created using the Sphere of Influence sizing that appears lowest in
the Tree.

• Regardless of the value for the sizing control you set, other factors such as edge and face curvature
and the proximity of small features may override the effect of the sizing control.

• When using mapped face controls, or Sweep or MultiZone parallel edge assignments are handled
automatically for mapped faces. That is, for a mapped face, there are two sets of parallel edges. If
you increase or decrease the sizing on one edge, the same increase or decrease occurs automatically
on the other edge to ensure a mapped mesh is possible. If a model contains a row of mapped
faces (such as the sides of a box), you can set a number of elements on one edge and the same
number of elements will be forced on all side/parallel edges. Setting Behavior to Hard will give
that edge priority. In case of conflict between two edges that should be parallel but have different
hard sizing controls assigned to them, the software will either fail and print a message about the
conflict, or a free mesh will be given for that face.

• When using MultiZone:

– If you scope bias settings to parallel edges, and the sizings create conflicts, they are applied ac-
cording to the following priority:

1. Double bias edge (highest priority)

2. Single bias edge

3. No bias edge

– Setting Behavior to Hard on an edge gives that edge a higher priority. That is, a hard edge sizing
takes priority over a soft edge sizing, but among sizing controls that are hard or soft, the order
of priority is double, single, then no biasing.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 299
Local Mesh Controls

• If you apply a local Sizing control (p. 296) to a solid body with a Method control set to Hex Dom-
inant (p. 233) or Sweep (p. 235), or to a sheet body with a Method control set to Quadrilateral
Dominant (p. 282), a near uniform quadrilateral mesh will result on all affected faces on a body
meshed with Hex Dominant, on the source face meshed with Sweep, and on all affected faces
meshed with Quadrilateral Dominant. To obtain even more of a uniform quadrilateral mesh, set
the Behavior of the Sizing control to Hard.

• If several sizing controls are attached to the same edge, face, or body, the last control is applied.
If a sizing control is placed on an edge and then another is placed on a face or body that contains
that edge, the edge sizing takes precedence over the face or part sizing.

• If you have adjusted the element size, then changed length units in a CATIA or ACIS model, when
you choose Update or Clear Generated Data at a Model or Project node in the Tree Outline, you
may need to re-adjust the element size. The sizing control does not automatically re-adjust to
match this situation.

• When using MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284) and Surface Mesh Method is set to Uniform, the Element
Size will take priority over local face or body sizings unless the specified face or body size is smaller
than the Element Size. This means you can use face or body sizing to obtain a finer mesh, but not
to obtain a coarser mesh.

• For a table summarizing the behaviors of local sizing controls when used with various mesh
methods, refer to Interactions Between Mesh Methods and Mesh Controls (p. 478).

Applying a Local Sizing Control

You can set the local sizing on a body, face, edge, or vertex.

1. To access the Sizing Control:

Right-click a body, face, edge, or vertex, and then select Insert > Sizing.

Or

On the Tree Outline, right-click the Mesh object and select click Insert > Sizing.

Or

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Sizing.

2. If necessary, in the Details view, define the scope of the selection:

To apply local sizing to... Do this...

A geometry selection 1. Click Scoping Method and select
Geometry Selection.

2. Select a body, face, edge, or vertex.

3. In the Geometry field, click Apply.

A named selection 1. Click Scoping Method and select

Named Selection.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
300 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sizing Control

To apply local sizing to... Do this...

2. Select a Named Selection.

3. Do one of the following, depending on what entities you selected and how you want to control
the mesh sizing:

If you selected... And you want to... Do this...

Bodies, faces, or edges Specify an element size to 1. In the Type field,
control mesh sizing select Element Size.

2. Define the Element

Size (p. 303).

Bodies, faces, or edges Specify a scale factor to define 1. In the Type field,
the local minimum and select Factor of
defeature sizes as factors of the Global Size.
global element size
2. Define the Factor of
Global Size (p. 306).

Bodies, faces, edges, or vertices Apply mesh sizing within the 1. In the Type field,
confines of a sphere select Sphere of
Influence.

2. Define the Sphere of

Influence (p. 304).

Bodies Apply mesh sizing by 1. In the Type field,

specifying an element size and select Body of
controlling the mesh density Influence.
based on neighboring bodies
of influence 2. Define the Bodies of
Influence (p. 305).

3. Define the Element

Size (p. 303).

Edges Control mesh sizing according 1. In the Type field,

to a discrete number of select Number of
divisions along the edge Divisions.

2. Define the Number of

Divisions (p. 306).

4. If necessary, define any advanced options.

The values of the advanced options are set by default. You can change these values to apply
greater control over the local sizing on an entity.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 301
Local Mesh Controls

For more information on the advanced options, see Descriptions of Local Sizing Control Op-
tions (p. 302).

Note:

If Use Adaptive Sizing is set to No, any local size applied to an entity is also applied to
all lower topology entities.

Descriptions of Local Sizing Control Options

Use the options described below to further define local mesh sizing. The choices that are available
depend on the selected topology, physics preference, and as noted in the individual option descriptions.
You can set the following local sizing options:

Definition Options:

• Element Size (p. 303)

• Sphere of Influence (p. 304)

• Body of Influence (p. 305)

• Factor of Global Size (p. 306)

• Number of Divisions (p. 306)

Advanced Options:

• Defeature Size (p. 307)

• Defeature Size Scale (p. 307)

• Influence Volume (p. 307)

• Affected Distance (p. 307)

• Capture Curvature (p. 308)

• Capture Proximity (p. 308)

• Growth Rate (p. 309)

• Local Min Size (p. 309)

• Curvature Min Size Scale (p. 309)

• Curvature Normal Angle (p. 309)

• Proximity Min Size (p. 309)

• Proximity Min Size Scale (p. 310)

• Proximity Gap Factor (p. 310)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
302 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sizing Control

• Proximity Size Function Sources (p. 310)

• Behavior (p. 310)

• Bias Type and Bias Option (p. 310)

Element Size
If you selected a body, face, or edge, Element Size (default) is one of the available options in the
Type field. Enter a positive value (decimals are allowed) in this field. Smaller values generate more
divisions. A value of "0" instructs the sizing control to use its defaults.

The following series of figures shows the effect of the Element Size option applied to the central
face at 5mm.

Element Size set to

5mm.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 303
Local Mesh Controls

Element Size default.

Additional details about the Element Size option differs depending on the sizing options set. The
description of Element Size is as follows:

• For an edge, Element Size is the maximum size on the edge. It takes priority over the global
Max Size (p. 110), and any face or body sizing control that includes the edge(s). If two edge
sizing controls are attached to the same edge, the latter size control takes priority.

• For a face, Element Size is the maximum size on the face, which is then propagated down to
the edges (unless a more local edge control is assigned). The value of Element Size takes
priority over Max Size (p. 110) and any body size control that includes the face(s). If two face
sizing controls are attached to the same face, the latter size control takes priority.

• For a body, Element Size is the maximum size on the body, and the maximum sizes on faces
and edges of the body (unless a more local face or edge size control is assigned). The value
of Element Size takes priority over the global Max Size (p. 110). If the body size behavior is
Hard (p. 310), the value of Element Size also takes priority over the global Max Size (p. 110).

Sphere of Influence
The Sphere of Influence option is available in the Type field after you select an entity such as a
body, face, edge, or vertex.

If the Sphere of Influence is scoped to a body or vertex, the Sphere of Influence affects the entire
body regardless of sizing options being used. If the Sphere of Influence is scoped to a face or edge
and Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes, the Sphere of Influence only affects the face(s) or edge(s)
that are scoped to the control and the transition away from those entities. If the Sphere of Influence
is scoped to a face or edge and any other sizing option is used, the Sphere of Influence will affect
the whole body (not just scoped face(s) or edge(s)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
304 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sizing Control

Although the Behavior option is not available for Sphere of Influence, Sphere of Influence behaves
as a Hard setting. That is, in the vicinity of a Sphere of Influence, the Sphere of Influence sizing
overrides pre-existing sizing information regardless of whether the pre-existing sizes are larger or
smaller than the Sphere of Influence sizing. This is in contrast to the Body of Influence (p. 305) option,
which behaves as a Soft setting.

For bodies, faces, and edges, Sphere of Influence allows you to apply mesh sizing within the confines
of a sphere in space that you define as follows:

1. Create a local coordinate system whose origin you intend to be the center of the sphere.

2. Select this coordinate system in the Sphere Center field.

3. Enter the radius of the sphere in the Sphere Radius field.

4. Enter a value in the Element Size field. The element size will be applied to all topologies within
the confines of the sphere. For example, if you are applying the element size to a face, the size
will also be applied to the edges of that face, and to the vertices of those edges, but only within
the confines of the sphere. An example is shown below.

If you selected a vertex, the only option available in the Type field is Sphere of Influence. The de-
scription is the same as presented above except that the center of the sphere is the vertex. There is
no need to create or use a local coordinate system to define the center of the sphere. After applying
element size to a vertex using Sphere of Influence, the element size is applied to all topologies
connected to that vertex, such as all edges and faces containing that vertex, if they fall within the
sphere. An example is shown below.

Body of Influence
The Body of Influence option is available in the Type field if you selected a body and Use Adaptive
Sizing is set to No. Using this option, you can set one body as a source of another body (that is, a

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 305
Local Mesh Controls

Body of Influence). The Body of Influence will influence the mesh density of the body that it is
scoped to, but it will not be a part of the model geometry nor will it be meshed. Body of Influence
bodies are noted in the Details View of each prototype.

Although the Behavior option is not available for Body of Influence, Body of Influence behaves as
a Soft setting. That is, in the vicinity of a Body of Influence, the specified Body of Influence sizing
must be larger than the smallest Curvature Min Size (p. 113)/Proximity Min Size (p. 115) and smaller
than the global Max Size (p. 110) to have an effect on the mesh size distribution. The specified Body
of Influence sizing imposes a local maximum size on all elements that are inside the boundary of
the body. This is in contrast to the Sphere of Influence (p. 304) option, which behaves as a Hard
setting.

Remember the following notes when using Body of Influence:

• If your source body is a sphere, it is best for you to use the Sphere of Influence option instead of
Body of Influence. Body of Influence is intended for non-spherical bodies.

• In general, users are discouraged from defining a Body of Influence and a Sphere of Influence
such that the regions of influence overlap. In cases where elements fall within overlapping bod-
ies/spheres of influence, elements will be created using the Sphere of Influence sizing that appears
lowest in the Tree.

• You cannot apply loads, mesh controls, etc. on bodies of influence. Bodies of influence are used
only to influence the sizing controls and therefore only sizing attributes can be applied to them.

• You can suppress and unsuppress bodies of influence.

• If you are using Body of Influence with Match Control, be aware that the body of influence will
not be copied from one matched entity to the other. As a workaround, you can copy the body in
the DesignModeler application and use both bodies as your source.

Factor of Global Size

If you select a body, face, or edge, Factor of Global Size is one of the available options in the Type
field (unless Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes). Choose Factor of Global Size and enter a value for
Element Size Factor to define the local minimum and defeature sizes as factors of the global element
size. If local sizings are defined as a factor of global size and you modify the Element Size (p. 102),
the local sizings are recalculated.

Number of Divisions
If you select an edge, the options available in the Type field are Element Size and Sphere of Influence,
along with the Number of Divisions option. Choosing Number of Divisions and entering a value
in the Number of Divisions field is an alternative to choosing Element Size if you are interested in
having the mesh be sized according to a discrete number of divisions along an edge. If you set
Number of Divisions to a value greater than 1000, the number of divisions will not be drawn on the
edge in the Geometry window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
306 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sizing Control

Defeature Size
For body sizing and face sizing controls, sets the local tolerance for defeaturing. Features smaller than
or equal to this value will be removed when the mesh is generated. You can specify any value
greater than 0.0.

If the local sizing is Uniform, the default local Defeature Size is set to the smaller of the following
two values:

• Global Defeature Size

• 50% of the value of the local Element Size

For all other local sizing controls, the default local Defeature Size is set to the smaller of the following
two values:

• Global Defeature Size

• 50% of the value of the local Curvature Min Size or Proximity Min Size (whichever is smaller)

For more information about setting the defeature size, see Defeature Size (p. 111).

Defeature Size Scale

Specify the scale factor for the defeature size. The default values comes from the scale factors for
Mechanical Defeature Size Factor and CFD Defeature Size Factor depending on the physics pref-
erence (CFD physics preference uses the CFD Defeature Size Factor, other physics preferences use
the Mechanical Defeature Size Factor). The default value or the value that you specify is multiplied
by the global element size to determine the local defeature size.

Influence Volume
When Element Size is selected, the Influence Volume appears with Yes or No option. The default
option is No. If you select Yes, the Affected Distance field appears. When influencing the volume,
the face size control generates spheres of influence internally by automatic determination of radius
and size based on the Affected Distance.

Note:

• Cartesian method does not support Influence Volume meshing.

• Layered Tetrahedrons Method does not support Influence Volume meshing.

• When Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes, Influence Volume option does not have effect.

Affected Distance
When Influence Volume is set as Yes, the Affected Distance option appears. You can enter the
distance up to which the defined Element Size will affect the volume mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 307
Local Mesh Controls

Capture Curvature and Capture Proximity

If a global sizing option is defined for the model, then you can set a local sizing on a body, face, or
edge to further refine the local entity's sizing. When you set a local sizing on an entity, the local sizing
options default to the same values that are defined for the global size function. You can change any
of these values, and the local values will take precedence over the global values when the mesh is
generated.

For example, if Capture Curvature and/or Capture Proximity are selected, and the local sizing is
Uniform (or vice versa), the local sizing option takes precedence.

Example 4: Setting a Local Sizing Option

If the global sizing option is set to Curvature with a 20° Curvature Normal Angle, and you set a
local sizing of Curvature on a face with a 60° Curvature Normal Angle, the local Curvature Normal
Angle will take precedence when the mesh is generated. In this example, the face with the local sizing
control will use a Curvature Normal Angle of 60° even though the global value is 20°.

If using Nonlinear Mechanical or CFD physics preference, or when Use Adaptive Sizing is set to
No; the following options are available and work as follows:

• Capture Curvature = Yes turns on the Curvature-based Sizing (p. 107).

• Capture Proximity = Yes turns on the Proximity-based Sizing (p. 107).

• If Capture Curvature and Capture Proximity are both set to Yes, then both Curvature-based Siz-
ing (p. 107) and Proximity-based Sizing (p. 107) will be used.

• If Capture Curvature and Capture Proximity are both set to No, then Uniform (p. 108) sizing will
be used.

Note:

Local sizing limitations include:

• If Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes, then you cannot set a local size function.

• If the global sizing option is set to Capture Proximity or both Capture Proximity and
Capture Curvature, and the local sizing option is set to Capture Curvature or both
Capture Proximity and Capture Curvature (or vice versa), the mesh on the entity is
generated as though both Capture Proximity and Capture Curvature are set locally.

• If the global sizing option is set to Capture Proximity, and the local sizing option is set
to Capture Curvature (or vice versa), the option that has the smallest size specified for
it (either Proximity Gap for the Proximity sizing, or Curvature Normal Angle for the
Curvature sizing) takes precedence.

• The local Proximity sizing is not supported for sheet models. If both the local Proximity
and Curvature sizing is defined on a sheet model, only the Curvature sizing takes effect.

• Local proximity sizing is not supported for edge sizing controls. To set a local edge sizing
control, you must choose either Capture Curvature or Uniform (both Capture Curvature
and Capture Proximity set to No).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
308 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sizing Control

Growth Rate
You may specify a growth rate for the scoped soft size of an entity (body, face, or edge only). The de-
scription of the scoped Growth Rate is the same as that of the global growth rate (p. 110) that you
can set in the Details View when the Mesh object is selected in the Tree Outline. However, the growth
rate you specify for a scoped entity must always be smaller than or equal to the specified global growth
rate (p. 110). Growth Rate is not available for Sphere of Influence. Specifying a growth rate for a face
or body affects the growth on the face or on the boundary of the body, and its effect continues
outside of the scoped entity as well.

Local Min Size

You can set Local Min Size to specify a value that takes priority over the global Min Size when you
select a body, face, or edge. If Local Min Size is set to Default, the mesher uses either the global Min
Size or the local Element Size (if defined), whichever is smaller. This setting is available when Capture
Curvature is set to Yes, and is useful when you want to refine the mesh based on curvature. When
you set the Local Min Size, the mesher refines from the Element Size to the Local Min Size in curved
areas, but retains the Element Size for flat areas.

Note:

Local Min Size may not be respected by the Sweeping or MultiZone Methods due to
the interval assignment used to generate structured meshes. The min size is used on
source faces, but not necessarily on side faces.

Curvature Min Size Scale

Specify the scale factor for the curvature minimum size. The value that you specify is multiplied by
the global element size to determine the local curvature minimum size. The default is determined by
the Mechanical Min Size Factor or CFD Min Size Factor option (p. 392) in the Options dialog box,
depending on the physics preference.

Curvature Normal Angle

You may specify Curvature Normal Angle for a scoped entity (body, face, or edge only). Curvature
Normal Angle is the maximum allowable angle that one element edge is allowed to span given a
particular geometry curvature. Available only when Capture Curvature is set to Yes. You can specify
a value from 0 to 180 degrees to override the global setting (where a value of 0 resets the option to
its default). The default for the global setting is calculated based on the Physics Preference (p. 96).

For more information, see Curvature Normal Angle (p. 114).

Proximity Min Size

This option allows you to specify a minimum size to be used in a local proximity sizing calculation,
in addition to the Local Min Size (p. 309). By default, Proximity Min Size is set equal to the default
of Local Min Size. You can accept the default or specify a value greater than 0. For more information,
see Proximity Min Size (p. 115).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 309
Local Mesh Controls

Proximity Min Size Scale

Specify the scale factor for the proximity minimum size. The value that you specify is multiplied by
the global element size to determine the local proximity minimum size. The default is determined by
the Mechanical Min Size Factor or CFD Min Size Factor option (p. 392) in the Options dialog box,
depending on the physics preference.

Proximity Gap Factor

Specify the minimum number of layers of elements to be generated in gaps when Capture Proximity
is set to Yes.

Proximity Size Function Sources

This option is available if Capture Proximity is set to Yes. It determines whether regions of proximity
between faces and/or edges are considered when proximity sizing calculations are performed.

For more information, see Proximity Size Function Sources (p. 115).

Behavior
If the global option Use Adaptive Sizing is Yes, or the local sizing is Uniform (both Capture Curvature
and Capture Proximity set to No), the Behavior option is available for bodies, faces, and edges.

You can specify either Soft (default) or Hard, but the effect depends on the type of mesh being
generated. Typically, Hard results in a stricter size setting than Soft. For example, with a tri or tet
mesh, the Hard setting would not allow as much transition from one element size to another element
size due to influences of sizing on neighboring objects. With a Hard setting, the element size defined
would be maintained for the object to which the setting is scoped. With a Soft setting, the element
size defined may be modified in order to respect other size settings in the vicinity of the object to
which the setting is scoped.

You should take care when applying Hard sizes. With a mapped quad/tri or swept mesh, a Hard
setting forces the interval edge assignment on the object to be met, and if the mesher cannot achieve
the setting, the mesh could fail.

Bias Type and Bias Option

For edges only, use Bias Type to adjust the spacing ratio of nodes on an edge. This feature is useful
for any engineering problem where nodes need to be clustered on an edge or group of edges, or if
there is a need to bias the mapped mesh of a face towards a specific direction with respect to the
edges of the face. Bias Type can be used with all meshers except the Patch Independent Tetrahedron
method. To use Bias Type, choose one of the four pre-determined patterned options depicted
pictorially from the Bias Type drop-down menu:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
310 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Contact Sizing Control

Note:

The MultiZone meshing method respects all Bias Type options. The nodes generally follow
the distribution. However, some optimization can be done to improve transition with
other mesh, or to improve the quality. Setting the Behavior to Hard will give higher pri-
ority to the bias settings defined than the optimization.

Then specify a Bias Option. The drop-down menu enables you to choose No Bias, Bias Factor, or
Smooth Transition:

• Bias Factor is defined as the ratio of the largest edge to the smallest edge. To set the Bias Factor,
choose Bias Factor from Bias Option and enter a value into the field to define the ratio.

• Smooth Transition is defined as Growth Rate = Bias Factor^(1/(n-1)), where n is the number of
divisions. To define Smooth Transition, choose Smooth Transition from Bias Option, then enter
a value for Growth Rate.

Note:

If Behavior is set to Hard, then the number of divisions and the bias cannot be changed
by the mesher. If Behavior is set to Soft, then the edge divisions can be changed but the
edge will be initially meshed with the specified Bias Factor.

If you want to select multiple edges to apply sizing, but some of the edges do not have the same
orientation, you can use the Reverse Bias option to manually select all of the edges. Reverse Bias
is available when the control is applied to the edges, defined as an Element Size or Number of Di-
visions, and has a bias towards one of the vertices (“- -- --- ----” or “---- --- -- -”).

To apply Reverse Bias, select a group of edges, then choose Reverse Bias and click Apply. Only edges
that are part of the main scoping of the control are applied. All others are ignored.

To undo Reverse Bias, select an edge that is not part of the main scoping. Then choose Reverse
Bias and click Apply.

Contact Sizing Control

Contact Sizing creates elements of relatively the same size on bodies from the faces of a face to face
or face to edge contact region. This control generates spheres of influence (p. 304) internally with
automatic determination of radius and size (if Resolution is selected for Type). You may want to apply
a method control (p. 202) on sweepable bodies to force the elements to be tetrahedron in the case
where the sweeper is not providing enough local sizing near your contact region. Your swept mesh
may be quite dense if the contact size is small on the source and target faces of the body. You may
also see very little effect on swept bodies in the case where a contact size is applied to a very small
region of a large source face.

To access the Contact Sizing,

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 311
Local Mesh Controls

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Contact Sizing.

Or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Method in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

Or

Right-click a body, face, edge, or vertex, and then select Insert > Contact Sizing.

Or

On the Tree Outline, drag a Contact Region or Contacts folder from the Connections to Mesh.

Or

On the Tree Outline, right-click Contact Region from the Connections and click Create > Contact
Sizing.

The Contact Region Details view has the following options:

Scope

• Contact Region: Allows you to scope the contact region.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected control. The default value is No. When Suppressed
is set to Yes, the Active field displays the status of the selected control. The Active field is read-only.

• Type: Allows you to select the type of contact meshing. The default value is. The available options
are:

– Resolution: Allows you to specify a value for relative size. The default value is 4. You can
parametrize Resolution.

– Element Size: Specify an element size to control mesh sizing. Enter a positive value (decimals
are allowed) in this field. Smaller values generate more divisions. When you select Element
Size, the Element Sizeoptions allow you to specify the value for absolute size. The default
value is 0 mm. When you specify a value different from the global Defeature Size, it overrides
the global value. You can parametrize Element Size.

Note:

• You can select two bodies in the Geometry window and use the Go To > Contact Sizing
Common to Selected Bodies option to identify any contact sizing controls that exist between
the two bodies. This feature provides an easy way for you to delete the common controls.

• Because Contact Sizing objects cannot be duplicated, they cannot be used as template
objects for the Object Generator.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
312 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Refinement Control

Refinement Control
Refinement controls specify the maximum number of times you want an initial mesh to be refined.
You can specify refinement controls for faces, edges, and vertices.

To access the Refinement Control,

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Refinement.

Or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Refinement in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

Or

Right-click a face, edge, or vertex, and then select Insert > Refinement

The Refinement Details View has the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry or named selection. The default value is Geo-
metry Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allow you to scope the geometry bodies. When you select Geometry
Selection, the Geometry allows you to select the geometry from the Geometry window.

– Named Selection: Allow you to scope bodies grouped under a named selection.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the method control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is set to Yes, the Active provides the number of suppressed parts and is a read-only
option.

• Refinement: Specify the maximum number of times you want an initial mesh to be refined. The
default value is 1. You can parametrize Refinement. When you attach several entities, the last
control applied takes precedence.

Some refinement controls can override or affect other refinement controls that have been applied to
connected topology. A face refinement control overrides a refinement control on any of the face's edges
or vertices. An edge refinement control overrides a refinement control on either of the edge's vertices.
Basically, a refinement control will lower the value of an overridden control by its own value.

For example, consider a face refinement control with a refinement value of 1, where one of the face's
edges has a refinement control with a value of 2, and one of the edge's vertices has a refinement control
with a value of 2. In this example, the face refinement control reduces the value of the edge refinement
control by 1, and it also reduces the value of the vertex refinement control by 1. The edge refinement

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 313
Local Mesh Controls

control now has a value of 1, so it reduces the vertex's refinement control by 1. Now the vertex refinement
control has a value of zero, which essentially means the refinement control has no effect.

Note:

• Refinement controls are not available for the MultiZone, Patch Independent Tetra,
Cartesian, Layer Tetrahedron or MultiZone Quad/Tri mesh methods. If you are using
the Automatic Method (p. 206) and you have enabled the Use MultiZone for Sweepable
Bodies (p. 389) option, refinement controls on sweepable bodies behave similarly to how
they behave when the Sweep mesh method is used.

• In the following scenarios, refinement controls are automatically suppressed:

– When automatic inflation (p. 163) (either Program Controlled (p. 164) or All Faces in
Chosen Named Selection (p. 165)) is used with refinement in the same model.

– When local inflation (p. 345) is used with refinement in the same body or in the
same part.

• If you apply a refinement control to a part that was either swept meshed (p. 235) or hex
dominant meshed (p. 233), and then you delete the refinement control, the intermediate
tetrahedral mesh is retained unless you invalidate the state of the part (for example, by
clearing the database). An intermediate tetrahedral mesh is created when you try to refine
non-tetrahedral solid elements.

• Refinement controls are not supported on shared faces between solid bodies and sheet
bodies in a multibody part.

• Refinement controls are not supported for Mixed Order Meshing (p. 461).

• Special processing of refinement operations occurs when you use the Mesh worksheet to
create a selective mesh history. Refer to Using the Mesh Worksheet to Create a Selective
Meshing History (p. 448) for details.

Face Meshing Control

Face meshing controls enable you to generate a free or mapped mesh on selected faces. The Meshing
application determines a suitable number of divisions for the edges on the boundary face automatically.
If you specify the number of divisions on the edge with a Sizing control, the Meshing application at-
tempts to enforce those divisions.

To set the Face Meshing controls, highlight Mesh in the Tree Outline, and right-click to view the menu.
Select Insert> Face Meshing. You can also click Mesh in the Tree Outline, and select the Mesh Control
Context Toolbar, then select Face Meshing from the drop-down menu.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
314 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Face Meshing Control

Definition>Mapping is set to Yes by default, also exposing Constrain Boundary (p. 315) and Ad-
vanced (p. 320) settings. If Mapping is set to No, the Mesher will perform a free mesh and the Constrain
Boundary and Advanced settings are not available.

Note:

To assist you in defining face meshing controls, you can use the Show Mappable Faces (p. 542)
feature to select all mappable faces automatically and highlight them in the Geometry
window.

Mapped Face Meshing is supported for the following mesh methods:

Volume Meshing:

• Sweep (p. 235)

• Patch Conforming Tetrahedron (p. 208)

• Hex Dominant (p. 233)

• MultiZone (p. 242)

Surface Meshing:

• Quadrilateral Dominant (p. 282)

• Triangles (p. 284)

• MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284)

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) (p. 287)

Face Meshing control topics include:

Setting Basic Face Meshing Controls for Mapped Meshing
Understanding Advanced Mapped Face Meshing Controls
Notes on Face Meshing Controls for Mapped Meshing
Example Usage

Note:

For general information about applying mapped Face Meshing controls in combination with
the various mesh method controls, refer to Meshing: Mesh Control Interaction Tables (p. 475).

Setting Basic Face Meshing Controls for Mapped Meshing

This section describes the steps for setting basic Face Meshing controls for mapped face meshing.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 315
Local Mesh Controls

To set basic Face Meshing controls for mapped meshing:

1. Insert a mapped face meshing control by highlighting Mesh in the Tree and right-clicking to
view the menu. Select Insert > Face Meshing.

In the Mapped Face Meshing Details view, underDefinition, Mapped Mesh is set to Yes by
default.

2. Under the Definition , select Method as Quadrilaterals or Triangles: Best Split. The Triangles:
Best Split option is available only for sheet models.

3. Specify the Internal Number of Divisions to provide number of divisions across annular regions
or seamless cylinders. (The Internal Number of Divisions option is activated when the Face
Meshing control Definition is set to Mapped Mesh and the control is scoped to faces made up
of two loops.) The default value is 0.

4. Select Constrain Boundary to specify whether you want to allow the mesher to split the
boundary of a mapped mesh region to aid in meshing of adjacent faces. You can select Yes
(constrain boundary; no splitting is allowed) or No (do not constrain boundary; splitting is allowed).
The default is No. See Notes on Face Meshing Controls for Mapped Meshing (p. 327) for related
information.

5. Right-click the Mesh object in the Tree and click Generate Meshto generate the mesh.

Note:

When Mapped Meshing fails on a surface, the mesher automatically meshes the
surface using Aggressive Tri Reduction.

To access the Face Meshing,

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Face Meshing.

Or

On The Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Face Meshing in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

Or

Right-click the face and select Insert > Face Meshing.

Mapped Face Meshing Details view has the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry or named selection. The default value is
Geometry Selection. The available options are:

– Geometry Selection: Allow you to scope the geometry bodies. When you select Geo-
metry Selection, the Geometry allows you to select the geometry from the Geometry
window

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
316 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Face Meshing Control

– Named Selection: Allow you to scope the named selection from the available named
selections.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the method control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is Yes, theActive provides the number of suppressed parts and is read-only.

• Mapped Mesh: Generates the structured mesh for the selected geometry faces when set to
Yes. When Mapped Mesh is No, maps the faces automatically and generates quad dominant
mesh.

• Internal Number of Divisions: Allows you to set the number of divisions across annular regions
or seamless cylinders. The default value is 0.

Note:

Internal Number of Divisions is available only when Mapped Mesh is Yes.

• Method: Allows you to select the shape of the elements used to fill the body. The default
value is Quadrilaterals. When you set Method as Quadrilaterals, it creates the quadrilateral
mesh on the face. When you set Method as Triangles: Best Split, it creates the triangular
mesh on the face.

• Constrain Boundary: Specify whether you want to allow the mesher to split the boundary of
a mapped mesh region to aid in meshing of adjacent faces. The default value is No.]]When
Constrain Boundary is Yes, it allows you to split the boundary of a mapped mesh region.
When Constrain Boundary is No, it allows you to split the boundary of a mapped mesh region.

Figure 108: Face Vertex Types

Advanced

• Specific Sides: Creates the face mesh such that three mesh element edges intersect at the
vertex (see (b) in Figure 108: Face Vertex Types). The Meshing application treats the two topo-
logical edges that are adjacent to the vertex as a single edge for the purposes of meshing.

• Specified Corners: Creates the face mesh such that four mesh element edges intersect at the
vertex (see (c) in Figure 108: Face Vertex Types). Assigning the Corner vertex type to a vertex
whose adjacent edges form an angle less than 180° creates an unnecessarily bad quality mesh
(although the mesh will be valid).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 317
Local Mesh Controls

• Specific Ends: Creates the face mesh such that only two mesh element edges intersect at the
vertex (see (a) in Figure 108: Face Vertex Types). As a result, the mapped and submapped face
mesh patterns on both sides of the End vertex terminate at the edges adjacent to the vertex.
Assigning the End vertex type to a vertex whose adjacent edges form an angle greater than
180° is likely to result in mesh failure.

For detailed information regarding advanced features, refer Understanding Advanced Mapped
Face Meshing Controls (p. 320)

• MultiZone Semi-Structured: Improves the mesh distribution, applies to only MultiZone

Meshing. The default value is No.

When MultiZone Semi-Structured is Yes, the available option is:

– Transition Type: Allows you to specify the type of transition. The available options are:

→ Transition (Default): Transitions mapped mesh such that the two edges along
the transition path have the same edge sizing and the other two edges should
have a transitional size of the form:

edge1 = edge2 +/- 2*n

where, n is the number of transitions.

→ Circle: Creates an O-grid for circular or elliptical type face.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
318 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Face Meshing Control

→ Half-Circle: Creates a C-grid for semi-circular or semi-elliptical type face.

→ Quarter-Circle: Creates an L-grid for quarter-circle or quarter-ellipse type faces.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 319
Local Mesh Controls

Understanding Advanced Mapped Face Meshing Controls

When you apply advanced mapped Face Meshing controls for mapped meshing to a face, the
Meshing application divides the face into one or more mappable regions and creates a mapped mesh
in each region. Advanced mapped face meshing controls are subject to restrictions related to vertex
types (p. 321) and restrictions related to edge mesh intervals (p. 322).

The advanced Face Meshing controls for mapped meshing are supported for the following mesh
methods only:

Volume Meshing:

• Sweep (p. 235)

• Patch Conforming Tetrahedron (p. 208)

• Hex Dominant (p. 233)

• MultiZone (p. 242)

Surface Meshing:

• Quadrilateral Dominant (p. 282)

• Triangles (p. 284)

• MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284)

Advanced mapped Face Meshing topics include:

Restrictions Related to Vertex Types
Restrictions Related to Edge Mesh Intervals
Selecting Faces and Vertices
Effect of Vertex Type on Face Meshes

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
320 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Face Meshing Control

Setting Advanced Face Meshing Controls for Mapped Meshing

Note:

For general information on applying Face Meshing controls for mapped meshing in com-
bination with the various mesh method controls, refer to Meshing: Mesh Control Interaction
Tables (p. 475).

Restrictions Related to Vertex Types

To constitute a submappable face, a face must possess only End, Side, Corner, and Reversal vertices.
In addition, the total number of End vertices, NE, must satisfy the following equation:

NE = 4 + NC + 2NR

where NC and NR are the total numbers of Corner and Reversal type vertices, respectively, on the
face. That is, for every Corner type vertex, the face must possess an additional End vertex, and for
every Reversal vertex, the face must possess two additional End vertices.

Note:

You cannot specify Reversal vertices. Reversal vertices are used internally by the Meshing
application to determine whether the face is mappable.

The shape of the mesh generated by means of the advanced face meshing controls depends on
the type and arrangement of vertex types on the face. As an example of the effect of vertex types,
consider the face shown in Figure 105: Inside Corner Vertex (p. 321), which consists of a planar L-
shaped face, one corner of which is truncated at an angle.

Figure 105: Inside Corner Vertex

In Figure 105: Inside Corner Vertex (p. 321), the inside corner vertex (C) is designated as a Corner
vertex, therefore, in order to be submappable, the face must possess five End type vertices (A, B,

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 321
Local Mesh Controls

D, E, and F). The advanced mapped Face Mesh control divides the face into the following two
mapped regions:

• A, B, C, H, F, G

• C, D, E, H

Note:

If you enforce an advanced mapped face mesh control on a face, the Meshing application
evaluates the face with respect to its vertex type designations. If the vertex types do not
meet the criteria outlined above, the Meshing application attempts to change the vertex
types so that the face is submappable.

For most submappable faces, there are multiple configurations of vertex types that sat-
isfy the vertex type criteria. Each vertex type configuration results in a unique node
pattern for the submapped mesh. When the Meshing application automatically changes
vertex types, it attempts to employ the configuration that minimizes distortion in the
mesh. To enforce a specific node pattern on a submapped mesh, manually select the
vertices such that they meet the advanced mapped mesh control vertex type criteria
outlined above. (See Selecting the Vertex Type and Picking Vertices (p. 323).)

Restrictions Related to Edge Mesh Intervals

If you specify a bias on the edge of a face before applying an advanced mapped Face Mesh control
to the face, you must specify the bias on all parallel edges of the face.

Selecting Faces and Vertices

To use advanced mapped Face Mesh controls on a face, you must do the following:

• Select the face upon which the vertex types are to be defined

• Select the vertex type (using the Specified Sides, Specified Corners, and Specified Ends
controls (p. 325))

• Pick the vertices to which the vertex type specification is to be applied

Selecting the Face

The Meshing application vertex types are specific to the faces upon which they are set. Therefore,
to specify the type designation of an individual vertex, you must first select a face to be associated
with that vertex. An individual vertex may possess as many vertex type designations as the number
of faces to which it is attached. For example, it is possible for a vertex to possess a Side type desig-
nation with respect to one face and an End type designation with respect to another, as long as
two separate mapped face meshing controls are defined for the two faces. For more information,
refer to Setting Advanced Face Meshing Controls for Mapped Meshing (p. 325).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
322 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Face Meshing Control

Selecting the Vertex Type and Picking Vertices

The structure of any face mesh in the vicinity of an individual vertex on its boundary is a function
of the vertex type. There are three vertex types that you can specify.

• End

• Side

• Corner

Figure 106: Face Vertex Types

An individual vertex may possess only one vertex type designation. For example, you cannot des-
ignate a vertex as type "side" and also designate that same vertex as type "end." For more inform-
ation, refer to Setting Advanced Face Meshing Controls for Mapped Meshing (p. 325).

Each vertex type differs from the others in the following ways:

• The number of face mesh lines that intersect the vertex

• The angle between the edges immediately adjacent to the vertex

The following table summarizes the characteristics of the vertex types shown in Figure 106: Face
Vertex Types (p. 323).

Note:

If a face has only 4 vertices and 4 edges, the maximum for the range of the angle
of a Side vertex type is 179°, and the acceptable range shifts accordingly.

Vertex Intersecting Grid Range of Angle Between Edges

Type Lines
End 0 0° — 135°
Side 1 136° — 224°
Corner 2 225° — 314°
Reversal 3 315° — 360° (You cannot specify Reversal vertices. The range
for Reversal vertices is used internally by the Meshing application
to determine whether the face is mappable.)

The following sections describe the general effect of the End, Side, and Corner vertex types on the
shape of the face mesh in the vicinity of a specified vertex.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 323
Local Mesh Controls

End Vertex Type

When you specify a vertex as the End vertex type (Specified Ends control (p. 325)), the Meshing
application creates the face mesh such that only two mesh element edges intersect at the
vertex (see (a) in Figure 106: Face Vertex Types (p. 323)). As a result, the mapped and submapped
face mesh patterns on both sides of the End vertex terminate at the edges adjacent to the
vertex. Assigning the End vertex type to a vertex whose adjacent edges form an angle greater
than 180° will likely result in mesh failure.

Side Vertex Type

When you specify a vertex as the Side vertex type (Specified Sides control (p. 325)), the Meshing
application creates the face mesh such that three mesh element edges intersect at the vertex
(see (b) in Figure 106: Face Vertex Types (p. 323)). The Meshing application treats the two topo-
logical edges that are adjacent to the vertex as a single edge for the purposes of meshing.

Corner Vertex Type

When you specify a vertex as the Corner vertex type (Specified Corners control (p. 325)), the
Meshing application creates the face mesh such that four mesh element edges intersect at the
vertex (see (c) in Figure 106: Face Vertex Types (p. 323)). Assigning the Corner vertex type to a
vertex whose adjacent edges form an angle less than 180° will create an unnecessarily bad
quality mesh (although the mesh will be valid).

Effect of Vertex Type on Face Meshes

As an example of the general effects of vertex types on face meshes, consider the planar face shown
in Figure 107: Seven-sided Planar Face (p. 324). The following two examples illustrate the effects of
different vertex type specifications applied to vertices C, F, and G on the shape of the resulting
mesh.

Figure 107: Seven-sided Planar Face

In Figure 108: Example Face Mesh—Side Inside Corner Vertex (p. 325), vertices C, F, and G are specified
as Side vertices. Therefore, the Meshing application treats sides BCD and EFGA as if each were a

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
324 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Face Meshing Control

single edge. As a result, the entire face represents a mappable region, and the Meshing application
creates a single checkerboard pattern for the mesh.

Figure 108: Example Face Mesh—Side Inside Corner Vertex

In Figure 109: Example Face Mesh—Corner Inside Corner Vertex (p. 325), vertices C, F, and G are
specified as Corner, Side, and End type vertices, respectively. As a result, the face is submappable,
and the Meshing application creates two separate checkerboard patterns for the mesh. The upper-
left submapped region is defined by the polygon ABCHFG. The lower-right submapped region is
defined by CDEH. For both regions, the node at point H serves as an End type vertex for the purposes
of mesh creation.

Figure 109: Example Face Mesh—Corner Inside Corner Vertex

Setting Advanced Face Meshing Controls for Mapped Meshing

This section describes the basic steps for setting Face Meshing controls for mapped meshing.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 325
Local Mesh Controls

To set advanced Face Meshing controls for mapped meshing:

1. Insert a Face Meshing control by highlighting Mesh in the Tree and right-clicking to view the
menu. Select Insert> Face Meshing. Definition>Mapped Mesh is set to Yes by default.

2. Select the face upon which the vertex types are to be defined by scoping the face in the
Mapped Face Meshing Details View. (Refer to Selecting the Face (p. 322) for more information.)

3. For the Definition> Method control, choose Quadrilaterals or Triangles: Best Split.

4. Enter additional Definition settings, as desired, in the Details View.

5. Use the Specified Sides, Specified Corners, and Specified Ends controls in the Advanced
section of the Details View to select the desired vertices in the Geometry window and apply
your selections. To do so, pick the desired vertex/vertices in the Geometry window and then
click the Specified Sides, Specified Corners, or Specified Ends control to assign the vertex/ver-
tices to the desired vertex type. (Refer to Selecting the Vertex Type and Picking Vertices (p. 323)
for more information.)

Note:

If you select a vertex by mistake and want to de-select it, click the control in question
in the Advanced section of the Details View, clear the selection by clicking in an
"empty" portion of the Geometry window, and then click Apply. For example, as-
sume that you mistakenly selected 1 vertex for the Specified Corners control. To
clear the selection:

• In the Specified Corners control in the Advanced section of the Details

View, click your selection (that is, the text "1 Vertex").

The Apply/Cancel buttons will appear in the Specified Corners control and
the vertex will be highlighted in green in the Geometry window.

• Click in an empty portion of the Geometry window.

• Click Apply in the Specified Corners control.

Note:

An individual vertex may possess as many vertex type designations as the number
of faces to which it is attached. For example, it is possible for a vertex to possess a
Side type designation with respect to one face and an End type designation with
respect to another, as long as two separate mapped face meshing controls are
defined for the two faces. Conversely, a single mapped Face Meshing control cannot
specify the same vertex as more than one vertex type. That is, you cannot designate
a vertex as type Side and also designate that same vertex as type End in a single
mapped face meshing control. If you attempt to do so, the second and any sub-
sequent assignments for that vertex will result in the control being highlighted in
yellow in the Advanced section of the Details View, and you will not be able to

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
326 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Face Meshing Control

generate a mesh. If this occurs, use the procedure noted above to de-select the
unwanted vertex assignment(s).

6. Generate the mesh by right-clicking the Mesh object in the Tree and selecting Generate Mesh.

Notes on Face Meshing Controls for Mapped Meshing

Remember the following notes when using the Face Meshing controls for mapped meshing:

• The blue status icon that may appear in the Tree Outline indicates that a mapped mesh cannot be
provided on the scoped topology. One of three scenarios triggers the icon:

1. The face cannot be map meshed.

2. The quality of the mapped mesh was not acceptable and a free mesh was generated.

3. If Constrain Boundary (p. 315) is set to Yes, the mesher will fail if the boundary of a mapped
mesh must be modified.

• For mixed/solid shell parts, a Face Meshing control cannot be scoped to a sheet face if the face is
adjacent to a solid body. In such cases, the meshing of the sheet face will fail.

• To assist you in working with mapped face meshing, you may want to use the Show Mappable
Faces (p. 542), Show Sweepable Bodies (p. 537), and/or Preview Surface Mesh (p. 531) features.
The Show Mappable Faces feature selects all mappable faces automatically and highlights them
in the Geometry window. By using the Show Sweepable Bodies feature, you can find out
whether bodies are sweepable (before and after modifying vertex types). By using the Preview
Surface Mesh feature, you can verify that your mesh settings are correct.

• When sweeping (p. 399):

– If the sweep method is applied to a body and mapped face meshing is defined for either
the body's source or target face, the sweep mesher will fail if a mapped mesh cannot be
obtained for the face.

– When mapped face meshing is defined for a side face, the mapped mesher will loosen its
tolerances on determining whether a face is mappable.

– When sweeping and using advanced mapped meshing controls (p. 322), you must set vertex
types for both the source and target faces.

• When a face has only 4 vertices and 4 edges, and mapped Face Meshing controls are applied, the
only factor that will determine a successful mapped mesh is element quality.

Note:

It is often helpful to use the Show Vertices option to ensure edges are complete and
do not have unintended segmentation. If an edge is segmented, it could mean that a
face you think should be successfully mapped actually has 5 vertices and 5 edges. To

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 327
Local Mesh Controls

help resolve such issues, you can define a virtual edge (p. 546) or use advanced mapped
Face Meshing controls (p. 320).

• An effective technique for mapped meshing on surface bodies is to select all faces on the body
and let the mesher determine which faces should be map meshed and which faces should be free
meshed.

• If the mapped Face Meshing controls are attached to faces with exactly two boundary edges or
two sets of boundary edges, an additional option, Internal Number of Divisions, is available. This
option allows you to specify the number of layers of elements that will be generated between the
two boundary edges.

– If there is a conflict between Internal Number of Divisions and a Face sizing control, the
mapped face control's Internal Number of Divisions value will take priority.

– If there is a conflict between Internal Number of Divisions and a parallel Edge sizing
control, the Sweep mesh method will respect the Internal Number of Divisions unless the
size is hard, in which case it will return an error notifying you of the conflict. The MultiZone
mesh method will respect the Edge sizing control.

– If there is a conflict between the Internal Number of Divisions and the number of divisions
on a Sweep mesh method, the Sweep mesh method will return an error notifying you of
the conflict.

– See Face Characteristics for Annular faces in the table below for more information.

The table below provides an overview of types of faces and how various mesh methods handle when
mapped Face Meshing controls are applied to them.

Face Characteristic
Circular Triangle Annular Internal
Loops

Mesh Method

• Sweep (p. 235) Not supported. Not Supported. In Not

You must free supported. the Details supported.
• Thin mesh these faces. You must View, the In- You must
Sweep (p. 406) free mesh ternal Num- free mesh
these faces. ber of Divi- these faces,
• Hex As side faces, sions (p. 315) but note the
Dominant (p. 233) triangle faces option is following: If
can be activated so there is just
• Patch
mapped to you can one internal
Conforming
obtain a specify the loop, it is
Tetrahedron (p. 208)
wedge mesh number of treated as an

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
328 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Face Meshing Control

Face Characteristic
Circular Triangle Annular Internal
Loops

Mesh Method

• Quadrilateral at one divisions annular case.

Dominant (p. 282) corner, across the For example,
depending annular if the model
• Triangles (p. 284) on source region. The above were
face option is set split in half,
selection. to 3 in the you would
example have a square
below: annulus
which would
mesh similar
to the
circular
annulus
model.
• MultiZone (p. 242) Supported, Supported. Supported. In Ignored for
but mesh Triangle faces the Details source faces.
• MultiZone quality is are View, the In- However,
Quad/Tri (p. 284) poor. submapped ternal Num- internal loops
to tri ber of Divi- are
primitives. sions (p. 315) supported for
option is side faces. If
activated so this example
you can is meshed
You can use specify the top to
MultiZone or number of bottom, and
Mapped divisions has mapped
Mesh to across the faces defined
As side faces,
obtain an annular on the sides,
triangle faces
O-Grid for region. The it meshes as
can be
better quality option is set follows:
mapped to
in corners. to 3 in the
obtain a
example
wedge mesh
below:
at one
corner,
depending For more
on source information
face on using
selection. mapped Face
Meshing with

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 329
Local Mesh Controls

Face Characteristic
Circular Triangle Annular Internal
Loops

Mesh Method

side faces,
see Side Face
Handling of
Imprinted
Regions (p. 432).

With fillets, chamfers, or large or small angles

• It is not always clear which vertex(es) should be used as the corner(s). Using virtual topology (p. 545)
to merge edges or split faces, or using mapped face meshing vertex controls may help.

• When there are a large number of segments along a side. This situation may create difficulties in
assigning incremental edge assignments that lead to good quality mesh. In these cases, adding a
face split is a good way to ensure the interval edge assignment is done correctly.

Concerns over the mappability of faces may be different depending on whether the faces are
source/target faces or side faces. For sweeping to be successful (regardless of whether Sweep (p. 235),
Thin Sweep (p. 406), or MultiZone (p. 242) is used), all side faces (that is, all non-source/target faces)
must be mappable. Ensuring side face mappability is most critical to ensure a successful swept mesh.
Ensuring a source face can be mapped should be a lower priority, and your strategy for sweeping
should account for this difference. You can use the Show>Mappable Faces (p. 542) option to help
determine mappability of faces.

In addition to the mappability of each individual side face, the collective set of faces for a given side
may present a problem. For example, for a collective set of faces, all parallel edges need to have the
same number of divisions from the top to the bottom of the sweep. Ensuring all side faces of a swept
body are mappable does not always ensure the body is sweepable. For example, if parallel edges of
a mapped face change in direction, a source edge could become a side edge and make the body
impossible to sweep. Also, edge splits on one face need to propagate through the collective set of
faces while maintaining a reasonable quality mesh. Reducing the number of edge splits may simplify
the sweeping and lead to a better quality mesh. This effect is the result of the simplification in the

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
330 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Copy Control

"interval edge assignment," or the requirement for the mesher to have the same number of divisions
along the sweep path.

Extending splits through the set of side faces may also help the mesher with the incremental edge
assignments, as well as with constraining the grid lines along the sweep path to control the mesh
quality. The imprinting that occurs with MultiZone creates further complications. See Side Face
Handling of Imprinted Regions (p. 432) for more information.

Example Usage
For an example problem demonstrating how to use face meshing, see Brake-Squeal Analysis in the
Mechanical Technology Showcase: Example Problems.

Mesh Copy Control

The Mesh Copy control enables you copy mesh from one body to another. Mesh Copy reduces the
mesh setup time for repetitive bodies or parts. Association to CAD is maintained after performing mesh
copy.

Mesh controls are scoped only to the source anchor body. When the mesh is generated, the source
anchor body is meshed and copies the mesh to targets. Mesh Copy automatically merges nodes of
bodies when both bodies belong to the same part or bodies have a shared interface.

To access the Mesh Copy control,

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Mesh Copy.

or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Mesh Copy in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

Right-click on the face in the Geometry window and then select Insert > Mesh Copy.

Mesh Copy Details view has the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to select the geometry selections or named selections for scoping.
The default value is Geometry Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allows you to scope the geometry faces or bodies. When you select
Geometry Selection, Source Anchor allows you to select the face or body as source
from the Geometry window.

– Named Selection: Allows you to scope the faces or bodies grouped under a named se-
lection. When you select Named Selection, Source Anchor allows you to select the ap-
propriate Named Selection as source.

• Target Scoping: Allows you to scope the target faces or bodies. The available options are Geo-
metry Selection and Named Selection. The default value is Geometry Selection.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 331
Local Mesh Controls

– Geometry Selection: Allows you to scope the selected geometry. When you select Geo-
metry Selection, the Target Anchors allows you to select the target faces or bodies from
the Geometry window.

– Named Selection: Allows you to select the available name selection. When you select
Named Selection, the Target Anchors allows you select the target faces or bodies from
the available named selections.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the method control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is Yes, the Active provides the number of suppressed parts and is read-only.

• Node Merge Tolerance Option: Allows you to select the node merge tolerance options. The
default option is Program Controlled. The available options are :

– Program Controlled: Performs node merge within the shared topologies with a default
tolerance. The default tolerance is 10 percent of the global Element Size.

– Percentage of Element Size: Performs node merge within the shared topologies with
the provided percentage of element size.

– Absolute Value: Performs node merge on shared topologies based on the absolute dis-
tance. The default absolute value is calculated as 0.1 * global Element Size.

Note:

While scoping the source and target anchors, note the following:

• The source and target face area should be the same.

• The associated source and target bodies should have the same volume.

• The source and target configuration should be identical (for example, a circle to rectangle
mapping is incorrect, even if the face area is the same).

• If the above is not true, the mesh may be copied, but the nodes may not be associated
properly to the target bodies, or the copied mesh transformation may be incorrect.

Figure 110: Mesh Copy Scope (p. 333) shows the set up of the Source face (blue) and Target Anchor
faces (red) for the Mesh Copy control. Figure 111: Generated Mesh (p. 333) shows the mesh that was
generated.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
332 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Copy Control

Figure 110: Mesh Copy Scope

Figure 111: Generated Mesh

Note:

• Mesh Copy does not support previewing the surface mesh, or previewing inflation.

• Mesh Copysupports multibody parts with share topology. Bodies which are scoped to a
Mesh Copy control are meshed first, and then the remaining bodies are meshed.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 333
Local Mesh Controls

• Mesh Copy supports Selective meshing (p. 444) only if the source bodies are meshed before
the target bodies. If the target bodies are meshed first, the mesh is not copied.

• The Mesh Copy target body is a reflection of the source. Element connectivities are differ-
ent. This may cause the solver to fail. Choosing a different target anchor face might help
in some cases. True reflection is not supported.

• Mesh Copy does not support refinement controls.

• A body can be scoped to Mesh Copy control target scoping, and mesh Method Controls
geometry scoping at the same time.

• The mesh copy algorithm gives higher priority to Method Control when a body is scoped
to Method Controls geometry scoping and Mesh Copy target scoping.

• The source body does not copy the sizing controls set up on the target bodies.

Match Control
The Match Control matches the mesh on two or more faces or edges in a model. The Meshing applic-
ation provides two types of match controls—cyclic (p. 336) and arbitrary (p. 338).

To access the Match control, right-click Mesh on the Tree Outline. Click Insert > Match Control. You
can also click Mesh on the Tree Outline, click the Mesh Context Toolbar on the ribbon, then click
Match Control.

The Match Control is supported for the following mesh methods:

Volume Meshing:

• Sweep (p. 235)

• Patch Conforming (p. 208)

• MultiZone (p. 242)

Surface Meshing:

• Quad Dominant (p. 282)

• All Triangles (p. 284)

• Automatic (PrimeMesh) (p. 287)

Remember the following information when using the match control feature:

• Edge meshes are matched for sheet, 2D, and 3D bodies. Face meshes are matched across bodies.

• A single match control with one high face and one low face cannot be applied across multiple parts.
If there are multiple faces on the high side and multiple faces on the low side, the software does its
best to match the high and low sides on a part-by-part basis. For example, the match control will
support situations in which there are two parts, each having one face on the high side and one face

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
334 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Match Control

on the low side (for a total of two high faces and two low faces). However, for more complex situations,
you must be careful to ensure the proper matching is done.

• Matching will fail if the high and low faces are on two separate bodies that have other bodies (being
meshed with a method other than Sweep) or a space between them.

• The faces or edges that you select must be topologically and geometrically the same.

This means:

– They have the same number of vertices on the high and low sides.

– They have similar surface area or length.

– The high and low sides have similar transformation.

The mesher will move nodes away from the geometry to meet the transformation.

• If the low and high sides of a geometry do not match, the high side geometry is meshed and the
low side will be meshed using the transformation from the match control. In this case, the low side
geometry and mesh might be slightly different, so a warning is displayed prompting you to check
this deviation and decide whether it is acceptable or that you should modify the geometry.

• Multiple match controls can be associated with a single entity, but multiple associations can result
in conflicts among match controls. If a conflict occurs, the Meshing application issues an error message,
and matching fails. For example, a match control conflict may occur if the two faces adjacent to an
edge have two different match controls applied to them. If the two match controls use two different
sets of coordinate systems the mesher may produce an error even if the transformation between the
two match controls is the same. However, for this case, if the two match controls refer to the same
set of coordinate systems there won’t be any conflict.

• A match control can only be assigned to one unique face pair. Assigning the same face as High/Low
Geometry in more than one match control is not supported. If multiple match controls assign the
same face as a High/Low Geometry entity, the match control that appears lowest in the Tree is
honored.

• Match controls are not respected with refinement or adaptivity.

• When you perform tet meshing on a body with match control applied, adjacent bodies get meshed
concurrently, even if a single body is chosen using Selective Meshing.

• When match is used with the Sizing Options (p. 105), the effect of a sizing on the high or low side
will be transferred bidirectionally from the high side to the low side and vice versa. This means that
if the low side has a sizing control and the high side does not, the Sizing control will use the low
sizing control on the high side.

• Match controls on faces are supported with Pre inflation (p. 172), regardless of whether inflation is
set to Program Controlled (p. 164) or has been set through any global or local inflation definition. In
contrast, match controls on edges are not supported with Pre inflation. Match controls (both faces
and edges) are not supported with Post inflation (p. 173). For non-supported cases, Ansys Workbench
automatically suppresses/disables the Match Control feature.

• Match controls are not enforced when previewing inflation (p. 534).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 335
Local Mesh Controls

• You cannot apply a match control to topology on which a face-edge pinch (p. 187), mesh connection,
or symmetry control has been applied. In any of these cases, an error will be issued when you generate
the mesh.

• Match controls on edges are not supported for the MultiZone (p. 242) mesh method. When match
controls on faces are used with MultiZone, only one periodic or cyclic transformation is supported
(MultiZone can support multiple match controls, as long as they use the same coordinate system and
have the same angle/translation). In addition, MultiZone does not support matching of free meshed
regions (p. 244).

• Match controls can be used with thin sweeping (p. 406), as shown in the figures below. In the figure
on the left, a match control was applied to the top and bottom faces. In the figure on the right, a
match control was applied to the side faces.

Figure 112: Match Controls Used with Thin Sweeping

Match control topics include:

Cyclic Match Control
Arbitrary Match Control

Note:

For general information on applying match controls in combination with the various mesh
method controls, refer to Meshing: Mesh Control Interaction Tables (p. 475).

Cyclic Match Control

The cyclic matching process involves copying the mesh of the first selected faces or edges in the
Match Control (the High Geometry Selection scoped in the Details View of the Match Control) to
the second selected faces or edges in the control (the scoped Low Geometry Selection).

You can scope a Cyclic Match Control to either a geometry selection or a named selection.

If you want to automatically generate solver constraints for periodic mesh in addition to matching
the mesh, you should use the Symmetry feature in the Mechanical application.

1. Insert a Match Control by right-clicking the Mesh object in the Tree Outline and selecting Insert
> Match Control.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
336 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Match Control

2. In the Details view, define the scope of the selection:

To apply a match control to... Do this...

A geometry selection 1. Click Scoping Method and select
Geometry Selection.

2. Select one or more faces or edges, and

then in the High Geometry Selection
field, click Apply.

3. Select one or more faces or edges, and

then in the Low Geometry Selection
field, click Apply.

A named selection 1. Click Scoping Method and select

Named Selection.

2. In the High Boundary and Low

Boundary fields, select the appropriate
named selections.

3. In the Details View, select Cyclic as the Transformation type and a coordinate system with its
z-axis aligned to the axis of rotation for the geometry.

4. Generate the mesh by right-clicking the Mesh object and selecting Generate Mesh from the
context menu.

Note:

When a match is successful, the number of elements in the matched faces/edges will
be the same, and there will be a direct one-to-one mapping between their nodes. A
small blue status icon ( ) appears to the left of the Match Control object icon in the
Tree Outline if the Match Control fails on the face or edge pair.

When a cyclic Match Control is used together with Sizing (p. 296) controls, the controls on the high
side have the higher precedence. Whatever controls are on the high faces or edges will be honored
on the low faces or edges in the Match Control. Sizing controls applied to the low faces or edges
will be honored only if the high side does not have the same controls, and only if the sizing is applied
directly on the low topology (that is, applying the sizing on connected topologies will have no effect).

Note:

The Meshing application inserts match controls for periodic regions automatically. See the
Match Meshing and Symmetry (p. 462) section for more information.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 337
Local Mesh Controls

Arbitrary Match Control

This feature lets you select multiple pairs of faces or edges in a model to create a match control that
will consequently generate exactly the same mesh on the high geometry as it does on the low geo-
metry. You can select a set of high faces belonging to different parts, and low faces belonging to
different parts, as long as the high and low pairs are on the same body. So, for example, you can
have a single match control consisting of multiple pairs of faces or edges across bodies.

However, unlike cyclic match controls (p. 336), which require you to select a coordinate system with
its z-axis of rotation aligned to the geometry's axis of rotation, for arbitrary match controls the faces
or edges to be matched can be arbitrarily located, and the match control is based on two coordinate
systems that you select.

You can scope an Arbitrary Match Control to either a geometry selection or a named selection.

If you want to automatically generate solver constraints for periodic mesh in addition to matching
the mesh, you should use the Symmetry feature in the Mechanical application.

1. Insert a Match Control by right-clicking the Mesh object in the Tree Outline and selecting Insert
> Match Control.

2. In the Details view, define the scope of the selection:

To apply a match control Do this...

to...
A geometry selection 1. Click Scoping Method and select Geometry Selection.

2. Select one or more faces or edges, and then in the High

Geometry Selection field, click Apply.

3. Select one or more faces or edges, and then in the Low

Geometry Selection field, click Apply.

A named selection 1. Click Scoping Method and select Named Selection.

2. In the High Boundary and Low Boundary fields, select the

appropriate named selections.

3. Change the value of the Transformation control to Arbitrary.

4. Choose the coordinate systems for the selected high and low geometry entities. The applicable
settings in the Details View are:

• High Coordinate System: Choose the coordinate system for the faces/edges assigned by the
High Geometry Selection control.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
338 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Match Control

• Low Coordinate System: Choose the coordinate system for the faces/edges assigned by the
Low Geometry Selection control.

Note:

All the coordinate systems currently defined for the model appear in the High Co-
ordinate System and Low Coordinate System drop-down menus. You may choose
coordinate systems from the list, or you may need to define additional coordinate
systems. For the match control to be honored, the coordinate systems that you choose
must be defined such that a valid transformation matrix can be calculated. Else, the
two coordinate systems must be created such that when the coordinates of every
point of the Low Geometry Selection in the Low Coordinate System are placed into
the High Coordinate System, the high and low faces/edges match exactly. Refer to
the Coordinate Systems Overview in the Mechanical help for information on coordinate
systems and how to create them.

5. Generate the mesh by right-clicking on the Mesh object and selecting Generate Mesh from the
context menu.

When a match is successful, the number of elements in the matched faces/edges will be the
same, and there will be a direct one-to-one mapping between their nodes. If the mesh is generated
but the match was unsuccessful, a small blue status icon ( ) displays to the left of the Match
Control object icon in the Tree Outline.

Example 5: Arbitrary Mesh Matching

The figures below show an example of arbitrary mesh matching. Figure 113: Coordinate Systems for
Arbitrary Mesh Matching (p. 339) shows the selected coordinate systems, and Figure 114: Matched
Mesh (p. 340) shows the resulting matched mesh. Edge and face sizings were also applied.

Figure 113: Coordinate Systems for Arbitrary Mesh Matching

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 339
Local Mesh Controls

Figure 114: Matched Mesh

Pinch Control
The Pinch control lets you remove small features (such as short edges and narrow regions) at the mesh
level in order to generate better quality elements around those features.

When Pinch controls are defined, the small features in the model that meet the criteria established by
the controls will be "pinched out," thereby removing the features from the mesh. You can instruct the
Meshing application to automatically create pinch controls based on settings that you specify (as de-
scribed in Pinch Control Automation Overview (p. 190)), or you can manually designate the entities to
be pinched, as described below in Defining Pinch Controls Locally (p. 340).

Local pinch control topics include:

Defining Pinch Controls Locally
Changing Pinch Controls Locally

For an overview of pinch controls and details on pinch control automation, refer to Pinch (p. 187). For
general information on applying pinch controls in combination with the various mesh method controls,
refer to Meshing: Mesh Control Interaction Tables (p. 475). For general information about pinch control
usage, see Usage Information for Pinch Controls (p. 194).

Defining Pinch Controls Locally

This section describes the steps for defining pinch controls locally.

To define pinch controls locally:

1. Click the Mesh folder in the Tree Outline. Right-click and select Insert > Pinch from the context
menu.

Or

Click Mesh Control on the toolbar and choose Pinch from the menu.

A pinch control object is inserted into the Tree.

2. In the Geometry window, pick one or more faces, one or more edges, or one vertex that you
want to define as the Primary. (A Primary geometry is an entity that retains the profile of the

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
340 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Pinch Control

original geometry.) Refer to Pinch (p. 187) for a table that summarizes the valid entities you can
pick for each type of pinch control.

3. Use either of these methods to apply your selection:

• Right-click in the Geometry window to display the context menu and select Set As Pinch
Primary.

• Click in the Primary Geometry field in the Details View.

The pinch region is flagged in the Geometry window. The color of each selected entity changes
to blue to identify it as primary geometry. If you want to adjust your selections, you can re-pick
geometry and then apply the new selections to overwrite the existing primary geometry. If using
the context menu method to apply selections, you can also pick additional geometry and select
Add To Pinch Primary to add the geometry to the existing primary geometry. Also see Changing
Pinch Controls Locally (p. 343).

4. In the Geometry window, pick one or more edges or vertices that you want to define as the
secondary. (A secondary geometry is an entity that changes in order to move towards the primary
geometry. Depending on the tolerance, the pinch control will pinch out the entire secondary
entity or only a portion of the secondary entity into the primary. Faces cannot be defined as
secondary.)

5. Use either of these methods to apply your selection:

• Right-click in the Geometry window to display the context menu and select Set As Pinch
Secondary.

• Click in the Secondary Geometry field in the Details View.

The color of each selected edge/vertex changes to red to identify it as secondary geometry. If
you want to adjust your selections, you can re-pick geometry and then apply the new selections
to overwrite the existing secondary geometry. If using the context menu method to apply selec-
tions, you can also pick additional geometry and select Add To Pinch Secondary to add the
geometry to the existing secondary geometry. Also see Changing Pinch Controls Locally (p. 343).

6. Change the value of the Suppressed control if desired.

By default, the value of Suppressed is No. If you change the value to Yes, this pinch control has
no effect on the mesh (that is, the small features you picked for this pinch control are not removed
and will affect the mesh). In addition, an Active control with a read-only setting of No, Suppressed
appears under the Suppressed control when Suppressed is set to Yes.

7. Change the value of the Tolerance control if desired.

By default, the value of Tolerance is based on the global pinch control tolerance (p. 192). If you
specify a different value here, it overrides the global value.

8. Change the value of the Snap to Boundary control if desired.

By default, the value of Snap to Boundary is Yes. Snap to Boundary is applicable only for pinch
controls in shell models for which a face has been defined as the primary geometry and one or
more edges are defined as the secondary. In such cases, when the value of Snap to Boundary
is Yes and the distance from a secondary edge to the closest mesh boundary of the primary face

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 341
Local Mesh Controls

is within the specified snap to boundary tolerance, nodes from the secondary edge are projected
onto the boundary of the primary face. The joined edge will be on the primary face along with
other edges on the primary face that fall within the defined pinch control tolerance. Refer to the
figures below to see the effect of the Snap to Boundary setting.

Note:

For edge-to-edge pinch controls in shell models, the snap tolerance is set equal to
the pinch tolerance internally and cannot be modified.

9. Change the value of the Snap Type control if desired. Snap Type appears only when the value
of Snap to Boundary is Yes.

• If Snap Type is set to Manual Tolerance (the default), a Snap Tolerance field appears
where you may enter a numerical value greater than 0. By default, the Snap Tolerance
is set equal to the pinch tolerance but it can be overridden here.

• If Snap Type is set to Element Size Factor, a Primary Element Size Factor field appears
where you may enter a numerical value greater than 0. The value entered should be a
factor of the local element size of the primary topology.

Note:

When you define a pinch control locally, the value of Scope Method is Manual (read-only).
If you make changes to a pinch control that was created through pinch control automa-
tion (p. 193), the value of the Scope Method field for that pinch control changes from
Automatic to Manual.

Figure 115: Snap to Boundary Set to Yes (p. 343) shows the mesh when Snap to Boundary is set to
Yes (default).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
342 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Pinch Control

Figure 115: Snap to Boundary Set to Yes

Figure 116: Snap to Boundary Set to No (p. 343) shows the mesh for the same model when Snap to
Boundary is set to No.

Figure 116: Snap to Boundary Set to No

Changing Pinch Controls Locally

This section describes the steps for changing pinch controls locally. You can make changes to pinch
controls regardless of whether they were created automatically or manually. You can select multiple
pinch controls to make the same changes to all selected pinch controls at one time.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 343
Local Mesh Controls

To change pinch controls locally:

1. In the Tree Outline, select the pinch control(s) that you want to change.

2. In the Geometry window, pick one or more faces, one or more edges, or one vertex that you
want to define as primary. Refer to Pinch (p. 187) for a table that summarizes the valid entities
you can pick for each type of pinch control.

3. Use either of these methods to apply your selection:

• Right-click in the Geometry window to display the context menu and select Set As Pinch
Primary or Add To Pinch Primary.

• Click in the Primary Geometry field in the Details View.

The pinch region is flagged in the Geometry window. The color of each selected entity changes
to blue to identify it as primary geometry. If you want to further adjust your selections, you can
re-pick geometry and then apply the new selections to overwrite or add to the existing primary
geometry. To add to the geometry, you must use Add To Pinch Primary in the context menu.

4. In the Geometry window, pick one or more edges or vertices that you want to define as second-
ary. (Faces cannot be defined as secondary.)

5. Use either of these methods to apply your selection:

• Right-click in the Geometry window to display the context menu and select Set As Pinch
Secondary or Add To Pinch Secondary.

• Click in the Secondary Geometry field in the Details View.

The color of each selected edge/vertex changes to red to identify it as secondary geometry. If
you want to further adjust your selections, you can re-pick geometry and then apply the new
selections to overwrite or add to the existing secondary geometry. To add to the geometry, you
must use Add To Pinch Secondary in the context menu.

6. Change the value of the Suppressed control if desired.

By default, the value of Suppressed is No. If you change the value to Yes, this pinch control has
no effect on the mesh (that is, the small features you picked for this pinch control are not removed
and will affect the mesh). In addition, an Active control with a read-only setting of No, Suppressed
appears under the Suppressed control when Suppressed is set to Yes.

7. Change the value of the Tolerance control if desired.

By default, the value of Tolerance is based on the global pinch control tolerance (p. 192). If you
specify a different value here, it overrides the global value.

8. Change the value of the Snap to Boundary control if desired.

By default, the value of Snap to Boundary is Yes. Snap to Boundary is applicable only for pinch
controls in shell models for which a face has been defined as the primary geometry and one or
more edges are defined as the secondary. In such cases, when the value of Snap to Boundary
is Yes and the distance from a secondary edge to the closest mesh boundary of the primary face
is within the specified snap to boundary tolerance, nodes from the secondary edge are projected

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
344 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Inflation Control

onto the boundary of the primary face. The joined edge will be on the primary face along with
other edges on the primary face that fall within the defined pinch control tolerance. Refer to
Figure 115: Snap to Boundary Set to Yes (p. 343) and Figure 116: Snap to Boundary Set to No (p. 343)
to see the effect of the setting.

Note:

For edge-to-edge pinch controls in shell models, the snap tolerance is set equal to
the pinch tolerance internally and cannot be modified.

9. Change the value of the Snap Type control if desired. Snap Type appears only when the value
of Snap to Boundary is Yes.

• If Snap Type is set to Manual Tolerance (the default), a Snap Tolerance field appears
where you may enter a numerical value greater than 0. By default, the Snap Tolerance
is set equal to the pinch tolerance but it can be overridden here.

• If Snap Type is set to Element Size Factor, a Primary Element Size Factor field appears
where you may enter a numerical value greater than 0. The value entered should be a
factor of the local element size of the primary topology.

Note:

If you make changes to a pinch control that was created through pinch control automa-
tion (p. 193), the value of the Scope Method field for that pinch control changes from
Automatic to Manual.

Inflation Control
Inflation is useful for CFD boundary layer resolution, electromagnetic air gap resolution or resolving
high stress concentrations for structures. It is supported for the mesh methods listed in the section In-
flation Group (p. 161). You can use local inflation mesh controls to apply inflation to specific boundaries.
When an inflation control is scoped to a solid model, every scoped geometry must have a boundary
defined for it. The settings of the local inflation controls will override global inflation control (p. 161)
settings.

You can define local inflation controls either by inflating a method or by inserting individual inflation
controls.

Inflating a Method
1. Insert a mesh method.

2. Associate (scope) the desired bodies with the method.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 345
Local Mesh Controls

3. Right-click the method and choose Inflate This Method from the menu.

Note:

For example, if you right-click a Tetrahedrons method control or a Sweep method control
and specify the source, then an Inflate This Method menu option is available. Choosing
this option inserts an inflation control on every body to which the Tetrahedrons meshing
method with the selected Algorithm is applied, or on every face to which the Sweep
method is applied. Similarly, an inflation control will be inserted into the Tree Outline for
each body/face. (Sweeping with inflation is the same as inflation with tetrahedrons except
that with sweeping you pick faces and edges instead of bodies and faces.)

4. Highlight one of the inflation controls that was inserted into the Tree Outline.

5. Change the value of the Suppressed control if desired.

By default, the value of Suppressed is No. If you change the value to Yes, this inflation control has
no effect on the mesh. In addition, an Active control with a read-only setting of No, Suppressed
appears under the Suppressed control when Suppressed is set to Yes.

6. Use either of these methods to specify the inflation boundaries:

• In the Details View, set Boundary Scoping Method to Geometry Selection, pick the entities
in the Geometry window, and click the Boundary field in the Details View to Apply.

• In the Details View, set Boundary Scoping Method to Named Selections, select a Named
Selection from the Boundary drop-down, and press Enter.

Note:

– To select multiple Named Selections to be used as inflation boundaries, press

and hold the Ctrl key while selecting the Named Selections from the Boundary
drop-down, and then press Enter.

– If none of the predefined Named Selections include the correct topology to be

used as an inflation boundary, no Named Selections will be available in the
drop-down. For example, if you scoped a surface body with the method in step
2, a Named Selection containing an edge must exist. Otherwise, you cannot
select anything from the drop-down.

7. Specify additional inflation options as desired. For details about options, refer to the notes below
and to Inflation Group (p. 161).

8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 for each inflation control in the Tree Outline.

Inserting Individual Inflation Controls

1. Optionally, select the desired bodies or faces in the Geometry window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
346 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Inflation Control

2. Use either of these methods to insert the inflation control:

• Click Mesh Control on the toolbar and choose Inflation from the menu.

• Right-click in the Geometry window and choose Insert > Inflation from the menu.

3. If you selected the bodies or faces in step 1, go directly to step 4. If not, use either of these methods
to scope inflation to the desired bodies or faces:

• In the Details View, set Scoping Method to Geometry Selection, pick the entities in the
Geometry window, and click the Geometry field in the Details View to Apply.

• In the Details View, set Scoping Method to Named Selection, and select a Named Selection
from the Named Selection drop-down.

4. Change the value of the Suppressed control if desired.

By default, the value of Suppressed is No. If you change the value to Yes, this inflation control has
no effect on the mesh. In addition, an Active control with a read-only setting of No, Suppressed
appears under the Suppressed control when Suppressed is set to Yes.

5. Use either of these methods to specify the inflation boundaries:

• In the Details View, set Boundary Scoping Method to Geometry Selection, pick the entities
in the Geometry window, and click the Boundary field in the Details View to Apply.

• In the Details View, set Boundary Scoping Method to Named Selections, select a Named
Selection from the Boundary drop-down, and press Enter.

Note:

– To select multiple Named Selections to be used as inflation boundaries, press

and hold the Ctrl key while selecting the Named Selections from the Boundary
drop-down, and then press Enter.

– If none of the predefined Named Selections include the correct topology to be

used as an inflation boundary, no Named Selections will be available in the
drop-down. For example, if you selected a face in step 1, a Named Selection
containing an edge must exist. Otherwise, you cannot select anything from the
drop-down.

6. Specify additional inflation options as desired. For details about options, refer to the notes below
and to Inflation Group (p. 161).

Notes on Defining Local Inflation Controls (2D Only)

In most cases, the controls in the global Inflation (p. 161) group apply to both 3D and 2D inflation, and
the values set globally will be populated to the local inflation controls. Changes that you make to the
local inflation settings will override the global settings. Exceptions and special considerations for defining
2D local inflation are described here.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 347
Local Mesh Controls

• When defining 2D local inflation, the available options for the Inflation Option (p. 166) control are
Smooth Transition (default), First Layer Thickness, and Total Thickness. If the Inflation Option
control is set to First Aspect Ratio or Last Aspect Ratio globally, it will be set to Smooth Transition
locally.

– When Inflation Option is Smooth Transition, you can set values for Transition Ratio (p. 168),
Maximum Layers (p. 169), and Growth Rate (p. 169).

– If you select First Layer Thickness, you can set values for First Layer Height (p. 169), Maximum
Layers (p. 169), and Growth Rate (p. 169). The value of Growth Rate is used to calculate the
heights of the successive layers, as follows:

Growth Rate = hn+1 / hn

where hn = height of layer n

– If you select Total Thickness, you can set values for Number of Layers (p. 169), Growth
Rate (p. 169), and Maximum Thickness (p. 169). The first layer height is computed based on
these three values. The heights of the successive layers are computed using the same formula
shown above under First Layer Thickness.
When 2D inflation is applied to a 3D model (that is, to the face of a 3D body), the local value of
Maximum Layers will be set equal to the global value by default. However, when it is applied to a
2D model (i.e, to the face of a surface body), the local value of Maximum Layers will be set to 2.

• If you are using the Quadrilateral Dominant (p. 282) mesh method with inflation and the Size Func-
tion (p. 105) is on, the mesh size of the last inflation layer will be used for the corresponding Quadri-
lateral Dominant boundary mesh size.

Notes on Defining Local Inflation Controls (3D and 2D)

• To make inflation boundary selection easier, select Annotation Preferences from the Toolbar and
then deselect Body Scoping Annotations in the Annotation Preferences option box to toggle the
visibility of annotations in the Geometry window. For example, after scoping inflation to a body, the
body will be displayed using a blue solid annotation. Turn off the body scoping annotations, then
select the desired faces as boundaries. For picking internal faces, the Hide Faces right-click option
may help you to see inside a body. For example, you can select external faces in the Geometry
window and then use the Hide Faces option to hide the selected faces (making it easier to select
the internal faces).

• Multiple Inflation controls can be scoped to the same body or face with different inflation options
on the faces/edges.

• If the mesh method is Automatic, the Patch Conforming tetrahedron method will be used for inflation
on a body and the Sweep method will be used for inflation on a face.

• If the mesh method is Cartesian (3D only) and Physics Preference is set to CFD, then three boundary
layers are created with total thickness proportional to element size. If Cartesian and physics is not
CFD, then a single boundary layer is added with thickness proportional to element size.

• In the following scenarios, using inflation results in automatic suppression of the refinement (p. 313)
control:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
348 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Gasket Control

– When automatic inflation (p. 163) (either Program Controlled (p. 164) or All Faces in Chosen
Named Selection (p. 165)) is used with refinement in the same model

– When local inflation (p. 345) is used with refinement in the same body or in the same part

• For information on setting global inflation controls and descriptions of all of the individual inflation
controls, refer to Inflation Group (p. 161). For steps to follow to assign inflation depending on the se-
lected mesh method, refer to Inflation Controls (p. 453). For general information on applying inflation
controls in combination with the various mesh method controls, refer to Meshing: Mesh Control In-
teraction Tables (p. 475).

Gasket Control
Gasket Control applies a sweep mesh in a chosen direction and drops midside nodes on gasket elements
that are parallel to the sweep direction.

For information regarding Gasket Mesh from the Geometry refer to Gasket Meshing.

Gasket Control is available only when Body object's Stiffness Behavior is set to Gasket.

Or

When there is Static Structural is available in the Model Tree.

To access Gasket Control,

On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Gasket.

Or

On the Tree Outline, click Mesh and click Gasket in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

Or

When Body object's Stiffness Behavior is set to Gasket, Gasket Control is automatically available on
the Tree.

Gasket Control Details View has the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry bodies or named selection. The default value is
Geometry Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allow you to scope the geometry bodies. When you select Geometry Selec-
tion, the Geometry allows you to select the geometry from the Geometry window.

– Named Selection: Allow you to scope bodies grouped under a named selection.

Definition

• Element Order: Allows you to select element order for Gasket Control. The default value is Use
Global Setting. For information on the Element Order option, refer to Method Controls and Element
Order Settings.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 349
Local Mesh Controls

• Source Scoping Method: Defines the method for choosing a source face. Geometry Selection enables
you to select sources or targets manually using the Source option. Named Selection enables you
to choose one Named Selection as a source or target using the Source Named Selection option.

• Free Face Mesh Type: Allows you to select the type of face mesh. The default value is Quad/Tri.

– Quad/Tri: Allows you to generate the quad and triangular mesh on the source face.

– All Quad: Allows you to generate all quadrilateral mesh on the source face.

– All Tri: Allows you to generate all triangular mesh on the source face.

Feature Suppress
Feature Suppress enables you to remove small features at the mesh level. The small features may
create bad quality mesh while meshing. Hence, you need to remove such small features to generate a
good quality mesh. A typical example of a small feature may be an embossed (or indented) logo as
shown below:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
350 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Feature Suppress

To access Feature Suppress control:

• Right-click Mesh object and click Insert > Feature Suppress.

or

• On the Ribbon, click Feature Suppress under Controls group in Mesh Context tab.

When you click Feature Suppress, the Details view displays the Feature Suppress options:

Scope

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 351
Local Mesh Controls

Scoping Method: Allow you to scope the bodies having features that need to be suppressed. The
available body scoping methods are Geometry Selection and Named Selection.

• Geometry Selection: Allow you to scope the geometry bodies.

• Named Selection: Allow you to scope the geometry bodies to be suppressed in the named se-
lection.

Definition

Source Selections: Allow you select the methods used for feature suppression. The available options
are Automatic, Defeature Faces and Parent Faces. The default option is Automatic.

• Automatic: Automatically detect the features to be suppressed on a body. The default value of
the Feature Height used for feature suppression is also calculated automatically.

• Defeature Faces: Allow you to select the faces to be suppressed during meshing.

• Parent Faces: Allows you to select the common neighboring face (parent) to the feature faces
that needs to be suppressed.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
352 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Feature Suppress

Source Scoping Method: Allow you to scope the defeatured faces or parent faces depending on the
selected method. The available scoping methods are Geometry Selection and Named Selection.

• Geometry Selection: Allow you to select the defeatured faces or parent faces. When you select
Geometry Selection, the Source Geometry allows you to select the feature to be suppressed
from the Geometry window.

• Named Selection: Allow you to scope the defeatured faces or parent faces in the named selection.
When you select Named Selection, the Source Named Selection allows you to select the feature
to be suppressed from the available named selections.

Feature Height: Allows you to specify the height of the feature to be suppressed based on the maximum
distance between parent faces and faces considered for suppression. The image below shows the same.
You may use a value slightly larger than a locally measured edge length, as the distance between the
parent faces and faces considered for suppression can vary for a given feature.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 353
Local Mesh Controls

When you select the Method as Automatic or Parent Faces, the Feature Height is available. For the
Automatic method, the default value chosen is 80% of the Element Size. For Parent Faces method,
the default value is –1. It suppresses all features enclosed by the parent face.

Feature Suppress control allow you to preview the suppressed faces using the Show Suppressible Fea-
tures (p. 539) before suppressing them.

Limitation
Feature Suppress control has the following limitations:

• Feature Suppress cannot be applied on areas with protected topology. Feature Suppress
considers the following as Protected Topology:

– Named Selection group with Protected set to Yes.

– geometric faces in Face Meshing controls.

– geometric faces with applied sizing controls.

• Feature Suppress does not work if parent faces are split around the feature to be removed. You
cannot use Virtual Topology to merge such faces and you can merge the faces at the geometry
level using geometry modeling tool such as Discovery or Discovery Modeling.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
354 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Repair Topology

• Feature Suppress supports only solid bodies and not sheet bodies.

• Feature Suppress supports only Patch Conforming Tetrahedron and Hex Dominant mesh
methods.

• Feature Suppress does not support Virtual Topology.

Repair Topology
Repair Topology allows you to repair topologies of the scoped entities.

All Repair Topology bodies should be scoped under Automatic (PrimeMesh) method. If not, scope
the bodies under Automatic (PrimeMesh) to perform Repair Topology operation.

To Access Repair Topology:

1. Right-click the Mesh folder in the Tree Outline.

2. Select Insert > Repair Topology.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 355
Local Mesh Controls

The following options are available in the Details view for Repair Topology:

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the Repair Topology control. The default value is No. When
Suppressed is set to Yes, the Active field displays the status of the Repair Topology control.
The Active field is read-only.

Merge Faces Options

• Merge Faces: Merges the selected faces. The default value is No. When the value is set to Yes,
the following option appears:

– Scoping: Allows you to select either Geometry Selection or Named Selection. The default
value is Geometry Selection. When you select Geometry Selection, Merge Faces Geo-
metry allows you to scope the face geometry. When you select Named Selection, you
can select multiple named selections from the list of available face named selections.
After selecting, you must press Enter to apply the selection. Based on the Scoping selected,
the number of faces used for the respective selection is displayed.

Suppress Edges Options

• Suppress Edges: Suppress the selected edges. The default value is No. When the default value
is set to Yes, the Scoping allows you to scope Geometry Selection or Named Selection. The
default value is Geometry Selection. When you select Geometry Selection, Suppress Edges
Geometry allows you to scope geometry selection. When you select Named Selection, allows
you to scope the named selection.

Partial Defeature Options

• Partial Defeature: Allows you to partially merge the geometry by suppressing only a portion
of the edge joining two faces based on Thin Face Width, Sharp Angle and Feature Angle.
Partial Defeature is useful for retaining important geometric features without merging the faces
completely at thin faces or sharp angles.

When you set Partial Defeature to Yes, the mesher automatically sets the Remove Thin Faces
and Remove Sharp Angle to Yes by default, and you cannot update Remove Thin Faces and
Remove Sharp Angle. When Partial Defeature set to Yes, the available option is:

– Scoping: Allows you to select the scoping method. The default value is Geometry Selection.
Scoping allows you to select Geometry Selection or Named Selection. When you select
Geometry Selection, Partial Defeature Geometry allows you to scope the thin faces in the
geometry. When you select Named Selection, allows you to scope the thin faces in the named
selection. Partial Defeature scoping is used for Remove Thin Face Width and Remove Sharp
Angle options.

Repair Thin Faces Options

• Remove Thin Faces: Removes the thin faces by merging them with the neighboring faces. The
default value is No. When Remove Thin Faces isYes, the Thin Face Width and Scoping options
are displayed.

– Thin Face Width: Allows you to specify the width of the thin face. The default value for
Thin Face Width is same as the Connection Tolerance.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
356 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Repair Topology

– Scoping: Allows you to select the scoping method. The default value is Geometry Selec-
tion. Scoping allows you to select Geometry Selection or Named Selection. When you
select Geometry Selection, Thin Face Geometry allows you to scope the thin faces in
the geometry. When you select Named Selection, allows you to scope the thin faces in
the named selection. Scoping is available only when Partial Defeature is set to No.

Repair Short Edges Options

• Collapse Short Edges: Collapses the edges below the specified tolerance. Feature edges and
Protected edges are not collapsed. The default value is No. When the Collapse Short Edges is
set to Yes, the Short Edge Length and Scopingoption are displayed.

– Short Edge Length: Allows you to specify the shortest edge length to performs collapse op-
eration.

– Scoping: Allows you to select the scoping method. The default value is Geometry Selection.
When Scoping is Geometry Selection, the Short Edge Geometry is displayed that allows
you to apply the scoping to the selected edges. When Scoping is Named Selection, allows
you to select the available named selections. Scoping is available only when Partial Defeature
is set to No.

Repair Sharp Angle Options

• Remove Sharp Angle Faces: Removes the sharp angle faces below the specified angle tolerance
by merging them to the neighboring faces. The default value is No. When the value is set to
Yes, the Sharp Angle and Scoping options appear.

– Sharp Angle: Allows you to capture faces below the specified angle. The default value
for Sharp Angle is 10 degrees.

– Scoping: Allows you to select the scoping method. The default value is Geometry Selec-
tion. When Scoping is Geometry Selection, the Sharp Angle Geometry allows you to
apply the scoping to the selected faces. When Scoping is Named Selection, allows you
to select the available named selections.

Repair Pinch Faces Options

• Pinch Faces: Removes small features at the mesh level. The default value is No. When set to
Yes, the Pinch Tolerance and Scoping options appear.

– Pinch Tolerance: Allows you to pinch the faces below the specified tolerance. The default
value of Pinch Tolerance is same as the Connection Tolerance.

– Scoping: Allows you to select the scoping method. The default value is Geometry Selec-
tion. When Scoping is Geometry Selection, the Pinch Faces Geometry allows you to
apply the scoping to the selected faces. When Scoping is Named Selection, allows you
to select the available named selections.

Fill Hole Options

• Fill Hole: Fills the selected holes. The default value is No. When set to Yes, Scoping appears
and allows you to select either Geometry Selection or Named Selection.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 357
Local Mesh Controls

– Geometry Selection: Allows you to scope only edges for fill hole option. The default value is
Geometry Selection.

– Named Selection: Allows you to scope edge-based name selection for fill hole option.

Advanced

• Feature Angle: Specifies the minimum dihedral angle at which the geometry features are repaired.
The default value is 30 degrees. You can provide any value between 0 to 180 degrees.

Feature Angle is the dihedral angle measured as follows:

When θ=0, two surfaces are perfectly tangential, and the edges are not protected. Hence, the
two surfaces can be merged, or edges can be suppressed, pinched or more.

When 30 ≤ θ ≤ 90 degrees, the edges between the two surfaces are protected and cannot
perform merging or pinching at the location.

θ = 90

When θ > 90 degrees,the surfaces are not protected and prevents topology operations like merge
or pinch on faces or edges.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
358 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Connect

You can right-click the Mesh, select Diagnostics > Find Unconnected Edges to display the unconnected
edges. You can also access the overlapping faces by selecting Diagnostics > Find Overlapping Faces.

Note:

• Repair Topology operations are performed during meshing. Hence, the changes are
not reflected on the input geometry. You should carefully examine mesh association
to geometry when using repair topology.

• Repair Topology operations respects Protected Entities. Hence, Repair Topology

options do not alter Protected Entities.

Connect
Connect control allows you to create conformal mesh between the selected entities.

All Connect bodies should be scoped under Automatic (PrimeMesh) method. If not, scope the bodies
under Automatic (PrimeMesh) to perform Connect operation.

To access Connect control, right-click Mesh object and click Insert > Connect. When you click Connect,
the Details view displays the Connect options.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 359
Local Mesh Controls

Note:

• Connect control does not support scoping to solid entities.

• All legacy databases saved with Batch Connections will resume with Connect control.

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to select Geometry or Named Selection for scoping.

• Use Worksheet: Allows you to scope using worksheet when set to Yes. The default value is No.
When Use Worksheet is set to Yes, the connections are made using worksheet.

Connections Using Worksheet

Connections can also be performed using Worksheet. Worksheet allows you to define the order
in which connections are performed and allows you to define varying connection parameters.
Worksheet is context sensitive. To perform connections using Worksheet, you must be in the
Mesh folder. Click Worksheet in Tools under the Home tab to open the Worksheet.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
360 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Connect

Note:

You can activate, setup and visualize mesh worksheet only from the Mesh folder.

Worksheet allows you to scope named selections. Named selections can either be body based
or face based. For each step you can change connection option and specify connection toler-
ance(s). The available connection options are:

– All to All: Connects all possible entities in the scope during the connection process. When
All to All is selected, sliver faces and short edges below the connection tolerance value
are removed as a part of the connection process.

– Free to All: Connects only unconnected edges to rest of the entities in the scope.

– Free to Free: Connects only unconnected edges in the scope.

The steps involved in Worksheet based connection are as follows:

1. Right- click the Worksheet.

2. Click Add to add a step.

3. Specify scope defined by named selection from the drop-down list in the Scoped Bodies
field. All Bodies is a named selection available by default.

4. Select the Connection Option.

5. Specify connection tolerance or list of tolerances for the step. The connection tolerance(s)
behaves same as global connection tolerance and list of tolerance.

6. Add as many steps as required for the connection.

When Generate Mesh is clicked connections are established in the sequence defined in the
worksheet. The mesh is generated after all the connections are made.

Note:

All Bodies is available by default under scoped bodies in the Worksheet. This named
selection is scoped to all bodies in the assembly.

Definition

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 361
Local Mesh Controls

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the Connect control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is set to Yes, the Active field displays the status of the Connect control. The Active
field is read-only.

• Multiple Connection Steps: Allows you to provide multiple values for connection tolerance.
The default value is No. When you set Multiple Connection Steps to No, Connection Tolerance
field is available to provide the tolerance value for connection. When you set the Multiple
Connection Steps to Yes, the Connection Tolerance List is available to provide multiple values
for connection tolerance. You can specify any number of connection tolerance values separated
by a space. The first value in Connection Tolerance List performs face to face intersections,
short edge removal, thin face removal and so on. From the second tolerance value onwards only
the unconnected (free) edges are considered for performing connections.

• Connection Size: Defines the size with which you discretize the edges before connecting them.
By default, the connection size is same as Element Size.

• Connection Option: Allows you to select the connect options. The available connection options
are All to All, Free to All, Free to Free. For more details, check Connections Using Work-
sheet (p. ?)

• Coplanar Angle Tolerance: Checks whether the two faces to be connected are in the same
plane or not. When the faces are in the same plane, intersection is not performed. The value of
Coplanar Angle Tolerance is in degrees.

• Perform Intersections: Allows you to skip intersection while connecting the selected entities.
The default value is Yes.

Note:

When you use Connect and Mesh Selected Entities on legacy files which have partially
saved mesh, the previously saved mesh gets cleared. You may have to regenerate mesh for
the entire model.

Weld
Weld control allows you to create weld bodies and, or generate layers of quad elements on the weld
faces (angled and normal faces), in between the angled and normal faces and on the faces that are
welded together along the edges shared with the angled and normal faces. When you select Source
as Mesh and Create using options like Curves, Curves and Bodies or Curves and Faces, angled and
normal faces are created during meshing using defined Weld Curve. The faces are associated to a weld
body that is created during meshing. The weld body is available under the Geometry tree object. The
weld body name is same as that of the Weld control. One weld body gets created per Weld Curve.
Weld supports coincident welds and solid shell welds. In Files > Options > Meshing, when Solid-Shell
Weld – Shared Nodes is No under Meshing, creates non conformal mesh with contacts between the
shell and the weld bodies. When Solid-Shell Weld – Shared Nodes is Yes, creates conformal mesh
without contacts between the shell and the weld bodies. The default value is No.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
362 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Weld

All Weld bodies should be scoped under Automatic (PrimeMesh) method. If not, scope the bodies
under Automatic (PrimeMesh) to perform Weld operation.

Note:

Weld bodies created at the mesh level are deleted, when the following occurs:

• Mesh is cleared.

• Geometry is updated.

You can access the weld control as follows:

1. On the Tree Outline, click Mesh object.

2. Right-click the Mesh object in the Tree Outline.

3. Select Insert > Weld.

Also, you can access Weld from Mesh Context tab when you click Mesh object on the Tree Outline.

When you have a defined Weld object on the Tree, you can right-click Mesh and select Export... >
Weld Definition File to write the FE-Safe weld definition files at the provided location.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 363
Local Mesh Controls

Weld Details view has the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: You can use Geometry Selection or Named Selections for scoping. The default
value is Geometry Selection. Scoping Method is not available only when the Create Using is
set to Curves.

• Type: Allows you to select the type of weld control. The available types are:

– Continuous Seam: Allows you to perform continuous welding.

– Intermittent Seam: Allows you to perform discontinuous welding. When you select Type
as Intermittent Seam, the Source is Mesh by default and is a read only field.

Note:

Intermittent Seam modeled as Mesh Independent is treated as Continu-

ous Seam as it is in contact with solids.

• Source: Allows you to select Geometry or Mesh for welding. Source represents where the weld
faces are modeled. You can select Geometry, for weld faces created in CAD. You can select
Mesh, when the weld entities are to be created during mesh generation.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
364 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Weld

• Modeled As: Allows you to choose or define how weld entities are modeled. When the Source
is Geometry and Type is Continuous Seam, you need to define what the weld faces represent.
The available options are:

– Angled: Creates mesh only on the angled face for the weld.

– Normal: Creates mesh only on the normal face for the weld.

– Normal and Angled: Creates mesh on the angled or normal faces with layers of quad
mesh on both angled and normal with the user defined HAZ distance on top and bottom
faces. When you select Normal and Angled, the Normal Surface and Angled Surfaces
fields are available.

– Parent Bodies Connection: Connects the top and bottom faces without creating quad
layers on the angled or normal face. When you select Parent Bodies Connection, the
Bottom Faces and Top Faces fields are available.

When you select the Source as Mesh, the available options are:

– Normal and Angled: Creates both angled and normal face for the weld.

– Angled: Creates only the angled face for the weld.

– Normal: Creates only the normal face for the weld.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 365
Local Mesh Controls

– 1D: Creates normal only weld using beams. Here beams are conformally connected to
the top and bottom faces. For input edge or curves, the beams created are represented
as a single body. 1D is available only when the Source is Mesh.

Note:

1D does not support Weld Element Rows.

– Mesh Independent: Creates mesh without weld faces or HAZ layers. Mesh Independent
is available only when the Source is Mesh. Nodes on the top faces are attached to the
elements on the bottom face which act as contact points. To view the element faces at-
tached to the nodes, click Show Mesh in the Display tab after generating mesh. Mesh
Independent supports Solid-Solid weld creation.

• Weld Element Rows: Allows you to split elements from weld faces. You can provide the number
of splits required. The default value is 1. The value ranges from 1 to 2.

• Create Using: Allows you to create weld using Curves, Curves and Bodies, Curves and Faces,
Edges, Edges and Bodies or Edges and Faces. Available only when the Source is Mesh.

– Curves: Allows you to pick a beam body and use it as weld curve. Software automatically
determines the faces in proximity of the defined weld curve to be welded. When you select
Curves, the Weld Curve option is available.

– Curves and Bodies: Allows you to define bodies to be welded together in addition to
the weld curve. When you select Curves and Bodies, the Bottom Bodies, Top Bodies,
Weld Curve options are available.

– Curves and Faces: Allows you to define faces to be welded together in addition to the
weld curve. This option gives you better control on defining the scope for weld creation
during mesh generation. When you select Curves and Faces, the Bottom Faces, Top
Faces, Weld Curve options are available.

– Edges: Allows you to scope geometry edges to create welds. The edges scoped to a weld
control or in a row of worksheet must be continuous. When you select Edges, the Edges
option is available.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
366 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Weld

– Edges and Bodies: Allows you to define bodies to be welded together in addition to the
geometry edges. When you select Edges and Bodies, the Bottom Bodies, Top Bodies,
Edges options are available.

– Edges and Faces: Allows you to define faces to be welded together in addition to the
geometry edges. This option gives you better control on defining the scope for weld
creation during mesh generation. When you select Edges and Faces, the Bottom Faces,
Top Faces, Edges options are available.

Note:

If the Curves or Edges option is providing incorrect result for weld creation, then
using Curves and Faces or Edges and Faces is recommended.

• Angled Direction: Allows you to specify the direction of the angle creation. The available options
are Normal, Reversed and Both.

– Normal: Allows you to create an angled face in the same direction of the face normal
direct for edges-based inputs and along the weld curve for curve-based input.

– Reversed: Allows you to create an angled face in the opposite direction of the face normal
direct for edge-based input and opposite to the weld curve for curve-based input.

– Both: Allows you to create an angled face along both the same direction and opposite
direction of the face normal direct for edge-based inputs and both the same and opposite
sides of the weld curve for curve-based input.

• Use Worksheet: Allows you to use worksheet for weld controls. Worksheet enables you to
combine multiple weld controls in a single weld control. The default value is No. For more details,
see Weld Worksheet (p. 376).

• Curve Scoping: Available only when the Source is Mesh and Creating Using is set to either
Curves, Curves and Bodies or Curves and Faces. The available options are Geometry Selection
and Body Selection. The default value is Geometry Selection. Body Selection allows you to
select the weld curve from the list of beam bodies.

Note:

When you use beam bodies as weld curve, Treatment is automatically set to
Construction Body. Treatment does not reset automatically, when the beam
body is removed from the Weld Curve scope.

Definition

• Suppressed: Suppress the weld control. The default value is No. When the value is set to Yes, the
Active options appears with a read-only setting No,Suppressed.

• Adjust Weld Height: Allows you to adjust the weld height. The default value is No. When the Adjust
Weld Height is set to Yes, the Weld Height (Leg02) Assignment is available.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 367
Local Mesh Controls

– Weld Height (Leg02) Assignment: Allows you to select the weld height assignment. The
available options for Weld Height (Leg02) Assignment are User Defined and Expression.

→ User Defined: Allows you to define the weld height. When you select User Defined,
the Weld Height (Leg02) is available. Weld Height (Leg02) allows you to define the
height of the weld created during mesh generation. The default value is calculated
based on the average of the sheet thicknesses of the bodies connected by the weld.
If the sheet thicknesses of the bodies are not available, no height adjustment is per-
formed during mesh generation.

→ Expression: Allows you to calculate the weld height based on the expression. When
you select Expression, the Weld Height (Leg02) Expression allows you to calculate
the weld height based on the average thickness of the up and down faces. The Weld
Height (Leg02) Expression should be based on t1 and t2, where t1 is the average
thickness of all up faces and t2 is the average thickness of all down faces. Weld Height
(Leg02) Expression allows only variables t1 and t2 as input and does not allow other
variables.

Note:

Variables t1 and t2 must be in lower case. Expression supports min, max and
scientific numbering. Expression does not support any special characters
other than the following mathematical operators like '+', '-', '/', '*', '^', '(', ')'.
For Expression, you must specify constants in geometric unit and not in
Workbench display units.

• Weld Length: Allows you to define the length of each weld in the intermittent seam. The Weld
Length is available only when the selected Type is Intermittent Seam. There is no default value for
weld length. Thus, you must define the weld length manually.

• Weld Pitch: Allows you to define the pitch of the weld. Weld Pitch is the distance from mid-point
of one weld to the mid-point of adjacent weld in an intermittent seam weld. Weld Pitch is therefore
the sum of the weld length and the gap between each of the welds. There is no default value for
Weld Pitch. Therefore, you must define the Weld Pitch manually. Weld Pitch must be greater than
Weld Length.

• Number of Welds: Allows you to define the number of intermittent seam welds on the Weld Curve
or Edge. You can also specify the number of intermittent seam welds. The intermittent seam welds
are created based on the specified Weld Length and Weld Pitch. Once the defined Number of Welds
is achieved, no further welds are created on the scoped Weld Curve or Edges.

Note:

Weld Pitch and Number of Welds are optional. You can either provide Weld Pitch or
Number of Welds value while performing weld operation.

• Offset 1: Allows you to specify the distance between the start vertex and the first intermittent seam
weld. The default value is 0.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
368 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Weld

• Offset 2: Allows you to specify the distance between the last intermittent seam weld and the end
vertex in the scoped Weld Curve or Edges. The default value is 0.

• Creation Criteria: Allows you to define the criteria for the weld creation. The field is only available
when the Source is Mesh. The default value is Width Based. The available options are:

– Angle Based: Allows you to control the angle between the angled face and bottom face.
When you select Angle Based for creating weld, the Weld Angle appears. The default value
is 45 degrees. You can select any value from 30 to 60 degrees for Weld Angle.

Note:

Normal face is always created perpendicular to the bottom face.

– Width Based: Allows you to create welds of constant width along the weld line. When you
select Width Based for creating weld, the available option is Weld Width (Leg01) Assignment.
Weld Width (Leg01) Assignment allows you to select the type of weld width assignment.
The available options are User Defined and Expression. The default value is User Defined.

→ User Defined: Allows you to provide the weld width. When you select User Defined,
the Weld Width (Leg01) is set to Default. The Default value for Weld Width (Leg01)
is equal to Weld Height (Leg02). If the Weld Height (Leg02) is not available, the De-
fault is calculated as the default Angle Based.

→ Expression: Allows you to calculate the weld width based on the Weld Width (Leg01)
Expression. When you select Expression, the Weld Width (Leg01) Expression calculates
the weld width based on the expression. The expression should be based on t1 and
t2, where t1 is the average thickness of all up faces and t2 is the average thickness of
all down faces. Expression allows only variables t1 and t2 as input and does not allow
other variables.

Note:

Variables t1 and t2 must be in lower case. Expression supports min, max and
scientific numbering. Expression does not support any special characters
other than the following mathematical operators like '+', '-', '/', '*', '^', '(', ')'.
For Expression, you must specify constants in geometric unit and not in
Workbench display units.

• Edge Mesh Size Assignment: Allows you to select the edge mesh size assignment. The available
options are User Defined and Expression. The default is User Defined.

– User Defined: Allows you to define the mesh size used to discretize the edges defined as
weld lines. The default value for Edge Mesh Size is same as the global Element Size.

– Expression: Allows you to calculate the edge mesh size based on the Edge Mesh Size Expres-
sion. Edge Mesh Size Expression calculates the edge mesh size based on the average thickness

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 369
Local Mesh Controls

of the up and down faces. The expression must have only t1 and t2 as variables, where t1 is
the average thickness of all up faces and t2 is the average thickness of all down faces.

Note:

Variables t1 and t2 must be in lower case. Expression supports min, max and
scientific numbering. Expression does not support any special characters other
than the following mathematical operators '+', '-', '/', '*', '^''(', ')'. For Expression,
you must specify constants in geometric unit and not in Workbench display
units.

Note:

The Edge Mesh Size should be reduced for welds involving high curvature.

• Create HAZ Layer: Allows you to create the HAZ layer for the weld control when set to Yes. The
default value is Yes. When Create HAZ Layer is set to Yes, the following options are available:

– HAZ Distance Option: Allows you to define the HAZ Distance. The default value is the Global
Element Size.The available options are Distance Per HAZ and Total Distance.

→ Distance Per HAZ: Allows you to specify the height for each quad layer.

→ Total Distance: Allows you to provide the total distance for which the HAZ layers are
created. Here, Total Distance by Number of HAZ along with HAZ Growth Rate de-
termines the height of each quad layer.

– HAZ Distance Assignment: Allows you to select the type of HAZ distance assignment. When
you set Create HAZ Layer to Yes , the HAZ Distance Assignment is available with User
Defined option as default. The available options are User Defined and Expression.

→ User Defined: Allows you to provide the HAZ Distance. The HAZ Distance allows you to
define the height for each quad layer. The default value is the Global Element Size. When
you select User Defined, the HAZ Distance Top Plate allows you to specify the height of
each quad layer for the top plate based on the selected HAZ Distance Option. HAZ Distance
Bottom Plate allows you to specify the height of each quad layer for the bottom plate
based on the selected HAZ Distance Option.HAZ Distance Top Plate and HAZ Distance
Bottom Plate can be parameterized.

→ Expression: Allows you to calculate the HAZ distance based on the expression. The HAZ
Distance Expression Top Plate allows you to calculate HAZ distance for top plate based
on the expression. The HAZ Distance Expression Bottom Plate allows you to calculate
HAZ distance for bottom plate based on the expression. The HAZ Distance Expression Top
Plate and HAZ Distance Expression Bottom Plate should be based on t1 and t2, where
t1 is the average thickness of all up faces and t2 is the average thickness of all down faces.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
370 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Weld

HAZ Distance Expression Top Plate and HAZ Distance Expression Bottom Plate allow
only variables t1 and t2 as input and do not allow other variables.

Note:

Variables t1 and t2 must be in lower case. Expression supports min, max and
scientific numbering. Expression does not support any special characters other
than the following mathematical operators like '+', '-', '/', '*', '^', '(', ')'. For Expres-
sion, you must specify constants in geometric unit and not in Workbench display
units.

– Number Of HAZ: Allows you to define the number of quad layers generated from the weld
lines. The default value for Number Of HAZ is 1 and the maximum number of layers that can
be generated is 3. When Number Of HAZ is greater than one, Layer Transition Type allows
you to specify the type of mesh elements to be created during the layer transition.

– HAZ Growth Rate: Allows you to define the rate at which the HAZ layer grows. The default
value is 1.2

• Generate End-Caps: Allows you to generate triangular end-caps at the free ends of the welds. The
default value is Yes.

Note:

– End-caps are not created when Modeled As is set to Normal.

– End-caps are created when Modeled As is set to Angled. End-caps are usually
created in plane of an angled face. However, if there is no enough space to create
in-plane end-caps, then they can be created out of angled face plane.

• Generate Named Selection: Creates FE named selection. The default value is No. The available options
are:

– Weld: Creates FE named selection on the weld body for the respective mesh control. This
named selection is added under Named Selection tree-node with the name same as that of
the weld control. The default value is No.

– HAZ Layer 1: Creates named selection on mesh elements for the first offset layer.

– HAZ Layer 2: Creates named selection on mesh elements for the second offset layer.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 371
Local Mesh Controls

– HAZ Layer 3: Creates named selection on mesh elements for the third offset layer.

Note:

The HAZ Layer option created depends on the Number Of HAZ. That is, if the
Number of HAZ is set to 1, only HAZ Layer 1 option is created. The HAZ Layer 2
and HAZ Layer 3 options are not created when the Number of HAZ is 1.

Note:

You can parameterize Edge Mesh Size, Weld Height (Leg02), Weld Pitch, Weld Width
(Leg01),Number of Welds, Offset 1, Offset 2, HAZ Distance, Layer Height, Weld Angle,
Weld Length only when Use Worksheet is set to No. For more information, see Working
with Meshing Application Parameters (p. 87).

Mechanical Properties

• Material: Allows you to define the material for the weld bodies created during meshing. You
can only select the defined materials for weld bodies from the drop-down menu. The default
option is None.

• Cross Section: Allows you to assign cross section to weld bodies Modeled As 1D. This option
is available only when Modeled As is set to 1D.

• Thickness Assignment: Allows you to select different options to define the thickness of weld
bodies created during meshing. The available options are:

– Program Controlled: Allows the application to control the thickness of the weld bodies
during meshing. The default value is Program Controlled. Here thickness is calculated as
follows:

Weld Thickness = (Average thickness of top and bottom weld bodies) / √2

– Min Parent Thickness Factor: Allows you to specify the minimum thickness factor for
weld bodies during meshing. Here thickness is calculated as follows:

Weld Thickness= Min Parent Thickness Factor * min (Average thickness of all top and
bottom faces for the created weld)

– Max Parent Thickness Factor: Allows you to define the maximum thickness factor for
weld bodies during meshing. Here thickness is calculated as follows:

Weld Thickness= Max Parent Thickness Factor * max (Average thickness of all top and
bottom faces for the created weld).

– Both: Allows you to specify the minimum and maximum thickness factor for weld bodies
during meshing. Here thickness is calculated as follows:

Weld Thickness= Min Parent Thickness Factor * min(Average thickness of all top and
bottom faces for the created weld) + Max Parent Thickness Factor * max(Average thickness
of all top and bottom faces for the created weld).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
372 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Weld

– User Defined: Allows you to define the Thickness value for weld bodies during meshing.

– Expression: Allows you to calculate thickness of weld based on the expression. The weld
thickness is calculated as the average thickness of all up and down faces. The expression
should be based on t1 and t2, where t1 is the average thickness of all up faces and t2 is
the average thickness of all down faces. Expression allows only variables t1 and t2 as
input and does not allow other variables.

Note:

Variables t1 and t2 must be in lower case. Expression supports min, max and
scientific numbering. Expression does not support any special characters other
than the following mathematical operators like '+', '-', '/', '*', '^', '(', ')'. For Expres-
sion, you must specify constants in geometric unit and not in Workbench display
units.

Note:

The Mechanical Properties options are not available when the Source is Geometry.

Advanced

• Relaxation: Relaxes the HAZ layered failure. The available options are Conservative and None.
The default value is Conservative.

– Conservative : Provides warning for HAZ layered failures.

– None: Provides error for HAZ layered failure.

– Aggressive: Provides warning for weld face creation failures and HAZ layered failures.
Aggressive option allows you treat failing welds as Mesh Independent irrespective of
the setting or Type to handle weld face failures.

• Sharp Angle: Allows you to automatically merge the bottom faces if the weld faces intersect
them at an angle less than the specified value. The default value is 90 degrees. The Sharp Angle
allows you to provide any value from 0 to 90 degrees.

• Connection Tolerance: Allows you to connect the weld bodies created during mesh generation
to the parent metal bodies. Available only when the Source is Mesh. When two parts to be
welded together are close to each other, the Connection Tolerance should be less than the
gap between the parts to be weld.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 373
Local Mesh Controls

• Smoothing: Available only when the Source is Mesh. The default value is Yes. Smoothing
should be set to No for highly curved surfaces to achieve better results.

• Butt Weld: Mark the weld elements and join them along their edges on the same plane when
Butt Weld is Yes. Butt Weld is available only for Mesh Independent Weld.

• Lap Weld Angle Tolerance: Allows you to adjust angled face direction by specifying appropriate
angle. Lap Weld Angle Tolerance is available only when the Source is Mesh and Modeled As
is either Angled or Normal and Angled. The default value is 5 degree. The acceptable range of
Lap Weld Angle Tolerance is 0 to 90 degrees.

• Pinball Radius: Allows you to calculate contact formulation while solving. Pinball Radius is
available only when Modeled As is Mesh Independent. The default value is Element Size.

• Layer Transition Type: Allows you to provide the mesh element type to be created during layer
transition. Layer Transition Type is available only when the Number Of HAZ is greater than
one. The default value is Quad. The available options are:

– Quad: Allows you to create the quadrilateral mesh.

– Quad/Tri: Allows you to create the mesh with both quadrilateral and triangular elements.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
374 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Weld

– Quad/Minimal Tri: Allows you to create the mesh with more quadrilateral and less trian-
gular elements.

Note:

Quad/Minimal Tri pattern is used only in limited scenarios where good quality
elements can be created.

Note:

Cross hair is implemented for Edge Mesh Size, HAZ Distance and Connection Tolerance,
the diameter of the cross hair is equal to the value of the corresponding parameter.

Weld Graphics Enhancements

Preview Weld Geometry: Allows you to preview the weld faces before meshing. It also allows you to
view the errors and warnings for weld before meshing. You can access the Preview Weld Geometry
from the Mesh object andWeld controls.

Preview Weld Mesh: Allows you to generate the weld mesh on the selected controls for preview. You
can access Preview Weld Mesh from Mesh object and Weld control. Preview Weld Mesh creates mesh
only for the weld faces and its corresponding up and down faces. You can also right-click any column
in the Worksheet to access Preview Weld Mesh.

Color Coding

Weld helps you to visualize the status of the weld created based on the color of the weld control. The
blue color weld control denotes successful weld creation. The yellow color denotes the warning and
partial error in the weld creation. The red color denotes the failure in weld creation. The same color
coding applies to the weld worksheet. When you select a weld control in a row in the worksheet, the
selected weld control is highlighted in green color in the Geometry window and vice versa. The light
blue color denotes the weld curve or weld in an unknown mesh state.

Show Mesh

Show Mesh displays the Weld and HAZ layer elements as solid and other elements as translucent. To
access Show Mesh, in the Display tab click Show > Show Mesh.

Zoom to Weld

Zoom to Weld allows you to zoom to fit the scoped references of weld component. To access the
Zoom to Weld, right-click the Geometry window and click Zoom to Weld. Zoom to Weld is automat-
ically applied to the selected items in worksheet.

Seam Weld Review

Seam Weld Review allows you to hide the parts that are not scoped to weld. To access Seam Weld
Review, in the Display tab click Show > Seam Weld Review.

Imported Data Highlight

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 375
Local Mesh Controls

Imported Data Highlight enables you to pick and highlight the weld components both in the geometry
window and in the worksheet. You can access Imported Data Highlight from the Graphics toolbar.

Note:

Weld supports Scripting. Scripting allows you to diagnose the weld errors and you can
edit the Weld APIs to correct the same. For more detailed information on Weld Scripting,
refer Accessing and Manipulating the Mesh Object and for more information on Weld
Worksheet Scripting, refer Working with Weld Worksheet.

Weld Worksheet
Worksheet allows you to scope the weld controls. When Use Worksheet is set to Yes, Scope with
Worksheet appears in the Details view which is a read-only field. The Worksheet opens and allows
you to create weld controls. Worksheet provides different options based on the selected Source and
Type. The options available in Worksheet are read only in the Details view. You can define these options
in the Worksheet.

Note:

Worksheet allows you to create weld controls for curved bodies using Body Selection.

Worksheet has the following features:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
376 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Weld

• Import: Allows you to import the worksheet parameters as .CSV file format. You can also edit
the CSV file if required. The .CSV file import format should be as given below:

Rows 1 and 2 are used to populate the weld control Details view. The values in Row 1 and 2
should not be modified (Row 1 and Row 2 are for internal use only. Row 2 and Row 3 are not
related. You must be using Row 3 onwards for working with worksheet). The values in Row 1
represents the following:

In Row 2, the numbers indicate the columns in worksheet. The details are as follows:

– 0 - Active

– 1 - StepNumber

– 2 - Bottom Face/Body/ Normal surface

– 3 - Top Face/Body/Angled surface

– 4 - Weld Curve

– 5 - Edge

– 6 - Edge Mesh Size

– 7 - Weld Height (Leg02)

– 8 - Weld Angle

– 9 - Weld Length

– 10 - Weld Pitch

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 377
Local Mesh Controls

– 11 - Number of Welds

– 12 - Offset1

– 13 - Offset2

– 14 - HAZ Distance

– 15 - Number of HAZ Layers

– 16 - Generate End-caps

– 17 - Sharp Angle

– 18 - Connection Tolerance

– 19 - Lap Weld Angle Tolerance

– 20 - Thickness Value

– 21 - Min Thickness Factor

– 22 - Max Thickness Factor

– 23 - Smoothing

– 24 - HAZ Growth Rate

– 25 - Cross Section Id

– 26 - Intersection Tag

– 27 - Thickness Expression

– 28 - Weld Width (Leg01) Expression

Note:

– Named selections for edges should be unique.

– Named selection generated are always prefixed with weld_ in the name.

– For each row, the edges scoped to the named selection must be continuous.

– If welds are defined using Curves, then the names of weld curves must be
unique.

– Material is not available in Worksheet.

• Export: Allows you to export the worksheet parameters as .CSV file format.

• : Allows you to sort all the selected weld curves in the worksheet or the Geometry window
in ascending order and displays it on the first page of the worksheet.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
378 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Weld

• : Allows you to sort rows based on its status.

• Enter name field: Allows you search weld curves using the text entered in the textbox. When
you enter the text in the Enter name field and click Create Controls for All Curve Bodies,
worksheet displays all weld curves with the entered text.

• Create Controls for All Curve Bodies: Allows you to create all weld curves. Also, records the
operation and allows you to playback the same for reference.

• Previous: Allows you to move to the previous page of the worksheet from the current page.

• Next: Allows you to move to the next page of the worksheet from the current page.

• Showing entries per page: Displays the number of allowed entries per page. This is an auto-
populated entry.

Note:

You can click the header of the worksheet columns to sort the items of the respective
column.

Error Handling using Worksheet

Worksheet enables you to handle errors and failures efficiently. The Worksheet rows highlighted in
yellow indicates warning messages. The red highlighted rows indicate error messages. The grey high-
lighted rows indicate the invalid weld or suppressed geometry. The allows you to send the weld
for meshing. White is for active and valid weld with valid geometry. Only active rows can be provided
as input for meshing. When your input to worksheet has a suppressed body, the weld worksheet row
is highlighted in grey but will be active.

When you set the Use Worksheet to Yes and right-click the Weld object in the tree view, the following
options are available:

• Deactivate Problematic Worksheet Entries: Allows you to deactivate the row which is causing
error while meshing.

Right-click the Worksheet, the following options are available:

• Add: Allows you to add a row to the worksheet.

• Delete: Allows you to remove a row in the worksheet.

• Activate all Selections: Allows you to activate the multiple rows selected.

• Deactivate all Selections: Allows you to deactivate the multiple rows selected.

• Go To Selected Items in Tree: Allows you to go to the selected worksheet item in the tree.

• Promote to Weld Control: Allows you to create new weld control for the selected worksheet
row. These rows are added to a new worksheet created for the new weld control.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 379
Local Mesh Controls

• Paste From Clipboard: Allows you to copy the text from clipboard to worksheet.

• Preview Weld Mesh: Allows you to generate the weld mesh on the selected controls for preview
from the worksheet.

• Preview Weld Geometry: Allows you to preview the weld faces before meshing from the
worksheet. It also allows you to view the errors and warnings for weld before meshing.

Note:

Weld Worksheet allows you to select the faces, edges and bodies only through
named selections and you cannot add faces, edges and bodies to the weld
worksheet selection from the Geometry window.

Weld Limitations
The Weld control has the following limitations:

• Weld control does not support Connect and Mesh Selected Entities option.

• Combined length of all angled faces and combined length of all normal faces should be same.

• Weld control overrides all other sizing and local control settings.

• The selection option for Weld Curve does not support multiple bodies.

• CAD edges scoped in a weld control or in one row of weld control worksheet must be continuous.

• Weld control does not support intersecting welds for all sources.

• Weld Control does not support triangular mesh, when you select Mesh Type as Triangles.

• Weld Worksheet allows you to import only files with plain CSV format.

• The Weld control does not support writing Weld Definition File for multiple edges or closed
loop selections.

• Solid Shell welds could fail for solver if Solid-Shell Weld – Shared Nodes is Yes under Meshing
in Files > Options > Meshing.

Quad Layer
Quad Layer control allows you to create layer of quadrilateral elements around holes and edges. Quad
Layer control enables you to scope the edge loops or edge based named selections. You must use
Automatic (PrimeMesh) method to scope the parent bodies of edges used in Quad Layer control.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
380 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quad Layer

You can right-click Mesh and click Preview > Quad Layer to preview the quad layer before mesh
generation. Also, you can right-click Quad Layer, and click Preview > Quad Layer.

Note:

When you use Preview > Quad Layer, you cannot preview the applied edge sizing.

To access the Quad Layer control,

Right-click Mesh object and click Insert > Quad Layer.

or

Click Mesh on the Tree Outline and click Quad Layer in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

When you click Quad Layer, the Details view displays the Quad Layer options:

Type

• Quad Layer Type: Allows you to select the type of quad layer control. The available option is
Washer and Edge Loop.

– Washer: Enables you to create quad layers around the circular edges.

– Edge Loop: Enables you to create quad layers on circular and non-circular edges.

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to select the scoping method for washer control. The default
method is Geometry.

– Geometry: Allows you to scope the edges.

– Named selection: Allows you to scope the edge based named selection.

• Method: Allows you to define the method when the Quad Layer Type is Washer. The available
options are Basic and Advanced.

– Basic: Compute the edge meshes on the washer and provides better transition. Basic
method automatically decides the growth rate and width of the washer. When you select
Basic, the available options are Minimum Number of Divisions and Number of Washer

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 381
Local Mesh Controls

Layers. Basic method requires you to provide minimal inputs. The number of divisions
around the hole as well as washer layer heights is computed to give the best mesh based
on the element size and the hole size.

Note:

When more than one washer layer is specified in the Basic method, in
some cases the width of the washer does not increase with the number
of layers. This happens to accommodate the minimum number divisions
specified and to get a smooth transition of the elements from washer
layer to the adjacent mesh.

– Advanced: Allows you to create the washer layers as per your preference. When you select
Advanced, the available options are Number of Divisions, Number of Washer Layers
and Type.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the washer control. The default value is No. When Sup-
pressed is set to Yes, the Active field displays the status of the washer control. The Active field
is read-only.

• Control Messages: Provides an error message when you try to apply control on washer edges
which already have an applied control. The default value is No. When you try to apply a control
on the Washer edge having an applied control, the Control Message is set to Yes and the cor-
responding error message is provided.

• Minimum Number of Divisions: Displays the minimum number of divisions required for the
washer layer. It determines the minimum number of nodes on the washer layer. The default
value is 6. The Minimum Number of Divisions option is only available when the Method is
Basic. It is a lower bound on the Number of Divisions, so that you can avoid the automatic
setting of a smaller number of divisions than an acceptable value.

• Number of Divisions: Allows you to divide the washer edge into the specified the number of
divisions. The application recommends, you use an even number of divisions (6, 8, 12, ...) to get
the best mesh flow in your quad mesh.

• Number of Washer Layers: Allows you to specify the required number of quad layers to be
created. The default value is 1 and the maximum allowed number of layers is 3.

• Type: Allows you to define the type of washer layer height. The available options are Washer
Diameter and Washer Layer Height.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
382 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Quad Layer

– Washer Diameter: Allows you to specify the washer layer height as a factor of diameter
for holes. When the Type is set to Washer Diameter, the Scale of Diameter is available.
The Scale of Diameter allows you to define the washer height as factor of diameter. The
default value is 1.5

Note:

When you provide a Scale of Diameter value less than or equal to one,
Washer takes the default value.

– Washer Layer Height: Allows you to specify the height of the washer layers. The default
value is same as the Element Size. Available only when the Type is Washer Layer Height.

• Growth Rate: Allows you to specify the width ratio between the adjacent washer layers. This
option is available only when the Number of Washer Layers is greater than 1. The default value
is 1.0

• Element Size: Allows you to provide the element size of the created quad mesh. Element Size
is available only when the Quad Layer Type is Edge Loop.

• Number of Quad Layers: Allows you to provide the number of quad layers to be generated.
Number of Quad Layers is available only when the Quad Layer Type is Edge Loop. The default
value is 1. The maximum allowed number of quad layers is 4.

• Layer Height: Allows you to specify the height for each quad layer. Layer Height is available
only when the Quad Layer Type is Edge Loop.

• Quad Layer Direction: Allows you to select how to specify the quad layer direction. The available
options are:

– Program Controlled: Creates quad layers on all connected faces around the input edges.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 383
Local Mesh Controls

– Scope Faces: Allows you to create quad layers on the scoped faces. When you select
Scope Faces, Faces Scoping Method allows you to scope the face using Geometry Se-
lection or Named Selection. When you select Geometry Selection, Face Selection allows
you to select the faces from the Geometry window for scoping. When you select Named
Selection, Face Named Selection allows you to select the faces from the available named
selections for scoping.

Advanced

– Relaxation: Relaxes the quad layer failures. The available options are None and Conservative.
When you select None, generated mesh fails on quad layer failure. When you select Conser-
vative, generates successful mesh even when quad layer fails.

– Auto-Defeature: Allows you to partially suppress edges or edges around the holes to obtain
good quality quad layers. The default value is No. When Auto-Defeature is Yes, allows you
to specify the Proximity Tolerance.

– Proximity Tolerance: Specifies the absolute distance to defeature around the edges to gen-
erate successful quad layer. The default value for proximity tolerance is calculated as:

Proximity Tolerance = Total Layer Height + (0.8*Element Size)

– Layer Transition Type: Allows you to specify the mesh element type created during layer
transition. Layer Transition Type is available only when the Number Of Washer Layers or
Number of Quad Layers is greater than one. The default value is Quad. The available options
are:

→ Quad: Allows you to create the quadrilateral mesh.

→ Quad/Tri: Allows you to create the mesh with both quadrilateral and triangular elements.

→ Quad/Minimal Tri: Allows you to create the mesh with more quadrilateral and less triangular
elements.

Note:

Quad/Minimal Tri Layer Transition Type are used only in limited scenarios
where good quality elements can be created.

Limitations

Quad Layer has the following limitations:

• Quad Layer control supports only quadrilateral mesh.

• When the edge sizes on the hole boundary are smaller than the allowed minimum size, you
should use a smaller value for the Minimum Number of Divisions to get a good quality mesh
for the washer layers.

• Washer control can be applied only on circular holes. Washer control automatically filters out
non-circular holes while meshing. Hence, you should use Washer control on circular holes only.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
384 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Deviation

• Quad/Minimal Tri Layer Transition Type are used only in limited scenarios where good quality
elements can be created.

Deviation
Deviation control enables you to set the mesh resolution in the primary curvature direction for fillets
on shell (surface) bodies. Mesh resolution along the fillet is taken from global or local mesh size controls.
Deviation control enables you to scope faces or face based named selections.

All Deviation bodies should be scoped under Automatic (PrimeMesh) method. If not, scope the bodies
under Automatic (PrimeMesh) to perform Deviation operation.

To access the Deviation control,

Right-click Mesh object and click Insert > Deviation.

or

Click Mesh on the Tree Outline and click Deviation in the Mesh Context tab on the Ribbon.

When you click Deviation, the Details view displays the deviation options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to select the scoping method for Deviation control. The default
method is Geometry.

– Geometry: Allows you to scope the faces.

– Named Selection: Allows you to scope the face based named selection.

Definition

• Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the Deviation control. The default value is No. When
Suppressed is set to Yes, the Active field displays the status of the Deviation control. The
Active field is read-only.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 385
Local Mesh Controls

• Type: Allows you to define the type of deviation control specifications. The available options
are Deviation Tolerance, Mesh Size, Number of Divisions.

– Deviation Tolerance: Allows you to specify the maximum distance between the mesh and
the curvature of the fillet. You can provide smaller Deviation Tolerance to get a better
curvature resolution.

– Mesh Size: Allows you to specify the mesh size on the shorter sides of the fillets. The default
value for Mesh Size is 75% of the chosen Element Size.

– Number of Divisions: Allows you to specify the number of divisions on the curved sides of
the faces.

Limitations

• In the Mesh Details view, when the Capture Curvature is set to Yes, the Deviation control is
not considered while meshing.

• Deviation control supports only quadrilateral mesh.

• Deviation control does not work on fillets having sharp angle edges.

• Deviation control only meshes continuous body. It does not mesh any exclusion or inclusion in
the model.

• When Deviation control cannot be applied, the default quadrilateral dominant mesh is generated.

• When there is an extra topological node on one side of the shorter edge of the fillet, the node
gets projected to the other shorter edge of the fillet to get all quadrilateral mesh for Deviation
control.

• The Deviation control generates quadrilateral mesh on triangular and polygonal shaped fillets.

Geometry Fidelity
Geometry Fidelity ensures the nodes of the mesh lie on the scoped geometry including midside nodes
for quadratic elements. Geometry Fidelity adds constraint on the mesh which cause deterioration in
quality in some situations due to the forced projection. In such cases, you should refine the mesh at
the same locations with local size control.

The following image shows the face without Geometry Fidelity

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
386 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Geometry Fidelity

The following image shows the face with Geometry Fidelity

To access Geometry Fidelity,

On the Tree Outline, right-click the Mesh and click Insert > Geometry Fidelity.

Or

Right-click on the Geometry window and click Insert > Geometry Fidelity.

Geometry Fidelity Details view has the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope geometry faces or named selection. The default value is
Geometry Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allow you to scope the faces. When you select Geometry Selection, the
Geometry allows you to select the faces from the Geometry window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 387
Local Mesh Controls

– Named Selection: Allow you to scope faces grouped under a named selection.

Definition

Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the Geometry Fidelity control, when set to Yes. The default value
is No.

Limitations
• Geometry Fidelity supports only for Patch Conforming Algorithm for Tetrahedrons Method
Control (p. 208).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
388 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Meshing: Options
You can control the behavior of functions in the Meshing application through the Options dialog box.
For more information, refer to:
Accessing the Options Dialog Box
Meshing Options on the Options Dialog Box
Licensing Option
Mesh Quality Option

Accessing the Options Dialog Box

To access the Meshing application options (p. 389):

1. From the main menu, choose Files > Options. An Options dialog box appears and the options are
displayed on the left.

2. Click a specific option on the left (either Meshing or Export).

3. Change any of the option settings by clicking directly in the option field on the right. You will first
see a visual indication for the kind of interaction required in the field (examples are drop-down
menus, secondary dialog boxes, direct text entries).

4. Click OK.

Note:

• To cancel your changes and restore the default settings, click Reset on the Options dialog
box.

• Option settings within a particular language are independent of option settings in another
language. If you change any options from their default settings, then start a new Workbench
session in a different language, the changes you made in the original language session
are not reflected in the new session. You are advised to make the same option changes
in the new language session.

Meshing Options on the Options Dialog Box

The options that appear in the right pane of the Options dialog box depend on which category is se-
lected in the left pane:

• When Meshing is selected in the left pane, these subcategories appear:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 389
Options

– Meshing

– Virtual Topology

– Sizing

– Quality

– Inflation

• When Export is selected in the left pane, these subcategories appear:

– CGNS

– Ansys Fluent

Meshing
• Highlight Topology Being Meshed if Possible: Controls the default for highlighting of topologies
during mesh processing. When Yes (default), the topology that is currently being processed by the
mesher is highlighted in the Geometry window, which may help with troubleshooting (p. 580). This
highlighting is not supported for the Patch Independent Tetra or MultiZone mesh methods, or
when assembly meshing is being used. Refer to Generating Mesh (p. 528) for details.

• Allow Selective Meshing: Allows/disallows selective meshing. Choices are Yes and No. The default
value is Yes. Refer to Selective Meshing (p. 444) for details.

• Number of CPUs for Meshing Methods: Specifies the number of processors to be used by the
meshing operation. There is no counterpart setting in the Details View. Specifying multiple processors
will enhance the performance of the MultiZone Quad/Tri, Patch Independent Tetra, and MultiZone
mesh methods. This option has no effect when other mesh methods are being used. You can specify
a value from 0 to 256 or accept the default. The default is 0, which means the number of processors
will be set automatically to the maximum number of available CPUs. The Number of CPUs option
is applicable to shared memory parallel (SMP) meshing (multiple cores; not supported for clusters).
Refer to Parallel Part Meshing (p. 472).

• Default Physics Preference: Sets the default option for the Physics Preference (p. 96) in the Details
View of a Mesh object. Choices are Mechanical, Nonlinear Mechanical, Electromagnetics, CFD,
Explicit, and Hydrodynamics.

• Default Method: Sets the default Method setting in the Details View of a Method (p. 202) control
object. This option only affects Method controls that are added manually. Choices are Automatic
(Patch Conforming/Sweeping), Patch Independent, and Patch Conforming. When the geometry
is attached, the default method of all options except Automatic will be scoped to all parts in the
assembly. The Automatic option has no effect.

Note:

Changing the Default Method changes the default mesh method for all future ana-
lyses, regardless of analysis type.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
390 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Meshing Options on the Options Dialog Box

• Default Sheet Body Method: Sets the default method for the Sheet Body Method in the Details
view of a Mesh object. The available options are Quad Dominant and Prime Mesh. You can change
this value in the Automatic Methods group under Mesh Details view.

• Use MultiZone for Sweepable Bodies: If set to On, the mesher uses the MultiZone (p. 419) method
instead of General Sweeping (p. 399) for sweepable bodies. The default setting is Off. See MultiZone
for Sweepable Bodies (p. 422) for more information.

• Solid –Shell Weld- Shared Nodes: Generates weld between shell and solid bodies but the node
connection between the weld and solid bodies are not conformal. Instead, bonded contact is created
while solving when Solid –Shell Weld- Shared Nodes is No. When Solid –Shell Weld- Shared Nodes
is Yes, creates conformal mesh without contacts between the shell and weld bodies.

• Topology Checking: Sets the default value for the Topology Checking (p. 183) control. The default
value is Yes.

• Verbose Messages from Meshing: Controls the verbosity of messages returned to you. If set to On
and you are meshing a subset of bodies, the message "These bodies are going to be meshed" appears,
and you can click the right mouse button on the message to see the bodies. The default is Off. Re-
gardless of the setting, when meshing completes and any bodies failed to mesh, the message "These
bodies failed to be meshed" appears, and you can click the right mouse button to see them.

• Number of CPUs for Parallel Part Meshing: Sets the default number of processors to be used for
parallel part meshing. You can change this value in the Advanced (p. 93) group under the Details
View. Using the default for specifying multiple processors will enhance meshing performance on
geometries with multiple parts. For parallel part meshing, the default is set to Program Controlled
or 0. This instructs the mesher to use all available CPU cores. The Default setting inherently limits 2
GB memory per CPU core. An explicit value can be specified between 0 and 256, where 0 is the default.
Refer to Parallel Part Meshing (p. 472) for more details.

• Show Only Non-Zero Mesh Element Statistics: Enables you to view the counts for all element types
even the ones that do not exist in the mesh when set to No. The default value is Yes.

• Redraw Graphics after Each Mesh Generation: Displays the graphics for every step in the Mesh
Worksheet (p. 448) after completing the mesh generation for the respective step, when set to Yes.
The default value is Yes. Redraw Graphics after Each Mesh Generation applicable only when Mesh
Worksheet is created and active.

• Skip Part Remesh in Worksheet Meshing: Skips remeshing the failed rows in the worksheet in case
of mesh failure and continues meshing the consecutive rows when Skip Part Remesh in Worksheet
Meshing is Yes. The default value is No.

Virtual Topology
Merge Edges Bounding Manually Created Faces: Sets the default value for the Merge Face Edges
setting in the Details View of a Virtual Topology object. Choices are Yes and No. The default value is
Yes.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 391
Options

Sizing
• Adaptive Resolution: Sets the resolution for mesh sizing when Use Adaptive Sizing is set to Yes.
The default setting is Program Controlled. The range of values that can be set is 0 to 7, with the
mesh resolution changing from coarse (0) to fine (7). See Resolution (p. 109) for more information.

• Mechanical Min Size Factor (Default: 0.01): Sets your preference for the scale factor that will be
used to calculate the default minimum size when the physics preference is Mechanical, Electromag-
netics, or Explicit. The value that is specified here is multiplied by the global element size to determine
the default minimum size.

• CFD Min Size Factor (Default: 0.01): Sets your preference for the scale factor that will be used to
calculate the default minimum size when the physics preference is CFD. The value that is specified
here is multiplied by the global element size to determine the default minimum size.

• Explicit Min Size Factor (Default: 0.5): Sets your preference for the scale factor that will be used to
calculate the default minimum size when the physics preference is Explicit. The value that is specified
here is multiplied by the global element size to determine the default minimum size.

• Mechanical Defeature Size Factor (Default: 0.005): Sets your preference for the scale factor that
will be used to calculate the default defeature size when the physics preference is Mechanical,
Electromagnetics, or Explicit. The value that is specified here is multiplied by the global element
size to determine the default defeature size.

• CFD Defeature Size Factor (Default: 0.005): Sets your preference for the scale factor that will be
used to calculate the default defeature size when the physics preference is CFD. The value that is
specified here is multiplied by the global element size to determine the default defeature size.

• Explicit Defeature Size Factor (Default: 0.1): Sets your preference for the scale factor that will be
used to calculate the default defeature size when the physics preference is Explicit. The value that
is specified here is multiplied by the global element size to determine the default defeature size.

• Bounding Box Factor (Default: 0.05): Helps set the default Element size as follows: (Bounding Box
Diagonal * Bounding Box Factor = Default Element size). This is only used when Use Adaptive Sizing
is set to No and only when solid or both solid and sheet bodies are present in the model. Adaptive
sizing uses its own default.

• Surface Area Factor (Default: 0.125): Helps set the default Element size as follows: sqrt(Average
Surface Area) * Surface Area Factor = Default Element Size). This is only used when Use Adaptive
Sizing is set to No and sheet bodies are present in the model. Adaptive sizing uses its own default.

• Explicit Particle Diameter Factor (Default: 0.5): Sets your preference for the scale factor that will
be used to calculate the default Particle Diameter when the physics preference is Explicit. The value
that is specified here is multiplied by the global Particle Diameter to determine the default Particle
Diameter.

• MultiZone Sweep Sizing Behavior: If set to Use Size Function, then any applied sizing controls
(curvature and proximity refinement, and/or local sizing) are evaluated in all directions of the selected
bodies. If set to Ignore Size Function, curvature and proximity refinement and/or local sizing along
the sweep path are ignored and the spacing along the sweep path is determined either by the
global sizes or local sizes that are explicitly set on edges along the sweep direction.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
392 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Meshing Options on the Options Dialog Box

You can also override the sizing by locally specifying hard edge sizes or using the Sweep Size Beha-
vior control in the MultiZone method control to locally adjust the sizing for the bodies the control
is scoped to. See MultiZone Method Control (p. 242) for more information.

• Propagate Global to Local Settings: Enables you to use the global values for Capture Curvature
and Capture Proximity as default local values when set to Yes. The default value is Yes.

Quality
• Check Mesh Quality: Sets the default quality behavior (p. 121) with respect to how the mesher responds
to error and warning limits. Choices are:

– Default - With this setting, the behavior changes as appropriate when you change the setting of
Physics Preference.

– Yes, Errors - If the meshing algorithm cannot generate a mesh that passes all error limits, an error
message is printed and meshing fails.

– Yes, Errors and Warnings - If the meshing algorithm cannot generate a mesh that passes all error
limits, an error message is printed and meshing fails. In addition, if the meshing algorithm cannot
generate a mesh that passes all warning (target) limits, a warning message is printed.

– No - Mesh quality checks are done at various stages of the meshing process (for example, after
surface meshing prior to volume meshing). The No setting turns off most quality checks, but some
minimal checking is still done. In addition, even with the No setting, the target quality metrics are
still used to improve the mesh. The No setting is intended for troubleshooting (p. 579) and should
be used with caution as it could lead to solver failures or incorrect solution results.

– Mesh Quality Worksheet: Perform mesh checks after mesh completion based on user defined
warning and error limits set in the Mesh Quality Worksheet.

• Mechanical Error Limit: Sets the default error limit (p. 127) when Physics Preference is set to
Mechanical. Choices are Standard Mechanical and Aggressive Mechanical.

• Target Element Quality (0 = Program Default): Sets the default target element quality (p. 139). When
you modify this value, the value you enter becomes the new default for the Target Element Qual-
ity (p. 130) in the Details View. You can enter 0 on the Options panel to revert to the program default.

• Target Skewness (0 = Program Default): Sets the default target skewness (p. 151). When you modify
this value, the value you enter becomes the new default for the Target Skewness (p. 131) in the Details
View. You can enter 0 on the Options panel to revert to the program default. For a tetrahedral mesh,
you should not set Target Skewness to a value < 0.8.

• Target Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes) (0 = Program Default): Sets the default target Jacobian ra-
tio (p. 142). When you modify this value, the value you enter becomes the new default Target Jacobian
Ratio (Corner Nodes) (p. 131) in the Details View. You can enter 0 on the Options panel to revert to
the program default.

• Target Aspect Ratio (Height) (0 = Program Default): Sets the default target explicit aspect ratio.
When you modify this value, the value you enter becomes the new default for the Target Aspect
Ratio (Height) in the Details View. You can enter 0 on the Options panel to revert to the program
default.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 393
Options

Inflation
Inflation-related options that can be set on the Options dialog box include:

• Maximum Height over Base (p. 177)

• Gap Factor (p. 177)

• Growth Rate Type (p. 177)

• Maximum Angle (Degrees) (p. 178)

• Fillet Ratio (p. 178)

• Use Post Smoothing (p. 179)

• Smoothing Iterations (p. 180)

CGNS
• File Format: Sets the file format to be used for CGNS Export (p. 64) operations. There is no counterpart
setting in the Details View. Choices are:

– ADF (default) - Exports the mesh in ADF (Advanced Data Format).

– HDF5 - Exports the mesh in HDF5 (Hierarchical Data Format version 5).

• CGNS Version: Sets the CGNS library version to be used for CGNS Export (p. 64) operations. There
is no counterpart setting in the Details View. Choices are 4.3 (the default), 3.3, 3.2, 3.1, 3.0, 2.5, 2.4,
2.3, 2.2, and 2.1.

• Export Unit: Defines the unit of measurement for the mesh when exported to CGNS. The default is
Use Project Unit, which means the mesh is not scaled. If you change this to another value (centimeter,
millimeter, micrometer, inch, or foot), the mesh is scaled according to the export unit you select.

Ansys Fluent
• Format of Input File (*.msh): Sets the file format to be used for Fluent Mesh Export (p. 43) operations.
There is no counterpart setting in the Details View. Choices are Binary (the default) and ASCII.

• Auto Zone Type Assignment: When set to On (the default), zone types are automatically assigned,
as described in Fluent Mesh Export (p. 43). When set to Off, assigns all boundary zones as the default
WALL, enabling you to assign your own zone type assignments for Fluent Mesh Export (p. 43) oper-
ations.

Licensing Option
In the Mesh System, you can access Meshing License options from File > Licensing. The License Options
allows you to set your license preferences. The available License Options are:

• CFD PrepPost

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
394 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Quality Option

• Ansys Mechanical Enterprise

• Ansys Mechanical Premium

• Ansys Mechanicl Pro

• Ansys Mechanical Enterprise PrepPost

• Ansys LS-DYNA

From 2021 R2 release, Ansys Meshing does not support Advanced Meshing(advanced_meshing license
feature). However, you can access the Advanced Meshing in the earlier versions of Ansys Meshing
providing backward compatibility.

Meshing App sets the CFD PrepPost by default. You can also disable the license by selecting the license
to be disabled and click the Disable button. You can access the legacy features by selecting the Show
Legacy Licenses and the following license options are available:

• CFD PrepPostPro

• Ansys Professional NLT

• Ansys Structural

• Ansys Professional NLS

• Ansys Multiphysics

• Ansys ExplicitSTR

• Ansys Emag

• Ansys AUTODYN PrepPost

• Ansys Mechanical/Emag

All meshing features and options are available for the supported license features, but Fracture Meshing
is available only for Ansys Enterprise License.

Mesh Quality Option

Mesh Quality options can be accessed from File > Options > Meshing > Mesh Quality. The Mesh
Metrics are displayed and you can set them as per your preference.

• Element Quality: When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Element Quality is
available for the following physics preference Explicit, Mechanical, Nonlinear Mechanical, CFD,
Electromagnetics, Hydrodynamics. You can enable the Element Quality visibility in the Mesh
Details view for the given mesh metric by selecting On and disable visibility by selecting Off as
per your preference.

• Aspect Ratio: When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Aspect Ratio is available for
the following physics preference Mechanical, Nonlinear Mechanical, CFD, Electromagnetics,

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 395
Options

Hydrodynamics. You can enable the Aspect Ratio visibility in the Mesh Details view for the
given mesh metric by selecting On and disable visibility by selecting Off as per your preference.

• Jacobian Ratio (MAPDL): When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Jacobian Ratio
(MAPDL) is available for the physics preference Electromagnetics. You can enable the Jacobian
Ratio (MAPDL) visibility in the Mesh Details view for the given mesh metric by selecting On
and disable visibility by selecting Off as per your preference.

• Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes): When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Jacobian
Ratio (Corner Nodes) is available for the physics preference Explicit, Mechanical, Nonlinear
Mechanical, Electromagnetics. You can enable the Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes) visibility
in the Mesh Details view for the given mesh metric by selecting On and disable visibility by
selecting Off as per your preference.

• Jacobian Ratio (Gauss Point): When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Jacobian
Ratio (Gauss Point) is available for the physics preference Mechanical, Nonlinear Mechanical,
Electromagnetics. You can enable the Jacobian Ratio (Gauss Point) visibility in the Mesh Details
view for the given mesh metric by selecting On and disable visibility by selecting Off as per your
preference.

• Warping Factor: When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Warping Factor is available
for the physics preference Electromagnetics, Hydrodynamics. You can enable the Warping
Factor visibility in the Mesh Details view for the given mesh metric by selecting On and disable
visibility by selecting Off as per your preference.

• Parallel Deviation: When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Parallel Deviation is
available for the physics preference Electromagnetics. You can enable the Parallel Deviation
visibility in the Mesh Details view for the given mesh metric by selecting On and disable visib-
ility by selecting Off as per your preference.

• Maximum Corner Angle: When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Maximum Corner
Angle is available for the following physics preference Explicit, Mechanical, Nonlinear Mech-
anical and Electromagnetics. You can enable the Maximum Corner Angle visibility in the Mesh
Details view for the given mesh metric by selecting On and disable visibility by selecting Off as
per your preference.

• Skewness: When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Skewness is available for the
following physics preference Mechanical, Nonlinear Mechanical, CFD, Electromagnetics, Hy-
drodynamics. You can enable the Skewness visibility in the Mesh Details view for the given
mesh metric by selecting On and disable visibility by selecting Off as per your preference.

• Orthogonal Angle: When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Orthogonal Angle is
available for the following physics preference CFD, Electromagnetics. You can enable the Or-
thogonal Angle visibility in the Mesh Details view for the given mesh metric by selecting On
and disable visibility by selecting Off as per your preference.

• Characteristic Length (Autodyn): When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Charac-
teristic Length (Autodyn) is not available for any of the physics preference. You can enable the
Characteristic Length (Autodyn) visibility in the Mesh Details view for the given mesh metric
by selecting On and disable visibility by selecting Off as per your preference

• Minimum Tri Angle: When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Minimum Tri Angle
is available for the following physics preference Explicit, Mechanical, Nonlinear Mechanical

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
396 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Quality Option

and Hydrodynamics. You can enable Minimum Tri Angle visibility in the Mesh Details view
for the given mesh metric by selecting On and disable visibility by selecting Off as per your
preference.

• Maximum Tri Angle: When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Maximum Tri Angle
is available for the following physics preference Explicit, Mechanical, Nonlinear Mechanical
and Hydrodynamics. You can enable the Maximum Tri Angle visibility in the Mesh Details
view for the given mesh metric by selecting On and disable visibility by selecting Off as per your
preference.

• Minimum Quad Angle: When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Minimum Quad
Angle is available for the following physics preference Explicit, Mechanical, Nonlinear Mech-
anical and Hydrodynamics. You can enable the Minimum Quad Angle visibility in the Mesh
Details view for the given mesh metric by selecting On and disable by selecting Off as per your
preference.

• Maximum Quad Angle: When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Maximum Quad
Angle is available for the following physics preference Explicit, Mechanical, Nonlinear Mech-
anical and Hydrodynamics. You can enable the Maximum Quad Angle visibility in the Mesh
Details view for the given mesh metric by selecting On and disable visibility by selecting Off as
per your preference.

• Warping Angle: When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Warping Angle is available
for the following physics preference Explicit, Mechanical, Nonlinear Mechanical and Hydro-
dynamics. You can enable the Warping Angle visibility in the Mesh Details view for the given
mesh metric by selecting On and disable visibility by selecting Off as per your preference.

• Tet Collapse: When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Tet Collapse is available for
the following physics preference Explicit, Mechanical and Nonlinear Mechanical. You can
enable the Tet Collapse visibility in the Mesh Details view for the given mesh metric by selecting
On and disable visibility by selecting Off as per your preference.

• Aspect Ratio (Height): When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Aspect Ratio (Height)
is available only for physics preference Explicit. You can enable the Aspect Ratio (Height) vis-
ibility in the Mesh Details view for the given mesh metric by selecting On and disable visibility
by selecting Off as per your preference.

• Minimum Element Edge Length: When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Minimum
Element Edge Length is available for the following physics preference Explicit, Mechanical
and Nonlinear Mechanical. You can enable the Minimum Element Edge Length visibility in
the Mesh Details view for the given mesh metric by selecting On and disable visibility by selecting
Off as per your preference.

• Maximum Element Edge Length: When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Maximum
Element Edge Length is available for the following physics preference Explicit, Mechanical
and Nonlinear Mechanical. You can enable the Maximum Element Edge Length visibility in
the Mesh Details view for the given mesh metric by selecting On and disable visibility by selecting
Off as per your preference.

• Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA): When you select Based on Physics Preference, the Charac-
teristic Length (LS-DYNA) is available only for physics preference Explicit. You can enable the
Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA) visibility in the Mesh Details view for the given mesh metric
by selecting On and disable visibility by selecting Off as per your preference.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 397
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
398 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Meshing: Specialized Meshing
You can use the meshing features in Ansys Workbench to perform various types of specialized meshing.
For more information, refer to:
Mesh Sweeping
MultiZone Meshing
Selective Meshing
Inflation Controls
Mesh Refinement
Mixed Order Meshing
Contact Meshing
Winding Body Meshing
Wire Body Meshing
Pyramid Transitions
Match Meshing and Symmetry
Rigid Body Meshing
Thin Solid Meshing
CAD Instance Meshing
Meshing and Hard Entities
Baffle Meshing
Parallel Part Meshing

Mesh Sweeping
This method of meshing complements the free mesher. If a body's topology is recognized as sweepable,
the body can be meshed very efficiently with hexahedral and wedge elements using this technique.
The number of nodes and elements for a swept body is usually much smaller than ones meshed with
the free mesher. In addition, the time to create these elements is much smaller.

Workbench will automatically check to see if the body fulfills the topological requirements for sweeping.
It will then choose two faces that are topologically on the opposite sides of the body. These faces are
called the source and target faces. Workbench will mesh the source face with quadrilateral and triangular

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 399
Specialized Meshing

elements and then copy that mesh onto the target face. It then generates either hexahedral or wedge
elements connecting the two faces and following the exterior topology of the body.

Note:

• This information applies to general sweeping. For requirements and usage information
specific to thin model sweeping, see Thin Model Sweeping (p. 406).

• For descriptions of the sweep option settings, see Sweep Method Control (p. 235).

Requirements for General Sweeping

A body cannot be swept if any of these conditions exist:

• There is a completely contained internal void in the body.

• If more than one source or target face exists on a body. (You must slice the body so that the sub-
bodies produced may have one-to-one mapping of source and target bodies or use the MultiZone
Method or Thin Sweep that support many-to-one configuration of source and target bodies.)

• A source and target pair cannot be found. That is, the sweeper cannot find at least one path from a
source surface to a target surface connected by edges or closed surfaces.

• If a Sizing control (p. 296) is used on a body with hard edge sizing and the source and target faces
contain hard divisions which are not the same for each respective edge.

When sweeping it is only necessary to apply hard divisions to one leg of the sweep path. If the path
has multiple edges, you should apply your controls to that path.

If the sweep path is shared by another body and that path lies on the body's source or target face then
more hard divisions may be needed to constrain the sweeper.

When using Virtual Topology with sweeping, avoid creating virtual cells that result in a fully closed
surface. Fully closed surfaces cause difficulties for the swept mesher and may result in poor meshes.
When selecting adjacent faces for inclusion in a virtual cell, it is best to use Virtual Topology to merge
some (but not all) of the faces. A good approach is to use Virtual Topology for the smaller faces, but
omit any larger faces from the virtual cell.

To preview any bodies that can be swept meshed, click Mesh on the Tree Outline and right-click the
mouse. Select Show > Sweepable Bodies from the context menu to display bodies that fulfill the re-
quirements of a sweepable body. However, even if these requirements are met, the shape of the body
may at times still result in poorly shaped elements. In these cases, the tetrahedron mesher is used to
mesh the body.

The Show Sweepable Bodies feature only displays bodies that can be swept in terms of topology
where the source and target are not adjacent on an axis. It cannot automatically determine axis-
sweepable bodies. However, these bodies can be meshed if a Sweep mesh method is applied and source
and target faces are defined. A sweepable body may not be Sweep meshed if the body geometry is
not suitable.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
400 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Sweeping

Show Mappable Faces is a good tool to diagnose side faces. All side faces should be mappable, but
if they are not found to be mappable, it indicates there may be a problem with the topology. For help
in diagnosing problems when using the Sweep method, refer to the description of the Edge group in
the Mechanical help. This toolbar provides access to features that are intended to improve your ability
to distinguish edge and mesh connectivity.

Other Characteristics of General Sweeping

Other characteristics of sweeping include the following:

• The general sweeper ignores the Proximity Gap Factor (p. 115) setting, which is used to help define
the proximity-based sizing (p. 107).

• Hard entities (p. 468) are not supported for the general sweeper.

• If the sweep method is applied to a body and a mapped Face Meshing (p. 314) control is defined for
either the body's source or target face, the sweep mesher will fail if a mapped mesh cannot be obtained
for the face. See Notes on Face Meshing Controls for Mapped Meshing (p. 327) for related information.

• The source and target faces do not have to be flat or parallel.

• If the topology of the source and target face is the same, the sweeping operation will often succeed
even if the shape of the source face is different from the shape of the target face. However, drastically
different shapes can cause element shape failures.

• Sweeping does not require your model to have a constant cross section. However, the best results
are obtained for constant or linearly varying cross sections.

• For swept meshes with inflation (p. 454) and match control (p. 334), inflation is performed ahead of
the match mesh and sweeping. This can affect the sizings on the match controls, which can in turn
lead to meshing failure. Therefore, when using both match controls and inflation with sweeping, it
might improve meshing robustness if you assign hard edge sizings (p. 300) to the high and low edges
of the source face for the sweep.

Figure 117: Axis Sweep Representation

Figure 118: Edge Only Sweep Path

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 401
Specialized Meshing

Figure 119: Edge Plus Closed Surface Sweep Path

Rules Followed By the General Sweeper

In deciding which area should be designated as the source area for general sweeping, the program
uses the following rules, in the order as listed below. The sweeper will check all the rules until it finds
a rule to use. Once a higher order rule is used, all the lower rules will not be considered. For example,
if none of the first five rules apply, it will check against rule 6. In this case, if a face is a plane (flat) and
the other face is not a plane (not flat), the flat face will be picked as the source and the test will be
terminated.

1. Manually set control - specify both source and target: The source and target for sweeping will
be exactly as you specify. This is the fastest way of meshing. It will eliminate searching for a possible
source and target. For axis-sweeping, this method must be used. If a face is a source of another
body and is not picked as a source of the current body, the aforementioned face will be used as a
source.

2. Manually set control - specify source: Once the user specifies a source area, the program will try
to find the target suitable to the source. The source will be exactly as specified.

3. Face Mesh control: The program finds the face with a mapped Face Mesh control applied to it.

4. Number of loops: The face with the largest number of loops will be picked as source face.

5. Number of lines: The face with the largest number of lines will be picked as source face.

6. Flat face: A flat face has higher priority for being a source face.

7. Less sharing: In most cases, a face might be used by one or a maximum of two bodies. If every one
is flat (plane), the one used by the least number of bodies (that is, used by just one body) will be
picked as source face.

8. Larger area: The largest area will be picked as the source.

Topological Requirements of the General Sweeper

The general sweeper must have at least one path between the source face and target face. The side
faces of the sweep do not need to be singular but they must all be submappable and have single loops.
The source face cannot be a closed analytic such as a full cylinder, torus or sphere. However, partial
analytics are acceptable as source and target faces.

Note:

Creo Parametric creates unique topological models that no other CAD system creates. In all
other CAD systems, non-periodic faces can have only one exterior topological loop. On the
other hand, models in Creo Parametric can have non-periodic faces with multiple exterior

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
402 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Sweeping

loops. This type of topology does not pose a problem for the free meshers in the Meshing
application. However, it does pose a problem for the general sweeper. As noted above, side
faces of the sweep must have single loops. They cannot have multiple exterior loops because
if they do, a single path from the source to the target cannot be determined.

Importing the model into the DesignModeler application breaks the face with multiple exter-
ior loops into multiple faces with single loops because the DesignModeler kernel does not
support the Creo Parametric topology. Exporting the model from Creo Parametric to IGES
or STEP format will also resolve this issue.

Figure 120: Example (a) Showing Invalid Closed Cylindrical Face as Source Face

Figure 121: Example (b) Valid Open Cylindrical Face as Source Face

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 403
Specialized Meshing

Figure 122: Example (c) Multiple Connected Side Faces

Using General Sweep to Mesh a Narrow Channel Body

The series of images below illustrates the use of general sweep, along with mapped face meshing (p. 314)
and hard edge sizing (p. 300) controls, to mesh a narrow channel body. Figure 123: Axial Sweep Mod-
el (p. 404) shows the source, target, and side areas of the axial sweep model used in this example.

Figure 123: Axial Sweep Model

Because the source and target areas to be meshed are a narrow channel and you want them to be
meshed with map mesh, it may present difficulties to the mesher. In Figure 124: Axial Sweep Model:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
404 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Sweeping

Face Meshing Control (p. 405), a mapped Face Meshing control is defined on the source face. Four
vertices (two on each side area) have been selected for the Specified Sides control.

Figure 124: Axial Sweep Model: Face Meshing Control

In cases similar to this example, the key to obtaining a successful mesh is the definition of a hard edge
sizing control to make the two paired parallel edges. As shown in Figure 125: Axial Sweep Model: Hard
Edge Sizing Control (p. 406), set the Type to Number of Divisions and enter a value in the Number of
Divisions field (in this case, 50). The Hard option ensures the number of divisions are the same on the
pair of edges.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 405
Specialized Meshing

Figure 125: Axial Sweep Model: Hard Edge Sizing Control

Finally, Figure 126: Axial Sweep Model: Meshed (p. 406) shows the mesh obtained using the settings
described above.

Figure 126: Axial Sweep Model: Meshed

Thin Model Sweeping

Similar to the behavior of the general sweeper (p. 399), the thin model sweeper creates a structured
hexahedral/wedge mesh, but for a thin model. It meshes one side of the thin solid (the source), and
then sweeps the mesh to the other side (the target). Unlike the general sweeper, the thin model

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
406 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Sweeping

sweeper does not require a topological one-to-one match of source to target. The model may have
multiple source and/or target surfaces. (Refer to Topological Requirements of the Thin Model
Sweeper (p. 408) for examples.) In addition, the thin model sweeper can perform some edge defeaturing
and allowing it to mesh models that have reasonably small features.

Requirements and usage information specific to the thin model sweeper include the following:

• The model must be thin—if the model is too thick, the thin model sweeper algorithm may fail.

• The source(s) and target(s) cannot touch each other.

• The model must have an obvious "side" that is perpendicular to the source and target, all of the
side areas must connect directly from source to target.

• Mesh controls defined on the target may not be respected.

• Multibody parts are supported.

• For multibody parts, only one division through the thickness is possible. For single body parts, you
can define multiple elements through the thickness using the Sweep Num Divs control in the
Details View of the Sweep Method. (See steps below.)

• The thin model sweeper ignores the Proximity Gap Factor (p. 115) setting, which is used to help
define the proximity-based sizing (p. 107). Using the proximity-based sizing in combination with
the thin model sweeper may lead to an unnecessarily long computation time.

• If two bodies intersect to make a "T" connection, the thin model sweeper does not require that a
mapped mesh control be defined at the junction of the two bodies.

• The Preview Source and Target Mesh and Preview Surface Mesh features do not support the
thin model sweeper.

• See Notes on Face Meshing Controls for Mapped Meshing (p. 327) for information about using
mapped Face Meshing controls with the thin model sweeper.

Considerations for Selecting Source Faces for the Thin Model Sweeper
The thin model sweeper meshes one side of a thin solid (the source), and then sweeps the mesh to
the other side (the target). You can control which side the mesher uses as the source by selecting
source faces manually. (To do so, set the Src/Trg Selection control to Manual Thin as described below.)

For most geometries, you can select just 1 of the faces in the complete set of faces that you want to
be used as the source set, and the mesher will properly identify the other faces that are a part of that
source set. However, for more complicated models (such as those containing multibody parts), you
need to select all source faces in the source set in order for the mesher to be successful in finding
the complete set of source faces.

A general rule of thumb is if you can select a single face and then extend the selection to its limits,
the mesher can also identify the proper complete set of source faces. (For details about extending
selections, refer to the description of the Extend Selection command in the Mechanical help.) If the
geometry contains sharp angles that make the limit extension selection difficult, it will also be difficult
for the mesher to use a single face for the source face definition, and you should select the complete
set of source faces.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 407
Specialized Meshing

Topological Requirements of the Thin Model Sweeper

If a thin model mesh fails, turn on the Edge Coloring > By Connection option to see if the edge con-
nectivity is unusual. In some cases, the geometry connectivity may not be as expected, and this may
create problems during meshing. These problems can be fixed in the DesignModeler application, the
CAD package, or possibly through the use of virtual topologies (p. 545)

The thin model sweeper supports M source faces to N target faces, where M and N can be any positive
whole numbers. Between source faces and target faces, there must be "side faces." The angles between
side faces and either source faces or target faces must be sharp enough that the faces are NOT con-
sidered to be smoothly connected. Therefore, a knife with a thin blade would not be appropriate for
thin model sweeping because the cutting edge (blade) does not form a "side face." During the thin
model sweeping meshing process, the features (vertices, edges, and faces) on the target may not be
preserved and therefore, you should avoid applying boundary conditions to the target. The side faces
must connect to both source and target. No edges or vertices are allowed on side faces. In this sense,
no hard edges (p. 468) on side faces are allowed. Side edges must connect directly from source to
target. You can use virtual topology to eliminate some features.

Figure 127: Example (a) N Source to 1 Target or 1 Target to N Source Topology

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
408 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Sweeping

Figure 128: Example (b) N Source to N Target Topology

Figure 129: Example (c) 1 Source to N Target Mesh

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 409
Specialized Meshing

Figure 130: Example (d) N Source to 1 Target Mesh

Figure 131: Example (e) N Source to N Target Mesh

Use Virtual Topology to create a single edge between source and target faces.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
410 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Sweeping

Figure 132: Using Virtual Topology to Create Single Edge Between Source/Target Faces

Mesh Controls and the Thin Model Sweeper

Mesh Controls applied on the target faces/edges are ignored. Only mesh controls applied to the
source faces/edges are respected.

In example (a) below, the Mapped Face Control is ignored because it is applied to the target face.

Figure 133: Example (a) Mapped Face Control Applied to Target Is Ignored

In example (b) below, the Mapped Face Control is respected because it is applied to the source face.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 411
Specialized Meshing

Figure 134: Example (b) Mapped Face Control Applied to Source Is Respected

Thin Model Sweeping for Single Body Parts

This section provides the basic steps for using thin model sweeping to mesh a single body part.

To use the Thin Model Sweeper to mesh a single body part:

1. Click the Mesh object in the Tree and select Insert> Method from the context menu.

2. Scope the Method control to the thin body.

3. In Details> Definition, set Method to Sweep.

4. Set Src/Trg Selection to Manual Thin or Automatic Thin.

Although Automatic Thin may work for simple cases, you may need to select Manual Thin de-
pending on the complexity of the model.

5. If you selected Manual Thin, scope the source face(s), remembering the recommendations
provided in Considerations for Selecting Source Faces for the Thin Model Sweeper (p. 407).

6. Enter additional sweep option settings, as desired, in the Details View. These may include Free
Face Mesh Type, Sweep Num Divs, and Element Option. For descriptions of these options, see
Sweep Method Control (p. 235).

7. Define other mesh controls, as desired.

8. Generate the mesh.

Figure 135: Thin Solid Sweeper Used to Mesh a Single Body Part (p. 413) shows a model of a timing
cover that consists of a single body. The thin solid sweeper was used to mesh the body. To obtain
this mesh, Free Face Mesh Type was set to Quad/Tri, Sweep Num Divs was set to 2, and Element
Option was set to Solid Shell.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
412 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Sweeping

Figure 135: Thin Solid Sweeper Used to Mesh a Single Body Part

Figure 136: Thin Solid Sweeper Used to Mesh a Single Body Part: Detail (p. 413) shows detail of the
timing cover. The Sweep Num Divs setting of 2 is apparent in this view.

Figure 136: Thin Solid Sweeper Used to Mesh a Single Body Part: Detail

Thin Model Sweeping for Multibody Parts

This section provides the basic steps for using thin model sweeping to mesh multibody parts. You
can define thin sweep for each thin body in the multibody part.

To use the Thin Model Sweeper to mesh a multibody part:

1. Select a thin body in the Geometry window, right-click, and select Insert> Method.

2. Set Method to Sweep.

3. Set Src/Trg Selection to Manual Thin or Automatic Thin.

Although Automatic Thin may work for simple cases, you may need to select Manual Thin de-
pending on the complexity of the model.

4. If you selected Manual Thin, scope the source face(s) of the thin body, remembering the recom-
mendations provided in Considerations for Selecting Source Faces for the Thin Model Sweep-
er (p. 407).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 413
Specialized Meshing

5. Enter additional sweep option settings for the thin body, as desired, in the Details View. These
may include Free Face Mesh Type and Element Option. For descriptions of these options, see
Sweep Method Control (p. 235).

6. If the part contains multiple thin bodies, repeat step 1 through step 5 for each.

7. If the part contains any thick sweepable bodies, repeat step 1 through step 5 for each, but set
Src/Trg Selection to Automatic, Manual Source, or Manual Source and Target (depending
on complexity of the model).

8. If the part contains any non-sweepable bodies, define mesh methods for each, if desired. If the
mesh methods are left undefined, the Meshing application will determine the most appropriate
methods to use for the non-sweepable bodies.

9. Define other mesh controls, as desired.

10. Generate the mesh.

Figure 137: Thin Solid Sweeper Used to Mesh a Multibody Part (p. 414) shows a model of a bracket
that consists of four bodies. The thin solid sweeper was used to mesh the bodies. To obtain this mesh,
Free Face Mesh Type was set to Quad/Tri and Element Option was set to Solid.

Figure 137: Thin Solid Sweeper Used to Mesh a Multibody Part

Additional Considerations for Using the Thin Model Sweeper

This section describes several models and scenarios to consider before using the thin model sweeper.

The first example involves a multibody part that models a laminated composite material, as shown
below. Defining source faces for such models may be confusing.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
414 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Sweeping

Figure 138: Thin Solid Sweeper and Laminated Composite Models

The part contains nine bodies. Assume that the Manual Thin option for Src/Trg Selection will be
applied to each of them. With the Manual Thin option, source faces must be defined for each selected
body (each body must have at least one face selected as its source face). There are different ways
that you can select faces to meet this requirement, and it is logical to assume that defining nine
source faces (one for each body) is one way that will work. However, in cases of laminated composites,
you must specify every other face as a source face.

Consider the figure below, in which nine faces (indicated by arrows) are defined as source faces for
the nine bodies. As illustrated by the figure, Body 1 has two faces defined as source faces, and the
same is true for bodies 2 through 8. This source face definition causes ambiguity for the thin sweep
mesher, which will have trouble determining a target face in bodies 1 through 8 and may fail.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 415
Specialized Meshing

Figure 139: Ambiguous Source Face Definition for Laminated Composite Model

Now look at the figure below. Here every other face has been selected as a source face, for a total of
five. With this source face definition, each body still has one face selected to be its source face, so
the requirement for Manual Thin source face selection has been met. With this source face definition,
the thin sweep mesher will have no problem determining target faces for each of the bodies.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
416 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Sweeping

Figure 140: Recommended Source Face Definition for Laminated Composite Model

Note:

For cases in which the Automatic Thin option can be used, an alternative method to
consider is to apply the Manual Thin option to only one body, define its source face, and
apply the Automatic Thin option to the remaining bodies.

Before using thin solid sweeping, remember that the mesher meshes one side of faces and then
sweeps the mesh to the second side of faces. Consider Figure 141: Thin Solid Sweeper Limitation (p. 418),
which shows a model containing three plates. In the thin sweep operation, the edges that are common
to two source faces are present on the source side. If the edges are different on the opposite side,
the mesher will use the nodes from the source side in the mesh on the opposite side anyway. Thus,
if there are features on the non-source side that are unique and need to be captured, you should not
use the thin solid sweeping approach, as the mesher will ignore these features.

In Figure 141: Thin Solid Sweeper Limitation (p. 418), there is no valid way to mesh the middle plate
with the thin solid sweep method, as there is an imprint coming from both the plate above and the
plate below the middle plate, unless:

1. The plate is decomposed (sliced) to ensure all target face(s) have a corresponding source
face.

2. The multibody part is broken into single parts (non-conformal mesh at common interfaces).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 417
Specialized Meshing

3. Some other mesh method is used. (In Figure 141: Thin Solid Sweeper Limitation (p. 418), a tet
mesh method is used.)

4. The source and target faces have similar pairs, and the source faces are selected properly
(described below).

Figure 141: Thin Solid Sweeper Limitation

Figure 142: Adding Face Projections (Splits) in the DesignModeler Application (p. 418) illustrates an
alternative approach to meshing the model above. In the DesignModeler application, the Projection
feature allows face(s) to be split so that the source and target pairs will align. (For this model, the
Edges on Face type of projection was used.)

Figure 142: Adding Face Projections (Splits) in the DesignModeler Application

With the addition of the face splits, the model can be meshed successfully with the thin solid sweep
method by applying the Manual Thin option for Src/Trg Selection to all three bodies, and defining
the top surface of each body as its source faces, as shown below. In this example, two faces are selected

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
418 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 MultiZone Meshing

as source faces for the body on the left, three for the middle body, and two for the body on the right.
Defining the source faces in this way ensures that everything is meshed from one side of the multibody
part to the other.

Figure 143: Defining Source Faces when Face Splits Are Present

Figure 144: Three Plates Model Meshed with Thin Solid Sweeper (p. 419) shows the meshed model.

Figure 144: Three Plates Model Meshed with Thin Solid Sweeper

MultiZone Meshing
The MultiZone mesh method provides automatic decomposition of geometry into mapped (struc-
tured/sweepable) regions and free (unstructured) regions. It automatically generates a pure hexahedral
mesh where possible and then fills the more difficult to capture regions with unstructured mesh. The
MultiZone mesh method and the Sweep mesh method operate similarly. However, MultiZone has
capabilities that make it more suitable for a class of problems for which the Sweep method would not
work without extensive geometry decomposition.

MultiZone meshing topics include:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 419
Specialized Meshing

• MultiZone Method Control (p. 242)

• MultiZone Algorithms (p. 420)

• Using MultiZone (p. 423)

• MultiZone Support for Inflation (p. 440)

• MultiZone Limitations and Hints (p. 442)

MultiZone Algorithms
The MultiZone mesh method, which is based on the blocking approach used in Ansys ICEM CFD
Hexa, starts by automatically blocking out surfaces. If the surface blocking can form a closed volume,
then the volume may be filled automatically with a number of structured, swept, or unstructured
blocks. The structured blocks can be filled with Hexa, Hexa/Prism, or Prism elements and the un-
structured blocks can be filled with Tetra, Hexa Dominant, or Hexa Core elements depending on
your settings, as described in MultiZone Method Control (p. 242).

The blocking algorithm and the meshing algorithm used to generate a MultiZone mesh are detailed
below.

MultiZone Blocking Algorithm

The blocking algorithm used to generate a MultiZone mesh can be described as follows. The series
of figures illustrates the process, assuming the geometry shown in Figure 145: Blocking Al-
gorithm—Sample Geometry (p. 420).

Figure 145: Blocking Algorithm—Sample Geometry

1. Creates automatic surface blocking (2D) by performing a surface analysis. In this step the al-
gorithm:

• Uses the MultiZone Quad/Tri mesh method to generate 2D blocking.

• Uses mapped controls to try to force mapping. In general, surfaces with four sides are
mapped (structured) and other surface patches are free (unstructured).

• Uses Src/Trg face selection to try to imprint faces into the source/target faces. (MultiZone
treats all sources/targets as sources, as imprinting can occur from either side. For additional
details, refer to MultiZone Source Face Selection Tips (p. 426).)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
420 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 MultiZone Meshing

Figure 146: Blocking Algorithm—Step 1: 2D Blocking

2. Creates a MultiZone (3D) structure. In this step the algorithm:

• Processes surface blocks to match swept sections.

• Connects surface blocks to create volume blocking (3D) using unique heuristic approaches
to avoid some of the traditional limitations of sweeping algorithms.

• Resolves the volume region with structured, swept, and unstructured blocks. Mapped faces
become structured blocks and free faces become unstructured blocks.

Figure 147: Blocking Algorithm—Step 2: 3D Blocking

3. O-Grid creates boundary blocks automatically, and the algorithm extrudes O-Grid to create
inflation.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 421
Specialized Meshing

Figure 148: Blocking Algorithm—Step 3: Inflation

Note:

Inflation can be performed on a combination of side and/or source faces.

MultiZone Meshing Algorithm

The meshing algorithm used to generate a MultiZone mesh can be described as follows:

• Assigns intervals by transferring sizing from the topology to blocking.

• Meshes structured faces (those that can be mapped meshed) using transfinite interpolation
and unstructured (free) faces with all quadrilateral or a combination of quadrilateral/triangle
elements.

• Interpolates, sweeps, and fills the volume mesh for the structured, swept, and unstructured
blocks respectively. The structured blocks can be filled with Hexa, Hexa/Prism, or Prism ele-
ments and the unstructured blocks can be filled with Tetra, Hexa Dominant, or Hexa Core
elements depending on your settings, as described in MultiZone Method Control (p. 242).

MultiZone for Sweepable Bodies

If using Use MultiZone for Sweepable bodies (p. 389), you can use the Show Sweepable Bodies (p. 537)
setting to identify bodies that will be meshed using the MultiZone method. Although MultiZone
can mesh other, more complex bodies, it does not attempt this unless you manually insert MultiZone
mesh method controls.

Other notes about the behavior of MultiZone when meshed in this way:

1. When meshing using Automatic approach, MultiZone uses Preserve Boundaries = All (Note
this is different than the default when scoping a body to a MultiZone mesh method) and no de-
featuring is done.

2. If MultiZone fails to generate a valid mesh due to errors in the mesh quality or topology, the
body will be meshed with Free Mesh Type = Tetra.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
422 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 MultiZone Meshing

3. Bodies scoped to an Automatic Mesh Method will also be meshed in the same way.

Using MultiZone
To help you to determine whether the MultiZone mesh method is the most appropriate method for
your problem and to ensure blocking is constructed properly, you must consider the following char-
acteristics of the problem:

• Sources

• Sweep paths (side faces)

• Intersections (levels)

To classify a MultiZone problem, consider which faces will be sources and in turn, which sources will
cause imprinting. (Note that imprinting, which is described in MultiZone Source Face Imprinting
Guidelines (p. 427), has its own classifications that further define the problem.)

In Figure 149: Classifying the Problem: Sources (p. 423), four faces have been selected as sources.

Figure 149: Classifying the Problem: Sources

You must also consider the sweep path, or sides, of the mesh. This includes how many potential
sweep directions exist in the problem and if there is more than one, how imprints should be handled.
See Figure 150: Classifying the Problem: Handling of Paths and Imprints (p. 424).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 423
Specialized Meshing

Figure 150: Classifying the Problem: Handling of Paths and Imprints

A collective set of attached faces in a body is used for imprinting. For example, if one of the faces in
this model has a split in it as shown in Figure 151: Collective Source Faces (p. 424), the number of
source faces increases by one. However, the set of source faces remains the same.

Figure 151: Collective Source Faces

Thus, there are still four levels of source faces. However, now there are additional considerations ne-
cessary for imprinting, and handling of side faces.

All faces that are not sources are side faces, and they make up the path. In a simple box example,
the box could be swept in any one of three directions, but it is the source selection that determines
the path. If no source is selected, MultiZone determines the path arbitrarily.

The model shown in Figure 152: Classifying the Problem: Sweep Path (p. 425) shows one clear sweep
direction. The green faces are the side faces.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
424 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 MultiZone Meshing

Figure 152: Classifying the Problem: Sweep Path

By default in MultiZone, the mesher is set to automatically determine the sweep path. Since 2D regions
and 3D regions are decomposed automatically, this allows the mesher the freedom to choose paths
that may not be possible without first subdividing the model. For example, in cases like the valve
body shown below, with a traditional sweep meshing approach you would either need to split this
body into three regions (center region with path along the axis, and two half cylinders with path top
to bottom), or mesh the whole body from top to bottom.

Figure 153: Valve Body: Traditional Approach

With MultiZone, the mesher determines that certain portions of the cylindrical region face need to
be mapped as a side face, and other portions of it that need to be considered as source faces, and
therefore it can decompose the sweep paths automatically.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 425
Specialized Meshing

Figure 154: Valve Body: Automatic Source Faces with MultiZone

In general, you should allow MultiZone to define its own sweep path. However, if the path is obvious
and there are clear source and side faces, or if MultiZone is not able to determine the sweep path
on its own, you can guide the mesher by setting manual source faces and ensuring side faces are
mappable.

For more information, refer to:

MultiZone Source Face Selection Tips
MultiZone Source Face Imprinting Guidelines
MultiZone Face Mappability Guidelines
Using Virtual Topology to Handle Fillets in MultiZone Problems

MultiZone Source Face Selection Tips

When you choose the MultiZone mesh method, the Details View expands to expose various set-
tings (p. 242), one of which is Src/Trg Selection. Src/Trg Selection, which defines the source and
target selection type for the MultiZone mesh method, can be set to either Automatic (the default)
or Manual Source. Remember these points when selecting faces:

• Select both source and target faces. MultiZone internally decides which faces to take as sources
and which to take as targets.

• To do imprinting of face loops, all swept section faces (that is, those that are perpendicular to
the sweep direction) should be selected.

• Source faces will generally be meshed with a free mesh. Depending on the geometry, you can
add mapped face meshing controls (p. 314) to these faces to get mapped meshing.

• At an interface in a multibody part (in which two bodies share the same face), there is not always
a distinction of which body the face belongs to. When using MultiZone in such cases, setting
the face to be inflated may affect both bodies because both bodies are meshed with MultiZone
at the same time.

• To make source face selection easier, select Annotation Preferences from the Toolbar and then
deselect Body Scoping Annotations in the Annotation Preferences option box to toggle the
visibility of annotations in the Geometry window. For example, after scoping MultiZone to a
body, the body will be displayed using a blue solid annotation. Turn off the body scoping annota-

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
426 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 MultiZone Meshing

tions, then select the source faces. For picking internal faces, the Hide Faces right-click option
may help you to see inside a body. For example, you can select external faces in the Geometry
window and then use the Hide Faces option to hide the selected faces (making it easier to select
the internal faces).

Refer to Figure 101: Source / Target Face Selection for MultiZone (p. 255) for more information.

MultiZone Source Face Imprinting Guidelines

Imprinting has its own classifications that further define the problem. Models often exhibit combin-
ations of these different situations when trying to sort out the sweep paths between pairs of source
face(s).

When selecting source faces, it is important to recognize that the pairs of source faces need to have
proper matches (that is, each level must be resolved with other levels). If source faces cannot be
paired, imprinting must be done by the software to create proper pairs. The software supports only
certain types of imprinting, so it is important to understand these cases.

Imprinting classifications include:

Internal Loops
Boundary Loops
Multiple Internal Loops
Multiple Connected Internal Loops
Parallel Loops
Intersecting Loops

It is also important to note that if you set the Free Mesh Type (p. 242) to anything other than Not
Allowed, some of the imprinting will not be done, as this can lead to some problems in the creation
of the free blocks. For example, on some models you could get a pure hex mesh if you set Free
Mesh Type to Not Allowed, but not get a pure hex mesh if you set Free Mesh Type to some
other value.

Internal Loops
Internal loops are internal regions that imprint to other faces, such as the fins in the rotor model
shown below.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 427
Specialized Meshing

Figure 155: Source Imprinting Classifications: Internal Loops

Boundary Loops
Boundary loops are splits in a face that extend to the boundary, such as those shown in the
model below.

Figure 156: Source Imprinting Classifications: Boundary Loops

Multiple Internal Loops

Some models exhibit multiple internal loops, such as those in the model below.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
428 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 MultiZone Meshing

Figure 157: Source Imprinting Classifications: Multiple Internal Loops

Multiple Connected Internal Loops

Some models exhibit multiple connected internal loops, such as those in the model of the circuit
board below. The MultiZone method has been applied to the underlying board, which is high-
lighted in blue. The Edge Coloring>By Connection feature is on in this view.

Figure 158: Source Imprinting Classifications: Multiple Connected Internal Loops View 1

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 429
Specialized Meshing

In the figure below, the body corresponding to the underlying board was selected and meshed.
In this view, both the Edge Coloring>By Connection and Show Vertices features are on.

Figure 159: Source Imprinting Classifications: Multiple Connected Internal Loops View 2

Parallel Loops
Some models exhibit parallel loops, such as those in the model below. If the software can match
all pairs these models should work; however, the angle between pairs can cause problems (due
to difficulties finding the pairs), and if there are non-matched pairs they will cause problems. For
non-matched pairs, virtual topologies may solve the problem. For these kinds of examples, using
automatic source face selection is often more robust than manual source face selection.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
430 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 MultiZone Meshing

Figure 160: Source Imprinting Classifications: Parallel Loops

Intersecting Loops
Two views of a model with intersecting loops are shown below. Notice that the sources on the
top and bottom would intersect when being imprinted. These types of cases are not supported
yet. You can use geometry decomposition as a workaround.

Figure 161: Source Imprinting Classifications: Intersecting Loops View 1

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 431
Specialized Meshing

Figure 162: Source Imprinting Classifications: Intersecting Loops View 2

MultiZone Face Mappability Guidelines

To construct a swept or all hex mesh on typical geometries, side faces generally have to be able
to be mapped or submapped. In most cases, if manual source faces are selected with MultiZone,
all other faces are treated as side faces and are mapped/submapped if possible. However, certain
model characteristics can lead to problems in mapping/submapping side faces, and ultimately lead
to meshing failure. You can use virtual topologies to correct most issues and obtain successful side
face handling and mesh generation. In some cases, you may also want source faces to be
mapped/submapped, but that should be a lower priority.

In addition, imprinted regions must have a clear path of connecting side faces and handling inter-
sections throughout the path.

Note:

If all faces of a body have a face meshing control set to Mapped, MultiZone will perform
additional steps to ensure an all-mapped hex mesh is created. This can be important
for cases where source faces of one body are side faces of an adjacent body so the entire
body must be meshed with mapped faces in order to mesh the full model.

For guidelines that explain some common situations and steps you can take to resolve faces into
mappable regions, see:

• Face Meshing Control (p. 314)

• Side Face Handling of Imprinted Regions (p. 432)

Side Face Handling of Imprinted Regions

When an imprint is made to connect two sets of source faces, side faces are constructed in the
process. (See Figure 150: Classifying the Problem: Handling of Paths and Imprints (p. 424).) Generally,
the pairs of imprints create a natural set of side faces that are mappable. However, if there are
several sets of side faces along the sweep path, the interval edge assignment of the internal
mapped faces can become tricky. Because there are not physical faces or edges to help define
the interval edge assignment, you are sometimes better off adding more decomposition to help
control this (either by splitting some of the external faces, or by slicing the geometry).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
432 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 MultiZone Meshing

The simple cutout case shown below illustrates this.

Figure 163: Simple Cutout Case

In the case above, there is a set of source faces at top, center, and bottom. Internal side faces
are constructed from the center to the bottom and the interval edge assignment for these internal
edges is found by subtracting the number of divisions for the top to center region of sweep path
from the entire sweep path.

However, in cases in which the internal cutouts are at multiple levels or the sides do not provide
a clear connected path, MultiZone could have difficulties constructing side faces with appropriate
interval edge assignment unless you set the Free Mesh Type (p. 242) to something other than
Not Allowed, or you perform manual geometry decomposition. Refer to the figure below for an
example showing cutouts at multiple levels.

Figure 164: Cutouts at Multiple Levels

In the figure above, notice that cutouts at different levels are meshed at the same level with regard
to the grid lines.

When there are intersections between the imprints and the side faces along the sweep path,
some complications may arise. For example, the case shown in Figure 165: Intersections Between
Levels and Sides (p. 434) has one clear sweep path (top to bottom), six levels (sets of sources),
and a need for imprints.

The legend below explains the symbols and display options used in Figure 165: Intersections
Between Levels and Sides (p. 434).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 433
Specialized Meshing

Figure 165: Intersections Between Levels and Sides

To construct a swept mesh on this model, MultiZone needs to resolve the intersections between
the cylinders, and the side rib. In this case, meshing is successful because the sources are well-
defined, and the side face handling is clear (side faces can be submapped appropriately).

Figure 166: Meshed Model

However, if the sources are not well-defined (or incomplete), or the side faces cannot be mapped,
MultiZone will have difficulties. To fix such problems, add extra decomposition or mesh with the
Free Mesh Type option.

Cylindrical Side Faces

Cylinders have a start and end point which, at times, can affect the quality of the meshing. When
you add a first virtual edge to split a circle (the side face of a cylinder), you create two vertices:
one where you split the circle and one at the end point, as shown below.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
434 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 MultiZone Meshing

Figure 167: Vertices in a Split Circle

If MultiZone fails to mesh a cylindrical surface with cut-outs folded at greater than 180 degrees,
splitting the cylinder along the seam to get a sub-mapped face mesh may help. If you use this
method, check to ensure that the split does not hamper mesh quality.

Figure 168: 360 ˚ Cutout

For more information about virtual split edges, see Creating and Managing Virtual Split
Edges (p. 561).

Internal Loop Side Faces

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 435
Specialized Meshing

When internal loops exist along the side faces of the sweep path, as shown in Figure 169: Internal
Loops along Side Faces of the Sweep Path (p. 436) below, the following tips might help:

Figure 169: Internal Loops along Side Faces of the Sweep Path

1. Assign a mapped face control to the side face(s) with the internal cutouts to help ensure
those faces are mapped.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
436 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 MultiZone Meshing

Figure 170: Map Face Control Assigned to Side Faces

2. Assign front/back of connecting faces as source faces for MultiZone.

Figure 171: Connecting Faces Assigned as Source Faces

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 437
Specialized Meshing

3. If side faces are cylindrical, use inflation to get reasonable quality mesh.

Figure 172: Using Inflation on Cylindrical Side Faces

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
438 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 MultiZone Meshing

Figure 173: Using Inflation on Cylindrical Side Faces

Using Virtual Topology to Handle Fillets in MultiZone Problems

The presence of fillets in a model can cause problems for MultiZone, since arguably a fillet could
be either a side face or a source face and the mesh quality in the corner could be problematic.
Ideally, a fillet should be split in half, with one half going to the source face and the other half going
to the side face.

Figure 174: Fillets and MultiZone

In addition, inflation is generally recommended to improve the high angled elements that would
be formed along the edge that is shared between the source and side faces. Inflation allows the
mesh to transition away from the boundary and reduce the angle. See Figure 175: Fillets and Infla-
tion (p. 440).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 439
Specialized Meshing

Figure 175: Fillets and Inflation

Alternatively, the fillet could be removed by assigning the fillet to the side face through a virtual
topology operation.

Figure 176: Fillets as Side Faces

Refer to Meshing: Virtual Topology (p. 545) for more information.

MultiZone Support for Inflation

The Inflation Option (p. 166) setting determines the heights of the inflation layers. For the MultiZone
mesh method, you can set Inflation Option to Smooth Transition, Total Thickness, or First Layer
Thickness. First Aspect Ratio and Last Aspect Ratio are not supported.

The Inflation Option for MultiZone is set to Smooth Transition by default. The approach Smooth
Transition uses for computing each local initial height for MultiZone differs from the approach used
for tet mesh methods. This is because an inflated tet mesh contains different types of volume elements
(tets and prisms where the ratio takes into consideration the difference in volume based on element
shape), while in an inflated MultiZone mesh the elements generally will be the same type.

Inflation in MultiZone is done by offsetting the topology to construct inflation regions called an O-
Grid. In the O-Grid creation, only the faces that are being inflated will be offset. For example, in a
simple box (or sphere) like the following:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
440 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 MultiZone Meshing

If all faces are inflated, you would get a complete O-Grid.

If you only select some faces of the box, the faces that are not inflated do not get an O-Grid region,
and the inflation layers attach to that face. In the following image, all faces are inflated except the
left face.

Inflation controls define:

• How thick the O-Grid region is.

• The sizing along the O-Grid.

When the Smooth Transition option is used with MultiZone, the O-Grid edge length varies based
on the number of elements, and the local last inflation height is computed as Transition Ratio (p. 168)
* local_mesh_size. As with other mesh methods when Smooth Transition is used, the inflation layers
are created using the values of the Transition Ratio (p. 168), Maximum Layers (p. 169), and Growth
Rate (p. 169) controls.

Note:

• Because the MultiZone mesh method uses an O-Grid technique for inflation, it cannot
stairstep or peel back layers if there is insufficient room for all layers. Because of this,
the default values for Smooth Transition inflation could be aggressive, depending on

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 441
Specialized Meshing

the model. Reducing the number of layers or switching to a different type of inflation
definition may be more suitable for some models.

• MultiZone supports Program Controlled (p. 164) inflation.

• The Collision Avoidance (p. 174) option is not used for MultiZone as the inflation layers
are created within the blocking approach.

MultiZone Limitations and Hints

MultiZone has the following limitations:

• Pinch controls (p. 187) are not supported.

• Only three-dimensional bodies can be used as Bodies of Influence (BOIs) (p. 305).

• The hard-sizing behavior of Sphere of influence (SOI) (p. 304) controls is not supported. You
can define a refinement with an SOI control but not a coarsening. The SOI element size is only
applicable in the mesh if it is smaller than the local mesh size without SOI.

• BOI controls are interpreted as an agglomerate of SOI controls that fill the body of influence.
Therefore, on the boundaries of that body, the size might be a little larger because the location
is not in one of the spheres.

• The scope is not used for the SOI/BOI definition. The SOI/BOI does not act only on the scoped
topology, but on all topologies within the region of the SOI/BOI.

• In MultiZone, size controls (p. 304) are first applied on the edges. For structured blocks, the
mapped mesh of structured blocks is completely determined by the mesh on the attached
edges. You cannot apply refinement or coarsening to the faces as you can for unstructured
blocks. Therefore, to see the impact of the SOI on a mapped face, you must increase the radius
of the SOI or lower the Growth Rate (p. 110) to influence the mesh size on the edges.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
442 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 MultiZone Meshing

Figure 177: Sphere of Influence on Face that Doesn't Intersect Edges

• In MultiZone, a closed edge is represented by more than one blocking topological edges.
Therefore, user-specified edge node distribution size may not be respected. However, the
number of intervals will still be respected,

• For split curves in rotated edge association, only interval count, not distribution, will be respec-
ted.

• Some inflation cases are not supported. For example, when the inflation does not form a closed
loop (which would lead to non-conformal mesh that is not allowed). In these cases the inflation
will be skipped. Also see MultiZone Support for Inflation (p. 440).

Tips:

Some tips to follow while performing MultiZone meshing:

• The Show Sweepable Bodies (p. 537) feature is a good tool to detect bodies that should mesh
with MultiZone.

• There is no access to underlying blocks except by writing out the Ansys ICEM CFD files (p. 84).

• For help in diagnosing problems when using the MultiZone method, refer to the description
of the Edge group in the Mechanical help. This toolbar provides access to features that are
intended to improve your ability to distinguish edge and mesh connectivity.

• See Handling General MultiZone Meshing Failures (p. 593) for more information.

For additional information, refer to Interactions Between Mesh Methods and Mesh Controls (p. 478)
(Patch Independent Mesh Methods table).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 443
Specialized Meshing

Selective Meshing
Using selective meshing, you can selectively pick bodies and mesh them incrementally. After meshing
a body, you can mesh the entire part or assembly or continue meshing individual bodies. To generate
the rest of the mesh in the model, use the Generate Mesh (p. 528) feature.

The following mesh methods are supported:

• For solid meshing:

– Patch Conforming Tetrahedron (p. 208)

– Patch Independent Tetrahedron (p. 210)

– MultiZone (p. 242)

– Sweep (p. 235)

– Hex Dominant (p. 233)

• For surface meshing:

– Quad Dominant (p. 282)

– All Triangles (p. 284)

– MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284)

Remember the following information when using selective meshing:

• Selective meshing is enabled by default. You can use the Allow Selective Meshing (p. 389) option
to disable it. See Disabling Selective Meshing (p. 448) for information about Meshing application be-
haviors when selective meshing is disabled.

• Selective meshing is not persistent for a geometry update or re-mesh operation. However, you can
use the Mesh worksheet to create a selective meshing history so that your meshing steps can be
repeated in the desired sequence. Otherwise, you must manually re-mesh bodies in the desired se-
quence. Refer to Using the Mesh Worksheet to Create a Selective Meshing History (p. 448) for details.

• When using the Preview Surface Mesh (p. 531), Preview Source and Target Mesh (p. 533), or Preview
Inflation (p. 534) feature during selective meshing, the previewed mesh will be discarded when you
perform a subsequent preview or full mesh operation. The previewed mesh will not be used to seed
the subsequent mesh operation.

• After meshing, the meshed status icon (p. 579) appears in the Tree Outline for a meshed body within
the Geometry folder, or for a multibody part whose child bodies are all meshed. If you make changes
after meshing that invalidate (p. 579) the mesh for an individual body (such as adding sizing to the
body), you will need to re-mesh that body only.

• In a multibody part, if any child bodies have been meshed and refined, another child body is unmeshed,
and you subsequently mesh the unmeshed body, the mesh state of all refined bodies in the part will
be invalidated and re-meshed during mesh generation. Similarly, if one body is unmeshed and refine-
ment is needed on another, generating the mesh will result in meshing and refinement of the entire

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
444 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Selective Meshing

part. In addition to cases involving refinement, this behavior applies in cases where post inflation is
used.

• When meshing a body that is part of a symmetry object, match control (p. 334), or pinch control (p. 187),
all bodies to which the control is applied need to be meshed at the same time. Also, if a body that
is part of a symmetry object, mesh connection object, contact match object, match control, or pinch
control fails to mesh, the body will have an invalid mesh state (p. 579) that will propagate to all other
bodies that are part of the respective object/control.

• Mesh connections (p. 485), contact matches (p. 496), post inflation (p. 170), and refinement (p. 313) are
not performed until all body meshes have been generated. These operations will either be performed
when the last body is meshed through selective meshing, or in the last step of the Generate
Mesh (p. 528) operation.

• Selective meshing is boundary constrained. That is, if you add a size control to a face that is adjacent
to an up-to-date body, the edges of that face will be recovered from the existing mesh. Due to the
boundary constraints, the mesher cannot split the edges to aid in meshing and will fail if it attempts
to do so.

• When you mix mesh methods in multibody parts, the manner in which topology shared by multiple
bodies is protected depends on whether adjacent bodies are being meshed with Patch Independent
methods (Patch Independent Tetrahedron (p. 210), MultiZone (p. 242), or MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284))
and/or Patch Conforming methods (Patch Conforming Tetrahedron (p. 208), Sweep (p. 235) [general
or thin], or Hex Dominant (p. 233)):

– The interface between a Patch Conforming method and a Patch Conforming method is not protected.

– The interface between a Patch Conforming method and a Patch Independent method is completely
protected.

– Only the boundary is protected at the interface between a Patch Independent method and a Patch
Independent method.

• You can use the Verbose Messages from Meshing (p. 389) option to control the verbosity of messages
returned to you. Depending on the setting, before meshing a message reports the subset of bodies
that is going to be meshed and/or after meshing a message reports the subset of bodies that failed
to mesh.

• Size controls on neighboring bodies are not considered, if you are performing selective meshing. This
limitation is applicable to all mesh methods that support selective meshing. However, its impact may
differ depending on the methods being used.

For example, consider the simple model below, which consists of two boxes to which the Patch Inde-
pendent Tetra mesh method has been applied. A local size control that defines a much smaller Element
Size than the global size has been scoped to the top face of the box on the left.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 445
Specialized Meshing

Figure 178: Two Boxes with Sizing on One Face

When the mesh is generated in one step (for the entire part rather than body by body), there is a
smooth transition from the fine element size to the coarse element size, as shown in Figure 179: Mesh
Generated for Entire Part (p. 446).

Figure 179: Mesh Generated for Entire Part

However, the mesh will differ if selective (body by body) meshing is performed. Figure 180: Selective
Meshing: Left Body First (p. 447) shows the mesh when the body on the left is meshed first, and the
body on the right is meshed second. In this case although the results are different than those in the
figure above, the mesh may still be acceptable because the impact of the local size control on the
left body has influenced the boundary mesh of the right body.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
446 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Selective Meshing

Figure 180: Selective Meshing: Left Body First

In Figure 181: Selective Meshing: Right Body First (p. 447), the body on the right was meshed first, and
the body on the left was meshed second. When this meshing sequence is used, the mesh on the
right body does not recognize the size control that is scoped to the body on the left. This results in
a coarse mesh on the right body with the transition region occurring on the left body.

Figure 181: Selective Meshing: Right Body First

• When Mesh Based Connection is set to Yes,Selective Meshing is not supported.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 447
Specialized Meshing

Disabling Selective Meshing

Set the Allow Selective Meshing (p. 389) option to No to disable selective meshing. The Meshing ap-
plication behaves as follows when selective meshing is disabled:

• If you make changes after meshing that invalidate (p. 579) the mesh for an individual body in a
multibody part (such as adding sizing to the body), the mesh for all bodies in the part is invalid-
ated and you will need to re-mesh all bodies.

• If one body in a multibody part is suppressed and you mesh all the other bodies, unsuppressing
the suppressed body invalidates (p. 579) the mesh for all the bodies within that part. When you
regenerate the mesh, all the bodies within that part will be re-meshed. If the model contains
multiple parts, bodies in the other parts will not be affected and will not be re-meshed.

• The Generate Mesh (p. 528), Preview Surface Mesh (p. 531), and Clear Generated Data (p. 541)
RMB menu options are unavailable for individual bodies in multibody parts in the Tree Outline.
To use these features for a multibody part, you must right-click at the part level in the Tree
Outline.

• There is no Parts> flyout menu for the Generate Mesh (p. 528), Preview Surface Mesh (p. 531),
and Clear Generated Data (p. 541) RMB menu options in the Geometry window. If you select
one of these options, the action is performed on the entire part.

Note:

In some cases, the mesh may be generated in a selective fashion (body by body) even if se-
lective meshing is currently disabled. For example, if you use selective meshing to mesh
some of the bodies in a part, then disable selective meshing, and then generate the mesh
and the mesh process does not invalidate any bodies, the mesh is generated using selective
meshing processes. To avoid this behavior, you can use the Clear Generated Data (p. 541)
feature or force a change of the mesh state on the part. Non-selective meshing will be used
for all subsequent meshing.

Using the Mesh Worksheet to Create a Selective Meshing History

When you perform selective meshing, you control the sequence in which bodies are meshed. You can
use the Mesh worksheet to create a selective meshing history, so that your meshing steps can be re-
peated in the desired sequence for any geometry update or re-mesh operation. Figure 182: Mesh
Worksheet (p. 449) shows a sample Mesh worksheet. Each row in the worksheet corresponds to a step
in the meshing sequence. When you generate the mesh, the software processes the steps one by one.
For each step, the software selects the bodies identified by the specified Named Selection and meshes
those bodies using the meshing controls that are applied to them.

Note:

The Mesh worksheet is a helpful meshing tool, but it does not manage mesh state. State
management is handled at the prototype (Body object) and mesh levels. Mesh state is visible
in the Tree Outline in the Geometry folder and in the Mesh folder. See Understanding
States (p. 583) for more information.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
448 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Selective Meshing

Figure 182: Mesh Worksheet

There are two ways to create a selective meshing history:

• By recording meshing steps as you perform them

• By adding meshing steps to the worksheet manually

To create a selective meshing history by recording your steps:

1. Click the Mesh object in the Tree Outline.

2. Do one of the following:

Right-click the Mesh object and select Start Recording from the context menu. As a result, the
worksheet opens in recording mode automatically.
-or-
Click the Worksheet button on the toolbar and click the Start Recording button on the work-
sheet.

3. Move the worksheet to the desired location to dock it. The location will persist whenever the Mesh
object or one of its child objects is highlighted in the Tree Outline. For example, you may want to
dock the worksheet alongside the Geometry window, allowing you to view both at once.

Note:

The worksheet is not dockable on Linux platforms. On Linux, you can drag the worksheet
off the Meshing application interface, and it will then appear in its own separate window.

4. Do one of the following:

Select one or more bodies or parts in the Geometry window, right-click, and select Generate
Mesh on Selected Bodies. If you did not dock the worksheet, you may need to click the
Worksheet button on the toolbar or the Graphics tab at the bottom of the worksheet to return
to the Geometry window first.
-or-
Select one or more bodies or parts in the Tree Outline, right-click, and select Generate Mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 449
Specialized Meshing

As a result, a Named Selection for the selected set is generated (named Meshing_1, Meshing_2,
Meshing_3, and so on) and is added to the worksheet automatically.

During recording, other steps in the worksheet are ignored while the mesh for the selected set is
being generated. See below for additional notes on recording and playback behaviors.

5. Repeat step 4 for each meshing step in the desired sequence.

6. When you are done meshing bodies/parts, do one of the following:

Right-click the Mesh object and select Stop Recording from the context menu.
-or-
Click the Stop Recording button on the worksheet.

Note:

You do not have to record the meshing for all bodies, only those for which you want to
record the meshing order. See Mesh Worksheet Recording and Playback Behaviors (p. 450)
for details.

To create a selective meshing history manually:

1. Click the Mesh object in the Tree Outline.

2. Click the Worksheet button on the toolbar.

3. Move the worksheet to the desired location to dock it. The location will persist whenever the Mesh
object or one of its child objects is highlighted in the Tree Outline. For example, you may want to
dock the worksheet alongside the Geometry window, allowing you to view both at once.

Note:

The worksheet is not dockable on Linux platforms. On Linux, you can drag the worksheet
off the Meshing application interface, and it will then appear in its own separate window.

4. Add a row to the worksheet by right-clicking on the table and selecting Add from the context menu.

5. In the new row, click the Named Selection column and select a Named Selection from the Named
Selection drop-down.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each meshing step in the desired sequence.

Mesh Worksheet Recording and Playback Behaviors

Remember the following information regarding recording and playback behaviors:

• During recording, the button in the upper-right corner of the worksheet is red. When recording is
stopped, the button is green.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
450 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Selective Meshing

• When you start recording, the software checks for meshed bodies and verifies that each meshed
body is accounted for in the worksheet. If any extraneous meshed bodies are found, recording does
not occur and an error message is issued. You must clear the mesh entirely (or at least clear the mesh
from the bodies that are not being used by the worksheet) before you can begin recording. To do
so, use the Clear Generated Data (p. 541) option or click the Clear Generated Mesh button on the
worksheet.

• When you start recording, the states of the bodies being used by the worksheet are checked. If any
body is not in a meshed state, recording does not occur and an error message is issued. You must
bring the mesh up-to-date before you can begin recording. To do so, right-click the last step in the
worksheet and select Generate Mesh Through This Step from the context menu. See below for
more information about using this option.

• As steps are being recorded, they are appended to the existing steps in the worksheet.

• Other steps in the worksheet are ignored while the mesh for the selected set is being generated.

• After you have entered recording mode, recording stops when the mesh is up-to-date. An exception
to this behavior occurs if you record one or more steps but then suppress all remaining unmeshed
bodies. In such cases, the mesh will be up-to-date but recording will not stop automatically. You
must click Stop Recording.

• During recording/playback, post mesh operations (including mesh connections (p. 485), contact
matches (p. 496), post inflation (p. 170), and refinement (p. 313)) do not occur until the last step in the
worksheet, after all meshing is complete.

• If you select the Preview Surface Mesh (p. 531), Preview Source and Target Mesh (p. 533), or Preview
Inflation (p. 534) feature, recording stops and a warning message is issued.

• The Generate Mesh (p. 528) option is context sensitive. It behaves differently depending on where
you invoke it. If you invoke it from the Mesh object in the Tree Outline (RMB on Mesh folder >
Generate Mesh), it behaves similar to the Preview options in that recording stops. If you invoke it
from the Geometry object (RMB on Geometry folder > Generate Mesh) or from the Geometry
window (RMB > Generate Mesh On Selected Bodies), the operation is treated as a selective meshing
step and is recorded.

• If you insert a step manually, recording stops and a warning message is issued.

• If you delete a step manually, recording stops and a warning message is issued.

• If the mesh fails, recording stops and a warning message is issued.

• To replay steps incrementally, right-click in the row of interest and select Generate Mesh Through
This Step from the context menu. As a result, recording stops, any existing mesh is cleared, and all
meshing steps prior to and including the selected step are replayed in the Geometry window.

Mesh Worksheet Named Selection Behaviors

Remember the following information regarding Named Selection behaviors:

• Only Named Selections that consist of bodies are selectable from the worksheet's Named Selection
drop-down.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 451
Specialized Meshing

• If the model contains bodies that are not included in any Named Selection, these bodies are meshed
last.

• If a Named Selection is used by the worksheet, the Used by Mesh Worksheet field in the Details
View for that Named Selection is set to Yes, even if the corresponding worksheet step is inactive.

• For Named Selections that are generated automatically by the worksheet, the Send to Solver (p. 78)
option in the Details View is set to No by default. The default is Yes for Named Selections that you
create. The worksheet respects the user-defined settings. That is, if you create a Named Selection,
retain the Send to Solver setting of Yes, and subsequently use that Named Selection in the worksheet,
the Named Selection will be passed to the solver as expected.

• If a change to a Named Selection being used by the worksheet causes the Named Selection to become
underdefined or invalid, the corresponding worksheet step will be deactivated without invalidating
the worksheet. Reasons a Named Selection may become underdefined or invalid include:

– You change the scope of a Named Selection from body to face/edge

– A geometry update changes the scope of a Named Selection, or causes the software to try to
delete the Named Selection

• If you delete a named selection manually, recording stops and a warning message is issued.

• From the Tree Outline, you can suppress/unsuppress Named Selections or bodies included in Named
Selections that are being used by the worksheet, and the corresponding worksheet step will be de-
activated/activated accordingly without invalidating the worksheet.

You also can activate/deactivate steps directly on the worksheet. By default, a check mark ( ) appears
on the worksheet, meaning steps that correspond to all unsuppressed bodies/Named Selections are
active. To deactivate a single step, clear the corresponding check box. To deactivate all active steps,
click and it is replaced by . Toggling between and activates/deactivates the steps
corresponding to all unsuppressed bodies/Named Selections. Toggling step activation on the worksheet
has no effect on the suppressed status of the corresponding bodies/Named Selections in the Tree
Outline.

When a step is inactive, its row in the worksheet is grayed out. Inactive steps are skipped during
mesh generation and other worksheet operations.

To obtain the example shown in Figure 183: Mesh Worksheet Step Deactivation (p. 453), the Converter
Named Selection was suppressed in the Tree Outline.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
452 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Inflation Controls

Figure 183: Mesh Worksheet Step Deactivation

Miscellaneous Points to Remember

• To delete a row from the worksheet, right-click in the row of interest and select Delete from the
context menu. The worksheet, including the meshing sequence, will be updated automatically.

• Click the Delete All Steps button to clear all data from the worksheet.

• If the mesh fails at any point in the process, the process terminates but returns as much of the mesh
as possible.

• If you change the worksheet after you mesh, those changes will not be reflected in your meshing
state as the worksheet does not affect meshing state. The changes will take effect the next time you
generate a mesh.

• If you select bodies to mesh individually (by using the Generate Mesh On Selected Bodies (p. 528)
option in the Geometry window, the Generate Mesh (p. 528) option in the Geometry folder, or by
using the Preview Surface Mesh (p. 531), Preview Source and Target Mesh (p. 533), or Preview Infla-
tion (p. 534) feature), the Meshing application ignores the worksheet and generates the mesh for the
selected bodies.

• If you select Part or Body objects in the Geometry folder in the Tree Outline, right-click, and then
select Generate Mesh (p. 528) from the context menu, the Meshing application ignores the worksheet
and generates the mesh for the selected parts/bodies.

• When you resume a saved project from an older release, you should generate worksheet based named
selections manually after meshing to update the named selections.

• When generating a mesh from the Mesh Worksheet, if the last step fails, mesher attempts to remesh
the entire part, including bodies not listed in the named selection.

Inflation Controls
Inflation is useful for CFD boundary layer resolution, electromagnetic air gap resolution or resolving
high stress concentrations for structures.

The following sections provide the high-level steps to follow to assign inflation depending on the selected
mesh method.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 453
Specialized Meshing

For information on setting global inflation controls and descriptions of all of the individual inflation
controls, refer to Inflation Group (p. 161). Alternatively, you can use local inflation mesh controls to apply
inflation to specific boundaries. For details, refer to Inflation Control (p. 345). For general information
on applying inflation controls in combination with the various mesh method controls, refer to Meshing:
Mesh Control Interaction Tables (p. 475).

Inflation Controls With Sweeper

Inflation is a pre process for the sweeper (p. 235). The source face is meshed and then inflated before
sweeping with the sweeper.

Note:

• Inflation is supported only on the source face(s) of the sweep (that is, inflation on the side
faces). Inflation away from the source face(s) is not supported.

• You do not have to select a source face for sweeping with inflation. You can simply pick
faces for inflation and the Meshing application will internally place a Sweep method on
the adjacent bodies using the inflated faces as the sources (unless another method already
exists).

To add boundary layers to a source face for sweeping:

1. Apply a Method control to a body.

2. Set Method to Sweep.

3. Set Src/Trg Selection to Manual Source or to Manual Source and Target.

4. Scope the source (and target if Manual Source and Target was selected).

5. Set Free Face Mesh Type to All Quad, All Tri, or Quad/Tri. Your selection determines the shape
of the elements used to fill the swept body (pure hex, pure wedge, or a combination of hex/wedge
respectively). The boundary region of the source/target faces will always be meshed with quad
layers. Refer to Figure 184: Sweep Method With Inflation: Hex Fill (p. 455) and Figure 185: Sweep
Method With Inflation: Wedge Fill (p. 456).

6. Enter additional sweep settings, as desired, in the Details View.

7. Select the source face and insert an Inflation control.

8. Select the outer boundary edges of the source face for inflation (p. 346) (the edges that you want
inflation to grow away from).

9. Enter additional inflation settings, as desired, in the Details View.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
454 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Inflation Controls

10. Mesh the body.

Note:

If the target face has a different number of edges than the source face, the bias of the
boundary layer may not be transferred correctly.

To obtain the mesh shown in Figure 184: Sweep Method With Inflation: Hex Fill (p. 455), Free Face Mesh
Type was set to All Quad. Notice the boundary region is meshed with quad layers.

Figure 184: Sweep Method With Inflation: Hex Fill

To obtain the mesh shown in Figure 185: Sweep Method With Inflation: Wedge Fill (p. 456), Free Face
Mesh Type was set to All Tri. Notice the boundary region is meshed with quad layers.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 455
Specialized Meshing

Figure 185: Sweep Method With Inflation: Wedge Fill

Inflation Controls With Patch Conforming Mesher

Inflation can be either a pre process or a post process for the patch conforming (p. 208) mesher.

To add boundary layers to a face using the Patch Conforming Mesher:

1. Apply a Method control to a body.

2. Set Method to Tetrahedrons.

3. Set the tetrahedrons Algorithm to Patch Conforming.

4. Select the body and insert an Inflation control.

5. Select the faces to be inflated (p. 346) (the faces that you want the inflation layers to grow away
from).

6. Enter additional settings, as desired, in the Details View.

7. Mesh the body.

Inflation Controls With Patch Independent Mesher

Inflation is a post process for the patch independent (p. 210) mesher after it has created the tetrahedron
elements.

To add boundary layers to a face using the Patch Independent Mesher:

1. Apply a Method control to a body.

2. Set Method to Tetrahedrons.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
456 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Inflation Controls

3. Set the tetrahedrons Algorithm to Patch Independent.

4. Set the Min Size Limit.

5. Select the body and insert an Inflation control.

6. Select the faces to be inflated (p. 346) (the faces that you want the inflation layers to grow away
from).

7. Enter additional settings, as desired, in the Details View.

8. Mesh the body.

Inflation Controls With MultiZone

To add boundary layers to a face using the MultiZone (p. 242) Mesher:

1. Apply a Method control to a body.

2. Set Method to MultiZone.

3. Select the body and insert an Inflation control.

4. Select the faces to be inflated (p. 346) (the faces that you want the inflation layers to grow away
from).

5. Enter additional settings, as desired, in the Details View.

6. Mesh the body.

For more information, see MultiZone Support for Inflation (p. 440).

Inflation Controls With MultiZone Quad/Tri Mesher

To add boundary layers to a face using the MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284) Mesher:

1. Apply a Method control to a body.

2. Set Method to MultiZone Quad/Tri.

3. Select a body or face and insert an Inflation control.

4. Select the edges to be inflated (p. 346) (the edges that you want inflation to grow away from).

5. Enter additional settings, as desired, in the Details View.

6. Mesh the body.

Note:

Base mesh caching is not supported for MultiZone Quad/Tri, so a change to inflation controls
requires remeshing.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 457
Specialized Meshing

Inflation Controls With Quadrilateral Dominant or All Triangles Mesher

Inflation is a pre process for the quadrilateral dominant (p. 282) mesher or all triangles (p. 284) mesher.

To add boundary layers to a face using the Quadrilateral Dominant or All Triangles Mesher:

1. Apply a Method control to a body.

2. Set Method to Quadrilateral Dominant or Triangles.

3. Select a body or face and insert an Inflation control.

4. Select the edges to be inflated (p. 346) (the edges that you want inflation to grow away from).

5. Enter additional settings, as desired, in the Details View.

6. Mesh the body.

Inflation Controls With Cartesian Mesher

Inflation is a Pre process only for the Body Fitted Cartesian (p. 261) mesher. For CFD physics only, three
layers are created with total thickness proportional to Element Size; for other physics preferences, only
only layer is created.

To add boundary layers to a body using the Cartesian Mesher:

1. Apply a Method control to a body.

2. Set Method to Cartesian.

3. Select the Method and add an Inflation (p. 345) control.

4. Enter additional settings, as desired, in the Details View.

5. Mesh the body.

Inflation Handling Between Bodies With Different Methods

The inflation handling between bodies where one body is meshed with the sweep method and one
body is meshed with the patch conforming tetrahedral method requires some special consideration to
ensure inflation layers propagate through the common interface. There are two such cases to consider:

• The case in which the common interface of two bodies is also a source/target face of the swept
body

• The case in which the common interface of two bodies is also a side face of the swept body

The model below will be used to explain the first case, in which the common interface of two bodies
is also a source/target face of the swept body.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
458 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Inflation Controls

Figure 186: Swept Body Shares Source/Target Face With Tet Body

In this case, inflation on the patch conforming tetrahedral method must be defined off the faces of the
wall (not common interface), or by using Program Controlled (p. 164) inflation (which ignores faces in
Named Selections and common interfaces between bodies). The swept body needs the source face to
be selected, and 2D inflation must be defined on the source face. Since 2D inflation does not support
the Smooth Transition (p. 166) option, it is best to use another option so that the inflation between
bodies will properly align.

Figure 187: Defining Inflation for a Swept Body Sharing Source/Target Face With Tet Body

After properly setting up the model and ensuring the inflation of the tet body and the swept body have
similar near-wall spacings, a mesh can be generated where the inflation layers will pass from one body
to the next with proper connections on the common interface, as shown below.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 459
Specialized Meshing

Figure 188: Detail of Proper Connections on the Common Interface

The model below will be used to explain the second case, in which the common interface of two bodies
is also a side face of the swept body.

Figure 189: Tet Body Surrounds Swept Body

In this case, inflation on the patch conforming tetrahedral method must be defined off the faces of the
wall (not common interface), or by using Program Controlled (p. 164) inflation (which ignores faces in
Named Selections and common interfaces between bodies). To properly align the inflated tet mesh to
the side faces of the swept body, a biasing must be used along the sweep direction. Since the biasing
along the sweep direction uses a different formulation than the inflation biasing, the following notes
may be helpful.

The sweep bias ratio is the ratio of largest edge to smallest edge along sweep path, the growth ratio
for inflation is a factor of the growth from the first element to the second element, etc. These relate as
described below. The equation to get the inflation growth rate to align to the swept body is:

(1/N-1)
Ir = Sb

where

Sb = Sweep Bias

N = Number of Divisions along sweep

Ir = Inflation Growth Rate

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
460 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mixed Order Meshing

Also, to get proper alignment between the first layer of inflation and sweep, you need to use the first
layer height of the swept mesh as first layer height for sweep.

Because the first layer height is computed by the software from the length of the sweep path, the
sweep bias, and the number of divisions along the sweep—and there is no easy way to get the length
of the sweep path—you should mesh the swept body first, measure the first layer height, and use this
value as input for the First Layer Height (p. 169) option when defining inflation controls. The inflation
growth rate can then be calculated using the formula above. This leads to well-aligned layers between
the sweep and tet regions, as shown below.

Figure 190: Detail of Well-aligned Layers Between the Swept and Tet Regions

Inflation and Baffles

The Meshing application provides support for meshing 0–thickness walls, or baffles, as non-manifold
faces of a solid body. Inflation is supported. See Baffle Meshing (p. 470) for more information.

Mesh Refinement
Mesh refinement is a postprocess in the mesh generation process in which the elements on the selected
topology are split. This is useful for local mesh sizing control. See the Refinement Control (p. 313) section
for more information.

Mixed Order Meshing

The Method Controls and Element Order Settings allow you to specify whether the mesh to be
generated for a given body is Quadratic (high order) or Linear (low order). Mixed Order Meshing
refers to meshing a multibody part having shared topology with some bodies as Quadratic and some
bodies as Linear. In such situations, "transitional elements" are required to connect the mesh at any
linear-to-quadratic interface. These "transitional elements" are treated as quadratic elements with
dropped midside nodes, and the side of the interface on which they appear is determined by your
meshing process. Mixed Order Meshing is not supported for Axisymmetric Sweep. See Method Controls
and Element Order Settings (p. 202) for more information.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 461
Specialized Meshing

Contact Meshing
Enhancing convergence or quality of results for structural contact analysis may require the use of contact
sizing to create similarly sized meshes where faces and bodies are coming in contact. See the Contact
Sizing Control (p. 311) section for more information.

For information about using contact meshing for rigid bodies, refer to Rigid Body Meshing (p. 463).

Winding Body Meshing

Winding body meshing creates special element types depending on the attributes given to bodies in
the DesignModeler application. No mesh controls are supported for winding bodies because of the
nature of the required mesh.

Wire Body Meshing

Wire body meshing meshes the wire bodies in an assembly, respecting any mesh controls applied to
the edges of the wire body.

Note:

Wires and beams are both considered to be line bodies and are handled in the same way
by the mesher.

Pyramid Transitions
Pyramid transitions occur when a swept or hex dominant body abuts, that is, shares faces with, a body
meshed with tetrahedrons. The mesher will try to insert the pyramids into the body meshed with tetra-
hedrons. If that is not possible, the hexahedron at the boundary will be split into pyramids and tetra-
hedrons to create a conformal mesh between the two bodies. Pyramids will also be formed at the inter-
face of an end cap of inflation on quad surface mesh and a tet body.

Match Meshing and Symmetry

For parts that are symmetric about a cylindrical axis, you can match the mesh by using either cyclic
mesh matching or the Symmetry feature in the Mechanical application. The following table describes
when to use each method:

Table 2: Mesh Matching for Symmetrical Parts

If you want to... Do this...

Match the mesh, but you do not want to Apply a Cyclic Mesh Match control (p. 336).
automatically generate solver constraints for
periodic mesh
Match the mesh, and automatically generate Define the symmetry in the model by applying
solver constraints for periodic mesh the necessary Symmetry regions, Periodic regions,
or Cyclic regions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
462 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rigid Body Meshing

When Periodic Region or Cyclic Region objects exist in the Symmetry folder, match face mesh controls
will be created internal to the mesher. If the mesher cannot match the mesh on the objects in the
Symmetry folder, it will return a failure or informational message.

Related topics include:

• For a description of the Symmetry folder and its support of Periodic Region and Cyclic Region
objects, see Symmetry in the Mechanical help.

• For an overview of the match control and its limitations, see Match Control (p. 334).

• For general information on applying match controls in combination with the various mesh method
controls, see Meshing: Mesh Control Interaction Tables (p. 475).

Rigid Body Meshing

Rigid body meshing simplifies the representation of a model by reducing it to the contact regions and
the centroid of the model. That is, when a part is defined as a rigid body, the mesher knows to mesh
only the contact regions, and to create a single mass element at the centroid of the model. (The centroid
is represented by an Inertial Coordinate System. Refer to the discussion of Rigid Bodies in the Mech-
anical help for more information.)

Rigid body meshing can be used for both 2D and 3D contact. For 2D models, only the edges of the rigid
surface in contact are meshed because the surface mesh is not needed for the analysis. Similarly, for
3D models, only the faces of the rigid body in contact are meshed because the volume mesh is not
needed. The elements used to mesh the contact surfaces can be quadrilateral or triangular in shape,
with or without midside nodes.

The following surface mesh methods can be applied to rigid bodies:

• Quadrilateral Dominant (p. 282)

• Triangles (p. 284)

Rigid body contact meshing respects mapped face controls (p. 314) and sizing (p. 296) controls. If 2D in-
flation (p. 161) is applied, inflation layers are generated for the surfaces in contact.

If a method control is scoped to a rigid body, the Method control is set to Quadrilateral Dominant
by default, but you can change the value to Triangles. When Method is set to Quadrilateral Dominant,
an additional option called the Free Face Mesh Type control is available for most analyses and can be
set to either Quad/Tri (default) or All Quad.

For Transient Structural, Rigid Dynamics, and Explicit Dynamics analyses, certain default behaviors related
to rigid body meshing differ depending on analysis type and solver. Additionally, the Free Face Mesh
Type option is replaced by the Rigid Face Mesh Type option to determine the default element shape

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 463
Specialized Meshing

for rigid body face meshing. The table below provides information you should be aware of when selecting
one of these analysis types from the Toolbox and adding it to a Workbench project.

Table 3: Rigid Body Meshing: Default Behaviors for Rigid Dynamics, Transient Structural, and
Explicit Dynamics Analyses

Standard Solver Element Straight Rigid Body Rigid Face

Analysis Type Order (p. 101) Sided Behavior (p. 182) Mesh Type
Elements (p. 180)
Rigid Rigid Body - Not applicable Full Mesh Quad/Tri
Dynamics Dynamics
Transient Mechanical Program No Dimensionally Quad/Tri
Structural APDL Controlled Reduced
Explicit Autodyn Linear Not applicable Full Mesh Quad/Tri
Dynamics
LS-DYNA LS-DYNA Linear Not applicable Full Mesh Quad/Tri

For information about generating a full mesh on rigid bodies instead of a surface mesh, refer to the
description of the Rigid Body Behavior (p. 182) control.

Using 2D Rigid Body Contact Meshing

This section describes the basic steps for using 2D rigid body contact meshing.

To define a 2D rigid body for contact meshing:

1. Open the model in the Mechanical application.

2. In the Tree, expand the Geometry object so that the body objects are visible.

3. Click the body that you want to define as the rigid body.

4. In the Details> Definition view for the body, change the value of the Stiffness Behavior control
to Rigid.

Note:

When you change the Stiffness Behavior to Rigid, an Inertial Coordinate System
object is added to the Tree automatically. This Inertial Coordinate System represents
the centroid of the body.

5. If desired, change the value of the Element Order (p. 101) control.

6. Generate the mesh by right-clicking on the Mesh object in the Tree and selecting Generate Mesh.

Note:

The mesh for the 2D rigid body is created only in the contact region (edges in contact).
See the figure below for an example.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
464 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rigid Body Meshing

In the figure below, which shows a model of a slab and a cylinder, the cylinder has been defined as a
rigid body. When the mesh is generated, the cylinder is meshed with line elements as shown.

Figure 191: 2D Rigid Body Contact Meshing

Using 3D Rigid Body Contact Meshing

This section describes the basic steps for using 3D rigid body contact meshing.

To define a 3D rigid body for contact meshing:

1. Open the model in the Mechanical application.

2. In the Tree, expand the Geometry object so that the body objects are visible.

3. Click the body that you want to define as a rigid body.

4. In the Details> Definition view for the body, change the value of the Stiffness Behavior control
to Rigid.

Note:

When you change the Stiffness Behavior to Rigid, an Inertial Coordinate System
object is added to the Tree automatically. This Inertial Coordinate System represents
the centroid of the body.

5. If you wish to control the mesh method, insert a mesh method by right-clicking on the Mesh object
in the Tree and selecting Insert> Method.

Note:

The Automatic method appears in the Details View.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 465
Specialized Meshing

6. In the Details View, scope the mesh method to the rigid body.

Note:

By default, the Method control is set to Quadrilateral Dominant for rigid bodies, but
you can change the value to Triangles. When Method is set to Quadrilateral Dominant,
an additional option called the Free Face Mesh Type control is available and can be
set to either Quad/Tri (default) or All Quad.

7. If desired, change the value of the Element Order (p. 101) control.

8. Generate the mesh by right-clicking on the Mesh object in the Tree and selecting Generate Mesh.

Note:

The mesh for the 3D rigid body is created only in the contact region (faces in contact).

Thin Solid Meshing

Thin solid meshing is useful for thin solid bodies where one element through the thickness is desired.
This meshing also takes advantage of the Mechanical APDL application's SOLSH190 element or the LS-
DYNA thick shell element .

• It may be advantageous to use a Sizing control on the faces/body along with mapped Face Meshing
controls to give a uniform mesh.

• Virtual Topology (p. 545) may be necessary to satisfy the topological criterion for thin solid meshing.

CAD Instance Meshing

The Meshing application supports pattern instances that have been defined for part features or assembly
components in a CAD system, such as Creo Parametric, Parasolid, or Solid Edge. These instance definitions
remain in the CAD system. When a model with instances is read in to Workbench, the geometry is read
once and then copied for each instance. Similarly, when meshing, the Meshing application generates
the mesh once and then copies it for each instance. Support for pattern instances provides these benefits:

• Improved geometry import speed because only one instance of a part is read in

• Improved meshing speed because only one instance of a part is meshed, copies of the first in-
stance's mesh are used for the remaining instances

Remember the following information when working with instances:

• Instances of bodies are not supported. Single body part instancing is supported, as well as certain
variations of instancing of multibody parts (for example, multibody parts can be instanced, but a
body cannot be instanced within a single part). For more information, refer to the discussion of feature
modeling's effect on instance data in the DesignModeler help.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
466 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 CAD Instance Meshing

• If you apply a mesh control to a part that is instanced, each instance must have the same control
applied to it or the part will be meshed individually. For example, if your model consists of four parts
that are instanced but only one part has an edge sizing control applied to it, that part will be meshed
individually and the other three parts will be meshed once and instanced.

• Instancing is not supported for the following controls. Each part that has any of these controls applied
to it will be meshed individually, regardless of whether the control in question is applied to all in-
stances:

– Sphere of influence (p. 304) sizing

– Body of influence (p. 305) sizing

– Contact sizing (p. 311)

– Rigid body meshing (p. 463) (presence of any rigid bodies in the part)

• You can use the Extend Selection command to select a set of instances, which can be useful for
performing tasks such as applying loads or creating a Named Selection. To select a set of instances,
first select one instance, then click the Extend Selection drop-down menu and choose Extend to
Instances. Extend to Instances searches for all remaining instances that are defined for the currently
selected instance. The Extend to Instances menu option is enabled only when pattern instances are
defined in the current model.

• When using mesh methods or controls that require both body scoping and face scoping (such as
Sweep (p. 235) with source face selection or inflation (p. 345)), you can use the Object Generator to
set up the model for instancing. For details, refer to Generating Multiple Objects from a Template
Object in the Mechanical help.

• Because the mesh is copied from the first instance to the remaining instance, it follows that each in-
stance will be meshed with the same number of nodes and elements. To confirm this, after CAD in-
stances are successfully meshed, click the Geometry object in the Tree Outline. Then click the
Worksheet toolbar button. When the Worksheet appears, click the Nodes heading, which sorts the
data on that column and allows you to view the matching numbers of nodes and elements for each
instance.

• Error handling for instances is also copied. For example, if the mesher fails on one instance, all instances
will fail. However, you will receive a warning message for each instance. Refer to Figure 192: Error
Handling for Instances (p. 468), which shows a model containing eight identical pistons.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 467
Specialized Meshing

Figure 192: Error Handling for Instances

Meshing and Hard Entities

The two types of hard entities are hard edges and hard points. Hard entities are usually defined in the
DesignModeler application or a CAD system.

A hard point is an embedded point in a face or edge. Hard points are captured by nodes during the
meshing process. Hard points are not supported for the following mesh methods or controls:

• General sweeping (p. 399)

• 3D inflation (p. 161)

A hard edge is an embedded edge in a face. There are two main types of embedded edges:

• An edge in which one vertex of the edge touches the face boundary, but the other vertex does
not touch a face boundary

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
468 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Meshing and Hard Entities

• An edge in which neither of the vertices touches the face boundary

Hard edges are not supported for the following mesh methods or controls:

• General sweeping (p. 399)

• 2D or 3D inflation (p. 161)

Note:

• If the methods and controls listed above are required in your mesh, insert a Virtual Topology
and use the Simplify Faces (p. 552) option to remove the hard entities.

• Other mesh methods have certain limitations in how hard points and hard edges are
handled. For more information, refer to Limitations of Using Hard Entities with Other Mesh
Controls (p. 469).

Spot Welds
Spot welds are used to connect individual surface body parts together to form surface body model as-
semblies, just as contact is used for solid body part assemblies. Spot welds are usually defined as hard
points in the DesignModeler application or a CAD system:

• When a model is imported into the Meshing application, the mesher simply treats the hard points
as embedded points.

• Upon import to the Mechanical application, spot welds are automatically generated where hard
points are defined in the model.

For related information, refer to Point in the DesignModeler help and Spot Welds in the Mechanical
help.

Limitations of Using Hard Entities with Other Mesh Controls

Limitations of hard entities include the following:

• 3D inflation (p. 161) does not support hard entities of either type. If inflation is applied, a warning
message is issued to indicate the hard entities were ignored.

• 2D inflation (p. 161) supports hard points only.

• General Sweeping (p. 399) does not support hard points.

• The MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284) and MultiZone (p. 242) mesh methods do not respect hard entities
unless their topology is protected (p. 184).

• For the MultiZone (p. 242) mesh method only, the faces that contain the hard entities must be
selected as source faces for the hard entities to be respected.

• Hard edges may exist accidentally in a CAD model due to Boolean operations with tight tolerances
or other such operations. These accidental hard edges may be undesired, in which case you

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 469
Specialized Meshing

should remove them by using the Virtual Topology: Face Simplify feature or defeaturing them
within the DesignModeler application or a CAD system.

Baffle Meshing
The Meshing application provides support for meshing 0-thickness walls, or baffles, as non-manifold
faces of a solid body. For such models, you do not have to adjust the mesh size to capture the thin re-
gions.

Characteristics and limitations of baffle meshing include:

• For part/body level meshing, baffle meshing is supported by the Patch Conforming Tetra (p. 208),
Patch Independent Tetra (p. 210), and MultiZone (p. 242) mesh methods only. If you apply any
other mesh method to a body containing baffles, the mesh method will be suppressed, and the
reason (not supported) will be reported in the Active read-only field in the Details View. In such
cases, the body will be meshed with the Patch Conforming Tetra mesh method.

• When the MultiZone mesh method is used, the body with a baffle must be meshed with a free
mesh of tetrahedral elements. For this reason, you must set the Free Mesh Type to Tetra for
bodies with baffles.

• The Patch Conforming Tetra and Patch Independent Tetra mesh methods support inflation of
baffles. The MultiZone mesh method does not support inflation of baffles.

• When the Patch Conforming Tetra mesh method is used, inflation layers will stair step (p. 174) at
free boundary edges of the baffles.

• When the Patch Independent Tetra mesh method is used and Collision Avoidance (p. 174) is set
to Stair Stepping, inflation layers will stair step at free boundary edges of the baffles. However,
if Collision Avoidance is set to Layer Compression, full prism columns appear at the free
boundary edges.

• Program Controlled (p. 164) inflation is supported (that is, if you select Program Controlled
inflation, baffles are automatically selected to be inflation boundaries unless they are in a Named
Selection).

• Only two-sided growth cases for inflation are supported.

• Pyramid transitions are supported.

• Prism/pyramid elements are not supported for meshing crossed/intersecting baffles.

• There is a single set of nodes on the internal face.

Figure 193: Cylinder Containing Baffles (p. 471) shows a model of a cylinder that contains a series of
baffles.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
470 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Baffle Meshing

Figure 193: Cylinder Containing Baffles

In Figure 194: Section Cut Showing Baffle Meshing (p. 471), the model was meshed using Program
Controlled inflation. Since the baffles were not in a Named Selection, they were automatically selected
to be inflation boundaries. A section plane was activated to view a section cut through the model, and
the baffle faces were selected in the Geometry window.

Figure 194: Section Cut Showing Baffle Meshing

Figure 195: Detail of Inflation on Baffles (p. 472) shows a detailed view of the inflation layers on the
baffles.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 471
Specialized Meshing

Figure 195: Detail of Inflation on Baffles

Parallel Part Meshing

You can control three mechanisms in Ansys Workbench that operate in a parallelized manner:

• Remote Solve Manager Design Point updates. Refer to RSM Configuration.

• Parallel Part meshing: Tools> Options> Number of CPUs for Parallel Part Meshing

• Individual mesh methods (MultiZone Quad/Tri, Patch Independent Tetra, and MultiZone only):
Tools Options > Number of CPUs for Meshing Methods

For the most efficient use of machine resources, it is important that the running processes do not over-
saturate the processing cores or the available memory. You must allocate processing cores to each of
these mechanisms in a way that provides the most benefit for your workflow. When parallel part
meshing is invoked with the default number of CPUs, it automatically uses the cores of all available
CPUs with a minimum of 2 gigabytes per CPU core.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
472 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Parallel Part Meshing

Parallel Part Meshing Best Practices

Best practices include:

• Know how many physical processing cores are available.

• If you are using Remote Solve Manager (RSM), meshing is done serially. This option cannot be
overridden.

• For non-RSM Design Point updates, meshing is done serially by default. You can override this
option by setting the option Number of CPUs for Parallel Part Meshing explicitly under
Meshing > Advanced Options.

• If you are using more than one processor for individual meshing methods, be sure to set a balance
between the two meshing options if you are using methods that support the Number of CPUs
for Meshing Methods option (MultiZone Quad/Tri, Patch Independent Tetra, and MultiZone).
They should be set to an explicit value greater than 0.

For example, if you are using an 8 core system, setting Number of CPUs for Parallel Part
Meshing to 3 and Number of CPUs for Mesh Methods to 3 will provide a good balance. If the
mesh methods that you typically use support the Number of CPUs for Meshing Methods option,
setting the Number of CPUs for Parallel Part Meshing to 2 and the Number of CPUs for
Meshing Methods to 4 or 5 may potentially provide more benefit.

• If you are using parallel part meshing only, you can set the Number of CPUs for Parallel Part
Meshing to 0. In such cases, the software uses as many cores as possible.

• For Parallel Part meshing, you should turn off hyper-threading as this may lead to degradation
of parallel performance.

• Note that Parallel Part meshing does not support the following mesh controls:

– Contact Sizing

– Fracture

– Mesh Match via Symmetry

– Morph Service/Morphing

– Pinch

– Post Connection

– Post-Inflation

– Preview Surface Mesh/Preview Inflation

– Retry

– Refinement

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 473
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
474 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Meshing: Mesh Control Interaction Tables
This section presents the effects of applying combinations of mesh controls on the same part or body.
Topics include the meshing implication when one mesh method is applied in combination with another
mesh method, and the effects of applying various mesh controls in combination with the various mesh
methods.
Interactions Between Mesh Methods
Interactions Between Mesh Methods and Mesh Controls

Interactions Between Mesh Methods

The tables below present the effects of meshing two or more bodies in a multibody part using a com-
bination of different mesh methods:

• Using combinations of surface mesh methods

• Using combinations of solid mesh methods

• Applying a single 3D inflation control on more than one solid body when a combination of mesh
methods has been scoped to the bodies

• Applying a 3D inflation control on a solid body when more than one mesh method has been
scoped to the body

Note:

• The Cartesian (p. 261) mesh method operates at the part level, and does not support inter-
actions with other mesh methods. If one body in a multibody part is scoped to be meshed
with the Cartesian mesh method, all bodies will be added to the scoping.

• Refer to Conformal and Non-Conformal Meshing (p. 21) for information about conformal
meshing.

The table below describes the automatic sequencing of surface mesh methods when two mesh methods
are being used. If all four methods are being used, the automatic sequence is:

1. Automatic (PrimeMesh) (p. 287)

2. All Triangles (p. 284)

3. Quad Dominant (p. 282)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 475
Mesh Control Interaction Tables

4. MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284)

Note:

If you are performing selective meshing, you control the sequence. Refer to Selective Mesh-
ing (p. 444) for usage notes.

Surface Mesh Method

Surface Mesh
Method All Quad MultiZone Automatic (Prim-
Triangles (p. 284) Dominant (p. 282) Quad/Tri (p. 284) eMesh) (p. 287)
All Tri- Automatic (Prim-
N/A All Triangles first All Triangles first
angles (p. 284) eMesh) only
Quad Domin- Quad Dominant Automatic (Prim-
All Triangles first N/A
ant (p. 282) first eMesh) only
MultiZone Quad Dominant Automatic (Prim-
All Triangles first N/A
Quad/Tri (p. 284) first eMesh) only
Automatic (Prim- Automatic (Prim- Automatic (Prim- Automatic (Prim-
N/A
eMesh) (p. 287) eMesh) only eMesh) only eMesh) only

The table below describes the automatic sequencing of solid mesh methods when two methods are
being used. If more than two methods are being used, the automatic sequence is:

1. Automatic (PrimeMesh) (p. 287)

2. MultiZone (p. 242)

3. General Sweep (p. 399)

4. Thin Sweep (p. 406)

5. Hex Dominant (p. 233)

6. Patch Conforming Tetra (p. 208)

7. Patch Independent Tetra (p. 210)

Note:

• If you are performing selective meshing, you control the sequence. Refer to Selective
Meshing (p. 444) for additional usage notes.

• During automatic sequencing of solid mesh methods when inflation has been applied,
Post inflation is always applied last and uses as its input mesh the complete currently ex-
isting part mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
476 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Interactions Between Mesh Methods

Solid Mesh Method

Solid Mesh Patch Patch Auto
Method Hex General Thin
Conforming Independent MultiZone (p. 242) (Pr
Dominant (p. 233)Sweep (p. 399)Sweep (p. 406)
Tetra (p. 208)Tetra (p. 210) eMes
Hex Domin- Auto
General Thin Sweep Hex Dom- Hex Domin-
ant (p. 233) N/A MultiZone first (Prim
Sweep first first inant first ant first
fi
General Auto
General Sweep General General General 1
Sweep (p. 399) N/A MultiZone first (Prim
first Sweep first Sweep first Sweep first
fi
Thin Auto
Thin Sweep General Thin Thin
Sweep (p. 406) N/A MultiZone first (Prim
first Sweep first Sweep first Sweep first
fi
Patch Con- Patch Con- Auto
Hex Dominant General Thin Sweep
forming N/A forming MultiZone first (Prim
first Sweep first first
Tetra (p. 208) Tetra first fi
Patch Inde- Patch Con- Auto
Hex Dominant General Thin Sweep
pendent forming N/A MultiZone first (Prim
first Sweep first first
Tetra (p. 210) Tetra first fi
Mul- Auto
MultiZone MultiZone MultiZone MultiZone
tiZone (p. 242) MultiZone first N/A (Prim
first1 first first first
fi
Automatic Automatic Automatic
Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic
(Prim- (Prim- (Prim-
(PrimeMesh) (Prim- (Prim- (PrimeMesh) N
eMesh) (p. 287) eMesh) eMesh)
first eMesh) first eMesh) first first
first first

1–While mixing Sweep and MultiZone mesh methods, pre-meshed faces may be used in these ways:

• Mapped faces can be supported as side faces when MultiZone or Sweep is used to mesh sub-
sequent bodies. The pre-meshed faces may have been generated using either General Sweep
or MultiZone. There are limitations on how the face is mapped. Simple mapped faces (that is,
4-sided) are supported. However, more complicated submapped cases may cause problems.

• Mapped faces can be supported as source faces.

• Free faces (where mesh does not have a quad mapped pattern) can be supported as source
faces only.

The table below describes how inflation is handled if you apply a single 3D inflation control on more
than one solid body when a combination of mesh methods has been scoped to the bodies.

Method 1 Method 2 Supported Inflation Algorithm

Patch Conforming Tetra (p. 208) Patch Independent Post (p. 173) inflation only
Tetra (p. 210)
Patch Conforming Tetra (p. 208) MultiZone (p. 242) Pre (p. 172) inflation only1
Patch Independent MultiZone (p. 242) No inflation allowed; inflation is
Tetra (p. 210) suppressed

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 477
Mesh Control Interaction Tables

Method 1 Method 2 Supported Inflation Algorithm

Patch Conforming Tetra (p. 208) Patch Independent No inflation allowed; inflation is
Tetra (p. 210) (+ Method 3 of suppressed
MultiZone (p. 242))
General Sweep (p. 399) Any other method No inflation allowed; inflation is
suppressed
Thin Sweep (p. 406) Any other method No inflation allowed; inflation is
suppressed
Hex Dominant (p. 233) Any other method No inflation allowed; inflation is
suppressed
Automatic (PrimeMesh) (p. 287) Any other method No inflation allowed; inflation is
suppressed

1– In such cases involving MultiZone, the value of the Inflation Algorithm control displays as Pre but
an O-grid-based algorithm specific to MultiZone is used. As with the Pre inflation algorithm, the mesh
is inflated during the meshing process.

The table below describes how inflation is handled if you apply a 3D inflation control on a solid body
when more than one mesh method has been scoped to the body. In such cases, the method control
that appears lowest in the Tree is respected and therefore inflation is handled as it would normally be
handled for that method.

Lowest Method in Tree Supported Inflation Algorithm(s)

Patch Conforming Tetra (p. 208) Post (p. 173) or Pre (p. 172) inflation
Patch Independent Post (p. 173) inflation only
Tetra (p. 210)
MultiZone (p. 242) Pre (p. 172) inflation only1
General Sweep (p. 399) No inflation allowed; inflation is
suppressed
Thin Sweep (p. 406) No inflation allowed; inflation is
suppressed
Hex Dominant (p. 233) No inflation allowed; inflation is
suppressed
Automatic (PrimeMesh) (p. 287) No inflation allowed; inflation is
suppressed

1– In such cases involving MultiZone, the value of the Inflation Algorithm control displays as Pre but
an O-grid-based algorithm specific to MultiZone is used. As with the Pre inflation algorithm, the surface
mesh is inflated first and then the rest of the volume mesh is generated.

Interactions Between Mesh Methods and Mesh Controls

The tables in this section present the effects of applying various mesh controls in combination with the
various mesh methods, and include:

• Using mesh controls with the solid meshing methods

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
478 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Interactions Between Mesh Methods and Mesh Controls

• Using mesh controls with the surface meshing methods

The table below describes the effects of applying the mesh control on the left with each of the solid
meshing methods.

Solid Meshing Methods

Mesh
Patch
Patch
Control General
Thin
Hex Layered Automatic
Conforming
Independent MultiZone (p. 242) Cartesian (p. 261)
Sweep
Sweep
Dominant
(p.(p.
399) (p. 233) Tetrahedron (p. 266)(PrimeMesh) (p. 287)[a]
406)
Tetra
Tetra
(p.(p.
208)
210)
Body
Sizing
Supported
Supported Supported Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported Supported Supported
Control (p. 296)
Face
Sizing
Supported
Supported Supported Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported Supported Supported
Control (p. 296)
Edge
Sizing
Supported
Supported Supported Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported Not supported Supported
Control (p. 296)
Supported,
Supported,
Sphere but
but
Supported, but
of only
only
Supported
Supported only influences Supported
Not supported Not supported Not supported
Influence influences
influences
source face(s).
Control (p. 304) source
source
face.
face(s).
Supported,
Supported,
Body but
but
Supported, but
of only
only
Supported
Supported only influences Supported
Not supported Not supported Not Supported
Influence influences
influences
source face(s).
Control (p. 305) source
source
face.
face(s).
Contact
Sizing
Supported
Supported Supported Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported Not supported Not Supported
Control (p. 311)
Refinement
Not
Supported Not supported Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported Not supported Not supported
Control
supported
(p. 313)
Mapped N/A. All faces
Not
Face
Supported Supported Supported
Supported
Supported
are essentially Not supported Not Supported
supported
Control (p. 314) mapped.
Match Not Supported, with Not
Supported Supported
Supported
Not supported Not supported Not supported
Control
supported
(p. 334) limitations (p. 334). supported
Supported
on
Pinch Not Not
Supported Not supported sources
Supported
Not supported Not supported Not supported
Control
supported
(p. 340) supported
and
targets.
Inflation Supported
Not
Not
Supported
Supported Supported Supported Not supported Not supported
Control (p. 345) onsupported
supported

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 479
Mesh Control Interaction Tables

Solid Meshing Methods

Mesh
Patch
Patch
Control General
Thin
Hex Layered Automatic
Conforming
Independent MultiZone (p. 242) Cartesian (p. 261)
Sweep
Sweep
Dominant
(p.(p.
399) (p. 233) Tetrahedron (p. 266)(PrimeMesh) (p. 287)[a]
406)
Tetra
Tetra
(p.(p.
208)
210)
source
via
2D
inflation.
Feature Not Not
Not
Supported Not supported Supported
Not supported Not supported Not supported
Suppress
Supported
(p. 350) supported
supported
Axisymmetric
Not Not Supported with Not
Not
Supported
Not supported Not supported Not supported
Meshing
supported
supported limitations (p. 258) supported
supported
Geometry
Not Not
Not
Not
Fidelity
Supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported
supported supported
supported
supported
(p. 386)
[a] Effect of applying mesh controls with Automatic (PrimeMesh) for solid bodies when Shell-
Solid Weld -Shared Nodes is set to Yes. For more information See Automatic (Prim-
eMesh) (p. 287).

The table below describes the effect of applying the mesh control on the left with each of the surface
meshing methods.

Surface Mesh Methods

Mesh Control All Quad MultiZone Automatic
Triangles (p. 284) Dominant (p. 282) Quad/Tri (p. 284)(PrimeMesh) (p. 287)
Body Sizing Size control affects elements on body
Supported Supported
Control (p. 296) and lower topological entities.
Face Sizing Size control affects elements on face and
Supported Supported
Control (p. 296) lower topological entities.
Edge Sizing Size control affects element edge
Supported Supported
Control (p. 296) lengths on edge.
Sphere of Influence Inserts elements of specified size within
Not supported Not supported
Control (p. 304) sphere.
Inserts elements of specified size within
Body of Influence
body. Only available when Size Function Not supported Not supported
Control (p. 305)
is on.
Contact Sizing Inserts spheres of influence on contact
Not supported Not supported
Control (p. 311) faces in regions within contact tolerance.
Refinement
Refines elements as post-process. Not supported Not supported
Control (p. 313)
Mapped faces are meshed before any
other faces. Interval assignment may
Mapped Face
affect edge divisions. No sphere of Supported Not Supported
Control (p. 314)
influence support. No mesh based
defeaturing or pinch support.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
480 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Interactions Between Mesh Methods and Mesh Controls

Surface Mesh Methods

Mesh Control All Quad MultiZone Automatic
Triangles (p. 284) Dominant (p. 282) Quad/Tri (p. 284)(PrimeMesh) (p. 287)
Edge meshes are matched for sheet, 2D,
and 3D bodies. Face meshes are
Match Control (p. 334) matched across bodies. Match controls Not supported Not supported
cannot be applied across multiple parts.
Additional restrictions (p. 334) apply.
Pinch Control (p. 340) Supported Not supported Not supported
Inflation
Supported Supported Not Supported
Control (p. 345)
Weld (p. 362) N/A N/A N/A Supported
Repair
N/A N/A N/A Supported
Topology (p. 355)
Connect (p. 359) N/A N/A N/A Supported
Deviation (p. 385) Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported
Quad Layer (p. 380) Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported
Pull (p. 516) Supported Supported Supported Supported
Geometry Fidelity
Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported
(p. 386)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 481
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
482 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Meshing: Miscellaneous Tools
The miscellaneous meshing tools described in the following sections include:
Generation of Contact Elements
Renaming Mesh Control Tools
Mesh Numbering
Mesh Editing
Common Display Features

Generation of Contact Elements

When you load a model into the Meshing or Mechanical application, by default, connections are found
between parts that have faces in proximity of each other. Depending on the application, you may want
the boundaries common to two parts to be similar, so that contact definitions or non-conformal interface
definitions may be more accurate. To get common boundaries between parts in an assembly, you should
first imprint all the parts with each other in Discovery Modeling or DesignModeler (p. 21). Then, when
you edit the model in the Meshing or Mechanical application, you should define specific contact condi-
tions.

One of those conditions is tolerance, which controls the extent of contact between parts in an assembly.
Tolerance is set as a percentage of the bounding box of the assembly. The bounding box is the smallest
volume that the assembly will fit in. You can change the tolerance (between -100 and 100) in the Options
dialog box under the Mechanical application's Connections category.

The higher the number, the tighter the tolerance. A loose tolerance generally increases the number of
contact faces and areas of contact between parts, while a tight tolerance will decrease the number of
contact faces.

Each face of a part is checked against the faces of other parts in the assembly. A connection is generated
between any faces within the tolerance. You can use overlap tolerances to further limit which faces are
in contact if you want only the faces that fully overlap to be found in contact.

When solving in the Mechanical solver, the elements for the two sets of faces that make up a contact
pair are compared. Contact elements are generated for element pairs that are within the tolerance, but
element pairs outside the tolerance are ignored.

Recommendations for Defining Contact for CFD Analyses

CFD users should be aware of the following recommendations:

• The Auto Detect Contact On Attach option controls whether contact detection is computed
upon geometry import. If you do not want contact detection to be computed, make sure that
it is disabled by selecting Tools> Options from the Ansys Workbench main menu, and then se-

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 483
Miscellaneous Tools

lecting either the Mechanical or Meshing category as appropriate. The option is enabled by default
in both applications.

• If you are an Ansys Fluent user, you generally want to imprint all the parts with each other in
Discovery Modeling or DesignModeler (p. 21) as mentioned above. Failing to imprint parts may
lead to connections that have cyclic redundancy and may fail to output to the solver.

• For Ansys Fluent users, a boundary zone type of INTERFACE is assigned automatically to the
contact source and contact target entities that compose contact regions at the time of mesh
export. See Special Cases (p. 54) for details.

Renaming Mesh Control Tools

You can rename any of the mesh control tool objects to include the name assigned to the part or body.
To do this, right-click the object and choose Rename Based on Definition from the context menu. For
example, if you scope a Refinement tool to a body named Tube and choose Rename Based on
Definition, the mesh control tool name changes from Refinement to Refinement on Tube. The name
change is reflected both in the tree and as a label on the body.

Mesh Numbering
The Mesh Numbering feature allows you to renumber the node and/or element numbers of a generated
meshed model consisting of flexible parts. The feature is useful when exchanging or assembling models
and could isolate the impact of using special elements such as super elements. For details, refer to Mesh
Numbering in the Mechanical help.

In the Details view, when the Read Only is set to Yes under the Model Assembly group, you cannot
access Mesh Numbering. When the mesh is read only, mesh renumbering fails and provides an error
message.

Mesh Editing
Mesh Editing enables you to improve or refine the quality of a mesh and more efficiently create con-
tinuous, conformal meshes for large models with multiple parts. You can move individual nodes, merge
nodes together, match nodes, or use mesh connections to join the meshes of topologically disconnected
surface bodies and solids.

If the nodes on two different parts are coincident (there are duplicate nodes at the same location), it
is faster to merge the nodes to join them. If the nodes are at different locations, you should use mesh
connections or contact matches.

Mesh Connections work only for sheet bodies, and Contact Matches work only for solid bodies. You
can use Node Move and Node Merge for solid, sheet, and line bodies.

Note:

Ansys DesignSpace licenses do not support the Mesh Editing feature.

The Mesh Editing feature is described in the following sections:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
484 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

Inserting a Mesh Edit Object

Mesh Connections
Contact Matches
Node Merge
Node Move
Pull

Inserting a Mesh Edit Object

Mesh Editing tools, such as Mesh Connections (p. 485), Contact Matches (p. 496), Node Merge (p. 508),
and Node Move (p. 512) are listed in the tree hierarchy as children of the Mesh Edit object.

To insert a Mesh Edit object:

• Right-click the Model object and choose Insert > Mesh Edit.

If you have already created a Mesh Edit object, the option will not be available from the Insert
menu.

• Right-click the Mesh object and choose Insert, then choose any of the following:

– Mesh Connection Group

– Manual Mesh Connection (for manual mesh connections)

– Contact Match Group

– Contact Match (for manual mesh contact match)

– Node Merge Group

– Node Merge

– Node Move

– Pull

A parent Mesh Edit object is created automatically.

• On the Mesh Edit toolbar, select Mesh Edit, and then select an option.

A parent Mesh Edit object is created automatically.

When you add a Manual Mesh Connection, Contact Match, or Node Merge object, the corresponding
group object is created as well.

Mesh Connections
Mesh connections enable you to join the meshes of topologically disconnected surface bodies that
may reside in different parts. They are an alternate option to connecting the geometry (for example,
by using the DesignModeler application to repair small gaps). However, geometry tolerances are

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 485
Miscellaneous Tools

tighter than the tolerances used by mesh connections and often lead to problems in obtaining con-
formal mesh.

Scoping
With mesh connections, the connections are made at the mesh level and tolerance is based locally
on mesh size. Connections are made edge-to-face or vertex-to-face, they connect edge(s) or vertices
on face(s) to another face to pinch out the gap and create conformal mesh between the edge(s) and
face(s).

Since mesh connections are a post mesh process–the mesh is pinched in a separate step after
meshing is complete–the base mesh is stored to allow for quicker updates. That is, if you change a
mesh connection or meshing control, only local re-meshing is required to clean up the neighboring
mesh.

Note:

With Ansys Workbench Release 16.0, post pinch behaviors are migrated into Mesh Con-
nections. When you regenerate a mesh that was created using Pinch Behavior settings,
the new mesh might report different results than the previous mesh.

Surface Bodies With No Shared Topology:

Same Surface Bodies With Edge-To-Edge Mesh Connection Established:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
486 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

Treatment of Legacy Databases

Resuming a legacy database (prior to v16), the application moves Mesh Connection objects and the
associated Connection Group folders that contain them to the new Model-level Mesh Edit parent
folder.

Application
To apply mesh connections:

1. Insert Mesh Connection objects automatically or manually.

• Mesh connections can be automatically generated using the Detect Mesh Connections option
available from the right-click context menu of the Mesh Connections or Mesh Connection
Group folder. The Tolerance Value, pairing type, and other properties used for auto detection
can be set in the Details view of the Mesh Connection Group folder under the Auto Detection
category. Sheet thickness can also be used as a Tolerance Value.

The automatic mesh connections feature is very helpful, but it can only detect edge-to-face
connections. If you need to define edge-to-edge connections, you will need to define them
manually. The feature can also find and create connections that you may not want. Always review
the connections, or at least be aware that if problems arise, they may be due to automatically
generated mesh connections.

• For more control, or to control the engineering design, you may want to insert Mesh Connection
objects manually.

Highlight the Mesh Connection Group folder and select the Manual Mesh Connection option
on the Mesh Edit context tab, or right-click the object and select Insert > Manual Mesh Con-
nection.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 487
Miscellaneous Tools

The Manual Mesh Connection option is also available when the top-level Mesh/Mesh Edit
folder is selected. Selecting the option at this level adds a Mesh Connection Group object in
addition to a Mesh Connection object.

You can also select one or more Contact Regions or the Contacts folder, right-click, and select
Create>Mesh Contact(s) or Connection(s). This option enables you to create Mesh Connection
objects from Contact Regions. The application scopes the new Mesh Connection objects to the
geometries of the Contact Region(s) and sets the tolerance to be equal to the trim tolerance
of the contact region. The Mesh connections are added into a new Mesh Connection Group
folder.

2. In the Details view specify Primary Geometry and Secondary Geometry.

• "Primary" indicates the topology that will be captured after the operation is complete. That is,
it is the topology to which the secondary topologies in the connection are projected.

• "Secondary" indicates the topology that will be pinched out during the operation. That is, it is
the topology that is projected and merged with the primary.

The primary geometry can be one or more faces or edges. The secondary geometry can only be
one or more edges or vertices. When specifying faces, the annotation is displayed on both sides
of the faces.

Note:

Mesh connections support common imprints, which involve multiple secondaries con-
nected at the same location to a common primary. See Common Imprints and Mesh
Connections (p. 491).

3. In the Details view specify Tolerance. The Tolerance here has a similar meaning to the Tolerance
Value global connection setting, and is represented as a transparent sphere. See Tolerances Used
in Mesh Connections (p. 489) for details about Tolerance and how it relates to the Snap Tolerance
described below.

4. For edge-to-face mesh connections only, in the Details view specify Snap to Boundary and Snap
Type. When Snap to Boundary is Yes (the default) and the distance from a secondary edge to
the closest mesh boundary of the primary face is within the specified snap to boundary tolerance,
nodes from the secondary edge are projected onto the boundary of the primary face. The joined
edge will be on the primary face along with other edges on the primary face that fall within the
defined pinch control tolerance. See Pinch Control (p. 340) for details.

Snap Type appears only when the value of Snap to Boundary is Yes.

• If Snap Type is set to Manual Tolerance (the default), a Snap Tolerance field appears
where you may enter a numerical value greater than 0. By default, the Snap Tolerance is
set equal to the pinch tolerance but it can be overridden here. See Tolerances Used in
Mesh Connections (p. 489) for details about Snap Tolerance and how it relates to the Tol-
erance described above.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
488 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

• If Snap Type is set to Element Size Factor, a Primary Element Size Factor field appears
where you may enter a numerical value greater than 0. The value entered should be a
factor of the local element size of the primary topology.

5. Highlight the Mesh Edit folder and choose Generate (right-click and choose from context menu).
The surface bodies are displayed and show the mesh connections.

6. If necessary, review the mesh connections:

a. Select one or more Mesh Connection or Mesh Connection Group objects, right-click, and
select Create Named Selections.

A named selection is created for each mesh connection you selected. If you selected a mesh
connection group, a named selection is created for each mesh connection within the group.
Each named selection is automatically given the same name as the mesh connection from
which you created it.

b. Click a named selection to view the mesh for the mesh connection.

Tolerances Used in Mesh Connections

You can set two separate tolerances to define mesh connections. Setting appropriate tolerances is
often critical to obtaining high quality mesh that adequately represents the geometry you want to
capture.

• Tolerance – Projection tolerance to close gaps between bodies.

• Snap Tolerance – Snap to boundary tolerance to sew up mesh at the connection (applicable to
edge-to-face mesh connections only).

The Tolerance value is used to find which bodies should be connected to which other bodies. Setting
a larger Tolerance connects more bodies together, while setting it smaller may cause some connections
to be missed. For this reason, you might want to set this to a larger value than needed. Setting a
smaller value can avoid problems in automatic mesh connection creation, but can also result in other
problems because the tolerance used in meshing is inherited from automatic mesh connection detec-
tion settings.

Using a Large Tolerance Value

For a large assembly for which you do not want to define mesh connections manually, automatic
mesh connection detection provides many benefits. Setting a large Tolerance value to find connections

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 489
Miscellaneous Tools

yields more connections, which provides a higher level of comfort that the model is fully constrained.
However, larger values can be problematic for the following reasons:

• When more automatic mesh connections are created, more duplicates can be created and the
mesher decides ultimately which connections to create. In general, making these decisions yourself
is a better approach.

• The Snap Tolerance defaults to the same value as the Tolerance. If the value of Tolerance is too
large for Snap Tolerance, the mesher may be too aggressive in pinching out mesh at the connection,
and hence the mesh quality and feature capturing may suffer.

Using a Small Tolerance Value

When mesh connections are generated automatically, the Tolerance is used on the geometry edges
and faces to determine which entities should be connected. However, the connections themselves
are not generated until meshing occurs. Because the connections are performed on nodes and elements
of the mesh rather than on the geometry, the tolerances do not translate exactly.

For example, in the case below, you would want to set a Tolerance that is slightly larger than the
gap in the geometry. If the gap is defined as x and the tolerance is set to x, automatic mesh connection
detection could find the connection, but the meshing process may result in mesh that is only partially
connected.

Tips for Setting Tolerances

As detailed above, setting the correct tolerance can be very important, and in some cases may require
some speculation and/or experimentation. The following tips may help:

• You can adjust the Tolerance used to generate automatic mesh connections after the connections
are found. Sometimes it is a good idea to use one Tolerance value to find the mesh connections,
select all the mesh connections, and then reduce or increase the Tolerance later.

• Having Snap to Boundary turned on and using a Snap Tolerance are not always advisable. It
depends on the model and the features you want to capture.

Mesh Sizing and Mesh Connections

Mesh size has an effect on the quality and feature capture of a mesh connection as follows:

• Mesh size always affects the base mesh, as features are only captured relative to mesh size.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
490 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

• During mesh connection processing, the base mesh is adjusted according to the common imprint/loc-
ation. In cases where there is a large projection or a large difference in mesh sizes between the
primary entity and the secondary entity, the common edge between bodies can become jagged.
Also, as local smoothing takes place, there can be some problems in transition of element sizes.
You can often use one of the following strategies to fix the problem:

– Use more similar sizes between source and target.

– Improve the tolerance used by mesh connections (either for projection, or for snapping to
boundary).

– Adjust the geometry's topology so that the base mesh is more accommodating to the mesh
connection.

See Common Imprints and Mesh Connections (p. 491).

Common Imprints and Mesh Connections

The tolerance for common imprints comes from the minimum element size in the footprint mesh,
which is the horizontal plate in the example below. Common imprints are made if the gap between
imprints is smaller than or equal to 5 percent of the element size in the connection region. For this
reason, setting the mesh size appropriately is important to control whether the imprints will be
common or not.

For example, in the case shown below, if you want a common imprint, the minimum element size is
set to Yes) should be >x.

In this case, you could scope local face mesh sizing on the horizontal plate to control the sizing.

Mesh Connections for Selected Bodies

You can select a geometric entity and lookup the mesh connection object in the tree outline. To find
the relevant mesh connection object:

• Right-click a geometric entity, and then click Go To > Mesh Connections for Selected Bodies.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 491
Miscellaneous Tools

Mesh Connections Common to Selected Bodies

You can select a pair of geometric entities and lookup the shared Mesh Connection object in the
tree outline. To find a relevant mesh connection object:

• Select the appropriate pair, and then click Go To > Mesh Connections Common to Selected
Bodies.

This option can be helpful for finding spurious mesh connections, in which case duplicates can be
removed.

Displaying Multiple Views of Mesh Connections

Use the Body Views button on the Mesh Edit Context tab to display parts in separate auxiliary win-
dows.

For closer inspection of mesh connections, you can use the Show Mesh option on the Display Context
tab along with Body Views and the Sync Views toggle button. When the Body Views button is en-
gaged, any manipulation of the model in the Geometry window will also be reflected in both auxiliary
windows. The Body Views toggle button enables you to display parts in separate windows and the
Sync Views toggle button, when activated, causes any change in the Geometry window to also be
reflected in the auxiliary windows.

Merging Mesh Connections

Mesh connections can be merged by selecting the desired objects, right-clicking, and selecting the
Merge Selected Mesh Connections option. During the process, the application deletes the original
objects and creates a new Mesh Connection object with a combined scoping.

Mesh Connections can only be merged under the following criteria:

• The mesh connections are not already connected.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
492 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

• The primary and secondary geometry must have similar topology for the connections being
merged. For example, if you are merging two connections and the first has a face for the
primary geometry and the second has an edge for the primary geometry, the connections
cannot be merged. If both primaries are faces and both secondaries are edges, the connections
can be merged.

When mesh connections are merged, the new mesh connections contain the merged set of entities
as primaries and secondaries.

Note:

Be aware that the merge operation process can create undesired connections. This can
create a connection that is not appropriate for mesh generation.

Diagnosing Failed Mesh Connections

The state of each mesh connection is displayed in the Tree Outline. For a description of the various
states, see Understanding Mesh Connection and Contact Match States (p. 584).

General Failures
In the event of a general mesh connection failure, the following approach is recommended:

1. Select an ignored or failed mesh connection shown in the tree and look at Control Messages in
the Details View.

Note:

You can use the Filter to identify Mesh Connection objects that are State>Ignored.
However, if a mesh connection is in an “error” state, it cannot be filtered in the tree.

2. Click Yes, Click to Display to display related error messages.

3. Right-click the error messages:

a. If a message provides “Problematic Geometry” information:

i. Select the message, right-click, and select Show Problematic Geometry from the
context menu.

This action highlights the geometry in the Geometry window that is responsible for the
message.

Note:

Any error message that is related to a specific mesh connection will be asso-
ciated with the secondary geometry in the connection.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 493
Miscellaneous Tools

ii. Select the problematic bodies, right-click, and select Go To > Mesh Connections for
Selected Bodies.

This action highlights all mesh connections attached to the problematic geometry.

iii. Review the tolerances and mesh sizes associated with the highlighted connections.

b. If a message provides “Go to Body” information:

i. Select the message, right-click, and select Go to Body from the context menu.

This action highlights the object in the Details view that is responsible for the message.

ii. Review the tolerances and mesh sizes associated with the highlighted body or bodies.

This action highlights all mesh connections attached to the problematic geometry.

Mesh Connection Failure

If you receive an error or warning message about one or more mesh connections:

1. Highlight and review the message.

2. Right-click the message and select the option Go To Object. The corresponding Mesh Con-
nection object that is at issue becomes active in the tree.

3. Verify that all of the associated properties are properly defined.

4. Right-click the message and select the option Show Problematic Geometry. The corresponding
Primary/Secondary geometry that is at issue becomes highlighted in the Graphics window.

5. Verify that the all of the associated geometries are properly defined.

Failures Due to Defeaturing from MultiZone Quad/Tri Meshing and/or Pinch Controls

Due to the patch independent nature of the MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284) mesh method, a connection
may fail because the mesh is associated with some face of the body but not with the face that is in-
volved in the connection. This type of mesh connection failure, which may also occur when pinch
controls are defined, is the result of the part mesh being significantly defeatured prior to mesh con-
nection generation. To avoid mesh connection failures when using MultiZone Quad/Tri and/or pinch
controls, use one of the following approaches:

• Use virtual topology (p. 545) to merge the faces of interest with the adjacent faces to create large
patches, and then apply mesh connections to the patches.

• Protect small faces in mesh connections by defining Named Selections.

The software does not automatically extend the connection region because doing so may lose the
engineering intent of the model.

For example, consider the two parts shown below.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
494 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

If you are using the MultiZone Quad/Tri mesh method or pinch controls, the part mesh may look
like the one shown below. Notice that one face has been defeatured out.

In this case:

• If the defeatured face is the one defined in the mesh connection, the connection will fail.

• If the other face is the one defined in the mesh connection, the connection will succeed.

• If you include both faces in the mesh connection, the connection will succeed.

Since you cannot always control which face is defeatured, the most robust and recommended approach
is to include both faces in the mesh connection.

Points to Remember
• After model assembly, you cannot generate new mesh connections in a mesh that already has
mesh connections. Mesh connections only work with a model assembly if the mesh is unconnected
in the upstream systems. Because the base meshes from the upstream systems are not available
to the assembled model, you must regenerate the mesh to use mesh connections.

• The mesh must be up-to-date before you can generate mesh connections.

If the mesh is not up-to-date, then the base mesh will be regenerated when you generate the mesh
connections.

• Although the tolerance used for finding mesh connections and for generating mesh connections
may be the same value, the tolerance itself has slightly different meanings in the two operations.
When finding mesh connections, the tolerance is used to identify pairs of geometry edges or
face(s)/edge(s). When generating mesh connections, the tolerance is used in pinching together the
edge mesh or edge/face mesh. Since the geometry consists of NURBS, and the mesh consists of
linear edges, the same tolerance may mean something slightly different in the two operations.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 495
Miscellaneous Tools

For example, consider a geometry that consists of two cylindrical sheet parts that share an interface
constructed from the same circle. Also consider that you are finding mesh connections with a tol-
erance of 0.0. In this case, the mesh connection is easily found because the two edges are exactly
the same. However, when the mesh connection is being formed, some segments of the edge may
fail to be pinched together if the mesh spacing of the two parts is different and therefore the tol-
erance of the edge mesh is different. Also see Tolerances Used in Mesh Connections (p. 489).

• For a higher order element, a midside node along the connection between a secondary and a
primary is located at the midpoint between its end nodes, instead of being projected onto the
geometry.

• Although mesh connections do not alter the geometry, their effects can be previewed and toggled
using the Display Context tab.

• For Error Limits (p. 127), mesh connections support the Standard Mechanical option only.

• If you define a mesh connection on topology to which a match control (p. 334), Face Meshing
control (p. 314), or inflation control (global (p. 161) or local (p. 345)) is already applied, the mesh
connection may alter the mesh, which in turn may eliminate or disable the match, mapped face
meshing, or inflation control.

• Mesh connections cannot be mixed with refinement (p. 313) or post inflation (p. 170) controls.

• A mesh connection scoped to geometries (for the primary and the secondary) that lie on the same
face are ignored by the mesher, and, as a result, no mesh connection is generated.

• Refer to Clearing Generated Data (p. 541) for information about using the Clear Generated Data
option on parts and bodies that have been joined by mesh connections.

• Refer to Using the Mesh Worksheet to Create a Selective Meshing History (p. 448) for information
about how mesh connection operations are processed by the Mesh worksheet.

• Mesh connections are not supported for external mesh models.

• Mesh connections are not supported between solid bodies and sheet bodies in a multibody part,
or between sheet bodies and line bodies in a multibody part.

Contact Matches
Contact matches enable you to match mesh nodes between topologically disconnected solids within
a specified tolerance. They are an alternate option to imprinting faces (for example, by using the
DesignModeler application). Geometry tolerances are typically tighter than the tolerances used by
contact matches, which can lead to problems in obtaining conformal mesh. In these scenarios, contact
matches provide a more robust option.

Similar to mesh connections, contact matches are performed on mesh nodes. Contact matches can
only be face-to-face between solid bodies.

Contact matches are a post-mesh operation, performed after the base mesh has been generated. The
base mesh is then stored so that if you change a contact match, only local re-meshing is required to
clean up the neighboring mesh. Likewise, if you make any changes to the base mesh, the contact
matches must be re-generated.
Considerations for Contact Matches

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
496 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

How Mesh Size Affects Contact Matches

How Tolerances Affect Contact Matches
Applying Contact Matches
Displaying Multiple Views of Contact Matches
Troubleshooting Failed Contact Matches

Considerations for Contact Matches

You should be aware of the following points regarding contact matches:

• After model assembly, you cannot generate new contact matches in a mesh that already has
contact matches.

Contact matches only work with a model assembly if the mesh is unconnected in the upstream
systems. Because the base meshes from the upstream systems are not available to the assembled
model, you must regenerate the mesh to use contact matches.

• The mesh must be up-to-date before you can generate contact matches.

• Contact matches are only supported for the patch conforming mesh method.

Contact matches are not supported for the following mesh methods:

– Mixed order meshing (p. 202)

• For a higher order element, a midside node along the connection between a secondary and a
primary is located at the midpoint between its end nodes, instead of being projected onto the
geometry.

• For Error Limits (p. 127), contact matches support the Standard Mechanical option only.

• If you define a contact match on a topology to which a match control (p. 334), Face Meshing
control (p. 314), or inflation control (global (p. 161) or local (p. 345)) is already applied, the contact
match may alter the mesh, which in turn may eliminate or disable the match, mapped face
meshing, or inflation control.

• Contact matches cannot be mixed with refinement (p. 313) or post inflation (p. 170) controls.

• A contact match scoped to geometries (for the primary and the secondary) that lie on the same
face are ignored by the mesher, and, as a result, no contact match is generated.

• Contact matches are not supported for external mesh models.

How Mesh Size Affects Contact Matches

Mesh size affects the quality and feature capture of a contact match as follows:

• Mesh size always affects the base mesh, as features are only captured relative to mesh size.

• During mesh contact match processing, the base mesh is adjusted according to the common
imprint and location.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 497
Miscellaneous Tools

In cases where there is a large projection or a large difference in mesh sizes between the primary
entity and the secondary entity, there could be problems in the transition of the mesh away from
the contact match area. If the mesh size difference is too great, the contact match will not be
generated. You can often use one of the following strategies to fix the problem:

– Use more similar sizes between source and target.

– Improve the tolerance used by contact matches.

– Adjust the geometry's topology so that the base mesh is more accommodating to the contact
match.

• The Tolerance also affects how the mesh is matched for these types of bodies. For more inform-
ation, see How the Tolerance Affects Gaps and Boundaries (p. 499).

How Tolerances Affect Contact Matches

Setting appropriate tolerances is critical to obtaining high quality mesh that adequately represents
the geometry you want to capture.

The Tolerance value is used to find which mesh nodes on a body should be matched to mesh
nodes on another body. Setting a larger Tolerance matches more nodes, while setting it smaller
may cause some nodes not to be matched. For this reason, you might want to set this to a larger
value than needed. Setting a smaller value can avoid problems in automatic contact matching, but
can also result in other problems because the tolerance used in meshing is inherited from automatic
contact match detection settings.

Considerations for Using a Large Tolerance Value

For a large assembly for which you do not want to define contact matches manually, automatic
mesh contact match detection provides many benefits. Setting a large Tolerance value to find
contact matches yields more matches.

However, larger values can be problematic. When more automatic contact matches are created,
more duplicates can be created, which can cause problems when attempting to match the mesh.
In general, making these decisions yourself is a better approach.

Considerations for Using a Small Tolerance Value

When contact matches are generated automatically, the Tolerance is used on the geometry edges
and faces to determine which entities should be matched. However, the contact matches themselves
are not generated until after the mesh has been generated. Because the contact matches are per-
formed on nodes and elements of the mesh rather than on the geometry, the tolerances do not
translate exactly.

For example, in the case below, you would want to set a Tolerance that is slightly larger than the
gap in the geometry. If the gap is defined as x, and the tolerance is set to x, automatic mesh contact
match detection could find the connection, but the meshing process may result in mesh that is
only partially matched.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
498 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

Figure 196: Setting the Contact Match Tolerance

How the Tolerance Affects Gaps and Boundaries

The tolerance also controls how the mesh nodes are matched when there is a gap between the
boundary edges of the "Primary" and "Secondary" bodies, or a gap between the bodies themselves,
or both.

The following figure shows how the tolerance can be used to match mesh nodes between two
solid bodies. In this example, there is a gap between the bodies, as well as a gap between the
boundary edges.

Figure 197: Contact Match with Gaps Between "Primary" and "Secondary" Bodies

Assuming that the mesh size is not too large, the following table describes how the mesh will be
matched when there are gaps between bodies and boundaries:

Table 4: Mesh Matching for Gaps

If... Then...
There is a gap between the bodies only The mesh is matched between the bodies as long
as the gap between surfaces is within the
specified tolerance. The gap will remain, but the
mesh nodes will be matched.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 499
Miscellaneous Tools

If... Then...
There is a gap between the boundary edges, but This mesh is generated first, and the parts
not between the bodies are meshed separately. The gap may be
meshed depending on the mesh sizes being
used and whether there is an imprint in the
geometry.

Note:

If there is an imprint in the

geometry and you want to
remove the gap, you can remove
it by inserting a pinch control
prior to meshing.

For more information, see Pinch

Control (p. 340).

There is a gap between both the bodies and the The mesh is matched along the boundaries as
boundary edges long as the gap is within the specified tolerance,
and the mesh size is less than or equal to the size
of the gap. If the gap is not within the tolerance,
or if the mesh size is too large, then the mesh is
matched from the edge to the interior.

The mesh size also affects how the mesh is matched for these types of bodies. For more information,
see How Mesh Size Affects Contact Matches (p. 497).

Applying Contact Matches

You can apply contact matches by using any of the following methods:

• Apply contact match controls from contact regions (p. 500)

• Automatically apply contact matches (p. 502)

• Manually apply contact matches (p. 503)

Applying Contact Match Controls from Contact Regions

1. In the Tree view, click the Contacts object and verify that, in the Auto Detection category,
the Tolerance Value is set appropriately.

This value controls the relative distance that the application will use to search for contact
between parts. However, if the tolerance is set too high, then extraneous contact matches
might be generated.

For more information about auto detection tolerance, see Connection Group.

2. Select the contact regions for which you want to create contact matches by doing one of the
following:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
500 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

• To create contact matches for one or more contact regions, select the Contact Regions, right-
click, and select Create > Mesh Contact(s) or Connection(s)

• Or, to create contact matches for all of the contact regions, right-click the Contacts folder
and select Create > Mesh Contact(s) or Connection(s)

The application scopes the new Contact Match objects to the contact region(s), and sets the
tolerance to be equal to the trim tolerance of the contact region. The Contact Match objects
are added into a new Contact Match Group folder.

3. In the Details view, specify the tolerance by setting the Tolerance Type and Tolerance Value.

The tolerance here has a similar meaning to the Tolerance Value global connection setting,
and is represented as a transparent sphere.

Setting the correct tolerance can be very important, and in some cases may require some
speculation and experimentation. You can adjust the tolerance after the contact matches are
generated by selecting the contact matches and then changing the Tolerance Value.

For details on setting the tolerance, see How Tolerances Affect Contact Matches (p. 498)

4. Generate the contact matches by doing one of the following:

To... Do this...
Generate all contact matches Right-click the Mesh Edit folder and select Generate.
Generate contact matches for Right-click the Contact Match Group object and select
a contact match group Generate.

If the base mesh is out-of-date, it is regenerated. The nodes are matched between the primary
and secondary geometries, and a message appears displaying the number of node pairs that
were matched.

If the normals between the primary and secondary faces are misaligned, some contact matches
may not be generated.

5. If necessary, review the contact matches:

a. Select one or more Contact Match or Contact Match Group objects, right-click, and select
Create Named Selections.

A named selection is created for each contact match you selected. If you selected a contact
match group, a named selection is created for each contact match within the group. Each
named selection is automatically given the same name as the contact match from which
you created it.

b. Click a named selection to view the mesh for the contact match.

To better view the mesh on the contact region, click the Wireframe button on the
Graphics toolbar.

6. If desired, merge the nodes by dragging the contact matches into a Node Merge Group.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 501
Miscellaneous Tools

The mesh nodes are matched during the contact match operation, but they are not merged.
If you want conformal mesh, you should merge the nodes.

For more information about merging nodes, see Node Merge (p. 508).

7. To convert the contact matches to geometry selections, select the contact regions, right-click,
and select Convert To > Geometry Selection.

Converting the contact matches is helpful if you want to delete the contact regions, but wish
to retain the contact matches.

Automatically Applying Contact Matches

1. If necessary, insert a Contact Match Group folder (p. 485).

2. Select the Contact Match Group folder and, in the Details view, set the Auto Detection
properties as needed.

3. Right-click the Contact Match Group folder, and then select Detect Connections.

4. In the Details view, verify the properties.

Primary Geometry, Secondary Geometry

"Primary" indicates the topology that will be captured after the operation is complete. That
is, it is the topology to which the nodes in the secondary topologies are matched. The
primary geometry can be one or more faces.

"Secondary" indicates the topology that will be matched to the primary during the operation.
The secondary geometry can be one or more faces.

Tolerance

The Tolerance here has a similar meaning to the Tolerance Value global connection setting,
and is represented as a transparent sphere.

Setting the correct tolerance can be very important, and in some cases may require some
speculation and experimentation. You can adjust the tolerance after the contact matches
are generated by selecting the contact matches and then changing the Tolerance Value.

For details on setting the tolerance, see How Tolerances Affect Contact Matches (p. 498)

5. Generate the contact matches by doing one of the following:

To... Do this...
Generate all contact matches Right-click the Mesh Edit folder and select Generate.
Generate contact matches for Right-click the Contact Match Group object and select
a contact match group Generate.

If the base mesh is out-of-date, it is regenerated. The nodes are matched between the primary
and secondary geometries, and a message appears displaying the number of node pairs that
were matched.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
502 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

The automatic contact match detection might detect contact matches that are undesirable.
Therefore, if any contact matches fail, you should verify that the contact match is necessary
before attempting to correct the error (p. 505).

If the normals between the primary and secondary faces are misaligned, some contact matches
may not be generated.

6. If necessary, review the contact matches:

a. Select one or more Contact Match or Contact Match Group objects, right-click, and select
Create Named Selections.

A named selection is created for each contact match you selected. If you selected a contact
match group, a named selection is created for each contact match within the group. Each
named selection is automatically given the same name as the contact match from which
you created it.

b. Click a named selection to view the mesh for the contact match.

To better view the mesh on the contact region, click the Wireframe button on the
Graphics toolbar.

7. If desired, merge the nodes by dragging the contact matches into a Node Merge Group.

The mesh nodes are matched during the contact match operation, but they are not merged.
If you want conformal mesh, you should merge the nodes.

For more information about merging nodes, see Node Merge (p. 508).

Manually Applying Contact Matches

1. If necessary, insert a Contact Match Group folder (p. 485).

2. Do one of the following:

• Right-click the Contact Match Group folder and select Insert > Contact Match.

• Highlight the Contact Match Group folder, and then click the Contact Match option on
the Mesh Edit toolbar.

3. In the Details view, verify the properties.

Primary Geometry, Secondary Geometry

"Primary" indicates the topology that will be captured after the operation is complete. That
is, it is the topology to which the nodes in the secondary topologies are matched. The
primary geometry can be one or more faces.

"Secondary" indicates the topology that will be matched to the primary during the operation.
The secondary geometry can be one or more faces.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 503
Miscellaneous Tools

Tolerance

The Tolerance here has a similar meaning to the Tolerance Value global connection setting,
and is represented as a transparent sphere.

Setting the correct tolerance can be very important, and in some cases may require some
speculation and experimentation. You can adjust the tolerance after the contact matches
are generated by selecting the contact matches and then changing the Tolerance Value.

For details on setting the tolerance, see How Tolerances Affect Contact Matches (p. 498)

4. Generate the contact matches by doing one of the following:

To... Do this...
Generate all contact matches Right-click the Mesh Edit folder and select Generate.
Generate contact matches for Right-click the Contact Match Group object and select
a contact match group Generate.

If the base mesh is out-of-date, it is regenerated. The nodes are matched between the primary
and secondary geometries, and a message appears displaying the number of node pairs that
were matched.

If the normals between the primary and secondary faces are misaligned, some contact matches
may not be generated.

5. If necessary, review the contact matches:

a. Select one or more Contact Match or Contact Match Group objects, right-click, and select
Create Named Selections.

A named selection is created for each contact match you selected. If you selected a contact
match group, a named selection is created for each contact match within the group. Each
named selection is automatically given the same name as the contact match from which
you created it.

b. Click a named selection to view the mesh for the contact match.

To better view the mesh on the contact region, click the Wireframe button on the
Graphics toolbar.

6. If desired, merge the nodes by dragging the contact matches into a Node Merge Group.

The mesh nodes are matched during the contact match operation, but they are not merged.
If you want conformal mesh, you should merge the nodes.

For more information about merging nodes, see Node Merge (p. 508).

Displaying Multiple Views of Contact Matches

To more closely inspect a contact match, you can display the "Primary" and "Secondary" bodies in
auxiliary windows next to the Geometry window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
504 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

Figure 198: Viewing the "Primary" and "Secondary" Bodies in Auxiliary Windows

1. Select a contact match.

2. On the Mesh Edit toolbar, click the Body Views button.

The "Primary" and "Secondary" bodies are displayed in auxiliary windows.

3. For closer inspection of contact matches, click the Show Mesh button on the Graphics Options
toolbar.

4. If desired, synchronize the views between the Geometry window and the auxiliary windows
by clicking the Sync Views button on the Mesh Edit toolbar.

By synchronizing the views, any change in the Geometry window will be reflected in the aux-
iliary windows.

Troubleshooting Failed Contact Matches

Diagnosing Failed Contact Matches
If a contact match fails, the Contact Match object may be in the "Ignored" state in the Tree Outline
( ), or a warning or error message might be displayed.

For a description of the various contact match states, see Understanding Mesh Connection and
Contact Match States (p. 584).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 505
Miscellaneous Tools

To diagnose a failed contact match:

1. If necessary, use the Filter to identify any contact matches that are in the "Ignored" state.

a. In the Outline, click the Filter drop-down menu and select State.

b. In the adjacent drop-down menu, select Ignored.

2. If the contact match is in the "Ignored" state, then display the associated error message:

a. In the Tree Outline, select the Contact Match object.

b. In the Details view, click Click to Display to display the associated error message.

You can use the Filter to identify contact matches that are in the "Ignored" state. However, if
a contact match is in an error state, it cannot be filtered in the tree.

3. For each error message, take corrective action:

If the error message... Do this...

Provides "Problematic Geometry" information 1. Right-click the error message and
select Show Problematic Geometry.

The geometry that is responsible for

the message is highlighted in the
Geometry window.

Any error message that is related to

a specific contact match will be
associated with the secondary
geometry.

2. Right-click the problematic bodies

and select Go To > Contact
Matches for Selected Bodies.

All contact matches that are

attached to the problematic
geometry are highlighted.

3. Review the tolerances and mesh

sizes associated with the highlighted
contact matches.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
506 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

If the error message... Do this...

For more information, see Correcting
Contact Match Errors (p. 507).

Provides "Go to Body "information 1. Right-click the error message and

select Go to Body.

The object that is responsible for the

message is highlighted in the Details
view.

2. Review the tolerances and mesh

sizes associated with the highlighted
body or bodies.

For more information, see Correcting

Contact Match Errors (p. 507).

This action highlights all contact

matches attached to the problematic
geometry.

Provides "Go to Object" information 1. Right-click the message and select

Go To Object.

The corresponding Contact Match

object that is at issue becomes
active in the tree.

2. Verify that all of the associated

properties are properly defined.

Correcting Contact Match Errors

Contact match errors may occur due to tolerance issues or mesh size differences. Automatic contact
match detection (p. 502) can result in undesirable contact matches. Therefore, if you used this
method to apply the contact matches, you should verify that the failed contact match is necessary
before correcting the error.

1. If there is a tolerance error, verify that the Tolerance Value is correct.

If the distance between the "Primary" and "Secondary" bodies is greater than the Tolerance
Value, then increase the tolerance.

2. Create a named selection for the failed contact matches that should have the same mesh size:

a. Select all of the failed contact matches, right-click, and select Create Named Selection.

A named selection is created for each failed contact match.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 507
Miscellaneous Tools

b. Select the named selections that should have similar mesh size, right-click, and select
Merge Selected Named Selections.

When choosing named selections, you should consider the location of the contact matches
in the assembly, and the mesh size in the regions surrounding those contact matches.

3. Define the mesh size for the faces in the named selection:

a. Right-click the Mesh object and select Insert > Sizing.

b. In the Details view, set the Scoping Method to Named Selection, and then select the
named selection that you created.

c. Define the mesh sizing by modifying the settings in the Definition group as needed.

For more information about the face sizing settings, see Descriptions of Local Sizing
Control Options (p. 302).

4. Right-click the Mesh object and select Generate.

The base mesh is regenerated with the face sizing control.

5. Right-click the Mesh Edit object and select Generate.

The contact matches are regenerated.

Node Merge
Node Merge is a mesh editing tool that enables you to merge mesh nodes within a specified tolerance,
making the mesh conformal across bodies, parts, and assemblies. Node merge can be used in con-
junction with Node Move (p. 512) to remove large gaps in meshes without degrading mesh quality
significantly. Node Merge can be performed on solid, sheet, and line bodies.

Scoping
Similar to Mesh Connections, Node merges are performed on mesh nodes. You must, however, explicitly
specify the tolerance for node merges. Node merges can be face-to-face, face-to-edge, or edge-to-
edge. Node Merge is a post-mesh operation, performed after the base mesh is generated. The base
mesh is then stored so that if you change a node merge, only local re-meshing is required to clean
up the neighboring mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
508 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

Requirements
For a Node merge to be successful, the mesh must be of similar size, and the number of mesh nodes
to be merged on both topology entities need to be equal. If nodes on the primary and secondary do
not have a 1–1 correspondence, then the resulting mesh after node merge can have holes.

Note:

Mesh Connections take priority over Node Merge operations. If nodes are connected by
mesh connections, then the Node Merge operation will ignore the connection.

Application
Node merge operation supports two methods for connecting the mesh: Automatic and Manual. They
both work similarly, with the exception that in manual node merge the node merge objects are ex-
plicitly populated in the tree, but are hidden in automatic mode. Automatic node merge is very useful
when working on very large assemblies, as large number of node merge objects can slow down
performance. Manual node merge, however, allows you to review individual node merge objects in
detail.

A node merge operation is executed as a single operation on the base mesh of the whole model. If
you have multiple node merge groups, executing Generate on a single group will merge only the
nodes in that group, and will return the mesh to the state prior to the node merge operations on
the other groups. To connect all of the node merge groups, execute Generate at the Mesh Edit
folder level.

If you have applied any mesh connections or contact matches, you should generate them before
applying node merges.

To automatically apply node merges:

1. Right-click the Model object in the Tree and choose Mesh Edit, or select the Model object and
choose Mesh Edit from the Model toolbar.

2. Right-click the Mesh Edit object and choose Insert>Node Merge Group, or choose Node Merge
Group from the Mesh Edit toolbar.

3. Select the Node Merge Group and set the Method to Automatic Node Merge in the Details
view (this is the default setting).

4. Set the Scoping Method to Geometry Selection (the default) or to Named Selection and choose
the body or bodies to search for node merges.

5. Modify the Tolerance settings in the Details view. The Tolerance value is used to find which
bodies should be connected to which other bodies. For a discussion of Tolerance settings, see
Tolerances Used in Mesh Connections (p. 489), although Snap Boundaries are not available for
Node Merges.

• Tolerance Type: Options include Slider, Value, and Use Sheet Thickness. Bodies in an assembly
that were created in a CAD system may not have been placed precisely, resulting in small
overlaps or gaps along the connections between bodies. You can account for any imprecision
by specifying connection detection tolerance. This tolerance can be specified by value when

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 509
Miscellaneous Tools

the type is set to Slider and Value, or sheet thickness of surface bodies when the type is set
to Use Sheet Thickness.

• Tolerance Slider: Appears if Tolerance Type is set to Slider. To tighten the connection detection,
move the slider bar closer to +100 and to loosen the connection detection, move the slider bar
closer to -100. A tighter tolerance means that the bodies have to be within a smaller region (of
either gap or overlap) to be considered in connection. A looser tolerance will have the opposite
effect. Be aware that as you adjust the tolerance, the number of connection pairs could increase
or decrease.

• Tolerance Value: Appears if Tolerance Type is set to Slider or Value. This field is read-only if
the Tolerance Type is set to Slider showing the actual tolerance value based on the slider
setting. When the Tolerance Type is set to Value, you can provide an exact distance for the
detection tolerance.

After you provide a greater than zero value for the Tolerance Value, a circle appears around
the current cursor location. The radius of the circle is a graphical indication of the current Tol-
erance Value. The circle moves with the cursor, and its radius will change when you change
the Tolerance Value or the Tolerance Slider. The circle appropriately adjusts when the model
is zoomed in or out.

• Use Range: Appears when the Tolerance Type property is set to Slider or Value. Options include
Yes and No (default). If set to Yes, you will have the connection detection searches within a
range from Tolerance Value to Min Distance Value inclusive.

• Min Distance Percentage: Appears if Use Range is set to Yes. This is the percentage of the
Tolerance Value to determine the Min Distance Value. The default is 10 percent. You can move
the slider to adjust the percentage between 1 and 100.

• Min Distance Value: Appears if Use Range is set to Yes. This is a read-only field that displays
the value derived from: Min Distance Value = Min Distance Percentage * Tolerance Value/100.

• Face/Face: Options include Yes and No (default). Detects connection between the faces of
different bodies. The maximum allowable difference in the normals for which contact is detected
is 15 degrees.

• Face/Edge: Options include Yes and No (default). Detects connection between faces and edges
of different bodies. Faces are designated as targets and edges are designated as contacts. Saying
Yes exposes Face Angle Tolerance and Edge Overlap Tolerance.

• Edge/Edge: Options include Yes (default) and No. Detects connection between edges of dif-
ferent bodies.

• Search Across: This property enables automatic connection detection through the following
options:

– Bodies (default)

– Parts: Between bodies of different parts, that is, not between bodies within the same multibody
part.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
510 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

– Anywhere: Detects any connections regardless of where the geometry lies, including different
parts. However, if the connections are within the same body, this option finds only Face/Face
connections, even if the Face/Edge setting is turned On.

• Face Angle Tolerance: Available only if Face/Edge is set to Yes. For faces that will be excluded
from the proximity detection pair, this property defines the minimum angle between the primary
face and secondary edge entity, above which the two face pairs will be ignored from proximity
detection. The default value is 70°.

• Edge Overlap Tolerance: Available only when Face/Edge is set to Yes. This tolerance value is
the minimum percentage that an edge may overlap the face and is included as a valid proximity
detection pair. The default value is 25%.

6. Generate the node merge by doing one of the following:

To... Do this...
Generate all node merges Right-click Mesh Edit and choose Generate.
Generate node merges for a. For each Node Merge Group that should not be generated,
a Node Merge Group right-click the Node Merge Group and choose Suppress.

b. Right-click the Node Merge Group and choose Generate.

To manually apply Node Merges using the Node Merge Group:

1. Right-click the Model object in the Tree and choose Mesh Edit, or select the Model object and
choose Mesh Edit from the Model toolbar.

2. Right-click the Mesh Edit object and choose Insert>Node Merge Group, or choose Node Merge
Group from the Mesh Edit toolbar.

3. Select the Node Merge Group and set the Method to Manual Node Merge in the Details view.

An additional control, Group By is exposed in the Details view. Options for Group By include
None, Bodies, and Parts, and Faces. This property allows you to group the automatically generated
connections objects. Setting Group By to Bodies (default) or to Parts means that connection
faces and edges that lie on the same bodies or same parts will be included into a single connection
object. The Faces option is only available if the Face/Face or Face/Edge controls are set to Yes.

Setting Group By to None means that the grouping of geometries that lie on the same bodies
or same parts will not occur. Any connection objects generated will have only one entity scoped
to each side (that is, one face or one edge). If there are a large number of source/target faces in
a single region. Choosing None avoids excessive contact search times in the solver.

4. Right-click the Node Merge Group and select Detect Connections. The states of the Node Merge
connection are denoted using the same symbols as are used for Mesh Connections (p. 584).

5. Generate the node merge by doing one of the following:

To... Do this...
Generate all node merges Right-click Mesh Edit and choose Generate.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 511
Miscellaneous Tools

To... Do this...
Generate node merges for a. For each Node Merge Group that should not be generated,
a Node Merge Group right-click the Node Merge Group and choose Suppress.

b. Right-click the Node Merge Group and choose Generate.

Generate individual node Select each node merge that you want to generate, right-click, and
merges choose Generate.

To manually apply Node Merges individually:

1. Right-click the Model object in the Tree and choose Mesh Edit, or select the Model object and
choose Mesh Edit from the Model toolbar.

2. Right-click the Mesh Edit object and choose Insert>Node Merge, or choose Node Merge from
the Mesh Edit toolbar.

The object is added as a child of a new Node Merge Group.

Alternatively, you can select a Node Merge Group and set the Method to Manual Node Merge
in the Details view. Then, right-click the Node Merge Group and choose Insert>Node Merge.

3. Set the Scoping Method to Geometry Selection (the default) or to Named Selection to determine
how you will select the Primary Geometry and Secondary Geometry.

4. Select the Node Merge object and choose the Primary and Secondary Geometries:

• “Primary” indicates the topology that will be captured after the operation is complete.

• “Secondary” indicates the topology that will be pinched out during the operation.

5. Set the controls under Definition as desired.

6. Generate the node merge by doing one of the following:

To... Do this...
Generate all node merges Right-click Mesh Edit and choose Generate.
Generate the individual node Right-click the node merge and choose Generate.
merge

Note:

The mesher does not check the quality of the mesh after a Node Merge is performed.
Therefore, you should perform a manual quality check any time you insert a Node Merge.

Node Move
The Node Move feature enables you to select and then manually move a specific node on the mesh
to improve the local mesh quality.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
512 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

Requirements
This feature has the following topological requirements:

• Node movement is restricted to the target part. That is, nodes cannot be moved outside of
the part.

• Face/Edge nodes can be moved along the corresponding face/edge only.

• The application locks corner nodes to the underlying vertex.

• Moving a node on a solved analysis causes the solution data to become obsolete. However,
the state does not become obsolete for other objects that depend on the mesh (for example,
imported loading conditions, Element Orientations). If your node movement changes affect
other objects, you will need to manually clear and refresh these objects to apply the new
changes.

• The Node Move feature is disabled if you are working with Section Planes.

Application
The Node Move object is a child object of Mesh Edit. It is inserted into the tree by selecting the Node
Move button on the Mesh Edit toolbar or by selecting the Mesh Edit object, right-clicking, and se-
lecting Insert>Node Move.

To use this feature, you need to generate the mesh on your model. This can be done before or after
you have inserted the object into the tree. Once generated, the node selection options are assigned
automatically. The Select Type is set to Select Mesh and Vertex is the required picking tool. Moving
the cursor across the mesh of your model displays the available mesh nodes. You may then select
and move nodes.

In addition, once the object is placed in the tree, the Node Move toolbar displays.

Node Move toolbar options include the following:

Undo Last

Cancels the last node movement performed on the mesh. Operations that change the original
mesh may make this option unavailable.

Undo All

Cancels all of the node movements that you have made to the mesh. Operations that change the
original mesh may make this option unavailable.

Probe, Max, and Min

These are annotation options. Selecting the Max and/or Min buttons displays the maximum and
minimum values for mesh criteria (Element Quality, Jacobian Ratio, etc.) that you have selected.
The Probe feature is also criteria-based. You place a Probe on a point on the model to display
an annotation on that point. Probe annotations show the mesh criterion-based value at the loc-

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 513
Miscellaneous Tools

ation of the cursor. When created, probe annotations do not trigger the database to be marked
for the file needing to be saved (that is, you will not be prompted to save). Be sure to issue a save
if you wish to retain these newly created probe annotations in the database. These options are
not visible if the Mesh object Display Style property is set to the default setting, Body Color.

Edges Options

This drop-down menu provides options to change the display of your model, including:

• No Wireframe: displays a basic picture of the body.

• Show Elements: displays element outlines.

These options are the same options that are available on the Meshing Context Toolbar.

Free Mode
You can depress the F4 key while you are moving a node to remove certain movement restrictions.
This mode enables you to move an edge, vertex, or face node anywhere on a given face.

Direct Node Movement

You can also move a node by manually selecting the desired node, right-clicking, and then selecting
the option Node Move By Direct Input.

This option displays an entry window where you can manually change the X, Y, Z location of the
node.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
514 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

Element Quality Display

To enhance the presentation of your selections and movements, make sure that you set the Display
Style property of the Mesh to Element Quality. An example of this setting is provided below. The
exact display is provided on the Node Move object (and the legend title is also Mesh).

Worksheet
The Worksheet works in combination with the Node Move feature. The Worksheet records all of
the node movements performed. In addition, and as illustrated below, the Worksheet provides in-
formation about the selection order of node movements, node numbers, coordinate-based location
information (previous and new), as well as the options to undo the last movement or all of the
movements that were made.

Note:

If you update your mesh (Mesh object>Update), the application maintains your movements
in the Worksheet until the mesh is cleared (zero nodes) using the RMB option Clear
Generated Data or you refresh data from the CAD source.

The illustration above also shows the Worksheet docked in the lower portion of the screen so that
you can easily see all of your node movement information while also being able to see the model.
Docking is possible with the docking tool shown here. This tool displays when you drag a window's
title bar. Hovering the window over one of the blue arrows highlights the arrow. Releasing the mouse
button docks the window in that screen location. It may also be useful to display the node numbers
on your model using the display option Node Number available through Annotation Preferences.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 515
Miscellaneous Tools

Note:

Node move operations are not persistent. The Worksheet view gives a history of what
has been done based on the current Node IDs, but new Node IDs are created when the
model is re-meshed. Therefore, the history recorded in the Worksheet is rendered out-of-
date after re-meshing. For this reason, Node Move operations should be used sparingly,
and only to fix small issues.

See the Windows Management Help section for additional information.

Example
The following is an animated example of the use of the feature in tandem with the Element Quality
display. View online if you are reading the PDF version of the help. Interface names and other com-
ponents shown in the demos may differ from those in the released product.

Pull
Pull enables you to extrude or revolve element faces, to generate solid mesh. Pull can be applied
directly to scoped element faces,or geometric faces or bodies (only shell body) from a surface or
solid mesh. Pull generates volume of solid elements for the specified height or revolved volume from
the source mesh along the specified coordinated system or the face normal vector. Pull allows you
to create surface coating on solid bodies, element faces and geometric faces belonging to the solid
bodies to generate shell mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
516 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

Note:

Pull cannot be accessed through Mesh only system.

Pull creates linear elements if the base mesh is having linear elements and quadratic elements if the
base mesh is quadratic. Pull mesh supports curvilinear mid nodes for quadratic elements.

On the Tree view under Mesh object, right-click Pull > Generate Selected Pull to create Pull Part
under the Geometry tree. The Pull part created is independent of the contents of the Pull mesh.
When you Extrude or Revolve object from mesh data, the base mesh consists of solid element faces
or surface elements. Each connected set of elements forms a body. Each body has a top, bottom and
side face. Two edges are created bounding the top and bottom face. These edges are called ring
edges and they do not have vertices.

When you Extrude or Revolve object from CAD topology, bodies of the Pull part match the bodies
of the base mesh. Bottom faces of the pull bodies match those of base mesh and top face match the
corresponding face of the base mesh. A side face is created for each edge of the CAD topology. Edges
and vertices of Pull bodies are created to form watertight solids.

The exceptions to the above rule are the following:

• When the mesh body having multiple parts are meshed using Batch Connections or Auto-
matic (PrimeMesh) Method, a Pull part is created for a Pull feature.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 517
Miscellaneous Tools

• When the Pull feature is Extrude up to target and the target is such that some of the base
mesh must be removed to perform extrusion, you must apply the rules of extrusion of the
mesh objects. Hence, the pull sides are not defined by the original CAD topology edges.

Note:

• For Pull defined by CAD topology, if the Pull mesh is cleared or CAD model is re-
freshed, all loads and boundary conditions behavior follow the one defined by the
CAD topology entities.

• For Pull defined by mesh elements or element faces, if Pull mesh is cleared or CAD
model is refreshed, all loads and boundary conditions need to be redefined.

Extrude

Extrude scopes shell bodies, elements belonging to shell bodies, geometric faces of shell or solid
bodies, element faces of solid bodies.

To access Extrude,

1. Right-click Mesh Object > Insert > Mesh Edit.

2. Right-click Mesh Edit > Insert > Pull > Extrude.

3. Click Pull (Extrude) on the Tree view and click Generate to perform extrude mesh.

The Details view displays the Pull (Extrude) options :

Scope

Scoping Method: Allows you to scope the model based on your selection. There are two options.
They are Geometry Selection and Named Selection.

Geometry Selection: Allows you to scope elements, element faces, geometric faces and sheet bodies
for Extrude.

Named Selection: Allows you to select the element facets and elements belonging to sheet and
solid bodies for Extrude.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
518 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

Definition

Method: Displays the selected method of Pull. This is a read-only field.

Extrude: Allows you to generate solid elements for specified number of layers and height

Height: Allows you to specify the total height for the volume of solid elements. Height allows only
positive values.

Number of Layers: Allows you to specify the number of layers to be used for Extrude.

Extruded By: Allows you to specify the direction of extrusion. The available options are Use Coordinate
System, Face Normal and Face Normal (Reversed).

• Use Coordinate System: Allows you to generate elements in the specified coordinate system.
When you select Use Coordinate System option in Extruded By, the Coordinate System
and Use Coordinate System fields appear. The Coordinate System allows you to select the
Global Coordinate System by default. The Use Coordinate System allows you to select any
of the XYZ coordinate axis.

• Face Normal: Allows you to generate elements along the face normal vector.

• Face Normal Reversed: Allows you to generate elements along the opposite direction of the
face normal vector.

Extrude Upto: Allows you to generate elements up to the specified target. The target can be faces
from solids or sheet bodies and multiple faces with sharing geometric edge.

Element Option: Allows you to select the element type for the solver to use. The available options
are Solid and Solid Shell. The default value is Solid.

Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected entities. You can select Yes to suppress the selected
entities and No to unsuppress the selected entities. The default value is No.

Part Properties

Material: Allows you to select the material of your choice. You can also select a different material
from the parent body material.

Revolve

Revolve scopes shell bodies, elements belonging to shell bodies, geometric faces of shell or solid
bodies, element faces of solid bodies.

To access Revolve,

1. Right-click Mesh Object > Insert > Mesh Edit.

2. Right-click Mesh Edit > Insert > Pull > Revolve.

3. Click Pull (Revolve) on the Tree view and click Generate to generate pull elements along the
revolution angle.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 519
Miscellaneous Tools

The Details view displays the Revolve options:

Scope

Scoping Method: Allows you to scope the model based on your selection. There are two options.
They are Geometry Selection and Named Selection.

Geometry Selection: Allows you to scope elements, element faces, geometric faces and sheet bodies
for Revolve.

Named Selection: Allows you to select the element facets and elements belonging to sheet and
solid bodies for Revolve.

Definition

Method: Displays the selected method of Pull. Revolve allows you to generate solid elements for
the specified number of layers and revolution angle along the edge coordinate system.

Revolution Angle: Allows you to specify angle of revolution for the solid elements. Here, Pull (Revolve)
automatically merges the nodes of the first layer and last layer for 360 degrees revolution. Revolution
Angle allows only positive values.

Number of Layers: Allows you to specify the number of layers to be used for Revolve.

Coordinate System: Allows you to select the Global Coordinate System by default. This option
supports only Cartesian System.

Axis of Revolution: Allows you to select the coordinate axis along which the selected elements can
be revolved. The available options are X Axis, Y Axis, Z Axis.

Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected entities. You can select Yes to suppress the selected
entities and No to unsuppress the selected entities. The default value is No.

Part Properties

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
520 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

Material: Allows you to select the material of your choice. You can also select a different material
from the parent body material.

Surface Coating

Surface Coating allows you to scope solid element faces. For mesh body, the bodies are created
according to the bodies that own solid element faces. Each element face creates a topological face.
Also, creates edges and vertices to form the topology. When you perform Pull on solid bodies with
boundaries, bodies are created for each body that owns faces in the surface coating body and creates
faces, edges, and vertices to match the topology of the base mesh.

To access Surface Coating,

1. Right-click Mesh Object > Insert > Mesh Edit.

2. Right-click Mesh Edit > Insert > Pull > Surface Coating.

3. Click Pull (Surface Coating) on the Tree view and click Generate to generate surface elements
on the solid.

The Details view displays the Surface Coating options:

Scope

Scoping Method: Allows you to scope the model based on your selection. There are two options.
They are Geometry Selection and Named Selection.

Geometry Selection: Allows you to scope element faces, geometric faces and solid bodies for Surface
Coating.

Named Selection: Allows you to scope element faces, geometric faces and solid bodies for Surface
Coating.

Definition

Method: Displays the selected method of Pull. Surface Coating allows you to create shell elements
coating for the outer layer of the 3D objects. You can scope solid element faces, CAD faces and solid
bodies through Geometry Selection and Named Selection.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 521
Miscellaneous Tools

Line Coating: Allows you to produce line elements coating the edges of the 2D axisymmetric objects
only. When you scope an edge using Surface Coating, the Method automatically changes to Line
Coating. When you generate Pull, line element are created under the Pull part in the Geometry tree.
Pull (Surface Coating) supports multiple surface coating on the same body or face and on element
faces.

Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected entities. You can select Yes to suppress the selected
entities and No to remove suppression from the selected entities. The default value is No.

Part Properties

Material: Allows you to select the material of your choice. You can also select a different material
from the parent body material.

Nonlinear Effects: Choose whether to include nonlinear effects. Options include Yes (default) and
No.

Thermal Strain Effects: Choose whether to include thermal strain effects. Options include Yes (default)
and No.

Stiffness Option: Allows you to provide the stiffness behavior of the shell body created by surface
coating. The available options are Stress Evaluation Only, Membrane Only, Membrane and Bending.

Thickness: Allows you to specify the thickness for surface coating. The Thickness option is available
only when the Stiffness Option is set to Membrane Only or Membrane and Bending.

Limitations

• Pull cannot detect the intersection between the existing mesh and the created Pull or inter-
section between the two Pull objects. Pull can only detect self-intersection within a single
Pull. Then, it provides an error message without creating Pull mesh.

• If Pull is scoped to two element faces, geometric faces or disconnected bodies from disjoint
bodies in the same model for performing Pull operation, two Pull bodies are created in the
generated Pull part under Geometry on the Tree view.

• When Pull is performed on a highly curved surface, the generated pulled elements may con-
verge or intersect. Such elements are excluded from extrusion when Extrude Upto is set to
Yes. When Extrude Upto is set to No, the Pull operation is aborted providing an error message.

• When a solid object is added through Construction Geometry after generating the Pull object,
you cannot generate mesh on the solid body. You must insert and mesh all solid objects before
generating the first Pull object.

• When you try to Pull (Extrude) using solid element faces, only single side face (perpendicular
to extrude direction) is created instead of creating multiple faces as with the extruding topo-
logical entity.

• When you select multiple Pull objects for performing Pull operations, you do not have the
option to generate pull. However, to generate multiple Pull, you can select the Pull objects
then right-click Mesh Edit > Generate.

• When you suppress a Pull part under the Geometry tree, the Pull object under the Mesh Edit
folder is not suppressed. It remains unchanged.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
522 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Editing

• When you apply Pull on single bodies, Pull creates non conformal mesh. That is, nodes of the
interfaces from parent body and pull body are not connected. You should define the manual
contact to resolve the issue.

• When you have a Pull object generated, the Node Merge option is not available when you
try to insert it by right-clicking Mesh Edit > Insert > Node Merge. You can now select Beta
Options from Tools > Options > Appearance to access the Node Merge in Pull.

• Pull does not support cylindrical coordinate system.

• Pull (Surface Coating) does not support rigid bodies.

• Refresh is not supported when you scope mesh elements or element faces for Pull generation.

• For geometries created using the Mesh Pull feature and exported as a Part Manager Database
file, the Ansys Mechanical does not currently support re-meshing the part using normal mesh
methods when you import the .pmdb file into a new Mechanical session.

• When you perform Pull on a model having both solid and shell bodies, Pull scopes element
faces of both solid and shell bodies without providing an error message.

• When same elements are scoped through two different Name Selection, multiple Pull can be
used to generate the Pull for the same elements without providing any warning message.

• When you apply Pull on a model having multibody part with shared topology, it creates con-
formal mesh and shares topology between the bodies. Hence, if you do not want to share
topology, you must transfer the model to Ansys Mechanical as multi-part assemblies.

• For Extrude and Revolve, Pull automatically suppresses the base body and hides it in the
graphics when:

– Sheet body is scoped

– All the geometric faces of a sheet or solid body is scoped

– All elements of a sheet body are scoped.

• When a single Pull is applied on the multipart assembly, the Pull creates non conformal mesh
and may have self-intersection causing Pull failure. You may define separate Pull for each part
of the multipart assembly for successful pull generation.

• Line Coating does not support the interface between the 2D and 3D surfaces.

• When you have meshed Pull (Surface Coating) objects on the Tree view and you insert a
Pull (Extrude) or Pull (Revolve) object, the state change of Pull (Extrude) and Pull (Revolve)
affect the state of Pull (Surface Coating).

• Pull allows you to mesh only multibody parts with same order mesh. If mixed order mesh is
scoped, then Pull generation gives error due to dropped nodes. To avoid this, Pull should
have either linear or quadratic mesh as input and not both in a single Pull control.

• When a generated Pull in a system is transferred to another system and both the systems are
updated and then if you suppress the Pull in the first system and update both the systems,
the updated Pull in the first system is not transferred to the Pull in the second system.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 523
Miscellaneous Tools

• When Pull (Extrude, Revolve, Surface Coating) is duplicated, the scoping of the original Pull
(Extrude, Revolve, Surface Coating) is not retained for the duplicated Pull (Surface Coating).

• When there are multiple Pull (Surface coating) scoped to same body under the Mesh object
on the Tree view,

– Clearing mesh on the first Pull (Surface Coating), automatically clears the mesh on the
second Pull (Surface Coating) and vice versa. Also, when this happens the Pull (Surface
Coating) Part under the Geometry on the Tree view is not cleared for the second Pull.

– Suppressing the second Pull (Surface Coating), affects the state of first Pull (Surface
Coating) and vice versa.

– Generating a second Pull (Surface Coating), clears and regenerates the first Pull (Surface
Coating).

• When you scope multibody parts such as solid and shell bodies sharing the edge which have
mixed order mesh in Pull, self-intersections may occur when the Pull is generated along the
face normal or face normal reversed. Hence, same order mesh should be scoped for the Pull
and extrude direction should be specified using the coordinate system.

• When bodies scoped for Pull are suppressed, the Pull mesh goes out of state but the Pull
part remains on the Geometry tree.

Common Display Features

This section describes some common display features:
Hiding or Suppressing Bodies
Hiding or Showing Faces
Creating Section Planes

Hiding or Suppressing Bodies

For a quick way to hide bodies (that is, turn body viewing off ) or suppress bodies (that is, turn body
viewing off and remove the bodies from further treatment in the analysis), select the bodies in the
tree or in the Geometry window (choose the Body select mode, either from the toolbar or by a right-
click in the Geometry window). Then right-click and choose Hide Body or Suppress Body from the
context menu. Choose Show Body, Show All Bodies, Unsuppress Body, or Unsuppress All Bodies
to reverse the states.

The following options are also available:

• Hide All Other Bodies: show only selected bodies.

• Hide or Show: contains menu options to hide specific body types. Based on the body types of
your model, options include: Solid Bodies, Surface Bodies, and Line Bodies.

• Invert Visibility: inverts the visibility of hidden bodies versus those that are visible. When selected,
all hidden bodies become visible and all visible bodies become hidden.

• Suppress All Other Bodies: enables you to unsuppress only selected bodies.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
524 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Common Display Features

• Invert Suppressed Body Set: enables you to reverse the suppression state of all bodies (unsup-
pressed bodies become suppressed and suppressed bodies become unsuppressed).

Note:

• If another model level object, such as a Remote Point, Joint, or Contact Region, is scoped
to a Body that becomes Suppressed, that object also becomes suppressed until it is re-
scoped or the body is Unsuppressed.

• Results from hidden bodies are used in the formulation of the maximum and minimum
values in the contour legend and in the Details View.

• Results from suppressed bodies are suppressed and are not used in the formulation of
maximum and minimum values.

• When you suppress or unsuppress bodies, the state of the mesh remains the same.

Hiding or Showing Faces

You can hide selected faces on a model such that you are able to see inside the model. This feature
is especially useful for bodies with interior cavities, such as engine blocks. To use the feature, first
select faces on the model that you want to hide, then right-click anywhere in the Geometry window
and choose Hide Face(s) in the context menu. This menu choice is only available if you have already
selected faces.

Choose Show Hidden Face(s) from the context menu to restore the visibility of faces previously
hidden using Hide Face(s). The Show Hidden Face(s) menu choice is only available if there are hidden
faces from choosing Hide Face(s). It cannot be used to restore the visibility of faces previously hidden
by setting Visible to No in the Details view of a Named Selection object.

Note:

The selected faces will appear hidden only when you view the geometry. The feature is
not applicable to mesh displays or result displays.

Creating Section Planes

For viewing purposes, you can use the Create Section Plane option to slice the graphical image of
your model based on a predefined coordinate system. For details, refer to Creating Coordinate-Based
Section Planes in the Mechanical help.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 525
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
526 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Meshing: Ease of Use Features
The features described in this section are intended to assist you in meshing.
Updating the Mesh Cell State
Generating Mesh
Previewing Surface Mesh
Previewing Source and Target Mesh
Previewing Inflation
Previewing Weld Geometry
Previewing Weld Mesh
Previewing Quad Layer
Showing Program Controlled Inflation Surfaces
Showing Sweepable Bodies
Showing Problematic Geometry
Showing Problematic Location
Showing Problematic Elements
Showing Elements that Do Not Meet the Target Metric
Showing Removable Loops
Showing Suppressible Features
Displaying Element Normals on Mesh
Inspecting Large Meshes Using Named Selections
Generating Multiple Mesh Controls from a Template
Clearing Generated Data
Showing Missing Tessellations
Showing Mappable Faces
Grouping Mesh Objects By Type

Updating the Mesh Cell State

In contrast to the Generate Mesh (p. 528) feature (which only produces the mesh), the Update feature
determines whether the geometry needs to be updated, refreshes the geometry if necessary, generates
the mesh if necessary, and also writes the output data for any connected cells:

• The Generate Mesh feature is useful when you are investigating the impact of different settings
on the mesh but you are not ready to export the mesh files.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 527
Ease of Use Features

• The Update feature is useful if you make a connection in the Ansys Workbench Project Schem-
atic from a Mesh cell to a system that requires a new type of output data (for example, if you
make a connection from the Mesh cell to a Fluid Flow (CFX) or Fluid Flow (Fluent) analysis system).
In such cases, the Mesh cell will go out-of-date. To bring the Mesh cell up-to-date, you can perform
an Update on the Mesh cell from within the Project Schematic, or follow the procedure below
from within the Meshing application.

To update the Mesh cell:

1. Select the Mesh object or any mesh control object.

2. Right-click to display the context menu.

3. Select Update in the menu.

Note:

As an alternative to steps 2 and 3, you can click the Update button on the Mesh toolbar.

Generating Mesh
The Generate Mesh operation uses all defined meshing controls as input to generate a mesh. Generate
Mesh operates only on active objects, meaning that if bodies or controls are suppressed, they are ignored
by the meshing operation. You can generate mesh on the entire (active) model, or selectively on (active)
parts and/or bodies. This includes single body parts, multibody parts, individual bodies, or multiple se-
lected bodies across different parts or within the same part.

Note:

• Selecting Generate Mesh generates a mesh based on the current mesh settings. It does
not write the output data for any connected cells (downstream systems). Generate Mesh
is useful when you are investigating the impact of different settings on the mesh but you
are not ready to export the mesh files. Refer to Updating the Mesh Cell State (p. 527) for
related information.

• Using selective meshing, you can selectively pick bodies and mesh them incrementally.
After meshing a body, you can mesh the whole part or assembly or continue meshing in-
dividual bodies. Refer to Selective Meshing (p. 444) for additional information.

Monitoring the Meshing Process

The Ansys Workbench Mesh Status dialog box contains a Highlight check box that you can use to
control whether the topology that is currently being processed by the mesher is highlighted in the
Geometry window, which may help with troubleshooting (p. 580).

You can enable and disable the Highlight check box during the meshing process. Meshing performance
should be similar regardless of whether topology highlighting is enabled, but it may be less distracting
to disable it. If topology highlighting is enabled and you stop the meshing process, the highlighted
topology is selected for you automatically.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
528 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Generating Mesh

This topology highlighting is not supported for the Patch Independent Tetra or MultiZone mesh
methods is being used. For information about how to set the default for topology highlighting, refer
to Meshing Options on the Options Dialog Box (p. 389).

Suppressing and Unsuppressing Bodies in a Model

When there is a combination of suppressed and unsuppressed (active) bodies in a model, the Meshing
application meshes only the active bodies. This is true regardless of mesh method. In addition, all influ-
ence of the suppressed bodies on neighboring bodies and their meshes is suppressed. For example, if
a size control is applied to a suppressed body, the size control will not affect that body, nor will it influ-
ence neighboring bodies (in general, if a size control is assigned to a suppressed body, that control is
also suppressed unless it is also attached to other active bodies). Refer to Selective Meshing (p. 444) for
additional information.

To generate the mesh for all active bodies:

1. Select the Mesh object or any mesh control object.

2. Right-click to display the context menu, or choose the Mesh drop-down menu from the toolbar.

3. Select Generate Mesh in the menu.

All active bodies are meshed. If the model includes multiple parts, they are meshed in parallel. The
Ansys Workbench Mesh Status dialog box appears, displaying the meshing progress and high-
lighting each entity as it is meshed.

After the mesh has been generated, it is displayed when you select the Mesh object or the Show
Mesh display option.

4. If necessary, stop the meshing process:

a. In the Ansys Workbench Mesh Status dialog box, click Stop.

To see which parts have been meshed, expand the Geometry object in the Tree Outline. A
green status icon ( ) indicates that the part has been meshed.

b. To restart the meshing process, right-click the Mesh object or any mesh control object and
select Update.

The meshing process resumes and meshes only the parts that have not yet been meshed.

To generate the mesh for individual active bodies:

1. Select the bodies by doing one of the following:

• In the Tree Outline, select one or more Body objects.

• Select one or more bodies in the Geometry window.

2. Right-click to display the context menu.

3. Select Generate Mesh in the menu.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 529
Ease of Use Features

The bodies that you selected are meshed. If you selected multiple parts, they are meshed in parallel.
The Ansys Workbench Mesh Status dialog box appears, displaying the meshing progress and
highlighting each entity as it is meshed.

After the mesh has been generated, it is displayed when you select the Mesh object or the Show
Mesh display option.

4. If necessary, stop the meshing process:

a. In the Ansys Workbench Mesh Status dialog box, click Stop.

To see which parts have been meshed, expand the Geometry object in the Tree Outline. A
green status icon ( ) indicates that the part has been meshed.

b. To restart the meshing process, right-click the Mesh object or any mesh control object and
select Update.

The meshing process resumes and meshes only the parts that have not yet been meshed.

To generate the mesh for individual active parts:

1. Select the parts by doing one of the following:

• In the Tree Outline, select one or more Part objects.

• In the Geometry window, select one or more parts.

2. Right-click to display the context menu.

3. Select Generate Mesh in the menu.

The parts that you selected are meshed. If you selected multiple parts, they are meshed in parallel.
The Ansys Workbench Mesh Status dialog box appears, displaying the meshing progress and
highlighting each entity as it is meshed.

After the mesh has been generated, it is displayed when you select the Mesh object or the Show
Mesh display option.

4. If necessary, stop the meshing process:

a. In the Ansys Workbench Mesh Status dialog box, click Stop.

To see which parts have been meshed, expand the Geometry object in the Tree Outline. A
green status icon ( ) indicates that the part has been meshed.

b. To restart the meshing process, right-click the Mesh object or any mesh control object and
select Update.

The meshing process resumes and meshes only the parts that have not yet been meshed.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
530 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Previewing Surface Mesh

After successfully generating a mesh, you can view mesh statistics and mesh metric information that
you can use to evaluate the mesh quality. For more information, see Statistics Group (p. 198) and Quality
Group (p. 120).

To re-mesh:

1. Select the Mesh object.

2. Right-click to display the context menu and select Clear Generated Data in the menu.

3. Confirm that you want to clear the mesh by clicking the Yes button.

4. Right-click the Mesh object to display the context menu again and select Generate Mesh in the
menu.

Note:

• The order of topological entities is not guaranteed during a CAD source refresh. In cases
in which you mesh, refresh, and re-mesh, the mesher may not produce exactly the same
mesh if the refresh caused the topological entities to be reordered. As a result of this re-
ordering, the mesher meshes the entities in a different order as well, producing a slightly
different result.

• When selected from the Geometry object in the Tree Outline, the Generate Mesh RMB
menu option behaves slightly differently than when it is selected from the Mesh object
in the Tree Outline. Refer to Selective Meshing (p. 444) for details.

• Refer to Meshing: Troubleshooting (p. 579) for tips and strategies for handling problems
that may occur during meshing.

Previewing Surface Mesh

You can preview the surface mesh for all unsuppressed parts, individual unsuppressed parts, or individual
unsuppressed bodies. This includes single body parts, multibody parts, individual bodies, or multiple
selected bodies across different parts or within the same part. You can also export the previewed surface
mesh file in Fluent format, as described in Exporting a Previewed Surface Mesh in Fluent Format (p. 533).

Note:

• This feature is not supported for the Patch Independent and MultiZone mesh method
controls. It is also not supported for thin model sweeping (that is, use of the Sweep mesh
method control with Src/Trg Selection set to Manual Thin or Automatic Thin) .

• When previewing surface mesh on bodies that are being meshed with Sweep, not all sizing
information is used in the calculation. Previewing surface mesh on such bodies is a crude
check to get a general idea whether the surface mesh is appropriate, but the full mesh
may look different due to differences in sizing calculations when taking all meshing con-
straints into account.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 531
Ease of Use Features

• Refer to Selective Meshing (p. 444) for general information about selective meshing and
limitations related to using the Preview Surface Mesh feature with selective meshing.

To preview the surface mesh for all unsuppressed parts:

1. Select the Mesh object or any mesh control object.

2. Right-click to display the context menu, or choose the Mesh drop-down menu from the toolbar.

3. Select Preview> Surface Mesh in the context menu or Preview Surface Mesh in the drop-down
menu. The surface mesh is displayed for the model when you select the Mesh object.

To preview the surface mesh for individual unsuppressed parts - from the object tree:

1. Select the Part objects.

2. Right-click to display the context menu.

3. Select Preview> Surface Mesh in the menu. The surface mesh is displayed for the parts when you
select the Mesh object.

To preview the surface mesh for individual unsuppressed parts - from the Geometry window:

1. Select the Mesh object.

2. Select the parts in the Geometry window.

3. Right-click to display the context menu.

4. Select Parts> Preview Surface Mesh in the menu. The surface mesh is displayed for the parts
when you select the Mesh object in the tree.

To preview the surface mesh for individual unsuppressed bodies - from the object tree:

1. Select the Body objects.

2. Right-click to display the context menu.

3. Select Preview> Surface Mesh in the menu. The surface mesh is displayed for the bodies when
you select the Mesh object.

To preview the surface mesh for individual unsuppressed bodies - from the Geometry window:

1. Select the Mesh object.

2. Select the bodies in the Geometry window.

3. Right-click to display the context menu.

4. Select Preview Surface Mesh On Selected Bodies in the menu. The surface mesh is displayed for
the bodies when you select the Mesh object in the tree.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
532 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Previewing Source and Target Mesh

After successfully previewing the surface mesh, you can view statistics about it. These statistics include
mesh metric information that you can use to evaluate the mesh quality. For more information, see
Statistics Group (p. 198).

Exporting a Previewed Surface Mesh in Fluent Format

Follow the steps below to export a previewed surface mesh in Fluent format:

To export a previewed surface mesh in Fluent format:

1. Follow the procedure to preview a surface mesh (p. 531).

2. Select File> Export from the main menu to export the surface mesh.

3. In the Save As dialog box, choose a directory and specify a file name for the file. Then choose
Fluent Input Files from the Save as type drop-down menu and click Save.

A .msh file suitable for import into Fluent will be created in the requested directory.

Previewing Source and Target Mesh

This feature allows you to preview the source and target meshes for scoped bodies. You can preview
the source and target mesh on individual bodies or multiple selected bodies across different parts or
within the same part. This feature applies only to a Method (p. 202) control set to the Sweep option.

Note:

• This feature is not supported for thin model sweeping (that is, use of the Sweep mesh
method control with Src/Trg Selection set to Manual Thin or Automatic Thin).

• Refer to Selective Meshing (p. 444) for general information about selective meshing and
limitations related to using the Preview Source and Target Mesh feature with selective
meshing.

To preview the source and target mesh:

1. Scope the body or bodies of interest.

2. Right-click the Mesh object and insert a Method (p. 202) control.

3. In the Details View, set Method to the Sweep option.

4. Right-click the Sweep Method option in the tree to display the context menu, or choose the Mesh
drop-down menu from the toolbar.

5. Select Preview> Source and Target Mesh in the context menu or Preview Source and Target
Mesh in the drop-down menu. The source and target meshes are displayed when you select the
Mesh object.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 533
Ease of Use Features

Previewing Inflation
The Preview Inflation feature helps you identify possible problems with inflation before you generate
the mesh. You can preview inflation on single body parts, multibody parts, individual bodies, or multiple
selected bodies across different parts or within the same part. You can also export the previewed inflation
mesh file in Fluent format, as described in Exporting a Previewed Inflation Mesh in Fluent Format (p. 535).

Remember the following information when using the Preview Inflation feature:

• This feature is not supported for the Patch Independent Tetra and MultiZone mesh method controls.

• Match controls (p. 334) are not enforced when previewing inflation.

• In certain cases, Preview Inflation may return an invalid (p. 579) mesh. Generate Mesh (p. 528) may
return a valid mesh with inflation, a valid mesh without inflation (because inflation failed), or result
in a mesh failure (because tet meshing failed). For these reasons if Generate Mesh fails, using either
the Preview Surface Mesh (p. 531) or Preview Inflation feature to locate the worst quality element
is also likely to locate the cause of the mesh failure.

• When previewing inflation on bodies that are being meshed with Sweep, not all sizing information
is used in the calculation. Previewing inflation on such bodies is a crude check to get a general idea
whether inflation will work and/or if there will be problems with inflation prior to generating the full
mesh, but the full mesh may look different due to differences in sizing calculations when taking all
meshing constraints into account.

• This feature applies only when the Inflation Algorithm control is set to Pre (p. 172).

• After successfully previewing inflation, you can view statistics about it. These statistics include mesh
metric information that you can use to evaluate the mesh quality. For more information, see Statistics
Group (p. 198).

• Refer to Selective Meshing (p. 444) for general information about selective meshing and limitations
related to using the Preview Inflation feature with selective meshing.

To preview inflation:

1. Apply inflation to the desired boundaries.

2. Select an object in the Tree Outline (the Mesh object, a mesh Method object, or an Inflation object)
and right-click to display the context menu.

3. Select Preview > Inflation in the menu. In response, Workbench generates the inflation layers only
and displays them in the Geometry window. You may need to click the Mesh object in the Tree
Outline before you can view the inflation layers.

Figure 199: Previewed Inflation Mesh (p. 535) shows a model of an auto manifold to which inflation was
applied. The Preview Inflation feature was selected, and the inflation layers were generated and dis-
played in the Geometry window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
534 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Previewing Weld Geometry

Figure 199: Previewed Inflation Mesh

Figure 200: Section Plane View of Previewed Inflation Mesh (p. 535) shows a different view of the auto
manifold model. For this view, a Section Plane was defined so that the inflation layers could be viewed
internally.

Figure 200: Section Plane View of Previewed Inflation Mesh

Exporting a Previewed Inflation Mesh in Fluent Format

Follow the steps below to export a previewed inflation mesh in Fluent format:

To export a previewed inflation mesh in Fluent format:

1. Follow the procedure to preview inflation (p. 534).

2. Select File> Export from the main menu to export the inflation mesh.

3. In the Save As dialog box, choose a directory and specify a file name for the file. Then choose
Fluent Input Files from the Save as type drop-down menu and click Save.

A .msh file suitable for import into Fluent will be created in the requested directory.

Previewing Weld Geometry

The Preview Weld Geometry feature helps you to preview the weld faces before meshing. It also allows
you to view the errors and warnings for weld before meshing. You can access Preview Weld Geometry
from Mesh object and from each row of the weld worksheet.

To access Preview Weld Geometry,

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 535
Ease of Use Features

1. In the Tree view, right-click the Mesh object.

2. Select Preview > Weld Geometry.

Previewing Weld Mesh

The Preview Weld Mesh feature helps you to generate the weld mesh on the selected controls for
preview. You can access Preview Weld Mesh from Mesh object and Weld control only. Preview Weld
Mesh creates mesh only for the weld faces and its corresponding up and down faces. You can also
right-click any column in the Worksheet to access Preview Weld Mesh.

To access Preview Weld Mesh,

1. In the Tree view, right-click the Mesh object.

2. Select Preview > Weld Mesh. The Weld Mesh is displayed on the weld faces and on its up and
down faces.

Previewing Quad Layer

The Preview Quad Layer feature helps you to preview the quad layers before mesh generation. You
can access Preview Quad Layer from Mesh object and Quad Layer control only.

Note:

When you use Preview > Quad Layer, you cannot preview the applied edge sizing.

To access Preview Quad Layer,

1. In the Tree view, right-click the Mesh object.

2. Select Preview > Quad Layer to display the quad layer mesh created.

You can also right-click Quad Layer and click Preview > Quad Layer to preview the quad layer before
mesh generation

Showing Program Controlled Inflation Surfaces

If you select Program Controlled as the value for the Use Automatic Inflation (p. 163) control, all surfaces
in the model are selected to be inflation boundaries, except:

• Surfaces that are members of Named Selections groups

• Faces on non-enclosure bodies if an enclosure body is present

• Faces on bodies that have manual inflations on them

• Interfaces between bodies in a multibody part

• Faces used in contact

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
536 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Showing Problematic Location

• Faces used in symmetry

• Faces on bodies being meshed with Hex Dominant or manual Sweep controls

To view the faces that have been selected for inflation:

1. Select the Mesh object in the Tree Outline.

2. Right-click to display the context menu.

3. Select Show> Program Controlled Inflation Surfaces in the context menu.

Showing Sweepable Bodies

You can display bodies that are "sweepable" according to the criteria detailed under Mesh Sweep-
ing (p. 399).

To display sweepable bodies:

1. Select the Mesh object or any mesh control object.

2. Right-click to display the context menu.

3. Select Show> Sweepable Bodies in the menu. All sweepable bodies are displayed.

Showing Problematic Geometry

If problematic geometry causes meshing to fail, Workbench alerts you by:

• Displaying a Problematic Geometry message annotation in the Geometry window

• Displaying messages in the Messages window to describe the problem

For related information on viewing problematic geometry, refer to:

• Show Problematic Geometry in the DesignModeler help

• Meshing: Troubleshooting (p. 579)

Showing Problematic Location

If problematic location causes meshing to fail, Workbench alerts you by:

• Displaying a Show Problematic Location message annotation in the Geometry window

• Displaying messages in the Messages window to describe the problem

Note:

When the problematic location is inside the body, you can use wire frame mode to visualize
that particular location.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 537
Ease of Use Features

For related information on viewing problematic location, refer to:

• Show Problematic Geometry in the DesignModeler help

• Meshing: Troubleshooting (p. 579)

Showing Problematic Elements

When you select mesh Method as Hex Dominant or Physics Preference as Explicit, a warning message
is provided if internal pyramid elements are created while meshing. You can right-click the warning
message and click Show Problematic Elements to create a named selection for all pyramid elements.

Showing Elements that Do Not Meet the Target Metric

If Check Mesh Quality (p. 121) is set to Yes, Errors and Warnings, and the generated mesh contains
elements that do not meet the specified target metric, a warning message is displayed in the Messages
window to indicate the problem.

You can create a Named Selection for these elements by right-clicking the Messages field and selecting
Show Elements in the context menu. A Named Selection named Warning Elements will be created.

Refer to Quality Group (p. 120) for related information.

Showing Removable Loops

You can use the Show Removable Loops feature prior to meshing to view loops that will be removed
according to the criteria defined by the global Sheet Loop Removal (p. 197) and Loop Removal Toler-
ance (p. 197) controls.

This feature applies only to sheet models, and it responds only to the settings of the global loop removal
controls. For example, if you set loop removal controls locally and your model contains loops that will
be removed according to your local criteria, the Show Removable Loops feature will return nothing
if the global Sheet Loop Removal control is off (set to No).

To view removable loops:

1. Select the Mesh object in the Tree Outline.

2. Right-click to display the context menu.

3. Select Show> Removable Loops in the context menu.

Note:

This feature is not supported for the MultiZone Quad/Tri (p. 284) mesh method.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
538 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Displaying Element Normals on Mesh

Showing Suppressible Features

You can use the Show Suppressible Features to preview the faces that are to be suppressed, before
applying the feature suppress control.

To view Suppressible Feature:

1. Right-click the Mesh object in the Tree Outline.

2. Select Show > Suppressible Features in the context menu.

Displaying Element Normals on Mesh

Display Element Normals on Mesh enables you to display a normal vector for each element. The
normal vector orientation ensures the accurate representation and analysis of the Multiphysics effects
within the cell structure. The default value is No. The available options are Yes and No. You can access
Display Element Normals on Mesh from File > Options > Graphics > Default Graphics Options.

Hexahedral Element

For hexahedral element, you should pay attention to the connectivity, to ensure the correct orientation
of the through-thickness direction. The mesher establish the orientation direction of hex elements
considering the topological face selection as a reference point to determine the lower portion of the
reoriented hex element. The shared internal faces are not considered for determining the orientation
as the internal algorithm autonomously expands the hex layer for re-orientation, starting from the anchor
face and progressing inwards.

Here,

nodes 0 to 3 define the lower surface.

nodes 4 to 7 define the upper surface.

face index 4 represents the bottom face.

face index 5 represents the top face.

The normal to face index 5 defines the normal of the hex element.

Wedge Element

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 539
Ease of Use Features

For a wedge element, the connectivity of nodes defines the element’s orientation.

Here,

nodes 0 to 2 define the lower surface.

Nodes 3 to 5 define the upper surface.

face index 0 represents the bottom face.

face index 1 represents the top face.

The normal to face index 1 defines the normal of the wedge element.

Note:

Hexahedral and wedge elements only support normal.

Inspecting Large Meshes Using Named Selections

You can use Named Selections to inspect only a portion of the total mesh. Although this feature is
available regardless of mesh size, it is most beneficial when working with a large mesh (greater than 5
- 10 million nodes). For details, refer to Displaying Named Selections in the Mechanical help.

Generating Multiple Mesh Controls from a Template

The Object Generator enables you to make one or more copies of a template object, scoping each to
a different piece of geometry. When defining mesh controls, you can use the Object Generator to make
copies of a template mesh control, which may reduce the necessity to manually define multiple related
mesh controls. For details, refer to Generating Multiple Objects from a Template Object in the Mechan-
ical help.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
540 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Clearing Generated Data

Clearing Generated Data

You can clear generated data from the database using a right-mouse click menu item. You can either
clear all mesh and results data (if applicable) from a model, or clear the mesh data on a selected part
or body.

Note:

• When you clear the mesh, the status of the part or body will indicate that it is not meshed.

• When used on parts and bodies that have been joined by mesh connections (p. 485), the
Clear Generated Data option works as follows, where the "base" mesh, which is stored
in a temporary file, is the mesh in its unsewn (pre-joined) state:

– If a base mesh is available, the mesh is reverted to the base mesh and the requested
parts/bodies are cleared.

– If no base mesh is available, the entire mesh is cleared and a warning message is issued.
Reasons the base mesh may not be available include situations in which you have deleted
your temporary files, exported a .mechdat file for someone else to use, or moved your
project database to a different computer.

– All mesh connections in the model, including those not associated with the selected
body or part, are cleared.

– Because a Node Move cannot be undone, Clear Generated Data is not available from
the Mesh Edit context menu when the Mesh Edit object has only Node Move objects
as children.

To clear all mesh and results data from a model - from the object tree:

1. Select the Mesh object in the Tree Outline.

2. Right-click to display the context menu.

3. Select Clear Generated Data in the context menu.

4. When asked whether you want to clear the data, click Yes.

To clear the mesh data from the selected part or body - from the object tree:

1. Select the part or body in the Tree Outline.

2. Right-click to display the context menu.

3. Select Clear Generated Data in the context menu.

4. When asked whether you want to clear the mesh, click Yes.

To clear the mesh data from the selected body - from the Geometry window:

1. Select the Mesh object.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 541
Ease of Use Features

2. Select the bodies in the Geometry window.

3. Right-click to display the context menu.

4. Select Clear Generated Data On Selected Bodies in the context menu.

5. When asked whether you want to clear the mesh, click Yes.

To clear the mesh data from the selected part - from the Geometry window:

1. Select the Mesh object.

2. Select the part in the Geometry window.

3. Right-click to display the context menu.

4. Select Parts> Clear Generated Data in the context menu.

5. When asked whether you want to clear the mesh, click Yes.

Showing Missing Tessellations

Geometry with missing facets can lead to incorrect geometry representation by the mesher. Using the
Show Missing Tessellations feature, you can highlight geometry with missing facets, which will allow
you to detect and resolve problems prior to mesh generation.

Note:

This feature is available only for the Patch Independent Tetra (p. 210) mesh method.

To highlight missing tessellations:

1. Select the Geometry object in the Tree Outline.

2. Right-click the Geometry object or in the Geometry window to display the context menu.

3. Select Show Missing Tessellations in the context menu.

If a face without tessellations is found:

• The boundary of the face will be highlighted in the Geometry window.

• A warning message will be displayed in the Messages window advising you to use the Show
Problematic Geometry (p. 537) context menu option to locate the problem areas.

Showing Mappable Faces

You can display faces that are "mappable" according to the criteria detailed under Face Meshing Con-
trol (p. 314).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
542 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Grouping Mesh Objects By Type

To display mappable faces:

1. Select the Mesh object or any mesh control object.

2. Right-click to display the context menu.

3. Select Show> Mappable Faces in the menu. All mappable faces are highlighted in the Geometry
window.

4. Right-click the Mesh object or mesh control object and select Insert> Face Meshing. In the Details
View, the Geometry field shows the number of faces that are mappable and therefore were selected.

By default, Definition>Mapped Mesh is set to Yes, which means the faces in the Face Meshing control
are mapped by default.

To edit the selected set of faces, click the Geometry field in the Details View to activate it. Then in the
Geometry window, select the mappable faces that you want to use in the Face Meshing control. Click
Apply in the Details View to complete your selection. Then proceed with the procedure described in
Face Meshing Control (p. 314).

Grouping Mesh Objects By Type

If you have many different types of mesh objects, you can use the Group All Similar Children option
to organize the objects into folders based on their type. In the following figure, the mesh methods, in-
flation control, and refinement have been grouped into separate folders.

Figure 201: Mesh Objects Grouped By Type

For more information, see Group Tree Objects.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 543
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
544 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Meshing: Virtual Topology
The following sections cover these topics:
Introduction
Creating and Managing Virtual Cells
Creating and Managing Virtual Split Edges
Creating and Managing Virtual Split Faces
Creating and Managing Virtual Hard Vertices
Common Virtual Topology Operations
Common Virtual Topology Features

Introduction
Uses of virtual topology include:

• Before performing analysis of a CAD model, you may want to group faces/edges together to form
virtual cells. In such cases, virtual topology can aid you in reducing the number of elements in the
model, simplifying small features out of the model, and simplifying load abstraction.

• You can split a face to create two virtual faces, or split an edge to create two virtual edges. For example,
in the case of a rectangular face in which a single edge on one side of the face corresponds to two
edges on the opposite side of the face, you can split the single edge so that node alignment across
the face can have similar spacing.

• When needed, you can create virtual hard vertices to facilitate split face operations.

• Virtual topology can be helpful for handling fillets for MultiZone and sweep meshing. See Using
Virtual Topology to Handle Fillets in MultiZone Problems (p. 439).

A CAD Model has two parts:

1. Topology: The connectivity of a CAD model, meaning: vertices are connected to edges, which
are connected to faces, which are connected to volumes. Each one of these entities is referred
to as a cell.

2. Geometry: The geometry of the CAD model is the underlying mathematical definition of the
aforementioned cells.

A virtual cell in the Mechanical application or the Meshing application modifies the topology of only
the local copy in the Mechanical application or Meshing application. Your original CAD model remains
unchanged. New faceted geometry is also created with virtual topology. However, the mesher may
project the nodes back to the original geometry where applicable.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 545
Virtual Topology

You can use Virtual Topology to simplify the geometry to aid in meshing. There are several ways to
simplify the topology using either automatic, manual, or a combination of automatic and manual ap-
proaches. The best approach to use is generally based on the meshing objectives (number of elements
desired) and the cleanliness of the CAD model.

Virtual cells are often created to:

• Reduce the element count (increase the mesh size).

• Fix the topology of bodies that are not sweepable, to have mappable faces so that the bodies
are now sweepable.

• Fix meshing problems.

To reduce the element count, it is often a good idea to first use Automatic or Repair operations to
reduce the number of faces/edges, and then use Manual virtual topology operations to ensure important
topology is respected and/or features that could create mesh quality problems are removed.

To fix the topology of bodies make them sweepable. Automatic and/or Repair operations might be
helpful, but it is often very dependent on the geometry. Manual virtual topology operations give you
more control and are often the better approach.

Meshing problems sometimes occur because of the topology. When a meshing failure occurs it generally
points to the offending topology. Using Manual virtual topologies is a good way to fix such problems.

For more information about the Automatic and Manual approaches to creating virtual cells, see:

• Creating Virtual Cells Manually (p. 549)

• Creating Virtual Cells Automatically Using Automatic Mode (p. 552)

• Creating Virtual Cells Automatically Using Repair Mode (p. 556)

Note:

• There are geometric limitations to creating virtual cells, including those related to cells
that would have too much curvature, or other limitations in trying to represent a group
of faces by a single face.

• The tesselation of models from CATIA4 may not be appropriate for virtual topology, which
could prevent the creation of virtual cells for these models.

Creating and Managing Virtual Cells

Notes on Virtual Cell Creation

• Scoped objects except other virtual cells may need to be relinked to the new virtual cells when that
virtual cell is composed of entities in the scoped object. When the virtual cell is deleted the object
may need to be rescoped to the original entities.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
546 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Managing Virtual Cells

• All scoped objects except for mesh controls and other virtual cells will be protected during automatic
virtual cell generation. This will allow users to load their models and run auto virtual topology without
deleting loads. All faces within a protected object may be merged with faces in the same protected
object and not in any other protected object.

• If Generate on Update is set to Yes and you update the geometry, all Virtual Cell objects that were
created automatically will be deleted and recreated based on the new geometry. Any loads that were
attached to geometry within the deleted Virtual Cell objects will need to be reattached to the new
geometry.

• If Generate on Update is set to No and you update the geometry, all Virtual Cell objects that were
created automatically should remain persistent barring major topology changes of the model being
updated. Reapplication of loads may not be necessary.

• For any virtual cells that were generated, you can choose whether the nodes will be projected back
to the underlying geometry (in contrast to the virtual cell’s faceted geometry). To do so, select the
desired virtual cell and use the Virtual Topology Properties dialog (p. 573) to set the Project to
Underlying Geometry option to Yes or No. The default is Yes for analytical geometry. Otherwise,
the default is No. Computational expense increases when the option is set to Yes. Use these guidelines:

– Yes is recommended if:

→ You are using virtual topology to fine tune the topology of your mesh and need precise control
from the Size Function (p. 105).

→ Your geometry is valid and you want the mesh to capture it accurately. Here, there may be a
slight impact on performance.

– No is recommended if:

→ You are using virtual topology to simplify bad/corrupt geometry or topology.

→ You are trying to grossly defeature a model (for example, remove bosses, serial numbers and so
on).

Virtual Cell Logic and Usage

The Virtual Topology feature is a cell dependency operation where existing virtual cells can be used to
create new virtual cells both manually and automatically. Within the cell hierarchy, a virtual cell depends
on another virtual cell if the latter is used to create the former.

Virtual Face Dependency

A virtual face depends on a virtual edge if during the face creation the virtual edge is used to create
virtual face loops. A virtual face depends on another virtual face if the latter was used to create the
former.

The following image represents the Merge Face Edges in the off position.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 547
Virtual Topology

Figure 202: Merge Face Edges Off

The following image represents the Merge Face Edges in the on position.

Figure 203: Merge Face Edges On

Virtual Edge Dependency

A virtual edge depends on a virtual face if during the edge creation an owner loop belongs to the said
face. A virtual edge depends on another virtual edge if the latter was used to create the former.

Note:

• If a virtual edge was created from a virtual split edge, you cannot delete the virtual split
edge without first deleting the virtual edge. Conversely, if a virtual split edge was created
from a virtual edge, you cannot delete the virtual edge without first deleting the virtual
split edge.

A warning message appears in the Messages window for each failed deletion. To highlight
the geometry that is responsible for a message, select the message, right-click, and select
Show Problematic Geometry from the context menu.

• In addition, if the virtual edge belongs to a virtual face, the virtual face will not be deleted
either.

A warning message appears in the Messages window for the virtual face, and you can
use the Show Problematic Geometry option to highlight the face.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
548 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Managing Virtual Cells

You can manually designate faces and edges for inclusion into a virtual cell, or you can have the
Mechanical application or the Meshing application automatically create virtual cells based on settings
that you specify. You can use the Automatic mode to globally reduce the number of faces and edges
where possible, or use Repair to focus more closely on problematic faces and edges. The geometry
under a virtual cell is represented by the underlying cell's graphic resolution.

Note:

• There are geometric limitations to creating virtual cells, including those related to cells
that would have too much curvature, or other limitations in trying to represent a group
of cells by a single cell.

• The tessellation of models from CATIA4 may not be appropriate for virtual topology, which
could prevent the creation of virtual cells for these models.

Creating Virtual Cells Manually

1. Insert a Virtual Topology object in the tree.

2. Choose the face (Ctrl+F) or edge (Ctrl+E) selection filter, and then pick one or more faces or one
or more edges that you want to include in the virtual cell(s).

You can use the Close Vertices button to identify tightly clustered vertices that might need to be
merged.

3. Create the Virtual Cell object(s) by doing one of the following:

• Choose Merge Cells on the Virtual Topology context toolbar. You can also use Ctrl+M to
merge either the faces after selecting them, or the common edge between faces.

• Click the right mouse button on the Virtual Topology object and select Insert> Virtual Cell
from the context menu.

• Click the right mouse button in the Geometry window and select Insert> Virtual Cell from
the context menu.

From the selected set of faces or edges, the software creates the virtual cell(s). During this process,
adjacent selected entities are grouped appropriately to form virtual cell(s), while any single selected
entity (that is, one that is selected but is not adjacent to any other selected entity) forms its own
virtual cell. An error message appears in the Messages window for each subset of failed topologies.
To highlight the geometry that is responsible for a message, select the message, right-click, and
select Show Problematic Geometry from the context menu. Refer to the examples below.

Note:

• A virtual cell cannot be created on a single edge that is straight or enclosed with no vertices.

• A virtual cell cannot be created on a single face that is cylindrical or planar. For example,
if you select either the top face or middle face in the figure below and try to create a vir-

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 549
Virtual Topology

tual cell, no virtual cell will be created. However, selecting the bottom face will result in
creation of a virtual cell.

Figure 204: Single Face Virtual Cell Limitations

Examples of Virtual Cell Formation

In the example shown in Figure 205: Formation of Virtual Faces (p. 551), suppose that you select faces
A, B, E, and F and then select Insert> Virtual Cell. As a result, virtual faces AB and EF will be formed,
as shown in Figure 206: Virtual Faces After Operation (p. 551).

The edges would be handled according to the Merge Face Edges setting. For example, if Merge Face
Edges is set to Yes, virtual edges ac and km also will be formed.

As another example, using the same starting point, if you select faces A, E, and F and then select Insert>
Virtual Cell, virtual faces A and EF will be formed. In this case, if Merge Face Edges is set to Yes, vir-
tual edge km also will be formed.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
550 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Managing Virtual Cells

Figure 205: Formation of Virtual Faces

Figure 206: Virtual Faces After Operation

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 551
Virtual Topology

In the example shown in Figure 207: Formation of Virtual Edges (p. 552), suppose that you select all
edges and then select Insert> Virtual Cell. In this case, only virtual edge eg will be formed because
only those virtual edges that can be formed without forcing face merges will be created.

Figure 207: Formation of Virtual Edges

Creating Virtual Cells Automatically Using Automatic Mode

1. Insert a Virtual Topology object in the tree.

2. In the Details View, ensure that Method is set to Automatic.

3. Make adjustments as needed to any of the following settings in the Details View:

• Behavior – Determines how aggressively the face(s) and edge(s) are merged. The choices are
Low, Medium, High, Edges Only, and Custom. The Edges Only setting will merge only edges.
The Custom setting exposes Custom properties (Curvature and Feature Angles) and Advanced
Custom properties (Aspect Ratio, Contact Angle, Edge Angle, and Shared Boundary Ratio).
These properties enable you to set parameters that control the creation of automatic Virtual To-
pologies.

Note:

Setting any of the Custom or Advanced Custom Properties to -1 resets the value of
that property back to its default.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
552 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Managing Virtual Cells

• Gauss Curvature Angle – Represents the flatness of the resultant face. If Angle is greater than
the Gauss Curvature Angle, the faces will stay separate. Increasing the Curvature Angle causes a
greater number of faces to be grouped into fewer, larger faces, which might mean that there are
fewer resulting Virtual Topologies.

Figure 208: Gauss Curvature Angle

The Gauss Curvature Angle can range from 0-180 degrees. The default setting is 60 degrees.
The following figure shows the results of setting the Gauss Curvature Angle to 25, 60, and 120
degrees respectively.

Figure 209: Curvature Angle at 25, 60, and 120 degrees

Note:

For best results, set the angle between 20 and 120 degrees. If the angle is set below
this range, few faces will be merged. Setting the value above this range could result
in problems with the mesh. Setting the value above this range could also result in large
clusters of faces that ultimately fail to merge into a virtual face.

• Feature Angle – Sets the minimum angle between faces at a common edge. If Angle , as
shown in the following figure, is greater than the Feature Angle, the faces will stay separate.
Faces are merged as the Feature Angle increases.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 553
Virtual Topology

Figure 210: Feature Angle

The Feature Angle can range from 0 to 180 degrees. The default setting is 40 degrees. The fol-
lowing figure shows the results of setting the Feature Angle to 20, 40, and 80 degrees respectively.

Figure 211: Feature Angle at 20, 40, and 80 Degrees

Note:

For best results, set the angle between 30 and 90 degrees. If the angle is set below
this range, few faces will be merged. If the value is set above this range, it could result
in large clusters of faces that ultimately fail to merge into a virtual face.

• Aspect Ratio – The ratio between the area of the face group to the square of the shared
boundary length between the face and the Face Group. This setting controls how faces are
grouped. Here, increasing the Aspect Ratio causes a greater number of faces to be grouped into
fewer, larger faces. The Aspect Ratio can range from 0 to 1. The default setting is 1. The following
figure shows the results of setting the Aspect Ratio to 0.2, 0.5, and 0.9, respectively.

Figure 212: Aspect Ratio at 0.2, 0.5, and 0.9

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
554 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Managing Virtual Cells

• Contact Angle – The angle introduced at common vertices between faces. This setting prevents
complicated boundaries when grouping faces (for example, angles introduced at contact points
between faces). Increasing the Contact Angle causes a greater number of faces to be grouped
into fewer, larger faces. The angle can range from 0 to 360 degrees. The default setting is 360
degrees. The following figure shows the results of setting the Contact Angle to 270 degrees, 330
degrees, and 355 degrees, respectively.

Figure 213: Contact Angle at 270, 330, and 355 degrees

• Edge Angle – The feature angle between edges at their common vertex. Increasing the Edge
Angle causes a greater number of edges to be grouped together. The angle can range from 0 to
180 degrees. The default setting for the Edge Angle is 80 degrees. The following figure shows the
results of setting the Edge Angle to 80 degrees, 100 degrees, and 150 degrees, respectively.

Figure 214: Edge Angle at 80, 100, and 150 degrees

• Shared Boundary Ratio – The ratio of the length of the common boundary to the length of the
smallest perimeter. Increasing the Shared Boundary Ratio causes the number of grouped faces
decreases. The ratio can range from 0 to 0.5. The default setting for the ratio is 0. The following
figure shows the results of setting the Shared Boundary Ratio to 0.2, 0.3, and 0.4, respectively.

Figure 215: Shared Boundary Ratio at 0.2, 0.3, and 0.4

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 555
Virtual Topology

4. Make adjustments to the Advanced (p. 572) settings in the Details view.

5. Do one of the following:

• Click right mouse button on the Virtual Topology object and choose Generate Virtual Cells
from the context menu. Virtual cells are automatically created for each region that meets the
criteria established by the settings in step 2.

These virtual cells remain valid after a geometry update.

• Choose the face (Ctrl+F) or body selection filter and pick two or more faces or two or more
bodies. Click right mouse button on the Virtual Topology object and choose Generate
Virtual Cells on Selected Entities from the context menu. From the selected set of faces or
bodies, the software groups adjacent entities appropriately and automatically creates virtual
cells for each region that meets the criteria established by the settings in step 3.

These virtual cells become invalid after a geometry update.

Creating Virtual Cells Automatically Using Repair Mode

1. Insert a Virtual Topology object in the tree.

2. In the Details View change the Method to Repair.

3. Make adjustments as needed to any of the following settings in the Details View:

• Behavior – Determines the type of repair to be performed. The choices are Repair All, Repair
Small Edges, Repair Slivers, and Repair Small Faces.

– The Repair Small Edges setting tries to remove all the small edges, satisfying the Repair
Settings criteria displayed in the Details View. The small edges are removed either by
merging their attached faces or by merging the small edge with an adjacent edge. The
Repair Small Edges setting exposes the Max Edge Length and Min Edge Length settings.
The edges with lengths between Max Edge Length and Min Edge Length are repaired.

The following example, the first figure shows small edges between faces.

Figure 216: Small Edges Between Faces

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
556 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Managing Virtual Cells

After Small Edge Repair (as shown in the following figure) with Max Edge Length set to
0.5 mm and Min Edge Length set to 0 mm, the small edges are removed by the faces
being merged.

Figure 217: Small Edges Removed

In the following figure, small edges are attached to the same faces.

Figure 218: Small Edges Attached to the Same Faces

After Small Edge Repair with Max Edge Length set to 0.9 mm and Min Edge Length set
to 0 mm, the small edges are merged.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 557
Virtual Topology

Figure 219: Small Edge Repair with Edge Merge

– The Repair Slivers option tries to remove all the slivers, satisfying the Repair Settings
criteria shown in the Details View. The slivers are removed by merging the sliver face with
another adjacent face. The Repair Slivers option exposes the Max Sliver Width and Min
Sliver Width options. The sliver faces with width between Max Sliver Width and Min
Sliver Width are repaired.

The following figure shows a geometry with a sliver face.

Figure 220: Sliver Face

After Sliver Repair with Max Sliver Length set to 2 mm and Min Sliver Length to 0 mm,
the sliver face is merged with an adjacent face.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
558 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Managing Virtual Cells

Figure 221: Sliver Repair

– The Repair Small Faces option tries to remove all the small faces satisfying the Repair
Settings criteria shown in the Details View. The small faces are removed by merging the
small face with another adjacent face.

The Repair Small Faces option exposes the Max Face Area and Min Face Area options.
The faces with area between Max Face Area and Min Face Area are repaired.

The following figure shows a small face.

Figure 222: Small Face

After small face repair with Max Face Area set to 0.04 mm2 and Min Face Area set to 0
mm2, the small face is merged with an adjacent face.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 559
Virtual Topology

Figure 223: Small Face Repair

– The Repair All setting tries to remove all of the small edges, sliver faces, and small faces
that satisfy the Repair Settings criteria shown in the Details View.

Repair Settings– Exposes settings like Max Edge Length and Min Edge Length, depending
on the Behavior settings. The default values for different Repair Settings are:

→ Max Edge Length: Default is set to ½ Min Size (available under Sizing in mesh
when Size Function is turned ON)

→ Min Edge Length: Default is 0, or no lower limit

→ Max Face Area: Default is set to (½ Min Size)2.

→ Min Face Area: Default is 0, or no lower limit

→ Max Sliver Width: Default is set to ½ Min Size

→ Min Sliver Width: Default is 0, or no lower limit

Note:

Setting any of the Repair Settings to -1 resets the value of that setting back to its default.

4. Make adjustments to the Advanced (p. 572) settings in the Details view.

5. Do one of the following:

• Click right mouse button on the Virtual Topology object and choose Generate Virtual Cells
from the context menu. Virtual cells are automatically created for each region that meets the
criteria established by the settings in step 2.

These virtual cells remain valid after a geometry update.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
560 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Managing Virtual Split Edges

• Choose the face (Ctrl+F) or body selection filter and pick two or more faces or two or more
bodies. Click right mouse button on the Virtual Topology object and choose Generate
Virtual Cells on Selected Entities from the context menu. From the selected set of faces or
bodies, the software groups adjacent entities appropriately and automatically creates virtual
cells for each region that meets the criteria established by the settings in step 3.

These virtual cells become invalid after a geometry update.

Creating and Managing Virtual Split Edges

When preparing geometry for meshing, it may be advantageous to split an edge into two virtual edges
separated by a vertex. For example, in the case of a rectangular face in which a single edge on one side
of the face corresponds to two edges on the opposite side, you can split the single edge so that node
alignment across the face can have similar spacing. This can be achieved by creating Virtual Split Edge
objects. You can also modify the split interactively by dragging the newly created vertex along the
length of the original edge. This alters the split location.

Splitting an Edge
1. Insert a Virtual Topology object in the tree.

2. Choose the edge selection filter (Ctrl+E) and then in the Geometry window, pick the edge that you
want to split. The selected edge can be either a "real" edge or a previously-defined virtual edge.

Note:

To simplify specification of the split location, when picking the edge to split you
should position your cursor at the point on the edge where you want the split to
occur. Then select Virtual Split Edge at + as described in step 3.

3. Create the Virtual Split Edge using either of these methods:

• To define the split location according to your cursor location on the edge, right-click in the
Geometry window and select Insert> Virtual Split Edge at + from the context menu, or
choose Split Edge at + on the Virtual Topology context toolbar.

• To define the split without specifying the location, select the edge you want to split, right-
click in the Geometry window, and select Insert> Virtual Split Edge from the context menu,
or choose Split Edge on the Virtual Topology context toolbar. By default the split ratio will
be set to 0.5, but you can change it later by using the Virtual Topology Properties dia-
log (p. 573).

Note:

If the software cannot create the split, the error message “Unable to split the edge
at selected location or with given split ratio” will appear and the split will not be
created.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 561
Virtual Topology

4. In step 3, if you created the Virtual Split Edge object by selecting Virtual Split Edge at +, the split
ratio is determined automatically by the software. If you created it by selecting Virtual Split Edge,
you can either accept the default of 0.5 or specify a different split ratio by right-clicking and selecting
Edit Selected Virtual Entity Properties.... Then edit the Split Ratio field on the Virtual Topology
Properties dialog.

The split ratio defines the location of the split by specifying the ratio between the distance from
the start point of the edge to the split location and the overall length of the edge. Specify a value
from 0 to 1. For example, a value of 0.5 will split the edge into two edges of equal length. A value
of 0.75 will split the edge into two edges where the first edge is three quarters of the length of the
original edge, and the second edge is only one quarter of the length of the original edge. A value
of 0 or 1 is valid only if the selected edge is a closed edge. In the case of a closed edge, such as a
circle, the edge will be split into two edges, and the new vertex will be placed along one of the
new edges.

You can change the location of the split at any time by accessing the Virtual Topology Proper-
ties (p. 573) dialog and editing the Split Ratio field, or by modifying the edge split interactively.

To modify an edge split interactively, select any portion of the original edge or its vertex split location
in the Geometry view. Then, while pressing F4 on the keyboard, drag the mouse along the length
of the edge to redistribute the split ratio. The display indicates the initial 3-D location of the split,
together with a preview of its new location and split ratio.

When you change the split ratio of an edge split that is attached to a face split, both the edge split
and the face split are adjusted accordingly.

Virtual Split Edge Dependency

Existing virtual edges and/or existing virtual split edges can be used to create new virtual split edges.
Within the split edge hierarchy, a virtual split edge depends on a virtual edge if the latter is used to
create the former. Similarly, a virtual split edge depends on another virtual split edge if the latter is
used to create the former.

Note:

If a virtual edge was created from a virtual split edge, you cannot delete the virtual split edge
without first deleting the virtual edge. Conversely, if a virtual split edge was created from a
virtual edge, you cannot delete the virtual edge without first deleting the virtual split edge.

A warning message appears in the Messages window for each failed deletion. To highlight
the geometry that is responsible for a message, select the message, right-click, and select
Show Problematic Geometry from the context menu.

Locking Locations of Dependent Virtual Split Edges

In cases involving virtual split edge dependency, you can choose whether the locations of dependent
splits are locked or unlocked when the location of the parent split is modified. If unlocked, the location
of the dependent split moves to maintain its defined split ratio when the parent is modified. If locked,
the location of the dependent split persists when the parent is modified. Regardless of the setting, the

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
562 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Managing Virtual Split Edges

location of the dependent split will move if preserving its location would invalidate the split (see Fig-
ure 227: Overridden Locked Dependent Splits (p. 564) for an example).

Note:

For parametric updates, all virtual split edges are treated as unlocked.

1. Highlight the Virtual Topology object in the tree.

Note:

Locking must be set globally on the Virtual Topology object. It cannot be set locally
for individual Virtual Split Edge objects.

2. In the Details View, set the Lock position of dependent edge splits option to Yes (default) or No.

The following figures illustrate locking. Figure 224: Original Virtual Split Edge with Dependent Virtual
Split Edge (p. 563) shows an example in which a split at .5 was defined on original edge ab, creating
two new edges—ac and cb. A second split at .5 was then defined on edge cb, creating two new
edges—cd and db.

Figure 224: Original Virtual Split Edge with Dependent Virtual Split Edge

Figure 225: Unlocked Dependent Splits (p. 564) shows the expected behavior when Lock position of
dependent edge splits is set to No, and the split located at point c is changed from .5 to .1. Notice
that point d has moved to maintain its defined split ratio at .5 of cb.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 563
Virtual Topology

Figure 225: Unlocked Dependent Splits

Figure 226: Locked Dependent Splits (p. 564) shows the expected behavior when Lock position of de-
pendent edge splits is set to Yes, and the split located at point c is changed from .5 to .1. Notice that
in this case point d has not moved, and the split ratio is now .72222 of cb.

Figure 226: Locked Dependent Splits

In Figure 227: Overridden Locked Dependent Splits (p. 564), the split located at point c was changed
from .5 to .9. Even with locking set to Yes, in this case point d was moved because preserving its location
would have invalidated the split (that is, if its original location had been preserved, point d would no
longer be located on edge cb).

Figure 227: Overridden Locked Dependent Splits

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
564 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Managing Virtual Split Faces

Notes on Virtual Split Edges

• When the Sweep mesh method (p. 235) is used, the guiding edges must have consistent lengths to
obtain a regular mesh in the sweep direction. You can define virtual split edges to achieve consistent
lengths for these edges.

• If your Geometry view is configured to display Shaded Exterior and Edges, you can conveniently
review virtual split edges by clicking the Virtual Topology group in the Tree Outline. In this mode,
split edges will be highlighted in two different colors (automatically assigned) to draw attention to
the splits.

• You cannot use the virtual split edge feature to split edges belonging to line bodies.

Creating and Managing Virtual Split Faces

When preparing geometry for meshing, it may be advantageous to split a face. This can be achieved
by creating Virtual Split Face objects, which allow you to split a face along two vertices to create 1 to
N virtual faces. The selected vertices must be located on the face that you want to split.

Splitting a Face
1. Insert a Virtual Topology object in the tree.

2. Choose the vertex selection filter and then in the Geometry window, pick two vertices on the face
that you want to split.

Note:

• The vertices must be attached to the same face and in the same part.

• Optionally, you can create one or more Virtual Hard Vertex objects to facilitate the split
face operation. Virtual Hard Vertex objects allow you to define a hard point according
to your cursor location on a face, and then use that hard point in the split face opera-
tion. Refer to Creating and Managing Virtual Hard Vertices (p. 568).

• To see all vertices in the Geometry window, including any virtual hard vertices, make
sure that the Show Vertices option is enabled.

3. Create the Virtual Split Face by doing one of the following:

• Choose Split Face at Vertices on the Virtual Topology context toolbar.

• Click right mouse button on the Virtual Topology object and select Insert> Virtual Split
Face at Vertices from the context menu.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 565
Virtual Topology

• Click right mouse button in the Geometry window and select Insert> Virtual Split Face at
Vertices from the context menu.

Note:

• If the software cannot create the split, the error message “Unable to split face at selected
vertices, please ensure vertices are attached to the same face and in the same part”
will appear and the split will not be created.

• To change the location of a virtual hard vertex interactively, select it in the Geometry
view. Then, while pressing F4 on the keyboard, drag the mouse to move the vertex to
the desired location. You cannot move the vertex beyond the face on which it was
created. The display indicates the initial 3-D location of the vertex, together with a
preview of its new location.

When you change the location of a virtual hard vertex, the corresponding face split is
adjusted accordingly.

You cannot use the Virtual Topology Properties dialog to change the location of a
virtual hard vertex.

Special Considerations for Virtual Split Faces

Certain types of faces cannot be split by a single split operation; they require two splits. For example,
refer to the cylindrical face in the figure below. As a result of the first split, a seam edge is created and
the face is no longer a periodic face. To actually split the cylindrical face, you then must select two
more vertices and split the face a second time.

Figure 228: Types of Faces Requiring Two Virtual Split Face Operations

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
566 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Managing Virtual Split Faces

To split a face along more than two vertices you must perform a series of split face operations using
two vertices at a time. For example, refer to the figure below, where V1, V2, V3, and V4 are vertices,
and HV1 and HV2 are virtual hard vertices. Splitting the face through V1, HV1, HV2, and V4 would require
three split operations:

1. Select V1 and HV1 and split the face.

2. Select HV1 and HV2 and split the face.

3. Select HV2 and V4 and split the face.

Figure 229: Splits Requiring a Series of Virtual Split Face Operations

Virtual Split Face Dependency

Existing virtual faces and/or existing virtual split faces can be used to create new virtual split faces.
Within the split face hierarchy, a virtual split face depends on a virtual face if the latter is used to create
the former. Similarly, a virtual split face depends on another virtual split face if the latter is used to
create the former.

Faces can be split by selecting vertices of virtual split edges, providing the vertices meet the requirements
described in the procedure above.

Note:

If a virtual face was created from a virtual split face, you cannot delete the virtual split face
without first deleting the virtual face. Conversely, if a virtual split face was created from a
virtual face, you cannot delete the virtual face without first deleting the virtual split face.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 567
Virtual Topology

If a virtual split face was created from vertices of virtual split edges, you cannot delete the
virtual split edges without first deleting the virtual split face.

If a virtual split face was created from virtual hard vertices, you cannot delete the virtual hard
vertices without first deleting the virtual split face.

A warning message appears in the Messages window for each failed deletion. To highlight
the geometry that is responsible for a message, select the message, right-click, and select
Show Problematic Geometry from the context menu.

Creating and Managing Virtual Hard Vertices

You can create one or more Virtual Hard Vertex objects to facilitate a split face operation (p. 565). Virtual
Hard Vertex objects allow you to define a hard point according to your cursor location on a face, and
then use that hard point in the split face operation.

Creating a Virtual Hard Vertex

1. To create a virtual hard vertex (hard point), choose the face selection filter (Ctrl+F) and then in the
Geometry window, pick the face that you want to split. Position your cursor on the face where you
want the hard point to be located, left-click, and do one of the following:

• Right-click in the Geometry window and select Insert> Virtual Hard Vertex at + from the context
menu.

• Choose Hard Vertex at + on the Virtual Topology context toolbar.

Hanging Edges Resulting From Split Faces

It is important to understand the effect hard vertices and hanging edges can have on meshing. If a face
is not completely split, the partial face split is treated as a hanging edge and can create constraints on
the mesher. If a virtual hard vertex is created but is not used for a split (or it comes in from the geometry),
it can also create constraints on the mesher.

Common Virtual Topology Operations

This section describes common virtual topology operations.

Importing Legacy Models

Upon import of a legacy model into release 2025 R1, suppressed virtual topology entities will be deleted.
This includes any virtual topology entities that were suppressed manually (for example, by right-clicking
on the virtual topology entity in the Tree Outline and selecting Suppress from the context menu), but
it does not include virtual topology entities that are suppressed because the body containing them is
suppressed. If entities are deleted, a warning message will be issued advising you to import the model
into an earlier release, unsuppress the affected entities, and save the model for use in release 2025 R1.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
568 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Common Virtual Topology Operations

Handling of Geometry Changes That Result in Incomplete Virtual Entities

The Virtual Topology object that appears in the Tree Outline represents all definitions of virtual face or
virtual edge groups, and all definitions of virtual split edges, virtual split faces, and virtual hard vertices
within a model. Individual objects for these virtual entities do not appear in the Tree. If a geometry
operation invalidates a virtual entity, refreshing the geometry does not cause the Virtual Topology
object in the Tree Outline to become underdefined. For example, if you include a fillet and one neigh-
boring face in the creation of a virtual cell, but later remove the fillet from the CAD model and refresh
the geometry, that individual virtual cell will become underdefined (as it only includes the one neigh-
boring face), but it will not be deleted, and there will be no change in the Tree Outline. If in a later
operation, the fillet is re-added to the CAD model and refreshed, the virtual cell will be restored. When
a virtual entity becomes underdefined due to a geometry operation, a message is issued. You might
be able to view partial Virtual Entities by right-clicking on the Show Problematic Geometry message.

Underdefined Virtual Topologies are not displayed in Virtual Topology graphics, nor are they included
in Virtual Topology statistics.

Note:

If you suppress a part or all bodies in a multibody part in the DesignModeler application,
and refresh the geometry in the Meshing application, any virtual topology that had been
defined on those bodies will be removed. The virtual topology will not be removed if only
some bodies within a multibody part are suppressed in DesignModeler.

Using Named Selections with Virtual Topology

If you are using Named Selections with virtual topology and you subsequently modify the virtual topology,
you must manually update the Named Selections. For example, if you create a Named Selection to
define local inflation and then define virtual topology on that Named Selection, you must update the
Named Selection before generating the mesh or the inflation will not be defined correctly. This limitation
does not always occur if you perform a similar operation using the DesignModeler application. For ex-
ample, after you perform a merge operation in DesignModeler, the software may be able to relink the
Named Selection to the topology automatically when the geometry is refreshed.

Cycling Through Virtual Entities in the Geometry Window

You can use the and buttons on the Virtual Topology context toolbar to cycle through virtual
topology entities in the sequence in which they were created and display them in the Geometry window.

1. In the Geometry window, select a virtual entity.

2. On the Virtual Topology context toolbar, click or .

Remember the following information when using and :

• and are grayed out until at least one virtual entity has been defined.

• If no virtual entities are selected, clicking displays the first virtual entity in the sequence and clicking
displays the last virtual entity in the sequence.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 569
Virtual Topology

• If the currently selected virtual entity is the last in the sequence, clicking displays the first virtual
entity in the sequence. If the currently selected virtual entity is the first in the sequence, clicking
displays the last virtual entity in the sequence.

• If using when multiple virtual entities are selected, the entity that has the highest ID (based on
the order in which the entities were created) is considered to be the current selection, and clicking
displays the entity that follows it.

• If using when multiple virtual entities are selected, the entity that has the lowest ID (based on the
order in which the entities were created) is considered to be the current selection, and clicking
displays the entity that precedes it.

• If the current multiple selection contains no virtual entities, and work as though there are no
selections (That is, clicking displays the first virtual entity in the sequence and clicking displays
the last virtual entity in the sequence). If the current multiple selection contains a mixture of virtual
entities and non-virtual entities, the non-virtual entities are ignored.

• If a split is selected, both edges or all faces of the split are displayed.

• If any virtual entities are deleted or merged, the sequence is adjusted automatically. For example,
the following behaviors occur if you create 14 virtual entities and then perform these actions in order:

1. If you select the fifth virtual entity and click , the sixth virtual entity is displayed.

2. Click , and the fifth virtual entity is displayed.

3. Delete the sixth virtual entity, select the fifth virtual entity, and click . The seventh virtual entity
is displayed. This occurs because the sixth virtual entity was deleted.

4. Merge the seventh and eighth virtual entities, which creates a fifteenth virtual entity.

5. Select the fifth virtual entity and click . The ninth virtual entity is displayed. This occurs because
the sixth virtual entity was deleted and the seventh and eighth were merged to form a new entity.

Deleting All Virtual Entities

You can use the Delete All Virtual Entities option to delete all virtual topology entities from a model
at one time, regardless of type.

1. Highlight the Virtual Topology object in the Tree Outline or select any virtual topology entity in
the Geometry window.

2. Right-click and select Delete All Virtual Entities.

3. Answer Yes at the prompt.

Deleting All Virtual Cells

You can use the Delete All Virtual Cells option to delete all virtual topology cells (the virtual topology
group itself, including any virtual split edges, virtual split faces, or virtual hard vertices, will not be de-
leted). This option is available only when the Virtual Topology object in the Tree Outline is highlighted

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
570 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Common Virtual Topology Operations

and virtual cells, as well as virtual split edges, virtual split faces, and/or virtual hard vertices exist. Oth-
erwise, use the Delete All Virtual Entities option.

1. Highlight the Virtual Topology object in the Tree Outline.

2. Right-click the Virtual Topology object in the Tree Outline or in the Geometry window. Select
Delete All Virtual Cells.

3. Click Yes at the prompt.

Deleting All Virtual Split Edges

You can use the Delete All Virtual Split Edges option to delete all virtual split edges (the virtual topology
group itself, including any virtual cells, virtual split faces, or virtual hard vertices, will not be deleted).
This option is available only when the Virtual Topology object in the Tree Outline is highlighted and
virtual split edges, as well as virtual split faces and/or virtual hard vertices exist. Otherwise, use the
Delete All Virtual Entities option.

1. Highlight the Virtual Topology object in the Tree Outline.

2. Right-click the Virtual Topology object in the Tree Outline, or in the Geometry window. Select
Delete All Virtual Split Edges.

3. Answer Yes at the prompt.

Deleting All Virtual Split Faces

You can use the Delete All Virtual Split Faces option to delete all virtual split faces (the virtual topology
group itself, including any virtual cells, virtual split edges, or virtual hard vertices, will not be deleted).
This option is available only when the Virtual Topology object in the Tree Outline is highlighted and
virtual split faces, as well as virtual split edges and/or virtual hard vertices exist. Otherwise, use the
Delete All Virtual Entities option.

1. Highlight the Virtual Topology object in the Tree Outline.

2. Right-click the Virtual Topology object in the Tree Outline, or in the Geometry window. Select
Delete All Virtual Split Faces.

3. Click Yes at the prompt.

Deleting All Virtual Hard Vertices

You can use the Delete All Virtual Hard Vertices option to delete all virtual hard vertices (the virtual
topology group itself, including any virtual cells, virtual split faces, or virtual split edges, will not be
deleted). This option is available only when the Virtual Topology object in the Tree Outline is highlighted
and virtual hard vertices, as well as virtual split faces and/or virtual split edges exist. Otherwise, use the
Delete All Virtual Entities option.

1. Highlight the Virtual Topology object in the Tree Outline.

2. Right-click the Virtual Topology object in the Tree Outline or in the Geometry window. Select
Delete All Virtual Hard Vertices.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 571
Virtual Topology

3. Click Yes at the prompt.

Deleting Selected Virtual Entities

You can use the Delete Selected Virtual Entities (And Dependents) option to delete selected virtual
topology entities, along with any dependents if applicable.

To use a right mouse button click:

1. Highlight any object in the Tree Outline (for example, the Geometry or Mesh object).

2. In the Geometry window, select the virtual entities that you want to delete.

3. Right-click and select Delete Selected Virtual Entities (And Dependents).

4. Answer Yes at the prompt.

To use the Virtual Topology context toolbar:

1. Highlight the Virtual Topology object in the Tree Outline.

2. In the Geometry window, select the virtual entities that you want to delete.

3. Choose Delete on the Virtual Topology context toolbar.

4. Click Yes at the prompt.

Also see:

• Creating and Managing Virtual Cells (p. 546)

• Creating and Managing Virtual Split Edges (p. 561)

• Creating and Managing Virtual Split Faces (p. 565)

• Creating and Managing Virtual Hard Vertices (p. 568)

Common Virtual Topology Features

This section describes features that are common to all types of virtual topology.

Setting Advanced Properties

The following Advanced settings are available in the Details View for Automatic and Repair modes.

• Generate on Update – Sets whether you want to include the settings in this Details View when you
update the geometry.

• Simplify Faces – Removes hard edges and hard vertices from the selection.

– Yes: If the Simplify Faces property is turned on, the program removes hard edges and hard
vertices.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
572 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Common Virtual Topology Features

– No: If the Simplify Faces property is turned off, faces are not simplified.

• Merge Face Edges – The property is relevant only during the virtual face creation process. It applies
only to manually-created virtual faces and can be modified at any time, but the modification will
have no effect on previously-created virtual faces.

– Yes: If the Merge Face Edges property is turned on, the program will attempt to merge
bounding edges of a newly manually-created virtual face and create virtual edges. The criterion
used to merge edges is based on the Behavior setting.

– No: If the Merge Face Edges property is turned off, only a virtual face will be created out of
selected faces.

• Lock position of dependent edge splits – See Locking Locations of Dependent Virtual Split
Edges (p. 562).

• Virtual Faces, Virtual Edges, Virtual Split Edges, Virtual Split Faces, Virtual Hard Vertices, Total
Virtual Entities – Read-only indications of corresponding counts in the model. See Viewing Virtual
Topology Statistics (p. 576).

Using the Virtual Topology Properties Dialog to Edit Properties

You can use the Virtual Topology Properties dialog to edit the properties of selected virtual topology
entities.

To use a right mouse button click:

1. Highlight any object in the Tree Outline (for example, the Geometry or Mesh object).

2. In the Geometry window, select the virtual entities whose properties you want to edit.

3. Right-click and select Edit Selected Virtual Entity Properties....

4. Make the desired changes in the Virtual Topology Properties dialog.

5. To apply any changes and/or exit, press Enter on your keyboard or click X on the dialog.

To use the Virtual Topology context toolbar:

1. Highlight the Virtual Topology object in the Tree Outline.

2. In the Geometry window, select the virtual entities whose properties you want to edit.

3. Choose Edit on the Virtual Topology context toolbar.

4. Make the desired changes in the Virtual Topology Properties dialog.

5. To apply any changes and/or exit, press Enter on your keyboard or click X on the dialog.

Remember the following information when using the Virtual Topology Properties dialog:

• If all selected virtual entities have the same value for a particular property, that value appears in the
Virtual Topology Properties dialog. Otherwise, the value for that property is blank.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 573
Virtual Topology

• Fields that are grayed out are read-only.

• The changes you make in the Virtual Topology Properties dialog will be applied to all selected vir-
tual entities.

• If you change a split location, the graphic in the Geometry window will be redrawn.

Consider the examples below. For the first example, two virtual faces were selected. One virtual face
was composed of five faces, and its Project to Underlying Geometry option was set to No. The other
virtual face was composed of three faces, and its Project to Underlying Geometry option was set to
Yes.

Figure 230: Virtual Topology Properties Dialog: Example 1

In the example below, two virtual faces were selected. In this case each virtual face was composed of
three faces, and Project to Underlying Geometry was set to Yes for both virtual faces.

Figure 231: Virtual Topology Properties Dialog: Example 2

In the example below, two virtual edges and one virtual split edge were selected. Both virtual edges
were composed of two edges, but Project to Underlying Geometry was set to Yes for one virtual
edge and to No for the other.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
574 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Common Virtual Topology Features

Figure 232: Virtual Topology Properties Dialog: Example 3

In the example below, one virtual face and one virtual split face were selected. The virtual face was
composed of five faces, and its Project to Underlying Geometry option was set to No.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 575
Virtual Topology

Figure 233: Virtual Topology Properties Dialog: Example 4

In the example below, one virtual hard vertex was selected.

Note:

Although you cannot use the dialog to modify the Virtual Hard Vertex Location, you can
do so interactively using the F4 key. See Creating and Managing Virtual Split Faces (p. 565)
for details.

Figure 234: Virtual Topology Properties Dialog: Example 5

Viewing Virtual Topology Statistics

The Details View of the Virtual Topology object provides counts of the following:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
576 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Common Virtual Topology Features

• Virtual faces

• Virtual edges

• Virtual split edges

• Virtual split faces

• Virtual hard vertices

• Total virtual entities

Remember the following information when viewing virtual topology statistics:

• Statistics are updated whenever a geometry or virtual topology change occurs.

• If any body is suppressed, the virtual topology entities on that body are not counted.

• If you create a virtual topology entity and then use it to create another virtual topology entity, the
former exists in the background in a suppressed state and is not counted.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 577
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
578 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Meshing: Troubleshooting
This section is intended to provide you with tips and strategies for avoiding and handling problems
that may occur when using the Meshing application. Topics include:

• Meshing Process (p. 580)

• Recommended First Course of Action for Meshing Failures (p. 580)

• Understanding Messaging (p. 582)

• Identifying Poor Quality Mesh (p. 580)

• Using Named Selection Diagnostics to Find Meshing Issues (p. 596)

• Tips for Using Virtual Topology (p. 597)

• Tips for Successful Meshing Using Local Controls (p. 597)

• Handling Patch Conforming Tetrahedral, Hex Dominant, Quad Dominant, and All Triangle Meshing
Failures (p. 589)

• Handling General MultiZone Meshing Failures (p. 593)

• Handling General Sweep Meshing Failures (p. 592)

• Handling Failures due to Protected Topology (p. 585)

• Handling Patch Independent Tet Meshing Failures (p. 588)

• Understanding States (p. 583)

• Shape Checks and Meshing Failures (p. 584)

• Handling Selective Meshing Failures (p. 585)

• Handling Thin Sweep Meshing Failures (p. 593)

• Handling Failed Mesh Connections (p. 596)

• Handling Failed Contact Matches (p. 596)

• Meshing Complicated Models (p. 598)

• Using a Localized Operating System on Linux (p. 600)

• Using Lustre Parallel File Systems on Linux (p. 600)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 579
Troubleshooting

Meshing Process
When you generate mesh, the mesh is generated as a separate process per part. If there are multiple
parts, each part can be meshed in parallel. While meshing, the status of meshing is displayed in the
bottom left-hand side of the screen where an interrupt button is also available. When you double-click
on the mesh status, Ansys WorkBench Mesh Status window displays the detailed information on the
meshing progress on parallel cores.

Other information, such as the amount of memory used can be found by using a task manager.

While the mesher is working at certain points it will highlight topology (edges, faces, bodies). If the
mesher gets stuck for a long time on a particular topology, you should inspect the highlighted topology
and possibly merge it with another topology using virtual topology, adjust the mesh sizes in that area
or return to a geometry tool to investigate and fix the problematic location.

For details about topology highlighting during the meshing process, refer to Generating Mesh (p. 528).
For information about how to set the default for topology highlighting, refer to Meshing Options on
the Options Dialog Box (p. 389).

Identifying Poor Quality Mesh

The following approaches are recommended to improve the mesh quality and obtain a valid mesh:

• Set the Display Style to identify quality by color.

• Use the Mesh Metric (p. 133) option to view information about a number of quality statistics and set
Min/Max values to find poor quality elements.

• Use the Worksheet as your Scoping Method and use worksheet data to define criterion-based
measurements.

Recommended First Course of Action for Meshing Failures

If your mesh generation fails, it may be a partial or complete meshing failure. Your first course of action
should be to examine any messages that the mesher returns to the Messages window. The messages
include hints that explain why the meshing completely or partially failed. In some cases, you can right-
click the message and select Show Problematic Geometry to highlight any entities associated with
the message in the Geometry window and see what the failed mesh looks like. If the geometry contains
many bodies and only a few have failed to mesh, to isolate the bodies that failed to mesh, right-click
the Geometry window and click Go To > Unmeshed Bodies. Other bodies can then be hidden.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
580 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
The mesher helps you to visually identify obsolete or failed meshes. As shown in the figures below,
failed meshes are shaded in maroon and obsolete meshes are colored yellow. The approximate location
the meshing failure is identified by a convergence of white lines. If this is not clear, color by connectivity
can be enabled to identify the point at which unmeshed face edges will be marked as red (single con-
nectivity) and if you switch to wireframe mode these locations can be seen more clearly.

Figure 235: Obsolete Mesh

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 581
Troubleshooting

Figure 236: Failed Mesh

If the entities are very small, you can refer to the status bar at the bottom of the window to view stat-
istics related to the entities. Then create a Named Selection to retain information about the problematic
entities. Continue reading below for more information about messaging.

Understanding Messaging
The Messages window prompts you with feedback concerning meshing operations. Every message
returned from the mesher is not necessarily an error. Messages come in three forms:

• Error: Requires action from you to obtain a mesh.

• Warning: Guides you in best practices or alternative courses of action. A warning does not require
you to fix any problems, but may give an indication of a subsequent related error.

• Information: Helps you make better decisions related to meshing your model or provides you with
information about the approach the mesher used to mesh your model.

Once messages are displayed, you can:

• Double-click a message to display its contents in a pop-up dialog box.

• Highlight a message and then press the key combination Ctrl+C to copy its contents to the clipboard.

• Press the Delete key to remove a selected message from the window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
582 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Select one or more messages and then use the right mouse button click to display the following
context menu options:

– Go To Object - Selects the object in the Tree Outline that is responsible for the message.

– Show Problematic Geometry - Highlights the geometry in the Geometry window that is responsible
for the message. This option is not always available.

– Show Intersecting Surface Mesh - Creates two named selection groups. One named selection
group has the failed body, and the other group contains the intersecting elements displayed by
the Show Intersecting Surface Mesh.

– Show Message - Displays the selected message in a pop-up dialog box.

– Copy - Copies the selected messages to the clipboard.

– Delete - Removes the selected messages.

– Refresh - Refreshes the contents of the Messages window as you edit objects in the Tree Outline.

Understanding States
Sometimes the mesher returns an invalid mesh. Refer to the state of the body in the Tree Outline to
determine whether a body was meshed:

• A check mark denotes a body in a fully defined but unmeshed state.

• A check mark with a hash denotes a meshed body.

• A question mark denotes a body that needs more information before it can be sent to the
solver.

When your model contains an active unmeshed body, the Mesh object in the Tree Outline is preceded
by a lightning bolt to indicate a body is out-of-date and requires action:

When your model is in the process of being meshed, the Mesh object is preceded by a green lightening
bolt to indicate that the meshing is in progress:

When your model is fully meshed (all bodies are in a meshed state), the Mesh object is preceded by a
check mark to indicate that the meshing data is fully defined and ready for the next stage of your
analysis (that is, an update in the Meshing application or a solve in the Mechanical application):

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 583
Troubleshooting

Understanding Mesh Connection and Contact Match States

Mesh connections and contact matches use the following symbols to denote mesh state:

• A check mark denotes a connection or match that is fully defined and ready to be connected
or matched.

• A check mark with a hash denotes a successful connection or match.

• A question mark denotes a connection or match that is invalid that needs more information
before it can be connected or matched.

• A circle with a bar in it denotes a connection or match that is ignored. Check the Details view
of the mesh connection or contact match for the reason.

• A lightning bolt indicates that the connection or match is out-of-date and requires action.

• An ‘X’ denotes a suppressed connection or match. Unsuppressing the connection or match re-
quires it to be reconnected or rematched even if it was previously connected or matched.

Shape Checks and Meshing Failures

Meshing may fail if the mesh quality does not meet the criterion of the defined shape checks (p. 127).
The following approaches are recommended to improve the mesh quality and obtain a valid mesh:

1. To identify faces that do not meet the shape checking criteria, right-click the warning message and
select Show Problematic Geometry.

2. Use a different shape check setting.

Some shape checks (p. 127) have a stricter set of criterion than others. By using a different shape
check setting a mesh might be generated, and the mesh metrics bar graph (p. 133) can be used to
find the mesh violating the stricter shape checks. In this way, locating the problem is the first step
to fixing it.

Note:

You can turn off most shape checks altogether by setting Check Mesh Quality (p. 121) to
No.

3. Use the methods described in Identifying Poor Quality Mesh (p. 580) to determine the quality of the
mesh.

4. Use the Preview Surface Mesh (p. 531) and/or Preview Inflation (p. 534) features.

With this approach the boundary mesh is generated even if the mesh would violate the defined
shape checks. Once the previewed mesh is generated, use the mesh metrics bar graph (p. 133) to
determine the location of bad quality elements. Generally, fixing the bad quality surface mesh is
the best way to fix the volume mesh because bad quality mesh is usually a result of the geometry

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
584 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 over-constraining the mesh topology. Using defeaturing controls (such as Loop Removal (p. 196) and
Mesh Defeaturing (p. 110)), pinch (p. 187) controls, and virtual topologies (p. 545) are all good strategies
to remove geometry features that may cause problems for the meshing algorithms.

Note:

Not all mesh methods support the use of Preview Surface Mesh (p. 531) and Preview
Inflation (p. 534).

For additional information about the shape checking acceptance criterion used by Ansys Workbench,
refer to Ansys Workbench and Mechanical APDL Application Meshing Differences (p. 87).

Handling Selective Meshing Failures

Selective meshing (p. 444) may lead to unexpected results in cases where a mesh control change affects
only one body. This may in turn lead to sweep mesh failure because the source and target meshes no
longer align or the resultant change makes a body unsweepable. If desired, you can set the Allow Se-
lective Meshing (p. 389) option to No to disable selective meshing and allow the mesh control changes
to ripple through the entire part.

Selective meshing is not persistent for a geometry update or re-mesh operation. However, you can use
the Mesh worksheet to create a selective meshing history so that your meshing steps can be repeated
in the desired sequence. Otherwise, you may need to go through your body meshing steps manually
if the single mesh update does not satisfy your meshing requirements. Refer to Using the Mesh Worksheet
to Create a Selective Meshing History (p. 448) for details.

Handling Failures due to Protected Topology

Improper set up of hard protected topology (p. 184) may result in meshing failures if the mesher cannot
return a reasonable mesh while also respecting the topology.

In the example, a sliver face is missing from the Named Selection defined. The Protected option is set
to Yes.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 585
Troubleshooting

Figure 237: Example with Missing Face

The missing face could lead to problems during meshing since boundaries of hard protected topologies
receive special treatment to ensure the mesh is properly associated. The special protection ensures the
outer boundary is captured accurately, however, it could have a negative impact on meshing since the
mesher is forced to capture the sliver surface. With the Highlight option enabled, the problematic face
is highlighted during the meshing process (Figure 238: Problematic Topology Highlighted During
Meshing (p. 587)). If a face is highlighted for a long period of time it can indicate a problem meshing
the face. In this case, the problem comes from the protected topology.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
586 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Figure 238: Problematic Topology Highlighted During Meshing

The missing face could also lead to other meshing failures. For example, the sizing applied may be such
that the mesher cannot return a reasonable mesh while also respecting the topology. In this case, the
mesher may fail in face meshing while trying to protect the boundaries of the Named Selection. The
faces that fail to mesh are indicated in the message window (use the right mouse button to select the
error message to show the problematic geometry).

Figure 239: Failed Surface Mesh Due to Protected Topology

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 587
Troubleshooting

Examine the model to locate objects scoped to either the sliver face or the neighboring faces of the
sliver face (Named Selection). By including the sliver face in the Named Selection definition, the mesh
can be generated while respecting the sizing and the topology.

Figure 240: Mesh Respecting Protected Topology

Handling Patch Independent Tet Meshing Failures

If there are gaps in your geometry and Patch Independent tet meshing fails, the mesh size may be set
smaller than the size of the gaps in the geometry. In such cases, try adjusting the size of the mesh in
those regions so they are larger than the geometry gap size.

Figure 241: Patch Independent Tet Mesh Failure Due to Geometry Gap

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
588 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Figure 242: Patch Independent Tet Mesh Failure Corrected with Larger Mesh

Handling Patch Conforming Tetrahedral, Hex Dominant, Quad Dominant, and

All Triangle Meshing Failures
Some mesh failures are due to an inappropriate defeature size (either default or user input) or dirty
geometry. Use the following guidelines to determine which issue is the cause of the failure:

1. If a message provides "Problematic Geometry" information, use it to determine which portions of

the model fail. Often, one or more faces fail to mesh.

2. Use Diagnostic and Visualization Tools to help you find the problematic locations. Diagnostics for
intersecting faces can point out issues where corrupted surface mesh is causing failure and can be
linked to geometry corruption or defeaturing tolerances causing edge meshing issues. Switching
on Edge Coloring > By Connection along with Wireframe display can highlight unmeshed faces
very clearly with red edges. Diagnostics for Free Mesh Edges will also highlight these areas with
Named Selections.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 589
Troubleshooting

3. If a face fails to mesh, check whether the geometry looks problematic. Problems may arise if very
sharp or thin faces exist or if faces are corrupted (the graphics may look strange/wrapped). If so,
some options used to address the problem are as follows:

• Add local size controls to reduce mesh size.

• Add local size controls to modify defeaturing tolerance.

• Merge faces locally using Virtual Topology.

• Add a local Pinch control.

• Modify the geometry in the problematic location using a geometry tool.

4. If a face fails to mesh but does not appear problematic at first inspection, check to see if the edges
attached to that face may be problematic. For example:

• Turn on the Show Vertices and Close Vertices options to see if any edge is significantly fa-
ceted (that is, it has many edge splits in comparison to mesh size), or if there are any unex-
pected clusters of vertices. The mesher will try to respect geometric vertices, so unnecessary
vertices can lead to complications in meshing that may be avoidable. Use of virtual topolo-
gies (p. 545), pinch (p. 187) controls and so on, to handle in these situations.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
590 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• For a multibody part, turn on the Edge Coloring > By Body Connection option to see if the
edge connectivity is unusual between bodies.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 591
Troubleshooting

Handling General Sweep Meshing Failures

In the event of a sweep mesh failure, the following approaches are recommended:

1. Check for contradicting edge sizings.

2. For Src/Trg Selection, use a manual setting instead of automatic.

3. Check side faces to see if they are mappable. Use of virtual topologies (p. 545) can help make bodies
sweepable:

• Turn on the Show Vertices and Close Vertices options to see if any edges have unnecessary
splits. Extra edge splits can make faces that appear to be mappable more difficult to map.
Virtual edges (p. 546) can help in these cases.

• Use of virtual face splits (p. 565) can help make faces more mappable, as can use of the
mapped face mesh control (p. 314) and its advanced options.

4. Turn on the Edge Coloring > By Connection option to see if the edge connectivity is unusual. In
some cases, the geometry connectivity may not be as expected, and this may create problems
during meshing. These problems could be fixed in the DesignModeler application, the CAD package,
or possibly through the use of virtual topologies (p. 545).

5. For a multibody part, turn on the Edge Coloring > By Body Connection option to see if the edge
connectivity is unusual between bodies.

For detailed information about the requirements and characteristics of sweep meshing, refer to Mesh
Sweeping (p. 399).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
592 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
For additional information, refer to Figure : Strategies for Avoiding Stretched Elements in the Mechanical
APDL help.

Handling Thin Sweep Meshing Failures

In the event of a thin sweep mesh failure, first refer to Thin Model Sweeping (p. 406) for detailed inform-
ation about the requirements and characteristics of thin sweep meshing.

The Preview Source and Target Mesh and Preview Surface Mesh features do not support the thin
model sweeper. Thus, if a failure occurs, you must use the feedback in the Messages window to determ-
ine the problem:

• If Src/Trg Selection is set to Automatic Thin, determine whether the correct source/target faces are
being used. You can review the source/target faces by right-clicking the appropriate message. If in-
correct source/target faces are being used, select the Manual Thin option on the sweep method and
pick the correct faces manually.

• In many cases, the messages tell you to use virtual topology (p. 545) to merge an edge/face. Thin
sweeping requires one division through the thickness for multibody parts. Side edges must connect
directly from source to target to comply with this rule.

• If a message tells you the target faces are not meshed, try swapping the source/target faces.

• In cases where a thin sweep body and a general sweep body are neighbors, the general sweep body
has higher priority and is meshed first. The general sweep operation may place nodes on the side
area/edge of the thin sweep body. If you receive a message describing this situation, you must apply
additional mesh controls to prevent it.

• If both source and target areas are meshed, thin sweep will fail. In this case, you must find some way
to eliminate the situation.

• Thin sweep may issue warning messages stating that the source you picked was swapped with the
target, and that some controls on the target faces were ignored as a result. These types of warning
messages are for your reference only.

Handling General MultiZone Meshing Failures

In the event of a MultiZone mesh failure, the following approaches are recommended:

1. If using automatic source face selection, try using manual source face selection (or vice versa). For
manual source face selection, ensure that all sources and targets are selected. Refer to Using Mul-
tiZone (p. 423) for more information.

2. Ensure that all side faces are mappable. Refer to MultiZone Face Mappability Guidelines (p. 432) for
more information. Use of virtual topologies can help make bodies sweepable:

• Turn on the Show Vertices and Close Vertices options to see if any edges have unnecessary
splits. Extra edge splits can make faces that appear to be mappable more difficult to map. Virtual
edges (p. 546) can help in these cases.

• Use of virtual face splits (p. 565) can help make faces more mappable, as can use of the mapped
face mesh control (p. 314).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 593
Troubleshooting

3. If MultiZone doesn’t respect edge biasing, as shown in Figure 243: Edge Biasing Not Respected by
MultiZone (p. 594) below, it may be because the opposite edge is split. To work around this, perform
the edge biasing on the opposite edges to get a better edge distribution, as shown in Figure 244: Edge
Biasing Respected by MultiZone (p. 595).

Figure 243: Edge Biasing Not Respected by MultiZone

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
594 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Figure 244: Edge Biasing Respected by MultiZone

Note:

When a curve with bigeometric distribution is split, the curve is split into GEO1 and
GEO2 starting at the split point.

4. Turn on the Edge Coloring > By Connection option to see if the edge connectivity is unusual. In
some cases, the geometry connectivity may not be as expected, and this may create problems
during meshing. These problems could be fixed in the DesignModeler application, the CAD package,
or possibly through the use of virtual topologies (p. 545).

5. For a multibody part, turn on the Edge Coloring > By Body Connection option to see if the edge
connectivity is unusual between bodies.

For detailed information about the requirements and characteristics of MultiZone, refer to MultiZone
Meshing (p. 419).

Handling Multizone Thin Sweep Failures

When the mesh fails without providing any useful message, you should try following:

1. Set sweep thickness slightly higher than the maximum thickness of the body.

2. Select source or target faces (try to select source and target faces completely, partial selection
may return partial mesh).

Handling Multizone Cart Sweep Failures

When the mesh fails while performing Cart Sweep, you should try the following:

• Select the source face.

• Adjust cartesian size, you need to be careful about the sizes while performing Cart Sweep. For
some cases, it works only with particular size.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 595
Troubleshooting

• Do not apply too many size parameters, it makes Cart Sweep overconstrained and mesh fails.

• Ensure that there are no drafts in the model, Cart Sweep cannot handle drafts.

Handling Failed Mesh Connections

In the event of a mesh connection failure, refer to Diagnosing Failed Mesh Connections (p. 493).

Handling Failed Contact Matches

In the event of a contact match failure, refer to Troubleshooting Failed Contact Matches (p. 505).

Using Named Selection Diagnostics to Find Meshing Issues

The Diagnostics Action allows you to create Named Selections for the selected bodies which will
highlight some key issues with the mesh that may need your attention to make it analysis-ready. Before
adding a Diagnostics row to the worksheet, rows should be added to select relevant bodies to be used
in the diagnostic checks as shown in the example below where all solid bodies are selected in the first
row.

Several Criteria exist in the Diagnostics Action and depending on the Entity Type used, their effects
areas follows:

Entity Type Criterion Usage

Face Defeatured Shows where geometry Faces have been fully defeatured during
meshing.
Edge Defeatured Shows where geometry Edges have been fully defeatured during
meshing.
Edge Partially Defeatured Shows where geometry Edges have been partially defeatured
during meshing.
Vertex Defeatured Shows where geometry Vertices have been fully defeatured
during meshing.
Mesh Node Free Mesh Edges Shows mesh nodes at edges which are open. That is, if volume
meshing has failed due to unmeshed faces it will highlight
these areas.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
596 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Mesh Intersecting Shows where mesh elements are intersecting causing meshing
Element Elements failure. Useful for troubleshooting failed-to-mesh bodies. The
fixes can be as follows:

• Add local size controls to reduce mesh size.

• Add local size controls to modify defeaturing tolerance.

• Merge faces locally using Virtual Topology.

• Modify the geometry in the problematic location using

a geometry tool.

Mesh Body Interference Shows mesh elements which are intersecting due to bodies
Element Elements overlapping in 3D space. Elements at the surface intersection
are selected. Geometry tools may be needed to repair such
areas if overlaps are deemed too large.
Mesh Sharp Angle Shows mesh elements which are flat due to geometry faces
Element Elements coming together at a tangent or sharp angle. Useful to diagnose
geometry problems causing bad quality elements. Such
problems may need to be fixed in a geometry editor by addition
of a chamfer or round. For example, using Pull in Discovery or
Discovery Modeling.
Mesh Free Mesh Edges Shows mesh nodes at edges which are open. That is, if volume
Element meshing has failed due to unmeshed faces it will highlight
these areas.
Element Intersecting Shows where mesh elements are intersecting causing meshing
Face Elements failure. Useful for troubleshooting failed-to-mesh bodies.
Element Body Interference Shows element faces which are intersecting due to bodies
Face Elements overlapping in 3D space. Elements at the surface intersection
are selected. Geometry tools may be needed to repair such
areas if overlaps are deemed too large.

When the Diagnostics worksheet tool has been used to generate element based named selection, you
can right-click the named selection to access the Select Mesh Clusters in Group and use Walk in the
Selection tab to graphically traverse through the mesh elements and mesh element clusters.

Tips for Using Virtual Topology

Virtual topology (p. 545) surfaces made up of two loops are not automatically mappable. For a faceted
surface made up of two loops to be map meshed, a mapped Face Meshing control must be scoped
to it or it must be a side area of a general sweep body.

Tips for Successful Meshing Using Local Controls

Mesh Based Defeaturing will pinch the together edges, if within the specified tolerance. But, large values
can cause problems in some locations, especially in models with mixed scales. Local controls allow you
to apply defeaturing locally by selecting problematic locations identified by error messages after
meshing and:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 597
Troubleshooting

• adding a body or face sizing with a larger (or smaller) defeaturing tolerance.

• adding a pinch control where you chooses the primary and secondary edge to focus the defea-
turing to a specific pair of edges.

Meshing Complicated Models

Meshing a complicated model may require special attention and experimentation. In such cases, the
following strategies and guidelines are recommended for obtaining a successful mesh:

1. Analyze the model to determine its complexity:

• Identify the small features that you do (and do not) want to retain.

• Consider the model's size and its relationship to the element size transitions that are appropriate
for the mesh. A smoother transition from the fine element size to the coarse element size will
result in a larger number of elements, which should be considered (especially if the model is quite
large). Coarser transitions will result in a smaller number of elements. You must determine what
is acceptable.

• Refer to the value in the Minimum Edge Length (p. 120) field.

This field provides a read-only indication of the minimum edge length in the model.

• Think about the element size that you expect to obtain, especially the desired minimum element
size. To help you determine the desired size, in the Geometry window, select the edges of small
features that you want to retain and refer to the status bar for feedback about the selections.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
598 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
2. Perform a low-effort mesh evaluation by using appropriate sizes as determined from #1, but without
controls such as inflation, match mesh controls, and so on, that add constraints to the mesher. Also,
try to start with a coarser mesh size and refinement in later steps.

• If the mesh is successful, examine it to see whether the mesh size and transition rates are accept-
able. In most cases, you will need to make some adjustments to obtain the desired results.

• If the mesh fails, examine any messages that the mesher returned to the Messages window, as
described elsewhere in this Troubleshooting (p. 579) section.

3. Adjust settings to retain desired small features:

• In many cases, small features are either small holes or channels in the model and are associated
with high curvature. For this reason, using the Curvature-based sizing (p. 107) is a good strategy
for retaining these features.

• Be careful when using Proximity-based sizing (p. 107). If the value of Minimum Edge
Length (p. 120) is too small, using Proximity-based sizing may lead to meshing problems.

4. Adjust settings to defeature (remove) unimportant small features:

• The Meshing application automatically defeatures small features according to the specified Defea-
ture Size (p. 111). Refer to the Minimum Edge Length (p. 120) value to help determine which small
features will be defeatured automatically.

• For solid models, Defeature Size is set to 50% of the value of Curvature Min Size (p. 113) by
default. If you set a larger Defeature Size, you must also set a larger Curvature Min Size because
the defeature size cannot be as large as the minimum element size.

5. Check the quality with the Quality Histogram and using Display style to view contours and max/min
values of metrics such as Skewness, Element Quality and Aspect Ratio. Adjust the mesh settings
to achieve the desired quality.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 599
Troubleshooting

Continue making adjustments until your results are satisfactory. Try adjusting controls such as face
sizing (p. 300), edge sizing (p. 300), transition rate (p. 112), and smoothing (p. 133). You may also want
to experiment with virtual topology (p. 545).

Using a Localized Operating System on Linux

If you are using a localized operating system (such as French or German) on Linux, you must perform
additional steps in order for the Meshing application to recognize the correct numerical format. Refer
to the platform details section of the Ansys, Inc. Linux Installation Guide for details.

Using Lustre Parallel File Systems on Linux

Meshing application projects created prior to Release 16.0 need to be updated before they can be used
on Lustre parallel file systems on Linux. To do this:

1. Load the project into Release 16 software on a system that does not use a Lustre parallel file
system.

2. Perform an operation that changes each model in the Meshing application (for example, hide
and then show a part). If systems share the same model, the change must be done for only
one of the systems.

3. Save the project.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
600 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Meshing: Mesh Workflows
Mesh Workflows offer an alternative paradigm in Ansys Mechanical to enable mesh generation from
complicated CAD geometries. When you use CAD geometries in simulation, it requires clean up and
modifications (for example, hole filling, overlap resolution).

Mesh Workflows allow you to create specific meshing procedures like wrap, pull, extrude, and more,
using Ansys PrimeMesh technology. Mesh Workflows have a built-in execution logic that provides
an easy-to-use and customizable solution for complex meshing tasks.

Mesh Workflows topics include:

Mesh Workflow Concepts
Mesh Workflows Introduction
Mesh Workflows Context Tab
Mesh Workflow
Mesh Workflow Types
Mesh Workflow Steps
Mesh Workflow Controls
Mesh Workflow Outcomes
Property Worksheet
Mesh Workflow States
Mesh Workflow Domain Browser

Mesh Workflow Concepts

Mesh Workflows define a new meshing framework exposing advanced meshing capabilities to Ansys
Mechanical for dealing with complex CAD geometries and meshing procedures. In Mesh Workflows,
a meshing procedure is modelled as a sequence of Steps (a workflow) that can be parameterized and
interconnected through the concepts of Controls and Outcomes.

Controls define the inputs for each workflow step, exposing the underlying algorithm parameters and
defining the input scope for the step.

Outcomes expose the output data for each workflow step, expose information about the underlying
algorithm execution, such as failure information and the generated mesh data as output scopes.

Mesh Workflow Steps operate on a new computational domain called the PrimeMesh model, based
on the PrimeMesh meshing kernel, which exposes new meshing capabilities to Ansys Mechanical.

PrimeMesh Model

The PrimeMesh model eases mesh generation in the following ways:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 601
Mesh Workflows

• Provides a lightweight simulation geometry that operates independently of the CAD constraints.

• Allows geometry modifications and manipulations that are often difficult to achieve with CAD
systems.

• Operates differently from CAD-based systems and allows the creation of volumes without a CAD
body.

• Uses wrapper approaches or surface and edge-based tools to create closed volumes for volume
meshing, eliminating the need for boolean operations, which often fail with complex geometry.

A PrimeMesh model can be initialized by transferring the desired geometry from Mechanical to the
Mesh Workflows, using the exposed Input object.

In the Mesh Workflows, all entities under a Mechanical part, including solid bodies, sheet bodies, line
bodies, surfaces, curves, and vertices get converted to corresponding PrimeMesh topological entities.

PrimeMesh topological entities are simplified, faceted versions of the original geometry and the
mesher keeps the original detailed geometry as a reference.

In the PrimeMesh Model, you can perform various operations to interact with the PrimeMesh topology,
allowing flexible changes that are difficult to achieve in a CAD system. These operations include creating
tolerant edge-based connections and merging complex surfaces or edges without losing the original
shape.

When all Mesh Workflow Steps are completed, the resulting PrimeMesh model can be transferred to
the Mechanical Mesh by completing the Output object. On completion, the underlying PrimeMesh
model is translated to the corresponding Mechanical entities as a set of geometry bodies, mesh parts
and named selections.

Note:

Each Mesh Workflow operates on a separate PrimeMesh model, as no data is shared

between multiple workflows.

The PrimeMesh model computational domain has:

• Parts: Refers to the topology and mesh data of the model. When PrimeMesh consumes a
Mechanical Part, it forms a PrimeMesh Part for each component.

The following image shows the multibody part in Mechanical and PrimeMesh:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
602 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Concepts

Note:

PrimeMesh Parts are independent of each other, and do not share any data with
other Parts.

The following image shows the multibody part with shared topology in Mechanical and Prim-
eMesh:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 603
Mesh Workflows

Note:

In multibody parts, bodies with shared topology in Mechanical create a single

part in PrimeMesh.

For example, in the Wrap Step, you can delete the original part from the CAD in Mesh Workflow
after creating a representation better suited for simulation. In some cases, this approach saves
significant time and effort compared to cleaning up CAD and creating closed volumes by con-
necting and refining surface topologies. When meshing the PrimeMesh model Parts, PrimeMesh
needs to collect the generated mesh entities to propagate them to output back into Mechanical
entities, such as geometric entities like solid or sheet bodies, or Named Selection groups of
Faces or Bodies.

• Zones: Represents a group of complete topological or mesh entities that define a complete
partitioning of a part. Each zone has the entities with same dimension such as Volume Zones
(3D), Face Zones(2D) and Edge Zones (1D), and has one-to-many mapping like one entity can
belong to a single zone but one zone can consist of multiple entities. For its non-overlapping
property, Zones can be used for assigning material property and boundary condition. The fol-
lowing image shows the multibody part in Mechanical transfers in to zones in PrimeMesh:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
604 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Concepts

Note:

Mesh entities create a unique partition of the domain, so they do not overlap.
For example, mesh elements (like hexes or tets) cannot appear in multiple Volume
Zones, and mesh faces (like quads or tris) cannot appear in multiple Face Zones

The following image shows the volume zones in PrimeMesh transfer to solid bodies in Mechan-
ical:

• Labels: Represents a named grouping of entities. You can apply these labels for meshing oper-
ations and to determine which surfaces appear during the transfer to the Mesh Folder.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 605
Mesh Workflows

The following image shows how the Named Selections in Mechanical transferred to Labels in
PrimeMesh:

Mechanical PrimeMesh Description and Differences

Parts Parts Compared to Mechanical Parts which are consisting of geometry
bodies, PrimeMesh Parts can either consist of topology entities
created from imported CAD parts or contain mesh entities created
from faceted geometries and/or imported meshes.
Solid Body Volume Each solid body becomes a topological volume in the PrimeMesh
Zone model once initialized. You can define Volume Zones with multiple
topological volumes for property assignment. Volume Zones transfer
to Mechanical as solid bodies.
Sheet Body Face Zone Face Zone is a collection of topological faces or a group of
interconnected mesh faces. Face Zones transfer to Mechanical as
surface bodies.
Line Body Edge Zone Edge Zone is a collection of topological edges or a group of
interconnected mesh edges. Edge Zones transfer to Mechanical
as line bodies.
Named selec- Labels Labels are names associated to entities. Compared to Named selec-
tions tions in Mechanical, Labels do not have a state and can appear or
disappear at any time. At mesh workflow initialization time, Named
Selections are propagated as Labels in the PrimeMesh model.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
606 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflows Introduction

Mesh Workflows Introduction

Mesh Workflows offer a workflow-based approach for mesh generation of specific needs and support
the use of predefined templates which can be customized as needed. Each Mesh Workflow consists
of a series of steps which define the mesh generated, and each specific step in the workflow is based
on a generic operation of a certain type. The Controls of an operation define what-to-do and how-to-
do and provide a flexible composition of meshing algorithms and the Outcomes capture the results of
an operation.

To access Mesh Workflows,

1. On the Tree Outline, right-click Model and click Insert > Acoustic Workflows > Mesh Work-
flows.

2. Select Mesh Workflow Type as per your requirement.

or

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 607
Mesh Workflows

1. On the Tree Outline, click Model.

2. In the Model Context tab, under the Mesh group, click Mesh Workflows, click Acoustic Workflows
and select the Mesh Workflow Type.

or

1. On the Tree Outline, right-click Mesh and click Insert > Acoustic Workflows > Mesh Workflows.

2. Select the Mesh Workflow Type as per your requirement.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
608 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflows Introduction

or

1. On the Tree Outline, click Mesh.

2. In the Mesh Context tab, under the Mesh Workflow group, click Mesh Workflows, click Acoustic
Workflows and select the desired Mesh Workflow Type.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 609
Mesh Workflows

or

1. Right-click the Geometry window, click Insert > Mesh Workflows > Acoustic Workflows.

2. Select Mesh Workflow Type as per your requirement.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
610 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflows Introduction

When you select a Mesh Workflow Type, a Mesh Workflows object is created on the tree. When you
click the Mesh Workflows object on the Tree, the Mesh Workflows Details view and the Mesh
Workflows Context (p. 612) tab are displayed.

Mesh Workflows object has a Mesh Workflow child-object of the selected Mesh Workflow Type.
Mesh Workflow child-object has a predefined workflow based on the selected Mesh Workflow Type.
You can select the created Mesh Workflow child-object to display the Details view of the corresponding
Mesh Workflow (p. 613) child-object and its associated Mesh Workflow Property Worksheet (p. 676).

The Mesh Workflows Details view has the following options:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 611
Mesh Workflows

Definition

• Active Workflow Group: Displays the active workflow type used for generating mesh.

Note:

Mesh object parameters in the Details view do not have any impact on the Mesh
Workflow parameters.

Right-click options available in Mesh Workflows are:

• Insert: Allows you to insert the desired mesh workflow type.

• Delete: Allows you to delete the respective mesh workflows.

• Clear Generated Data: Allows you to reset the generated data for the selected mesh workflow.

• Clear Output Data: Allows you to clear the output data after completing the mesh workflow.
Clear Output Data is available only after completing the mesh workflow.

• Generate Mesh Workflows: Allows you to generate the selected mesh workflow.

Mesh Workflows Context Tab

The Mesh Workflow Context tab allows you to:

• Generate a workflow from defined steps.

• Initialize, import, execute and export the workflows.

• Visualize the workflow properties using the worksheet.

The Mesh Workflows Context tab has the following options:

Mesh Workflows

• Generate Mesh Workflows: Allows you to generate mesh workflows.

• Initialize Workflow: Allows you to initialize mesh workflow, transferring selected input geometry
to the mesh workflow operations. Named Selections scoped to the input geometry translate
into corresponding Labels after initializing the workflow.

• Import Workflow: Allows you to import workflow steps from a file. Import Workflow is available
only after deleting steps and clearing data from the current workflow.

• Execute Step: Executes the next step of specific Mesh Workflow. Execute Step is available only
when Input is scoped. If the mesh workflow is not initialized yet, Execute Step initializes the
workflow before executing the step.

• Execute All Steps: Executes all step of specific Mesh Workflow. Execute All Steps is available
only when Input is scoped. If the mesh workflow is not initialized yet, Execute All Steps initializes
the workflow before executing the step.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
612 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow

• Export Workflows: Export the workflow steps as a template to a .emx file.

• Complete Workflow: Allows you to complete the workflow by transferring generated data back
to new mechanical geometry parts along with the corresponding part meshes. You cannot edit
the specified mesh workflow type after completing the workflow. Complete Workflow is available
only when workflow steps are fully executed. When you click Complete Workflow, the status
bar displays the progress of the workflow. You can click the progress bar displayed on the status
bar to open the Ansys Workbench Mesh Status window to view the transferring of generated
data. To interrupt a running workflow, In Ansys Workbench Mesh Status window, you can use
Stop to interrupt the generated workflow data transfer to the new mechanical geometry. Com-
plete Workflow is available only when workflow steps are fully executed.

Views

• Property Worksheet: Helps you view the published properties of each control involved in the
mesh workflows, provides an easy visualization of the driving input options for mesh workflows
and to edit individual controls. For information about the Worksheet, refer to Property Work-
sheet (p. 676).

• Domain Browser: Allows you to view the parts, zones, or labels involved in the mesh workflows
and to edit individual controls in mesh workflows. For information about the Domain Browser,
refer to Mesh Workflow Domain Browser (p. 682).

Mesh Workflow
Mesh Workflows offer a framework for creating simulation meshes through a predefined or customized
workflow composed of individual executable steps. The predefined workflows serve as meshing templates
for targeted industrial applications. Mesh Workflow Types (p. 618) offer predefined steps and values
for creating acoustic mesh. The predefined Mesh Workflow Types are:

• External FEM Acoustics

• Internal FEM Acoustics

• BEM Acoustics

Note:

Mesh Workflow child-object has rules embedded for data consistency. Hence, you are
not allowed to delete or modify some Steps.

Mesh Workflow child-object Details view has the following options:

General

• Workflow Type: Displays the selected mesh workflow type.

Definition

• Length Unit: Provides the length unit of the input model. When you use Initialize Workflow
to transfer the input geometry, mesh workflow derives the Length Unit from the transferred
input.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 613
Mesh Workflows

• Steps File Location: Displays the file location from which you load the steps using Import
Workflow.

Mesh Workflow object has the following child-objects:

• Input (p. 615)

• Steps (p. 615)

• Output (p. 617)

Right-click options available in Mesh Workflow Object are:

• Rename: Allows you to rename the specified mesh workflow object.

• Delete: Allows you to delete the specified mesh workflow object.

• Clear Generated Data: Allows you to clear generated data for the specified mesh workflow
object.

• Clear Output Data: Allows you to clear the output data after completing the specified mesh
workflow object. Clear Output Data is available only after completing the specified mesh
workflow object.

• Execute Step: Initializes the workflow and executes the next step of the specified mesh workflow.
Execute Step is available only when you initialize mesh workflow.

• Execute All Steps: Initializes the workflow and execute all steps of the specified mesh workflow.
Execute All Steps is available only when you initialize mesh workflow.

• Generate Mesh Workflows: Allows you to generate the specified mesh workflow object.

Behavior of Mesh Workflow Generated Bodies

Mesh Workflow generated bodies have the following special behaviors:

• When you right-click Geometry object and apply Freeze Mesh on all Parts on mesh workflow
generated bodies, it only freezes geometry bodies that are not mesh workflow generated.

• Mesh Workflow generated bodies behave like frozen bodies because the Mesh Workflows
completely handle their meshing and the local meshing methods cannot control Mesh Workflows.

• When you right-click Mesh object and click Clear Generated Data, clears only the mesh that
does not come from a mesh workflow.

• When you right-click Mesh object and click Clear All Generated Data, clears output data from
the mesh workflow and the local mesh.

• Mesh Workflow generated bodies in the Geometry window may displays both input geometry
and the mesh workflow generated geometry. Hence, you may have to hide the input geometry
in the Geometry window to select the Mesh Workflow generated bodies.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
614 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow

Input
Input allows you to select the geometry parts used for initializing the mesh workflow. Input supports
the transfer of geometry from imported bodies. You cannot transfer internally created bodies (for
example, pull bodies) or bodies from frozen parts as input.

Note:

: When you scope bodies with shared topology, the selection is automatically extended
to the entire multi-body part.

Right-click options available in the Input are:

• Initialize Workflow: Allows you to initialize the mesh workflow by transferring selected input
geometry to the mesh workflow operations. Named Selections scoped to the input geometry
translate into corresponding Labels after initializing the workflow. Initialize Workflow is available
only when you scope a geometry to Input .

• Rename: Allows you to rename the Input.

The Input Details view has the following options:

Scope

• Scoping Method: Allows you to scope the input. The available options are Geometry Selection
and Named Selection. The default is Geometry Selection.

– Geometry Selection: Allows you to scope the geometry bodies. When you select
Geometry Selection, Geometry allows you to select the bodies from the Geometry
window.

– Named Selection: Allows you to scope the available name selections.

Steps
Steps provide an ordered sequence of mesh workflow operations for the selected mesh workflow
type. Each Step represents controls and outputs defined for the specific operation. A set of control
data defines each Control based on its specific operation control type. Outcomes are predefined to
collect desired outputs after running the operation. The major purpose of Outcomes, besides monit-
oring results, is also to collect output information which can be used as input for a subsequent oper-
ation.

Right-click options available in the Steps are:

• Delete Settings: Allows you to delete Mesh Setting in the Steps Details view. The available
option is:

– Acoustic Settings: Allows you delete the acoustic Mesh Setting in the Steps Details view.

• Add Settings: Allows you to add Mesh Setting in the Steps Details view. The available option
is:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 615
Mesh Workflows

– Acoustic Settings: Allows you add the acoustic Mesh Setting in the Steps Details view.

• Propagate Settings: Transfer mesh settings when you update some sizes or number of layers
associated with individual steps in the Mesh Workflows. Propagate Settings is available only
when Analysis Frequency is greater than 0.0 Hz. The available option is:

– Acoustic Settings: Transfer acoustic mesh settings when you update some sizes or
number of layers associated with individual steps in the Mesh Workflows.

• Rename: Allows you to rename the Steps.

• Insert: Allows you to insert mesh workflow steps. You can only Insert a mesh workflow step
if the Output node is not completed.

• Delete Steps and Clear Data: Allows you to delete all steps and clear data in the workflow.
When you Delete Steps and Clear Data for the mesh workflow object, the input node remains
defined and you can select the Mesh Workflow Type for the Mesh Workflow.

• Execute Step: Executes the next step of specific Mesh Workflow. Execute Step is available
only when Input is scoped. If the mesh workflow is not initialized yet, Execute Step initializes
the workflow before executing the step.

• Execute All Steps: Executes all step of specific Mesh Workflow. Execute All Steps is available
only when Input is scoped. If the mesh workflow is not initialized yet, Execute All Steps ini-
tializes the workflow before executing the step.

Steps Details view has the following options:

General

• Number of Cores: Allows you to provide the maximum number of cores required for the mesh
workflow execution. The default value is 8. You can parametrize Number of Cores.

Mesh Settings

• Analysis Frequency: Allows you to set the frequency for the input model, which is used to derive
the Mesh Size. The default value is 0.0 Hz.

For setting Analysis Frequency, you should enter a value greater than 0.0 Hz. You can parametrize
Analysis Frequency.

• Quadratic Elements: Allows you to define to use the quadratic elements for the mesh or not. The
default value is No.

• Speed of Sound: Allows you to set the speed of sound, which is used to derive the Mesh Size.
The default value is 343.0 m/s. You can parametrize Speed of Sound.

• Mesh Size: Displays the mesh size for the mesh workflow. Mesh Size is a read-only value calculated
based on the below formula:

wavelength = C/F

C = Speed of Sound, and

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
616 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow

F = Analysis Frequency

For linear elements,

Mesh Size = wavelength/12

For quadratic elements,

Mesh Size = wavelength/6

• Number of Acoustic Layers: Displays the number of acoustic layers for the acoustic region.

Layers created around the acoustic region during the Extrude Acoustic Region step are called
Acoustic Layers. Number of Layers in the Extrude Acoustic Region step is equal to the Number
of Acoustic Layers.

When Quadratic Elements is set to No the default value for Number of Acoustic Layers is 2.

When Quadratic Elementsis set to Yes the default value for Number of Acoustic Layers is 1.

• Number of PMLs/IPMLs: Displays the number of PML/IPML layers for the PML/IPMLs region.

Layers created around the PML/IPML during the Extrude PML/IPML Region step are called PML/IPML.
Number of Layers in the Extrude PMLs/IPMLs Region step is equal to the Number of PMLs/IPMLs.

When Quadratic Elements is set to No the default value for Number of PMLs/IPMLs is 4.

When Quadratic Elements is set to Yes the default value for Number of PMLs/IPMLs is 2.

Output
Output controls the data transfer from generated Mesh Workflow data to Ansys Mechanical geometry
parts along with its associated mesh with type entities based on zones.

Right-click options available in Output are:

• Complete Workflow: Allows you to complete the workflow by transferring generated data
back to new mechanical geometry parts along with the corresponding part meshes. You cannot
edit the specified mesh workflow type after completing the workflow.Complete Workflow is
available only when workflow steps are fully executed. When you click Complete Workflow,
the status bar displays the progress of the workflow. You can click the progress bar displayed
on the status bar to open the Ansys Workbench Mesh Status window to view the transferring
of generated data. To interrupt a running workflow, In Ansys Workbench Mesh Status window,
you can use Stop to interrupt the generated workflow data transfer to the new mechanical
geometry. Complete Workflow is available only when workflow steps are fully executed.

• Rename: Allows you to rename the output.

• Clear Output Data: Allows you to clear the output data in the workflow. Clear Output Data
is available only if the mesh workflow is completed.

The Output Details view has the following options:

Definition

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 617
Mesh Workflows

• Data Transfer Type: Create the new geometries based on the data transfer type. The available
option is:

– By Zones: Allows you to create geometrical entities and named selections from zones.

• Process Entities of Type: Sets the type of entities dimension based on zones. The available
options are:

– Volume Zones: Allows you to process the volume zones and transfer it as solid bodies
in Geometry. The default value for External FEM Acoustics and Internal FEM Acoustics
is Volume Zones.

– Face Zones: Allows you to process the face zones and transfer it as surface bodies in
Geometry. The default value for BEM Acoustics is Face Zones.

Mesh Workflow Types

Mesh Workflow Types have predefined workflow templates to perform specific mesh operations that
can be customized as per your requirement. Each Mesh Workflow Type has Steps to perform specific
operation using Controls and Outcomes. Mesh Workflow Types available are:

• External FEM Acoustics (p. 619)

• Internal FEM Acoustics (p. 621)

• BEM Acoustics (p. 623)

Sizing Recommendations for Acoustic Workflows

In Acoustics Mesh Workflows, the number of elements required within a wavelength depends on the
desired frequency and required accuracy. You may need at least two or more elements per wavelength
to capture the acoustic behaviour efficiently.

The number of elements per wavelength is calculated as:

where,

N is the Number of Elements per Wavelength

c is the Propagation speed of sound

n is the Frequency of Interest

e is the Element Size

Hence, if you want two elements (N=2) per wavelength,you need to set the element size as:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
618 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Types

The speed of sound depends on the medium of transmission. The speed of sound is 343 m/s in air at
20°C and 1481 m/s in water at 20°C.

Guidelines related to Acoustics domain size and Acoustics mesh size to be followed while working with
Acoustic workflows are below:

• Domain size should be equal to wavelength (Without PML/IPML). Domain size can be smaller
with PML/IPML.

• Mesh size is dependent on speed of sound, Wavelength and Number of Elements in the
Wavelength.

• Recommend you to consider the following number of elements in acoustic domain:

– Number of lower order elements should be greater than or equal to 12 in acoustic domains.

– Number of higher order elements should be greater than or equal to 6.

– Number of PML/IPML elements should be greater than or equal to 4.

– Add buffer elements greater than or equal 2 that are required as a part of acoustic domain.

For example, if you are working on sound propagation for at 5000 Hz frequency in Air domain
with speed of sound as 343000 mm/s.

Acoustics Domain Size = 343000/5000 = 68.6 mm.

For Lower order mesh, Element Size for Acoustics and PML/IPML Mesh = 68.6/12 = 5.7167 mm.

For Higher order mesh, Element Size for Acoustics and PML/IPML Mesh = 68.6/6 = 11.4333 mm.

External FEM Acoustics

External FEM Acoustics workflow creates external acoustic sound radiation domain to predict the
propagation of radiated sound in the near field and far field due to vibration of the external surface
of the structural assembly or flow source port of the fluid flow.

External FEM Acoustics workflow can create different domain shape as per your requirement. The
available options are Convex Irregular Shape Enclosure (Irregular Body Fitted Convex), External
Part Enclosure (custom domain shape through imported CAD file), Spherical Enclosure, Hemispher-
ical Enclosure. All mesh domains have the option to create near field acoustic domain mesh which
is enough for radiation or infinite element boundary condition. You also have the option to add Per-
fectly Matched Layers (PML/IPML) to define PML boundary condition.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 619
Mesh Workflows

When you select Mesh Workflows as External FEM Acoustics, Mesh Workflow loads a predefined
template with Steps and Outcomes. Mesh Workflow performs the Steps through Controls and
Outcomes to achieve the desired mesh for the External FEM Acoustics.

External FEM Acoustics workflow has the following steps:

• Fill Holes (p. 625): Fill the holes defined in the Hole Filling step. The operation type available
for Fill Holes is Fill Holes (p. 625).

Note:

You can add or delete Fill Holes (p. 625) step as per your requirement.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
620 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Types

• Wrap Parts (p. 626): Wraps the selected parts. The operation type available for Wrap Parts is
Wrap (p. 626).

• Improve Wrap Mesh (p. 627): Improves the surface mesh. The operation type available for
Improve Wrap Mesh is Mesh Surface (p. 627).

• Create Enclosure (p. 627): Creates the enclosure around the specified scope. The operation
type available for Create Enclosure is Create Enclosure (p. 627).

• Mesh Volume (p. 628): Creates the volumetric mesh. The operation type available for Mesh
Volume is Mesh Volume (p. 628).

• Improve Volume Mesh (p. 628):Improves the volumetric mesh generated in the Mesh Volume
step. The operation type available for Improve Volume Mesh is Improve Volume Mesh (p. 628).

• Extrude Acoustic Region (p. 629): Generates layers of prismatic elements from the input surface
to a specified height. The generated volume may have layers of constant size hexahedral or
triangular prism elements depending on the input surface. The operation type available for
Extrude Acoustic Region is Extrude (p. 629).

• Extrude PML/IPML Region (p. 629): Generates layers of prismatic elements from the acoustic
region to a specified height. The generated volume may have layers of constant size hexahedral
or triangular prism elements depending on the input surface. The operation type available for
Extrude PML/IPML Region is Extrude (p. 629).

Note:

You can add or delete Extrude PML/IPML Region as per your requirement. You
can create PML/IPML layers extruding the external surface layer based on the
Number of Layers and Per Layer Height you specify.

• Create Acoustic Regions (p. 629): Creates the topology from the mesh only model. The oper-
ation type available for Create Acoustic Regions is Create Topology (p. 629).

• Merge Acoustic Regions (p. 629): Merges the volume. The operation type available for Merge
Acoustic Regions is Merge Volumes (p. 629).

• Assign Physics Properties (p. 630): Defines material properties and thickness on the scoped
parts or zones. The operation type available for Assign Physics Properties is Manage Zone
Properties (p. 630).

Points to Remember
Sizing Recommendations for Acoustic Workflows (p. 618)

Internal FEM Acoustics

Internal FEM Acoustics workflow creates acoustic domain for internal cavity acoustic wave
propagation and transmission. The workflow contains steps to close the openings (holes) on the ex-
ternal surface and create a watertight acoustic cavity. Internal FEM Acoustics workflow meshes the
surface cavity with triangular elements followed by volumetric meshing adjacent to the surface of

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 621
Mesh Workflows

the cavity. You can generate hybrid mesh using hexcore for volumetric meshing. This helps to reduce
the total mesh count if needed.

Note:

Internal FEM Acoustics recommends a minimum of 12 elements per wavelength for

FEM mesh having linear elements and a minimum 6 elements per wavelength of
sonic speed of medium for quadratic elements.

When you select Mesh Workflows as Internal FEM Acoustics, Mesh Workflow loads a predefined
template with Steps and Outcomes. Mesh Workflow performs these Steps through Controls and
Outcomes to achieve the desired mesh for the Internal FEM Acoustics.

Internal FEM Acoustics workflow has the following steps:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
622 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Types

• Fill Holes (p. 625): Fill the holes defined in the Hole Filling step. The operation type available
for Fill Holes is Fill Holes (p. 625).

Note:

You can add or delete Fill Holes (p. 625) step as per your requirement.

• Wrap Parts (p. 626): Wraps the selected parts. The operation type available for Wrap Parts is
Wrap (p. 626).

• Improve Wrap Mesh (p. 627): Improves the surface mesh. The operation type available for
Improve Wrap Mesh is Mesh Surface (p. 627).

• Mesh Volume (p. 628): Creates the volumetric mesh. The operation type available for Mesh
Volume is Mesh Volume (p. 628).

• Improve Volume Mesh (p. 628):Improves the volumetric mesh generated in the Mesh Volume
step. The operation type available for Improve Volume Mesh is Improve Volume Mesh (p. 628).

• Create Acoustic Regions (p. 629): Creates the topology from the mesh only model. The oper-
ation type available for Create Acoustic Regions is Create Topology (p. 629).

• Assign Physics Properties (p. 630): Defines material properties and thickness on the scoped
parts or zones. The operation type available for Assign Physics Properties is Manage Zone
Properties (p. 630).

Points to Remember
Sizing Recommendations for Acoustic Workflows (p. 618)

BEM Acoustics
BEM (Boundary element method) Acoustics requires only surface mesh of the source body for both
internal cavity sound propagation or transmission, and for external sound propagation for radiation.
You can either close openings (holes) to create watertight acoustic cavity for internal sound
propagation or does not close openings for external sound radiation. You can use Wrap to create
the surface mesh and remesh the surface with quadrilateral elements to improve surface mesh quality
and reduce the mesh count. For External BEM Acoustics, a microphone grid surface of hemispherical
shape can be created for results postprocessing using Create Enclosure step.

Note:

BEM Acoustics mesh has linear element by default. Hence, BEM Acoustics recom-
mends a minimum of 8 elements per wavelength of sonic speed of medium.

When you select Mesh Workflows as BEM Acoustics, Mesh Workflow loads a predefined template
with Steps and Outcomes. Mesh Workflow performs these Steps through Controls and Outcomes
to achieve the desired mesh for the BEM Acoustics.

BEM Acoustics workflow has the following steps:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 623
Mesh Workflows

• Fill Holes (p. 625): Fill the holes defined in the Hole Filling step. The operation type available
for Fill Holes is Fill Holes (p. 625).

Note:

You can add or delete Fill Holes (p. 625) step as per your requirement.

• Wrap Parts (p. 626): Wraps the selected parts. The operation type available for Wrap Parts is
Wrap (p. 626).

• Improve Wrap Mesh (p. 627): Improves the surface mesh. The operation type available for
Improve Wrap Mesh is Mesh Surface (p. 627).

• Quad Based Remesh (p. 627): Remesh the surface to convert the tri-based mesh into a quad-
dominant mesh. The operation type available for Quad Based Remesh is Mesh Surface.

Quad Based Remesh uses Constant Size Surface Mesher (p. 638) for remeshing.

• Create Enclosure (p. 627): Creates the enclosure around the specified scope. The operation
type available for Create Enclosure is Create Enclosure (p. 627).

• Create Acoustic Regions (p. 629): Creates the topology from the mesh only model. The oper-
ation type available for Create Acoustic Regions is Create Topology (p. 629).

• Assign Physics Properties (p. 630): Defines material properties and thickness on the scoped
parts or zones. The operation type available for Assign Physics Properties is Manage Zone
Properties (p. 630).

Points to Remember
Sizing Recommendations for Acoustic Workflows (p. 618)

Mesh Workflow Steps

Mesh Workflow Steps perform a set of sequential operations for the selected Mesh Workflow Type.
Each Step object has specific control types defined to perform specific operations. When you select a
Step in the Tree outline, the Details view for the respective Step has the following options:

General

• Operation Type: Displays the operation type for the selected mesh workflow step.

• Create Checkpoint: Creates checkpoint for the control and saves the current operation when
Create Checkpoint is Yes.

• Max Number of Warnings: Allows you to provide the maximum number of warnings that can
be displayed for the selected operation type. The default value is 5.

Right-click options for each Mesh Workflow Steps are as follows:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
624 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Steps

• Insert > Control: Allows you to add control types available for the selected operation. Some controls
are predefined for the selected mesh workflow operation. You can also add and delete the control
types as per your requirements. For more details, see Mesh Workflow Controls (p. 632).

• Inset > Outcome: Allows you to add outcomes available for the selected operation. You can also
scope Outcome as input for other mesh workflow operations. For more details, see Mesh Workflow
Outcomes (p. 672).

• Insert Step Before: Allows you to add operation with predefined controls before the selected Step.
You can right-click the selected Step and click Insert Step Before > Operation to add the operation
before the selected Step in the Mesh Workflow. The operations available are specific to selected
Step depending on the selected Mesh Workflow Type.

• Insert Step After: Allows you to add operation with defined controls after the selected Step. You
can right-click the selected Step and click Insert Step After > Operation to add the operation after
the selected Step in the mesh workflow. The operations available are specific to selected Step de-
pending on the selected Mesh Workflow Type.

• Duplicate Step: Allows you to duplicate the operation and add the duplicate with same controls at
the end of mesh workflow steps. Duplicate Step follows the same constraints as Insert > Step, de-
pending on the selected Mesh Workflow Type.

• Duplicate Step Before: Allows you to duplicate the operation and add the duplicate with same
controls before the selected Step. Duplicate Step Before follows the same constraints as Insert Step
Before > Step, depending on the selected Mesh Workflow Type.

• Duplicate Step After: Allows you to duplicate the operation and add the duplicate with same controls
after the selected Step. Duplicate Step After follows the same constraints as Insert Step After >
Step, depending on the selected Mesh Workflow Type.

• Delete: Allows you to delete the mesh workflow operation. You can delete an operation only when
the mesh workflow is not complete.

• Rename: Allows you to rename the mesh workflow operation.

• Revert To Step: Allows you to revert to the current operation or step when checkpoint is enabled.
When you perform Revert To Step after completing the workflow, the output generated is automat-
ically cleared and reverted to the selected step.

Fill Holes
The Fill Holes operation allows you to fill the holes in the model. You can use Hole filling controls
to define the holes to be filled. You can view the scoped entities in the Geometry window, which is
highlighted in blue color.

Note:

All hole edges should ideally be scoped in one or more Named Selections, which
helps to scope those edges by the corresponding labels in the Hole filling control.
When you scope disconnected edges or edges, Fill Holes might fail to fill all holes
and creates a FailingEdges label for diagnosis and provides an error message.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 625
Mesh Workflows

The Fill Holes operation have the following controls:

• Hole Filling (p. 633): Creates patch surfaces to close holes in the geometry. Hole Filling can
be performed only on continuous edges.

• Checkpoint (p. 659): Provides a revert option that allows you to revert the Fill Holes operation.

The Fill Holes operation has the following outcome:

• Scope (p. 673): Scopes the created labels of the Fill Holes operation.

Note:

You can insert one or more Hole Filling (p. 633) control.

Wrap
The Wrap operation allows you to wrap the selected parts. Wrap allows you to extract a closed
watertight surface used to create a volume mesh from geometry where the inputs

• are not connected

• have holes, leaks, or gaps

• have small features that need to be ignored or stepped over

The Wrap operation uses an appropriate material point to identify the relevant surfaces of the selected
objects. You can create a watertight faceted representation from the boundaries between the regions
of interest (identified through material points) and all other regions. The nodes on the faceted repres-
entation are then projected back to the input geometry, resulting in a wrapper surface closely repres-
enting the input geometry.

The Wrap operation allows you to wrap the input scope using the following controls:

• Constant Size Wrapper (p. 635): Wraps the input scope with the same size throughout the
model.

• Custom Names Wrapper (p. 637): Creates entities with the names you provide.

• Material Point (p. 637): Defines fluid regions or seal regions depending on whether the type
is Include or Exclude.

• Leak Detection (p. 638): Visualizes the leakages in the input scope so that you can close it.

• Checkpoint (p. 659): Provides a revert option that allows you to revert the Wrap operation.

The Wrap operation has specific outcomes that can be added as per your needs. You can right-click
Wrap, click Insert and select the required scope to scope it as outcome. The outcome can be used
as input scope in the consecutive operations. The available outcomes are:

• Scope (p. 673): Scopes the created parts of the Wrap operation.

• Face Zone Scope (p. 674): Scopes the created face zones in the Wrap operation.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
626 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Steps

• Volume Zone Scope (p. 674): Scopes the created volume zones in the Wrap operation.

Mesh Surface
The Mesh Surface operation allows you to improve the surface mesh. Mesh Surface operation allows
you to mesh the surface using the constant size to improve the surface mesh quality.

The Mesh Surface operation has the following controls:

• Constant Size Surface Mesher (p. 638): Creates uniform mesh along the surface. Surface
mesher uses triangular or quadrilateral mesh elements of the same size to create a mesh.

• Wrapper Specific Surface Mesher (p. 640): Creates surface meshing using sizes specific to
wrapper and improves the surface mesh quality.

• Checkpoint (p. 659): Provides a revert option that allows you to revert the Mesh surface oper-
ation.

Convert To allows you to change from one control to another control in the operation. You can right-
click a Mesh Surface control, click Convert To and select the respective control to which you want
to convert the selected control in the operation.

Create Enclosure
The Create Enclosure operation creates the enclosure around the specified scope. The Operation
Type is Create Enclosure.

The Create Enclosure operation has the following controls:

• External Part Enclosure (p. 641): Creates an external enclosure around the specified input
scope using an existing part specified as external scope.

• Spherical Enclosure (p. 643): Creates a spherical enclosure from the input scope automatically
with the provided parameters.

• Hemispherical Enclosure (p. 645): Creates a hemispherical enclosure from the input scope
automatically with the provided parameters.

• Convex Irregular Shape Enclosure (p. 647): Creates a convex enclosure from the input scope
automatically. The convex enclosure adapts to the input scope shape to minimize the internal
enclosed volume using the provided parameters.

• HemiConvex Irregular Shape Enclosure: (p. 649) Creates a hemiconvex enclosure of the input
scope. The hemiconvex enclosure adapts to the input scope shape to minimize the internal
enclosed volume using the provided parameters.

• Custom Names (p. 652): Creates enclosures or extrusions with the provided name.

Convert To allows you to change from one control to another control in the operation. You can right-
click a Create Enclosure control, click Convert To and select the respective control to which you
want to convert the selected control in the operation.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 627
Mesh Workflows

The Create Enclosure operation has specific outcomes which can be added as per your needs. You
can right-click Create Enclosure, click Insert and select the required scope to scope it as outcome.
The outcome can be used as input scope in the consecutive operations. The available outcomes are:

• Scope (p. 673): Scopes the created zones of the Create Enclosure operation.

• Internal Enclosure Scope (p. 674): Scopes the internal enclosure created in the Create Enclosure
operation.

• External Enclosure Scope (p. 675): Scopes the external enclosure created in the Create Enclos-
ure operation.

• Face Zone Scope (p. 674): Scopes the created face zones in the Create Enclosure operation.

• Volume Zone Scope (p. 674): Scopes the created volume zones in the Create Enclosure oper-
ation.

• Internal Volume Zone Scope (p. 676): Scopes the internal volume zones created in the Create
Enclosure operation.

Mesh Volume
The Mesh Volume operation creates volumetric mesh. You can use Constant Size Volume Mesher
or Size Filed Volume Mesher controls to generate the volume mesh.

The Mesh Volume operation has the following controls:

• Constant Size Volume Mesher (p. 652): Creates a volume mesh of uniform size on the entire
volume.

• Size Field Volume Mesher (p. 668): Mesh the model with the sizing defined in the size field
provided as input.

• Material Point (p. 637): Defines fluid regions or seal regions depending on whether the type
is Include or Exclude.

• Checkpoint (p. 659): Provides a revert option that allows you to revert the Improve Volume
Mesh operation.

The Mesh Volume operation have the following outcome:

• Scope (p. 673): Scopes the created zone of the Mesh Volume operation.

Improve Volume Mesh

The Improve Volume Mesh operation allows you to improve the volumetric mesh generated in the
Mesh Volume step.

The Improve Volume Mesh operation has the following control types:

• Volume Mesh Improvement (p. 654): Improves the quality of the volume mesh with specified
quality metrics using the provided input options.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
628 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Steps

• Second Order Conversion (p. 655): Improves the quality of the volume mesh with specified
quality metrics using the provided input options.

• Checkpoint (p. 659): Provides a revert option that allows you to revert the Improve Volume
Mesh operation.

Extrude
The Extrude operation generates layers of prismatic elements from the input surface to a specified
height. The generated volume may have layers of constant size hexahedral or triangular prism elements
depending on the input surface.

Note:

Extrude does not support inputs with topology.

The Extrude operation has the following controls:

• Extrusion (p. 655): Creates extruded layers from the input surface for a specified number of
layers with specified height.

• Custom Names (p. 652): Creates enclosures or extrusions with the provided name.

• Checkpoint (p. 659) Provides a revert option that allows you to revert the Extrude operation.

The Extrude operation has specific outcomes which can be added as per your needs. You can right-
click Extrude operation, click Insert and select the required scope that you need as outcome in the
consecutive operations. The available outcomes are:

• Extrusion Start Scope (p. 675): Scopes the base face used for extruding.

• Extrusion End Scope (p. 675): Scopes the end face created after extrusion.

• Face Zone Scope (p. 674): Scopes the created face zones in the Extrude operation.

• Volume Zone Scope (p. 674): Scopes the created volume zones in the Extrude operation.

Create Topology
The Create Topology operation allows you to create the topology from the mesh only model. Scoped
entities for topology creation can be defined in Topology Creation control.

The Create Topology operation has the following controls:

• Topology Creation (p. 657): Defines the scope to create the topology from the mesh.

• Checkpoint (p. 659): Provides a revert option that allows you to revert the Create Topology
operation.

Merge Volumes
The Merge Volumes operation allows you to merge the volumes.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 629
Mesh Workflows

The Merge Volumes operation has the following controls:

• Volumes Merging (p. 657): Merges all the volumes that share the input faces defined on the
scope into a single volume.

• Checkpoint (p. 659): Provides a revert option that allows you to revert the Merge Volumes
operation.

The Merge Volumes operation has specific outcomes which can be added as per your needs. You
can right-click Merge Volumes, click Insert and select the required scope that you need as outcome
in the consecutive operations. The available outcome is:

• Volume Zone Scope (p. 674): Allows you to scope the created volume zones in the selected
operation.

Manage Zone Properties

The Manage Zone Properties operation allow you to define material properties and thickness on
the scoped parts or zones. On completing the Workflow, the defined properties on the scoped zones
or parts are assigned to the geometry parts or bodies.

Note:

The Manage Zone Properties operation is not a mandatory step for completing the
mesh workflow. You can also assign properties to the newly created geometry after
completing the workflow.

The Manage Zone Properties operation have the following controls:

• Zone Material Assignment (p. 658): Defines the material assigned to zones.

• Zone Thickness Assignment (p. 658): Defines the thickness assigned to zones.

• Checkpoint (p. 659): Provides a revert option that allows you to revert the Manage Zone
Properties operation.

Patch Holes
The Patch Holes operation allows you to create patching surfaces for regions identified using the
Material Point and Hole Patching control properties.

The Patch Holes operation has the following controls:

• Hole Patching (p. 659): Allows you to patch holes in the model to close the volume defined
by the provided Include and Exclude material points in the Material Point control.

• Material Point (p. 637): Defines fluid regions or seal regions depending on whether the type
is Include or Exclude.

• Checkpoint (p. 659) Provides a revert option that allows you to revert the Patch Holes operation.

The Patch Holes operation has the following outcome:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
630 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Steps

• Scope (p. 673): Scopes the created labels of the Patch Holes operation.

Read Mesh
The Read Mesh operation allows you to read or append the mesh from a supported file (.pmd-
at,.msh,.cdb) to the mesh workflow model. The Operation Type is Read Mesh.

Note:

You can only insert Read Mesh before the first Step in a predefined Mesh Workflow.

The Read Mesh operation has the following controls:

• Mesh Reading (p. 660): Read a mesh into the mesh workflow model.

• Checkpoint (p. 659): Provides a revert option that allows you to revert the Read Mesh operation.

Write Mesh
The Write Mesh operation allows you to write the mesh created during the mesh workflow operation
in the model. The Write Mesh operation supports only .pmdat, .msh, .cdb file extension. The Operation
Type is Write Mesh.

Note:

You can only insert Write Mesh after the last Step in a predefined Mesh Workflow.

The Write Mesh operation has the following controls:

• Mesh Writing (p. 660): Writes and save the mesh generated in the mesh workflow for the se-
lected step.

• Checkpoint (p. 659): Provides a revert option that allows you to revert the Write Mesh operation.

Create Size Field

Create Size Field step allows you to create size field for the mesh workflow model. The created size
field depends on the defined size controls and the selected scope. Always, the smaller size take pre-
cedence over the larger size.

Create Size Field has the following controls:

• Checkpoint (p. 659)

• Custom Names (p. 660)

• Constant Sizing (p. 661)

• Curvature Sizing (p. 662)

• Proximity Sizing (p. 664)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 631
Mesh Workflows

• Body of Influence Sizing (p. 665)

Create Size Field step has specific outcomes which can be added as per your needs. You can right-
click Create Size Field, click Insert and select the required scope that you need as outcome in the
consecutive operations. The available outcome is:

• Size Field Name (p. 676)

Mesh Workflow Controls

Mesh Workflow Controls determine the execution of Mesh Workflow Steps based on the set of
defined controls. Mesh Workflow Controls allow you to provide inputs for executing the respective
Mesh Workflow Steps. Each Mesh Workflow Step has one or more specific controls that are mandatory
or optional. When you define a Mesh Workflow Step, the mandatory controls are automatically added.
You should define the optional controls for the Step as per your requirement.

Right-click options available in Mesh Controls are:

• Rename: Allows you to rename the mesh workflow controls.

• Delete: Allows you to delete the mesh workflow controls.

Each Control has the following options in its Details view:

General

• Control Type: Displays the selected control type.

Scope

• Define By: Allows you to define the input to the selected control. The available options are
Value and Outcome.

– Value: Allows you to set manually the value of the Scoping Method and Scoping Pattern.

– Outcome: Allows you to select the existing scoped outcomes from the previous steps as
input.

• Scoping Method: Allows you to select the entities for the selected control. The available options
are:

– Part: Allows you to select Parts for defining the scope of the control.

– Label: Allows you to select Labels for defining the scope of the control.

– Zone: Allows you to select Zones for defining the scope of the control.

• Scoping Pattern: Allows you to specify the name pattern to get the selected Scoping Method
with the provided name pattern. Scoping Pattern supports theRegular Expression. The following
patterns are supported:

Expression Description Example

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
632 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

.* Matches any number of any characters can.* matches all strings

including none. beginning with "can".

can, cane, candle, cancel, and so on

.*canmatches all strings ending

with "can".

Glucan, decan, scan, and so on.

? Matches exactly one character. ?an matches "can," "tan," "man," "ran,"
and so on.
[...] Matches one character from the [ct]an matches "can" or "tan.
characters given in brackets. A pair of
characters separated by a hyphen Can[0-5] matches "Can0," "Can1,"
denotes a range of characters to be "Can2," "Can3," "Can4," and "Can5"
matched.
Can[^2-3] matches "Can1" but
does not match "Can2" or "Can3."
(?!...) Negative lookahead. Matches any string (?!Can).* matches any string
that does not have the provided string. that does not begin with "Can".

(?!Can.*|bin.*).* matches
any string that does not begin with
"Can" or bin.

(?!.*can$).* matches all strings

that do not end with "can".
| Separates multiple names while Can|Decan|scan matches "Can," any
scoping. string starting with "Decan," and any
string containing "scan."
Separates multiple expressions to
match. Can|hole.*|.*pipe matches
"Can," any string starting with
"hole," and any string ending with
"pipe."

Note:

– You should always use \ character with special characters like {},[],(),^,$,.,|,*,+,?,\
. For more information, refer Regular Expression.

– You should be cautious while reading names in right-to-left scripts. When applying
matching patterns for such names, you should consider the implicit reading direction
while building the pattern.

Hole Filling
Hole Filling allows you to create patch surfaces to close holes in the surface meshes. Hole Filling
can be performed only on continuous edges.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 633
Mesh Workflows

Hole Filling Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Definition

• Topology Connection: Allows you to create a connected topology for the newly created faces
when Topology Connection is Yes. The default value is No. When Topology Connection is
Yes, hole edges should be continuous to perform fill holes operation.

• Part Name: Allows you to provide the name of the created part where new faces are defined.

• Face Zone Name: Allows you to name the created face zone.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
634 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

• Label Name: Allows you to label the created face zone with the specified name.

Constant Size Wrapper

Constant Size Wrapper wraps the input scope with the same size throughout the model.

Constant Size Wrapper Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 635
Mesh Workflows

Only Part can be selected for Constant Size Wrapping.

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Definition

• Define By: Allows you to define the element size based on value or settings. The available
options are:

– Value: Defines the element size based on the provided value.

• Settings: Defines the element size based on the settings under Mesh Settings in the Steps
Details view.

• Element Size: Provides the minimum feature element size of the input scope to be considered
for wrap operation. When Define By is Value, you can specify the element size for wrapping.
When Define By is Settings, displays the element size calculated based on the provided Mesh
Settings in the Steps Details view. The Element Size is read-only. You can click on the
right corner of the option and click Publish to publish element size to the Property Worksheet.
You can parameterize the Element Size only when Defined By is Value.

• Mesh Type: Allows you to select the mesh type. When Mesh Type is Triangles, generates
triangular mesh. When Mesh Type is Quadrilaterals, generates quad mesh. The default value
is Triangles.

• Live Region Type: Allows you to select the region type to extract the wrap region. The available
options are:

– Material Point: Allows you to define the volume of the model being wrapped. The
material point is set locally along the X, Y and Z coordinates.

– External: Allows you to wrap the surface from the external region. For External FEM
Acoustics and BEM Acoustics workflows, the default value is External.

• Delete Input Scope: Allows you to delete the input source of the model after wrapping when
Delete Input Scope is Yes.

• Exclude Enclosure: Allows you to exclude the external region and wrap inner parts only for
the box in box models when Exclude Enclosure is Yes. The default value is No.

• Face Zone By Part: Creates a face zone for each part of the input scope when Face Zone By
Part is Yes. The created face zones are converted to named selections in Mechanical after
completing the mesh workflow. When Face Zone By Part is No, creates a single face zone for
the whole input scope. Hence, only a single named selection is available for Mechanical after
completing the mesh workflow. The default value is No.

• Reverse Surface Orientation: Allows you to reverse the orientation of the created wrapper
surfaces. The default value is No. When Reverse Surface Orientation is No, the orientation
is same as the position of the Live material point for the wrapper. When Reverse Surface
Orientation is Yes, the orientation is opposite to the position of the Live material point for
wrapper. BEM Acoustics uses Reverse Surface Orientation where you need to wrap the ex-
ternal and solve the internal field.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
636 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

Custom Names Wrapper

Custom Names Wrapper control creates entities with the names you provide. Custom Names
Wrapper Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Definition

• Part Name: Allows you to provide name for the part that the wrapper creates enclosing the
volume.

• Volume Zone Name: Allows you to provide name for the volume zone of the created part.

• Face Zone Name: Allows you to provide name for the face zone forming the boundary of the
enclosed volume.

• Edge Label Name: Allows you to label the created feature edges with the provided names.

Material Point
Material Point defines fluid regions or seal regions depending on whether the type is Include or
Exclude. A 3D coordinate provides the position of the material point along the X, Y and Z coordinates.
You can parametrize X Coordinate, Y Coordinate and Z Coordinate. Material Point Details view
has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Definition

• Define By: Allows you to define the material point. The available options are:

– Location: Allows you to specify the location coordinates of the material point. The
available options are:

→ X Coordinate: Allows you to specify the X coordinate of the material point.

→ Y Coordinate: Allows you to specify the Y coordinate of the material point.

→ Z Coordinate: Allows you to specify the Z coordinate of the material point.

You can parametrize the X,Y,Z coordinates.

– Coordinate System: Allows you to select the defined coordinate systems to define
material points. You can click to select from the available list of defined Coordinate
Systems.

• Material Point Type: Allows you to select the type of material point. The available options
are Include and Exclude. The default value is Include.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 637
Mesh Workflows

– Include: Defines material points inside the wrapped volume.

– Exclude: Defines material points outside the wrapped volume.

Leak Detection
Leak Detection allows you to visualize the leakages in the input scope so that you can close it. Leak
Detection Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Definition

• Max Hole Size: Allows you to provide the maximum hole size to prevent leakage. You can
click on the right corner of the option and click Publish to publish Max Hole Size to the
Property Worksheet. You can parameterize Max Hole Size.

Constant Size Surface Mesher

Constant Size Surface Mesher control creates a surface mesh on the scoped set of entities consisting
of triangular or quadrilateral mesh elements of same size.

Constant Size Surface Mesher Details view has the following options:

General

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
638 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

• Control Type (p. ?): Displays the selected control type.

Scope

• Define By (p. ?): Allows you to define the input to the selected control. The available options
are:

– Value: Allows you to set manually the value of the Scoping Method and Scoping
Pattern.

– Outcome: Allows you to select the existing scoped outcomes from the previous steps
as input.
and .

• Scoping Method (p. ?): Allows you to select the entities for the selected control. The available
options are:

– Part: Allows you to select Parts for defining the scope of the control

– Label: Allows you to select Labels for defining the scope of the control.

– Zone: Allows you to select Zones for defining the scope of the control.

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?): Allows you to specify the name pattern to get the selected Scoping
Method. Scoping Pattern supports Regular Expression.

Definition

• Define By: Allows you to define the element size based on value or settings. The available
options are:

– Value: Defines the element size based on the provided value.

– Settings: Defines the element size based on the settings under Mesh Settings in the
Steps Details view.

• Element Size: Provides the element size for surface meshing. When Define By is Value, you
can specify the element size for surface meshing. When Define By is Settings, displays the
element size calculated based on the provided Mesh Settings in the Steps Details view. The
Element Size is read-only. You can click on the right corner of the option and click Publish
to publish Element Size to the Property Worksheet. You can parameterize Element Size
only when Define By is Value.

• Mesh Type: Allows you to select the type of mesh you want to generate. The default value is
Triangles. The available options are:

– Triangles: Creates mesh with triangular elements.

– Quadrilateral: Creates mesh with quadrilateral elements.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 639
Mesh Workflows

Wrapper Specific Surface Mesher

Wrapper Specific Surface Mesher provides post wrapping improvement operation using surface
meshing based on the mesh settings and surface quality measures. For example, you can improve
the wrapper generated surface by remeshing based on the current size field and target skewness.
You should use Wrapper Specific Surface Mesher only after wrapping.

Wrapper Specific Surface Mesher Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?): Displays the selected control type.

Scope

• Define By (p. ?)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
640 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

Only Part can be selected for surface meshing.

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Definition

• Define By: Allows you to define the element size based on value or settings. The available
options are:

– Value: Defines the element size based on the provided value.

– Settings: Defines the element size based on the settings under Mesh Settings in the
Steps Details view.

• Element Size: Provides the element size. When Define By is Value, you can specify the element
size for surface meshing. When Define By is Settings, displays the element size calculated
based on the provided Mesh Settings in the Steps Details view. The Element Size is read-
only. You can click on the right corner of the option and click Publish to publish Element
Size to the Property Worksheet. You can parameterize Element Size only when Defined By
is Value.

Note:

If you apply size fields for the Wrapper Specific Surface Mesher, the Max
Size specified in the size field takes precedence over the Element Size.

• Target Skewness: Allows you to provide the target skewness to improve surface mesh of
wrapper part. The Target Skewness value ranges from 0 (low quality) to 1 (high quality). The
default value is 0.6. You can click on the right corner of the option and click Publish to add
Target Skewness to the Property Worksheet. You can parameterize Target Skewness.

• Mesh Type: Allows you to select the type of mesh you want to generate. The default value is
Triangles. The available options are:

– Triangles: Creates mesh with triangular elements.

– Quadrilateral: Creates mesh with quadrilateral elements.

External Part Enclosure

External Part Enclosure creates an external enclosure around the specified input scope using an
existing part specified as external scope. External Part Enclosure Details view has the following
options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Scope

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 641
Mesh Workflows

• Define By: Allows you to define the input to the selected control. The available options are
Value and Outcome.

– Value: Allows you to set manually the value of the Inner Source Scoping Method and
Inner Source Scoping Pattern.

– Outcome: Allows you to select the existing scoped outcomes from the previous steps
as input.

• Inner Source Scoping Method: Allows you to select the Part, Label or Zone from the inner
source. The available options are:

– Part: Allows you to select parts for the inner source scoping.

– Label: Allows you to select labels for the inner source scoping.

– Zone: Allows you to select the zones for the inner source scoping.

• Inner Source Scoping Pattern: Allows you to specify the pattern to match the Part, Label or
Zone based on the selected Inner Source Scoping Method. Inner Source Scoping Pattern
supports all regular expressions (p. ?).

• Define By: Allows you to define the input to the selected control. The available options are
Value and Outcome.

– Value: Allows you to set manually the value of the External Source Scoping Method
and External Source Scoping Pattern.

– Outcome: Allows you to select the existing scoped outcomes from the previous steps
as input.

• External Source Scoping Method: Allows you to select the Part from the external source.
The available options are:

– Part: Allows you to select parts of the external source.

Note:

External Scoping Method is not available when Auto External Scope is set to
Yes.

• External Source Scoping Pattern: Allows you to specify the pattern to match the Part based
on the selected External Scoping Method. External Source Scoping Pattern supports all
regular expressions (p. ?).

Definition

• Auto External Scope: Derives the external scope for the enclosure from the input model
automatically when Auto External Scope is Yes. The default value is No.

• Define By: Allows you to define the element size based on value or settings. The available
options are:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
642 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

– Value: Defines the element size based on the provided value.

– Settings: Defines the element size based on the settings under Mesh Settings in the
Steps Details view.

• Element Size: Provides the element size. When Define By is Value, you can specify the element
size. When Define By is Settings, displays the element size calculated based on the provided
Mesh Settings in the Steps Details view. The Element Size is read-only. You can click on
the right corner of the option and click Publish to publish Element Size to the Property
Worksheet. You can parameterize Element Size only when Defined By is Value.

• Mesh Type: Allows you to provide the type of mesh. The default value is Quadrilaterals. The
available options are:

– Triangles: Creates mesh with triangular element.

– Quadrilaterals: Creates mesh with quadrilateral elements.

• Smoothing Iterations: Allows you to provide the number of smoothing iterations required.
The default value is 0. You can click on the right corner of the option and click Publish to
publish Smoothing Iterations to the Property Worksheet.

• Smoothing Preserve Volume: Allows you to preserve the volume after smoothing when
Smoothing Preserve Volume is Yes. The default value is No.

Spherical Enclosure
Spherical Enclosure control automatically creates a spherical enclosure for the input scope with the
provided parameters.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 643
Mesh Workflows

Spherical Enclosure Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Define By (p. ?)

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

Only Part can be selected for creating spherical enclosure.

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Definition

• Define By: Allows you to define the element size based on value or settings. The available
options are:

– Value: Defines the element size based on the provided value.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
644 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

– Settings: Defines the element size based on the settings under Mesh Settings in the
Steps Details view.

• Element Size: Allows you to provide the element size. When Define By is Value, you can
specify the element size. When Define By is Settings, displays the element size calculated
based on the provided Mesh Settings in the Steps Details view. The Element Size is read-
only. You can click on the right corner of the option and click Publish to publish Element
Size to the Property Worksheet. You can parameterize Element Size only when Defined By
is Value.

• Center Modality: Allows you to define the center of the spherical enclosure. The default value
is Minimal. The available options are:

– Minimal: Uses the center of the minimal enclosure sphere.

– Centered: Uses the center of the bounding box of the model.

– User Defined: Allows you to define the center using the provided location coordinate
(X, Y, Z).

• Mesh Type: Allows you to provide the type of mesh. The default value is Quadrilaterals. The
available options are:

– Triangles: Creates mesh with triangular elements.

– Quadrilaterals: Creates mesh with quadrilateral elements.

• Minimum Absolute Radius: Allows you to provide the minimum radius for the spherical en-
closure. The default value is 0.0. You can click on the right corner of the option and click
Publish to publish Minimum Absolute Radius to the Property Worksheet. You can paramet-
erize Minimum Absolute Radius.

• Minimum Number of Layers: Allows you to provide the minimum number of layers between
the model and the enclosure. You can parametrize Minimum Number of Layers. The default
value is 2. You can click on the right corner of the option and click Publish to publish
Minimum Number of Layers to the Property Worksheet.

• Percentage Increment: Allows you to specify the minimal percentage increment of the enclos-
ure dimensions with respect to the model. The default value is 1.0. You can click on the
right corner of the option and click Publish to publish Percentage Increment to the Property
Worksheet.

Hemispherical Enclosure
Hemispherical Enclosure control automatically creates a hemispherical enclosure for the input scope
with the provided parameters. Hemispherical Enclosure Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 645
Mesh Workflows

Scope

• Define By (p. ?)

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

Only Part can be selected for creating hemispherical enclosure.

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Definition

• Define By: Allows you to define the element size based on value or settings. The available
options are:

– Value: Defines the element size based on the provided value.

– Settings: Defines the element size based on the settings under Mesh Settings in the
Steps Details view.

• Element Size: Allows you to provide the element size. When Define By is Value, you can
specify the element size. When Define By is Settings, displays the element size calculated
based on the provided Mesh Settings in the Steps Details view. The Element Size is read-
only. You can click on the right corner of the option and click Publish to publish Element
Size to the Property Worksheet.

• Center Modality: Allows you to define the center of the hemispherical enclosure. The default
value is Centered. The available options are:

– Centered: Uses the center of the input scope projected on the plane defined along the
orientation.

– User Defined: Allows you to define the center using the provided location coordinate
(X, Y, Z). The available options are :

→ X Coordinate: Allows you to provide the location coordinate along X-axis.

→ Y Coordinate: Allows you to provide the location coordinate along Y-axis.

→ Z Coordinate: Allows you to provide the location coordinate along Z-axis.

• Orientation Modality: Allows you to define the orientation of the hemisphere. The default
value is Plus Z. The available options are Plus X, Plus Y, Plus Z, Minus X, Minus Y, Minus Z.

• Plane Distance: Allows you to provide the distance from the base of the hemisphere to the
model.

• Open Closure: Allows you to delete the base of the hemisphere while creating an open en-
closure when Open Closure is Yes. The default value is No.

• Delete Colliding Faces: Allows you to delete any model face colliding with hemisphere base
when Delete Colliding Faces is Yes. The default value is No.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
646 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

• Mesh Type: Allows you to provide the type of mesh. The default value is Quadrilaterals. The
available options are:

– Triangles: Creates mesh with triangular elements.

– Quadrilaterals: Creates mesh with quadrilateral elements.

Note:

Hemispherical Enclosure creates quadrilateral mesh for the hemisphere and

triangular mesh for the base.

• Minimum Absolute Radius: Allows you to provide the minimum radius for the hemispherical
enclosure. The default value is 0.0. You can click on the right corner of the option and click
Publish to publish Minimum Absolute Radius to the Property Worksheet. You can paramet-
erize Minimum Absolute Radius.

• Minimum Number of Layers: Allows you to provide the minimum number of layers between
the model and the enclosure. You can parametrize Minimum Number of Layers. The default
value is 2. You can click on the right corner of the option and click Publish to publish
Minimum Number of Layers to the Property Worksheet.

• Percentage Increment: Allows you to specify the minimal percentage increment of the enclos-
ure dimensions with respect to the model. The default value is 1.0. You can click on the
right corner of the option and click Publish to publish Percentage Increment to the Property
Worksheet.

Convex Irregular Shape Enclosure

Convex Irregular Shape Enclosure control automatically creates a convex enclosure of the input
scope. The convex enclosure adapts to the input scope shape to minimize the internal enclosed
volume using the provided parameters.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 647
Mesh Workflows

Convex Irregular Shape Enclosure Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Define By (p. ?)

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

Only Part can be selected for creating Convex Irregular Shape Enclosure.

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Definition

• Define By: Allows you to define the element size based on value or settings. The available
options are:

– Value: Defines the element size based on the provided value.

– Settings: Defines the element size based on the settings under Mesh Settings in the
Steps Details view.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
648 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

• Element Size: Provides the element size. When Define By is Value, you can specify the element
size. When Define By is Settings, displays the element size calculated based on the provided
Mesh Settings in the Steps Details view. The Element Size is read-only. You can click on
the right corner of the option and click Publish to publish Element Size to the Property
Worksheet. You can parametrize Element Size only when Defined By is Value.

• Mesh Type: Allows you to select the type of mesh to be used for meshing. The default value
is Quadrilaterals. The available options are:

– Triangles: Creates mesh with triangular elements.

– Quadrilaterals: Creates mesh with quadrilateral elements.

• Scale Factor: Allows you to define minimal increase in size of the convex enclosure with respect
to the input scope. You can click on the right corner of the option and click Publish to
publish Scale Factor to the Property Worksheet. The default value is 0.0.

• Distance: Allows you to specify the absolute distance to change the enclosure distance from
the model. The default value is 0.0 mm.

• Number of Layers: Allows you to specify the minimal number of volumetric layers to be created
between the model and the enclosure. The default value is 2. You can click on the right
corner of the option and click Publish to publish Number of Layers to the Property Work-
sheet.

• Smoothing Iterations: Allows you to provide the number of smoothing iterations required.
The default value is 5. You can click on the right corner of the option and click Publish to
publish Smoothing Iterations to the Property Worksheet.

• Smoothing Preserve Volume: Allows you to preserve the volume after smoothing when
Smoothing Preserve Volume is Yes. The default value is No.

HemiConvex Irregular Shape Enclosure

HemiConvex Irregular Shape Enclosure control automatically creates a hemiconvex enclosure of
the input scope. The hemiconvex enclosure adapts to the input scope shape to minimize the internal
enclosed volume using the provided parameters.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 649
Mesh Workflows

HemiConvex Irregular Shape Enclosure Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?): Displays the selected control type.

Scope

• Define By (p. ?)

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

Only Part can be selected for creating HemiConvex Irregular Shape Enclosure.

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Definition

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
650 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

• Define By: Allows you to define the element size based on Value or Settings. The available
options are:

– Value: Defines the element size based on the provided value.

– Settings: Defines the element size based on the settings under Mesh Settings in the
Steps Details view.

• Element Size: Provides the element size. When Define By is Value, you can specify the element
size. When Define By is Settings, displays the element size calculated based on the provided
Mesh Settings in the Steps Details view. The Element Size is read-only. You can click on
the right corner of the option and click Publish to publish Element Size to the Property
Worksheet.You can parameterize Element Size only when Defined By is Value.

• Orientation Modality: Allows you to define the orientation of the hemiconvex irregular shape
enclosure. The default value is Plus Z. The available options are Plus X, Plus Y, Plus Z, Minus
X, Minus Y, Minus Z.

• Plane Distance: Allows you to provide the distance from the base of the hemiconvex irregular
shape enclosure to the model. The default value is 0.0 mm. You can click on the right
corner of the option and click Publish to publish Plane Distance to the Property Worksheet.

• Open Enclosure: Allows you to delete the base of the hemiconvex irregular shape enclosure
while creating an open enclosure when Open Enclosure is Yes. The default value is No.

• Delete Colliding Faces: Allows you to delete any model face colliding with hemiconvex irreg-
ular enclosure base when Delete Colliding Faces is Yes. The default value is Yes.

• Mesh Type: Allows you to select the type of mesh to be used for meshing. The default value
is Quadrilaterals. The available options are:

– Triangles:: Creates mesh with triangular elements.

– Quadrilaterals: Creates mesh with quadrilateral elements.

• Scale Factor: Allows you to define minimal increase in size of the hemiconvex enclosure with
respect to the input scope. The default value is 1.0. You can click on the right corner of
the option and click Publish to publish Scale Factor to the Property Worksheet.

• Distance: Allows you to specify the minimal absolute distance to change the hemiconvex en-
closure distance from the model. The default value is 0.0 mm. You can click on the right
corner of the option and click Publish to publish Distance to the Property Worksheet.

• Number of Layers: Allows you to specify the minimal number of volumetric layers to be created
between the model and the enclosure. The default value is 2. You can click on the right
corner of the option and click Publish to publish Number of Layers to the Property Work-
sheet.

• Smoothing Iterations: Allows you to provide the number of smoothing iterations required.
The default value is 5. You can click on the right corner of the option and click Publish to
publish Smoothing Iterations to the Property Worksheet.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 651
Mesh Workflows

• Smoothing Preserve Volume: Allows you to preserve the volume after smoothing when
Smoothing Preserve Volume is Yes. The default value is No.

Custom Names
Custom Names create enclosures or extrusions with the provided name. Custom Names Details
view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Definition

• Internal Label Name: Allows you to provide the name of the label attached to internal entities.

• External Label Name: Allows you to provide the name of the label attached to external entities.

• Volume Zone Name: Allows you to name the volume zone.

• Face Zone Names: Allows you to name the face zone.

Constant Size Volume Mesher

Constant Size Volume Mesher control creates a volume mesh of uniform size on the entire volume.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
652 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

Constant Size Volume Mesher Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Define By (p. ?)

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Definition

• Define By: Allows you to define the element size based on value or settings. The available
options are:

– Value: Defines the element size based on the provided value.

– Settings: Defines the element size based on the settings under Mesh Settings in the
Steps Details view.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 653
Mesh Workflows

• Element Size: Provides the element size for volume meshing. When Define By is Value, you
can specify the element size for volume meshing. When Define By is Settings, displays the
element size calculated based on the provided Mesh Settings in the Steps Details view. The
Element Size is read-only. You can click on the right corner of the option and click Publish
to publish Element Size to the Property Worksheet. You can parameterize Element Size
only when Defined By is Value.

• Mesh Type: Allows you to provide the type of mesh. The default value is Tetrahedrons. The
available options are Tetrahedrons and HexCore.

– Tetrahedrons: Creates tetrahedral mesh.

– HexCore: Creates hexcore mesh. When you select HexCore, HexCore Relative Tet
Layer allows you to specify the number of tet layer elements created between the
boundary and hex cells. The default value is 0.25.

• Remesh: Allows you to remesh the entire volume when Remesh is Yes. The default is No.

• Label Name: Allows you to provide the name for the created volume. The name is added to
Labels tab in the Domain Browser.

Volume Mesh Improvement

Volume Mesh Improvement control improves the quality of the volume mesh with specified quality
metrics using the provided input options. Volume Mesh Improvement Details view has the following
options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Define By (p. ?)

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Definition

• Target Skewness: Allows you to provide the target skewness to achieve a desired quality
mesh. The Target Skewness value ranges from 0 (low quality) to 1 (high quality). The default
value is 0.9. You can click on the right corner of the option and click Publish to add Target
Skewness to the Property Worksheet. You can parameterize Target Skewness.

• Target Dihedral Angle: Allows you to provide the dihedral angle between volume mesh ele-
ment faces. The default value is 120 degrees. You can parametrize the Target Dihedral Angle.
You can click on the right corner of the option and click Publish to add Target Dihedral
Angle to the Property Worksheet. You can parameterize Target Dihedral Angle.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
654 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

• Number of Attempts: Allow you to provide the maximum number of attempts for volume
improvement. The default value is 5. You can click on the right corner of the option and
click Publish to add Number of Attempts to the Property Worksheet. You can parameterize
Number of Attempts.

Second Order Conversion

Second Order Conversion control converts linear surface mesh elements or volumetric mesh elements
to quadratic elements. Second Order Conversion has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Define By (p. ?)

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Definition

• Define By: Allows you to create quadratic elements based on value or settings. The available
options are:

– Value: Allows you to create quadratic elements based on the selected Create Quadratic
Elements option.

– Settings: Allows you to create quadratic elements based on the defined settings under
Mesh Settings in the Steps Details view.

• Create Quadratic Elements: Allows you to create elements with mid-side nodes when Create
Quadratic Elements is Yes. The default value is No.

Extrusion
Extrusion control creates extruded layers from the input surface for a specified number of layers with
specified height.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 655
Mesh Workflows

Extrusion Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Define By (p. ?)

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Definition

• Define By: Allows you to perform extrusion based on value or settings. The available options
are:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
656 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

– Value: Performs extrusion based on Per Layer Height and Number of Layers.

– Settings: Performs extrusion based on the settings under Mesh Settings in the Steps Details
view.

• Per Layer Height: Allows you to specify the height of each layer of solid elements. The default
value is 10 mm. You can click on the right corner of the option and click Publish to publish
Per Layer Height to the Property Worksheet. You can parameterize Per Layer Height only
when Defined By is Value.

• Number of Layers: Allows you to specify the number of layers to be used for extruding the
model. The default value is 2. You can click on the right corner of the option and click
Publish to publish Number of Layers to the Property Worksheet. You can parameterize
Number of Layers only when Defined By is Value.

Topology Creation
Topology Creation control allows you to define the scope to create the topology from the mesh.
Topology Creation Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Define By (p. ?)

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Definition

Delete Empty Volumes: Allows you to delete the volumes that do not have boundary nodes enclosing
the same in the created topology when Delete Empty Volumes is Yes. The default value is Yes.

Volumes Merging
Volumes Merging control merges all the volumes that share the input faces defined on the scope
into a single volume. Volumes Merging Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Define By (p. ?)

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 657
Mesh Workflows

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Zone Material Assignment

The Zone Material Assignment control allows you to define the material assigned to the zones. On
completing the Output (p. 617), the material assigned to a zone are transferred to the created geometry
parts and bodies accordingly. This allows you to have a fully defined geometry upon completion of
the workflow which is mandatory for automatic and persistent updates.

The Zone Material Assignment control Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Define By (p. ?)

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Definition

• Assignment: Allows you to select the desired material from the Engineering Data Materials
Selection window. You can click to open the Engineering Data Materials window to select
the required material.

Zone Thickness Assignment

The Zone Thickness Assignment control allows you to define the thickness assigned to zones. On
completing the Output (p. 617), assigns the thickness of the scoped zones to the newly created geo-
metry parts and bodies accordingly. This allows you to have a fully defined geometry on completing
the workflow, which is mandatory for automatic and persistent updates.

The Zone Thickness Assignment control Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Define By (p. ?)

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Definition

• Thickness: Allows you to specify the thickness of the input scope.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
658 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

Checkpoint
Checkpoint provides a revert option that allows you to revert the operation. You can add Checkpoint
for every operation if you want to save the state before executing the operation. After execution, the
saved state can be restored using Revert To Stepand the operation can be re-executed.

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Definition

• Create Checkpoint: Creates the checkpoint and allows you to revert to the previous step
when Create Checkpoint is Yes. The default value is Yes.

Note:

You can add only one Checkpoint control for each step.

Hole Patching
Hole Patching allows you to patch holes in the model to close the volume defined by the provided
Include and Exclude material points in the Material Point control.

Note:

You should have at least one Include material point to perform hole patching.

Hole Patching Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

• Exclude Scoping Method: Allows you to specify the entities to be excluded while performing
hole patching.

• Exclude Scoping Pattern: Allows you to specify the name pattern to be excluded from the
selected Scoping Method while performing hole patching.

Definition

• Element Size: Allows you to specify the minimum feature element size of the input scope to
be considered for patching holes. You can click on the right corner of the option and click

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 659
Mesh Workflows

Publish to publish Element Size to the Property Worksheet. You can parameterize Element
Size.

• Part Name: Allows you to provide the name for the created part after patching holes.

• Face Zone Name: Allows you to provide the name for the created face zones after patching
holes.

• Label Name: Allows you to name the label attached to the patched hole faces.

• Max Hole Size: Allows you to specify the maximum hole size to be considered for patching.

Mesh Reading
Mesh Reading allows you to read a mesh into the mesh workflow model. The read mesh can be
either appended to the already existing mesh or overwrite it. Mesh Reading supports .pmdat, .msh,
.cdb file extension for reading the mesh.Mesh Reading Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Definition

• File Name: Allows you to provide path of the file to be read.

• Append Data: Allows you to append the mesh data from the file to the mesh workflow
model

• Repair Model: Allows you to repair the mesh workflow model after reading the mesh data,
creating missing zones and volumes if required.

Mesh Writing
Mesh Writing allows you to write and save the mesh generated in the mesh workflow for the selected
step. Mesh Writing supports .pmdat, .msh, .cdb file extension to write your mesh.

Mesh Writing Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?)

Definition

• File Name: Allows you to provide name and path to write the file.

Custom Names(Sizing)
Custom Names control creates size field with the provided name. Custom Names Details view has
the following options:

General

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
660 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

• Control Type (p. ?): Displays the selected control type.

Definition

• Name: Allows you to provide the name for the created size field.

Constant Sizing
Constant Sizing control allows you to set the maximum size on the selected scope based on the
other applied size controls on the scope. If no size controls are applied on the selected scope, a uniform
size is provided throughout the mesh. That is, constant sizing is ignored on the selected scope, if the
any other applied size controls on the scope specify a smaller size.

Constant Sizing Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?): Displays the selected control type.

Scope

• Scoping Method (p. ?): Scopes Part, Zone or Label in the model.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 661
Mesh Workflows

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?): Scopes the Part, Zone or Label with the provided pattern.

Definition

• Define By: Allows you to scope the operation based on your selection. The available options
are:

– Value: Allows you to define the maximum size based on the provided element size.

– Setting: Allows you to define the maximum size based on the defined acoustic settings.

• Element Size: Provides the maximum element size for surface meshing. You can click on
the right corner of the option and click Publish to publish Element Size to the Property
Worksheet.

• Growth Rate: Allows you to specify the increase in element edge length with each succeeding
layer of elements. The default value is 1.2.

Curvature Sizing
Curvature Sizing control allows you to refine the surface mesh to capture the underlying curve and
surface curvature.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
662 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

Curvature Sizing Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?): Displays the selected control type.

Scope

• Scoping Method (p. ?): Allows you to select the entities for the selected control. The available
options are:

– Part: Allows you to select Parts for defining the scope of the control.

– Label: Allows you to select Labels for defining the scope of the control.

– Zone: Allows you to select Zones for defining the scope of the control.

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?): Allows you to specify the name pattern to get the selected Scoping
Method. Scoping Pattern supports Regular Expression.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 663
Mesh Workflows

Definition

• Define By: Allows you to scope the operation based on your selection. The available options
are:

– Value: Allows you to define the maximum size based on the provided element size.

– Setting: Allows you to define the maximum size based on the defined acoustic settings.

• Project On Geometry: Allows you to project the curvature created for size field on the under-
lying geometry of the model when Project On Geometry is Yes. The default value is Yes.

• Growth Rate: Allows you to specify the increase in element edge length with each succeeding
layer of elements. The default value is 1.2.

• Min Size: Allows you to specify a minimum size to be used for curvature sizing calculation.

• Max Size: Allows you to specify a maximum size to be used for curvature sizing calculation.

• Normal Angle: Allows you to specify the maximum allowable angle at which one element
edge is allowed to span for the specified curvature. The default value is 18 degrees.

Proximity Sizing
Proximity Sizing control allows you to compute edge and face sizes in gaps using the specified
minimum number of element layers.

Proximity Sizing Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?): Displays the selected control type.

Scope

• Scoping Method (p. ?): Allows you to select the entities for the selected control. The available
options are:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
664 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

– Part: Allows you to select Parts for defining the scope of the control.

– Label: Allows you to select Labels for defining the scope of the control.

– Zone: Allows you to select Zones for defining the scope of the control.

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?): Allows you to specify the name pattern to get the selected Scoping
Method. Scoping Pattern supports Regular Expression.

Definition

• Define By: Allows you to scope the operation based on your selection. The available options
are:

– Value: Allows you to define the maximum size based on the provided element size.

– Setting: Allows you to define the maximum size based on the defined acoustic settings.

• Growth Rate: Allows you to specify the increase in element edge length with each succeeding
layer of elements. The default value is 1.2.

• Min Size: Allows you to specify a minimum size to be used for proximity sizing calculation.

• Max Size: Allows you to specify a maximum size to be used for proximity sizing calculation.

• Element Per Gap: Allows you to specify the minimum number of layers of elements to be
generated in the gap. The default value is 3.

• Ignore Self Proximity: Ignores the proximity between two faces in the same face zone when
Ignore Self Proximity is Yes. The default value is Yes.

• Ignore Orientation: Ignores the face normal orientation while calculating the proximity when
Ignore Orientation is Yes. The default value is No.

Body of Influence Sizing

Body of Influence Sizing control allows you to apply mesh sizing based on the specified element
size and controls the mesh density based on neighboring bodies of influence.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 665
Mesh Workflows

Body of Influence Sizing Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?): Displays the selected control type.

Scope

• Scoping Method (p. ?): Allows you to select the entities for the selected control. The available
options are:

– Part: Allows you to select Parts for defining the scope of the control.

– Label: Allows you to select Labels for defining the scope of the control.

– Zone: Allows you to select Zones for defining the scope of the control.

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?): Allows you to specify the name pattern to get the selected Scoping
Method. Scoping Pattern supports Regular Expression.

Definition

• Define By: Allows you to scope the operation based on your selection. The available options
are:

– Value: Allows you to define the maximum size based on the provided element size.

– Settings: Allows you to define the maximum size based on the defined acoustic settings.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
666 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

• Element Size: Allows you to provide the element size for the selected scope. You can click
on the right corner of the option and click Publish to publish Element Size to the Property
Worksheet.

• Growth Rate: Allows you to specify the increase in element edge length with each succeeding
layer of elements. The default value is 1.2.

Size Field Surface Mesher

Size Field Surface Mesher control allows you to mesh the surface of the model with the sizing
defined in the size field provided as input.

Size Field Surface Mesher Details view has the following options:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 667
Mesh Workflows

General

• Control Type (p. ?): Displays the selected control type.

Scope

• Define By (p. ?): Allows you to define the input scope of the Size Field Surface Mesher control.

• Scoping Method (p. ?): Allows you to scope Part, Label or Zone as input for the Size Field
Surface Mesher control.

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?): Allows you to specify the name pattern to get the selected Scoping
Method. Scoping Pattern supports Regular Expression.

Definition

• Define Size Field By: Allows you to define the size field name pattern. The available options are:

– Value: Allows you to provide the size field name pattern manually.

– Outcome: Allows you to select an existing size field outcome from a previous step.

• Size Field Name Pattern: Allows you to specify the name pattern of size fields to be activated for
the surface meshing.

• Mesh Type: Allows you to select the type of mesh you want to generate. The default value is
Quadrilateral. The available options are:

– Triangle: Creates mesh with triangular elements.

– Quadrilateral: Creates mesh with quadrilateral elements.

• Project On Geometry: Allows you to project the created mesh on the underlying geometry when
Project On Geometry is Yes. The default value is Yes.

• Retain Existing Mesh: Allows you to retain the mesh on the already meshed topofaces while
remeshing when Retain Existing Mesh is Yes. The default value is No.

Size Field Volume Mesher

Size Field Volume Mesher allows you to mesh the model with the sizing defined in the size field
provided as input.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
668 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

Size Field Volume Mesher Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?): Displays the selected control type.

Scope

• Define By (p. ?): Allows you to define the input scope of the Size Field Volume Mesher
control.

• Scoping Method (p. ?): Allows you to scope Part, Label or Zone as input for the Size Field
Volume Mesher control.

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?): Allows you to specify the name pattern to get the selected Scoping
Method. Scoping Pattern supports Regular Expression.

Definition

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 669
Mesh Workflows

• Define Size Field By: Allows you to define the size field name pattern. The available options
are:

– Value: Allows you to provide the size field name pattern manually.

– Outcome: Allows you to select an existing size field outcome from a previous step.

• Size Field Name Pattern: Allows you to provide name for the created size field.

• Label Name: Allows you to name the created volume. The created name is available as label
under Labels tab in the Domain Browser.

• Mesh Type: Allows you to provide the type of mesh. The default value is Tetrahedrons. The
available options are:

– Tetrahedrons: Creates tetrahedral mesh.

– HexCore: Creates hexcore mesh. When you select HexCore, HexCore Relative Tet
Layer allows you to specify the number of tet layer elements created between the
boundary and hex cells. The default value is 0.25.

• Growth Rate: Allows you to specify the growth rate of the size field. The default value is 1.5.
You can click on the right corner of the option and click Publish to publish Growth Rate
to the Property Worksheet. You can parameterize Growth Rate.

• Remesh: Allows you to remesh the entire volume when Remesh is Yes. The default is No.

Size Field Wrapper

Size Field Wrapper control allows you to wrap the model with the sizing defined in the size field
provided as input.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
670 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Controls

Size Field Wrapper Details view has the following options:

General

• Control Type (p. ?): Displays the selected control type.

Scope

• Scoping Method (p. ?): Allows you to scope Part as input for the Size Field Wrapper control

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?): Allows you to specify the name pattern to get the selected Scoping
Method. Scoping Pattern supports Regular Expression.

• Target Scoping Method: Allows you to merge the newly created part of the wrapper to the
existing part automatically. Only Part can be selected for target scoping in Size Field Wrapper.

• Target Scoping Pattern: Allows you to specify the name pattern to get the selected target
Scoping Method. For more information, refer Scoping Pattern (p. ?).

Definition

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 671
Mesh Workflows

• Size Field Name Pattern: Allows you to specify the name pattern of size fields to be activated
for the wrapper operation.

• Live Region Type: Allows you to select the region type to extract the wrap region. The available
options are:

– Material Point: Allows you to define the volume of the model being wrapped. The
material point is set locally along with X, Y and Z coordinates. For Internal FEM
Acoustics, the default value is Material Point.

– External: Allows you to wrap the surface from the external region. For External FEM
Acoustics and BEM Acoustics workflows, the default value is External.

• Delete Input Scope: Allows you to delete the input source of the model after wrapping when
Delete Input Scope is Yes. The default value is Yes.

• Exclude Enclosure: Allows you to exclude the external region and wrap inner parts only for
the box in box models when Exclude Enclosure is Yes. The default value is No.

• Face Zone By Part: Creates a face zone for each part of the input scope when Face Zone By
Part is Yes. The created face zones are converted to named selections in Mechanical after
completing the mesh workflow. When Face Zone By Part is No, creates a single face zone for
the whole input scope. Hence, only a single named selection is available for Mechanical after
completing the mesh workflow. The default value is No.

• Reverse Surface Orientation: Allows you to reverse the orientation of the created face
zonelets. The default value is No. When Reverse Surface Orientation is No, the orientation
is same as the position of the Live material point for the wrapper. When Reverse Surface
Orientation is Yes, the orientation is opposite to the position of the Live material point for
wrapper. BEM Acoustics uses Reverse Surface Orientation where you need to wrap the ex-
ternal and solve the internal field.

Mesh Workflow Outcomes

Outcomes provide the results of the successfully executed operation. Outcomes act as read-only outputs
automatically filled after the execution of the operation, based on the applied controls, which you can
use to monitor the results of the operation and can be set as input to the following Mesh Workflow
Steps. The Outcomes created can be scoped as input to controls in the next Mesh Workflow Steps.
When you want an Outcome to be scoped as input to controls in the following operation, you can
right-click the Step, click Insert and select the Outcomes specific to the operation. The Outcomes added
for an operation can be scoped in the consecutive operations setting.

Outcome Details view has the following options:

General

• Outcome Type: Allows you to select the outcome type. The available options are:

– Scope (p. 673)

– Failure Info (p. 673)

– Face Zone Scope (p. 674)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
672 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Outcomes

– Volume Zone Scope (p. 674)

– Internal Enclosure Scope (p. 674)

– External Enclosure Scope (p. 675)

– Extrusion Start Scope (p. 675)

– Extrusion End Scope (p. 675)

– Size Field Name (p. 676)

Scope
Scope outcome allows you to scope the created entities of the operation. The created outcome can
be used to define the scope of the consecutive operations. Right-click the Step and click Insert >
Scope to add scope as an outcome. Scope Details view has the following options:

General

• Outcome Type: Displays the selected outcome type.

Scope

• Scoping Method: Displays the scoping method for the outcome type.

• Scoping Pattern: Displays the scoping pattern for the outcome type.

Definition

• Label Edges: Provides label to identify the edges created during the operation.

Failure Info
Failure Info provides information about the failures that occurred in the respective mesh workflow.

Note:

Failure Info Outcome is automatically added to its operation upon failure. You cannot
add Failure Info as Outcome manually.

Failure Info Details view has the following options:

General

• Outcome Type: Displays the selected outcome type.

Definition

• Error Text: Provides you the error messages for the failed mesh workflow operation.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 673
Mesh Workflows

Face Zone Scope

Face Zone Scope allows you to create an outcome, scoping created face zones in the selected control.
Right-click the Step and click Insert > Face Zone Scope to add face zone as an outcome make it
available for scoping in the subsequent operations.

Face Zone Scope Details view has the following options:

General

• Outcome Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Volume Zone Scope

Volume Zone Scope allows you scope the created volume zones in the selected operation. Right-
click the Step and click Insert > Volume Zone Scope to add volume zones as an outcome for the
subsequent operations. Volume Zone Scope Details view has the following options:

General

• Outcome Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Internal Enclosure Scope

Internal Enclosure Scope allows you to scope the internal enclosure created in the selected operation.
Right-click the Step and click Insert > Internal Enclosure Scope to add internal enclosure as an
outcome and make it available for scoping in the subsequent operations. Internal Enclosure Scope
Details view has the following options:

General

• Outcome Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
674 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Outcomes

External Enclosure Scope

External Enclosure Scope allows you to scope the external enclosure created in the selected operation.
Right-click the Step, click Insert > External Enclosure Scope to add external enclosure as an outcome
and make it available for scoping in the subsequent operations. External Enclosure Scope Details
view has the following options:

General

• Outcome Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Extrusion Start Scope

Extrusion Start Scope allows you to scope the base face used for extruding. Right-click the Step
and click Insert > Extrusion Start Scope to add extrusion start scope as an outcome and make it
available for scoping in the subsequent operations. Extrusion Start Scope Details view has the fol-
lowing options:

General

• Outcome Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Extrusion End Scope

Extrusion End Scope allows you to scope the end face created after extrusion. Right-click the Step
and click Insert > Extrusion End Scope to add extrusion end as an outcome and make it available
for scoping in the subsequent operations. Extrusion End Scope Details view has the following options:

General

• Outcome Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 675
Mesh Workflows

Internal Volume Zone Scope

Internal Volume Zone Scope allows you to scope the internal volume zones created in the selected
control. Right-click the Step and click Insert > Internal Volume Zone Scope to add internal volume
zone as an outcome and make it available for scoping in subsequent operations.

Internal Volume Zone Scope Details view has the following options:

General

• Outcome Type (p. ?)

Scope

• Scoping Method (p. ?)

• Scoping Pattern (p. ?)

Size Field Name

Size Field Name outcome allows you scope the name of the created size field. Right-click the Step,
click Insert > Size Field Name to add Size Field Name as an outcome and make it available for
scoping in the subsequent operations.

Size Field Name Details view has the following options:

General

• Outcome Type (p. ?): Displays the selected outcome type.

Definition

• Size Field Name Pattern: Provides the name of the created size field and adds the name under
Size Fields tab in the Domain Browser.

Property Worksheet
Propety Worksheet allows you to view the published properties of each control involved in the mesh
workflows, provides an easy visualization of the driving input options for mesh workflows and to edit
individual controls.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
676 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Property Worksheet

Property Worksheet has the following options:

• Publish Properties: Allows you to add the unpublished properties for the selected controls or
selected steps on the tree outline. You can select the check box of a respective step or control
and click Publish to add it to the Property Worksheet.

• Association: Displays the path of the step, control or outcome that uses the published property.

• Property: Displays the options published in the Details view as Property in the Property
Worksheet.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 677
Mesh Workflows

• Value: Displays the values of the property. You can edit the value for the property from the
worksheet for each control without accessing the individual control type.

Note:

You can hover over the Property Worksheet options and click the dropdown to sort
or filter the option in the worksheet as per your requirement. Value does not have
the sorting and filtering options. To reload or refresh the Property Worksheet, right-
click anywhere in the worksheet and click Reload.

• Go to page: Allows you to navigate to the specified page.

• Show rows: Allows you to specify the number of rows to be displayed on a page.

• : Allows you to navigate to the previous page in the Property Worksheet.

• : Allows you to navigate to the next page in the Property Worksheet.

Right-click options available in the Property Worksheet are:

• Unpublish: Removes the selected row from the Property Worksheet.

• Go To Object: Allows you to view the selected control on the tree outline.

Mesh Workflow States

Mesh Workflow States enable you to understand the states of workflows, steps and other related Mesh
Workflows objects. Mesh Workflow States help you to handle the problems occurring while working
with Mesh Workflows.

Mesh Workflows object, its child-objects and controls have states that are defined based on the data
propagated in the mesh workflow. The States propagate up in the object hierarchy. The parent object
gets the most relevant child object state. This helps you to navigate to the issues quickly and resolve
it.

Mesh Workflows objects and controls have the following states:

• A check mark denotes that a control is fully defined, or an operation has been executed suc-
cessfully.

• A check mark with a hash denotes a step is completed and is reversible after execution.

• A question mark denotes that the required input is not available. You may need to:

– define the scope

– set parameters

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
678 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow States

– wait for an Outcome from the previous operation

• A lightning bolt denotes that an operation is ready to be executed or that an Outcome is

not ready yet.

• A red exclamation mark denotes that the operation is blocked due to an error during execution.

Mesh Workflow objects and Controls states with examples are as follows:

Symbol Status Description

Requires input Indicates that the Mesh Workflows
requires input and is waiting for outcomes
from the operations.
Fully defined or executed successfully Indicates that the input is fully defined
and initialized the workflow successfully.
Ready to be executed or Outcome is not Indicates that the input is scoped and is
ready ready for initializing workflow
Completed the operation and the Indicates the Fill Holes operation is
operation is reversible successfully executed and you can revert
the operation.
Blocked the operation due to an error Indicates that the wrap operation is
blocked during execution due to an error.

Refer Understanding the States of Mesh Workflows (p. 679) for details about how the Mesh Workflow
states evolve while setting up and executing a workflow.

Understanding the States of Mesh Workflows

When your Mesh Workflows are inserted from a predefined workflow type or have an under-defined
input, the Mesh Workflows and the Input objects are preceded by a question mark to indicate the
mesh workflow is under-defined and requires input data:

When you have not initialized Mesh Workflow (that is, input geometry is scoped or defined but not
transferred), Mesh Workflows is preceded by a question mark and the Input object is preceded by
a lightning bolt to indicate the mesh workflow requires action:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 679
Mesh Workflows

Note:

When you scope the input geometry and initialize the workflow, the original body is
marked as inactive using a circle symbol under the Geometry object as shown below.
You are not allowed to scope this body for meshing using other Mesh Methods or
Mesh Workflow objects. The circle symbol also indicates an inactive body that does
not participate in other mesh workflows.

You may view the following changes:

• Suppressed in the Details view becomes read-only and parameterization applied

on bodies are removed.

• Geometry window does not display the inactive bodies when you select any
of the bodies under Geometry object in the Tree Outline.

When your mesh workflow contains no Mesh Workflow Steps, the Mesh Workflows and its child-
objects are preceded by a question mark to indicate the Mesh Workflow Type is under-defined,
whereas the Input object is preceded by a lightning bolt to indicate the input geometry is scoped
or defined but not transferred:

When your mesh workflow is initialized, the Input object is preceded by a check mark to indicate the
input geometry is fully transferred. Additionally, when some of the workflow steps are in the process

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
680 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow States

of being executed, the Steps object is preceded by a green lightening bolt to indicate that the steps
execution is in progress:

When your mesh workflow is initialized, the Input object is preceded by a check mark to indicate the
input geometry is fully transferred. Additionally, when your workflow steps are fully executed, the
Steps object is preceded by a check mark to indicate that the workflow generated data is ready for
output:

When your mesh workflow is completed, the Mesh Workflows and all its child-objects including
Output object are preceded by a check mark to indicate the workflow generated data is fully trans-
ferred to Mesh and Geometry object respectively.

Note:

A new body is created under the Geometry object after generating the Output, the
created body might be preceded by a question mark to indicate the geometry is under-
defined (for instance, there is no materials assigned to the zone properties).

Understanding the States of Mesh Workflow Steps

Mesh Workflow Steps use the following icons to denote step state:

• A check mark denotes a executed step which has checkpoint defined and you can revert to the
step after executing workflow.

• A check mark with a hash denotes a step that is reversible after executed.

• A question mark denotes a step that is blocked that needs input from previous step’s outcome
or user-defined values.

• A lightning bolt indicates that the step is ready to be executed.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 681
Mesh Workflows

• A red exclamation mark denotes that the operation is blocked due to an error during execution.

Mesh Workflow Domain Browser

Domain Browser allows you to view the parts, zones, labels or size fields involved in the mesh workflows
and to edit individual controls in mesh workflows.

Domain Browser has the following options:

• Name: Allows you to search based on the names of parts, zones, labels or size fields.

• Search Outline: Allows you filter the entities in the mesh workflow by matching your search criteria.
Search Outline uses the same regular expression supported in controls.

• : Allows you to enable the wizards to edit and configure the mesh workflow. For information
related to Show Wizards, refer to Show Wizards (p. 684).

• : Displays the selected entities in the Geometry window.

• Parts: Displays the parts in the mesh workflows.

In Domain Browser, Parts tab have the following icons:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
682 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Domain Browser

– : Denotes the parts with topology.

– : Denotes the parts without topology.

• Zones: Displays the zones in the mesh workflows.

– : Denotes the edge zones in the Mesh Workflow.

– : Denotes the face zones in the Mesh Workflow.

– : Denotes the volume zones in the Mesh Workflow.

• Labels: Displays the labels in the mesh workflows. Labels are groups of entities that you use in
various mesh workflow operations. When you initialize a workflow, the named selections in the im-
ported geometry become Labels in the Mesh Workflow.

In Domain Browser, Labels tab have the following icons:

– : Denotes the labels in the Mesh Workflow.

• Size Fields: Displays the size fields in the mesh workflows.

In Domain Browser, Size Fields tab have the following icons:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 683
Mesh Workflows

– : Denotes the size fields in the Mesh Workflow.

when you click parts, zones, labels and size fields right-click options available are:

• Select All: Allows you to select all the entities.

• Unselect All: Allows you to unselect all the entities.

Show Wizards

Show Wizards ( ) displays the wizards in the Domain Browser. Domain Browser has the following
wizards:

• Apply Selection (p. 685): Allows you to scope the entities for scoping patterns displayed in
the Domain Browser.

• Create Sizing (p. 686): Allows you to create size field controls for existing Create Sizing oper-
ations for the mesh workflow model.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
684 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Domain Browser

Wizards have the following option:

• Scope Preview: Previews the current pattern that is used by the wizards. If you select some entities
(parts, zones, labels or size fields) in the Domain Browser, the Scope Preview shows a pattern
that matches all the selected entities. If you do not select any entities, the Scope Preview shows
the pattern defined in the Search Outline to match the current Domain Browser entity filter.

Apply Scoping
Scope the parts, zones, labels or size fields for scoping patterns and size fields for the size field
name patterns available in the Domain Browser.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 685
Mesh Workflows

Apply Scoping has the following option:

• Apply Selection: Allows you to select the parts, zones, labels or size fields from Domain Browser
for the scoping pattern. Apply Selection is available only when you select parts, zones, labels
or size fields in the Domain Browser.

To scope entities in Domain Browser, select the entities in Domain Browser, select the check
box below the Apply Selection for the corresponding scoping patterns, and then click Apply
Selection to scope the entities to the selected patterns.

Create Sizing
Create size field controls for the existing Create Size Field operations for the mesh workflow
model. Create Sizing is available only when a Create Size Field operation is available in the Mesh
Workflow.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
686 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Workflow Domain Browser

Create Sizing has the following options:

• Apply Sizing: Allows you to select the parts, zones or labels for the size field. Apply Sizing is
available only when you select parts, zones or label in the Domain Browser.

• Step: Displays the available Create Size Field steps in the mesh workflow.

• Field Type: Allows you to select the control type for the Create Size Field operation. The available
control types are:

– Constant Sizing: Allows you to set the maximum size on the selected scope based on
the other applied size controls on the scope.

– Curvature Sizing: Allows you to refine the surface mesh to capture the underlying curve
and surface curvature.

– Proximity Sizing: Allows you to compute edge and face sizes in gaps using the specified
minimum number of element layers.

– Body of Influence Sizing: Allows you to apply mesh sizing based on the specified element.

• Mode: Allows you to select the mode of creating size field for the mesh workflow. The available
options are:

– Collective Control: Creates the single size field control type for the selected parts, zones or
labels.

– Individual Control: Creates the separate size field control type for selected parts, zones or label.
The format for naming a single control is <part name> (<control type>).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 687
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
688 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 bounding box diagonal - sizing global meshing control
Index , 119

Symbols C
0-thickness walls, 470 CAD instances, 466
Cartesian
A Additive Manufacturing, 261
accessing Meshing functionality, 35 Body Fitted, 261
activation of Mesh worksheet steps, 448 Cartesian option - in method control, 261
ADF file format, 389 CFD/fluids meshing strategies, 33
advanced global meshing controls, 180 CFD/fluids meshing with tetrahedrons, 345
algorithms - tetrahedral meshing algorithms , 207 CFL condition, 155
allow nodes to be moved off boundary - sizing global CFX-Mesh method
meshing control, 117 replacing, 40
Allow Selective Meshing, 389 CGNS
Ansys Fluent file format, 389
input file format, 389 version, 389
Ansys Fluent Meshing CGNS format export, 42
exporting faceted geometry to, 42 CGNS Version, 389
arbitrary match control characteristic length
description, 338 mesh metric, 155
ASCII file format check mesh quality global meshing control, 121
Fluent input file format, 389 checking overlapping contact regions - procedure, 79
aspect ratio (base/height) - inflation global meshing clearing generated data, 541
control, 170 collision avoidance - inflation global meshing controls,
aspect ratio for quadrilaterals 174
mesh metric, 141-142 component system
aspect ratio for triangles Mesh, 35
mesh metric, 140 conformal meshing, 21
assemblies of parts vs. multibody parts, 21 mesh method interoperability, 21
assembly - initial size seed meshing control option,113 contact
automatic inflation - inflation global meshing control, sizing - mesh control tool, 311
163 contact meshing, 462
automatic meshing, 89 contact sizing
automatic method - in method control, 206 description, 311
automatic virtual topology, 546 coordinate system
auxiliary meshing tools - listed and described, 483 creating section planes, 525
average surface area - sizing global meshing control , Courant-Friedrichs-Lewy condition, 155
120 Create Section Plane, 525
axis sweeping, 235 curvature min size - sizing global meshing control, 113
curvature normal angle - local mesh sizing tool option,
302
B curvature normal angle - sizing global meshing control,
baffle meshing, 470
114
batch mode, 84
CutCell Cartesian meshing
bias (sweeping) - in method control , 235
missing tessellations, 542
bias factor - in local sizing control, 302
orthogonal quality, 153
bias type - in local sizing control, 302
cyclic match control
binary file format
description, 336
Fluent input file format, 389
body of influence - local mesh sizing tool option, 302

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 689
Index

D resolving overlapping contact regions, 79

Default Method, 389 extended ICEM CFD meshing, 83
Default Physics Preference, 389 Extra Retries For Assembly, 389
defaults global meshing controls, 96
Defeature Size, 284 F
defeaturing, 110 F4
mesh, 110 modifying virtual topology splits, 561, 565
determination of physics, analysis, and solver settings, face meshing
39 description, 314
dockable worksheet, 448 face splits
dynamic defaults - sizing, 104 using F4 to modify, 565
virtual, 565
E File Format, 389
ease of use meshing features - listed, 527 Fill Small Holes, 284
edge behavior - in local sizing control , 302 fillet ratio - inflation global meshing controls , 178
edge bias - in local sizing control, 302 first aspect ratio - inflation global meshing control, 170
edge splits first layer height - inflation global meshing control, 169
using F4 to modify, 561 Fluent
virtual, 561 input file format, 389
element option fluent export format global meshing control, 100
in sweep method mesh control, 235 fluent export preview surface mesh global meshing
element order control, 100
default global control setting, 101 Fluent mesh export, 42
method control setting, 202 fluids meshing strategies, 33
element order - default global meshing control, 101 fluids meshing with tetrahedrons, 345
element quality Format of Input File (*.msh), 389
finding worst quality elements, 133 Free Mesh Type, MultiZone
mesh metric, 139 Hexa Core, 242
element shape Hexa Dominant, 242
meshing according to, 20 Not Allowed, 242
element size - default global meshing control, 102 Tetra, 242
element size - local mesh sizing tool option, 302
elements - statistics global meshing control, 199 G
elements that do not meet target metric, 538 gasket mesh control
enable washers - sizing global meshing control, 117 object reference, 349
error limits global meshing control , 127 gasket mesh control object reference, 349
exporting - procedure generating mesh - procedure, 528
previewed inflation mesh, 535 generating mesh controls from a template, 201, 540
previewed surface mesh, 533 generation of contact elements, 483
exporting faceted geometry Geometry window, 36
to Ansys Fluent Meshing, 42 global meshing settings - listed and defined, 93
exporting meshes Graphics window, 36
Ansys Fluent mesh format, 42 growth rate - inflation global meshing control , 169
Ansys ICEM CFD format, 42 growth rate - local mesh sizing tool option, 302
CGNS format, 42 growth rate - sizing global meshing control, 110
checking overlapping contact regions, 79 growth rate type - inflation global meshing controls ,
Mesh Application File format, 42 177
overlapping contact regions, 79
overlapping Named Selections, 79 H
Polyflow Classic format, 42 hard divisions - in local sizing control, 302
Pmeshes, 63 hard entities, 468

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
690 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
hard points interoperability
using in virtual face splits, 565, 568 mesh method, 21
HDF5 file format, 389
height of washer - sizing global meshing control, 117 J
hex dominant option - in method control, 233 Jacobian ratio
histogram of mesh metrics, 133 mesh metric, 142
history
meshing steps, 448 L
launching the Meshing application, 35
I layer compression - inflation global meshing controls,
ICEM CFD 174
batch mode, 84 legacy data, 40
extended meshing, 83 linear elements, 101
interactive meshing, 83 local meshing settings - listed and defined, 201
interactive mode, 84 loop removal global meshing controls, 196
writing ICEM CFD files, 84 loop removal tolerance - loop removal global meshing
ICEM CFD mesh export, 42 control, 197
importing meshes loops
Ansys CFX, 40 removing, 538
Ansys Fluent, 40 showing removable loops, 538
Ansys ICEM CFD, 40
ANSYS Polyflow Classic, 40 M
imprinting manual creation of virtual cells, 546
classifications for MultiZone, 427 Mapped Mesh Type, MultiZone
effects on meshing, 21 Hexa, 242
matched vs. non-matched, 21 Hexa/Prism, 242
incremental meshing, 444 Prism, 242
incremental meshing of bodies, 528 match control
inflation advanced options - inflation global meshing arbitrary, 338
controls, 174 cyclic, 336
inflation algorithm - inflation global meshing control, description, 334
170 match meshing - and symmetry, 462
inflation controls matched vs. non-matched imprinting, 21
with all triangles mesher, 453 max size - sizing global meshing control, 110
with MultiZone, 453 maximum angle - inflation global meshing controls ,
with patch conforming mesher, 453 178
with patch independent mesher, 453 maximum corner angle
with quadrilateral dominant mesher, 453 mesh metric, 150
with sweeper, 453 maximum layers - inflation global meshing control ,169
Inflation element type - inflation global meshing con- maximum thickness - inflation global meshing control
trol, 174 , 169
inflation global meshing controls, 161 Merge Edges Bounding Manually Created Faces, 389
inflation mesh control tool, 345 merge face edges - automatic virtual topology, 546
inflation option - inflation global meshing control , 166 Mesh Application File format export, 42
Inflation options on the Options dialog box, 389 mesh connection, 484
initial size seed - sizing global meshing control , 113 mesh control interaction tables, 475
inspecting large meshes, 540 mesh control tools
instances, 466 description, 201
interactions - mesh control, 475 instances, 466
interactive ICEM CFD meshing, 83 patterns, 466
interactive mode, 84 precedence, 201

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 691
Index

renaming, 484 exporting - procedure

mesh copy previewed inflation mesh, 535
description, 331 previewed surface mesh, 533
mesh data fluids, 345
clearing, 541 generating mesh - procedure, 528
mesh defeaturing global meshing controls, 110 generating mesh controls from a template, 201, 540
mesh edit, 484, 508, 512 global controls - listed and defined, 93
snap to boundary, 484 grouping meshing objects, 543
mesh match, 484 implementation in Workbench, 19
mesh method interoperability, 21 importing meshes, 40
mesh metric inspecting large meshes, 540
histogram, 133 local mesh controls, 201
mesh metric - quality global meshing control loop removal, 538
aspect ratio for quadrilaterals, 141-142 mesh sweeping
aspect ratio for triangles, 140 general sweeping, 399
characteristic length, 155 thin model sweeping, 406
element quality, 139 Meshing application - basic workflow, 27
Jacobian ratio, 142 Meshing application - basic workflow for CFD, 28
maximum corner angle, 150 Meshing application - basic workflow for combining
orthogonality quality, 153 CFD/fluids and structural meshing, 31
parallel deviation, 149 Meshing application - basic workflow for Fluids, 28
skewness, 151 Meshing application - description, 27
warping factor, 147 Meshing application - exporting meshes, 42
mesh metric - statistics global meshing control , 133 Meshing application - launching, 35
Mesh Metrics bar graph, 133 Meshing application - working with legacy mesh
mesh numbering, 484 data, 40
mesh objects Meshing application interface, 36
grouping by type, 543 Named Selections, 77
mesh quality workflow, 120 non-conformal meshing, 21
mesh refinement, 461 options
mesh sweeping export, 389
general sweeping, 399 inflation, 389
thin model sweeping, 406 meshing, 389
Mesh system, 35 overview, 389
meshing sizing, 389
algorithms - tetrahedral, 207 virtual topology, 389
assembly level vs. part/body level, 20 overlapping contact regions, 79
automatic, 89 overlapping Named Selections, 79
auxiliary tools, 483 overview, 19
by element shape, 20 parameters, 87
capabilities in Workbench, 19 previewing inflation - procedure, 534
CFD/fluids, 345 previewing source and target mesh - procedure,533
checking overlapping contact regions - procedure, previewing surface mesh - procedure, 531
79 repairing geometry in overlapping Named Selections,
clearing generated data, 541 79
conformal meshing, 21 replacing a Mesh system with a Mechanical Model
control interactions, 475 system, 36
controls, 89 resolving overlapping contact regions - procedure,
determination of physics, analysis, and solver set- 79
tings, 39 restarting the mesher, 528
ease of use features - listed, 527 selective, 444, 528

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
692 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 showing elements that do not meet target metric - description, 27
procedure, 538 determination of physics, analysis, and solver set-
showing geometry in overlapping Named Selections tings, 39
- procedure, 79 interface overview, 36
showing inflation surfaces - procedure, 536 strategies for CFD/fluids meshing, 33
showing mappable faces - procedure, 542 meshing support for hard entities, 468
showing missing tessellations, 542 meshing support for pattern instances, 466
showing problematic geometry - procedure, 537 meshing support for spot welds, 468
showing removable loops, 538 method mesh control tool
showing sweepable bodies - procedure, 537 description, 202
sizing options, 89 interactions - MultiZone quad/tri, 475
specialized - 0-thickness walls, 470 midside nodes
specialized - baffle meshing, 470 mixed order meshing, 203
specialized - CAD instance, 466 minimum edge length - sizing global meshing control
specialized - contact meshing, 462 , 120
specialized - hard entities, 468 mixed order meshing, 203, 461
specialized - inflation controls, 453 model assembly global meshing controls, 199
specialized - listed, 399 multibody parts vs. assemblies of parts, 21
specialized - match meshing and the symmetry MultiZone, 419
folder, 462 Free Mesh Type
specialized - mesh refinement, 461 Hexa Core, 242
specialized - mixed order meshing, 461 Hexa Dominant, 242
specialized - MultiZone, 419 Not Allowed, 242
specialized - non-manifold faces, 470 Tetra, 242
specialized - pyramid transitions, 462 imprinting classifications, 427
specialized - rigid body contact meshing, 463 Mapped Mesh Type
specialized - rigid body meshing, 463 Hexa, 242
specialized - spot weld, 468 Hexa/Prism, 242
specialized - sweeping, 399 Prism, 242
specialized - thin solid meshing, 466 MultiZone option - in method control, 242
specialized - winding body meshing, 462 MultiZone quad/tri mesh control interactions, 475
specialized - wire body meshing, 462 MultiZone quad/tri option - in method control, 284
stopping the mesher, 528 MultiZone Sweep Sizing Behavior
troubleshooting, 579 options, 389
types - listed, 20
updating the Mesh cell state - procedure, 527 N
Workbench vs. Mechanical APDL, 87 Named Selections
workflow, 19 and regions for CFX applications, 77
workflow - basic meshing, 27 exporting faceted geometry to Fluent Meshing, 42
workflow - CFD meshing, 28 inspecting large meshes, 540
workflow - combining CFD/fluids and structural program controlled inflation and, 164
meshing, 31 sending to solver, 78
workflow - Fluids meshing, 28 node merge, 508
workflows, 601 node move, 512
Meshing application nodes - statistics global meshing control, 198
basic meshing workflow, 27 non-conformal meshing, 21
basic workflow, 27 non-manifold faces, 470
basic workflow for CFD, 28 num cells across gap - sizing global meshing control ,
basic workflow for fluids, 28 115
combining CFD/fluids meshing and structural Number of CPUs for Meshing Methods, 389
meshing, 31 Number of CPUs for Parallel Part Meshing, 389

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 693
Index

number of layers - inflation global meshing control , post pinch controls, 484
169 pre inflation - inflation global meshing control, 170
precedence of mesh control tools, 201
O previewing inflation - procedure, 534
Object Generator previewing source and target mesh - procedure, 533
using to generate mesh controls, 201, 540 previewing surface mesh - procedure, 531
Options dialog box problematic geometry, 537
export, 389 program controlled inflation, 164
inflation, 389 projecting nodes to underlying geometry, 546
meshing, 389 proximity min size - sizing global meshing control, 115
overview, 389 proximity size function sources - sizing global meshing
sizing, 389 control, 115
virtual topology, 389 pyramid transitions, 462
orthogonal quality
mesh metric, 153 Q
overriding of mesh control tools, 201 quadratic elements, 101
quadrilateral dominant option - in method control ,282
P quality global meshing controls, 120
parallel deviation quality metrics, 133
mesh metric, 149
Parameter Workspace R
Meshing application and, 87 recording
parameters selective meshing steps, 448
Meshing application and, 87 refinement, 461
part - initial size seed meshing control option, 113 description, 313
patch conforming tetrahedral meshing algorithm , 208 removing loops, 538
patch independent tetrahedral meshing algorithm , renaming mesh control tool, 484
210 repairing overlapping Named Selections, 79
missing tessellations, 542 replacing a Mesh system with a Mechanical Model sys-
patterns, 466 tem, 36
persistence replacing CFX-Mesh method, 40
meshing steps, 448 resolving overlapping contact regions - procedure, 79
physics preference default global meshing control , 96 rigid body behavior - advanced global meshing control,
pinch control 182
defining pinch control automation, 187 rigid body contact meshing, 463
defining pinch controls locally, 340 rigid body meshing, 463
defining pinch controls manually, 340
generate pinch on refresh - pinch global meshing S
control , 192 section planes
pre, 187, 340 creating, 525
snap to boundary, 340 selective meshing, 444, 528
pinch controls adding steps manually, 448
post, 484 history, 448
pinch global meshing controls, 187 Mesh worksheet, 448
pinch tolerance - pinch global meshing control , 192 recording steps, 448
Pmeshes, 63 Send to Solver, 78
Polyflow Classic format export, 42 sheet loop removal - loop removal global meshing
Pmeshes, 63 control, 197
Polyflow Classic import, 40 showing elements - procedure, 538
polyflow export unit global meshing control, 100 showing geometry in overlapping Named Selections -
post inflation - inflation global meshing control, 170 procedure, 79

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
694 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
showing inflation surfaces - procedure, 536 T
showing mappable faces - procedure, 542 target Jacobian ratio - default global meshing control,
showing missing tessellations, 542 131
showing problematic geometry - procedure, 537 target quality - default global meshing control, 130
showing removable loops, 538 target skewness - default global meshing control, 131
showing sweepable bodies - procedure, 537 template
sizing using to generate mesh controls, 201, 540
description, 296 tessellations
specifying options, 109 missing, 542
sizing global meshing control, 105 tetrahedral meshing algorithms, 207
capture curvature, 107 Tetrahedrons meshing
capture proximity, 107 missing tessellations, 542
influence of, 89 orthogonal quality, 153
uniform, 108 thin model sweeping, 235
sizing global meshing controls, 103 thin solid meshing, 466
skewness topology checking control, 183
mesh metric, 151 transition - sizing global meshing control, 112
smoothing - sizing global meshing control, 133 transition ratio - inflation global meshing control , 168
smoothing iterations - inflation global meshing controls, triangle option - in method control , 284
180 troubleshooting, 579
Snap to Boundary, 340
snap to boundary, 484 U
Snap Type, 340
Unmeshable Areas, 389
soft divisions - in local sizing control , 302
updating the Mesh cell state - procedure, 527
solver preference default global meshing control , 99
use automatic inflation - inflation global meshing con-
span angle center - sizing global meshing control , 112
trol, 163
specialized meshing, 399
use post smoothing - inflation global meshing controls,
sphere of influence - local mesh sizing tool option, 302
179
splitting
use sheet thickness for pinch - pinch global meshing
edges, 561
control , 191
faces, 565
spot welds, 468
stair stepping - inflation global meshing controls, 174
V
statistics Verbose Messages from Meshing, 389
quality, 133 virtual cell
virtual topology, 576 creation, 546
statistics global meshing controls, 198 projecting to underlying geometry, 546
straight sided elements - advanced global meshing virtual hard vertex
control, 180 creation, 565, 568
strategies for CFD/fluids meshing, 33 using F4 to modify, 565, 568
Sweep Element Size, MultiZone, 242 virtual split edge
sweep option - in method control, 235 creation, 561
sweeping - mesh using F4 to modify, 561
general sweeping, 399 virtual split face
thin model sweeping, 406 creation, 565
symmetry - and match meshing, 462 using F4 to modify, 565
system virtual topology
Mesh, 35 automatic mode, 546
common features, 572
common operations, 568
overview, 545
repair mode, 546

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 695
Index

statistics, 576
Virtual Topology Properties dialog, 573
Virtual Topology Properties dialog, 573

W
warning limits global meshing control , 127
warping factor
mesh metric, 147
winding body meshing, 462
wire body meshing, 462
Workbench
meshing capabilities, 19
Workbench meshing vs. Mechanical APDL meshing, 87
workflows , 27
worksheet
selective meshing, 448
step activation and deactivation, 448
worst quality elements, 133
Write ICEM CFD Files, 284
writing ICEM CFD files, 84

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
696 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.